Installation And Maintenance PDF Toshiba Strata DK 14,40i,424 Install & Maint
Toshiba DK 14,40i,424 Install & Maint. Toshiba DK 14,40i,424 Install & Maint
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 766
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division Digital Business Telephone Solutions Installation and Maintenance Manual Software Release 3.1 Software Release 4.1 Software Release 4.1 and ACD May 1999 Strata DK General End User Information The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and Regulations. FCC Requirements Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company— connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs. Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area, call Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division in Irvine, CA (949) 583-3700. Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Strata DK system, the telephone company will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata DK system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following: 1. Your telephone number. 2. FCC registration number: ♦ Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of the system. ♦ If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a Key telephone system. ♦ If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid telephone system registration in some areas. ♦ If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor for assistance. DK14 and DK40i Key system: CJ6MLA-74479-KF-E Hybrid: CJ6MLA-74478-MF-E DK424 Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E PBX: CJCHN-22757-PF-E 3. Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area. 4. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ1CX, RJ2EX, RJ2GX, RJ48C, RJ48X, RJ11, RJ14C, RJ21X (see Network Requirements in this document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label. Radio Frequency Interference Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory. UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and tie lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.) In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1 Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2 Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5. © Copyright 1999 Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Telecommunication Systems Division DKA-MA-IN/MT-VE 4025061 Version E, May 1999 (DK40i, Strata AirLink) Version D.4, January 1999 (Format change) Version D.3, November 1998 (Update TBDK-0022) Version D.2, October 1998 (Update TBDK-0021) Version D.1, September 1998 (Update TBDK-0019) Version C, October 1997 Version B, April 1997 Version A.1, February 1997 (Update TB16-0003) Version A, December 1996 ® Important Notice — Music-On-Hold Publication Information Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant. UL All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without express written permission of the publisher of this material. Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Strata AirLink, Call Center Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners. Contents Introduction Organization ......................................................................................................................................... xv Conventions ........................................................................................................................................ xvii Related Documents/Media ................................................................................................................xviii Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation Inspection ............................................................................................................................................1-1 Packaging and Storage ........................................................................................................................1-1 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................1-1 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................1-2 Clearance and Location ................................................................................................................1-2 AC Power and Grounding Requirements ............................................................................................1-3 AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test .......................................................................................1-4 Alternate or Additional Ground ....................................................................................................1-4 KSU Mounting Considerations ...........................................................................................................1-5 Pre-installation ..............................................................................................................................1-5 Mounting the KSU ........................................................................................................................1-6 Reserve Power Battery ........................................................................................................................1-7 Power Supply Removal and Replacement ..........................................................................................1-8 Power Supply Removal ................................................................................................................1-8 Power Supply Replacement ..........................................................................................................1-9 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ..........................................................................................1-10 PCB Installation Considerations .................................................................................................1-10 KSU Option PCBs ......................................................................................................................1-10 PCB Option Considerations ........................................................................................................1-10 PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations .........................................................................1-10 Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits ................................................................1-12 Built-in CO Line Circuits ...........................................................................................................1-12 Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits ............................................................................................1-12 KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring ......................................................1-12 Power Failure Telephone Installation .........................................................................................1-12 Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection ..................................1-12 External Page Output Connection ..............................................................................................1-12 QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit .........................................................................1-13 QCDU2 Configuration ...............................................................................................................1-13 QCDU2 Installation ....................................................................................................................1-13 QCDU2 Programming ................................................................................................................1-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 i Contents Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration QSTU2A Standard Telephone Interface Unit ...................................................................................1-15 QSTU2 Configuration ................................................................................................................1-15 QSTU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................1-15 QSTU2 Programming .................................................................................................................1-16 QSTU2 Wiring ...........................................................................................................................1-16 QRCU3 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit .........................................................................1-17 QRCU3 Configuration ................................................................................................................1-17 QRCU3 Installation ....................................................................................................................1-17 QRCU3 Programming ................................................................................................................1-17 Built-in Auto Attendant ..............................................................................................................1-18 Programming ..............................................................................................................................1-18 WSIU1 Serial Interface Board ..........................................................................................................1-19 WSIU1 Installation .....................................................................................................................1-20 WSIU Programming ...................................................................................................................1-20 WSIU Wiring ..............................................................................................................................1-20 DK8/DK14 Compatibility .................................................................................................................1-21 DK14 Secondary Protection ..............................................................................................................1-22 DK14 Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................................................................1-23 Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration Base Key Service Unit (KSU) .............................................................................................................2-1 Station and CO Lines ....................................................................................................................2-1 Peripherals ....................................................................................................................................2-1 Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility ...................................................................................................2-3 Station, Lines, and Stratagy DK Voice Mail ................................................................................2-3 Peripherals ....................................................................................................................................2-5 Feature Capacities ...............................................................................................................................2-6 Station Considerations ........................................................................................................................2-8 Telephone Circuit (Port) Types ...........................................................................................................2-9 Digital Telephone Circuit Connections ........................................................................................2-9 Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections .................................................................................2-10 Standard Telephone Circuit Options ..........................................................................................2-10 ISDN Station Devices .................................................................................................................2-10 Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide ...............................................................................2-11 Base Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check ....................................................................................2-11 Expansion Capacity ....................................................................................................................2-12 Base and Expansions Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check ..........................................................2-12 Example Configuration Tables ...................................................................................................2-13 Configuration Considerations ...........................................................................................................2-14 Base Cabinet ...............................................................................................................................2-14 Expansion Cabinet ......................................................................................................................2-14 DK40i ISDN ...............................................................................................................................2-15 Worksheet 2 – System Power Factor Check .....................................................................................2-16 Telephone/Device PFs ................................................................................................................2-16 System Power Factors PCB/Telephone Device ..........................................................................2-16 Worksheet Examples ..................................................................................................................2-17 PCB and Power Factor Worksheets ............................................................................................2-18 DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility ...................................................................2-19 ii Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation Inspection .................................................................................................................... ........................3-1 Packaging and Storage ......................................................................................................... ...............3-1 Site Requirements ............................................................................................................. ..................3-1 Input Power ................................................................................................................... ................3-2 Clearance and Location ........................................................................................................ ........3-2 AC Power and Grounding Requirements ............................................................................................3-4 AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test .......................................................................................3-4 Alternate or Additional Ground ....................................................................................................3-5 KSU Mounting Considerations ...........................................................................................................3-5 Prior to Installation .......................................................................................................................3-5 Testing the System’s Power Supply .............................................................................................3-6 TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure ....................................................................................3-7 Mounting the Base KSU ...............................................................................................................3-8 Mounting the Expansion KSU ......................................................................................................3-9 Reserve Power Option .......................................................................................................................3-17 Reserve Power Installation .........................................................................................................3-18 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option ......................................................................................3-18 Installing Power Failure Emergency Transfer ............................................................................3-18 Testing Power Failure Emergency Transfer ...............................................................................3-18 Power Supply Removal and Replacement ........................................................................................3-19 Power Supply Removal ..............................................................................................................3-19 Power Supply Replacement ........................................................................................................3-20 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ..........................................................................................3-21 Base KSU PCBs .........................................................................................................................3-21 Expansion KSU PCBs ................................................................................................................3-22 PCB Hardware/Software Options ...............................................................................................3-22 PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations .........................................................................3-22 PCB Wiring ................................................................................................................................3-22 Digital Telephone Circuits ..........................................................................................................3-22 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................3-23 K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Installation .................................................................................3-23 K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Programming .............................................................................3-23 KKYS Installation ......................................................................................................................3-24 KSTU2 Configuration ................................................................................................................3-25 KSTU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................3-25 KSTU2 Wiring ...........................................................................................................................3-25 KSTU2 Programming .................................................................................................................3-25 TCIU2 Installation ......................................................................................................................3-28 TCIU2 Programming ..................................................................................................................3-28 TCOU Hardware Options ...........................................................................................................3-30 TCOU Installation or Replacement ............................................................................................3-30 TCOU Removal ..........................................................................................................................3-30 TCOU Programming ..................................................................................................................3-31 TDDU Installation ......................................................................................................................3-33 TDDU Programming ..................................................................................................................3-33 TSIU Installation ........................................................................................................................3-36 TSIU Programming ....................................................................................................................3-36 Universal Slot PCBs ..........................................................................................................................3-38 Strata DK I&M 5/99 iii Contents Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration Loop Limits .......................................................................................................................................3-39 DK40i Secondary Protection .............................................................................................................3-40 MDF Wiring Diagrams .....................................................................................................................3-41 Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration System Configuration ..........................................................................................................................4-1 Base Cabinet .................................................................................................................................4-2 Expansion Cabinets ......................................................................................................................4-2 DK424 and DK280 Compatibility ................................................................................................4-3 Designated Speaker OCA, DIU Data, and T1 slots ......................................................................4-4 DK280 to DK424 Upgrades .........................................................................................................4-5 Features Capacities ..............................................................................................................................4-6 System Capacity ..................................................................................................................................4-8 Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................4-12 RKYS Feature Key Upgrades .....................................................................................................4-15 Telephones ........................................................................................................................................4-16 Attendant Position Options ...............................................................................................................4-16 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door Phones (MDFBs) .............................................4-17 AC and Reserve Power Hardware .....................................................................................................4-18 Floor Mount Installation Hardware ...................................................................................................4-18 Worksheets ........................................................................................................................................4-19 Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements .............................................................................4-20 Digital Ports Required ................................................................................................................4-20 Electronic Ports Required ...........................................................................................................4-20 Standard Ports Required .............................................................................................................4-21 Station PCBs/Slots Required ......................................................................................................4-22 CO Line PCBs/Slots Required ...................................................................................................4-23 Attendant Console Slots Required ..............................................................................................4-26 PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU Option Slots Required ....................................................................4-26 PEPU Page Option PCB Required .............................................................................................4-26 System Slots Required ................................................................................................................4-27 Cabinets Required .......................................................................................................................4-27 Worksheet 2 – System Cabinet Assignment Guide ..........................................................................4-28 Worksheet 3 – System PCB Assignment Guide ...............................................................................4-29 Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide .....................................................................................4-31 Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check .....................................................................................4-34 Telephone/Device Power Factors ...............................................................................................4-36 Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation Inspection ............................................................................................................................................5-1 Packaging and Storage ........................................................................................................................5-1 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................5-2 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................5-2 Clearance and Location ................................................................................................................5-2 Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics .......................................................5-4 Cable Lengths ...............................................................................................................................5-5 Network Requirements .................................................................................................................5-6 Cabinet Installation Considerations ....................................................................................................5-7 Recommended Installation Sequence ..........................................................................................5-7 iv Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 6 – DK424 T1 Power Supply Installation ...................................................................................................................5-8 Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Removal .....................................................................5-11 Power Supply Replacement ........................................................................................................5-11 Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet ......................................................................................................5-11 Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) Installation .....................................................................................5-11 Expansion Cabinet Installation (DKSUE424) ............................................................................5-12 Cabinet Floor Mounting ....................................................................................................................5-21 One or Two Cabinets ..................................................................................................................5-21 Three or More Cabinets ..............................................................................................................5-21 Cabinet Removal – Floor-Mounted Systems ..............................................................................5-28 Cabinet Replacement ..................................................................................................................5-28 AC Power and Grounding Requirements ..........................................................................................5-28 AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test .....................................................................................5-29 Intercabinet Ground ....................................................................................................................5-30 AC Power Cabling Installation .........................................................................................................5-30 AC Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) ...................................................................5-30 AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) ...............................................................5-31 AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ..............................................................5-31 Reserve Power Installation ................................................................................................................5-32 Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) ............................................................5-33 Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) ........................................................5-33 Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ....................................5-34 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ..........................................................................................5-45 PCB Installation Considerations .................................................................................................5-45 PCB Option Considerations ........................................................................................................5-45 RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units ........................................5-46 PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations .........................................................................5-46 Maximum Line Capacities ..........................................................................................................5-47 Internal Hardware Options .........................................................................................................5-48 RCTU Installation .......................................................................................................................5-51 RCTU Programming ...................................................................................................................5-51 DK280 to DK424 Base Cabinet Upgrade Considerations ..........................................................5-52 Chapter 6 – DK424 T1 Channelization .....................................................................................................................................6-1 Slot Assignments .................................................................................................................................6-1 SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option) ..............................................6-2 RDTU Installation ........................................................................................................................6-3 System Programming for T1 ........................................................................................................6-3 RDTU Programming ....................................................................................................................6-8 Installation Guidelines ......................................................................................................................6-10 Applications .....................................................................................................................................6-11 RDTU to Network ......................................................................................................................6-11 RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.) .....................................................................6-11 RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated Less Than 655 ft.) .......................................................................6-12 Hardware and Cabling .......................................................................................................................6-13 RDTU Cable Length Switch .......................................................................................................6-13 RDTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs ................................................................................................6-13 RDTU Front Panel Indicators .....................................................................................................6-13 Strata DK I&M 5/99 v Contents Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU Cable Installation ............................................................................................................6-14 Loop Back Testing ............................................................................................................................6-16 RDTU Self Test ..........................................................................................................................6-16 Network/CSU T1 Span Test .......................................................................................................6-16 Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test ................................................................................................6-17 Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................6-18 T1 Fault Isolation ..............................................................................................................................6-20 Flowchart Symbols ............................................................................................................................6-21 Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Compatibility ..............................................................................................................................7-1 PCB Chapter Layout ...........................................................................................................................7-3 KCDU Configuration ...................................................................................................................7-4 KCDU Installation ........................................................................................................................7-4 KCDU Programming ....................................................................................................................7-4 PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit ...........................................................................................7-6 PDKU2 Hardware Options ...........................................................................................................7-6 PDKU2 Installation ......................................................................................................................7-6 PDKU2 Programming ..................................................................................................................7-6 Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU (Internal Option) 7-8 External Options ...........................................................................................................................7-8 PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option ........................................................7-8 PEKU Installation .........................................................................................................................7-9 PEKU Programming .....................................................................................................................7-9 PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit ................................................................................................7-11 PEPU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................7-11 PEPU2 Programming .................................................................................................................7-11 DK40i General Information ........................................................................................................7-13 Installing the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) (Internal Option) .....................7-13 External Options .........................................................................................................................7-14 PESU Installation .......................................................................................................................7-14 PESU Programming ...................................................................................................................7-15 IMDU Compatibility with PIOU and PIOUS .............................................................................7-17 IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) ..............................................7-17 PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation ......................................................................................................7-18 PIOU2, PIOUS2 Programming ..................................................................................................7-18 RATU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-22 RCIS PCB ...................................................................................................................................7-23 DK40i RCIU2 Installation ..........................................................................................................7-23 DK424 RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ........................................................................................7-23 DK424 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation ....................................................................7-24 RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Programming .........................................................................................7-24 RCOS Installation (Internal Option) ...........................................................................................7-28 RCOU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-29 RCOU Programming ..................................................................................................................7-29 RDDU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-33 RDDU Programming ..................................................................................................................7-34 Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) .....................................................................7-36 Installing RSTS (Internal Option) ..............................................................................................7-37 vi Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring RDSU Installation .......................................................................................................................7-37 RDSU Programming ...................................................................................................................7-37 RDTU T1 Interface Unit ...................................................................................................................7-38 REMU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-39 PEMU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-40 PEMU, REMU Programming .....................................................................................................7-40 RGLU2 Installation ....................................................................................................................7-43 RGLU2 Programming ................................................................................................................7-43 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit ........................................................................7-45 RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation ........................................................................................7-46 RSIU Installation ........................................................................................................................7-46 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming ............................................................................................7-49 RSSU Installation .......................................................................................................................7-51 RSSU Programming ...................................................................................................................7-51 R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) .................................................................7-53 External Options .........................................................................................................................7-54 RSTU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................7-54 RSTU2 Programming .................................................................................................................7-55 RCMS Subassemblies Installation ..............................................................................................7-56 RMCU Installation .....................................................................................................................7-58 RMCU/RCMS Programming .....................................................................................................7-59 Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams .....................................................................................................................8-2 Digital Station Wiring .........................................................................................................................8-2 Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams .............................................................................................8-9 Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams .........................................................................................8-17 Analog Devices Wiring ..............................................................................................................8-19 Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs .......................................................................8-21 CO Line Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................................................8-23 DID and Tie Line Wiring ...........................................................................................................8-29 Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams ...........................................................................................8-33 Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus Types of Telephones ...........................................................................................................................9-1 Digital Telephones ........................................................................................................................9-1 Electronic Telephones ..................................................................................................................9-2 Standard Telephones .....................................................................................................................9-2 Strata AirLink Wireless Handset ..................................................................................................9-2 Telephone Installation .........................................................................................................................9-3 System Connection .......................................................................................................................9-4 Telephone Wall Mounting ............................................................................................................9-5 Telephone Upgrades ............................................................................................................................9-7 Digital Telephone Upgrades .........................................................................................................9-7 Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) ...............................................9-10 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) ...........................................................................9-12 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps .................................................................................................9-14 Beep Strap ...................................................................................................................................9-14 Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) ........................................9-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 vii Contents Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option ...................................9-15 External Power Straps ................................................................................................................9-15 DKT2000 ADM Installation .......................................................................................................9-16 Electronic Telephone Upgrades ........................................................................................................9-16 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) ..................................................9-16 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) ...........................................................................9-17 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps .................................................................................................9-19 Beep Strap ...................................................................................................................................9-19 Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) .............................................................9-19 Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) ........................9-19 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection ...........................................................9-20 DDSS Console Connections .......................................................................................................9-20 DDSS Console Configuration ....................................................................................................9-20 DDSS Programming ...................................................................................................................9-21 HDSS Console ............................................................................................................................9-21 Door Phone (MDFB) .........................................................................................................................9-22 Lock Control Unit and Door Phone ..................................................................................................9-22 DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling ............................................................................................9-22 DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................9-23 MDFB Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................9-23 Door Phone/Lock Programming .................................................................................................9-24 Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) ....................................................................................9-24 Precautions ..................................................................................................................................9-25 Cordless Telephone Installation .................................................................................................9-25 Telephone Cord Connection .......................................................................................................9-26 Connect and Apply Power to Base Unit .....................................................................................9-26 Handset Battery Pack Installation ...............................................................................................9-27 Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack ..............................................................................9-27 Tips on Extending Battery Pack Life .........................................................................................9-28 Digital Add-on Module Installation ..................................................................................................9-29 ADM Programming ....................................................................................................................9-30 PC Attendant Console .......................................................................................................................9-31 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................9-31 PC Attendant Console Programming .........................................................................................9-33 PC Attendant Console Software Installation ..............................................................................9-34 Backup/Restore Configuration ...................................................................................................9-43 Windows Control Panel ..............................................................................................................9-44 Conventional Attendant Console ......................................................................................................9-47 Installation ..................................................................................................................................9-47 Conventional Attendant Console Programming .........................................................................9-47 DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone .........................................................................................9-48 Installation ..................................................................................................................................9-49 Programming ..............................................................................................................................9-49 viii Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation Power Failure Options ......................................................................................................... ..............10-1 Reserve Power ................................................................................................................. ...........10-1 DK14/DK40i Single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer ...................................................10-1 DK40i/DK424 Power Failure Transfer Unit ..............................................................................10-1 Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation ...........................................................10-2 Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ..........................................................10-3 MOH Option ...............................................................................................................................10-3 BGM Options .............................................................................................................................10-6 Alternate BGM Source Installation ............................................................................................10-9 External BGM Installation ........................................................................................................10-10 Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control ..............................................................................10-10 External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) .......................................10-10 Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU ........................................10-16 External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options ..........................................................................................10-19 Loud Ringing Bell Option ........................................................................................................10-19 Amplified Speaker Option ........................................................................................................10-22 Talkback Amplified Speaker Option ........................................................................................10-24 HESB Wall Mounting ..............................................................................................................10-26 External Page Options .....................................................................................................................10-26 External Page Option Installation .............................................................................................10-26 Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference ...............................................................................10-32 DK40i Information ...................................................................................................................10-32 DK424 Information ..................................................................................................................10-32 Amplified Talk Path .................................................................................................................10-33 Amplifier Requirements ...........................................................................................................10-33 Amplifier Programming ...........................................................................................................10-33 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options ............................................................................10-35 SMDR Printout Examples ........................................................................................................10-37 SMDR Programming ................................................................................................................10-39 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation ................................................................10-39 System Database Printout Using SMDR Port .................................................................................10-41 Program 97 ...............................................................................................................................10-41 Voice Mail Options .........................................................................................................................10-42 Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems ..........................................10-42 Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems ................................................................10-44 General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming ................................................10-44 Voice Mail Program Checklist .................................................................................................10-45 Voice Mail System Installation ................................................................................................10-46 PC/Data Communications Interface Units ......................................................................................10-47 RPCI-DI Dual Mode .................................................................................................................10-48 Common DIU Connections ......................................................................................................10-48 EIA Interface Leads (Signals) ..................................................................................................10-50 DIP Switch Options ..................................................................................................................10-59 RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI to PC Installation ................................................................................10-61 PDIU-DS to Printer Installation ...............................................................................................10-62 PDIU-DS to Modem Installation ..............................................................................................10-63 Modem Setup Recommendations .............................................................................................10-65 PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly .....................................................................................10-65 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ix Contents Chapter 11 – DK424 ACD Installation RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests ...................................10-66 DK Alarm Sensor ............................................................................................................................10-75 Auto Attendant ................................................................................................................................10-76 Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) .................................................................................10-77 Non-built-in Auto Attendant ....................................................................................................10-84 Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation ....................................................................................10-84 Enhanced 911 Service (E911) .........................................................................................................10-86 E911 System Installation ..........................................................................................................10-86 E911 Programming ...................................................................................................................10-86 Chapter 11 – DK424 ACD Installation Installation .........................................................................................................................................11-2 Multiple Serial Port Installation .................................................................................................11-2 Wiring .........................................................................................................................................11-3 ACD Installation Guidelines .............................................................................................................11-4 ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations .........................................................................11-7 ACD Programming .....................................................................................................................11-7 Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups ..........................................................................11-7 DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Incoming Line Calls ..................................................................................11-7 Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group ....................................................11-7 Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group ..........................................................................11-8 Overflow From an ACD Group Queue ......................................................................................11-8 ACD Group Status ......................................................................................................................11-9 Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment ...................................................................................11-10 ACD SMDR Printout Examples ...............................................................................................11-10 Insight DK (DK424 only) ...............................................................................................................11-14 Call Center Viewer (CCV) ..............................................................................................................11-14 Application Overview ...............................................................................................................11-14 Strata DK Requirements ...........................................................................................................11-15 Host PC Requirements ..............................................................................................................11-15 Reference Information ..............................................................................................................11-16 CCV Configuration .........................................................................................................................11-16 Considerations ..........................................................................................................................11-16 Connectors ................................................................................................................................11-16 CCV Configuration Instructions .....................................................................................................11-18 Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC .........................................................................11-18 Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC, More than 50 Feet Away ...............................11-19 Connecting CCV and SMIS .....................................................................................................11-20 Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs ...........................................................................................11-21 Connecting the CCV to More than Three CCV PC ..................................................................11-22 Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards ...................................................................................................11-24 Multiple Wall Boards ...............................................................................................................11-24 Chapter 12 – Fault Finding Fault Classification ............................................................................................................................12-1 Fault Clearing Procedures .................................................................................................................12-1 Parts Return .......................................................................................................................................12-2 KSU/RCTU Fault Isolation ...............................................................................................................12-3 Fault Isolation Procedure ............................................................................................................12-3 x Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 13 – Computer Telephony Integration DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test ...............................................................................................12-4 Station Cable Continuity Check ........................................................................................................12-7 Voltmeter Test ............................................................................................................................12-7 Ohmmeter Test ...........................................................................................................................12-8 Cable Installation Test ................................................................................................................12-9 Fault Isolation Flowcharts ...............................................................................................................12-10 Chapter 13 – Computer Telephony Integration About Strata DK and TAPI ...............................................................................................................13-1 Requirements .....................................................................................................................................13-1 StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 ..................................................................13-2 Step 1: Remove Previously Installed DKT TAPI Service Provider Applications .....................13-2 Step 2: Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages ........................................................................13-3 Step 2: Initialize StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider ......................................................13-4 Using StrataLink for CTI Connections .............................................................................................13-6 StrataLink Operation ..................................................................................................................13-6 DDE Commands .........................................................................................................................13-9 Telephone System Events .........................................................................................................13-10 TeleMagic Link ........................................................................................................................13-14 Testing TSPI Link ....................................................................................................................13-14 CTI Application Bulletin Contents .................................................................................................13-16 Chapter 14 – ISDN Interfaces PRI and BRI Overview .....................................................................................................................14-1 RPTU Interface Unit .........................................................................................................................14-3 RPTU Overview .........................................................................................................................14-3 CSU Requirements .....................................................................................................................14-3 Slot Assignments ........................................................................................................................14-4 RPTU Installation .......................................................................................................................14-5 Cabling ........................................................................................................................................14-8 RPTU Testing and Troubleshooting .........................................................................................14-10 Timing and Synchronization ...........................................................................................................14-11 RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) ..........................................................................................................14-13 Performance Monitoring ...........................................................................................................14-16 SMDR Output for ISDN .................................................................................................................14-18 RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units .........................................................................................14-18 Overview ..................................................................................................................................14-18 Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information ....................................................................................14-19 PS-1 Backup Power Option ......................................................................................................14-20 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Installation ........................................................................................14-21 Modular Jack Pin Configurations .............................................................................................14-26 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines ..............................................................14-27 Connecting TBSU and RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) ....................................................14-29 Connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) ..........................................14-30 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations ..............................................................14-32 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI Call Monitor .............................................................................14-34 RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit ...........................................................................................................14-36 RBUU Installation ....................................................................................................................14-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 xi Contents Chapter 15 – Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Chapter 15 – Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Minimum PC Requirements ..............................................................................................................15-2 HMIS Server ...............................................................................................................................15-2 HMIS Workstation .....................................................................................................................15-3 Installation .........................................................................................................................................15-3 Step 1: Check Strata DK System Requirements..........................................................................15-3 Step 2: Make Sure You Have Everything ..................................................................................15-4 Step 3: Inspect HMIS Server/Workstation PCs ..........................................................................15-4 Step 4: Connect HMIS PC to Strata DK .....................................................................................15-4 Step 5: Install the Network Hub (Optional) ................................................................................15-8 Step 6: Install Activation Keys ...................................................................................................15-9 Step 7: Power Up the System ...................................................................................................15-10 Step 8: Verify Communication Port Settings ...........................................................................15-10 Step 9: Verify Modem Settings ................................................................................................15-12 Step 10: Verify pcANYWHERE Modem Settings ...................................................................15-13 Step 11: Install the Software .....................................................................................................15-14 Step 12: Set up the HMIS Databases/Settings ..........................................................................15-16 Step 13: Check HMIS SMDR and TTY Port Settings .............................................................15-21 Step 14: Program the Strata DK ...............................................................................................15-27 Step 15: Set up the Server Network ..........................................................................................15-31 Step 16: Set up the Workstation ...............................................................................................15-36 Step 17: Installing the Workstation Software ...........................................................................15-39 Step 18: Map the HMIS Workstation to the Server ..................................................................15-41 Setup Utility ....................................................................................................................................15-42 AutoGen Setup .........................................................................................................................15-42 Master Room Setup Screen ......................................................................................................15-45 Employee Codes .......................................................................................................................15-47 Company Information ...............................................................................................................15-49 HMIS Settings ..........................................................................................................................15-50 Invoice Statement Format .........................................................................................................15-55 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................15-63 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................15-63 Reinstall/Upgrade Software ......................................................................................................15-63 Shut Down HMIS SMDR and/or TTY Servers ........................................................................15-65 Restart HMIS SMDR and/or TTY Servers ...............................................................................15-65 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................15-66 Verify Data Communications ...................................................................................................15-66 Check Trunk Utilization ...........................................................................................................15-68 Perform Manual Tests/Remote Maintenance ...........................................................................15-71 Output Data to File ...................................................................................................................15-72 Check HMIS Communications with Strata DK .......................................................................15-74 Verify Communication Port Settings .......................................................................................15-76 Verify Modem Settings ............................................................................................................15-78 Verify pcANYWHERE Modem Settings .................................................................................15-79 Verify Modem Data Communication .......................................................................................15-81 View HmisErr.Log ...................................................................................................................15-83 View History Log .....................................................................................................................15-84 xii Strata DK I&M 5/99 Contents Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems System Components ..........................................................................................................................16-1 Pre-installation ..................................................................................................................................16-2 Step 1: Check the System Hardware and Software Requirements..............................................16-3 Step 2: Review System Component Placement ..........................................................................16-3 Step 3: Review Possible System Configurations ........................................................................16-5 Step 4: Unpack the Shipment .....................................................................................................16-8 Step 5: Check the Equipment List ..............................................................................................16-9 Step 6: Purchase Additional Equipment .....................................................................................16-9 Step 7: Select Suitable Locations ...............................................................................................16-9 Step 8: Set Up Temporary Installation .......................................................................................16-9 Step 9: Use the Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand ...............................................................16-10 Step 10: Mount the Base Stations .............................................................................................16-13 BSIA System Installation ................................................................................................................16-14 Step 1: Install the Analog Line Module (ALM) ........................................................................16-14 Step 2: Run the Cable ...............................................................................................................16-16 Step 3: Activate the External Critical Alarm (Optional) ..........................................................16-16 Step 4: Determine the Base Station Power Supply ...................................................................16-16 Step 5: Connect the Power Supply ...........................................................................................16-18 Step 6: Connect the PC .............................................................................................................16-18 Step 7: Install the Strata AirLink Manager Software ...............................................................16-19 Step 8: Copy the Upgrade Software .........................................................................................16-20 Step 9: Configure the System ..................................................................................................16-21 BSIA Additional Information .........................................................................................................16-32 BSIA (Controller) Specifications .............................................................................................16-32 Adapter and BSIA Pinouts .......................................................................................................16-32 ALM Removal ..........................................................................................................................16-33 Initial Configuration Change ....................................................................................................16-34 Password Change ......................................................................................................................16-34 Base Station Addition ...............................................................................................................16-34 Communications Port Change ..................................................................................................16-35 RWIU System Installation ..............................................................................................................16-36 Step 1: Check the DIP Switches and Jumpers on the PCB .......................................................16-36 Step 2: Mount the WWIS onto the RWIU ................................................................................16-38 Step 3: Determine the Proper Strata DK Slot Configuration ....................................................16-38 Step 4: Install the RWIU/WWIS into the Strata DK ................................................................16-39 Step 5: Run the Cable ...............................................................................................................16-39 Step 6: Determine Base Station Power Supply ........................................................................16-40 Step 7: Connect the Power Supply ...........................................................................................16-41 Step 8: Use the Proper Power Factor (PF) ................................................................................16-41 Step 9: Program the Strata DK .................................................................................................16-43 Step 10: Connect the PC ...........................................................................................................16-44 Step 11: Initialize the RWIU ....................................................................................................16-45 Step 12: Install the RWIU Manager .........................................................................................16-45 Step 13: Start the RWIU Manager ............................................................................................16-46 Step 14: Set General Settings ...................................................................................................16-46 Step 15: Enter the Handset IDs .................................................................................................16-47 Step 16: Enable UTAM ............................................................................................................16-47 Step 17: Store the IDs in the Handset .......................................................................................16-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 xiii Contents Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information ........................................................................................................16-50 RWIU/WWIS Interface Unit ....................................................................................................16-50 Changing Initial Configuration .................................................................................................16-59 Changing Communications Ports .............................................................................................16-59 Checking RWIU and Base Station Software Versions .............................................................16-60 Viewing Log Messages ............................................................................................................16-60 Resetting Base Stations and RWIU ..........................................................................................16-61 Upgrading RWIU and Base Stations ........................................................................................16-61 Changing Base Station Numbers ..............................................................................................16-62 Charging Batteries ...........................................................................................................................16-62 Discharging Batteries ......................................................................................................................16-63 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................16-64 System Power, Polarity, and Continuity ...................................................................................16-64 Components ..............................................................................................................................16-64 Communications .......................................................................................................................16-64 RF Link Termination ................................................................................................................16-64 Noisy Circuits ...........................................................................................................................16-64 DC Resistance ...........................................................................................................................16-65 System Reset .............................................................................................................................16-65 Activation Code ........................................................................................................................16-65 Base Station ..............................................................................................................................16-65 Replacing a Defective Base Station ..........................................................................................16-67 Handset .....................................................................................................................................16-67 BSIA System ............................................................................................................................16-73 RWIU System ...........................................................................................................................16-84 Base Station Specifications .............................................................................................................16-86 Handset Specifications ....................................................................................................................16-87 Grounding Requirements ................................................................................................................16-88 FCC .................................................................................................................................................16-88 Part 68 .......................................................................................................................................16-88 Part 15 .......................................................................................................................................16-89 UTAM, Inc. .....................................................................................................................................16-89 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) .....................................................................................................16-91 Primary and Secondary Protectors ...........................................................................................16-91 System Line Circuit Requirements ...........................................................................................16-91 Glossary.............................................................................................................................................. GL-1 Index .......................................................................................................................................................IN-1 xiv Strata DK I&M 5/99 Introduction This manual provides detailed step-by-step instructions for installing and maintaining the Strata DK14 / DK40i / DK424 digital business telephone systems. It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers. At the time of this printing, this book contains Release 4.1 information for the DK424. It also contains some pre-release information for software beyond Release 4.1. Important! Information beyond Release 4.1 is preliminary and given prior to product release. Be careful when using this information as the software will change and updates/ additions will be required upon final release. Use this manual in conjunction with the Strata DK Programming Manual which covers the programs related to the Strata DK systems discussed in this book. Organization In this manual, information specific to one system is clearly marked for that system whether in a chapter title or within a chapter (e.g., DK40i CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU) found in Chapter 7). Unmarked information should be considered to be general to all Strata DK systems discussed in this book. This manual is organized into these sections/chapters for your convenience: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation covers site requirements and explains how to install Strata DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU). Includes power requirements, cable lengths/network and grounding requirements. ♦ Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration explains how to configure a Strata DK40i system. It also provides space to record the hardware and station devices that make up the system. ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation information. Defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the Strata DK40i. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and grounding requirements. Explains how to install both the Base Key Service Unit (KSU) and the Expansion KSU. Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems. ♦ Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration explains how to configure a Strata DK424 system. It also provides worksheets for determining hardware and station equipment placement and requirements. ♦ Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation information. Defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the Strata DK424. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/ Strata DK I&M 5/99 xv Introduction Organization network requirements, and grounding requirements. Explains how to install both the Base and the Expansion Cabinets. Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems. ♦ Chapter 6 – DK424 T1 provides information on T1/DS-1 interfacing for the DK424. T1/DS-1 interfacing is not available for the DK14 and DK40i. ♦ Chapter 7 – DK Universal Slot PCBs provides procedures for Strata DK40i/DK424 system Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) for installation into universal slots. It includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB. Note ♦ Chapter 8 – DK Universal Slot PCB Wiring contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies to the Strata DK systems. Note xvi PCBs that cannot be installed into universal slots can be found in the installation chapter for the system (e.g., Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation). Wiring diagrams for PCBs that cannot be installed into universal slots can be found in the installation chapter for the system (e.g., Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation). ♦ Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata DK systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles, PC and conventional attendant consoles, and door phones also appear. ♦ Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata DK systems. The instructions for each option include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. ♦ Chapter 11 – DK424 ACD Installation includes installation instructions for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for the Strata DK424 (applies to all common control processors except the RCTUA). Includes installation instructions for Call Center Viewer. ACD and MIS is not available to the DK14 and DK40i. ♦ Chapter 12 – Fault Finding for troubleshooting and fixing problems. ♦ Chapter 13 – Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) contains CTI, TAPI, and System Open Architecture Interface information. CTI application notes can be inserted here. ♦ Chapter 14 – ISDN contains an overview of the ISDN hardware with specific information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). It includes instructions for installation, hardware requirements, wiring requirements, and some programming considerations. ♦ Chapter 15 – Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) gives you information about HMIS, including installation, the Setup Utility, maintaining the HMIS databases and software, and troubleshooting. ♦ Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems gives information about the external and integrated wireless systems (BSIA and RWIU), including system components, installation of hardware and software, and troubleshooting. ♦ Glossary/Index Strata DK I&M 5/99 Introduction Conventions Conventions Conventions Description Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to specific items. Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information. CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely. WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death. [DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or intercom number. [PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for the telephone). [SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on another telephone is considered an SDN. [PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN). $ULDO#%ROG Courier Represents telephone buttons. Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display. “Type” Indicates entry of a string of text. “Press” Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press Enter. Plus (+) Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry. Example: # + 5. Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range. ➤ Denotes the step in a one-step procedure. ➤ Denotes a procedure. 36 Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button. A number on the black button represents a specific LED button. Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered. See Figure 10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext. xvii Introduction Related Documents/Media Related Documents/Media Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI or in print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on the back of the document’s title page. The following documents and CD-ROMS can be used to reference further information about the Strata DK systems. xviii ♦ Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshibaproprietary digital telephones, including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It also includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console. ♦ Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used digital telephone features. ♦ Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-proprietary digital single line telephones. ♦ Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshibaproprietary electronic telephones, including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console. ♦ Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequentlyused electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system. ♦ Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial and push-button standard telephones. ♦ Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless handset configured to standard ports of the Strata DK telephone system and many non-Toshiba systems. ♦ Strata AirLink External Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features. ♦ Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system. ♦ Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features. ♦ System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage the system. Contains instructions for Station Relocation, System Speed Dial, and other features only activated by the System Administrator. ♦ PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand-alone data interface units while in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also provides instructions on connecting to a Personal Computer with Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI). ♦ Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone. ♦ PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal Computer Digital Key Telephone system. ♦ Strata DK Feature Description Manual describes each feature associated with the Strata DK424, DK40i and DK14. Also provides descriptions of compatible Toshiba-proprietary telephones and peripherals. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Introduction Related Documents/Media ♦ Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing package which allows you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK 2000series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60-button digital DSS consoles. ♦ Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the system and system record sheets, including ACD. ♦ Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes T1/DS-1 interface installation and configuration instructions, as well as fault finding flowcharts to troubleshoot the systems. An ACD Section provides instructions for installing ACD into the Strata DK424. ♦ Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step hardware and software installation instructions. It includes examples of system configurations, information on performing a site survey, and troubleshooting techniques. ♦ Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an overall view of the system’s hardware, software, applications and features. The HMIS is a PCbased solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized hotel/motels and includes both the PC and software. ♦ Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them. ♦ Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications for Strata DK14, DK40 and DK424 digital business telephone systems. It also includes Strata DK424 ACD Documentation, including the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description, ACD Agent Guide, ACD Supervisors Guide. ACD Installation and Programming instructions are included in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual and Programming Manual. ♦ Strata DK HMIS CD-ROM contains a copy of all HMIS documentation/bulletins and enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications. ♦ StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software, that enables viewing, downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC. This software also provides a method of creating custom lists and user guides based on information from the Strata DK system. The CD-ROM contains the StrataControl User Guide. ♦ DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote application and the DKQuote User Guide that shows how to use this interactive software to assist you with Strata DK Systems configuration and pricing worksheets. ♦ DKAdmin/DKBackup CD-ROM includes the programs that let you easily and quickly custom program and/or update the Strata DK14/DK40/DK424 with a user-friendly PC display. The CD-ROM also contains the DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide that explains how to use the DKAdmin/DKBackup interactive software applications. The current version does not support DK40i. The following documentation and media applies to the Strata DK424 system only. ♦ Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview, including hardware and feature information. Highlights the technology employed in operating the ACD Strata DK424 system. ♦ ACD Agent Guide describes the ACD agent feature operation along with step-by-step procedures for using features. ♦ ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features. Strata DK I&M 5/99 xix Introduction Related Documents/Media ♦ Insight DK CD-ROM which includes Insight DK software, the upgrade to Insight DK Plus, Demo software, Insight DK documentation and training modules. ♦ Insight DK Installation Guide explains how to set up the network, install the server software, install clients and explains how the data files are organized. ♦ Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and Insight DK Plus MIS for the Supervisor of a call center. Instructions for creating and using Real Time Displays, Reports, Alarms, and Wallboards are also included. ♦ Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and customizing the on-screen wallboard and large character views of the real time call center data. ♦ PC Attendant Console User Guide explains the procedures necessary to operate the PC Attendant Console. ♦ PC Attendant Console Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequentlyused PC Attendant Console features. ♦ Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status information. ♦ Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions on using the Software MIS application. For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata DK documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications. xx Strata DK I&M 5/99 1 DK14 Installation DK14 Installation This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK14 system. It includes information on site requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s), the ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and PCB cabling. Inspection 1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. 2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. 3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. ➤ When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Site Requirements This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the DK14. Also included are grounding requirements. (Table 1-1 for electrical/ environmental characteristics.) Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-1 DK14 Installation Site Requirements Input Power The system requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 amps. The AC outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third-wire ground. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 1-3 for details). This is to eliminate interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent accidental power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use an ON/OFF wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit. For the DK14, a reserve power source (two customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup. Clearance and Location Front View The minimum clearance requirements for the DK14 KSU are shown in Figure 1-1. The HPFB should be mounted directly above the D14 KSU. 2" HPFB 2" Consider the following conditions when selecting a location for the KSU(s): DK14 KSU The location must be: ♦ Dry and clean ♦ Well ventilated ♦ Well illuminated ♦ Easily accessible The location must not be: ♦ Subject to extreme heat or cold ♦ Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants ♦ Subject to excessive vibration ♦ Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment 16.4" 2" 2" 2" Top View 3" Wall 3' Front Clearance 2399 Figure 1-1 1-2 10" DK14 KSU Clearance Requirements Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics DK14 Installation Table 1-1 DK14 Primary Power Input AC (Power Supply Specification) AC frequency Power AC Current 85~135VAC 50/60 Hz 75 watts maximum <0.7 amps maximum Environmental Specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature 32~104° F (0 ~40° C) 20~80% relative humidity without condensation -4~158° F (-20~70° C) Power Supply DC voltage output specification +24VDC (+26.3~+27.8VDC) +5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC) +5VDC converter on KSU PCB QSTU2 (Circuits 1 and 2) Ring Voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper: Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) Ringing capability 2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position QSTU2 modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum AC Power and Grounding Requirements The DK14 requires a solid earth ground for proper operation. The AC power cord contains a conductor for the “third-wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet. The third-wire ground should be the only ground necessary for the DK14; this ground must originate at the buildings main power distribution panel and have a solid connection to earth ground. (See Figure 1-2.) Third Wire AC Ground 115VAC ± 10VAC ♦ 0.7 amp. max 4' 5" A Electrical Building Ground (Main Power Distribution Box) Strata DK I&M 5/99 AC Voltage 115VAC ± 10VAC AC Current 0.7 amps max. FG 2159 Alternate Ground Grounding Rod Figure 1-2 CAUTION! DK14 KSU Power Supply AC Voltage Range: ♦ Third Wire Ground To AC Power Cord Ground 1 DK14 Grounding Diagram Lack of proper ground may cause improper operation and, in extreme cases, system failure. 1-3 DK14 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test Test the “third-wire ground” for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the following earth ground test procedure. WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. ➤ To perform the earth ground test procedure 1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC. 2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC. 3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained. 4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal. CAUTION! If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION! 5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 105~125VAC on the other terminal is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet. 6. Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than 1 ohm. CAUTION! If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded. If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. Alternate or Additional Ground If the “third-wire” AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or other disturbance causes system malfunction, or if local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct ground may be warranted. Connect a separate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG screw terminal on the DK14 power supply (see Figure 1-2). This chapter provides the instructions necessary to mount the DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU). Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace the power supply. 1-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation KSU Mounting Considerations KSU Mounting Considerations Pre-installation 10" 1. Loosen the screws on the front cover of the KSU, and remove the cover (Figure 1-3). 6.87 DK14 Installation The KSU is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. Toshiba recommends using the following method. Front Cover Screws (4) 2. Move the SW1 RAM Storage Battery jumper plug strap on the motherboard to the ON position (Figure 1-4). AC DC 3. If the DK14 is less than one mile from the central office (or PBX), set the CO line PAD switches, SW401 and SW451, to the PAD position to provide a 3db level loss to avoid excessive loudness. 16.3 4. Install all optional PCBs per instructions later in this chapter. 2361 6.7 Figure 1-3 J20 WSIU SW1 Off J16 QRCU WMAU1A J21 WSIU J19 DK14 Dimensions FG DK14 Main Printed Circuit Board On J14 QSTU System Frame Ground Bar J7 J12 QSTU C02 SW451 J3 C01 J2 J3, CO Line 2 Modular Jack (RJ11) J2, CO Line1 Modular Jack (RJ11) SW451 (CO1) SW401 (CO2): 3-db PAD Switches for CO Line 1 and 2 SW401 NOR BNPAD 0 PAD 3 NOR BNPAD 0 PAD 3 J13 QSTU QCDU#1 J9 25-pair Female Amphenol Connector (to Station Tip/Ring and Relay Contact) J15 QCDU#2 QRCU J10 J11 QSTU Wall Mount Screws (4) VR701 J8 FG BAR 2404 Modular Jack Cover Holders (for Storage of Modular Jack Covers) Figure 1-4 Strata DK I&M DK14 Interior View 5/99 1-5 DK14 Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Mounting the KSU 1. Make sure the power supply switch is turned OFF. 2. Place the KSU on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the four screw holes (there is one on each corner). See Figures 1-3 and 1-5. 3. Make sure the location of the KSU meets the minimum clearance requirements. 4. Drill holes on these marks. 5. Secure screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting surface. Stud Plasterboard Hard Board (1/4 inch plywood) 6. Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the screws completely into the mounting surface. 7. Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completely screwing the bottom two screws into the wall. 8. Ground system according to previous “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 1-3 instructions. 9. Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cable, etc.) to the KSU. Route the wiring as shown in Figure 1-6, and then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie wraps that come with the KSU. (See Figures 1-16~1-18 for additional wiring details.) Note 2360 DK14 KSU Figure 1-5 DK14 KSU Wall Mount Method Figure 1-6 shows cables routed to the right; they may also be routed to the left, depending on the location of the MDF. 10. If the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB) is going to be installed, refer to the following section. If not, proceed to Step 11. 11. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the DC power supply switch. 12. Reinstall the front cover onto the KSU. 1-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation Reserve Power Battery To HPFB FG Screw Reserve Battery (HPFB) Connector BATT AC Power Cord and Plug 4' 7" DC — DC ON/OFF Power Switch O DK14 Installation 3" Tie-wrap Holder SI02 RS-232 Interface Jacks, TTY, Caller ID, SMDR SI01 Station Tip/Ring Amphenol 25-pair Jack (female) CO4 CO2 RJ11 CO Line Jacks CO1 CO3 Tie-wrap Holder Left Side View Figure 1-6 RJ11 Power Failure Transfer Jack PFT Tie-wrap supplied to Hold Amphenol Connector 2397 Right Side View DK14 Side View and Jack Locations Reserve Power Battery A second HPFB can be installed directly above the unit to supply backup reserve power. ➤ To install the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB) 1. Place the HPFB directly above the DK14 KSU (Figure 1-7). 2. Mark the location of the two screw holes, then drill holes. 3. Screw the two screws two-thirds into the mounting surface. 4. Hang the HFPU on the screws then tighten the screws into the mounting surface. 5. Plug the first HPFB connector into BATT connector on the right side of the KSU. 6. Connect a ground wire from the HPFB “FG” screw to the DK14 QPSU8 screw labeled “HPFB6.” The ground wire can be fed through the opening by the AC power cord. Note The DK14 should be plugged into AC power and the DC power switch should be turned ON. The HFPU will not start to operate if AC power is not available during the initial installation. 7. The 24VDC LED on the HPFB should light. If it does not light, press the battery OFF switch with a pencil point or other small-tipped object. Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-7 DK14 Installation Power Supply Removal and Replacement 8. Dress and tie-wrap the HPFB cables. 9. To mount a second HPFB, repeat Steps 1~4, then plug the second HPFB connector in the first HPFB and connect an FG wire between each HPFB FG screw. 10. To test the HPFB, remove the DK14 AC plug from the AC outlet. The DK14 AC LED will go out, but the DK14 DC LED remains on. Also the system remains in normal working order and the HPFB 24V LED remains on. 11. If it is desired to turn off the HPFB (after loss of AC power), use a pencil or other sharp object to press the Battery OFF switch. CAUTION! Once the HPFB is turned OFF or unplugged (during AC power loss) it will not operate again until AC power is restored to the DK14 KSU. To Second HPFB (optional) Second HPFB Connector FG Screw HPFB Unit: Reserve Power Battery and Charger (optional) Tie-wrap Tie-wrap HPFB FG Wire Battery Connector AC Power Cord/Plug 4' 7" DC Power Switch AC DC Note Do not run power cables with station and CO line cables. Figure 1-7 2403 DK14 Reserve Power Installation Power Supply Removal and Replacement The power supply comes factory-installed in the KSU; if necessary, it can be removed and replaced. Power Supply Removal 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet. Confirm that green AC LED is not lit. See Figure 1-8. 2. Loosen the screws on the front cover of the KSU, and remove the cover. 3. Unplug HPFB cable from BATT connector of power supply and disconnect the HPFB ground wire. 1-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation Power Supply Removal and Replacement 4. Unplug the AC cable from the CN1 connector on the power supply. 6. Unplug the DC cable from the CN3 connector on the power supply. 7. Remove the top two, and bottom left corner screws that attach the power supply to the KSU. Remove power supply. Power Supply Mounting Screw QPSU8 Power Supply CN3, Battery Connector Plug Power Supply Mounting Screw F.G. Screw for Third Wire Ground Connection to Power Supply WARNING HPFB6 HPFB Ground Wire ACN1 Power Cord Connector Hazardous voltage inside ! If servicing required, remove A.C. cord. To HPFB6 FG Screw DK14 Installation 5. Remove the FG screw, and disconnect the green third wire ground ring terminal. Battery Connector for HPFB CN3 DC Power On/Off Switch AC CN2 CN1 F201, 3 Amp Fuse Non-replacable AC and DC Power Indicator LEDs DC FG J19 Yellow Wires (+24V) Power Supply Mounting Screw CN2, J19 Power Supply Connectors and Cable 2401 Figure 1-8 DK14 Power Supply Power Supply Replacement 1. Set the power supply in its proper place in the KSU. See Figure 1-8. 2. Secure the power supply to the KSU with the top two, and bottom left corner screws. 3. Install the green third wire ground ring terminal with the FG screw. 4. Plug the AC cable into the CN1 connector on the power supply. 5. Plug the DC cable into the CN3 connector on the power supply. 6. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and turn ON the power supply switch. 7. Test QPSU8 power supply according to Chapter 12-Fault Finding, “DK14 Hardware Fault Isolation procedure.” 8. Plug HPFB cable into BATT connector of power supply and reconnect the HPFB ground wire. 9. Reinstall the cover on the KSU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-9 DK14 Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation This section provides procedures for installation of Strata DK14 system optional printed circuit boards (PCBs) into the KSU. This includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB. Be sure the ground has been checked. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 1-3.) PCB Installation Considerations The Strata DK14 KSU comes standard with four digital telephone circuits (ports) and two CO line circuits. These circuits, along with the common control unit, are built into the motherboard. KSU Option PCBs The DK14 KSU can support up to four optional PCBs, including: ♦ A maximum of two QCDU2s: each one provides one CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits. ♦ A QSTU2 which provides two standard telephone circuits (ports). ♦ A QRCU2 which provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones (required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s), and three circuits to detect busy tone (required for the ABR feature). ♦ A WSIU which provides a port for either a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem, or Caller ID interface. ♦ The KSU does not come from the factory with any option PCBs installed. Each of the option PCBs must be installed in specific locations. (See Figure 1-9.) PCB Option Considerations PCBs may be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware and software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. PCB Software Options. After installation of the PCBs in the KSU, configure the PCBs for software options through programming. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual for detailed instructions. PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is recommended that the power supply be OFF. 1-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation WARNING Hazardous voltage inside ! If servicing required, remove A.C. cord. BATT 1 or 2 HPFB reserve power units DK14 Installation HPFB6 DC AC DC J4 SIO 2 J3 J20 J2 J21 SIO 1 WSIU1A 6-wire RJ11 Modular Jack QRCU3A Component Side J1 J10 J6 J8 J7 J5 0 PAD 3 J4 J14 STU SW101 J1 J11 STU F.G. CO4 QCDU2A J1 J9 SW1 J13 J3 STU 0 PAD 3 QSTU2A 190 130 6-wire RJ11 Modular Jacks CO1 QKYS SW101 J6-25 Pair Amphenol Jack (female) for Telephone Tip/Ring and Relay Contact CO2 J1 J15 QSTS2A QSTS1A F.G. CO3 PFT, RJ11 Modular Jack QCDU2A J12 J2 STU System Frame Ground Bar VR701 J22 2364 MOH Jack Figure 1-9 Strata DK I&M 600 ohm Page MOH Volume Control Not Used DK14 PCB Installation 5/99 1-11 DK14 Installation Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits The KSU comes standard with two CO lines and four digital telephone circuits already installed on the motherboard (WMAU). See Figure 1-4 for an illustration of the WMAU. Built-in CO Line Circuits The two standard loop start CO line circuits are integrated into the KSU motherboard WMAU and are identical to the QCDU2 CO line circuits. CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box (See Page 1-19 for address). See Figure 1-18 for wiring. Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits The four digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the motherboard in the KSU. These circuits are identical to the digital circuits found on the QCDU2. The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate. KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring See Figures 1-15~1-17 for details. Power Failure Telephone Installation 1. Remove the RJ11 cover (Figure 1-11) from the PFT jack and store the jack cover. 2. Connect the power failure telephone (500/2500-type standard telephone to the PFT jack. Figure 1-17 shows the DK14 MDF to CO Line Wiring. Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection Connect the MOH/BGM source to the MOH RCA jack (Figures 1-9 and 1-16) in accordance with Music Source Configuration A in Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. External Page Output Connection Connect the external page system to the 600ohm PAGE RCA output jack (Figure 1-9) to an external amplifier in accordance with the External Page Installation guidelines in Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. 1-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit DK14 Installation QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital telephones PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIU-DSs Does not support a DDSS console or DDCB Older Version(s): QCDU1A QCDU2 Configuration The QCDU2 may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system. It does not have to be configured for anything else. The decibel (db) PAD switch, SW101 controls the loudness by providing a 3 db signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position. The switch comes from the factory set at 0 (for no PAD) meaning no PAD loss. QCDU2 Installation A maximum of two QCDU2 PCBs can be installed in the KSU. ➤ To install the QCDU2 1. If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD switch SW101 to the PAD position. 2. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF. 3. Slide QCDU2’s front edge and FG wire under the System Frame Ground Bar; align and insert the QCDU2 connector J1 into the motherboard connector (J9 for CO3 first, J10 for CO4 second). (See Figure 1-10) Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors. Make sure the QCDU2’s connector edge next to the connector J1 snaps firmly into the standoffs on the KSU motherboard. (See Figure 1-4). 4. Connect the Frame Ground (FG) lead from the QCDU2 to the screw nearest the QCDU2 located on the system Frame Ground bar. Remove the “knock-out” from the KSU cover CO3 or CO4 access slot, and store the “knockout” in the slots provided in the KSU base. (See Figure 1-11.) J2 CO 3/4 QCDU2A FG To System Frame Ground Bar SW101 0 PAD 3 J1 2391 Figure 1-10 QCDU2 Printed Circuit Board Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-13 DK14 Installation QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit 1 Side View Cover C02 Knock out PFT jack cover when QCDU, SMDR/TTY is installed C01 Front View Modular Jacks PFT 2 Take out jack cover when PFT is connected 3 Store the jack cover in the jack cover holder 4 Reinstall the jack cover when the PFT telephone is unplugged 2392 Figure 1-11 Modular Jack Cover QCDU2 Programming The following parameters may be specified through programming for the QCDU2. Program 10-1: Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Auto Release detection; DISA, and other attributes to the CO line. Program 16: Assigns CO line to groups 81~84, and dial 9 group. Program 40: Assigns stations access to CO line (incoming and outgoing access). Program *50: Assigns Caller ID CO lines to Caller ID interface CO line. Program *51: Assigns station to Caller ID, Lost Call memory. 1-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation QSTU2A Standard Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones Auto Attendant devices separate BGM source connection voice mail machines facsimile machines DK14 Installation QSTU2A Standard Telephone Interface Unit Older Version(s): QSTU1A Note For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by standard telephones (or any other device connected to a QSTU2 port), a QRCU3 must be installed. The QSTS2 PCB is factory-installed on the QSTU. QSTU2 Configuration The QSTU2 does not require configurations for the ring generator voltage level. Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require 190; however, some devices may experience ring-trip at 190, and should be set at 130. QSTU2 Installation 1. Make sure the power supply switch is OFF. 2. Align the QSTU2 connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 to the motherboard connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 respectively. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors (see Figure 1-12). J1 J4 QSTS2 (factory installed) J5 J6 QSTU2 190 130 SW1 QSTU2A J3 J2 2393 Figure 1-12 QSTU2/QSTS2 Printed Circuit Boards Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-15 DK14 Installation QSTU2A Standard Telephone Interface Unit QSTU2 Programming The following parameters can be specified for the QSTU2: Program 31: Used to configure all QSTU2 ports connected to voice mail (see Chapter 7 – DK40i/ DK424 Universal Slot PCBs for voice mail installation). Program 10-2: Used to set standard telephone ringing option and separate BGM assignment. Note QSTU2 ports are fixed. They are assigned even if a QSTU2 is not installed. QSTU2 Wiring Refer to DK14 MDF to KSU Amphenol Wiring in Figure 1-16 for QSTU2 wiring. The QSTU2 must be connected to a OL13A (or equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations. (300 ohms loop resistance max., including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance.) 1-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation QRCU3 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit System: DK14 Installation QRCU3 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit DK14 Circuits per PCB: 3 DTMF/ABR Tone Receivers Interfaces with: two-wire devices such as standard telephones Auto Attendant devices, separate BGM source connection voice mail machines Facsimile machines. Older Version(s): QRCU1/QRCU2 The QRCU3 must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit (QSTU2), and it is required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls. The QRCU3 circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate. QRCU3 Configuration The QRCU3 does not have to be configured for operation. QRCU3 Installation 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF. 2. Align and insert the QRCU3 connectors J1 and J2 (see Figure 1-13 into the motherboard connectors J15 and J16 respectively (note the component side placement in Figure 1-4). Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Push down until the connectors lock together. QRCU3A V.1 J1 QKYS Connector J2 2394 Figure 1-13 QRCU3 Printed Circuit Board QRCU3 Programming The following parameters can be specified: Program 12: Set QRCU3 release time. Program 15: Sets QRCU3 operation after CO line flash. Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-17 DK14 Installation QRCU3 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit Built-in Auto Attendant DK14 Built-in Auto Attendant software is enabled by installing a QKYS1 Key (chip) onto the QRCU3 PCB. ➤ To install the QKYS1 Key 1. Make sure that the DKSU14 power supply switch is OFF. 2. Install the QKYS1 into the QKYS1 connector on the QRCU2 PCB (see Figure 1-13). 3. The QKYS1 does not require Program 03 assignments. Programming Refer to “Auto Attendant (Built-in)” in the Overview section of the Strata DK Programming Manual. 1-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation WSIU1 Serial Interface Board System: DK14 Circuits per PCB: two serial interface ports Interfaces with: SMDR connection for call accounting device Caller ID Interface Box, Interface for local connection of DKAdmin PC customer-provided external modem for remote maintenance from a PC with DK Admin DK14 Installation WSIU1 Serial Interface Board Older Version(s): none The WSIU1 PCB enables the DK14 system to connect to various hardware devices. It does not have an internal modem and does not support IMDU or RMDS. Only one WSIU1 can be installed per DK14 system. When installed, the WSIU1 port functions are identified and enabled automatically when power is turned on. See Program 76-1 for initialized data. CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box. See Figure 1-18 for wiring. The TC-1041 (MLX-41) is available from TEL-CONTROL, Inc., P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087. Phone (205) 881-4000. The communication parameters for TTY and Caller ID (WSIU1 SI01 or SI02) ports are: ♦ Data word bits = 7 ♦ Parity = even ♦ Stop bits = 1 The communication parameters for SMDR (WSIU SI01 or SI02) are: Strata DK I&M ♦ Data word bits = 8 ♦ Parity = None ♦ Stop bit = 1 5/99 1-19 DK14 Installation WSIU1 Serial Interface Board WSIU1 Installation SIO#2 SIO#1 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF. See Figure 1-14. J2 J1 2. Slide the front edge under the System Frame Ground Bar. Align and insert WSIU connector J4 into the motherboard connector J21, and J3 into J20. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper making of the connectors. Make sure the edge of the WSIU is next to the connector J1 and J2. 3. Remove the “knock-out” from the KSU cover SI01 or SI02 access slot, and store the “knock-out” in the slots provided in the KSU base. (See Figure 1-11.) WSIU Programming V.1 Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed WSIU1 port to a function. Where X identifies the WSIU1 port number (1~2) and Y identifies the WSIU1 port function: WSIU1A Program 03: No assignment is necessary. WSIU1 is automatically enabled when installed and power is turned ON. It is not assigned to a slot. 2396 Figure 1-14 WSIU Printed Circuit Board ♦ Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 OFF) ♦ Y=2, SMDR ♦ Y=4, SMDI ♦ Y=6, Caller ID Interface ♦ Y=0, No function - this should be used for any WSIU1 ports that are not used. Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed WSIU1 port to operate at a specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the WSIU1 Port number (1, 2). Z identifies the WSIU1/port transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps): ♦ Z=1; 9600 ♦ Z=2; 4800 ♦ Z=3; 2400 ♦ Z=4; 1200 Note The sum of WSIU1 port 1 and port 2 bps rate cannot exceed 9600 bps. WSIU Wiring Note 1-20 Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation, SMDR and TTY for WSIU wiring/ interconnecting details. See Figure 1-18 for Caller ID interface box to WSIU wiring. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation DK8/DK14 Compatibility DK8/DK14 Compatibility Table 1-2 DK14 PCBs Compatible with the DK8 System DK14 PCBs DKSU14A Compatibility (Use in DK8) Standard - X Base Unit Optional Function QMAU2A NO X Common Control/2-Loop Start CO Lines and 4Digital Telephones Interface Unit QPSU8A2 YES X Power Supply QCDU2A YES X 1-Loop Start CO Line and 2-Digital Telephones Interface Unit QRCU3A YES X 3-DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit QSTU2A YES X 2-Standard Telephones Interface Unit WSIU1A NO X 2-Serial I/O Interface Unit QKYS1A YES X Auto Attendant Feature Key Table 1-3 DK8 PCBs Compatible with the DK14 System Compatibility (Use in DK14) Standard DKSU8A - X Base Unit QMAU1A NO X Common Control/2-Loop Start CO Lines and 4Digital Telephones Interface Unit QCNU1A NO X Conference IC Unit QPSU8A YES X Power Supply QCDU1A NO X 1-Loop Start CO Line and 2-Digital Telephones Interface Unit QRCU2A/1A NO X 3-DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit DK8 PCBs Optional Function QSTU1A NO X 2-Standard Telephones Interface Unit QSMU1A NO X 1-SMDR/TTY Interface Unit QKYS1A YES X Auto Attendant Feature Key Strata DK I&M DK14 Installation Generally, Strata DK components are upward compatible to make upgrading cost-effective. Furthermore, there is a lot of cross-compatibility between similar systems. Most of the PCBs that were introduced for the DK14 can also be used in the DK8 system (see Table 1-2). Also, a number of DK8 PCBs can be used in the DK14 (see Table 1-3). 5/99 1-21 DK14 Installation DK14 Secondary Protection DK14 Secondary Protection ,, ,,, ,, ,,,, ,, , , , , , ,,,, , , ,,, The following diagram (see Figure 1-15) shows where secondary protectors must be installed for outside wiring. Building #1 Building #2 QSTU2 Standard Telephone or Other Device DK14 KSU Base Unit and QCDU2 HESB (optional) Digital Telephone or Cordless Base MDFB DDCB Secondary protectors DK14 KSU Base Unit and QCDU2 Earth Ground CO Line 2422 Earth Ground Important! To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC® Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee manufacturer. Figure 1-15 DK14 Secondary Protector Diagram 1-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation DK14 Wiring Diagrams DK14 Wiring Diagrams DK14 Installation Wiring diagrams for the DK14 (listed below) are shown in Figures 1-16~1-18. ♦ DK14 MDF to Station Wiring (QCDU2 and QSTU2) ♦ DK14 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (KSU and QCDU) ♦ DK14 MDF Wiring to Caller ID Interface (WSIU) 25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR To Base Unit (P5) With Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 or 2 Pair, See Note 2) Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 R1 T1 3 T1 (Voice /Data) R1 (Voice /Data) PT1 (Add. Power) PR1 (Add. Power) Circuit 2 to DKT23 or PDIU-DS or DDCB GN BK Y W BL T1 PT1 Circuit 3 to DKT33 or PDIU-DS or DDCB PR1 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 5 to DKT54 or PDIU-DS TR PT Modular Cord Circuit 6 to DKT64 or PDIU-DS Circuit 7 to DKT74 or PDIU-DS RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT43 or PDIU-DS GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Digital Telephone (DKT 1) (with or without ADM, PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2) QCDU2 2405 Circuit 8 to DKT84 or PDIU-DS Relay Contacts Notes Not Used 1. Voltage levels: T, PT=-26.3~27.8 VDC R PR=+4.5~+5.5 VDC +5V converter on KSU PCB 2. T/R wires are always required: PT/ PR are additional power wires required for long station runs only. PT/PR can also be used with normal station runs. 3. DKT circuits (1~4) are standard on the DK14 main PCB. 4. DKT circuits (5~6) require one optional QCDU2 circuit and DKT circuits (7~8) require a second QCDU2 to be installed. Standard Telephone Circuit 1 Not Used R1 T1 R R1 QSTU2 Standard Telephone Circuit 2 or BGM Not Used 66M150 Split Block Figure 1-16 DK14 MDF to Station Wiring (QCDU2 and QSTU2) Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-23 DK14 Installation DK14 Wiring Diagrams RJ11 Modular Jacks 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 T1 2345 654321 2345 654321 T 4 3 6-1 R T 4 3 6-1 2345 22 R CO1 R T 4 3 6-1 CO4 2345 21 22 CO3 CO3 654321 21 6-1 CO2 654321 20 BL 19 20 W 19 BL 18 W 17 18 BL 16 17 W 16 BL 15 W 15 Y 14 BK 14 Y 13 BK 13 4 3 CO2 Y 12 BK 11 12 Y 10 11 BK 10 GN 9 R 8 9 T R1 8 R T2 7 GN 6 7 R 6 CO4 R2 5 T3 4 5 GN 3 4 Modular Cords CO1 R 3 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 R3 2 GN 1 2 R 1 R4 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 Bridging Clips T4 To Network R T 4 3 6-1 Notes ● ● ● PFT (bottom) PFT, CO1, and CO2 modular jacks are equipped on the main circuit card of the DK14. CO3 requires one optional QCDU2 and CO4 requires a second QCDU2 to be installed. Power Failure Standard Telephone Network Jack: RJ11 or RJ21X, FIC: 02LS2. 2406 66M150 Split Block Figure 1-17 DK14 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (KSU and QCDU) 1-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK14 Installation DK14 Wiring Diagrams 7 7 8 8 GN T1 R1 BK Y T2 2345 R BL 6 654321 5 6 Modular Cords CO1 W 5 T1 4 Y 3 4 DK14 KSU RJ11 Modular Jacks BK 2 3 Dealer Supplied RJ14C GN 2 T1 R1 T2 R2 R 1 CO4 R T R1 Bridging Clips 1 R2 QCDU2 4 3 6-1 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 6-1 39 39 40 40 PFT (bottom) 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 50 50 T2 W BK R Modular Cord CO3 2345 BL Y GN 2 3 4 5 654321 CO2 6 5 4 3 2 1 R T QCDU2 4 3 6-1 CO2 R CO3 Same connections as above. 4 3 6-1 2345 T CO1 R T 4 3 Base 6-1 Same connections as above. 2345 CO4 R T Tel Control, Inc. Interface Box, TC-1041 8 7 6 SW1 5 4 Input 3 Port 2 3-4 1 66M150 Split Block 4 3 Power Failure Standard Telephone MLX-41 654321 48 BL W R2 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 DK14 Installation Telco RJ21X To Network OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF See TC-1041 Installation Manual. bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 SW1 1 2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON WSIU PCB Front View DB-9 Plug (male) RS-232 Out Front View 6-pin Modular Jack 6789 2 - 5 5 - 1 7 - 4 3-2 DB-9 (male) Modular Adaptor (see wiring diagram) Use Program *50 to assign CO lines 1~4 to MLX-41 lines 1~4 respectively. 654321 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2345 3-pair Modular Cord Toshiba Part #: PPTC-CLID14 Input Port 1-2 AC Adaptor (supplied with MLX-41) SIO #1 or SIO #2 (per Program 76) RS-232 In (Not Used) To 115VAC ±10VAC Modular Adaptor Wiring Diagram 2430 Figure 1-18 DK14 MDF Wiring to Caller ID Interface (WSIU) Strata DK I&M 5/99 1-25 DK14 Installation DK14 Wiring Diagrams 1-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration 2 DK40i Configuration This chapter explains how to configure a Strata DK40i system. It also provides tables for recording the hardware and station devices that make up the system. Base Key Service Unit (KSU) Station and CO Lines The DK40i Base KSU comes equipped with eight digital telephone station circuits. One of three optional PCBs can be added to provide either four loop start or DID lines, or two ISDN BRI S/T circuits (Table 2-1). An optional TCIU2 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) can be added to the Base KSU loop start line PCB to provide Caller ID interface. An optional KSTU2 PCB can be added to provide four standard telephone circuits (ports). An Expansion KSU can be added to the DK40i to increase the system capacity to 28 station ports and 12 lines. Note Peripherals The DK40i Base KSU can support a number of peripherals, which are not considered as stations or lines and do not affect the maximum station and line capacities. The DK40i Base KSU comes standard with built-in interfaces for connecting the following dealer-supplied equipment: an amplifier and speaker for paging and night ringing, Music-on-Hold (MOH) source, reserve power batteries, and emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences when using loop start lines in the base cabinet. A relay contact is also provided to control one of the following peripherals: MOH source, night bell, or page amplifier mute control. An optional KSTU2 PCB provides an alternate background music source interface. The music plays through Toshiba telephone speakers, as opposed to the external page speakers. The optional TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports to connect two of three options: a DKAdmin PC (or external modem for remote maintenance); or VM SMDI; or an SMDR port to connect a call accounting device or printer. An Expansion Unit RS-232 interface PCB is required if all three features are needed. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-1 DK40i Configuration Base Key Service Unit (KSU) Table 2-1 DK40i Base KSU Components Item Connector Type Supports Standard Optional Digital telephone circuits (8) Base KSU main PCB (TMAU2) Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI or ADM) Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS) 25-pair Door Phone Lock/Control Unit (DDCB) Amphenol Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS) Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) CO or DID line circuits (4) (TCOU or TDDU) Loop start or DID lines RJ11 modular ✔ BRI (S/T) circuits (2) (TBSU)1 2 BRI (S/T) circuits configure as BRI lines or station ports. BRI lines require a dealer supplied NT-1. 8-pair modular ✔ Power Failure Transfer Interface (TCOU only) Standard telephone (one)2 RJ11 modular ✔ Battery Backup Interface with built-in charger Two 12-volt batteries Proprietary connector/ cable ✔ Music-on-Hold/BGM Interface Music-on-Hold/BGM source2 RCA jack ✔ 600 Ohm page Interface Amplifier/speaker RCA jack ✔ ✔ Cable & batteries waiting)2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit (four-circuit, KSTU2) Standard telephones (no message Other single-line devices2 Alternate BGM source2 Fax machine2 Voice mail/auto attendant devices DTMF/ABR Receiver (K4RCU3, K5RCU, or K5RCU2)3 Automatic busy redial Standard telephone ports Interprets DTMF tones DISA, DID, Tie lines, or auto attendant Voice Mail Automated Attendant (KKYS) Built-in automated attendant 25-pair Amphenol ✔ Internal ✔ Internal ✔ Control Relay Choice of one: MOH Source Control Night Bell Control BGM Mute Control 25-pair Amphenol Caller ID (TCIU2) TCOU Caller ID interface Internal T/R to TCOU ✔ RS-232 ports (TSIU) Provides up to two ports for: Maintenance PC or External modem interface Voice Mail SMDI interface SMDR interface The TSIU does not support a built-in modem. 3-pair modular ✔ ✔ 1. Each circuit can be set independently for line or station side S/T BRI. 2. Customer-supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division. 3. K4RCU provides four DTMF circuits. K5RCU and K5RCU2 provide five DTMF circuits. Also, K5RCU2 provides the Mu law/A law jumper. 2-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility Expansion Units that are compatible with various Base KSUs are shown in Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Compatible Base KSUs and Expansion Units Base KSU DK16 Expansion Unit DK40i DK16e DK16 X X X X X DK40 X X DK40i X X DK40i Configuration DK16e X = Expansion Unit is compatible with Base KSU. Station, Lines, and Stratagy DK Voice Mail The optional DK40i Expansion KSU has four universal slots which can support Stratagy DK, loop and ground start lines, DID and Tie lines, ISDN BRI S/T lines and stations, Toshiba and analog stations, and option interface PCBs. PCBs that support lines and can be installed in the expansion unit are the RCOU/RCOS, KCDU, REMU, RBSU, or RDDU (see Table 2-3). PCBs that can support stations and be installed in the expansion unit are the PDKU2, RDSU, PEKU, RSTU2, PESU, RBSU/RBSS, RWIU, and KCDU. PCBs that can interface SMDR, SMDI, and a local or remote DKAdmin Personal Computer are PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU (see Table 2-4). Table 2-3 PCB DK40i Expansion KSU Components Circuits per PCB Interfaces Connector Central office loop start lines RJ14C modular (CO Line circuits) Digital circuits same as PDKU2, except no DDSS 25-pair Amphenol (digital telephone circuits) 8 digital telephone circuits Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI or ADM) DDSS console PDIU-DSs DDCB Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) 25-pair Amphenol PEKU 8 electronic telephone circuits Electronic telephones HDSS console Alternate BGM source EOCU PCB for OCA External conference amplifier HDCB 25-pair Amphenol PESU 2 standard telephone circuits/ 4 electronic telephone circuits (standard/ electronic telephone ports) Standard: same as RSTU (no MW) Electronic: same as PEKU, except PESU does not support HDSS console 25-pair Amphenol KCDU PDKU2 Strata DK I&M 2 CO line circuits/ 4 digital telephone circuits 5/99 2-3 DK40i Configuration Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility Table 2-3 PCB DK40i Expansion KSU Components (continued) Circuits per PCB Interfaces Connector 25-pair Amphenol (PIOU, PEPU) Spring clip terminal (PIOUS) PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU A PIOU or PIOUS can use an IMDU. See Table 2-4 for details. RBSU 2 ISDN BRI S/T circuits (station or line)1 ISDN BRI S/T TE-1s and Terminal Adaptors and ISDN BRI S/T line circuits connected to an NT-1 adaptor. RJ-45 RBSS Two ISDN BRI S/T circuits (station only) ISDN BRI S/T TE-1s and Terminal Adaptors. RJ-45 RWIU 8 or 16 digital circuits for Strata AirLink Up to four base stations (16 handsets max.) RJ-12 (6-wire modular jack) RCIU2 4 Caller ID circuits 8 circuits with RCIS Loop or ground start lines with Caller ID. Requires: RCOU, RGLU2 or PCOU. RJ14C modular RCOU 4 CO line circuits (lines) Central office loop start lines RJ14C modular RDDU 4 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) circuits DID lines RJ14C modular RDSU Without RSTS: 2 Standard telephone/ 4 Digital telephone circuits With RSTS: 4 Standard telephone/ 4 Digital telephone circuits Digital: Same as PDKU2, except no DDSS Console Standard: Same as RSTU2 (standard telephone message waiting not available) 25-pair Amphenol REMU 4 Tie line circuits E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I Signaling Type II Signaling Immediate start Wink start REMU (8-wire modular jack) USOC RJ1CX modular, 2- or 4-wire/Type I or II R48S 8 standard telephone circuits Optionally interfaces to the RSTU2 and RDSU to extend loop length of standard telephones from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. 25-pair Amphenol 4 Line circuits Loop or ground start lines RJ14C modular 8 Standard telephone circuits Standard telephones Voice mail ports Off-premises stations Other similar devices Alternate BGM source Auto attendant digital announcer Message waiting lamp generator 25-pair Amphenol 2 VM ports 4 VM ports 6 VM ports 8 VM ports All the above Stratagy DK systems use 8 station ports in the DK40i software. None None RGLU2 RSTU2 Stratagy DK 1. Each circuit can be set independently for line or station side (S/T BRI). 2-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility Peripherals An Expansion KSU can support PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU and PEPU PCBs (see Table 2-4 for a list of options). PIOU or PIOUS The PIOU/PIOUS provides one dedicated RS-232 port for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) connection to a call accounting device and one of the following: a TTY/RS-232 port which can connect to a customer-provided VM SMDI or external modem for remote maintenance, or to a local PC with DKAdmin ♦ connectors for an internal modem (IMDU) for remote maintenance and administration RSSU The RSSU provides one TTY/RS-232 port for a connection to a VM SMDI or customer-provided external modem for remote maintenance, or to a local PC with DKAdmin. The RSSU does not support SMDR or IMDU. DK40i Configuration ♦ Any device that connects to the PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU should not be considered a station and does not affect the system’s station capacity. Table 2-4 DK40i Interface PCB Options Interface Options1 RSSU PIOUS PEPU TSIU DK40i Base 2 X Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones) Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 duplex) PIOU Ω, X Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay X X X X Door lock or external amplifier control relay X X X X IMDU disables TTY output when piggy-backed onto PIOU or PIOUS cards X X X X X SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector) X X X Alarm sensor X X X X Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external modem, StrataControl and/or DKAdmin PC (requires TTY output port) Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port) X X X 1. Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) on the PIOU and PEPU is not available on the DK40i. 2. These functions are standard (built-in) to the DK40i Base KSU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-5 DK40i Configuration Feature Capacities Feature Capacities The DK40i line, system feature and station capacities are shown in Tables 2-5~2-7. Table 2-5 DK40i Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots Lines and PCB Slots Universal slots DK40i 41 1 CO lines – loop start 12 CO lines – ground start 12 2 12 DID lines (analog) 2 12 Tie lines (analog) ISDN BRI S/T type line circuits (each circuit requires an NT-1 device)2 6 circuits (12 B-channel/lines) Squared System Maximum (ground/loop lines + stations) 12 lines + 12 stations Squared System Maximum (Tie/DID lines + stations) 12 lines + 12 stations 1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit. 2. In the D40i, DID, Tie, and BRI lines do not use up station ports as in DK40 and the DK424, R3. Each BRI line circuit uses up to two CO lines of system capacity Table 2-6 DK40i System Feature Capacities Features Amplified Conferencing1 2-6 DK40i 2 Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous calls in dialing queue 5 Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Numbers - stored per station 10~100 Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Numbers - stored per system 200 CO Line Groups 8 Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups 10 DH Groups 16 DH stations per Group 28 DNIS Network Routing Numbers 100 DNIS Numbers 200 DTMF receivers 5 External Page Zones 4 Call Park Orbits - general 20 Call Park Orbits - individual 28 Personal LCD Messages per DKT2 10 Personal Message DKTs 16 [PhDNs] per System 28 [PDNs] per System 28 Ring Tones 3 Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party) 3 Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing (3-party) 4 Station Speed Dial 40 Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group) 1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Feature Capacities Table 2-6 DK40i System Feature Capacities (continued) Features DK40i Stratagy DK Systems (per system) 2 System LCD Messages 40 System Speed Dial 40 5 Telephone Group Page – simultaneous stations paged 28 Telephone Pickup Groups 20 Tenants 2 Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table 8 Toll Restriction Classes 4 Verified Account Codes 300 Voice Mail Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) Yes 1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware. 2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo. Table 2-7 DK40i Configuration Telephone Page Groups DK40i Station and Peripherals Capacities Stations Add-on modules (DADM) DK40i 12 Attendant consoles 0 DKT 2004-CT Cordless Telephones (simultaneous calls) 9 DKT 2004-CT Cordless Telephones 28 Door locks 3 Door phones 9 DSS consoles 3 Handset OCA stations 28 Off-premise stations 20 PDIU-DS1 24 RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI (per system) 24 RPCI-DI used for TAPI only (per system)1 24 Speaker OCA stations1 28 Standard stations 20 Telephones – DKT 282 Telephones – EKT 162 ISDN Terminal Adapters and/or TE-1s combined Telephones – Strata Airlink Handsets 10 circuit (20 devices)3 16 1. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by PDKU 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits. 2. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the stations must be DKTs. 3. In the DK40i, BRI station circuits do not use up CO line numbers as in the DK424, R4. Each BRI station circuit uses up to two station ports of system capacity. Toshiba BRI (S/T) station circuits are passive and allow up to two devices to share a circuit. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-7 DK40i Configuration Station Considerations Station Considerations For configuration purposes, any device which is connected to a dedicated telephone circuit is considered a “station.” Although the words “telephone” and “station” are often used interchangeably in Strata DK40i documentation, devices other than telephones—such as Standalone Data Interface units (PDIU-DSs)—should also be considered stations when configuring a system since they require a dedicated telephone circuit. A station apparatus overview is shown in Table 2-8. Table 2-8 Strata DK40i Station Apparatus Overview Circuit(s) Base Unit Capacity Base & Expansion Unit Combined Capacity Digital, one for each DKT Base KSU PDKU2 KCDU RDSU 1~8 1~8 1~4 5~8 8 28 Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) Digital, one for each PDIU-DS Base KSU PDKU2 KCDU RDSU 1~8 1~8 1~4 5~8 7 27 Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS) Digital, one for each DDSS Base KSU PDKU2 8 8 1 3 Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) Digital, one for each DDCB Base KSU PDKU2 or first KCDU 5 1 1 1 3 Electronic Telephone (EKT) Electronic, one for each EKT PEKU PESU 1~8 5~8 0 16 Electronic Direct Station Selection Console (HDSS) Electronic, two for the HDSS PEKU 7 and 8 0 2 Conference amplifier Electronic, two for the amplifier PEKU PESU 6 and 7 6 and 7 0 2 Single-wire-pair devices: Standard telephone Voice mail device Facsimile machine Modem Dictation equipment Standard, one for each device (voice mail devices may require more than one circuit) KSTU2 RSTU2 PESU RDSU RDSU/RSTS 1~4 1~8 1~2 1~2 1~4 4 20 Alternate BGM source May require interface transformer, see Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation Standard or electronic, one for the source KSTU2 PEKU PESU RSTU2 2 3 8 2 1 1 Type/Number of Circuits Required PCB or Interface Digital telephone (DKT without ADM or RPCI-DI) or Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) Station 2-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Telephone Circuit (Port) Types Telephone Circuit (Port) Types There are four types of telephone circuits to which stations can be connected: digital, electronic, and standard telephone circuits. Also, there are ISDN (S/T) type telephone circuits, terminal equipment (TE-1) and terminal adaptor circuits. Digital Telephone Circuit Connections Note Table 2-9 A maximum of four KCDU PCBs can be installed. If installed, KCDUs should be installed per configuration tables. The following devices can be connected to digital telephone circuits (see Table 2-9). Telephones connected to KCDU PCBs cannot be relocated or swapped using the station relocation feature. Digital Telephone Circuits Digital Device Digital telephones (2000- and 1000-series, Cordless Digital TelephoneDKT2004-CT) Circuits Required 1 DK40i Configuration The Strata DK40i Base KSU and the PDKU2 PCB each provide eight digital telephone circuits. Each KCDU and RDSU PCB provides four. The RWIU PCB provides circuits to support up to 16 wireless digital telephones. Comments Each digital telephone circuit can support a digital telephone. Only one of the following options can be installed on a 2000-series digital telephone: RPCI-DI, DVSU (SP-OCA) or ADMs. Note The RPCI-DI) and the Add-on Module (ADM) do not require a dedicated circuit. They share a circuit with the telephone. Any digital telephone circuit, except for circuit 8 on a PDKU21, can support a PDIU-DS. Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS) 1 Note Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS) 1 DDSS consoles can connect only to circuit 8 in the Base KSU and circuit 8 on a PDKU2. The KCDU cannot support a DDSS console. Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Box (DDCB) 1 DDCBs can only connect to Port 04 in the Base KSU, and Ports 12 and/or 20 on either the PDKU2 or KCDU. Wireless Integrated Handsets 1 Each RWIU supports up to 32 Strata AirLInk integrated handsets. Strata DK I&M 5/99 There are two versions of the PDKU2: PDKU21 and PDKU2. The versions are identical, except that circuits 1~8 on the PDKU2 can each support PDIU-DSs/RPCI-DI, while only circuits 1~7 on a PDKU21 can support PDIU-DSs/RPCI-DIs. 2-9 DK40i Configuration Telephone Circuit (Port) Types Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections There are no electronic telephone circuits in the Base KSU, and none can be added to it. However, either the PEKU PCB, which has eight electronic telephone circuits, or the PESU, which has four electronic telephone circuits, can be installed in the Expansion KSU. The following devices can be connected to electronic telephone circuits (see Table 2-10). Table 2-10 Electronic Telephone Circuits Electronic Device Circuits Required Comments Electronic telephones (6500-, 6000-, 3000-, 2000series) 1 Each electronic telephone circuit can support an electronic telephone. Electronic Direct Station Selection Console (HDSS) 2 The system supports only one HDSS console. The console must be connected to both circuits 7 and 8 on the PEKU. The PESU will not support an HDSS console. Alternate BGM source 1 The system supports an alternate BGM source which can be heard over digital and electronic telephone and external page speakers. This source can be connected to either circuit 3 on a PEKU, circuit 8 on a PESU, or circuit 4 on a KSTU2 or PSTU PCB. Conference amplifier 2 Up to three amplifiers for two CO line conferencing can be connected to ports 9 and 10; 17 and 18; and 24 and 25 on a PEKU or PESU. CAUTION! You must always calculate the Power Factor (PF)—see Worksheet 2. Exceeding the PF will cause the power supply to fail. If PF is exceeded, replace EKTs with DKTs. Standard Telephone Circuit Options In addition to supporting standard telephones, each of the standard telephone circuits can support any one of a number of single-wire-pair devices, including voice mail/Auto Attendant devices and modems (see Table 2-11). Table 2-11 Standard Telephone Circuits Base KSU Standard Telephone Circuits Number of Standard Telephone Circuits Supports Message Waiting Lamps on SLTs Expansion KSU KSTU2 RSTU2 PESU RSTU1 or PSTU RDSU/ RSTS 4 8 2 8 2/2 No Yes No No No ISDN Station Devices ISDN station devices must be S/T type. Each device requires a DK40i BRI circuit configured for station side, as opposed to line side. Two BRI circuits are provided by each of the ISDN PCBs: TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS. ISDN station devices include ISDN telephones, modems, terminal adaptors, video cards, etc. A maximum of 10 BRI circuits can be provided for ISDN stations. 2-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide Customer: Location: Be sure to consult “Example Configuration Tables” on Page 2-13 when filling out these tables. Table 2-12 Hardware Configuration Base Cabinet Slot No. 00 11 12 Expansion Cabinet 13 14 None None 15 16 17 18 Universal PCB Universal PCB Universal PCB Universal PCB (except Stratagy DK) DK40i Configuration This worksheet helps you configure the system. Use the following tables to record the hardware that comprises the system. To ensure that the system port/line capacity is not exceeded, consult Configuration Tables 2-13~2-16 when you fill out Tables 2-13 and 2-14 below. After configuring the system, use Worksheet 2 to ensure that the system power factors are not exceeded. None PCB Type None or K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 8 DKTs TCOU (4 Loop Start Lines) TDDU (4 DID Lines) TBSU (2 BRI Ckts.) KSTU2 4 SLT TCIU2 4 CLID Base Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check Table 2-13 Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Station Port Configuration Installed (Yes/No) Yes PCB Type Port Type Motherboard Digital Telephone (8 ports) KSTU2 Standard Telephone (4 ports) TBSU circuit #1 ISDN station side (2 ports) TBSU circuit #2 ISDN station side (2 ports) Port Total 8 Total Base Ports (16 ports max.) = Table 2-14 Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Line Configuration Installed (Yes/No) PCB Type Number of Line Types TCOU Loop start (4 lines) TDDU Direct Inward Dial (4 lines) TBSU circuit #1 ISDN line side (2 lines) TBSU circuit #2 ISDN line side (2 lines) Line Total Total Base Lines (4 lines max.) = Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-11 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide Expansion Capacity Table 2-15 Strata DK40i Expansion PCB Port/Line Capacity Reference Table Expansion PCB Port/Line Type No. of Ports No. of Lines 4 PCOU Loop Start Lines 0 RCOU Loop Start Lines 0 4 RCOU/RCOS Loop Start Lines 0 8 RGLU Ground or Loop Start Lines 0 4 RDDU Direct In Dial Lines 0 4 REMU E&M Tie Lines 0 4 PEMU E&M Tie Lines 0 4 KCDU Digital Ports/Loop Lines 4 2 PDKU2 Digital Telephone Ports 8 0 RSTU2 Standard Telephone Ports 8 0 RWIU Strata AirLink Wireless Interface 8 or 16 0 Stratagy DK Built-in Voice Mail System 8 0 RDSU 2 Standard/4-Digital Telephone Ports 8 0 RDSU/RSTS 4 Standard/4 Digital Telephones ports 8 0 PEKU Electronic Telephone Ports 8 0 PESU 2 Standard/4 Electronic Telephone Ports 8 0 2 ISDN BRI S/T circuits, station side or line side in any combination shown below: RBSU RBSS ● Both circuits line side 0 4 ● Both circuits station side 4 0 ● 1 station and 1 line circuit 2 2 4 0 2 ISDN BRI S/T circuits Base and Expansions Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check Refer to Tables 2-13~2-15 when filling in Table 2-16 to determine the DK40i Expansion Capacity. Table 2-16 Expansion Slot No. Strata DK40i Base and Expansion CO Line Configuration PCB Installed Port Type or Line Type Ports Lines 15 16 17 18 Total Ports and Lines in Expansion slots (15~18) Total Base Unit ports and lines (from Tables 2-12 and 2-13) Total DK40i Base/Expansion ports and lines (28 ports/12 lines max.) 2-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide Example Configuration Tables Table 2-17 Hardware Configuration Example Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Slot Number 00 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PCB Type K5RCU2 8 DKTs TBSU KSTU2 4 SLT None PDKU2 RBSU/ RBSS RCOU PIOU Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Station Port Configuration Example Installed (Yes/No) PCB Type Port Type Port Total Yes Motherboard Digital Telephone (8 ports) 8 Yes KSTU2 Standard Telephone (4 ports) 4 Yes TBSU circuit #1 ISDN station side (2 ports) 2 – TBSU circuit #2 ISDN station side (2 ports) – 14 Total Base Ports (16 ports max.) = Table 2-19 Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Line Configuration Example Installed (Yes/No) No No PCB Type Number of Line Types Line Total TCOU Loop start (4 lines) – TDDU Direct Inward Dial (4 lines) – – TBSU circuit #1 ISDN line side (2 lines) – Yes TBSU circuit #2 ISDN line side (2 lines) 2 Total Base Lines (4 lines max.) = Note 2 One TBSU circuit is configured a s a station-side BRI and one circuit is line-side BRI. Table 2-20 Strata DK40i Base and Expansion CO Line Configuration Example Expansion Slot No. PCB Installed Port Type or Line Type Ports Lines 15 PDKU 8 Ports 8 – 16 RBSU/ RBSS 4 Ports and 4 Lines 4 4 17 RDDU 4 Lines – 4 18 PIOU None – – Total Ports and Lines in Expansion slots (15~18) 12 8 Total Base Unit ports and lines (from Tables 2-17 and 2-18) 14 2 Total DK40i Base/Expansion ports and lines (28 ports/12 lines max.) 26 10 Note DK40i Configuration Table 2-18 18 Two RBSU circuits are line-side BRI and two RBSS circuits are station-side BRI. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-13 DK40i Configuration Configuration Considerations Configuration Considerations The following considerations should be taken into account when filling out the tables in “Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide”. Base Cabinet 1. Only one line PCB (TCOU, TDDU, or TBSU) can be installed in the Base cabinet. 2. If TBSU is installed, each circuit can be configured independently as a station side or line side S/T BRI circuit. 3. Each TBSU ISDN BRI circuit uses two station ports and no line numbers if the circuit is configured for the station side. 4. Each TBSU ISDN BRI circuit will use two line numbers and no station ports if the circuit is configured for the line side. 5. TDDU provides four DID lines and does not use station ports. 6. Install TCIU2 for Base KSU CO (TCOU) Caller ID Lines. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, do not install TCIU1 in the DK40i system. 7. K5RCU, K5RCU2 or K4RCU3 must be installed when using built-in automated attendant, Voice Mail, ABR, Stratagy DK, standard telephone ports, Tie lines, DISA, or DID Lines. 8. TSIU can be used for an RS-232 Maintenance (TTY) port, SMDI or SMDR port. RSIU cannot be used. Expansion Cabinet 1. Each RDDU provides four DID lines and does not use station ports. This is different from the DK424, DK40 and DK16e in which each DID circuit used a line number and station port. 2. Each REMU to PEMU provides the four Tie lines and does not use station ports. This is different from the DK424, DK40, and DK16e in which each Tie line circuit used a line number and station port. 3. Stratagy DK can be installed in the expansion unit to provide two, four, six or eight built-in Automated Attendant/Voice Mail circuits. Always install Stratagy DK in slot 15, 16, or 17; do not install Stratagy DK in slot 18. Program the Stratagy VM ports as if they were standard telephone ports connected to an external VM device. All models of Stratagy DK use up eight station ports. 4. Install RCIU2/RCIS in slot 17 (only) for Expansion KSU (RCOU/RCOS or RGLU2) Caller ID Lines. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, do no install RCIU1 in DK40i, and RCIU2 must not be installed in slot 18. 5. If required, install PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU in any slot. 6. Speaker OCA and RPCI/DIU data applications can only be installed on digital telephone ports in the DK40i Base KSU and slots 15 and 16 of the DK40i Expansion KSU (24 maximum). 2-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Configuration Considerations 7. Each Tie or DID line PCB installed provides four Tie or DID lines and does not use four station ports as in the DK40 (PEMU, REMU, RDDU, and RDDU). 8. RWIU can be installed in any of the expansion cabinet slots (15, 16, 17, and 18) to support up to 8 StrataLink handsets. If there are 9 to 16 handsets, the RWIU must be installed in slot 15 and slot 16 must be vacant. This system cannot support 24 or 32 handsets because of a port limitation. DK40i ISDN 1. TBSU installs in the base cabinet to provide 2 BRI S/T circuits, each circuit can be station side or line side in any combination. 2. If a TBSU is installed, TDDU or TCOU cannot be installed. Only one PCB (TSBU, TCOU or TDDU) can be installed in the DK40i base cabinet for a given DK40i configuration. 3. RBSU installs in any expansion unit slot to provide 2 BRI S/T circuits which can be station side or line side in any combination. DK40i Configuration Configure DK40i, ISDN BRI PCBs (RBSU, RBSS and TBSU) with the following rules 4. RBSS installs on an RBSU in any expansion unit slot to provide 2 BRI S/T circuits, which can be station side only. 5. Each RBSU, RBSS and TBSU ISDN BRI circuit uses two station ports and no line numbers if the circuit is configured for station side. This is different from the DK424 ISDN in which each BRI circuit uses two station ports and two line numbers when the circuit is configured for station side. 6. Each RBSU and TBSU ISDN BRI circuit will use two line numbers and no station ports if the circuit is configured for the line side. This is different from DK424 ISDN, in which each BRI circuit uses two station ports and two line numbers when the circuit is configured for line side. 7. Total maximum BRI S/T circuits on the station side is 10 (20 ports/B-channels max.). 8. Total maximum BRI S/T circuits on the CO line side is 6 (12 lines/B-channels max.). Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-15 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 2 – System Power Factor Check Worksheet 2 – System Power Factor Check The DK power supply was engineered for maximum cost efficiency to provide power for the most configurations. Because of this design, some power limitations exist when using old electronictype telephones, telephone option hardware, or newer PCBs, such as RWIU, TBSU, RBSU/RBSS. Telephone/Device PFs The power supply of each KSU supplies a limited amount of power. For each KSU, calculate the total Telephone/Device Power Factor (PF) and add it to Table 2-23. (See Table 2-12 for PCB quantity and type.) The TBSU, RBSU/RBSS and RWIU PCBs require more power from +5VDC than other PCBs; therefore, it is necessary to calculate the +5VDC and -24VDC PF on DK40i. Important! Table 2-21 A system PF check must be performed for all configurations. See Table 2-21 for the power supply +5VDC and -24VDC PFs for the DK40i system. DK40i System Power Factor Power Supply Max+5VDC PF Max -24VDC PF AC Input Current TPSU16A 14 39 1.8A Note AC current limitation by National Electric Code. Important! The -24VDC system PF is Expansion KSU PCBs and all telephone/options connected to the Base and Expansion KSUs. Base KSU option PCBs are already covered for -24VDC PF. System Power Factors PCB/Telephone Device Use the information in Table 2-22 to complete Tables 2-25 and 2-26. Table 2-22 DK40i PCB’s Power Factors PCB Type K5RCU2 2-16 +5VDC PF 0.6 -24VDC PF PCB Type NR RWIU +5VDC PF 9.2 -24VDC PF 0.0 K5RCU 0.6 NR PIOU 2.5 6.5 K4RCU3 0.6 NR PIOUS 2.0 4.0 TSIU 0.6 NR IMDU 0.3 0.16 TCOU 1.6 NR RSSU 0.6 0.3 TBSU 2.5 NR RCIU2 0.6 0.2 KSTU2 1.0 NR RCIS 0.3 0.1 TDDU 1.8 NR PEKU 2.5 0.7 TCIU 0.4 NR PESU 1.6 0.5 PDKU1, 2 8.0 0.3 RMCU 0.6 0.3 KCDU 1.5 1.2 RMCS 0.6 0.3 PSTU/RSTU (-24V) 2.0 0.5 REMU2/PEMU 1.5 7.5 RSTU2/R48S (-48) 3.5 1.0 RDDU 3.0 7.0 RSTU2 3.5 0.5 RGLU2 2.5 2.5 RDSU (-24V) 1.5 0.3 RBSU (2TE) 2.5 1.0 RDSU (-48V) 1.5 0.5 RBSS (2NT) 0.6 0.3 RCOU 2.5 2.0 RBSU/R40S (2NT) 2.5 3.8 RBSU/RBSS/R40S (4 NT) 3.1 4.1 RCOU + RCOS (8 CO) 4.5 4.0 PCOU1, 2 2.0 2.0 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 2 – System Power Factor Check Worksheet Examples Table 2-23 DK40i Telephone/Device 24 Volt Power Factor Worksheet Example (Base/Expansion KSU) Telephone Devices Quantity X 24VDC PF = 24VDC Total 16 16.0 1.0 = X 1.0 = 2000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 3000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.5 = 6000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 6005-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 6500-series Electronic Telephone X 1.0 = DDCB/HDCB (w. MDFB) X 1.2 = DDSS/HDSS Console X 0.8 = X 0.4 = X 0.5 = PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DS X 0.8 = Standard Telephone (-48VDC) X 1.0 = Standard Telephone (-24VDC) X 0.5 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) X 3.0 = HHEU X 0.1 = Stratagy DK X 1.0 Add-on Module RPCI-DI 8 Total -24VDC PF all Telephone Devices Note Table 2-24 4.0 DK40i Configuration X Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) 2000-series Digital Telephone (any series) = = 20.0 It is not necessary to consider the 5 volt PF for telephone devices. DK40i PCB and Power Factors Worksheet Example In the following example, the total DK40i PFs, 10.2 PF for the +5VDC PF category and 26.5 TPSU16 maximum +5VDC PF = 14; Maximum -24VDC PF = 39. Base PCBs K5RCU2 K5RCU K4RCU3 TSIU TCOU TBSU KSTU2 TDDU TCIU Expansion Unit PCBs Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Telephone Devices from Table 2-23 PCB Installed Yes No X +5VDC PF -24VDC PF 0.6 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR X X X X X X 2.5 1.0 X X PCB Name RBSU (2TE) RBSS (2NT) KCDU KCDU N/R Total DK40i PF = 2.5 0.6 1.5 1.5 3.8 0.3 1.2 1.2 N/R 20.0 10.21 26.51 1. Power factors are within limits. If power factors are exceeded, the system size must be reduced to stay within PF limits. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-17 DK40i Configuration Worksheet 2 – System Power Factor Check PCB and Power Factor Worksheets See examples on previous pages. Table 2-25 DK40i Telephone/Device Power Factor (Base/Expansion KSU) Quantity Installed Telephone Devices X -24VDC PF = 2000-series Digital Telephone (any series) X 1.0 = Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) X 1.0 = 2000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 3000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.5 = 6000-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 6005-series Electronic Telephone X 2.0 = 6500-series Electronic Telephone X 1.0 = DDCB/HDCB (w. MDFB) X 1.2 = DDSS/HDSS Console X 0.8 = Add-on Module X 0.4 = RPCI-DI X 0.5 = PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DS X 0.8 = Standard Telephone (-48VDC) X 1.0 = Standard Telephone (-24VDC) X 0.5 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) X 3.0 = HHEU X 0.1 = X 1.0 = Stratagy DK Total -24VDC PF of all Telephone Devices Table 2-26 -24VDC PF Total = Power Factor Worksheet Base PCBs PCB Installed Yes No +5 Volt PF -24 Volt PF K5RCU2 K5RCU K4RCU3 TSIU TCOU TBSU KSTU2 TDDU TCIU Expansion Unit PCBs PCB Name Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 -24VDC PF of telephones/devices from Table 2-25 Total DK40i PF = Note 2-18 If power factors exceed the maximum (+5VDC= 14, -24VDC = 39), the system size must be reduced to stay within PF limits. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Configuration DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility The Strata DK16 Base KSU cannot be upgraded to a DK16e, DK40 or DK40i and the DK16 Expansion Cabinet is not compatible with the DK16e, DK40 or DK40i. The Strata DK40i is not a modification of the DK40, but rather a completely new system. The DK40i uses the DK40 expansion cabinet. The DK16e can be upgraded to DK40 by changing a ROM chip, but not to a DK40i. The DK40 base cabinet cannot be upgraded to a DK40i. Most DK16 PCBs are not compatible with the DK40i, including the four-port Standard Station Interface Unit (KSTU1A), four-circuit DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit (K4RCU1A or K4RCU2A), and the Auto Attendant feature cartridge (KFCU1A). Four of the Strata DK40i PCBs are backward compatible with the DK16, DK16e and DK40. They are: KSTU2A, K4RCU3A, K5RCU and K5RCU2. The DK40i Expansion Cabinet is also backward compatible with the DK16. DK40i Configuration The original DK16 two-loop start CO line and four-digital station interface unit (KCDU1A) is forward compatible with the DK16e or DK40i. Table 2-27 shows the component compatibility between the Strata DK16 components with the DK16, DK16e, DK40 or DK40i systems. Table 2-27 Strata DK16 Components Strata DK16 Components Part Description DKSUB16A KSTU1A K4RCU1A & K4RCU2A KFCU1A DKSUE16A Compatible DK16 DK16 Base Cabinet X 4-Standard Telephone Interface Unit X 4-DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver X Auto Attendant Feature Cartridge X DK16 Expansion Cabinet X KCDU1A 2-Loop CO AND 4-DKT Interface Unit X KPSU16A Replacement Power Supply for DK16 X DK16e DK40 DK40i X X X Table 2-28 shows the component compatibility between the Strata DK16e, DK40 and DK40i components with the DK16, DK16e, DK40 or DK40i systems. Strata DK I&M 5/99 2-19 DK40i Configuration DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility Table 2-28 Strata DK16e/DK40i Components Strata DK16e/DK40/DK40i Components Part Description Compatible DK16 DK16e DK40 DK40i TCOU1A 4-Loop CO Line Interface Unit X X X TDDU1A 4-DID CO Line Interface Unit X X X TCIU2A Caller ID Interface Unit X X X TSIU1A 2-I/O Serial Interface Unit X X X KSTU2A 4-Standard Telephone Interface Unit X X X X K4RCU3A, K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A1 4- or 5-DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver (only 4 DTMF receivers will operate on DK16 and DK16e) X X X X KKYS1A Auto Attendant Feature Key X X X DKSUE16A DK16 Expansion Cabinet X DKSUET16A DK16e Expansion Cabinet X X X X DKSUE40A DK40i Expansion Cabinet X X X X KCDU1A 2-Loop CO and 4-DKT Interface Unit X X X X TPSU16A Replacement Power Supply for DK40i X X X TBSU1A 2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit X RBSU1A 2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit X RBSS1A 2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit X 1. For 9~12 DID and/or Tie lines, use K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A, not the K4RCU3A. 2-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation 3 This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK40i system. It includes information on site requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s), the ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and PCB cabling. 1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. 2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. DK40i Installation Inspection 3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. ➤ When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Site Requirements This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the DK40i. Also included are grounding requirements. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-1 DK40i Installation Site Requirements Input Power The system requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 amps. The AC outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third-wire ground. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 3-4.) This eliminates interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent accidental power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use an ON/ OFF wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit. For the Strata DK40i, a reserve power source (two customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup. Clearance and Location The minimum clearance requirements for the Strata DK40i Base and Expansion KSUs are shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. Refer to Page 3-5 for DK40i KSU mounting instructions. Top View Top View Expansion Wall Base 3.5" Wall 3 Feet 3 Feet 3.5" Front View Front View 20" 2" 2" 12.25" 2" 2" 2" 2" DK40i Base KSU Expansion Unit 18" DK40i Base KSU 18" 2" 4235 4234 Figure 3-1 2" DK40i Base KSU Clearance Requirements Figure 3-2 DK40i Base KSU and Expansion KSU Clearance Requirements Consider the following conditions when selecting a location for the KSU(s): The location must be: 3-2 ♦ Dry and clean ♦ Well ventilated ♦ Well illuminated ♦ Easily accessible Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Site Requirements The location must not be: ♦ Subject to extreme heat or cold ♦ Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants ♦ Subject to excessive vibration ♦ Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment If reserve power is to be installed for the Strata DK40i, the batteries will require a well-ventilated location close (within nine feet) to the DKSUB40 (the optional Toshiba-supplied battery cable is nine feet in length). Table 3-1 provides a summary of the electrical and environmental characteristics Table 3-1 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics DK40i Primary Power Input AC (Power Supply Specification) AC frequency Power AC input current 85~135VAC 50/60 Hz DK40i - 75 watts maximum 1.8A maximum Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature 32~104° F (0 ~40° C) 20~80% relative humidity without condensation -4~158° F (-20~70° C) Power Supply DC voltage output specification -24VDC (-25.94~-28.66VDC) +5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion KSU only DK40i Installation Environmental Specifications Battery Charger Characteristics Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC KSTU2, PSTU or PESU (Circuits 1 and 2) Ring Voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper: Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) Ringing capability 2 REN maximum per circuit, high or low position KSTU2, PSTU, or PESU modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum RSTU, RSTU2 or RDSU Ring Voltage 80V RMS sine wave Ringing capability 1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting RSTU2 Message Waiting Voltage -90VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.) RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum Traffic Rating Characteristics 9 CCS per station system-wide Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-3 DK40i Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power and Grounding Requirements The DK40i requires a solid earth ground for proper operation. The AC power cord contains a conductor for the “third-wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet. The thirdwire ground should be the only ground necessary for the DK40i; this ground must originate at the buildings main power distribution panel and have a solid connection to earth ground. (See Figure 3-3.) CAUTION! Lack of proper ground may cause improper operation and, in extreme cases, system failure. Third Wire Ground To AC Power Cord Ground 1 Third Wire AC Ground DK40i BaseKSU Power Supply 4' 5" A Electrical Building Ground (Main Power Distribution Box) AC Voltage 115VAC ± 10VAC FG AC Current 1.8 amps max. 4236 Alternate Ground Grounding Rod AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test Figure 3-3 DK40i Grounding Diagram Test the “third-wire ground” for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the following earth ground test procedure. WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. ➤ To perform the earth ground test procedure 1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC. 2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC. 3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained. 4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal. CAUTION! If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION! 5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 100~125VAC on the other terminal is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet. 3-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations 6. Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than 1 ohm. CAUTION! If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded. If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. Alternate or Additional Ground If the “third-wire” AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or other disturbance causes system malfunction, or if local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct ground may be warranted. Connect a separate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG screw terminal on the DK40i power supply (see Figure 3-3). The Base KSU and the optional Expansion KSU are both designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. Toshiba recommends using method 1 or 2 (see Figure 3-4). DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Prior to Installation 1. Loosen the screws on the front cover and the side cover of the Base KSU, remove the covers (see Figure 3-5). Figure 3-6 on Page 3-11 details the interior. 2. Place the BATT jumper plug to the ON position. 3. Install a CO line board, either the TDDU or TCOU onto the TMAU board (see Figure 3-7). The TCOU provides four loop start CO lines and can accommodate the Caller ID interface unit. The TDDU provides four DID lines. 4. Set CO line card switches. TCOU: Set the TCOU PAD switches (SW400-SW475) to the appropriate position (see Figure 3-21 on Page 3-32). The factory setting is NORMAL. If CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the central office the PAD position may be required. TDDU: Set the TDDU PAD switches to the appropriate position. Also, set the high/low voltage jumper plugs as required for proper dial pulse operation. See Figure 3-22 on Page 335. 5. If you are not installing a TCIU2, skip to Step 6. To install the TCIU2 (see Figure 3-20 on Page 3-29), align the prongs P20, P21, and P22 over P120, P121, and P122 of the TCOU and gently press down. Slip the plastic stand-off hook through the hole. CAUTION! Strata DK I&M 5/99 To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install TCIU1 in the DK40i system. 3-5 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations 6. The TCOU or TDDU cards have a green and yellow wire with a two-prong spade on the end. Slip the spade under the second screw from the right on the power supply (see Figure 3-7). 7. If applicable, install KSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit. The KSTS2 comes preinstalled onto the KSTU2. Then install both boards into the DK40i Base KSU (see Figures 3-17~3-19, beginning on Page 3-26). 8. If applicable, install the K5RCU or K5RCU2 or K4RCU3 (which provides Automatic Busy Redial and DTMF tone detection) into the Base KSU (see “K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Installation” on Page 3-23). 9. If applicable, install the KKYS (which provides built-in Auto Attendant) onto the K5RCU or K5RCU2 or K4RCU3. 10. If applicable, install the TSIU Serial Interface PCB into the KSU (Figure 3-23 on Page 3-37). If the TSIU is used for SMDR or TTY, then the PIOU/PIOUS SMDR/TTY output is not active. Testing the System’s Power Supply If the “AC” or “DC” LEDs fail to light in Steps 1 or 3, see TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure–Case 1. 1. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet (see Figure 3-8). The “AC” LED on the power supply lights green. 2. Turn ON the DC power switch for the TPSU16 power supply (see Figure 3-6). The “DC” LED on the power supply lights green. 3. Using a voltmeter or other device which checks voltage, measure the voltages referenced to frame ground (FG) at the P16 connector pins (test points) located on the motherboard. The voltages should fall within the ranges below. ♦ Yellow-green, black, and green wires: 0V ♦ Two yellow wires: -27V ♦ Range: -25.94V~-28.66V If the voltages do not fall within the ranges, unplug the DC power pins from the P16 connector and measure again at the same location; if the ranges remain unacceptable. See TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure–Case 2. 3-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure Case 1 If the AC and DC LEDs on the TPSU16 power supply in the Strata DK40i Base KSU do not light, even though the AC power plug is inserted into the wall outlet and the TPSU16 DC power switch is turned on, the AC overvoltage circuit breaker may have opened. ➤ To reset the AC overvoltage circuit breaker 1. Remove the AC power plug from the wall outlet, turn the DC power switch OFF, and wait six minutes. 2. After six minutes, insert the AC plug back into the wall outlet and turn the DC power switch ON. The AC and DC LEDs should turn on and the system should operate. If the system fails to operate, either the wall outlet is not providing AC power or the system’s power supply is defective. 3. If the AC power checks good, replace the power supply (see “Power Supply Removal and Replacement” on Page 3-19). If the TPSU16 power supply AC and DC LEDs light, but the system does not operate, the TPSU16 DC output overcurrent circuit breaker may have opened because of a DC short circuit. ➤ To reset the DC output overcurrent circuit breaker 1. Turn the DC power switch OFF for 15 seconds and then turn it back on. The system will go back to normal operation if the overcurrent breaker resets. DK40i Installation Case 2 2. If the system continues to fail, press in the two -24VDC circuit breakers located on the bottom left corner of the TPSU16 power supply. If, then, the system does not return to normal operation, the TPSU16 power supply may be defective or an optional PCB may be shorting out the TPSU16. 3. Remove all optional PCBs and the Expansion KSU to locate the short, then repeat Steps 1 and 2 and perform the power supply test. 4. If the power supply fails the test, replace the power supply (see “Power Supply Removal and Replacement” on Page 3-19 for more information.). If the power supply passes the test, the DK40i Base KSU is probably defective. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-7 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Mounting the Base KSU WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply switch is turned OFF. ➤ To mount the Base KSU 1. Place the Base KSU on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the four screw holes (there is one on each corner). See Figure 3-6. Make sure the location of the Base KSU meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 3-1 on Page 3-2. Note The Base KSU AC power cord is 4 feet 5 inches long. 2. Drill holes on these marks. If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, align screws with studs behind the wall. If using a hard board between the KSU and the wall, install screws first to the hard board, and then secure the hard board to the wall, making certain that screws are aligned with studs. 3. Secure screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting surface. 4. Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the screws completely into the mounting surface. 5. Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completely screwing the bottom two screws into the wall. 6. Ground system according to “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 3-4. 7. Connect applicable wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cable– see Figure 3-25 on Page 3-41) to the Base KSU and then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie wrap that comes with the Base KSU (see Figure 3-8 on Page 3-13). Remove amphenol connector clamp from plastic bag that comes with the Base KSU. Fasten the clamp to hold the amphenol connector. 8. Connect Reserve batteries and plug battery cable into BATT connector of the KPSU16 power supply (see “Reserve Power Option” on Page 3-17). 9. If the Expansion KSU is going to be installed, refer to “Mounting the Expansion KSU” on Page 3-9. If not, proceed to Step 1. 10. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the power supply switch. 11. Reinstall the front and side covers onto the Base KSU. 3-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Mounting the Expansion KSU Important! Table 3-2 For purposes of identification, the labels appear on the boxes and Expansion KSUs (see Table 3-2). Expansion Unit Labels Expansion Unit Box Labels Expansion KSU Model No. (expansion case bottom) 1. DK40i DK40 DK16e DK16 DKSUBI40A DKSUB40A DKSUBT16A DKSUB16A Model DKSUE40A1 Model DKSUE40A Model DKSUET16A Strata DK40 Strata DK40 Strata DK16e Model DKSUE16 Strata DK16 Strata DK40 may appear on a label. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply switch is turned OFF. 2. Set the Expansion KSU on the Base KSU’s hinge mounts, making sure that the Expansion KSU sets properly in place. 3. Remove the safety lock from plastic bag that comes with the Expansion KSU. Install safety lock to the Base KSU as shown. DK40i Installation ➤ To mount the Expansion KSU (see Figures 3-4, 3-6, 3-8~3-11) 1. Make sure the side cover is removed from the Base KSU. Turn Base KSU DC power switch OFF. 4. Pull out on the safety lock until it can no longer be moved, securing the Expansion KSU to the Base KSU. Do not detach the lock from the Base KSU. 5. Connect the Expansion KSU ribbon cable to the connector on the Base KSU. Close ribbon cable connector lock on Base KSU. 6. Connect Expansion KSU green/yellow ground wire plug (FG2) to TB1 of the Base KSU. (Make sure the plug locks on FG2.) 7. Making sure that the Expansion KSU is flush against the mounting surface, mark the location of the Expansion KSU mounting screw hole. 8. Swing the Expansion KSU away from the mounting surface, and drill a hole at the mark made in Step 7. 9. Install the PCBs per “Worksheet 1 – System PCB Assignment Guide” on Page 2-11 and slide the slot lock to the lock position. 10. Swing the Expansion KSU back to the mounting surface and secure it to the surface with a screw. 11. Connect the wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector–per Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring) to the PCBs. 12. Fasten the wiring with Tie wraps (supplied) to the bottom of the expansion and Base KSUs. 13. Knock out the tab on the bottom of the side cover. 14. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn ON the power supply switch. 15. Install the side cover to the Expansion KSU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-9 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Method 1 Plaster Board Stud Hard Board (1/2 Inch Plywood) Stud Plaster Board Method 2 Expansion KSU Expansion KSU Base KSU Base KSU 1614 Figure 3-4 KSU Wall Mounting Cover Screws (6) AC DC POWER Base Cover Side Cover = Six cover screws to be removed before mounting KSU Model: DKSUBI40A Strata DK40i Label on edge of Base KSU 4237 Figure 3-5 3-10 Base KSU Exterior Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation 1 PN2 2 KSU Mounting Considerations TPSU16A AC DC DC POWER - MADE IN 1 MODEL INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A V. 1A 1996-05 00001 TOSHIBA CORPORATION -24 Volt Circuit Breakers WARNING BATT 2 + POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY Reserve Power Battery Jack Hazardous voltage inside! If servicing required remove A. C. plug. Connect Expansion Unit TB1 TO FG2 Important Notice Expansion KSU Cable Receptacle OFF ON TMAU2A Battery Jumper Base Telephone Tip/Ring and Relay Contact DK40i Installation IMPORTANT: DKSUE16A is incompatible with this unit DKSUET16A or DKSUE40A is required for expansion FG2 Music-on-Hold Input 4238 Music-on-Hold Sensitivity Adjustment Figure 3-6 Strata DK I&M DK40i Base KSU Interior 5/99 3-11 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations FG Screw - + Optional with TCOU (provides Caller ID) V1 TC1U2A TCOU1A Install a TCOU, TBSU or TDDU here TDDU1A V1 3796 TBSU1A Figure 3-7 3-12 FS LOS TS BSY FS LOS TS BSY CO Line Board Installation into DK40i Base KSU Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations AC PO WE R DC DK40i Installation AC Power Cord Do not route power cord with other cords. Modular Connector Self-Adhesive Rubber Pad Supplied in plastic bag with Base KSU. Amphenol Clamp Tie Wrap1 Supplied in plastic bag with Base KSU. RCA Plug Tie Wrap Holder Amphenol Connector Modular Cord (X5) Base KSU Amphenol Cord (X1) PIN Jack Cord (X2) 2161 Figure 3-8 Strata DK I&M Base KSU Cables and Connectors 5/99 3-13 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Base KSU Hinge Mount TB1 (FG2) Expansion KSU Green/Yellow FG2 Wire and Plug (From Expansion KSU – Plugs into TB1 of Base KSU) P3 Ribbon Connector Lock LL PU K C LO SH PU K C LO UN Safety Lock (Supplied with Expansion KSU) Ribbon Cable (from Expansion KSU – Plugs into Expansion Connector (P3) of Base KSU) 2162 Figure 3-9 3-14 Base to Expansion KSU Connection Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Expansion Safety Lock FG Screw Base KSU 1 PN2 2 Expansion KSU TPSU16A AC DC DC POWER - MADE IN 1 MODEL INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A V. 1A 1996-05 00001 TOSHIBA CORPORATION BATT 2 + POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY PULL LOCK WARNING PUSH UNLOCK Hazardous voltage inside! If servicing required remove A. C. plug. FG2 FG2 Wire DK40i Installation Ribbon Cable to Expansion KSU Expansion KSU Latch Mounting Hole and Screw TMAU2A 4241 AC Cord (4'4") Tie Wrap Holder Model DKSUE40A Label on edge of Expansion KSU Figure 3-10 Expansion KSU Mounting and Connections Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-15 DK40i Installation KSU Mounting Considerations Expansion KSU Slot Lock Slot label S06 S07 PCB Lock S04 Side Cover S05 4242 Figure 3-11 Expansion KSU Slot Lock The DK16e Expansion Cabinet can be used on the DK40i Base Unit. The DK16e and DK40i Expansion Cabinet slot labels are different from the Program 03 slot numbers. Table 3-3 provides the slot labels and Program 03 slot numbers. Table 3-3 3-16 DK16e and DK40i Expansion Cabinet Slot Names DK40i Slot Label DK40i Prg 03 Slot Number S04 S15 S05 S16 S06 S17 S07 S18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Reserve Power Option Reserve Power Option A reserve power source (two customer supplied 12-volt batteries) can be connected to the DK40i power supply to ensure uninterrupted system operation in the event of a power failure. A preassembled interface cable for installation of the Reserve Power option is available from Toshiba (PBTC-3M), see Figure 3-12. TPSU40 Two-prong Male Connector (pre-assembled) BATT PBTC-3M Battery Cable with Ring Terminals and PPSU Connector (length - 9 feet) White + – Black In-line Fuse Holder 10 A (Fuse Provided) Black Power Supply White 16AWG – + 12 VDC Battery Ring Terminals 3/8 In. 2164 + – 12 VDC Battery Black Jumper with Ring Terminals (provided) DK40i Installation Actual Size Figure 3-12 System Power Supply Wiring Important! Local ordinances may dictate battery type and installation details. The batteries require a well-ventilated location within nine feet of the system (the interface cable is nine feet long). WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these instructions: ➤ Use only 12-volt, gelcell batteries. ➤ Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. The cells may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. ➤ Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed. ➤ Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conduction materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns. ➤ Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with this product only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this manual. ➤ Observe proper polarity orientation between the batteries and battery charger. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-17 DK40i Installation Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option Reserve Power Installation 1. Connect the PBTC-3M black jumper wire from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. See Figure 3-12. 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-ampere fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC3M battery cable. 3. Connect the white lead of the PBTC-3M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Important! The KSU must be connected to the live operating (hot) AC power source, and the power supply ON/OFF switch set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 4. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the power supply BATT +/receptacle. 5. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plug with the power supply power ON/OFF switch in the ON position. The system should continue to operate without any interruption. 6. Plug the AC power cable into PN2. 7. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and turn ON the power supply switch. 8. See “Prior to Installation” to confirm that the power supply is working properly. 9. Plug reserve battery cable into BATT connector of power supply. Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option To enable this option, a dedicated standard telephone must be connected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface (PF1) of a DK40i Base KSU equipped with a TCOU. Note During normal operation, this telephone cannot be used and does not count as a station (does not reduce the number of system’s available stations). If there is a power failure, the telephone automatically is connected to CO Line 1. When power is restored, the system resumes normal station and CO line assignments, and the dedicated telephone becomes inoperative again. Important! This is not available on a DK40i system with a TDDU installed. Installing Power Failure Emergency Transfer ➤ Connect a standard telephone to the PF1 connector in the Base KSU (see Figure 3-13). Testing Power Failure Emergency Transfer 1. Turn the system power switch OFF. 2. Lift the emergency standard telephone handset, and verify that there is CO dial tone. 3-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Power Supply Removal and Replacement MDF Power Available Connection TCOU 2 T CO Line 3 TCOU CO Line 1 R 4 5 MOD Jack CO1 (Base KSU) Power Fail Connection MDF R T PFT Standard Telephone MOD Jack PF1 (Base KSU) 2155 Power Supply Removal and Replacement The power supply (TPSU16A) comes factory-installed in the Base KSU; if necessary, it can be removed and replaced. DK40i Installation Figure 3-13 Base KSU Power Failure Transfer (PFT) Circuit Diagram Power Supply Removal 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet. Confirm that the green AC LED is not lit (see Figure 3-14). 3 4 2 1 PN2 2 FG4 2 + POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY TPSU16A MADE IN DC DC POWER - 1 AC 1 MODEL INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A V. 1A 1996-05 00001 TOSHIBA CORPORATION BATT FG WARNING -24V Hazardous voltage inside! -24V If servicing required remove A. C. plug. FG1 FG2 1643 8 7 6 5 Figure 3-14 Power Supply (TPSU16A) 2. Unplug reserve battery cable from BATT connector of power supply. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-19 DK40i Installation Power Supply Removal and Replacement 3. Unplug the FG2 plug from the Expansion KSU ground wire. 4. Unplug the DC cable from the DC OUT connector (P16). 5. Remove the FG screw from left side of power supply to free FG wire/terminal and building ground wire. 6. Unplug the AC power cord from PN2. 7. Remove the seven screws that attach the power supply to the Base KSU. Remove the power supply. Power Supply Replacement 1. Set the power supply in its proper place in the Base KSU (see Figure 3-14). 2. Secure the power supply to the Base KSU with the seven screws. 3. Connect the FG1 wire from the TCOU or TDDU to the FG1 screw on the power supply. 4. Plug the DC cable into the DC OUT connector. The green/yellow wire is on right-hand side. 5. Fasten FG green wire ring terminal and building ground wire to the left side of the power supply with the FG screw. 6. Plug the Expansion KSU green/yellow ground wire into FG2. 3-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation This section details Strata DK40i system PCBs installation into the Base and Expansion KSUs. Also described are optional configuration information and programming considerations for each PCB. Base KSU PCBs The Strata DK40i processor is built into the motherboard (TMAU2) and comes with eight digital telephone circuits (ports). The line circuits are on the TCOU or TDDU PCBs, which attach to the P10, P11 and P12 connectors on the TMAU. The PCBs that can be installed into a DK40i KSU are shown in Table 3-4. Table 3-4 DK40i Base KSU PCBs Provides Four loop start CO line circuits Four DID line circuits 2 BRI (S/T) circuits TCIU2 Four caller ID circuits KSTU2 Four standard telephone circuits TSIU K5RCU2, K5RCU or K4RCU3 KKYS Up to two serial interfaces (TTY and SMDR) Recognizes DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone and is required for DISA, Tie and DID lines and the DK40i built-in Auto Attendant. Also used to detect busy tone for the ABR feature. Automated Attendant Installs On TMAU2 motherboard TCOU TMAU2 motherboard Comments Only one TCOU, TBSU or TDDU can be installed on the motherboard. To prevent system malfunction, do not install a TCIU1 in the DK40i system. Only one TSIU can be installed per DK40i system. When installed, the TSIU does not use a slot. DK40i Installation PCB TCOU TDDU TBSU K5RCU2, K5RCU or K4RCU3 Toshiba recommends installing the Base KSU option PCBs, K5RCU2, K5RCU or K4RCU3 and/ or KSTU2, before mounting the Base KSU on the wall. Install the Expansion KSU per Page 3-9, then install the Expansion KSU option PCBs. The Base KSU slots 00~14 are automatically assigned the following codes in Program 03 when the system is turned on and the Base KSU PCBs are installed. Slot 00: Code 91 without K4RCU3; Code 92 with K4RCU3; Code 98 with K5RCU2 or K5RCU Slot 11: Code 62 eight digital telephones with OCA/DIU, 64 for OCA/DIU/DSS. Slot 12: Code 11 for TCOU, 16 for TDDU or 77 for TBSU (four loop, four DID lines or two BRI circuits). Note If installing TBSU, set each BRI circuit for station side or line side before installing more PCBs. Each BRI station circuit uses two station ports and each BRI line circuit uses two CO lines. Slot 13: Code 31, four KSTU2 ports Slot 14: Code 81, four TCIU2 circuits Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-21 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Expansion KSU PCBs A DK40i Expansion KSU from the factory does not come with any PCBs installed. (See Table 2-3 on Page 2-3 for a list of PCBs supported by the DK40i Expansion KSU and Chapter 7 – DK40i/ DK424 Universal Slot PCBs for detailed descriptions/installation instructions.) Toshiba recommends that PCBs which support electronic, digital or wireless telephones be installed into slots 15 and 16 because slots 17 and 18 cannot support speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) or Data Interface Units (DIUs) or more than 8 wireless handsets. See “Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility” beginning on Page 2-3 for configuration information for DK40i PCBs. PCB Hardware/Software Options PCBs can be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment, such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware and software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. PCB Hardware Options Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter and Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. PCB Software Options After installation of the PCBs in the KSU, configure the PCBs for software options through programming. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in this chapter. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual for more detailed programming instructions. PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations WARNING! To avoid electrical shock, make sure that the power supply is OFF whenever removing or installing PCBs. Before installing any PCBs, make sure the power supply has been tested, and the ground has been checked. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on Page 3-4.) PCB Wiring See “MDF Wiring Diagrams” on Page 3-41 in this chapter for DK40i Base KSU wiring and Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for Expansion KSU wiring. See Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems for RWIU wiring. Digital Telephone Circuits The eight digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the DK40i motherboard in the Base KSU. These circuits are identical to the digital circuits found on the PDKU. The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate. For wiring, see “MDF Wiring Diagrams” on Page 3-41. 3-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation K4RCU3, K5RCU and K5RCU2 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit System: DK40i Base KSU Circuits per PCB: K4RCU3: four DTMF receivers and four ABR busy tone detectors K5RCU, K5RCU2: five DTMF receivers and five ABR busy tone detectors. Interfaces with: automatic busy redial (ABR) interprets DTMF tones DISA, DID, Tie lines built-in auto attendant Older Version(s): K4RCU (not compatible with DK40i) K4RCU3 or K5RCU (compatible with DK16 and DK40i The K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit) and to enable ABR to operate. The K5RCU2 is the same as the K5RCU, except that it has jumper settings for A law and Mu law, which makes it applicable to more countries. The K4RCU3, K5RCU, or K5RCU2 does not have to be configured for operation. If built-in auto attendant is required, see auto attendant KKYS installation. K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Installation DK40i Installation Configuration 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF. 2. Make sure SW1 is set for Mu law if installing K5RCU2. The jumper must be set for Mu law in the U.S. and Canada. 3. Making sure that the component side of the K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 is face down (toward the power supply), plug the K4RCU3, K5RCU P602A and P602B female connectors into the P2A and P2B (K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2) connectors on the motherboard. See Figure 3-15. K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Programming ➤ Program 03: Enter code 92 for Slot 00 if K4RCU3 is installed or Code 98 with K5RCU or K5RCU2. Program 12: Sets K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 release time. Program 15: Sets K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 operation after CO line flash. Assigns DTMF/ Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-23 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 KKYS Connector 2165 Figure 3-15 Auto Busy Redial/DTMF Receiver Board (K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2) Installation KKYS Auto Attendant System: DK40i Base KSU Circuits per PCB: one Interfaces with: optional built-in auto attendant Older Version(s): none The KKYS installs onto the K5RCU2 card in the Base KSU. (See Figure 3-16.) KKYS Installation ➤ Install the KKYS onto the K5RCU2 to add the optional built-in auto attendant feature. KKYS MU K5RCU2A SW1 A 3799 Figure 3-16 K5RCU2 Printed Circuit Board 3-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation KSTU2 Four-circuit Standard Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Base KSU Circuits per PCB: four standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones (no message waiting) other single-line devices alternate BGM source (circuit 4) fax machine voice mail devices Older Version(s): KSTU1 (not compatible with DK40i–KSTU2 is compatible with DK16 and DK40i) KSTU2 controls and indicators are illustrated in Figures 3-17 and 3-18 and described in Table 3-5 on Page 3-27. Note KSTU2 Configuration The KSTU2 hardware has to be configured only for the square wave ring generator voltage level, nothing else. DK40i Installation For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by standard telephones (or any other device connected to a KSTU2 port), a K4RCU3 must be installed in the Base KSU. KSTU2 Installation 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF. 2. Before installing the KSTU2 in the Base KSU, set the SW1 ring generator to 130V P-P or 190V P-P. Note Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require 190; however, some devices may experience ring-trip at 190, and should be set at 130. 3. Plug the KSTU2 cable into the P4 connector on the motherboard in the Base KSU. The red wire on the cable should match up with pin 1 on the lower side of the connector. 4. Plug the KSTU2 P508 female connector into the P8 male connector on the motherboard. 5. Secure the KSTU2 to the standoffs with the two provided screws. KSTU2 Wiring Refer to DK40i Base KSU KSTU2 wiring in Figure 3-25 on Page 3-41. The KSTU2 must be connected to a OL13A (or equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations (300 ohms loop resistance max., including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance). KSTU2 Programming Program 03: Specify code 31 for KSTU2 slot. Program 31: Configures all KSTU2 ports connected to voice mail (see Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for voice mail installation). Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-25 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Program 10-2: Not required for Background Music (BGM) connection. Program 19: BGM connection to KSTU2 Port 11. CAUTION! Port numbers in the Expansion KSU shift by four ports if KSTU2 or TDDU is installed (or removed after it is installed). This determines whether or not the DDCB can be connected on the KCDU in slot 15. SW1 KSTU2A 1629 Figure 3-17 Standard Telephone Interface Board (KSTU2) UP 1630 KSTS2A (reverse) Figure 3-18 Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (KSTS2) 3-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Table 3-5 KSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Ring voltage jumper plug SW1 Description Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits: H = 190V P-P 3-terminal jumper L = 130V P-P Connects to P4 connector on the motherboard Cable P10 (connects to KSTS2 P20) 7-pin connector P11 (connects to KSTS2 P21) 9-pin connector P12 (connects to KSTS2 P22) 3-pin connector P13 (connects to KSTS2 P23) 5-pin connector Interface connector for optional KSTS2. The KSTS2 arrives installed onto the KSTU2 from the factory. KSTU2A DK40i Installation P4 KSTU Connector cable P504 24/140-3T UP KSTS2A KSTU2A 1633 Figure 3-19 KSTU2/KSTS2 Installation TBSU See “RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units” on Page 14-18 in Chapter 14 – ISDN Interfaces for TSBU installation documentation. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-27 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TCIU Caller ID System: DK40i Base KSU (mounts on TCOU) Circuits per PCB: four caller ID circuits Interfaces with: caller ID loop start CO lines Older Version(s): none To receive Caller ID, a TCIU2 circuit must be available to each line. (See Figure 3-20.) CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, do not install TCIU1 in the DK40i system. Each TCIU2 Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired across its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring. This is done automatically by the PCB connectors when the TCIU2 is mounted on the TCOU. However, if installing an RCOU/RCIU2 in the Expansion KSU, the connection is made on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). See the RCIU wiring diagram in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. TCIU2 Installation 1. Turn power OFF. 2. Install the TCIU2 onto the TCOU PCB by aligning the three sets of connectors marked TCOU or TCIU2, depending on the card. 3. Press down evenly and firmly on the TCIU2 card. TCIU2 Programming Program 03: Automatically assigns TCIU2 (Caller ID circuit) to slot 14 (code 81) when the TCIU2 is installed and power is turned on. Note TCIU2 Caller ID circuits are numbered automatically in numerical order starting from 01~04 when the TCIU2 is installed. Slots with code 81 will increment the Caller ID circuit numbers by four circuits on the DK40i. Program *50: Assigns TCOU lines that will receive Caller ID to the associated TCIU2 Caller ID circuit number. TCIU2 circuits 1~4 must be assigned to TCOU circuits 1~4, respectively. RCIU circuits 5~8 should be assigned RCOU or RGLU circuits 5~8. After assigning CO lines to Caller ID circuits, turn system power OFF for approximately five seconds and then back on or run Program 91-2 to activate Program *50 assignments. Program *51: Sets the Caller ID (CLID)/Automatic Dialed Number Identification (ANI) memory allocation for the appropriate stations. This memory is used to save CLID/ANI telephone numbers for calls that are received but not answered (abandoned calls). CLID/ANI numbers are not saved in station memory if they are answered. Stations can be allocated with memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10-number increments. The total memory allocated to all stations in a system is 200 numbers. 3-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Note When a CO line rings multiple stations, a station must be the owner of the Caller ID or ANI CO line to be able to save abandoned call (Caller ID and/or ANI) telephone numbers. (See Program *52.) Program *52: Assigns stations as owners of Caller ID CO lines. These stations will store the Caller ID telephone numbers received on abandoned (not answered) calls for the lines which they own. Typically all common CO lines are assigned to one designated telephone or attendant console and private lines are assigned to individual private line telephones. Note A station must also be allocated with Caller ID/ANI storage memory in Program *51 to store abandoned call telephone numbers. Program 39, Code 462: Assigns the Caller ID/ANI Lost Call Auto Dial button to LCD telephones that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A user can scroll through the stored abandoned call phone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button. Program 60-1, Key 01: Determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port, e.g., system Account Codes or CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers. ➤ Turn LED 01 ON if CLID and/or ANI information should be sent out the SMDR port. Note The system will initialize with LED 01 OFF, e.g., Account Codes information will be sent out the SMDR port. DK40i Installation ➤ Turn LED 01 OFF if Account Codes information should be sent out the SMDR port. P20 1335 P22 Figure 3-20 Table 3-6 P21 DK40i Caller ID Interface Unit (TCIU2) TCIU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description P20 5-pin plug To P120 of TCOU P21 9-pin plug To P121 of TCOU P22 9-pin plug To P122 of TCOU Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-29 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TCOU Four-circuit Loop Start CO Line Board System: DK40i Base KSU (mounts on KSU TMAU) Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits Interfaces with: loop start lines Older Version(s): none The optional TCOU PCB installs onto the TMAU motherboard. (See Figure 3-21 and Table 3-7 for information on controls, indicators and connectors.) Note Only one TCOU or TDDU can be installed on the motherboard. TCOU Hardware Options The TCOU PCB accepts the optional Caller ID (TCIU2 not TCIU1) board. When the TCIU2 is installed on the TCOU, the tip/ring of the TCOU circuits 1~4 are automatically connected to the tip/ring of TCIU2 circuits 1~4 respectively. TCOU Installation or Replacement 1. Make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power switch is OFF. 2. Mate the TCOU male connectors P110, P111, P112 to P10, P11 and P12 respectively on the TMAU. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper connection. See Figure 3-7 for installation information and Figure 3-27 on Page 3-43 for wiring. 3. Secure the three plastic stand-off tabs and install screws in upper right and lower left corners. 4. Set decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the appropriate position. In most cases set to the normal position (NOR). Switches are factory set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. If CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the central office, set the PAD positions to 3 to provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO. 5. Slip the spade connected to the green/yellow wire under the second screw from the right on the TPSU power supply (see Figure 3-21). Tighten the screw until the spade is snugly secured. TCOU Removal If you need to remove/replace the TCOU, make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power switch is turned OFF. ➤ To remove the TCOU 1. Loosen the screw on the TPSU power supply and free the spade. 2. Loosen and remove screws securing the TCOU to the TMAU (see Figure 3-21). 3. Pull back the three plastic stand-off tabs and pull up on the TCOU until P110, P111 and P112 are unplugged. 3-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TCOU Programming Program 03: Code 11 is specified automatically when TCOU is installed. Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is automatically enabled for ground start CO lines. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Programs 45~48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line. Programs 50~56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments. Programs 81~89 ♦ Assigns lines to ring selected stations and DH groups. ♦ Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line. DK40i Installation Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant. Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns which [DN] will flash when the CO line rings a telephone. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-31 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation P122 CO4 V1 CO3 TCOU1A CO2 P121 CO1 P120 PF1 1447 Figure 3-21 DK40i Loop Start CO Line Board (TCOU) Table 3-7 TCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector 3-32 Type of Component Description CO line connectors 1~4 Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits. PF1 Modular connector Power Failure Telephone Interface PAD switch SW202, SW302, SW402 (circuits 1~4) 2-position slide switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for CO line circuit P120 6-pin connector To P20 of TCIU2 P121 10-pin connector To P21 of TCIU2 P122 10-pin connector To P22 of TCIU2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TDDU Four-circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Base KSU (mounts on KSU TMAU) Circuits per PCB: four DID line circuits Interfaces with: DID lines Older Version(s): none The optional TDDU PCB installs onto the TMAU motherboard. (See Figure 3-22 and Table 3-8 for information on controls, indicators and connectors and Figure 3-27 for wiring.) Note Only one TCOU or TDDU can be installed on the motherboard. TDDU Installation 1. Make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power switch is OFF. 3. Secure the three plastic stand-off tabs and install screws in the upper right and lower left corners. 4. Set decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the appropriate position. Switches are factory set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. If CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the central office, set to the PAD positions to 3 to provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO. DK40i Installation 2. Mate the TDDU male connectors P110, P111, P112 to the TMAU female connectors. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper connection. (See Figure 3-7 on Page 3-12 for installation and Figure 3-27 on Page 3-43 for wiring.) 5. Sensitivity jumpers SW102~SW402 are used mostly for dial pulse operation to adjust for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the CO, the sensitivity should be set to low (L). As the loop length increases, set it to high (H). 6. Insert the TDDU into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. TDDU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 16 for slots that will support TDDUs. Make sure DTMF operation is enabled. Note Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 run instead. Program *09: Assigns DID line extensions to route to station [PDNs]. Program 10-1: Enables or disables Two-line Conference. Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, and additional attributes to each line. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program *17: Assigns intercept port for DID calls to wrong or vacant numbers. Program 17: Tie and DID line options. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-33 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ♦ Assigns Immediate or Wink start to DID lines and auto camp-on and no-dial tone return for DID lines. ♦ Assigns DID lines to route per DNIS and ANI options (Program 71 and 72) or DID numbers (Program *09). Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Programs 45~48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line. Programs 50~56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments. Programs 71 (1~5): Assigns DNIS or ANI option to DID lines. Programs *71~*73: Assigns telephone to ring called [DN]. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. The TDDU provides four DID lines and uses four station ports when installed. 3-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TDDU1A V1 DID4 VOL HL SW401 DID3 SW402 VOL HL SW301 DID2 SW302 VOL HL SW201 DID1 SW202 1349 SW102 PAD Switches (SW101 ~ 401) CO Line Circuits (DID1 ~ 4) 2-terminal Jumper Plugs DK40i Installation VOL HL SW101 Figure 3-22 DK40i DID CO Line Board (TDDU) Table 3-8 TDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line busy LEDs 1~4 (DID1~DID4) Red LED Lights to indicate DID line circuit is operating. Trunk indicator will not light unless TDDU is connected to a DID line. CO line connector (DID) Modular connector Interface connector for CO line (DID) circuits. PAD switch SW202, SW302, SW402 (circuits 1~4) Two-position slide Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit (when set in PAD position). SW102, SW202, SW302, SW402 (circuits 1~4) 2-terminal jumper plug Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. CAUTION! Strata DK I&M 5/99 Port numbers in the Expansion KSU shift by four ports if KSTU2 or TDDU is installed (or removed after it is installed). This determines whether or not the DDCB can be connected on the KCDU in slot 15. 3-35 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation TSIU Serial Interface Board System: DK40i Base KSU (plugs into KSU main PCB) Circuits per PCB: two TTY/RS-232 interface ports Interfaces with: SMDR connection for call accounting device customer-provided external modem for local/remote maintenance from a PC with DK Admin Older Version(s): none The TSIU PCB enables the DK40i system to connect to various hardware devices. It does not have an internal modem and does not support IMDU. (See Figure 3-23.) Only one TSIU can be installed per DK40i system. When installed, the TSIU port functions are identified and enabled automatically when power is turned on and the PIOU can still be installed for zone paging. Port 01 is TTY (Program 76-1, code 1) and Port 02 is disabled (Program 76-1, code 0). If the same function is programmed for an TSIU port and a PIOU or PIOUS port, only the TSIU port functions. The communication parameters for all TSIU TTY ports are: ♦ Data word bits = 7 ♦ Parity = even ♦ Stop bits = 1 The communication parameters for a TSIU SMDR port is: ♦ Data word bits = 8 ♦ Parity = none ♦ Stop bits = 1 TSIU Installation ➤ See Figure 3-23 for installation. TSIU Programming Program 03: No assignment is necessary. TSIU is automatically enabled when installed and power is turned ON. It is not assigned to a slot. Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed TSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the TSIU port number (1~4) and Y identifies the TSIU port function: ♦ Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 OFF) ♦ Y=2, SMDR ♦ Y=4, SMDI ♦ Y=0, No function - this should be used for any TSIU ports that are not used. Note 3-36 Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y override PIOU and/or PIOUS function codes 41 set in Program 03. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed TSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the TSIU Port number (1, 2). Z identifies the TSIU/port transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps): ♦ Z=1; 9600 ♦ Z=2; 4800 ♦ Z=3; 2400 ♦ Z=4; 1200 Note The sum of TSIU port 1 and port 2 bps rate cannot exceed 9600 bps. 1634 DK40i Installation SIO#2 SIO#1 SIO#2 SIO#1 TSIU1A Figure 3-23 Serial Interface Board (TSIU) Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-37 DK40i Installation Universal Slot PCBs Universal Slot PCBs The following PCBs can be used in the universal slots of either the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU or the Strata DK424 cabinets (see Table 3-9). Table 3-9 PCB 3-38 Universal Slot PCB Descriptions Title Description Page KCDU CO Line/Digital Interface Unit Provides two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. 7-4 PDKU Digital Telephone Interface Unit Provides eight digital telephone circuits that can support the same peripherals as the digital circuits in the Base KSU. 7-6 PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit Provides eight electronic telephone circuits that can interface with electronic telephones, an alternate BGM source, an HDSS, an external amplifier for DISA or two CO line conferencing. 7-8 PESU Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit Provides two standard telephone or two-wire device circuits/four electronic telephone circuits in the Expansion KSU. 7-13 PIOU and PIOUS Option Interface Unit Provides interfaces for SMDR, IMDU and external zone paging (PIOU only). 7-17 RCOU CO Line Interface Unit Adds four CO lines to the system and can only be installed in the Expansion KSU. Assigns Delayed Ringing to any CO line. You cannot piggy-back a RCOS. 7-28 RDDU DID Line Unit Provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines. Each line can have one office code and a block of extensions. 7-33 RDSU Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit Provides two standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone circuits. 7-36 REMU E&M Tie Line Unit Provides four Tie line circuits. 7-39 RGLU2 Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit Provides four line circuits. 7-43 RSSU PC Interface Unit Provides two RS-232 connections. 7-51 RSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit Has eight circuits that support single-line devices, such as: rotary and push-button standard telephones, fax machines, dictation equipment, modems, a separate BGM source, offpremises stations, Toshiba voice mail (Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP), digital announcement devices for the optional built-in auto attendant feature and customer-supplied voice mail devices. 7-53 RWIU Strata AirLink Unit Supports Digital Wireless Handsets: same as PDKU, except no DDSS console, Stand-alone Cordless Telephone, PDIU-DS, or DDCB. 16-36 Stratagy DK Stratagy Voice Mail Unit The Stratagy voice mail systems come with 2, 4, 6, or 8 voice mail ports. All of the Stratagy DK systems use 8 station ports in the DK40i and DK424 software. 10-42 RBSU/ RBSS ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit and Basic Rate Interface Subassembly RBSU provides two BRI S/T circuits. Each circuit provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. The RBSS attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI S/T type circuits that can be used for station-side connections only. 14-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation Loop Limits Loop Limits This section provides the maximum loop lengths for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies. The following information applies to only the Strata DK40i system (see Table 3-10). Diagrams that are applicable to all systems, including the DK40i, can be found in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring. Table 3-10 Digital Telephone/DIU/DDSS Console/ADM/Loop Limits Maximum line length (24 AWG) Mode DKT or Cordless base Ringing (Volume Max) DK40i KSU or Battery Backup1 1 Pair feet meters DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 675 204 DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 495 150 DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 330 100 DK40i KSU 495 150 Battery Backup 165 DK40i KSU 2 Pair2 feet meters 1 Pair plus external power3 DKT with DVSU (OCA) DKT with PDIU-DI/ PDIU-DI2/RPCI-DI 303 50 675 200 1000 303 1000 303 Battery Backup 675 204 1000 303 1000 feet DK40i KSU 495 150 1000 303 303 meters Battery Backup 33 10 330 100 DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 500 151 DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 500 151 1000 303 DK40i KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 165 50 DK40i KSU 675 204 Battery Backup 165 50 DK40i Installation DKT with HHEU or Carbon Handset 1000 PDIU-DS DKT with HHEU and RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 DDSS2060A DDCB DKT with DVSU and HHEU DKT with ADM 1. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively. 2. Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external power source. 3. Digital cable runs must not have the following: Cable splits (single or double) Cable bridges (of any length) High resistance or faulty cable splices Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-39 DK40i Installation DK40i Secondary Protection DK40i Secondary Protection The following diagram (see Figure 3-24) shows where secondary protectors must be installed for outside wiring. Building #1 Building #2 HESB PSTU/KSTU2 RSTU/RSTU2 RDSU/RSTS Standard Telephone HDSS or DDSS Console DK40i Base KSU DKT PEKU PESU PDKU RDSU Electronic or Digital Telephone Electronic or Digital Telephone or Cordless Base HDCB or DDCB MDFB DDCB or HDCB RBSU or TBSU NT-1 MDFB BRI U (Earth Ground) E&M tie Line REMU TCOU, PCOU, RCOU/RCOS RGLU, RCIU/RCIS Ground/Loop CO Line RDDU DID Line TDDU DID Line Secondary protectors – standard voltage 4240 (Earth Ground) Secondary protectors – low voltage Figure 3-24 DK40i Secondary Protector Diagram Important! 3-40 To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M Tie lines. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee manufacturer. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation MDF Wiring Diagrams MDF Wiring Diagrams Wiring diagrams for the DK40i (listed below) are shown in Figures 3-25~3-27. ♦ MDF Wiring to KSU & Amphenol Station and Relay Connectors (KSTU2) ♦ MDF Wiring to CO Lines and Digital Telephones (KCDU) ♦ MDF Wiring to CO Lines (TCOU and TDDU) See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Wiring Diagrams for more information. To Base Unit (P5) W/Female Connector W-BL BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 or 2 pair) Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add, Power) PR1 ((Add, Power) T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also). Circuit 2 to DKT24 or PDIU-DS DK40i Installation 25-Pair Cable with Male Amp Connector 26 Circuit 3 to DKT3 or PDIU-DS or DDCB Circuit 4 TO DKT4 or PDIU-DS or DDCB R GN BK Y W BL R1 Circuit 5 or DKT5 or PDIU-DS T1 PT1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 6 to DKT6 or PDIU-DS 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 7 to DKT7 or PDIU-DS TR PT Modular Cord Circuit 8 to DKT8 or PDIU-DS GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Digital Telephone (DKT 1) (With or without ADM, RPCI-DI) Relay Contacts Not Used R1 T1 STD TEL Circuit 1 Not Used R2 T2 STD TEL Circuit 2 or BGM KSTU2 Not Used R3 T3 STD TEL Circuit 3 Not Used R4 T4 Voltage levels: T, PT = –26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND) (Reference to FG ground) STD TEL Circuit 4 1679 66M150 Split Block Note See Table 3-10 on Page 3-39 for loop limits. Figure 3-25 MDF Wiring to KSU & Amphenol Station and Relay Connectors (KSTU2) Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-41 DK40i Installation MDF Wiring Diagrams T1 R1 T2 R2 CO LINE CABLING BRIDGING CLIPS 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 48 48 49 49 50 50 T1 R1 T2 R2 R GN R1 T1 BK Y W BL T2 R2 6 5 4 3 2 1 KCDU CO2 LED CO1 LED 2 3 4 5 MODULAR CORD 5 4 3 2 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK 25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 R2 R1 T1 T2 CO1+2 MODULAR JACK KCDU PIN-OUT NETWORK JACK: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 TO KCDU W/FEMALE CONNECTOR 6 543 21 1 1-6 TO NETWORK STATION CABLING BRIDGING CLIPS 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T1 (VOICE/DATA) R1 (VOICE/DATA) PT1 (ADD, POWER) PR1 (ADD. POWER) CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2 OR PDIU-DS JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS 24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2) R GN BK Y R1 T1 PT1 CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3 OR PDIU-DS PR1 W BL RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4 OR PDIU-DS 2- OR 4-WIRE MODULAR CORD TO RJ11 JACK ON BOTTOM OF PDIU-DI GND (-) GND (-) PR (5) T (4) R (3) PT (2) NOT USED 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Notes DIGITAL TELEPHONE (WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2) OR PDIU-DS - or DDCB 1. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC R, RP = 0.0 VDC (GND) (Reference to SG ground) 2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating on reserve power per Table 3-10. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. Figure 3-26 MDF Wiring to CO Lines and Digital Telephones (KCDU) 3-42 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i Installation MDF Wiring Diagrams RJ14C/RJ11 Modular Jacks 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 2345 654321 T1 2345 654321 R T 4 3 6-1 R T 4 3 6-1 2345 22 DID or CO3/TCIU3 DID or CO1/TCIU1 R DID or CO4 T 4 3 6-1 2345 21 22 654321 21 DID or CO3 654321 20 BL 20 W 19 BL 18 19 W 18 6-1 DID or CO2/TCIU2 BL 17 W 17 BL 16 W 15 16 Y 15 BK 14 Y 13 14 BK 12 13 Y 12 BK 11 Y 10 11 4 3 DID or CO2 BK 10 GN 9 R 8 9 R R1 8 DID or CO4/TCIU4 T T2 7 GN 6 7 R 5 6 Modular Cords R2 5 T3 4 GN 3 4 R 2 3 DID or CO1 R3 2 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T4 1 DK40i Installation 1 GN T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 R Bridging Clips R R4 To Network T 4 3 6-1 PFT TCOU Only TCOU TDDU 44 44 45 45 Network Jack RJ11 RJ11 46 46 FIC 02LS2 02RV2-T 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Power Failure Standard Telephone 1680 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Figure 3-27 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (TCOU and TDDU) Strata DK I&M 5/99 3-43 DK40i Installation MDF Wiring Diagrams 3-44 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration 4 This chapter explains how to configure the Strata DK424 system. The system has a modular design which enables it to support a number of station and CO line configurations. The main component of the system is the common control unit (RCTU) Printed Circuit Board (PCB). The focus of this chapter is a series of worksheets, providing a systematic procedure for determining the system’s size. The worksheets also provide space to record the hardware and station devices that make up the system. Tables and example worksheets are included to assist you in filling out the worksheets. Important! Prior to Release 4, Tie and DID lines used station ports. With Release 4.0 and higher processors, these lines do not use station ports, allowing larger capacity systems when Tie and DID lines are required. Important! System Configuration can be complex and time consuming. For best results: ♦ Use DKQuote to provide easy, fast, automated configuration. It runs on an IBM-compatible Pentium® PC or higher, equipped with a 110MB or larger hard drive, a 3.5” 1.44 MB high density floppy disk drive, 16MB RAM, and Windows® 98/95 or Windows NT®. See the DKQuote User Guide for more information. ♦ If the above software is not available, use the Worksheets in this chapter. DK424 Configuration System Configuration The DK424’s main components are: the DK424 Base Cabinet (DKSUB424), DK424 Expansion Cabinets (DKSUE424), and four system processors (RCTUA4, RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4, and RCTUE3/F4). The processor used in the system depends on the features and number of telephones and CO lines required. Each cabinet is shipped with its required Power Supply (RPSU280); the same power supply used in DK280 cabinets. See Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation for detailed information on installing RCTU PCBs. Strata DK I&M 4/99 4-1 DK424 Configuration System Configuration Base Cabinet The DK424 Base Cabinet provides two designated slots for the RCTU processor and six universal slots for station, line, and feature PCBs. It provides six connectors for expanding the system to a maximum of six Expansion Cabinets. It comes with a Motherboard Jumper Unit (MBJU) installed between the R11 and RCTU slot on the front side of the backplane motherboard. The MBJU is removed only when RCTUE/F is installed. MBJU is installed for all other DK Release 1~4 RCTU processor PCBs. Expansion Cabinets Cabinet and Universal Slot Capacity: Up to six DK424 Expansion Cabinets can be connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet. The number of DK424 Expansion Cabinets allowed depends on which processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet. The DK424 Expansion Cabinets support either six or eight universal slots, depending on which processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet. ♦ All Expansion Cabinets are six slot cabinets except DK424 Expansion Cabinets. DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight slots, but only when connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet controlled by an RCTUE3/F3 processor with the MBJU removed. ♦ No DK424 Expansion Cabinets are allowed when connected to the DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUA processor installed. ♦ One DK424 Expansion Cabinet provides six universal slots when connected to the DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUBA/BB processor installed. ♦ Up to five DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots each, when connected to the DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUC/D processor installed. ♦ Up to six DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots each, when connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F processor installed. Table 4-1 shows DK424 cabinet and slot capacities for Release 3 and 4 processors. Table 4-1 DK424 Cabinet and Expansion Slot Capacities Processor in DK424 Base Cabinet1 DK424 Expansion Cabinets Allowed RCTUA Universal Slots allowed per... Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet System 0 1~6 0 6 RCTUBA/BB 1 1~6 1~6 12 RCTUC/D 5 1~6 1~6 36 1~6 1~82 54 RCTUE/F 6 1. All cabinets are DK424. 2. Only the RCTUE/F processor allows up to eight universal slots in the DK424 Expansion Cabinet. 4-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration System Configuration DK424 and DK280 Compatibility DK424 cabinets replace DK280 cabinets in the DK product line structure. DK424 Expansion Cabinets began shipping in June 1995 and DK424 Base Cabinets in February 1997. All old DK280 Release 1~3 processors and DK280 Base/Expansion Cabinets can be mixed with new DK424 Base and Expansion Cabinets with the following criteria (see Tables 4-2 and 4-3): Table 4-2 DK280 Base with DK280 and/or DK424 Expansion Cabinets Universal Slots allowed per... Processor in DK280 Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinets Allowed Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet System RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUA4 0 1~6 0 6 RCTUB1, RCTUB2, RCTUBA3/BB3 or RCTUBA3/BB4 1 1~6 1~6 12 RCTUC/D2, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 RCTUE3/F4 5 1~6 1~6 36 Table 4-3 DK424 Base with DK280 and/or DK424 Expansion Cabinets Universal Slots allowed per... Expansion Cabinets Allowed Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet System RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUA4 0 1~6 0 6 RCTUB1, RCTUB2, RCTUBA3/BB3 or RCTUBA3/BB4 1 1~6 1~6 12 RCTUC/D2, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUC3/D4 5 1~6 1~6 36 1~6 1~6 for DK280 Exp. Cabs. 1~8 for DK424 Exp. Cabs. 36~542 RCTUE3/F3 RCTUE3/F4 1 6 DK424 Configuration Processor in DK424 Base Cabinet 1. Last Expansion Cabinet must be a DK424. 2. Depends on the combination of Expansion Cabinets. ♦ DK424 and DK280 Cabinets can be mixed in any combination, with one exception. If seven cabinets are required, an RCTUE/F processor must be installed in a DK424 Base Cabinet and the sixth Expansion Cabinet must be a DK424. In this case DK280 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots and DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots. ♦ DK280 and DK424 Base Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration and any RCTU processor can be installed. ♦ DK280 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-3 DK424 Configuration System Configuration ♦ DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration with a DK280 Base Cabinet, including a DK280 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F processor. ♦ DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots in one configuration only: when connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet controlled by an RCTUE/F processor (MBJU jumper must be removed - see installation for details). DK424 cabinets provide six universal slots in all other configurations. ♦ An RCTUE/F processor can be installed in a DK280 Base Cabinet. When an RCTUE/F processor is installed in a DK280 Base, only five Expansion Cabinets (DK424 and/or DK280) can be installed. These Expansion Cabinets provide only six universal slots. ♦ All older DK280 Release 1~3 processors will function in the DK424 Base Cabinet. The features available depend on the respective release and type of the RCTU. These processors include RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, RCTUB2, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC1/D2 and RCTUC3/D3. ♦ When an older processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet, the DK424 and DK280 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots and the MBJU jumper must be installed see RCTU installation for details. ♦ RCTUA in a DK424 Base allows no Expansion Cabinets. ♦ RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB in a DK424 Base allows one DK424 or DK280 Expansion Cabinet with six universal slots. ♦ RCTUC/D in a DK424 Base allows up to five DK424 and DK280 Expansion Cabinets in any combination. These Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots. Designated Speaker OCA, DIU Data, and T1 slots DK424 systems require that PDKU2 PCBs that support Speaker Off-Hook-Call-Announce (OCA) and PDIU-DS and RPCI-DI PCBs for data applications must be placed in the slots designated in Tables 4-4 and 4-5. Note PDKU2s that support Handset OCA and RPCI TAPI-only can operate in any slot. Additionally, to enable T1/DS-1 interface, the RDTU PCB(s) must be placed in certain slots, with corresponding slots left vacant. (The operation of certain channels necessitates vacant slots.) RDTU PCBs can be placed in the slots in bold type; the vacant slots are not in bold in the following tables. Example: for cabinet 1, if an RDTU is placed in slot 13 and you want to use RDTU channels 17~24, then slot 14 must be left vacant. If you installed a second RDTU, it would go into slot 15; slot 16 must also be vacant if you want to use RDTU channels 17~24. 4-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration System Configuration Table 4-4 DK424 or DK280 Base Cabinet with MBJU Removed Cabinet Type Total Universal Slots 1 DK424 (base) 6 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 13/143 15/163 2 DK280 6 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 21/223 23/243 25/263 2 DK424 8 21, 22, 23, 24 21/223 23/243 25/274/265 3 DK280 6 31, 32 31/323 33/354/345 3 DK424 8 31, 32, 37, 38 31/323 33/354/345 4 DK280 6 41, 42 41/423 43/454/445 4 DK424 8 41, 42, 47, 48 41/423 43/454/445 5 DK280 6 51, 52 51/523 53/554/545 5 DK424 8 51, 52, 57, 58 51/523 53/554/545 6 DK280 6 61, 62 61/623 63/654/645 6 DK424 8 61, 62, 67, 68 61/623 63/654/645 7 DK280 6 Cannot be seventh cabinet 7 DK424 8 No Data & Spkr OCA 71/774/725 73/754/745 No. 2 PDKU2 Data and Speaker OCA Slots RDTU1/Vacant Slots 37/383 47/483 57/583 67/683 Table 4-5 pertains to a DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTU-A1, A3, A4, B2, BA3/BB3 or BA3/BB4, C1/D2, C3/D3 or C3/D4 with MBJU or a DK280 Base Cabinet with RCTU-A1, A3, A4, B2, BA3/ BB3, BA3/BB4, C1/D2, C3/D3, C3/D4, E3/F3, E3/F4. Table 4-5 DK424 or DK280 Base Cabinet with MBJU Type Total Universal Slots PDKU2 Data and Speaker OCA Slots RDTU1/Vacant Slots 1 DK424 or DK280 (base) 6 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 13/143 15/163 2 DK424 or DK280 6 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 21/223 23/243 3 DK280 or DK424 6 31, 32 31/323 33/354/345 4 DK280 or DK424 6 41, 42 41/423 43/454/445 5 DK280 or DK424 6 51, 52 51/523 53/554/545 6 DK280 or DK424 6 61, 62 61/623 63/654/645 25/263 DK424 Configuration Cabinet No.2 These footnotes apply to Tables 4-5 and 4-6: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RCTUA does not support RDTU. RCTUB and RCTUBA/BB supports cabinets 1 and 2 only. Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 17-24 (2-slot RDTU positions). Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 9-16 (3-slot RDTU positions). Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 17-24 (3-slot RDTU positions). DK280 to DK424 Upgrades To upgrade an existing DK280 Base Cabinet to a DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F processor, see “DK280 to DK424 Base Cabinet Upgrade Considerations” on Page 5-52. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-5 DK424 Configuration Features Capacities Features Capacities The features and capacities of DK424 system processors are provided in Tables 4-6~4-8. Table 4-6 System Feature Capacities DK424 Features DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F Amplified Conferencing 1 0 2 4 4 4 4 Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous announcements 3 5 12 12 24 24 Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers: stored per station 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers: stored per system 200 200 200 400 1000 2000 16 CO Line Groups 4 8 8 8 16 Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups 10 10 10 10 10 10 DH Groups 16 16 16 16 16 16 DH stations per Group 8 28 32 32 32 32 DNIS Network Routing Numbers 0 100 100 200 300 300 DNIS Numbers 0 200 200 350 500 500 DTMF receivers 3 5 12 12 24 24 External Page Zones 0 4 4 4 4 8 Call Park Orbits - general 20 20 20 20 20 20 Call Park Orbits - individual 10 28 32 80 240 336 Personal LCD Messages per DKT 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 Personal Message DKTs 8 16 16 32 96 96 [PhDNs] per System 10 28 32 80 240 336 [PDNs] per System 10 28 32 80 240 336 Ring Tones 3 3 3 3 3 3 Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party) 2 3 3 7 7 14 Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing (3-party) 2 4 4 10 10 20 Station Speed Dial 40 40 40 40 40 40 Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stratagy DK Systems (per system) 0 2 2 2 4 4 System LCD Messages 40 40 40 40 40 40 System Speed Dial 40 40 40 100 100 800 Telephone Page Groups 5 5 5 5 9 9 Telephone Group Page – simultaneous stations paged 8 28 32 80 120 120 Telephone Pickup Groups 8 20 20 20 20 20 Tenants 2 2 2 4 4 4 Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table 8 8 8 8 16 16 Toll Restriction Classes 4 4 4 4 8 8 Verified Account Codes 300 300 300 300 300 500 Voice Mail SMDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware. 2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo. 4-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Features Capacities Table 4-7 Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots DK424 DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D Universal slots Lines and PCB Slots 0 41 6 12 36 54 CO lines – loop start 4 12 2 16 2 48 2 144 2 200 2 CO lines – ground start 0 12 16 2 40 2 136 2 200 2 12 16 3 40 3 136 3 200 3 16 3 40 3 136 3 200 3 144 4 192 4 DID lines (analog) 0 Tie lines (analog) 0 12 T1 (DS-1) lines each) 0 0 0 484 ISDN BRI (S/T or U) B channel lines 0 0 85 16 5 6 ISDN PRI (T) B channel lines Squared System Maximum (lines + stations) 0 0 0 47 4 lines + 4 stations 12 lines + 12 stations 16 lines + 16 stations RCTUE/F 16 5 141 48 lines + 48 stations 16 5 6 188 6 144 lines + 144 stations 200 lines + 200 stations 1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit. 2. All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs. 3. Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines. 4. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination). 5. BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL). 6. PRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, ANI, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL. Table 4-8 Station and Peripherals Capacities DK424 Stations DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F 8 12 12 40 120 200 Attendant consoles 0 0 0 2 4 4 DKT 2004-CT Cordless Telephones 8 28 32 80 240 336 DKT 2004-CT simultaneous calls 8 9 9 9 9 9 Door locks 2 3 4 5 5 5 Door phones (MDFB) 6 9 9 12 12 12 DSS consoles 0 3 3 4 8 8 ISDN BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA (2B+D per circuit) 1 0 0 8 24 48 72 Handset OCA stations 8 28 32 80 240 336 Off-premise stations 2 20 32 80 232 328 PDIU-DS 2 7 24 31 79 160 208 200 RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per system 2 8 24 32 80 144 RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per cabinet 2 N/A N/A 32 40 40 40 RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per system 2 8 24 32 80 186 280 Speaker OCA stations 2 8 28 32 80 160 208 Standard stations 2 20 24 72 232 328 Telephones – DKT 8 28 3 32 4 80 4 240 4 336 4 0 3 4 4 4 328 4 Telephones – EKT 16 32 80 240 DK424 Configuration DK14 Add-on modules (DADM) 1. ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/ or TA) can connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit. 2. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits. 3. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the stations must be DKTs. 4. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation). Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-7 DK424 Configuration System Capacity System Capacity The number of CO lines and stations needed determine the size of the system. Tables 4-9 and 4-12 show the station and line capacities for eight-port RCOU/RCOS CO line PCBs. There is a trade-off between stations and lines. Every group of eight stations installed decreases the CO line capacity of the system by eight, and vice versa. The exact hardware requirements depend on the features required. Tables 4-9~4-12 assume one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB. Table 4-9 Strata DK424 Expansion Cabinet Configuration for Eight-Port CO Line PCBs Without Caller ID 1 Cabinet RCTUA 4-8 CO Lines Stations 16 32 2 Cabinets RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB CO Lines Stations 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 40 40 48 48 56 56 64 64 72 72 80 3 Cabinets RCTUC/D CO Lines Stations 72 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 20 64 64 72 72 80 80 88 88 96 96 104 104 112 112 4 Cabinets RCTUC/D CO Lines Stations 96 92 88 84 80 76 72 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 88 88 96 96 104 104 112 112 120 120 128 128 136 136 144 144 152 152 160 5 Cabinets RCTUC/D CO Lines Stations 120 116 112 108 104 100 96 92 88 84 80 76 72 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 112 112 120 120 128 128 136 136 144 144 152 152 160 160 168 168 176 176 184 184 192 192 200 6 Cabinets RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets RCTUE/F CO Lines Stations 144 140 136 132 128 124 120 116 112 108 104 100 96 92 88 84 80 76 72 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 136 136 144 144 152 152 160 160 168 168 176 176 184 184 192 192 200 200 208 208 216 216 224 224 232 232 240 CO Lines Stations 200 196 192 188 184 180 176 172 168 164 160 156 152 148 144 140 136 132 128 124 120 116 112 108 104 100 96 92 88 84 224 224 232 232 240 240 248 248 256 256 264 264 272 272 280 280 288 288 296 296 304 304 312 312 320 320 328 328 336 336 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration System Capacity Table 4-10 CO Loop Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Capacities 1 Cabinet RCTUA 2 Cabinets RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets RCTUE/F Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations 8 24 24 16 8 40 56 72 40 32 24 16 56 72 88 104 56 48 40 32 24 72 88 104 120 136 72 64 56 48 40 32 88 104 120 136 152 168 88 80 72 64 56 48 40 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 136 128 120 112 104 96 88 80 152 168 184 200 216 232 248 264 Table 4-11 CO Ground Start with Caller ID, DID and/or Tie Analog Lines Maximum Combined Capacities 1 Cabinet RCTUA 2 Cabinets RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets RCTUE/F Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations 8 16 20 16 8 24 40 64 32 28 24 16 12 40 48 64 88 96 44 40 36 32 28 24 20 16 48 64 72 88 96 112 120 136 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 64 72 88 96 112 120 136 144 160 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 72 88 96 112 120 136 144 160 168 184 192 104 100 96 92 88 84 80 76 72 68 64 60 56 112 120 136 144 160 168 184 192 208 216 232 240 256 Table 4-12 DK424 Configuration Lines Digital, Tie, DID, Ground/Loop Start Digital T1 and ISDN PRI Lines Maximum Combined Capacities 2 Cabinets RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets RCTUE/F Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations 48 40 24 16 56 64 72 80 72 64 48 40 24 16 88 96 104 112 120 128 112 96 88 72 64 48 40 24 16 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 120 112 96 88 72 64 48 40 24 152 160 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 144 120 112 96 88 72 64 48 — 144 168 176 192 200 216 224 240 — 1921 184 168 160 144 136 120 112 96 240 248 264 272 288 296 312 320 336 Notes ● ● T1 lines can be in increments of 8, 16 and/or 24. PRI channels can be in increments of 23B+1D or 47B + 1D. Each B channel represents a PRI CO line. 1. The maximum number of PRI lines for 2 cabinets is 47, 3~6 cabinets is 141 and 7 cabinets is 188. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-9 DK424 Configuration System Capacity Tables 4-13~4-18 show system maximum capacity examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U) circuits. Table 4-13 RCTUA Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits BRI Station Circuits1 BRI Station B channels1 Other Station Circuits3 BRI Line Circuits4 BRI Line B channels4 Other Line Circuits5 82 16 2 16 0 0 0 6 12 16 2 4 0 5 10 16 3 6 0 Table 4-14 4 2 2 4 8 16 4 8 16 2 4 4 3 6 16 1 2 8 2 4 24 2 4 8 1 2 28 1 2 12 8 0 RCTUBA/BB Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits BRI Station Circuits 1 BRI Station B channels 1 Other Station Circuits 3 BRI Line Circuits 4 BRI Line B channels 4 Other Line Circuits 5 16 2 32 2 32 82 16 2 0 12 24 40 8 16 8 10 20 40 8 16 12 8 16 48 8 16 16 8 16 48 6 12 20 8 16 56 4 8 24 8 16 56 2 4 28 6 12 56 6 12 24 6 12 56 4 8 28 6 12 64 2 4 32 4 8 64 4 8 32 4 8 64 2 4 32 2 4 72 2 4 40 1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to eight TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit.). Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device. 2. Maximum BRI capacity. 3. Other stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard telephones and devices. 4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO lines (B channels) for incoming/outgoing calls. 5. Other lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines. 4-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration System Capacity Table 4-15 RCTUC/D Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits BRI Station Circuits 1 BRI Station B channels 1 Other Station Circuits 3 BRI Line Circuits 4 BRI Line B channels 4 Other Line Circuits 5 40 2 80 2 144 82 16 2 48 30 60 164 8 16 68 20 40 184 8 16 88 16 32 192 8 16 96 12 24 200 8 16 104 8 16 208 8 16 112 8 16 216 4 8 120 8 16 216 2 4 124 4 8 228 2 4 132 Table 4-16 RCTUE/F Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits BRI Station B channels 1 Other Station Circuits 3 BRI Line Circuits 4 BRI Line Other Line Circuits 5 B channels 4 64 2 128 2 19 2 82 16 2 56 50 100 216 8 16 84 40 80 240 8 16 104 30 60 256 8 16 124 20 40 280 8 16 144 16 32 288 8 16 152 8 16 304 8 16 168 8 16 312 4 8 176 8 16 312 2 4 180 4 8 320 4 8 184 4 8 320 2 4 188 2 4 328 2 4 192 DK424 Configuration BRI Station Circuits 1 1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to eight TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit). Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device. 2. Maximum BRI capacity. 3. Conventional stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard telephones and devices. 4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO lines (channels) for incoming/outgoing calls. 5. Conventional lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-11 DK424 Configuration Printed Circuit Boards Printed Circuit Boards The system interfaces with CO lines, stations, and peripheral devices via PCBs that plug into the Base and Expansion Cabinet slots and subassembly PCBs, that mount onto the plug-in type PCBs. Refer to Table 4-17 for a list of station and console PCBs supported by the DK424. Table 4-17 PCB PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector POTS FX RPTU (DK424 only) Tie (senderized) 1 circuit/ISDN PRI (23 B channels/1 D channel) Tie (cut through) OUTWATS (intra-LATA) RJ48C or RJ48X ISDN TIA-568A OUTWATS (inter-LATA) InWATS 2 ISDN BRI S/T point circuits (NT or TE). Each circuit is 2B+1D. (Host for the RBSS) RBSU attaches to RBSU RBSS RBUU attaches to RBUU RBUS RDTU2 RMCU attaches to RMCU RCMS Network and/or station side RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A 2 ISDN BRI, S point circuits (2B+D Station side only each) 1 RBSS subassembly per RBSU RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A (DK424 only) 2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits (2B+D each). Host for the Network and/or station side RBUS. (Release 4.2) RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A 2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits Network and/or station side (2B+D each) subassembly for the 1 RBUS subassembly per RBUU. RBUU. (Release 4.2) RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A Applies to DK424 only. Loop start lines 1~8, 1~16, or 1~24 channels (lines), depends on system programming Ground start lines 2-pair amphenol RJ48M Tie lines (wink or immediate) (All PCB amphenol DID/DOD lines (wink or immediate) connectors are female) 2 E911 CAMA circuits with the 1 RCMS or 4 with 2 RCMSs E911 CAMA lines 2 E911 CAMA circuits Up to 2 RCMSs per RMCU for 4 CAMA lines max. RJ11C modular E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission REMU 4 Tie line circuits Type I signaling REMU (8-wire modular jack) Type II signaling 2- or 4-wire/type I or II Immediate start Wink start KCDU (DK40i only) CO loop start lines 2 CO line circuits/ 4 digital telephone circuits Digital circuits same as PDKU, except no DDSS RJ14C modular (CO Line circuits) 25-pair amphenol (digital phone circuits) 4 CO line circuits (lines) RCOU attaches to RCOU 4-12 With RCOS: 8 CO line circuits (lines) RCOS Provides four additional Loop Start CO lines. CO loop start lines RJ14C modular 1 RCOS subassembly per RCOU Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Printed Circuit Boards PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued) Table 4-17 PCB Subassembly Circuits 4 circuits RCIU2 With RCIS: 8 circuits Interface Options Loop or Ground Start Lines with Caller ID. Requires: RCOU, RGLU2 or PCOU Used with RCOU/RCOS, PCOU, and RGLU2 CO line PCBs to provide 4 Caller ID circuits. 1 RCIS subassembly per RCIU2 RDDU 4 DID circuits DID Lines RGLU2 4 line circuits attaches to RCIU2 RCIS PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU attaches to PIOU and PIOUS A PIOU or PIOUS can use an IMDU Connector RJ14C modular RJ14C modular Loop or ground start lines RJ14C modular ACD/SMIS (DK424 only, except RCTUA) 25-pair amphenol (PIOU or PEPU) SMDI for Voice Mail Spring clip terminal (PIOUS) SMDR printer or call accounting machine Two 3-pair modular (TTY/ SMDR/SMDI/SMIS) PC or maintenance terminal (local or remote) (All PCB amphenol connectors are female) Provides remote maintenance 300 bps or 1200 bps full-duplex modem None for DKAdmin or DKBackup. 1 per PIOU/PIOUS. IMDU Standard telephones Voice mail ports Off-premises stations Other similar devices RSTU2 8 standard telephone circuits 25-pair amphenol Auto Attendant digital announcer (All PCB amphenol connectors are female) Message Waiting lamp (RSTU2 only) Fax machines ACD Announcer Strata Airlink wireless telephones attaches to RSTU2 and R48S RDSU Optionally interfaces to the RSTU2 48VDC circuit for up to 8 standard and RDSU to extend loop length of None telephone circuits standard telephones from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. Without RSTS: 2 standard telephone/ 4 digital telephone circuits RDSU With RSTS: 4 standard telephone/ 4 digital telephone circuits attaches to RSTU2 and RSTS RDSU Provides two additional standard telephone circuits PESU 2 standard telephone circuits/ 4 electronic telephone circuits (standard/electronic telephone ports) (DK424 only) RATU Strata DK I&M 4 PC attendant PC console circuits 5/99 DK424 Configuration Alternate BGM source Digital: same as PDKU, except no DDSS console Standard: same as RSTU (standard Message Waiting not available) 25-pair amphenol 1 maximum per RDSU None Standard: same as KSTU2 Electronic: same as PEKU, except PESU does not support HDSS console PC attendant console Conventional attendant console 25-pair amphenol 25-pair amphenol 4-13 DK424 Configuration Printed Circuit Boards Table 4-17 PCB PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued) Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI, DVSU, DADMs, or digital cordless telephone) PDKU2 8 digital telephone circuits Stand-alone digital cordless telephone 25-pair amphenol DDSS console PDIU-DS DDCB 2, 4, 6, or 8 VM ports All of the above Stratagy DK systems use 8 station ports in the DK40i and DK424 software Stratagy DK None None Electronic telephones HDSS console PEKU 8 electronic telephone circuits Alternate BGM source EOCU PCB for OCA 25-pair amphenol (All PCB amphenol connectors are Female) External conference amplifier HDCB attaches to PEKU or PESU EOCU Provides Speaker OCA path for 8 circuits on PEKU or 4 circuits on 1 for PEKU or PESU that supports PESU. (Handset OCA is not Speaker OCA available on EKTs.) ACD/SMIS SMDI for voice mail Up to 4 interface ports when installed with the optional RSIS or SMDR printer or call accounting machine RMDS piggy-back PCBs. PC or maintenance terminal (local or remote) RSIU (DK424 only) attaches to RSIU RSIS, RS-232 interface Up to 3 RSISs ...or RMDS (Modem/ RS-232) 1 RMDS and 2 RSISs per RSIU (DK424 only) Provides up to four interface ports (RS-232 and modem) for system interface with: RMDS (1200 or 2400 bps) Voice Mail SMDI ACD/SMIS One 3-pair modular per RSIS (RS-232), RMDS (Modem/RS-232) SMDR Local or Remote Maintenance for DKAdmin or DKBackup PC. RWIU 4 RJ11 jacks to support 4 Strata AirLink Integrated Base Stations 4-14 One 3-pair modular (TTY/ SMDR/SMDI/SMIS) Digital Wireless Handsets: same as PDKU, except no DDSS console, None Stand-alone cordless telephone, PDIU-DS, or DDCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Printed Circuit Boards RKYS Feature Key Upgrades The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Software Management Information System (SMIS) for ACD with feature keys that attach to the common control unit. See Table 4-18 for a list of features provided by RKYS feature keys. Table 4-18 RKYS Features Feature(s) Provided Built-in Auto Attendant RKYS1 RKYS2 RKYS3 X X X Applies to all RCTUs X X RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F X RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F ACD ACD with a SMIS application Common Control Unit Option Interface PCBs for the DK424 are listed in Table 4-19. Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripherals for further information on these options. Table 4-19 DK424 Interface PCB Options RSSU1 Interface Options PIOU1 PIOUS1 PEPU X X Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones) X Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex) X Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) X Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay X X X Door lock or external amplifier control relay X X X Alarm Sensor X X Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external modem (requires TTY output port)2 X X X (IMDU) (IMDU) (IMDU) X X X X3 X3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector) MIS for ACD (requires TTY output port)2, 4 Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)2 StrataControl and/or DKAdmin PC (requires TTY output port)2 X DK424 Configuration Remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU or RMDS) (disables TTY output when they are piggy-backed onto the PIOU/PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS cards)2 RSIU/ RSIS1 1. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU each provide one TTY port which can be flexibly programmed for the features marked with X. RSIU/RSIS can provide up to four flexible TTY/SMDR ports. 2. Maintenance modem, ACD/SMIS, Insight DK, Voice Mail, SMDI and DKAdmin PC Interface each require a separate TTY output. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU provide one TTY output each. RSIU with RSIS PCBs provides up to four TTY outputs. 3. SMDR output will function simultaneously on the same PIOU or PIOUS with one of the following: DKAdmin, remote modem, SMIS for ACD, Insight DK, or SMDI features. 4. Insight DK, Call Center Viewer and SMIS for ACD requires that the system processor (RCTU PCB) must be equipped with an RKYS3 or higher feature key. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-15 DK424 Configuration Telephones Telephones The DK424 system supports Toshiba Proprietary Digital (DKT) and older series Electronic Telephones (EKTs). Standard telephones (500 or 2500 series) and devices that require a standard telephone line interface (fax, modem, VM, etc.) can also be connected to DK424. Toshiba provides the following 2000-series Digital Telephones for Strata DK424 systems. ♦ DKT-2020SD–20-button speakerphone with LCD ♦ DKT-2010SD–10-button speakerphone with LCD ♦ DKT-2020S–20-button speakerphone ♦ DKT-2010H–10-button handsfree answerback telephone Toshiba telephones can be equipped with optional subassemblies (listed on Page 4-33). Attendant Position Options The DK424 provides three options for attendant positions which answer system incoming calls. See Table 4-8 for the number of options per RCTU processor. See Table 4-20 for configuration considerations. ♦ PC Attendant Console–used for medium-to-heavy traffic systems where an attendant must answer and transfer incoming calls. The PC Attendant Console requires a customer-provided PC plus the RATU PCB. Up to two consoles can be connected on systems with RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB or four with RCTUC/D (Release 2 and 3) and RCTUE/F PCBs. The RATU PCB uses four station ports in system software. RCTUC/D Release 1 and all RCTUAs do not support the attendant console. 4-16 ♦ Direct Station Select (DSS) Console–used for medium traffic systems where an attendant must answer and transfer incoming calls. The DSS console must connect to circuit 8 on a PDKU PCB. ♦ Digital Add-On-Module (DADM)–used for medium traffic, smaller systems, where an Attendant must answer and transfer incoming calls. The ADM connects to any 2000-series digital telephone. The DADM shares the associated telephones circuit so it does not require a designated PCB or circuit port (see “DADM” on Page 4-33.) Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door Phones (MDFBs) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door Phones (MDFBs) Up to 12 door phones can be installed in a system with DK424 RCTUB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F, nine with RCTUA. Each is connected to a DDCB or HDCB door phone control box. See Table 4-20 for door phone configuration considerations. Table 4-20 DSS Console and Door Phone Configuration Option Unit Interface/ PCB DDSS PDKU2 (Circuit 8) HDSS DDCB PEKU (Circuits 7 and 8) PDKU or RDSU (Circuit 5) DK424 Capacity Function 3-RCTUA 4-RCTUBA/BB 8-RCTUC/D 8-RCTUE/F Digital DSS console (DDSS) can be flexibly assigned to designated electronic and digital telephone stations: Up to 8-DSS consoles may be assigned to a designated electronic or digital telephone station. 3-RCTUA 4-RCTUBA/BB 8-RCTUC/D 8-RCTUE/F Electronic DSS console (HDSS) provides a 60-button console that functions with digital or electronic telephones. Buttons are flexibly assigned as CO line, speed dial, and DSS (no [PDN] or [PhDN]). 4 per system: RCTUBA/BB and RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Each Digital Door Phone/Lock control (DDCB) interfaces with up to three door phones (MDFBs) or two MDFBs and one door lock. 3 per system: RCTUA It has 60-buttons which are flexibly assigned as CO line, speed dial, and DSS (no [PDN] or [PhDN]). DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned to designated electronic and digital telephone stations: Up to 8-DSS consoles may be assigned to a designated electronic or digital telephone station. DDCBs/HDCBs can only be connected to Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028, normally in slots 11, 12, 13, and 14, respectively. HDCB PEKU or PESU (Circuit 5) 4 per system: RCTUBA/BB and RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F 3 per system: RCTUA Each Electronic Door Phone/Lock control (HDCB) provides interface for up to three door phones (MDFBs) or two MDFBs and one door lock. DDCBs/HDCBs can only be connected to Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028, normally in slots 11, 12, 13, and 14, respectively. DK424 Configuration Always install DDCB/HDCB station PCBs (PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU) in slots that have lower slot numbers than RDDU, PEMU, REMU2, RATU, or RDTU PCBs. Always install DDCB/HDCB station PCBs (PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU) in slots that have lower slot numbers than RDDU, PEMU, REMU2, RATU, or RDTU PCBs. MDFB (Door Phone) DDCB or HDCB 12 per system: RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F 9 per system: RCTUA Door phone (MDFB) with two-way talk path to system telephones. Includes microphone for talkback amplifier with HESB. Doorbell rings designated digital and electronic telephones. Notes DSS (DDSS and HDSS) Console ♦ ♦ ♦ No additional hardware is required for DSS consoles. DSS consoles are assigned to associated digital and electronic telephones in programming. DSS consoles cannot be connected to RDSU or PESU electronic circuits. Door Phone ♦ ♦ ♦ DK424 can support as many as 12 MDFBs. See Table 4-8. Each DDCB requires one circuit (Circuit 5) on a PDKU or RDSU, and each HDCB requires one circuit (Circuit 5) on either a PEKU or PESU. One door lock control can be configured on each DDCB and HDCB in place of one door phone. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-17 DK424 Configuration AC and Reserve Power Hardware AC and Reserve Power Hardware Detailed information for AC and reserve battery power installation is described in Chapter 5– DK424 Cabinet Installation. These optional assemblies may be required, see Table 4-21. ♦ RBTC1A-2M and PBTC-3M–Battery connecting cables. ♦ RC7C1A-1.7M–Seventh cabinet battery and data cable kit. ♦ RBDB2–Battery power distribution box for up to seven cabinets. ♦ RPSB1 and RPSB2–three-outlet AC power strips, for requirements. Table 4-21 Power Strip (RPSB) Requirements Quantity of RPSB1 and RPSB2 Power Strips Needed1 Local Electric Code Requirement 1 Cabinet 2 Cabinets 3 Cabinets 4 Cabinets 5 Cabinets 6 Cabinets 7 Cabinets Two AC power cords allowed from system. 0 - RPSB1 0 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 2 - RPSB1 2 - RPSB1 2 - RPSB1 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 1 - RPSB2 Only one AC power cord allowed from system. 0 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 1 - RPSB1 2 - RPSB1 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 0 - RPSB2 1 - RPSB2 1 - RPSB2 1 - RPSB2 N/A 1. High current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets. Toshiba highly recommends using the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations. Floor Mount Installation Hardware Floor mounting DK424 requires RFIF and RCCB hardware assemblies; wall mounting DK424 does not require special hardware (see Table 4-22), but may require a plywood backboard (see Chapter 3 – Cabinet Installation). Table 4-22 Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies Assembly RBTC1A-2M Description Reserve Power Cable - RBDB2 to Battery Terminals Function Two cables are required for up to six cabinet systems and three are required for seven cabinet reserve power installations (for current carrying capacity) when connecting reserve (battery) power to three or more cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also required–see “RBDB2” below. A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code compliance. PBTC-3M RBDB2 Reserve Power Cable - Cabinet Power Supply to Battery Terminals One cable is required for each Cabinet if connecting reserve power to one or two cabinets (wall or table mount). Battery Distribution Box Distributes reserve power when three or more cabinets require reserve power (floor or wall mount). A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code compliance. Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2 distribution box to connect up to six DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box. RC7C1A-1.7M is also required for the seventh cabinet. 4-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheets Table 4-22 Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies (continued) Assembly Description Function RC7C1A1.7M Cabinet 7 Cable Kit - Data and Battery Cables Used for seven cabinet installations only. Provides long data cable to connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the DK424 Base Cabinet. Provides a long battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to the sixth Expansion Cabinet power supply. RFIF (up to 7 cabinets) Floor Mount Fixture Kit Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on floor. Three pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF. Wall brackets are needed to secure floor mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes (not required to wall mount cabinets). RCCB1 (up to 6 cabinets) Conduit Connection Box Conduit box required for AC and battery power connection to three or more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on a table or any number of cabinets on a wall.) ...or RCCB2 (7 cabinets) RCCB2 is required instead of RCCB1 for seven cabinet floor mount installations. A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code compliance. RPSB1 Three-outlet AC Power Strip One RPSB1 required when installing three or four cabinets (wall or floor mount). Two RPSB1s required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or floor mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations. Three-outlet AC Power Strip - heavy cord High current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets. It is highly recommended to use the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to accommodate further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems. RWBF Wall bracket pair Required for seven cabinet systems when the system is floor mounted. Secures the seventh cabinet to the wall for safety purposes (not required to wall mount cabinets – see RFIF). Worksheets DK424 Configuration RPSB2 The worksheets help you configure the system. Designed to make the system configuration as orderly as possible, they also provide room to record the hardware - cabinets, PCBs, stations, and options - that comprise the system. Copy the worksheets as required, then fill them out in the order they are given. ♦ Worksheet 1 – System PCB Slot Requirements ♦ Worksheet 2 – System Cabinet Assignment Guide ♦ Worksheet 3 – System PCB Assignment Guide ♦ Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide ♦ Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor (PF) Check Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-19 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Customer Location Digital Ports Required Digital Telephones (DKTs) 2010-H 2010-SD 2020-S 2020-SD 2004-CT 2001-SLT WRLS-HS 1020-H 1020-SD Total Digital Telephones (DKTs) 1 port per Digital Telephone (1 X Total) Total DDSS Consoles 1 port per Digital DDSS Console (1 X Total) Total PDIU-DS 1 port per Digital PDIU-DS (1 X Total) Total Digital Door Phone/Lock Units (DDCB) 1 port per Digital DDCB (1 X Total) Total Digital Ports Notes ♦ Digital telephones equipped with RPCI-DI, PDIU-D12 or ADM only require one digital port. (See Table 4-8.) ♦ One door phone control box (DDCB) supports three door phones (MDFBs). (See Table 4-20.) ♦ WRLS-HS is the same part number for Digital or Analog (depends on the type installed). Electronic Ports Required Electronic Telephones (EKTs) 6510-S 6510-H 6520-S 6520-SD Total Electronic Telephones (EKTs) 1 port per Electronic Telephone (1 X Total) Total HDSS Consoles 2 ports per HDSS Console (2 X Total) Total Electronic Door Phone/Lock Unit (HDCB) 1 port per HDCB (1 X Total) Total BGM Source Extend Amplifiers 2 ports per amplifier (2 X Total) Total Alternate BGM Source 1 port per Alternate BGM Source (1 X Total) Total Electronic Ports 4-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Standard Ports Required Standard Telephones On Premise Off Premise Total Standard Telephones 1 port per Standard Telephone (1 X Total) Total Analog Wireless Handsets 1 port per Analog Wireless Handset (1 X Total) Total Voice Mail Ports 1 port per Voice Mail Port (1 X Total) Total Fax or Modem Devices 1 port per fax/modem device (1 X Total) Total ACD/Auto Attendant Digital Announcement Devices 1 port per device (1 X Total) Total Alternate BGM Source 1 port per Alternate BGM Source (1 X Total) Total Other Devices 1 port per device (1 X Total) Total Standard Ports Notes ♦ ♦ Isolation transformer may be required for the Alternate BGM Source, see Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. Other devices include dictation equipment, etc. DK424 Configuration Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-21 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Station PCBs/Slots Required 1. Total digital ports divided by 8 (round up) = Total PDKU2 PCB slots required Notes ● ● 2. PDKU2 provides eight digital telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 5 (when associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) can only interface with a DDCB. Circuit 8 can only interface with a DDSS console (see Page 4-17). The PDKU1 can also be used. The PDKU1 can only support Data Interface Units (DIUs) on circuits 1~7, while the PDKU2 can support DIUs on all eight circuits. See Table 4-20 (example) for slot limitations. Total standard ports divided by 8 (round up) = Total RSTU2 PCB slots required Notes ● ● ● 3. The PSTU2 or PSTU1 can also be used. These earlier version PCBs can interface with the same devices that the RSTU can, but they have different ring generators and cannot support MW. See the RSTU/PSTU section in Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs for more details. The RSTU2 provides eight standard telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 2 only can connect to a separate Background Music (BGM) source. The RSTU can be equipped with an R48S to extend the loop length of the RSTU from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms (see Table 4-17). RSTU2 is required to operate message waiting lamps on a standard telephone. Are four or less digital or standard ports needed? If so, RDSU (RSTS) can be used. Total RDSU PCB slots required Total RSTS PCB slots required ● 4. RDSU provides two standard telephone ports (circuits) and four digital ports (circuits) in its basic configuration. The optional RSTS can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard telephone ports. The RSTU2 can be equipped with an R48S to extend the loop length of the RSTU2 standard telephone ports from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms (see Table 4-17). Total electronic ports divided by 8 (round up) = Note 5. Are four or less electronic ports or two or less standard ports needed? If so, PESU can be used. Note 6. 4-22 Total PEKU PCB slots required PEKU provides eight electronic telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 5 (when associated with ports 004, 012, 020, or 028) can only interface with an HDCB. The HDSS consoles requires two PEKU (see Table 4-20). Each conference amplifier requires use of circuits 2 and 3 of a PEKU. (Refer to Step 5 before finalizing this number.) Total PESU PCB slots required PESU provides two standard telephone ports (circuits) and four electronic telephone circuits (ports). Circuit 5 (when associated with Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) can only interface with an HDCB (see Table 4-20). Add totals from Steps 1~5 = Total Station PCB slots required Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements CO Line PCBs/Slots Required 1. Determine analog loop start line PCB slot requirements. Total loop start lines (with/ without Caller ID) divided by 8 (round up) = Total RCOU/RCOS PCBs (slots) required Total loop start lines (with/without Caller ID) divided by 4 (round up) = Total RGLU2/RCOU/PCOU PCBs (slots) required (PCOU existing) Total analog loop start line PCB slots required Notes ● ● ● ● 2. RGLU2 can provide loop or ground start lines. RCOU provides four loop start CO lines in its basic configuration. An RCOS can be attached to the RCOU to add four more loop start CO lines for a total of eight per slot. PCOU2 provides four loop start CO lines. The PCOU1 and the PCOU2 are identical in fit, form, and function for the U.S. market. Determine analog ground start line PCB slot requirements. Note 3. Total analog ground start line PCB slots required RGLU2 provides four CO lines that can be individually configured as loop start or ground start. Determine E911 CAMA line PCB slot requirements. Total RMCU/RCMS PCBs (1 slot) required (RMCU existing) DK424 Configuration Total ground start lines (with/without Caller ID) divided by 4 (round up) = Total RMCU/RCMS CAMA PCB slots required Note 4. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports. Determine Caller ID (FSK) receiver/decoder PCB slot requirements. Total loop and ground start lines (with Caller ID) divided by 8 (round up) = Note 5. Total RCIU2/RCIS PCB slots required RCIU2 provides four caller ID receiver/ decoder circuits. RCIU2 with RCIS subassembly provides eight caller ID receiver/decoder circuits. Always use RCIU2 with RCIS for up to eight circuits as opposed to using two RCIU PCBs. These circuits do not use up station port or CO line software assignments. Determine analog Tie line PCB slot requirements. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-23 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Total analog Tie lines (with or without ANI/DNIS) divided by 4 = Total REMU/PEMU PCB slots required Notes ● ● ● 6. REMU provides four E&M Tie trunks (Type I or II signaling, Wink or Immediate Start, 2- or 4-wire transmission). The PEMU1 can also be used. The PEMU only provides Type 1 signaling, 2- or 4-wire transmission and Immediate Start. See Table 4-7 for REMU/PEMU maximum quantities. Prior to Release 4, each REMU or PEMU reduced system station port line and capacity by four ports and four lines. With Release 4, Tie lines do not use station ports. Determine analog DID line PCB (slot) requirements. Total analog DID lines (with or without ANI/DNIS) divided by 4 = Total RDDU PCB slots required Notes ● ● 7. RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing lines. (Prior to Release 4, each RDDU reduces system station port and line capacity by four ports and four lines.) With Release 4, DID lines do not use station ports. See Table 4-7 for RDDU (DID analog lines) maximum quantities. Determine RDTU T1 PCB (slot) requirements (loop/ground/Tie/DID lines). Total loop start lines (channels) Total ground start lines (channels) Total Tie lines (with/without ANI/DNIS) (channels) Total DID lines (with/without ANI/DNIS) (channels) Total RDTU lines required Note 8. Contact the T1 provider (Telco or Carrier company) to determine exact T1 channel/line needs. Determine RDTU PCB (slot) requirements. Total 8-channel RDTU PCB/slots Total 16-channel RDTU PCB/slots (include skipped slots) -2 slots Total 24-channel RDTU PCB/slots (include skipped slots) -2 slots Total RDTU PCB slots required 4-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Notes ● ● ● ● 9. When installing 16 or 24 channel RDTU PCBs into a slot, the next slot or two slots may not be usable for other PCBs (Tables 4-4 and 4-5 and Worksheet 2.) RDTU provides either 8, 16, or 24 channels (lines), depending on programming. Each channel can be set for either DID, ground start CO, loop start CO, or Tie line operation. (Each RDTU Tie line or DID line reduces the system line and station port capacity by one port.) As many as six RDTU PCBs can be installed in systems operating with the RCTUC/D common control unit, as many as two with RCTUB operated systems. The RCTUA does not support RDTU. Prior to Release 4, each Tie or DID line reduced system station capacity by one port. With Release 4, Tie and DID lines do not use station ports. Add totals from Steps 1~7. Total CO Line PCB slots required DK424 Configuration Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-25 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements Attendant Console Slots Required ➤ Enter one slot for each attendant console required (1~4 consoles maximum). Total RATU PCB slots required PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU Option Slots Required ➤ Enter number of option PCBs required. Total needed for MIS for ACD (required new) Total needed for remote/local maintenance with DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Total needed for SMDI Total needed for SMDR (existing PIOU) Total needed for miscellaneous options (see Table 4-19) Total PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU PCB slots required Notes The following subassembly PCBs do not required additional cabinet slots: ● ● ● The IMDU subassembly plugs onto PIOU or PIOUS to provide a remote maintenance modem. The RMDS subassembly plugs onto the RSIU to provide a remote maintenance modem. Up to three RSIS subassemblies can plug onto RSIU to provide any option listed in this Step. PEPU Page Option PCB Required ➤ Enter total number of PEPU PCBs needed. Total PEPU PCB slots required Note PEPU provide 600-ohm interface or 3-watt page output for external page/BGM operation. 4-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 1 – System PCB (Slot) Requirements System Slots Required ➤ List the number of slots for each of the following: Total number of Station PCB slots required (see Page 4-22) Total number of CO Line PCB slots required (see Page 4-25) Total number of attendant console slots required (see Page 4-26) Total number of option slots required (see Page 4-26) Total number of page option slots required (see Page 4-26) Total system slots required Cabinets Required ➤ Total system slots divided by 6 or 8 = Important! Total Cabinets required To determine the type of RCTU PCB required, use Table 4-7. The total Universal slots and features required determine the RCTU PCB needed. DK424 Configuration Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-27 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 2 – System Cabinet Assignment Guide Worksheet 2 – System Cabinet Assignment Guide DK424 and DK280 Base and Expansion Cabinets are interchangeable. The only system considerations are: ♦ OCA/RPCI configuration requirements ♦ Channel (8, 16, and 24) RDTU (T1/DS-1 interface) slot configuration requirements ♦ Number of system slots required. (See “System Slots Required” on Page 4-27.) See Tables 4-7 and 4-8 for OCA/RPCI and T1/DS-1 configuration requirements. Cabinet Type (DK424 or DK280) Number of Slots Available 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total Number of Slots Available Number of Slots Required 4-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 3 – System PCB Assignment Guide Worksheet 3 – System PCB Assignment Guide Fill in Worksheet 3 by recording PCBs in the following order (see Worksheet 1 for PCB type and quantities): 1. Write in the Cabinet Type. 2. Enter the RCTU PCBs as required: ♦ RCTUBA, RCTUC, or RCTUE in slot R11 ♦ RCTUA, RCTUBB, RCTUD, or RCTUF in slot RCTU 3. Enter PDKU, PEKU, or RSIU in slot 11. ...and/or if an RSIU is installed in slot 11, install a PDKU or PEKU in slot 12. 4. Starting with the lowest empty slot (S12 or S13), record all station, attendant console, loop start, ground start PCBs from lower to higher numbered slots (left to right). Record the appropriate port numbers used by each. Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs (see Tables 4-4 and 4-5). 5. After all station, attendant console, and ground/loop start line PCBs are recorded, write in all DID and Tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed (in left to right order). Record the line numbers. Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs. The maximum number of station ports used by station, PC attendant console, Tie, and DID PCBs can not exceed the following quantities: Processor Maximum Ports (Station, Tie and DID) 32 RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB 80 RCTUC/D 240 RCTUE/F 336 In some rare configurations, when using RDTU (T1) Tie or DID lines in systems, the maximum number of stations allowed may be reduced because the RDTU PCB takes up two or three cabinet slots. Each RDTU, REMU, or RDDU Tie/DID line uses one station port. RCIU/RCIS PCBs do not use station ports or CO line software time slot assignments. DK424 Configuration RCTUA 6. Write in the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, RCIU2/RCIS and RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in any convenient vacant slot, preferably in the last slots. Record any Caller ID circuit numbers. 7. Write in any Interface PCB Options. Strata DK I&M 5/99 4-29 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 3 – System PCB Assignment Guide Cabinet 1 (Type:1 ) R11 RCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 ) S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S272 S282 ) S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S372 S382 ) S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 S472 S482 ) S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 S572 S582 ) S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S672 S682 ) S71 S72 S73 S74 S75 S76 S772 S782 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 2 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 3 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 4 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 5 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 6 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note Cabinet 7 (Type:1 PCB Type Port Nos. Line Nos. Option/Note 1. Type = DK280, DK424, or NR (not required). Double-check after completing all worksheets, particularly Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check. 2. Cabinets 2~7: Last two slots are available on the DK424 using RCTUE/F processors, with MBJU removed. 4-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide Number Required Option RRCS PCB Comments RRCS-8 An RRCS (-4, -8 or 12 DTMF receiver circuits) must be installed on the RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F if the customer has: DTMF DID, Tie, ANI, DNIS, DISA lines (remote change of call forward destination), DNIS External Call Routing, using DTMF standard telephones, or voice mail-type devices with DTMF interfaces RRCS-12 ...or if the customer has built-in AA connected to RDSU, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, or PESU standard telephone ports. RRCS-4 Both the RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F can support one RRCS on each PCB, 2 RRCSs total (maximum 24 DTMF receivers). For normal traffic, an RRCS-4 is sufficient. However, for extremely high traffic, use an RRCS-8, -12, or multiple RRCSs for large systems. RKYS1, 2, or 3 If built-in AA ACD, or ACD/MIS is required, one RKYS option key is required see Table 4-18. PIOU/RSIU Subassembly PCBs One IMDU PCB may be installed on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB to provide built-in remote maintenance modem capability for the Strata DK system. IMDU PCB One RMDS PCB may be installed on the RSIU PCB to provide built-in remote maintenance modem for the Strata DK424 system. RSIS Up to three RSIS PCBs may be installed on the RSIU PCB to provide one or more of the following RS-232 interface ports: MIS for ACD, SMDR, SMDI, and/or Local Maintenance (TTY) Port for DKAdmin/Backup PC. HESC-65A One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each digital telephone and 6500-series electronic telephone requiring the Loud Ringing Bell option. HESB Amplifier/ Speaker One HESB is required for each digital and electronic telephone providing the Loud Ringing Bell option. DK424 Configuration RMDS PCB One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to either a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU (customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB). One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU (a customer-supplied talkback amplifier/page speaker may be used in place of HESB). PPTC/PPTC9 Adapter (Modular to RS-232) PPTC (25-pin) PPTC-9 (9-pin) Strata DK I&M 5/99 PPTC adapter is used to connect an external modem DB25 female connector to a PIOU/ PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS modular jack. If a PPTC is used, a null modem adapter is also required. PPTC9 adapter is used to connect a personal computer DB9 male COM port connector to a PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS modular jack. These adaptors are required for: SMIS for ACD, SMDI, SMDR, and system maintenance PC or terminal interface. 4-31 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide Option Number Required Comments DPFT Unit The DPFT provides a means to connect eight selected CO lines to standard telephones in the event of a power failure (each DPFT requires an RSTU or PSTU PCB). There is no limit to the number of DPFTs installed, provided that the system power factor is not exceeded. MDFB The MDFB door phone option plugs into the DDCB or HDCB control box to provide a door phone. Three MDFBs can be connected to each DDCB or HDCB. The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page talkback. RBDB2 Battery distribution box required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets (wall or floor mount). Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2 to connect up to six DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box. Another cable is required for the seventh cabinet. See RC7C1A-1.7M in this table. RCCB1 or RCCB2 Conduit connection box required for AC and battery power connection to three or more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on a table or any number of cabinets on a wall.) Use RCCB1 for one to six cabinet floor installations. Use RCCB2 for seven cabinets. RCCB conduit box is required for floor mount installations of three or more Cabinets. RFIF Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting any number of cabinets. Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on floor. Three pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF. Wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes. RPSB1/RPSB2 Three-outlet AC Power Strip–one RPSB1 required when installing three or four cabinets (wall or floor mount). Two RPSB1s required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or floor mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations. RPSB2 is a high current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets. It is highly recommended to use the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to accommodate further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems. 4-32 RBTC1A-2M Two reserve power cables (for current carrying capacity) are required for three to six cabinets and three are required for seven cabinets when connecting reserve power battery terminals to three or more cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also required–see “RBDB2” below. PBTC-3M One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet if connecting reserve power for one or two cabinets (wall or table mount). Cable connects cabinet power supply to battery terminals. RC7C1A-1.7M Two cables used for seven cabinet installations only. Provides long data cable to connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the DK424 Base Cabinet. Provides a long battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to the Base Cabinet power supply. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 4 – Option Configuration Guide Number Required Option Comments Stratagy or VP Voice Mail Refer to Toshiba Stratagy or VP documentation for detailed information about the VM machines and to C2 of Worksheet 2 in this chapter for DK424 VM port requirements. PC Attendant Consoles (with RATI and RATHC) These features require customer-supplied personal computers. See feature user guides for individual personal computer requirements. DKAdmin/ Backup SMIS for ACD Other Customersupplied Items Telephone Subassembly Option EOCU Number Required Comments One EOCU must be installed on each PEKU and/or PESU that is connected to electronic telephones which are equipped to receive OCA. Place the PEKU or PESU where it will provide the most efficient use of the 8circuit EOCU: The PESU only provides 4 electronic telephone ports; HDSS consoles use s ports on a PEKU; HDCBs use 1 port on a PESU or PEKU. One DVSU is required for each digital telephone (2000, 1000-series) that should receive telephone speaker OCA. Not required for Handset/Headset Speaker OCA. HVSU2 6500-series Electronic Telephones equipped with one HVSU2 to receive Speaker OCA calls. HVSU/HVSI Electronic Telephones equipped with the older HVSU and HVSI subassemblies (one per telephone) to receive OCA calls. HHEU One HHEU PCB must be installed in each digital (2000, 1000 series) and electronic telephone (6500, 6005 series) that supports a headset or connects to an HESB providing a loud ringing bell. PDIU-DI2 One PDIU-DI2 or PDIU-DI data calling interface can be installed on a 2000series Digital Telephones. PDIU-DI RPCI-D1 2000-series Digital Telephones must be equipped with an RPCI-DI to transmit and receive voice and data calls and/or interface with a TAPI PC application interface. One RPCI-DI per telephone. DADM One or two Add-on Modules can be attached to 2000-series Digital Telephones to provide an additional 20 or 40 buttons. Any combination of CO /LQH, '66, and 6' (Speed Dial) buttons can be added to DADMs. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration DVSU 4-33 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check The Strata DK power supply was engineered for maximum cost efficiency to provide power for the most configurations. Because of this design, some power limitations exist when using old electronic-type telephones and/or telephone option hardware. For example, only 24 3000-series telephones can be installed in a cabinet. Each telephone and PCB has a negative Power Factor (PF) and the RPSU424 or RPSU280 power supply have a positive PF (+65). The sum of the telephones’ PFs and PCBs connected to a signal cabinet must not exceed –65. In the case of +5VDC, the power factor must not exceed 25. The sum of the calculated cabinet PFs must not exceed the values provided on Page 4-38. Table 4-23 shows the PF for PCBs and the RPSU280. PF numbers for telephones and devices are shown on the following page. Note Table 4-23 The maximum number of RWIUs must not exceed one for the Base Cabinet and two for the Expansion Cabinets. PCB and Power Supply Power Factors PCB Type +5VDC -24VDC IMDU 0.1 0.16 PCOU1, 2 1.9 2.0 PDKU1, 2 0.8 0.3 With 8 DKTs. PEKU 1.6 0.7 With 8 EKTs. PEPU 1.1 6.5 PESU 1.5 0.5 PIOU 2.0 6.5 PIOU2 1.1 6.5 PIOUS 0.75 4.0 Power Supply RPSU280 or RPSU424 25.0 65.0 R40S1A 0.0 2.8 RATU 1.7 0.3 RBSS1A 0.6 0.3 RBSS2A 0.0 0.3 With 4 EKTs and 4 SLTs. Does not use +5VDC. Does not use +5VDC. RBSU + RBSS 3.1 0.3 RBSU1A 2.5 1.0 RBSU2A 0.0 1.0 Does not use +5VDC. RBUS1A 0.0 0.3 Does not use +5VDC. Does not use +5VDC. RBUU1A 0.0 1.0 RCIS1A 0.3 0.1 RCIU1A/2A 0.7 RCIU2 4-34 Notes 0.2 0.2 RCMS1A 0.6 0.3 RCOS1A/2A 1.7 2.0 RCOU (4 CO) 2.5 2.0 RCOU + RCOS (8 CO) 3.6 4.0 RCOU1A/2A 1.9 2.0 RCTUA 2.0 1.0 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check PCB and Power Supply Power Factors (continued) Table 4-23 PCB Type +5VDC -24VDC RCTUB 4.0 1.0 RCTUBA/BB 4.0 1.9 RCTUC/D 4.5 1.9 RCTUE/F 10.0 1.9 RDDU 2.6 7.0 RDSU (-24VDC) 1.1 0.3 RDSU + R48S (-48VDC) 1.1 0.5 RDTU 1.8 1.0 REMU2/PEMU 1.0 7.5 RGLU1A/2A 2.1 2.5 RMCU1A 0.7 0.3 RMDS1A 0.35 0.16 RPTU 2.6 1.0 RRCS-12 1.5 1.0 RRCS-4 0.4 0.3 Notes With 4 DKTs and 4 SLTs. 2400 bps MODEM. RRCS-8 1.0 0.5 RSIS1A 0.35 0.15 2400 bps. RSIU1A 1.0 0.3 9600 bps. RSSU 0.7 0.3 RSTU/RSTU2 (-24VDC) 1.4 0.5 With 8 SLTs. RSTU1 + R48S (-48VDC) 1.4 1.0 With 8 SLTs. 4.0 2.3 With 8 MWs. RWIU 9.2 0.0 With 8, 16, 24, or 32 handsets. Note Table 4-24 Power factor calculation samples are shown in Tables 4-24 and 4-25. Strata DK424 Base Cabinet PCB PDKU2A Table 4-25 +5VDC -24VDC 2 1.6 0.3 RBSU1A + RBSS1A 1 3.2 0.3 RCOU1A + RCOS1A 1 3.6 4.0 (8 COs) RCTUA3A 1 2.0 1.0 RRCS1A-4 1 0.4 0.3 RWIU 1 9.0 0.0 Total 7 19.8 5.9 Quantity +5VDC -24VDC Strata DK424 Expansion Cabinet PCB Strata DK I&M Quantity DK424 Configuration RSTU2 + R48S (-48VDC) RBSU1A + RBSS1A 1 3.2 0.3 RCOU1A + RSOU1A 1 3.6 4.0 (8 COs) RWIU 2 18.0 0.0 Total 4 24.8 4.3 5/99 4-35 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check Telephone/Device Power Factors The power supply of each cabinet supplies a limited amount of power. For each cabinet, calculate the total Telephone/Device PF and add it to the appropriate cabinet in “Cabinet Power Factor, PCB/Telephone Device” on Page 4-38. Telephone/Device Base Cabinet (1) Qty. PF Total Expansion Cabinet (2) Expansion Cabinet (3) Expansion Cabinet (4) Qty. Qty. Qty. PF Total PF Total PF Total Digital Telephone (DKT, any series) 1~120 Telephones x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = 121~240 Telephones x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = 2000-series Electronic Telephone (EKT) x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 3000-series EKT x 2.5 = x 2.5 = x 2.5 = x 2.5 = 6000-series EKT x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 6005-series EKT x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 1~120 Telephones x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = 121~240 Telephones x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = DDCB/HDCB (with MDFB) x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = DDSS/HDSS Console x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Add-on Module (DADM) x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = Integrated PDIU-DI x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Integrated RPCI-DI x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Stand-alone Data Interface Unit x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Standard Telephone (-48V) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = Standard Telephone (-24V) x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Attendant Console x 4.0 = x 4.0 = x 4.0 = x 4.0 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = HHEU x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = 6500-series EKT Total Power Factor (PF) Note 4-36 PF varies by number of telephones because of station paging limit of 120 telephones. Always use “1.0” for DKT telephones when calculating PFs for individual cabinets. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check Telephone/Device Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet (5) (6) Expansion Cabinet (7) Qty. Qty. PF Total Qty. PF Total PF Total Digital Telephone (DKT, any series) 1~120 Telephones x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = 121~240 Telephones x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = 2000-series Electronic Telephone (EKT) x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 3000-series EKT x 2.5 = x 2.5 = x 2.5 = 6000-series EKT x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 6005-series EKT x 2.0 = x 2.0 = x 2.0 = 1~120 Telephones x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = 121~240 Telephones x 0.6 = x 0.6 = x 0.6 = DDCB/HDCB (w.MDFB) x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = DDSS/HDSS Console x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Add-on Module x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = Integrated PDIU-DI x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Integrated RPCI-DI x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Stand-alone Data Interface Unit x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Standard Telephone (48V) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = Standard Telephone (24V) x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Attendant Console x 4.0 = x 4.0 = x 4.0 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = HHEU x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = 6500-series EKT DK424 Configuration Total Power Factor (PF) Note Strata DK I&M 5/99 PF varies by number of telephones because of station paging limit of 120 telephones. Always use “1.0” for DKT telephones when calculating PFs for individual cabinets. 4-37 DK424 Configuration Worksheet 5 – System Power Factor Check Cabinet Power Factor, PCB/Telephone Device Calculate the total PF of each cabinet (must be less than 65). See Worksheet 2, Table 4-9 for PCB quantity and type, and Table 4-23 for PF numbers. The Total Cabinet PF must not exceed the limits shown in Max. PF Allowed, at the bottom of this chart. Cabinets 1 2 PCB Type PF PCB Type 3 PF PCB Type 4 PF PCB Type 5 PF PCB Type 6 PF PCB Type 7 PF PCB Type PF 1 2 Slots 3 4 5 6 7 Power Factor 8 Cabinet PF (subtotal) Telephone/ Device PF (Page 4-36) Cabinet PF (total) Max. PF Allowed (all cabinets combined) Note 4-38 65 130 195 260 325 390 455 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Cabinets 2~7: Last two slots are available on the DK424 (RCTUE/F). DK424 Installation 5 This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK424 system. It includes information on site requirements and provides installation instructions for various cabinet configurations. It also explains how to install ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (Battery Backup) cabling, and Printed Circuit Board (PCB) cabling. Inspection When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. 5-1 DK424 Installation Site Requirements Site Requirements Input Power The DK424 requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17.5 amps. The system requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. See “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8 for complete AC power cabling, ground wiring and battery installation instructions.) CAUTION! To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an ON/OFF wall switch not be used on AC circuits dedicated for the use of DK424. A reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be connected to the DK424 to serve as a backup in case of power failure. Clearance and Location The Base and optional Expansion Cabinets may be either floor or wall mounted. Figure 5-1 shows the minimum clearance requirements. See “Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet” on Page 5-11 and “AC Power Distribution for Six Cabinets” on Page 5-36 for details. Notes ● ● Floor mounting requires the following additional hardware: ● RFIF – floor mounting stands and brackets. ● RCCB – electrical conduit box, if three or more cabinets are installed. Wall mounting may require a plywood (3/4 inch thick) backboard. When selecting a location for the cabinets, the location must be: ♦ Dry and clean ♦ Well-ventilated ♦ Well-illuminated ♦ Easily accessible The location must not be: ♦ Subject to extreme heat or cold ♦ Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants ♦ Subject to excessive vibration ♦ Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment Optional customer-supplied reserve batteries require a well-ventilated location close (within nine feet) to the DK424 cabinets. 5-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Site Requirements Front View Top View 23.6" 24" 14.5" Base Cabinet Wall 23.6" Cabinets 24" 9.75 " Expansion Cabinet Wall 36" Expansion Cabinet 78" Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Minimum Clearance Requirements (Wall Mounting) Expansion Cabinet 6" Floor Front View Top View 23.6" 24" Base Cabinet 13.5" Wall 24" 2" Brackets (RWBF) Expansion Cabinet Wall 23.6" Cabinets Expansion Cabinet 75" 11.75 " 36" Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 3" Floor Mount Stands (RFMF) Minimum Clearance Requirements (Floor Mounting) 3" Floor 1451 Figure 5-1 Strata DK I&M DK424 Installation Expansion Cabinet DK424 Minimum Clearance Requirements 5/99 5-3 DK424 Installation Site Requirements Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics See Table 5-1 for the DK424 electrical/environmental requirements and characteristics. Table 5-1 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics DK424 Primary Power Input AC AC amps for seven-cabinet system AC frequency Watts per cabinet (continuous) Watts for six cabinet system (continuous) DK424 Maximum Peak AC Input Current 1 cabinet – 2.5 amps 2 cabinets –5.0 amps 3 cabinets – 7.5 amps 4 cabinets – 10.0 amps Environmental Specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature Power Supply DC voltage output specification 115VAC ± 10VAC 20 amp circuit 50/60 Hz 180 845 5 cabinets – 11.5 amps 6 cabinets –15.0 amps 7 cabinets – 17.5 amps 32~104° F (0~40° C) 20~80% relative humidity without condensation -4~158° F (-20~70° C) -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC) +5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion Cabinet only Battery Charger Characteristics Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC PESU (Circuits 1 and 2) Ring voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper: Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load) Ringing capability 2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position RSTU2 or RDSU Ring voltage 80V RMS sine wave Ringing capability 1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting RSTU2 Message Waiting voltage -90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.) RSTU2 or PESU modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum BTU Rating PDKU (5) RCOU/RCOS (1) 190 BTUs (56 watt hours) per cabinet RCTUB (1) DKTs (40) Traffic Rating Characteristics 9 CCS per station system-wide 36 CCS per ACD/SMIS station Note There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description for details. 5-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Site Requirements Cable Lengths The Base and optional Expansion Cabinets must be placed within the allowed maximum distance of each other as designated by Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Station Loop Requirements Device Interface PCB Circuits Digital telephones1 PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DDSS consoles PDKU (8) PDIU-DS PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DDCB PDKU or RDSU (5) Attendant Console RATU (1~4) HDCB PEKU (5) or PESU (5)2 Electronic telephones PEKU or PESU RPCI-DI or PDIU-D12 PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) DADM PDKU (1~8) or RDSU (5~8) RATI RATU (1~4) HDSS consoles PEKU (7 & 8) No. of Wire Pairs (use 24 AWG twisted pair) 2-pair 40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m) 20 ohms 500 ft. (152 m) 300 ohms Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with 150 ohm device.3 600 ohms Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m) with 150 ohm device.3 1,200 ohms Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m) with 150 ohm device.3 2-pair (3-pair required for OCA) Shares digital telephone wirepair1 1 or 2-pair 2-pair 1-pair RSTU (1~8) RDSU/RSTS (1~4) with R48S option 1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM, OCA, Headset, or Data Interface Unit. DK424 Installation RSTU (1~8) RDSU/RSTS (1~4) without R48S option Maximum Distance from Cabinet to Device 1-pair PSTU (1~8) or PESU (1 & 2)1 Standard telephones, voice mail, Auto Attendant, etc. Max Loop Resistance (including device) 2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used. 3. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-5 DK424 Installation Site Requirements Network Requirements The system network requirements are provided in Table 5-3. Table 5-3 DK424 Network Requirements Network Jack Ringer Equivalence Universal Service Order Code RJ21X N/A 9.0F 02LS2 RJ14C/RJ21X 0.3B N/A 02RV2-T RJ14C/RJ21X 0.0B AS.2 TL11M, 2-wire TL31M, 4-wire TL12M, type 2, 2-wire TL32M, type 2, 4-wire RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ2FX RJ2HX Not Available (N/A) 9.0F 02GS2 (ground) 02LS2 (loop) RJ14C/RJ1CX 0.3B N/A (See last bullet note on Note 2 below.) RJ48C/RJ48X/ RJ48M N/A 6.0P N/A RJ21X/RJ14C 0.3B N/A 04DU9-1SN RJ48C/RJ48M N/A 02IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI) 02IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A RCMU/RCMS (CAMA) 02RV2-O RJ11C/RJ21-X N/A PCB/Interface Facility Interface Code OL13A (PESU) 1 PESU/RSTU2/RDSU (Off-premises Station) OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with R48S-48V) RCOU/RCOS (loop start line) RDDU REMU type 1 or type 2 RGLU2 (ground or loop start line) RDTU (DS-1/T1)2 RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID) 3 RPTU (PRI) RBSU/RBSS (S/T, OL13B (RSTU2, –24V) BRI)3 3 6.0P 1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection. 2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified: ● The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels. Unused channels must be bit-stuffed. ● Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or Immediate). ● Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame Format to be used, either is adequate for DK424 CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU. ● Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424 T1 CO digital voice lines. ● The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424 T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit. (CSUs are a Telco requirement.) ● RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN. 3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified. 5-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Cabinet Installation Considerations Cabinet Installation Considerations The Base (DKSUB424) and Expansion Cabinets (DKSUE424) can be wall or floor mounted. To make it easier to add cabinets (after the initial installation) when a customer needs to expand, install the Base Cabinet on top for wall-mount installations and on the bottom for floor-mount installations. The dimensions of the Base and Expansion Cabinets are: Height: Base Cabinet: 11 3/4 inches Height: Expansion Cabinet: 10 inches Width: 23 5/8 inches Depth: 9 3/4 inches Weight: Note approx. 30.5 lbs. (14 kg.) The weight approximates a cabinet completely filled with PCBs. Weight may vary slightly, depending on PCBs. Recommended Installation Sequence Step 1. Install power supplies in cabinets. 2. Mount cabinets on floor or wall. Reference Information “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8. “Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet” on Page 5-11. “Cabinet Floor Mounting” on Page 5-21. 3. Install ground wiring. “AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test” on Page 5-29. 4. Install AC power cabling to cabinets. “AC Power Cabling Installation” on Page 5-30. 5. Install reserve power cabling. “Reserve Power Installation” on Page 5-32. 6. Install PCBs and PCB cabling. Figures 5-10, 5-12, and 5-21. Note Each cabinet requires four wood screws (#12X 1.25 inch size) for wall mount installation. Wood screws are not provided with the system. DK424 Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-7 DK424 Installation Power Supply Installation Power Supply Installation The Base and Expansion Cabinets are shipped from the factory without the power supply installed. The DK424 cabinets use the same power supply (RPSU280 and/or RPSU424) as the DK280. Note RPSU280 and RPSU424 are fit, form, and functionally the same. They can be interchanged and mixed in DK280 and DK424 systems. ➤ To install power supplies in cabinets of new or installed systems 1. Remove the power supply from its box. The box should also contain a plastic bag with two jumper plugs for the power supply DKSUB or DKSUE connector. An AC power cord and the power supply mounting screws are provided with the KSU cabinet. 2. Make sure that the front and right side covers are removed from the cabinet (see Figure 5-2). 3. Slide the power supply into the right side of the cabinet so that its four mounting holes align with the four cabinet mounting holes (see Figure 5-3). (Make sure that the two backplane FG wires are positioned between the FG wire holder and the power supply.) Note The backplane FG wires are not safety grounds: they are required for proper system CO line operation. 4. Plug the DC OUT cable plug into the DC OUT connector on the power supply. (The plug has a guide key on it to ensure that it is plugged in correctly.) 5. Secure the FG wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screw. 6. Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the four provided screws. 7. If the cabinet is the Base Unit, plug the jumper plug that has a wire connected into the “DKSUB” jumper connector on the power supply. 8. If the cabinet is an Expansion Unit (DKSUE), plug the jumper plug that does not have a wire connected into the “DKSUE” jumper connector. Important! The power supply with the “DKSUB” jumper plug (plug with wire) installed is the master and has ON/OFF control over all other power supplies, which are designated as slaves. If the master power supply is turned OFF or ON, all other power supplies will automatically turn OFF or ON. (Individual power supplies must be turned on.) Power supplies that have the “DKSUE” jumper plugs (plug without wire) installed will not control other power supplies, but can be turned OFF or ON individually with their own ON/OFF switch. (The master power supply must be on and the intercabinet “Data” ribbon cable must be installed to allow a slave power supply to be turned ON.) 9. See Figure 5-3 to ensure that the power supply is properly installed. 10. Install power supplies in all cabinets, using Steps 1~9. 11. Install the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets, ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. Note 5-8 Power Supply testing procedures are provided in the Fault Finding chapter, which should be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Power Supply Installation Plastic Bag with Four Power Supply Mounting Screws Supplied with each Cabinet Shift cover left to remove front cover. Intercabinet Power Supply Ground Wire (Supplied with each Expansion Cabinet) Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) Loosen four screws to remove the top cover: Note: Do not remove the top cover if the Base Cabinet is the top cabinet. Front Cover Remove this screw to remove the front cover t h ig R t n ro F Loosen three screws to remove front cover 1452 Figure 5-2 Strata DK I&M Loosen two screws to remove the side covers (right and left side covers) DK424 Installation Right Side Cover DK424 Cabinet Front, Side, and Top Cover Removal and Installation 5/99 5-9 DK424 Installation Power Supply Installation R11 PCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 Top (2) Mounting Holes Bottom (2) Mounting Holes R11 RCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 4251 FG Wire and Spade Lug (Functional Ground) Jumper with wire must be installed only in base cabinet power supply using this connector Power Supply DC OUT DC Out Connector -24V –24V Circuit Breakers 1 POWER 2 +5V 3 -5V Jumper with no wire must be installed in all expansion cabinet power supplies using this connector DKSUB ➜ DKSUE ➜ Power Indicator LEDs (Green) Base Jumper Plug + BATT - FG Wire Holder ON Expansion Jumper Plug OFF FG Screw (3) FG Note AC IN ON/OFF Switch DC Voltage Pins Red Wire No Wire Blue Wire White Wire Green Wire +5V 0V –5V +5V 0V Green Wire Green Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire 0V 0V –24V –24V –24V Power Supply Jumpers are shipped in a plastic bag attached to each power supply as follows: AC Power Cord Third Wire Ground or Power Supply Daisy Chain Ground to Next Power Supply 24V Circuit Breaker Assignments: BATT (Volts) +5V (+4.5 ~ +5.5) EXP. Cabinet Base Cabinet DC Voltage Specification -5V (–4.5 ~ –5.5), Expansion Cabinet only + 0 -24V (–26.3 ~ –27.8) – –26.3 ~ –27.8* 24V-1 S15, S16 24V-1 SX1, SX2 24V-2 S13, S14 24V-2 SX3, SX4, SX5 24V-3 S11, S12 24V-3 SX6, SX7, SX8 On* RPSU424, the BATT output is 0 volts unless connected to good batteries Figure 5-3 5-10 DK424 Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Removal 1. Remove the front and right side covers (Figures 5-2 and 5-3) from the cabinet where the power supply will be removed. Remove the right side covers of other cabinets as necessary to disconnect wiring. 2. Turn the power supply OFF, and disconnect the AC power cord, all ground wiring and reserve power cabling that is connected to the power supply. 3. Disconnect the DC OUT cable plug from the DC OUT connector. 4. Loosen the four mounting screws securing the power supply to the cabinet and remove the power supply. Power Supply Replacement ➤ Install the replacement power supply per “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8. Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet If the cabinet mounting holes align with wall studs, the cabinet can be installed directly on the wall (see Figure 5-4). For more than two cabinets, a wooden backboard between the cabinet and the wall is highly recommended (see Figure 5-5). Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) Installation 1. If using a backboard: Obtain a board, such as plywood, that is at least 3/4 of an inch thick. The board should be at least 6-1/2 feet high (completely expanded systems with seven cabinets require this much height) and two feet wide (minimum). Secure the board to the wall with wood screws with the bottom edge of the board is six inches above the floor. (If there are wall studs, make sure the screws align with the studs.) 2. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Base Cabinet (see Figure 5-6). Note The bottom left screw must be completely removed. The two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the front cover should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal. 4. Use a level to make sure that the back cover is held level. 5. Trace the upper arch of the top mounting holes with a pencil. DK424 Installation 3. Hold the Base Cabinet back cover against the wall or backboard so that its two top mounting holes are approximately 6-1/2 feet (78 inches) above the floor. This allows seven cabinets to be installed (top-down) with a six-inch clearance between the floor and bottom cabinet (see Figures 5-7 and 5-8). 6. Remove the back cover from the wall. 7. Draw a line between the top two marking hole marks. 8. Drill holes on the line in the middle of the arch tracing. 9. Screw #12 X 1.25 inch size wood screws into the two drilled holes, leaving about 1/8 of an inch clearance between the screw heads and the wall. 10. Hang the Base Cabinet back cover from the top two screws and secure the screws into the wall. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-11 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet 11. Drill holes at the bottom two mounting holes of the back cover, and secure #12 X 1.25 inch wood screws into the two holes. 12. If installing just a Base Cabinet: Position the Base Cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers, slide the cabinet to the right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws on the right side of the cabinet. If installing Expansion Cabinets, skip to “Cabinet Floor Mounting” on Page 5-21. 13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. 14. Fill out the slot identification label on the cabinet (see Figure 5-11). 15. Reinstall the front cover, top cover, and side covers onto the cabinet. Expansion Cabinet Installation (DKSUE424) Note Toshiba recommends installing cabinets (see Figure 5-5~5-10 and 5-27) from the top down, with the Base Cabinet on top, the first Expansion Cabinet below it, the second Cabinet below that, etc. 1. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Expansion Cabinets. Note The bottom left screw must be completely removed. The two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the front cover should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal. 2. Hold an Expansion Cabinet back cover against the wall so that its top locating parts align with the bottom locating parts of the Base Cabinet back cover. To secure the Expansion Cabinet back cover to the wall or wall board, repeat Steps 5~11 from “Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) Installation” on Page 5-11. 3. To install additional Expansion Cabinet back covers, repeat Step 2 above. 4. Starting with the top Expansion Cabinet back cover (which is fastened to the wall), position an Expansion Cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers. Slide the cabinet to the right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws to the right side of the back cover. Repeat for all other Expansion Cabinets. 5. Loosen the bonding connection plates fastened on both sides of the first Expansion Cabinet, then fasten the plates between the Base Cabinet and the first Expansion Cabinet. Repeat to connect the first Expansion Cabinet to the second Expansion Cabinet, etc. 6. Loosen data cable door locking screws and open data cable doors; then connect the first Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB 2” (top) data cable connector on the Base Cabinet. Install data cables in appropriate connectors for all other Expansion Cabinets). 7. After all data cables are installed, close data cable doors and secure with the locking screw. Important! Data cable door screws must be firmly tightened for proper system operation. 8. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. 9. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet. 10. Reinstall covers onto cabinets. 5-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Wall 16 in. Dealer Supplied #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (4 Screws per Cabinet) Back Cover 1455 DK424 Installation Up nt Fro Figure 5-4 Strata DK I&M DK424 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram (Directly on the Wall) 5/99 5-13 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Locating Parts Plaster Board Wall 3/4" Plywood Backboard #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (As many as necessary to secure plywood backboard) Dealer Supplied #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (4 Screws Per Cabinet) Back Cover 6.5 ft. (for seven cabinets ) Up nt 6 inches between bottom cabinet and floor Fro 1456 Figure 5-5 5-14 Floor DK424 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram (with Plywood Backboard) Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) Loosen four screws to remove the top cover: Note Do not remove the top cover if the Base Cabinet is the top cabinet. Front Cover Remove this screw to remove the front cover Right Side Cover t ig n R ro F t h Loosen three screws to remove front cover Loosen two screws to remove the side covers (right and left side covers) R ig h t F ro n t Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) Back Cover Remove four screws to remove back cover Loosen two screws to remove the side cover (right and left covers) DK424 Installation Right Side Cover 1457 Figure 5-6 Strata DK I&M DK424 Cabinet Cover Removal and Installation 5/99 5-15 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Marking Hole 16 IN. Trace Upper Arch 8.1 Back Cover IN. 1459 Figure 5-7 DK424 Back Cover Mounting Holes Hang cabinet on back cover then slide to right. Hanger Back Cover Hanger Hole Back Cover Mounting Strip Important! After mounting cabinet to back cover use two screws to fasten cabinet to back cover. 1460 Figure 5-8 5-16 DK424 Mounting Cabinet on Back Cover Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Right Side AC Power Cables Front Bonding Connection Plates (Required for all wall mounted expansion cabinets on both right and left sides) To AC Outlet 1462 Figure 5-9 Right Side View of Cabinet Interior Note Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RPSB1 or RPSB2 Power Strip See “Outlet Strip (RPSB1 and RPSB2) Installation” on Page 5-34 for RPSB1 and RPSB2 cabinet locations. 5-17 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet Cab 2 Cable Important ! Data cable shield doors must be closed and secured at all times during the system operation. Left Side Base Cabinet CA B 2 CA B 3 CA B 4 CA B 5 CA B 6 CA B 7 Cable Guard Screw Cable Guard PCB Cable Data Cables Expansion Cabinet Front Data Cable Door (shown open) Expansion Cabinet 1461 Bonding Connection Plate (required for all wall mount expansion cabinets) To MDF Figure 5-10 Left Side View of Cabinet Interior 5-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet R11 RCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 Printed Circuit Board Cables CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 S_1 S_2 S_3 S_4 S_5 S_6 S_7 S_8 1848 DK424 Installation 1848 Figure 5-11 Front View of DK424 Cabinet Interior Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-19 DK424 Installation Wall Mounting the Base Cabinet 25-Pair Amphenol Cables Knock Out Plastic Top A. Cables Run Out of Top of Cabinet(s) To MDF B. Cables Run Out of Side of Cabinet(s) 25-Pair Amphenol Cables C. Cables Run Out of Bottom of Cabinet(s) To MDF To MDF 25-Pair Amphenol Cables 1464 Figure 5-12 DK424 Cabinet Cable Routing 5-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting Cabinet Floor Mounting One or Two Cabinets 1. Remove front, side, and top covers from cabinet(s) (Figure 5-2). Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver (Figure 5-6). 2. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8. 3. If installing just one cabinet, install the RFMF fixtures on each side of the bottom of the cabinet (Figure 5-13) and place the cabinet where it should be installed (go to Step 6). 4. If installing two cabinets, install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the cabinet that will be the bottom cabinet, making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. 5. If installing two cabinets: ♦ Set the bottom cabinet on the floor or mount surface, then set the top cabinet on the bottom cabinet. ♦ Fasten the two cabinets together with the four screws provided: (two screws at front “A” and two at back “B” of cabinet. Place cabinet where it should be installed. ♦ Connect the Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB. 2” data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28). 6. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. 7. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on cabinet(s) (Figure 5-11). 8. Reinstall covers on to cabinet(s). Three or More Cabinets This section shows you how to mount three or more cabinets to a concrete, wood or computer room floor. Use the General Steps for all of these methods first, then the specific steps that follow for each method. 1. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8. Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using Phillips screwdriver (Figure 5-5). 3. Install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the bottom cabinet. (Make sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. For Steps 3~10, see Figures 5-13~5-18. DK424 Installation 2. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 5-2). 4. Place cabinet two on top of the bottom cabinet and connect them together at points A and B with the screws provided. 5. Place cabinet three on top of cabinet 2 and connect them together at points A and B with the screws provided. 6. If installing more than three cabinets, install wall brackets (RWBF1) on the top of cabinet 3. Position the 3 cabinets parallel to the wall (2 inches from the wall) and secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors as required. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-21 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting 7. For systems with just three cabinets, secure the floor fixtures (already attached to the bottom cabinet) to the floor with the customer-provided floor bolts. 8. Refer to the following sub-sections and anchor the system to concrete, wood, or computer room floor. After completing those steps, proceed to Step 12. For systems with four or more cabinets, skip this step and proceed to Step 9. 9. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with the screws provided. 10. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF1) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 11. Check to make sure the cabinets are parallel to the wall. Secure the floor fixtures attached to the bottom cabinet to the floor with the customer-provided floor anchors. 12. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28). (The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labeled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.) 13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. 14. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet and reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) 5-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting Top Cabinet Wall Securing Brackets (RWBFIA) (Left and Right Side) B B Front (2) Mouting Screws A Provided with RFIF Kit B Back (2) Mounting Screws Provided with RFIF Kit B B B A B A B A B A B A B Third Cabinet Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF1A) (Left and right side) A RFMF Mounting Screws B 1 A Anchor Bolts (2) 1849 B Floor Fixture (RFMF1A) Anchor Bolts (2) RFMF Mounting Screws Figure 5-13 DK424 Cabinet Floor Installation DK424 Installation RFMF is inside of cabinet edge A Bottom Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF1A) Important! ● ● ● Strata DK I&M RFMF1A (two-each) and RWBF1A (six-each) are supplied with the floor installation kit RFIF Upper and third cabinets must be fixed to the wall with RWBFS on each side (use #12 x 1.25 wood screws and wall anchors, as required) Floor fixture (RFMF) must be fixed to floor by either anchor bolts, or wall by RWBF wall brackets (see Figures 5-14 and 5-15). 5/99 5-23 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting RWBF ,,,,,,,,, , , , , ,,,,,,,,, , , , , ,,,,, , , , , ,,,,,,, ,,,,, RWBF RWBFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated “A” Front two screws left and right sides RWBF “B” Back two screws left and right sides A B RWBF A B A B RWBF B A B A B A B A B A B A B RWBF A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B RWBF RWBF , ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, , ,, Customersupplied anchor bolts (each side) RWBF A RFMF RFMF RFMF RFMF RFMF 2705 RFMFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated Note RWBF1A (3-pairs) and RFMF1A (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit RFIF. Figure 5-14 Floor Mounting Cabinets (Bolted to the Floor) ,,,,,,,,,, , , , , , ,,,,, , , , , , , , , ,,,, , , , ,,,,,,, ,,,,,, RWBF RWBF RWBFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated RWBF “A” Front two screws, left and right sides “B” Back two screws, left and right sides RWBF RWBF A B A B B A B B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF , ,,, ,,, , ,,, , ,,, , ,,, RWBF A A RFMF RFMF RFMF RFMF RFMF 1850 RFMFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated Note RWBF1A (3-pairs) and RFMF1A (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit RFIF. Figure 5-15 Floor Mounting Cabinets, (Not Bolted to the Floor) 5-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting Bolt Cabinets to a Concrete Floor 1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (see Figures 5-13 and 5-16). 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. 4. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors. 5. Install the bolt anchors, with plugs, in the drilled holes. 6. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor. 7. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 8. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. DK424 Base Cabinet ,,,,, RFMF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Concrete Floor Bolt Anchor Plug 1467 Figure 5-16 Floor Mount Installation – Concrete Floor Bolt Cabinets to a Wooden Floor 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. DK424 Installation 1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (RFMF). See Figures 5-13 and 5-17. 4. Drill pilot holes to make insertion of 3/8 inch lag bolts easier, and to prevent splitting of wood flooring. 5. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 6. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using lag bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-25 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting DK424 Base Cabinet ,,,,,,, ,,,,,,, RFMF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Wooden Floor 1468 Figure 5-17 Floor Mount Installation – Wooden Floor Bolt Cabinets to a Computer Room Floor 1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (RFMF). See Figures 5-13 and 5-18. 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. 4. Drill holes through tile for 3/8-inch threaded rods. 5. After the tiles have been drilled, insert threaded rods through the holes in the tile and mark the concrete floor directly beneath the holes in the tiles. 6. Remove the tiles. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors. 7. Install the bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes. 8. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor. 9. Screw threaded rods into each bolt anchor. 10. Install a hex nut, lock washer, and flat washer on each threaded rod. Screw the nuts down far enough to allow floor tiles to be replaced over the threaded rods. 11. Replace tiles over threaded rods in their original positions on the floor. 12. Reach under the tiles, and screw the hex nuts upward until the flat washers are touching the bottom of the tile. 13. Use a hack saw to cut the threaded rods at a height of approximately 1.5 inches above the floor tile. 14. Move the Base Cabinet into position over the threaded rods. 15. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using flat washers, lock washer, and hex nuts on each threaded rod. 5-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting DK424 Base Cabinet ,,,, RFMF (Floor mount fixture) Flat Washer Lock Washer Hex Nut Concrete ,,, ,,, ,, Floor Tiles Lead Anchors ,,,, ,,,, , 1469 Figure 5-18 Floor Mount Installation – Computer Room Floor Mount Cabinets to Computer Room Floor (Unbolted) 1. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per “Power Supply Installation” on Page 5-8. 2. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 5-2). Note As shown in Figure 5-18, the two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the front cover (the bottom left screw must be completely removed) should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal. Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver (Figure 5-5). 3. Install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the bottom cabinet (Figures 5-12 and 5-14), making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. 5. Place a cabinet on top of the bottom cabinet and connect the cabinets together at points A and B with the screws provided. 6. Install wall brackets (RWBF1) on the top of cabinet three and secure them to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. DK424 Installation 4. Secure a wall bracket (RWBF1) to both floor fixtures with the screws provided. Secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. 7. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with screws provided. 8. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF1) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 9. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28). The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labeled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.) Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-27 DK424 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements 10. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 5-7. 11. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet (see Figure 5-11), then reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) Cabinet Removal – Floor-Mounted Systems This procedure is written on the presumption that the Base Cabinet is the bottom cabinet of systems with two or more cabinets. 1. Turn the system power OFF, and remove the front and side covers from the cabinet to be replaced and any cabinets above it. Remove the top cover from the top cabinet if it is to be replaced (Figure 5-6). 2. Unplug the AC power cord of the cabinet and any reserve power cabling connected to the power supply. Repeat this procedure for each cabinet above the cabinet to be replaced. 3. If a power strip (RPSB1 or RPSB2) (Figure 5-19), Conduit Connection Box (RCCB1 or RCCB2), or Battery Distribution Box (RBDB1 or RBDB2) is connected to the cabinet, remove it (Figures 5-23 and 5-26). 4. If the cabinet to be replaced is the Base Cabinet (DKSUB424), disconnect all data cables connected to the Base Cabinet data cable connector. 5. If the cabinet to be replaced is an Expansion Cabinet (DKSUE424), disconnect the data cable of the cabinet from the data cable connector on the Base Cabinet. Repeat this procedure for all Expansion Cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced. 6. Disconnect any intercabinet ground wiring or system ground wiring connected to the cabinet. Repeat this procedure for any cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced. 7. Remove any cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced, and then remove the cabinet to be replaced. Cabinet Replacement ➤ To replace cabinets, refer to “Cabinet Floor Mounting” on Page 5-21. AC Power and Grounding Requirements The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety. The AC power cord(s) already contains a conductor for the “third wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet. An insulated conductor must connect the frame ground terminal on the Base Cabinet (or the bottom Expansion Cabinet) to a cold water pipe or the building ground. Notes ● The “third wire ground” (“A” in Figure 5-28) must be dedicated. The conductor connected to the frame ground must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, but must not depend on the cord and plug of the system. WARNING! Failure to provide ground may be a safety hazard or lead to confusing trouble symptoms and, in extreme cases, system failure. 5-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test Test each “third wire ground” separately for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm) or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the following procedure. ➤ To test each “third wire ground” for continuity WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. 1. Obtain suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC. 2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100 ~ 125VAC. 3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground, point A in Figure 319). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained. 4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal. CAUTION! If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit Steps 5 and 6, and proceed directly to Step 7. 5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal and a reading of 100 ~ 125VAC on the other terminal is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet. 6. Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than one ohm. CAUTION! ➤ To test the frame ground conductor for continuity WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. DK424 Installation If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded. If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. 1. Disconnect the AC plug(s) of the system to make sure that the separate earth ground paths are separated. 2. With a suitable volt/ohm meter, perform a reading between points “A” and “B” shown in Figures 5-28, 5-21 and 5-22. Verify that the readings do not exceed the figures listed below. If they do, the condition must be corrected by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-29 DK424 Installation AC Power Cabling Installation A to B: 1 volt maximum then A to B: 1 ohm maximum Intercabinet Ground Connect intercabinet ground wires (supplied with each cabinet) between cabinets in systems with two or more cabinets (Figures 5-21 and 5-22). AC Power Cabling Installation The system requires an input power source of 50/60 cycles, 115VAC ± 10 VAC, and up to 17.5 amps AC to operate. AC power cabling requirements vary, depending on the method of cabinet installation and the number of cabinets. Refer “Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics” on Page 5-4 for electrical power requirements. Some floor-mounted configurations and all wall-mounted configurations require AC outlets, which must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. To avoid accidental turn off, do not configure the outlet with an ON/OFF switch. AC Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) Refer to the following instructions to install AC power cabling to floor or wall-mounted systems with just one or two cabinets: 1. Make sure all power supply (RPSU280) switches are in the OFF position. 2. If two cabinets are installed and local electrical code allows only one AC power cord from the system, install the RPSB2 in the bottom cabinet per Figures 5-19 and 5-20. 3. For AC power cords that will be plugged directly into a wall outlet: Undo the tie wrap that keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male end into the wall outlet. 4. For AC power cords that will be plugged into power strips: Do not undo the tie wrap that keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male end into the RPSB power strip. Plug the power strip power cord into a wall outlet (see Figure 5-9). Note 5-30 Power Supply testing procedures are provided in Chapter 12 – Fault Finding, which should be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation AC Power Cabling Installation AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) Local electrical codes specify that a maximum of one or two AC power cords from the system can be plugged into wall outlets. Systems with three or more cabinets must be equipped with power strips (RPSB1 or RPSB2) to adhere to this requirement. Each power strip has three outlets and an AC power cord. Three- or four-cabinet systems require one power strip, while five- to seven-cabinet systems require two or three power strips, depending on local electrical code requirements pertaining to the number of AC power cords (one or two) allowed from the system. ➤ To install AC power cabling to wall-mounted systems with three or more cabinets Refer to Figures 5-19~5-22 and follow these steps: 1. Make sure all power supply (RPSU280) switches are in the off position. 2. Secure power strips to applicable cabinets. 3. For AC power cords that will be plugged directly into a wall outlet: Undo the tie wrap that keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male end into the wall outlet. 4. For AC power cords that will be plugged into power strips: Do not undo the tie wrap that keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male end into the power strip. Plug the power strip power cord into a wall outlet. Note Power Supply testing procedures are provided in Chapter 12 – Fault Finding, which should be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly. AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) UL specifies that floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets require the installation of a Conduit Connection Box (RCCB1 or RCCB2) to connect AC power cabling (and reserve power) to the system. AC power cabling for floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets requires the installation of one or two power strips (RPSB1and RPSB2), depending on the number of cabinets installed. ➤ To connect AC power cabling to floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets Refer to Figures 5-19~5-19, 5-22, 5-26 and 5-27, and follow these steps: 2. Have a licensed electrician install conduit and cabling from the AC power source to the conduit connection box and local electrical codes. The remaining steps in this procedure can be performed by the regular system installer. 3. Make sure all power supply (RPSU280) switches are in the off position. DK424 Installation 1. Make sure that the conduit connection box is installed on the bottom cabinet. The box can be installed by the regular system installer. 4. Secure power strips to applicable cabinets. 5. For each power supply: Plug the female end of the provided AC power cord into the power supply, without removing the tie wrap that keeps the cord coiled. Plug the other end of the cord into a power strip. 6. Plug power strip power cords into the conduit connection box. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-31 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation Reserve Power Installation Two or four customer-supplied, 12VDC batteries (80 amp hours maximum) can be connected to the system as a power failure backup. In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery power without any interruption to existing calls or other normal system functions. The length of time reserve power operates depends on the system, size and number of batteries provided, and the system load. Typical reserve power duration estimates and battery specifications are estimated with the following considerations (see Table 5-4): ♦ Batteries have full charge at start of operation. ♦ Two or four batteries connected per Figure 5-25. ♦ Batteries are 12VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each. ♦ System is operating at full load traffic with LCD phones. ♦ Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance-free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and manufacturer. These figures should only be used as an estimate. Table 5-4 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimate Number of Cabinets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 16.0 hr 8.0 hr 5.0 hr 3.7 hr 3.0 hr 2.5 hr 0.5 hr Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 32.0 hr 16.0 hr 10.0 hr 7.5 hr 6.0 hr 5.0 hr 2.0 hr DC Current Drain (-24 VDC) 3.5 amps 6.7 amps 9.9 amps 13.1 amps 16.3 amps 19.5 amps 22.7 amps AC Input Current (AC Current Limitation by National Electric Code) 2.5 amps 5.0 amps 7.5 amps 10.0 amps 11.5 amps 15.0 amps 17.5 amps WARNING! Some batteries can generate explosive gases. Therefore... Ensure that batteries are located in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke near batteries. Avoid creating any electrical sparks near batteries. Use commercially available battery enclosures to reduce risk to nearby people and equipment. The procedure for installing reserve power varies, depending on the number of cabinets in the system and the mounting method employed in installing the cabinets. The following text details reserve power battery installation requirements. WARNING! Battery cables that exit the cabinet(s) are not UL listed because of possible incorrect installations. Have a licensed electrician install these cables. 5-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) 1. Connect the black jumper wire (supplied with the PBTC-3M cable) from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (Figure 5-20). 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC-3M cable. 3. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable white lead to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Important! The cabinet(s) must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply ON/OFF switch set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT+/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 4. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the Base Cabinet power supply BATT +/- receptacle. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to connect a PBTC-3M to the Expansion Cabinet. 6. To test reserve power operation, disconnect system AC power plugs with power supply ON/ OFF switches in the ON position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagram in Figure 5-25. Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) 1. Install the Battery Distribution Box (RBDB1A or RBDB2) to the bottom cabinet. 2. Connect two Cable “C” jumper wires from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (Cable “C” is supplied with the RBTC1A-2M cable). 3. Ensure that a serviceable 12-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the RBTC1A2M battery cable. 4. Connect the white lead of the RBTC1A-1.5M or RBTC2A-1.7M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. 5. Connect a second RBTC1A-1.5M or RBTC2A-1.7M in parallel to the first RBTC1A-2M cable per Steps 2, 3 and 4 instructions. Important! The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply ON/OFF switches set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. DK424 Installation 6. Plug the two RBTC1A-1.5M or RBTC2A-1.7M battery cables into the Battery Distribution Box. 7. Connect the RBTC1A-1.5M or RBTC2A-1.7M cables from the Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/- receptacle of individual power supplies (6-RBTC1A-1.5M cables are supplied with an RBDB distribution box). RBTC2A-1.7M is required for the seventh cabinet. It must be ordered with part number RCTC1A-1.7A. 8. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plugs with the power supply ON/OFF switches in the ON position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note Strata DK I&M If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagrams in Figure 5-25. 5/99 5-33 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) Floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets require a Conduit Connection Box (RCCB) to connect reserve power cabling and AC power cabling to the system. Only a qualified electrician can install cabling between the reserve power source and AC power cabling to the conduit connection box. All other steps required to install reserve power, including installation of the Battery Distribution Box (RBDB), can be accomplished by the normal system installer. ➤ To connect reserve power to floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets See Figures 5-23 and 5-26~5-28 and follow these steps: 1. Make sure that the Conduit Connection Box is installed on the bottom cabinet. The box can be installed by the regular system installer. 2. Have a licensed electrician install conduit and battery cabling to the Conduit Connection Box and local electrical codes. The remaining steps in this procedure can be performed by the regular system installer. 3. Install the Battery Distribution Box on the second cabinet (the cabinet directly above the bottom cabinet). 4. Plug the two Conduit Connection Box cables (coming from the left side of the RCCB box) into the Battery Distribution Box. Important! The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply ON/OFF switches set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 5. Connect RBTC1A-1.5 and RBTC2A-1.7 cables from the (RBDB or RBDB2) Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/- receptacle of individual power supplies (6 RBTC1A-1.5 cables come with each RBDB distribution box). RBTC2A-1.7 is a longer cable, required for the seventh cabinet. It must be special ordered with part number RCTC1A-1.7M. 6. To test reserve power operation, turn off the system AC power circuit breaker with power supply ON/OFF switches in the ON position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Expansion Cabinet RPSB1 or RPSB2 Outlet Strip 1471 Cabinet Bonding Plate To AC Outlet Figure 5-19 Outlet Strip (RPSB1 and RPSB2) Installation 5-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation RPSB280 Power Supply - Front View Right Side View Cabinet No. 1 PBTC-3M Cable to BATT Connector of Power Supply in Cabinet 1 DC OUT RPSB2 (see Important note below) -24V 1 POWER 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUE ‹ - PBTC-3M Cable to BATT Connector of Power Supply in Cabinet 2 White Wire PBTC-3M Cable BATT + Cabinet No. 2 DKSUB ‹ ON OFF AC Power Cord AC IN FG One AC Cord (see Important note below) Two PBTC-3M Cables Battery Box or Rack White Wires + 12 VOLT – + 12 VOLT Two Jumper to Connect Batteries in Series (Supplied With PBTC Cable) – Two AC Power Cords from RPSU280 Power Supplies (Cabinet 1 and 2) Black Wires To Dedicated AC Outlet (See Important Note) 115VAC ± 10VAC (11.5 Amps Max) DK424 Installation 1474 Figure 5-20 AC and Reserve Power, One or Two Cabinets, Wall or Floor-mounted Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 If local electric code allows only on AC cord from the system, install a RPSB2 in the bottom cabinet (per Figure 5-23). Plug power supplies into the RPSB2 and plug the RPSB2 into the dedicated wall outlet. 5-35 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation ONEAC 6-AP or 6-DP Solid State Secondary Protectors RPSU280A CAB 1 MBJU (see Note below) Jumper Unit AC IN FG Insulated Ground Wire “B” RPSU280A Frame Ground Screw (FG) AWG #6 Wire Maximum Length: 60 Feet AC IN Data Cables CAB 2 FG RPSU280A CAB 3 RPSB1A AC IN FG Cold Water Pipe Or Ground Rod Earth Ground: Per General Rules of Article 250 Of The National Electric Code, NFPA70 RPSU280A AC IN CAB 4 FG Third Wire AC Ground AC IN CAB 5 FG RPSB1A RPSU280A RPSU280A “A” Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 115VAC ±10VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 15 Amp Branch Circuit AC IN CAB 6 FG 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) (11.5 Amp max) 2043 AC Cable Third Wire Ground to AC Power Intercabinet Power Supply Ground Wire Important! Remove MBJU only when RCTUE/F is installed. Figure 5-21 AC Power Distribution for Six Cabinets 5-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation ONEAC 6-AP or 6-DP Solid State Secondary Protectors RPSU280A CAB 1 MBJU (see Note below) Jumper Unit AC IN FG Insulated Ground Wire “B” RPSU280A Frame Ground Screw (FG) AWG #6 Wire Maximum Length: 60 Feet AC IN Data Cables CAB 2 FG RPSU280A CAB 3 RPSB1A AC IN FG AC IN FG RPSB1A RPSU280A CAB 4 Cold Water Pipe or Ground Rod Earth Ground: Per General Rules of Article 250 of the National Electric Code, NFPA70 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) (7.5 Amp max) AC Cable Intercabinet Power Supply Ground Wire RPSU280A AC IN CAB 5 FG Third Wire AC Ground RPSU280A “A” AC IN CAB 6 FG CAB 7 FG 2044 Seventh cabinet data cable (order part # RC7C1A-1.7m) Third Wire Ground to AC Power Important! 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) (10 amp max) DK424 Installation AC IN RPSB2A RPSU280A Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit Remove MBJU only when RCTUE/F is installed. Figure 5-22 AC Power Distribution for Seven Cabinets Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-37 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation RBDB1 or RBDB2 (shown with cover on) +– +– BATT F7 (RBDB2 only) F6 PSU Remove three side screws to remove cover RBDB1A or RBDB2A F5 Remove three side screws to loosen cover F4 F3 F2 F1 (250V, 12 amps each) RBDB1 (6 cabinets) or RBDB2 (7 cabinets) (Shown with cover off) Right Side View Top Mounting Hole Bottom Cabinet (wall mount installation) Top Mounting Hole Second Cabinet Up (floor mount installation) RBDB1 or RBDB2 (shown with cover on) BATT PSU 1475 Bottom Mounting Hole Bottom Mounting Screw Figure 5-23 Battery Distribution Box (RBDB) Installation Wall/Floor Mount, Three or More Cabinets with Reserve Battery Back Up 5-38 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation Right Side View DC OUT To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Top Cabinet -24V 1 POWER 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUB ➜ DKSUE ➜ RBTC1A-1.5M Cable BATT + - To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 2 ON OFF FG To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 3 AC Power Cord AC IN RPSU280 Power Supply Front View Notes ● ● To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 4 Six RBTC1A-1.5M cables are supplied with each RBDB1A One “C” cable is supplied with each RBTCIA-2M RBTC1A-1.5M cables from RBDB/PSU connectors to individual power supply RBSU280 “BATT” connectors To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 5 PSU + White Wires RBDB Battery Cabinet or Rack 16 AWG Wire 12 Volt – + DK424 Installation To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Bottom Cabinet +–+– BATT Battery Distribution Box RBDB1A (Three or more cabinets, up to six. RBDB2A is required for seven cabinets) Two “C” cables to connect batteries in series 12 Volt RBTCIA-2M cables to connect batteries to RBDB distribution box (6.5 ft cables) Black Wires – 12 Amp Fuse Note 1476 See Battery Requirements in Figure 5-25 on Page 5-41. Figure 5-24 Six Cabinet Reserve Power, Three to Six (Wall Mounted Cabinets) Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-39 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation Right Side View To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Top Cabinet DC OUT To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 2 -24V 1 POWER 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUB ➜ DKSUE ➜ RBTC1A-1.5M Cable BATT + - To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 3 ON OFF FG To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 4 RPSU280 Power Supply Front View To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 5 Cable supplied with RC7C1A-1.7M cable kit. RBTC1A-1.5M cables from RBDB2/PSU connectors to individual power supply RBSU280 “BATT” connectors (supplied with RDBD2). To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Cabinet 6 Note To “BATT” Connector RPSU 280 Bottom Cabinet AC Power Cord AC IN Battery Cabinet or Rack See Battery Requirements in Figure 5-25 on Page 5-41. +–+– BATT PSU RBDB2 + White Wires 16 AWG Wire 12 Volt – + Three “C” cables to connect batteries in series 12 Volt RBTCIA-2M cables to connect batteries to RBDB2 distribution box (6.5 ft cables) Black Wires 12 AMP Fuse – 2071 Figure 5-25 Seven Cabinet Reserve Power (Wall Mounted Cabinets) 5-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation 2-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with RBDB2)1 12 Volt4 Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 2-Batteries/1-Cabinet (without RBDB) RBTC1A-2M2 Cable (6.5 ft) White Wire 3 cables for 7 cabinets only “C” Cable 12 Volt4 Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each + Base Cabinet RPSU 280 BATT – Cconnnector 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft) Black Wire To RPSU280 “BATT” Connectors (6 max) +– +– BATT PSU 4-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without RBDB) RBDB2 10A Fuse RBTC1A-1.5M Cables (6-max) Cable for 7th cabinet (order number RC7C1A-1.7M) Base Cabinet + 12 Volt4 Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 4-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with RBDB2) “C” Cables RPSU 280 BATT – connnector Expansion Cabinet + RPSU 280 BATT – connnector 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft)3 RBTC1A-2M 2 Cable (6.5 ft) 12 Volt4 3 cables for 7 cabinets only Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 2-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without RBDB) Base Cabinet + 12A Fuse To RPSU280 “BATT” Connectors (6 max) Fuses (10 AMP) RBTC1A-1.5M Cables (6-max) 12 Volt4 Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each RBDB2 (cover removed) RPSU 280 BATT – connnector + Expansion Cabinet RPSU 280 BATT – connnector 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft) Cable for 7th cabinet (order number RC7C1A-1.7M) 1477 1. When floor mounting the DK424, the batteries must be installed by a licensed electrician per local electric code using conduit. (See Figures 5-25, 5-21 and 5-22 DKSUE424.) 2. RBTC1A-2M cable current ratings: discharge, 12 amps max./charge, 3.9 amps max. 3. PBTC-3M and RBTC1A-15M cable current ratings: discharge, 4.9 amps max./charge 0.6 amps max. 4. Batteries should be installed in a customer-supplied commercial battery box or enclosed rack. Notes ● PBTC-3m cables are used for one or two cabinets installations (see Figure 5-21); two RBTC1A-2M cables are used for three or more cabinet installations (DKSUE424). Important! Since these cables are not UL listed, a licensed electrician should install them. DK424 Installation Figure 5-25 Battery Wiring Diagram (Two or Four Batteries) Wall Mount Only Cables connecting to batteries must be 16 AWG minimum. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-41 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation RCCB1 or RCCB2 (Shown with cover on) Third cord is on RCCB2 only Side View of RCCB RCCB1 (3~6 Cabinets) or RCCB2 (7 cabinets) Loosen top two cover screws to remove cover To RBDB or RBDB2 (Battery Distribution Box) Right Side View Loosen bottom two cover screws to remove cover Bottom Cabinet BATT + – L AC120V N FG RFMFI 1473 Fuse Ratings AC: F1~F3, 250V, 12A BAT: F4~F6, 250V, 15A RCCB (Shown with cover off) Battery Wires (12-AWG minimum) 24 AMPS Max Conduit Holes to 1/2 Inch AC Power Wire (Tradesize) (14-AWG minimum) Conduit 11.5 AMPS Max (RCCB1) 17.5 AMPS Max (RCCB2) Figure 5-26 Conduit Connection Box (RCCB) (Required to Floor Mount Three or More DK424 Cabinets Only) 5-42 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation (Maximum configuration: Cabinet 1 (top) ~ Cabinet 6 (bottom) right-hand side view) Right Side View Cabinet 1 DC OUT -24V 1 POWER 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUB ➜ DKSUE ➜ BATT + RBTCIA-1.5M Cable from RBDB ON OFF Cabinet 2 (etc) AC Cord from RPSB AC IN FG TO RPSU1 RPSB - AC Power Strip No. 1 (3 receptacles) for cabinet (1~3) power supplies TO RPSU2 TO RPSU3 RBTCIA-1.5M Battery Cables, One to Each Power Supply BATT Connector (6-max) TO RPSU4 RPSU280 Power Supply Front View RPSB - AC Power Strip No. 2 (3 receptacles) for cabinet (4~6) power supplies TO RPSU5 TO RPSU6 RCCB to RBDB Cable/Connector RCCB to RBDB Battery Connecting Cables/Connectors are Factory Wired on RCCB +– +– BATT 1 •• • 6 PSU RBDB1A, Battery Distribution/ Fuse Box (Shown mounted with cover on) Building Main Electrical Distribution Panel L AC Receptacles BATT AC120V – L N FG B A L = Line Wire (Hot) N = Neutral Wire FG = Ground Wire 14 AWG Wire (Minimum) A B + 12 VOLT – + 12 Volt Batteries 12 VOLT FI 12-AWG Wire (Minimum) Note TO BUILDING GROUND FG + RFMF, Floor Mount Fixture N AC Power Cords/Plugs from RPSB No. 1 and No. 2 Battery Cabinet or Rack – F1 = 24 AMP Fuse DK424 Installation RCCB 1A, AC/DC Conduit Connection Box (Shown mounted with cover off) 11.5 AMP MAX AC CIRCUIT BREAKER 1472 AC/DC wiring and conduit “A” and “B” must be installed by a licensed electrician per local electrical code (conduit trade size is 1/2 inch). See Figure 5-25 on Page 5-41 for battery specifications and wiring guidelines.) Figure 5-27 Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three to Six Cabinets (Floor Mount) Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-43 DK424 Installation Reserve Power Installation RPSU280A Seventh Cabinet BATT Cable supplied with RCTC1A-1.7M CAB 1 Cabinet 1 (Base) MBJU BATT BASE Jumper Unit Data Cable #1~6 supplied with Expansion Cabinets Cabinet 2 (Expansion) AC IN AC Cable RPSU280A BATT EXP AC IN Cabinet 3 (Expansion) BATT EXP RPSB1A RPSU280A AC IN Cabinet 4 (Expansion) BATT EXP RPSB1A RPSU280A AC IN RPSU280A Cabinet 5 (Expansion) BATT EXP RBTC1A-1.5M (6 cables supplied with RBDB unit) AC IN RPSU280A Cabinet 6 (Expansion) RBDB2A (7 cabinets) RBDB1A (6 cabinets) BATT EXP AC IN Data Cable #7 supplied with RC7C1A-1.7M RPSU280A BATT EXP Cabinet 7 (Expansion) AC IN RCCB2A (7 cabinets) RCCB1A (6 cabinets) 1851 External Battery (27.3VDC/35A max.) AC Input (115VAC ± 10VAC/17.5A max.) Figure 5-28 Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three to Seven Cabinets (Floor Mount) 5-44 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation This section provides procedures for the installation of DK424 Base and Expansion Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs). It includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, wiring, and programming considerations for each PCB. The DK424 system Base and Expansion Cabinets are shipped empty. The power supplies and PCBs are not installed at the factory. PCBs must be installed according to the configuration information obtained and developed in Chapter 4 – Configuration. ● Install PCBs only after installing the Base Cabinet and, if applicable, Expansion Cabinets per the Cabinet Installation section in this chapter. ● Be sure the power supply has been tested and the ground has been checked. ● Install universal slot PCBs per the DK424 configuration guidelines. Note Information in this section applies to both the Release 3 and Release 4 RCTU PCBs, unless specified otherwise. PCB Installation Considerations The Base Cabinet has eight slots. The first two slots, labeled “R11” and “RCTU” are reserved for the common control unit and future feature upgrades. The remaining six slots (labeled “S11,” “S12,” “S13,” “S14,” “S15,” and “S16”) are universal and capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs compatible with the DK424 systems. (If needed, RSIU must be installed in slot 11.) The Expansion Cabinets have eight universal slots, labeled “S_1,” “S_2,” S_3,” “S_4,” “S_5,” “S_6,” “S_7,”“S_8,” where the blank space of the label represents the number of the Expansion Cabinet. Like the universal slots in the Base Cabinet, these universal slots are capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs (except RSIU which can only be installed in slot 11). The DK424 Expansion Cabinet slots labeled “S_7” and “S_8,” can only be used when an RCTUE/ F processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet. When the RCTUE/F processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet, the MBJU PCB must be removed from the Base Cabinet to allow S_7 and S_8 to function in the DK424 Expansion Cabinets (see Figure 5-28 to locate MBJU). Cabinets are numbered from 1 to 7. The Base Cabinet is numbered 1; the first Expansion Cabinet, number 2; the second Expansion Cabinet, number 3; etc. See the DK424 Configuration and Universal Slot PCB section for details regarding PCB installation. DK424 Installation If RCTUA, BA/BB, or C/D are installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet, only slot S_1~S_6 can be used in DK424 or DK280 Expansion Cabinets. When these processors are installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet, the MBJU PCB must be installed on the Base Cabinet (see Figure 5-28 to locate MBJU). PCB Option Considerations DK424 PCBs may be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware and software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-45 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Hardware Options Some PCBs must be configured for hardware options prior to installation of the PCB in the cabinet. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. Software Options PCBs are configured for software options through programming, following the installation instructions of the PCBs. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual for detailed programming instructions. RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units System: DK424 Base Cabinet Current Version: RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4, RCTUE3/F4 Older Version(s): RCTUA1, RCTUB1&2, RCTUC/D1&2, RCTUBB3, RCTUD3, RCTUF3 The common control unit provides centralized control for the system. It incorporates a 16 or 32 bit, 68000-type microprocessor and contains a custom time switch and conference Large Scale Integration (LSI) circuitry. The processor operating software is programmed on four read-only-memory (ROM) chips on the RCTUA3 or RCTUA4, BB3 or BB4, and D3 or D4 PCBs and on the Flash Memory PCB RMMS on the RCTUF3 or F4 PCBs. The operating software (ROM or RMMS) is factory-installed. The RCTU PCBs also provide busy tone detection as a standard feature for Auto Busy Redial (ABR) and interfaces with optional RRCS DTMF receivers, feature keys (RKYS1, 2, or 3) for Auto Attendant (AA), Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Management Information System (MIS) for ACD, Toshiba proprietary RS-232 and SMDI voice mail interfaces. ACD and attendant consoles requires the RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F processors. Important! When installing RCTUE/F, you must remove the Motherboard Jumper Unit (MBJU) from the DK424 Base Cabinet (between R11 and RCTU slot on the front side of the cabinet motherboard), see Figure 5-28 to locate MBJU. If installing an RCTUA, BA/ BB, C/D, the MBJU must be installed on the DK424 Base Unit. PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations 1. The power supply must be OFF whenever removing or installing the common control unit— RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F (see Figure 5-29). 2. It is recommended that the power supply be OFF, whenever possible, when removing or installing the other PCBs. 5-46 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Heartbeat LED Heartbeat LED P2 P2 P2 P2 P11 P3 P11 P3 To RSIU if installed To RSIU if installed RCTUD only RCTUD only RCTUBA or RCTUC RCTUBA or RCTUC RCTUBB, RCTUA, or RCTUD Slot R11 Slot R11 Slot RCTU (Base Cabinet) RCTUBB, RCTUA, or RCTUD Slot RCTU (Base Cabinet) 4310 Figure 5-29 RCTU Slot Placement Maximum Line Capacities Configurations for a fully-expanded system can range from 40 lines/ 336 stations to a squared system of 200 outside lines/192 stations. Maximum Line Capacities by Processor Type Common Control Unit Number of Cabinets Maximum Lines Stations RCTUA one Cabinet (Base Cabinet) 16 32 RCTUBA/BB up to two Cabinets (Base Cabinet plus one six-slot Expansion Cabinet) 48 80 RCTUC/D up to six Cabinets (Base Cabinet plus up to five more six-slot Expansion Cabinets) 144 240 RCTUE/F up to seven Cabinets (Base Cabinet plus up to six more eight slot Expansion Cabinets) 200 336 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Table 5-5 5-47 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Additionally, each of the common control units can support a separate set of features. Refer to Chapter 4 – Configuration for more information. Each of the common control units (except RCTUBB) may be equipped with an RRCS (4, 8, or 12) to interpret Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signals transmitted from Tie/DID lines, built-in AA and standard telephone ports. The common control units also provide an interface (along with a volume control) for a Music-on-hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) source. RCTU PCBs are described later in this chapter. Internal Hardware Options The RCTU common control units support the following hardware options: DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS-4, RRCS-8, RRCS-12) There are three RRCSs: the RRCS-4 has four DTMF receiver circuits; the RRCS-8 has eight receiver circuits; and the RRCS-12 has 12 receiver circuits.The RRCS is shown in Figure 5-31. The RCTUA can support up to 12 DTMF receiver circuits; RCTUBA has up to 12 circuits; the RCTUC/D has up to 24 circuits (one RRCS on RCTUC and one RRCS on RCTUD), and the RCTUE/F has up to 24 circuits (one RRCS on RCTUE and one RRCS on the RCTUF). RKYS Feature Key Upgrades The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, ACD, and MIS for ACD with the following feature keys that attach to the common control unit. Table 5-6 RKYS Features Feature Key RKYS1 RKYS2 Common Control Unit Applies to all RCTUs RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F Feature(s) Provided ● ● ● ● RKYS3 RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F ● Built-in Auto Attendant Built-in Auto Attendant ACD Built-in Auto Attendant ACD with an MIS application ➤ To install the RKYS (1, 2, or 3) ➤ Insert the RKYS into the socket on the appropriate RCTU PCB (see Figure 5-30). Note Only one RKYS socket is available on the card. It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialization, and, before or after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are immediately enabled when the RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for AA and ACD must be run for the feature to operate. 5-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Backplane Connector TOSHIBA RKYS_A RCTUD Only CBRUK1A (Soldered on RCTU) RCTU A, B, BB, D or F 1956 Figure 5-30 RKYS Feature Key Installation Music-on-hold/Background Music Volume Control (External Options) Each of the common control units (except RCTUBB, RCTUD and RCTUF) has a trim potentiometer (VR1) to adjust the volume of the MOH/BGM source connected to the Music-onhold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) RCA jack interface, which is also on the common control unit. The volume control potentiometer and the MOH/BGM interface are on the RCTUA, RCTUBA3, RCTUA4, RCTUC, RCTUE3 and RCTUE4 PCBs. The VR1 potentiometer does not control the volume of alternate BGM sources connected to either the RSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, PEKU, PESU, or other BGM source interfaces. ➤ To install the MOH/BGM source to common control unit RRCS The DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS) translates DTMF signals to data signals and attaches to common control units with 4, 8, or 12 receiver circuits. RRCS (4, 8, or 12) Installation onto RCTUA DK424 Installation ➤ Adjust the VR1 potentiometer to the desired volume level while listening to MOH or BGM (see Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation). ➤ Mate RRCS connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 (Figure 5-31) with RCTUA connectors P2, P3, P4, P5. Apply firm, even pressure to the RRCS to ensure proper mating of the connectors. RRCS Installation onto RCTUBA, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F RCTUBA provides up to 12 DTMF receiver circuits because an RRCS PCB can be installed on RCTUBA only and not on RCTUBB. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-49 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units ➤ To install an RRCS onto RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F ➤ Mate RRCS connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 (See Figure 5-31) with the applicable RCTU PCB. Apply firm, even pressure to the RRCS to ensure proper mating of the connectors. RCTUA connectors are P2, P3, P4, P5. (See Figure 5-32.) RCTUBA connectors are P3, P4, P5, P6. (See Figure 5-33.) RCTUC connectors are P3, P4, P5, and P6; RCTUD connectors P5, P6, P7, P8. (See Figures 5-35, 5-36.) RCTUE connectors are P6, P7, and P9; RCTUF3 are P8, P9, and P10. (See Figures 5-37, 5-38.) Note The RRCS connectors on these PCBs are positioned to allow installation of the RRCS only in the proper position. The combined RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F common control unit can support up to 24 DTMF receiver circuits. Both the RCTUC or RCTUE and the RCTUD or F PCBs can be equipped with the RRCS (4, 8, or 12). RRCSs can be installed on both the RCTUC or RCTUE and the RCTUD or RCTUF at the same time. If only one RRCS is installed, the RRCS must be on the RCTUC. Always install the RRCS on the RCTUC before RCTUD and the RCTUE before RCTUF. Note The RRCS connectors on these PCBs are positioned to allow installation of the RRCS only in the proper position. J1 J2 J3 J4 1395 Figure 5-31 RRCS Printed Circuit Board RSIU Installation See “DK424 RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation” on Page 7-23. 5-50 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units RCTU Installation CAUTION! 1. Do not remove the plastic insulation shield from the back of the RCTU PCB. If the shield comes off, do not allow the back of the PCB to contact metal. 2. The RCTU PCBs are shipped from the factory with the battery jumper in the “OFF” position. Ensure it is moved to the “ON” position before installing the RCTU to protect customer configuration information stored in the RCTU RAM. 3. The power supply must be off when installing the RCTU PCB or damage to the board could result. 1. Set the P5, P8 or P9 battery jumper on the RCTUA, BA3, C3, D3, or RCTUF3 to the “ON” position (see Figures 5-31~5-38). 2. Ensure the RCTU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options (i.e., RRCS or RKYS). See “Internal Hardware Options” on Page 5-48. 3. Insert the RCTUA, RCTUBB, RCTUD, or RCTUF (1, 2 or 3) into the “RCTU” slot in the Base Cabinet. If RCTUA and RSIU is installed, you must also install a ribbon cable between them (“RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit” on Page 7-45). Ensure the component side of the RCTU PCB is facing right when installing it in the Base Cabinet. 4. Insert the RCTUBA, RCTUC, or RCTUE PCB into slot R11. 5. After installing the RCTU PCBs, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. 6. Connect the supplied ribbon cables between RCTUA, RCTUBA and BB and RSIU, if installed; or RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, and RSIU, if installed. Note Do not adjust the C14 or C15 trimmer capacitor. The capacitor is factory-calibrated. CAUTION! When packaging the RCTU PCB, use only a nonconducting material enclosure, such as plain cardboard. Conductive material can cause the internal battery to discharge and erase memory in the RCTU PCB. DK424 Installation When transporting the RCTU PCBs, keep the P8 or P9 battery jumper in the “ON” position in order to save the configuration data stored in RCTU RAM. (The battery will protect RAM for approximately six years.) Otherwise, to conserve the lithium battery, move the jumper to the “OFF” position. RCTU Programming After initially installing a new and unused common control unit, all on-board RAM memory needs to be erased and initialized by running Program 91-9 twice after all other PCBs are installed. If RAM contains configuration or feature data from previous programming that should be retained, do not run Program 91-9. See the Strata DK Programming Manual. Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-51 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units If installing a RCTU PCB perform a processor RAM test using Program 00, part 2. On new RCTU installations, the RAM test should be run after RCTU initialization and before entering the customer database. The following parameters can be specified, through programming, for the RCTU PCB. Program 00, part 2: RCTU RAM test. Program 03: ➤ For RCTUA, RCTUBA3, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F—assign the appropriate slot code for each PCB: slot code 00 for RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC or RCTUE; slot code 01 for RCTUD and RCTUF. ➤ Assign the appropriate code for each PCB: ♦ Code 91 – no RRCS ♦ Code 92 – four RRCS circuits ♦ Code 93 – eight RRCS circuits ♦ Code 94 – 12 RRCS circuits Notes ● ● System Power must be cycled or Program 91-2 must be run after Program 03. If there are no options on the RCTU, Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91-1 or 919 can be run instead. ➤ Program *03: For RCTUE/F only. Run program to identify DK424 and DK280 cabinets. ➤ Program 12: Select the seize time of the RRCS circuits. ➤ Program 90, 91, 92: RCTU initialization programs. DK280 to DK424 Base Cabinet Upgrade Considerations 1. Remove MBJU from the DK424 Base Cabinet motherboard. 2. After installing and initializing the RCTUE/F, run Program *03 to identify the DK280 and DK424 cabinets. ♦ DK280 Expansion Cabinet slots S_1 to S_6 operate; S_7 and S_8 do not. ♦ DK424 Expansion Cabinets slots S_1 to S_8 operate. Important! 5-52 If installing station and/or CO line PCBs in slots S_7 and S_8, the ports and/or lines will shift by 4, 8, 16, or 24, depending on the PCBs installed in S_7 and/or S_8. Toshiba recommends moving the existing 25-pair and modular cables backward, in order, to the newly installed PCBs to keep the port and CO line numbers matched with the cable pairs. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-7 RCTUA Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component DTMF Receiver Connector P2 Description Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P4 and P5. DTMF Receiver Connector P3 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P2, P4 and P5. DTMF Receiver Connector P4 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P2, P3 and P5. DTMF Receiver Connector P5 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P2, P3 and P4. BATT Battery Jumper P8 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. Future Feature Upgrade Connector P11 & P12 Connector for ribbon cable Connector for connection with future feature upgrade PCB. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to RCTUA. Heart Beat indicator CD11 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second ON – 1/4 second OFF). Backplane Connector P5 RRCS Connectors P4 P1 Install in “RCTU” Slot Tone ROM Feature Upgrade Connectors (not used) P12 U3 ON OFF P11 BATT IC16 VR1 RAA3-6 RAA3-5 RAA3-8 RAA3-7 IC17 IC18 IC15 RRCS Connectors P3 P2 RCTUA3 CBRUK Program ROMs IC15, 16, 17, and 18 RKYS Key Socket BGM and MOH Interface (RCA Jack) BGM/MOH Volume Control To RSIU DK424 Installation Heartbeat LED IC12 RCTUA3 Software Version R3.2 = 6 F 3226 Figure 5-32 RCTUA PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-53 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-8 RCTUBA Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description RCTUBA ribbon cable Connector P2 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for connection to RCTUBB. Used in conjunction with P2. DTMF Receiver Connector P3 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). Used in conjunction with P4, P5, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P4 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P5, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P5 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P4, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P6 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P4, and P5. BATT Battery Jumper P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. RCTUBA ribbon cable Connector P11 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for RCTUBA and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P2. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to RCTUBA. Backplane Connector RRCS Connectors P6 P5 P1 Install in Slot “R11” Program ROM ON P9 IC10 RRCS Connectors P2 P4 P11 RCTUBA3 Place Battery Jumper to ON Position Before Installing PCB To RCTUBB/RSIS Connectors RCTUBA3 BATT OFF BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) P3 VR1 BGM/MOH Volume Control (Screwdriver Adjustment) To RCTUBB (and RSIU if Installed) 1367 Figure 5-33 RCTUBA PCB 5-54 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-9 RCTUBB Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Connector P2 Connector for ribbon cables Connector for RCTUBA ribbon cables. Used with P2. Connector P3 Connector for ribbon cables Connector for RCTUBA and RSIU ribbon cable. Used with P11. Heart Beat indicator CD11 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second ON — 1/4 second OFF). Backplane Connector P1 Identifies ROM Version RBA3-0 RBA3-2 IC12 Install in “RCTU” Slot IC10 CBRUK Program ROMS IC9, 10, 11, and 12 IC9 CD5 Heart Beat LED P2 RCTUBB4 RBA3-9 RBA3-1 IC11 U3 To RCTUBA/RSIU Connectors P3 RCTUBB4 RKYS Key Socket 1368 Ribbon Cable to RCTUBA Ribbon Cable to RCTUBA (and RSIU if installed) Figure 5-34 RCTUBB PCB DK424 Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-55 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-10 RCTUC3 Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description RCTUC Ribbon Cable Connector P2 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for connection to RCTUD. Used in conjunction with P2. DTMF Receiver Connector P3 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). Used in conjunction with P4, P5, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P4 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P5, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P5 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P4, and P6. DTMF Receiver Connector P6 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3, P4, and P5. BATT Battery Jumper P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. RCTUC ribbon cable Connector P11 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for RCTUD and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P2. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to RCTUC. Backplane Connector RRCS Connectors P6 P5 P1 Install in Slot “R11” Program ROM ON P9 RCTUD/RSIU Connectors RRCS Connectors P2 P4 P3 BATT OFF RCTUC 3 IC10 Place Jumper in ON Position Before Installing PCB P11 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) VR1 BGM/MOH Volume Control (Screwdriver Adjustment) To RCTUD (and RSIU, if Installed) 1369 Figure 5-35 RCTUC PCB 5-56 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-11 RCTUD3 Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors (for Release 3) Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description RCTUD Connector P2 Connector for RCTUC ribbon cables Used with P2. RCTUD Connector P3 Connector for RCTUC ribbon cables Used with P11. BATT Battery Jumper P9 3-terminal jumper DTMF Receiver Connector P5 6-pin male connector Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). Used in conjunction with P6, P7, and P8. DTMF Receiver Connector P6 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P5, P7, and P8. DTMF Receiver Connector P7 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P5, P6, and P8. DTMF Receiver Connector P8 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P5, P6, and P7. Heart Beat Indicator CD5 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second ON, 1/4 second OFF). P8 P7 P1 ON IC10 Program ROMS IC9, 10, 11, and 12 P9 OFF BATT RCA4-9 RCA4-1 IC11 U3 IC9 P2 RCTUD4.X P6 P5 To RCTUC P3 To RCTUC (and RSIU, if installed) 3183 DK424 Installation Upgrade Label U4 RCTUD4.X RCA4-0 RCA4-2 IC12 Software Version R4 = Figure 5-36 RCTUD PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 5-57 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-12 RCTUE3 Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description RCTUF Connector P2 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to RCTUF and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P2. RRCS Connector P8 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). Used in conjunction with P6 and P7. RRCS Connector P7 Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). 3-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P6 and P9. RRCS Connector P6 Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P7 and P9. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. RCTUF Connector P11 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to RCTUF and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P11. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to RCTUF. Backplane Connector RRCS Connectors P7 P6 P1 UP Install in Slot “R11” UP RCTUE3A RTSS RCTUF/RSIU Connectors P2 P8 RRCS Connectors P11 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) VR1 BGM/MOH Volume Control (Screwdriver Adjustment) 1861 To RCTUF (and RSIU, if Installed) Figure 5-37 RCTUE PCB with RTSS Subassembly CAUTION! 5-58 When removing the RTSS from RCTUE3, take off the RTSS slowly, rocking back and forth in the direction of the arrows in the diagram. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Table 5-13 RCTUF4 Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description RCTUE Connector P2 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to RCTUE and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P2. RCTUE Connector P3 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to RCTUE and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P3. DTMF Receiver Connector P8 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (RRCS). Used in conjunction with P6, P7, and P9. DTMF Receiver Connector P9 6-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P5, P7, and P9. DTMF Receiver Connector P10 10-pin male connector Used in conjunction with P5, P6, and P9. Heart Beat Indicator CD5 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second ON, 1/4 second OFF). BATT Battery Jumper P5 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. Backplane Connector P9 P10 UP RRCS Connectors RMMS UP CBRUK RCTUE/RSIU Connectors RRCS Connectors CD5 RCTUF4 P2 P3 P5 P8 ON BATT OFF To RCTUE To RCTUE (and RSIU, if Installed) 1860 Figure 5-38 RCTUF PCB with RMMS Subassembly CAUTION! Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 Installation Heart Beat LED When removing the RMMS from RCTUF, take off the RMMS slowly, rocking back and forth in the direction of the arrows in the diagram. 5-59 DK424 Installation RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F Common Control Units Building #1 Building #2 HESB PSTU RSTU/RSTU2 RDSU/RSTS Standard Telephone HDSS or DDSS Console PEKU PESU PDKU RDSU Electronic or Digital Telephone Electronic or Digital Telephone or Cordless Base POW DTR PC Attendant Console DSR RATI RATU Conventional Attendant Console HDCB or DDCB MDFB DDCB or HDCB RDTU or RPTU MDFB 2077 CSU T1 Span Line or ISDN PRI Line Earth Ground E&M Tie Line REMU PCOU, RCOU/RCOS RGLU, RCIU/RCIS, RBUU/RBUS, RBSU/RBSS, RMCU/RCMS Ground/Loop/ISDN BRI/ E911 CAMA Lines DID Line RDDU Secondary protectors – standard voltage Earth Ground Important! Secondary protectors – low voltage To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M Tie lines. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee manufacturer. Figure 5-39 DK424 Secondary Protector Diagram 5-60 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 6 This chapter covers information on using T1/DS-1 interfacing. It is available for the DK424. T1/ DS-1 interfacing is not available for the DK14 and DK40i. Channelization The Strata DK424 RDTU PCB provides T1/DS-1 interface for up to 24 channels. Each channel can be individually set for loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID line operation (voice only, not data lines). Each RDTU can be set in system programming to activate (1~8), (1~16), or (1~24) channels (lines). Fractional increments of 4, 12, and 20 are also possible but the RDTU will still assign 8, 16, or 24 channels respectively in system software. Example: If only 12 channels of fractional T1 are used, assign RDTU as a 16 channel RDTU. The system will assign 16 CO lines to the RDTU even though only 12 CO lines will be used. To busy out unused RDTU channels (see “System Programming for T1” on Page 6-3, Step 4). Use Program 03 to set the quantity of RDTU channels. Slot Assignments Up to eight RDTU PCBs can be installed in a DK424 to provide up to 192 lines. RDTU PCBs can be installed in the same cabinets that have analog type CO line PCBs installed. RDTU PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the DK424 cabinets. (See Tables 4-4 and 4-5 in Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration for RDTU slot installation rules) If an RDTU is installed in a cabinet (in some cases one or two slots to the right of the RDTU may not be used in that cabinet) the number of unusable slots in a cabinet (none, 1 or 2) depends on which slot the RDTU occupies and how many lines (8, 16, or 24) the RDTU is programmed to provide. Use Program 03 to set the RDTU slot assignments and Channel quantities (Code 71 = 8 ch., Code 72 = 16 ch., and Code 73 = 24 ch.). DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-1 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit RDTU T1 Interface Unit System: DK424 Circuits per PCB: 8, 16, or 24 channels Interfaces with: ground start CO lines loop start CO lines DID or Tie lines Older Version(s): none RDTU is configured for Tie or DID lines and an RRCS must be installed for DTMF operation. LEDs on the RDTU show a continuous status of RDTU operation. Note Each Tie or DID line decreases the system’s station port and CO line capacity by one. A Strata DK424 system operating with an RCTUE/F can support up to eight RDTU PCBs. RCTUC/D common control unit supports up to six RDTU PCBs. The RCTUB and RCTUBA/BB support up to two RDTU PCBs. The RDTU cannot be installed in a system operating with the RCTUA. RDTU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-1 and described in Table 6-1. The RDTU requires installation of a customer-provided Channel Service Unit (CSU). Refer to “Installation Guidelines” on Page 6-10 for CSU installation. Testing procedures (local loop back and remote loop back) are in “Loop Back Testing” on Page 6-16. SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option) The distance between the DK424 cabinets and the CSU (or other customer premise T1 circuit) determines the setting of the SW1 Equalizer Switch. The SW1 switch consists of a bank of smaller switches, S1~S7. ➤ Set the SW1 switch as follows: Note 6-2 Mode Feet from DK424 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 Short 0~150 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF N/A Medium 151~450 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF N/A Long 450~655 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON N/A The maximum distance between the RDTU and the CSU or other T1 circuits can not be more than 655 feet (see “RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.)” on Page 6-11). Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit RDTU Installation Installing an RDTU (T1) into a Strata DK424 requires a number of system programs to be run. Toshiba recommends running these programs in the order listed before actually installing the RDTU into the system. This allows the RDTU to function immediately, including self-check loop back testing and normal operation, when it is inserted into the system. ➤ To install an RDTU PCB 1. Set jumper wire plugs P1 (LB), P2, P3, and P4 to the OFF position. See “Loop Back Testing” on Page 6-16 for loop back testing procedures. See “SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option)” on Page 6-2 for the appropriate SW1 equalizer switch setting. 2. Insert the RDTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (See “Slot Assignments” on Page 6-1 and Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration, Worksheet 2 for RDTU slot assignment recommendations.) 3. After installing the RDTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. System Programming for T1 1. Run Program 03: Assign the number of RDTU channels used and the cabinet slot number into which the RDTU will be installed (see “Channelization” and “Slot Assignments” on Page 6-1). If 1~8 channel are required, assign code 71, if 1~16 channels are required, assign code 72, or if 1~24 channels are required, assign code 73 to the RDTU slot. Also, assign RRCS code to RCTU if RDTU Tie/DID channels are DTMF. Important! Special consideration must be taken when installing Tie or DID T1 channels (see Worksheets in 6. 2. Run Program *41-2: Assign each channel for loop start, ground start Tie (Immediate or Wink), or DID (Immediate or Wink). See Program *41-2 record sheet (unused channels can remain as initialized—loop start). 3. Turn system power supply OFF (five seconds) and ON to activate Program 03 and *41-2 program data. Note These are the only programs relating to RDTU operation that require system power to be cycled OFF and ON. 4. Run Programs 16, 40, 39: If an RDTU is connected to a fractional T1 circuit and all the RDTU channels (8, 16, or 24) are not used, busy-out the unused CO lines from all line groups (Program 16), all telephone buttons (Program 39), and restrict all stations from accessing the unused lines (Program 40). 5. Run Programs 15 and 30: If RDTU Tie and/or DID are dial pulse: Run Program 15-1, LED ON for each DP Tie/DID line and run Program 30, LED 11 ON for each Tie/DID station port. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Example, if the Network fractional T1 provides 12 channels, set the RDTU connected to this T1 for 16 channels in Program 03 (with code 72). If this RDTU is the first CO line PCB in the system, the RDTU CO lines will be numbered 001~016. Use Programs 16, 39 and 40 to deny use of all unused lines (i.e., lines 13, 14, 15, and 16). In this case the first 12 lines are usable; lines 13, 14, 15, and 16 cannot be used. The CO lines on the next CO line PCB (any type) following the RDTU PCB will start numbering at line 017. 6-3 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit 6. Run Program 17. ♦ LED 01: For RDTU Tie lines, set LED01 to allow (ON) or deny (OFF) Page and Voice Announce on incoming calls to DK424 stations from the far end T1 Tie line stations. This option (LED01) does not apply to RDTU DID lines—Page and Voice Announce is always denied to incoming DID calls because of FCC “answer supervision” rules. ♦ LED 02 (Wink/Immediate): This assignment is for RDDU, REMU, and PEMU lines only; it does not apply to RDTU Tie or DID lines. Use Program *41-2 to assign RDTU lines for wink or immediate start. ♦ LED 03: Toshiba recommends turning this LED ON (initialized state) for all RDTU DID lines to enable incoming DID calls to camp-on busy stations. This is also necessary to allow more than one DID line to ring into a station simultaneously. LED03 does not apply to RDTU Tie lines. ♦ LED 04: For RDTU Tie lines, LED04 is normally OFF to enable dial tone to be received from the far end Tie line when calling DK424 stations. For DID lines LED04 is normally ON so RDTU DID lines do not send dial tone to the CO Run *41-1: Use this program to assign the RDTU (T1) Line Coding method (B8ZS or AMI) and signal Framing format (SF or ESF). Contact the account representative of the company that is providing the T1 span line (Local Central Office or Long Distance Provider) to determine which line Coding and Frame format will be used. ♦ Line Coding: The DK424 RDTU supports T1/DS-1 transmission of Voice and Analog Data (using modems) using Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) with Zero Code Suppression (ZCS) or Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution (B8ZS) line coding. B8ZS provides clear channel capability, which allows frame information bits to carry any combination of ones and zeros—a feature needed for T1/DS-1 transmission of digital DATA (DK424 does not support transmission of digital DATA over RDTU T1/DS-1 at this time). ♦ As of this writing, most Telcos provide AMI line coding which is adequate for DK424 RDTU voice transmission; however, B8ZS may be required by some long distance providers, college campus private networks, or customer premise end to end T1 connections. AMI and B8ZS are adequate for DK424 Voice T1/DS-1 transmission. ♦ Framing: As of this writing, D3/D4 Superframe (SF), or Type I and Extended Superframe (ESF), or Type II T1/DS-1 is offered by most all local Telcos and Long Distance Providers. Normally the local Telco will provide SF, which is adequate for DK424 voice (and modem type data) transmission. Long distance providers may offer either SF or ESF. ESF provides a more enhanced method of error checking that SF; however, the Channel Service Unit (CSU) must be compatible with ESF and may cost more than a SF only CSU. ESF circuits have the additional power of Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC), which allows end-to-end monitoring of T1 circuit performance. ESF, T1 performance monitoring normally requires that a person be specially trained for this function. SF and ESF Frame format is adequate for DK424 Voice (and modem type data) T1/DS-1 transmission. 7. Run Programs *41-3 and -4: These programs allow the RDTU Transmit and Receive (Volume) level to be adjusted by changing the RDTU built-in digital PAD value between +6 decibels (dB) and –15 dB. Transmit and Receive levels are individually adjustable on each RDTU (all channels will have the same level). Toshiba recommends using the initialized levels (Receive –3 dB/Transmit –6 dB) upon initial installation. Adjust the RDTU digital PAD as required while testing each RDTU T1 channel. 8. Run Program *42 Series—T1 Span Timing Reference Assignments Timing references for T1 RDTU PCBs are made with the Program *42 series. The RDTU (T1) timing (or synchronization) program options determine how the DK424 system digital voice 6-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit transmission path (time-switch) is synchronized with the far end digital system transmission path. For proper T1 operation, the equipment at each end of a T1 span line must be synchronized. The DK424 time-switch is synchronized (as slave) to the T1 span equipment on the other end of the T1 line by the RDTU PCB designated as the Primary Reference in Program *42-1. When a RDTU is connected to a Telco or Long Distance Provider T1 span line, the RDTU in the lowest slot number should be assigned as the Primary Reference RDTU (*42-1, DATA = 1 FOR THIS RDTU). If a malfunction occurs and Primary Synchronization is lost, the DK424 automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the T1 span connected to the RDTU PCB designated as the Secondary Reference (provided that there are two RDTU PCBs installed in the DK424) (see Figure 6-1). DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-5 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit Strata DK424 RCTU PCB Synchronization Circuit Clock Digital Telephone Time Switch RDTU(1) (Primary Ref) PDKU Electronic Telephone PEKU Standard Telephone RSTU DK Digital Transmission Voice Path SS1 Synchronization Circuit Span Line 1 Digital Voice Path Telco Central Office T1 RDTU(2) (Secondary Ref) SS2 Synchronization Circuit Span Line 2 AT&T Long Distance T1 Stratum 1 Clock Source Digital Voice Path RDTU(3) SS3 Synchronization Circuit Span Line 3 Other T1 Provider Digital Voice Path 1675 T1 Span Clock Not Synchronized Properly with Stratum 1 Clock Source Notes ● ● ● Figure 6-1 6-6 Primary Reference Synchronization: In this diagram RDTU(1) is the primary reference, its synchronization circuit sends the clock reference from the TELCO T1 span to the DK424, to the RCTU synchronization circuit, via RDTU1 Software Switch (SS). The RCTU(1) clock synchronizes the DK424 digital transmission voice path (via RCTU time switch) to the TELCO/STRATUM1 clock source. Secondary Reference Switch-Over: If the primary reference T1 RDTU(1) fails, the DK424 will automatically open the RDTU(1) primary synchronization circuit (SS1) and close the RDTU(2) secondary synchronization circuit (SS2). At this time, the DK424 digital voice path will be synchronized to the AT&T/ STRATUM1 clock source. Slip example: In the above diagram the “Other T1 Provider” is not synchronized to the STRATUM1 clock source properly – Slip problems will occur on RDTU(3) T1 channels. RDTU Primary/Secondary Reference Block Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit If there are two RDTU PCBs installed, it is recommended not to install the Primary and Secondary Reference RDTU PCBs in the same DK424 cabinet if possible (although both Primary and Secondary Reference RDTU PCBs can be installed in the same cabinet). The Secondary Reference RDTU should also be connected to a Telco or Long Distance Provider T1 span (*42-2, Data = 2 for this RDTU). If the equipment on the other end of the DK424 T1 lines should synchronize to the DK424 clock source, then blanks should be entered in Program *42. In this case, the DK424 clock runs free and is considered the Master Synchronization provider. The DK424 can be assigned as the Master (free run) clock provider if the far end equipment connected to the RDTU T1 span is a Customer Premise type equipment and it is not synchronized to some other T1 provider (i.e., PBX, Channel Bank, Key/Hybrid or other DK424). In this case (when the Telco network is not connected), either the DK424 RDTU span or the far end equipment can be the Master (synchronization clock provider). ♦ Program *42-1, Primary Timing Reference Assignment: Assign the Primary Timing Reference with this program. ♦ Program *42-2, Secondary Timing (Backup) Reference Assignment: Assign the Secondary (Backup) Timing Reference with this program. ♦ To assign RDTUs for the Master Clock Provider, leave Programs *42-1 and *42-2 blank. Press button/LED01 to enter blanks. Important! The Digital Network is connected to clocks with various degrees of precision called stratum levels from Stratum 1 (highest level of accuracy) to Stratum 4 (lowest level) as follows: • Stratum 1—Public Telephone Network clock located in Hillsboro, Missouri. • Stratum 2—Normally associated with #4 ESS Toll switches. • Stratum 3—Normally associated with #5 ESS Central offices. • Stratum 4—Normally associated with Digital PBXs. • If a DK424 RDTU is programmed as the Primary Synchronization Clock reference, the clock provider connected to this RDTU should be a reliable clock provider, such as a Telco or common carrier (Example—AT&T). All other T1 span lines connected to RDTUs in the DK424 must be synchronized to the same clock source as the AT&T span line. If a T1 span line is not synchronized with the primary clock provider (AT&T, for this example), then DK424 lines assigned to this T1 span line (RDTU) may experience “slip” problems. 9. The programs in Steps 1~8 are described for specific RDTU application programming. Also refer to “System Programming for T1” on Page 6-3. Run the programs as they apply to RDTU CO line applications. DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-7 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit RDTU Programming The following programs select the number of channels supported by the RDTU and assign line operation for the individual channels. Notes ● ● RDTU Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignment or Program 71 and 72 DNIS assignments (see Program 17, LED 05). RDTU DID lines can route per Program *09 assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS assignments (see Program 17, LED 05). Program 03: Specify Code 71 for an 8-channel RDTU, Code 72 for a 16-channel RDTU, or Code 73 for a 24-channel RDTU. (The 8-channel RDTU is the default.) Also, the Dual-Tone MultiFrequency receiver (RRCS) must be installed and assigned if RDTU Tie and/or DID lines are DTMF. Note If the T1 is 8 channels, skip Program 03 and run Programs 91, 91-1 or 91-9 instead. Program 04: Tie line digit translation (if T1 channel is Tie). Also see Programs 17 and 71~72. Program *09: Use to translate DID digits to ring designated stations. Also see Programs 17 and 71~72. Program 10-1: Use to enable or disable Two-Line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Use to assign DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is not needed for ground start lines. Also use to enable DID lines with DNIS and ANI options. Program *15: Use to make tenant assignments. Program 16: Use to assign lines to line groups. Program 17: Use to assign Tie/DID Auto Camp-on, and second dial tone. Program *17: Use to assign intercept port for DID line calls to wrong or vacant numbers. Program 30: If RDTU Tie and/or DID lines are Dial Pulse (DP—Program 15-1), then Program 30, LED 11 should be ON for the Tie/DID station port numbers; if they are DTMF, LED 11 should be OFF. Program 39: Use to assign line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Use to assign station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Use to assign station access to lines (outgoing only). Program *41 Series: Run to assign RDTU channel line operation, and coding and framing modes. Program 42-0, 1~8: Use to assign behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Program *42 Series: Use to assign timing reference for RDTUs. Programs 45~48: Use to define Toll Restriction for any line. Programs *50, *51, *52: Use to define Caller ID/ANI assignments. Programs 50~56: Use to define Least Cost Routing assignments. Program 59: Use to assign T1 lines to attendant console buttons. 6-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 RDTU T1 Interface Unit Program 71~74: These programs are used in place of Program *09 to assign DID/Tie/DNIS line ringing destinations. Program 71 (1~5): Tie/DID DNIS assignment (optional used in place of *09. Also see Program 04). Program *71~*73: Tie/DID telephone/[DN] ring assignments. Program 78: Use to assign special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Built-in Auto Attendant. Programs 81~89: Use to assign loop and ground start RDTU CO lines to ring selected stations on incoming calls. Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns [DN] LEDs to flash when CO line rings a telephone. Table 6-1 RDTU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description SW1 Equalizer Setting Switch 8 2-position slide switches Sets line length between RDTU and CSUs or other T1 (max 655 ft.). P3 (not used) 3-terminal jumper plug This jumper plug is reserved for future use. P4 Remote Loop Remote Mode jumper plug 3-terminal jumper plug Sets RDTU for Remote Loop Back mode test procedure. P1 and P2 Loop Back jumper plug 3-terminal jumper plug Sets RDTU for self check or Network/CSU loop back check. P3: Future Use ON P6 S1 ON OFF S8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Backplane Connector RDTU Self Test Network/CSU Test 1669 DK424 T1 P1 P2 Figure 6-2 Equalizer Setting Switch P1 OFF P2 ON OFF LB ON RDTU OFF LED Status Indicators SW1 Female Amphenol Connector ON CD2 CD1 OFF PSYNC SSYNC P4 RLB CD3 CD7 CD6 CD5 CD4 P3 LLB BSY FALM MFALM YALM BALM P4: Remote Loop Back Test RDTU Printed Circuit Board 6-9 DK424 T1 Installation Guidelines Installation Guidelines 1. Read “Channelization” on Page 6-1 before proceeding to Step 2. 2. Run RDTU T1 related system programs as described in “Applications” on Page 6-11. 3. Set P1 and P2, loop back jumper to the ON position for RDTU self test (see “RDTU Self Test” on Page 6-16). Refer to “Hardware and Cabling” on Page 6-13 for the appropriate SW1 Equalizer Switch setting and set SW1 to the setting that matches the RDTU cable length. 4. Install the RDTU PCB per instructions Page 6-3. Note Ensure the RDTU’s component side is facing right when installing it in the cabinet. 5. Run the RDTU self check per “Network/CSU T1 Span Test” on Page 6-17. After self check passes, put P1 and P2 to the OFF position for normal operation and insert the RDTU PCB back into the appropriate slot. 6. Install CSUs and wire them to the RDTU and Network Interface Unit (NIU) or Customer Premises T1 circuit as required. See “System Programming for T1” on Page 6-3. Note Before connecting the CSU to the Telco line, notify the T1 provider. You should also notify the T1 provider before disconnecting the CSU. CSU DK424 RDTU Transmit Receive Local Loop Back NIU Receive Network Transmit Network Loop Back 1674 Figure 6-3 CSU Local and Network Loop Back Tests 7. Perform CSU to RDTU and CSU to Network loop back testing per CSU documentation and “Loop Back Testing” on Page 6-16. Notes ● ● Local loop back and network loop back test cannot be performed simultaneously. CSU local/network loop back is a function of the CSU, not all CSUs provide this function – see CSU I&M documentation for CSU loop back test procedures. 8. After loop back testing is complete and synchronized with the far end T1 circuit, perform test calls on all RDTU lines. (Use the troubleshooting procedures in “T1 Fault Isolation” on Page 6-20 to help correct problems.) 9. Check T1 performance periodically for transmission errors using the “T1ERR” test. This requires a local or remote maintenance terminal connected to the PIOU or PIOUS PCB (local) and IMDU or Hayes-compatible modem (remote). 6-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Applications Applications Each RDTU T1 PCB requires the following connecting equipment and cables to provide service (see the following sections and Figure 6-4). RDTU to Network If the RDTU must interface to a public telephone network or common carrier T1 circuit, the RDTU must be connected to a CSU. Use the NDTU cable (30 ft. cable supplied with RDTU) to connect the RDTU to the CSU. The function of the CSU is to provide the required interface between the RDTU PCB and the Public Telephone or Carrier Network. The interface created by the CSU normally provides protection and capabilities for loop back testing both the Network equipment and the RDTU PCB. Connecting the CSU to the Network Interface Unit (NIU) is specified by the CSU manufacturer— see CSU installation documentation. Toshiba does not supply the cables and connectors required to connect the CSU to the NIU (see “RDTU Cable Installation”). RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.) If the RDTU must interface to a customer’s premises T1 circuit (PBX, key/hybrid, or another DK424) to provide Tie line service, the RDTU must be connected to a CSU (with Toshiba NDTU cable) if the other customer premise T1 equipment is more than 655 ft. from the RDTU. The T1 span on the other end must also connect to a CSU. Strata DK TOSHIBA NDTU 30 ft Cable RDTU DS-1 CSU Network Interface Unit Telco Digital Network or Common Carrier (AT&T, MCI, etc.) 1665 Figure 6-4 RDTU Connection to Digital Network or OCC The RDTU equalization switch (SW1) must be set for “SHORT” cable length because RDTU will be connected to the CSU with the 30 ft. NDTU cable (see Table 6-2). Connecting CSU to CSU and CSU to the far-end PBX T1 is specified by the CSU manufacturer— see the CSU installation documentation. Toshiba does not supply cables or connectors to connect CSU to CSU (Cable A) or CSU to the far end PBX (Cable B). DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-11 DK424 T1 Applications RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated Less Than 655 ft.) If the RDTU is within 655 ft. of the far-end PBX T1 circuit, a CSU is not required. However, connecting a RDTU T1 span to another PBX or Key/Hybrid T1, in a Tie line configuration at a distance less than 655 ft. (without a CSU) will require a customer provided special cable. The transmit and receive pair of this span cable must be separated by at least five cable pairs and the wires must be 24 AWG, twisted pair, otherwise 22 AWG, ABAM type cable must be used. See “RDTU Cable Installation” on Page 6-14. CSUs are not required if the RDTU is less than 655 ft. from the channel bank (see Figure 6-5). Two CSUs (customer provided) are required if the RDTU is more than 655 ft. from the customer premise channel bank (see Figure 6-6). In Figures 6-5 and 6-6, special cable and connectors are customer-provided. Strata DK424 R (1) RDTU T1 T (26) PBX or other CPE Customer-provided Special Cable/Connectors (2) Rr RDTU Transmit PBX/Key (27) Rt System or... Channel (1) Tr Bank R1 (2) RDTU Receive T1 (27) (26) Tt RDTU Amphenol Connector (Pin No.) Figure 6-5 PBX Amphenol Connector (Maximum 655 ft.) 1667 Required Cables/Connectors for RDTU Connection at Distances of Less than 655 (200 Meters) Strata DK424 RDTU TOSHIBA NDTU Cable 30 ft. max. Analog PBX or... Key System CSU Cable A CSU Cable B Channel Bank Analog Tie Line E&M Tie Lines 1668 More than 655 ft. Figure 6-6 6-12 RDTU Connection via CSU and Channel Bank Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Hardware and Cabling Hardware and Cabling RDTU Cable Length Switch The distance between the DK424, RDTU and CSU or RDTU to other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) T1 may vary (0~655 ft.) as shown. (See Figures 6-4, 6-5, and 6-6.) The RDTU interface transmitter must be equalized and its impedance must be matched to the cable length connecting the RDTU to the CSU or other CPE, T1. RDTU transmit equalization/ impedance matching is accomplished by setting RDTU SW1 for the proper cable length (see Figure 6-5 for SW1 location and “SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option)” on Page 6-2 for SW1 setting instruction). RDTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs The RDTU PCB provides jumper plugs for loop back testing. Loop back tests are described in “Loop Back Testing” on Page 6-16. RDTU Front Panel Indicators The RDTU PCB provides seven LED indicators to show the status of RDTU: Busy or Idle condition, Alarm status, and Synchronization status. See Table 6-2 for the function of each status LED. Figure 6-2 shows the LED locations.Busy LED (BSY)—Turns on when one or more RDTU channels (lines) are in use. Also, when the RDTU does not receive the far end 1.544 mbs carrier signal, the RDTU will cause the BSY to be on steady. Alarms are used to indicate potentially serious telephone network problems. Example: when monitoring a T1 network, if a Blue or Yellow alarm is indicated, it can be concluded that there is a cable fault or some other serious transmission impairment. Frame Alarm (FALM)—This LED turns ON steady if the RDTU has not achieved synchronization or when the span cable is not connected. ♦ Multi-Frame Alarm (MFALM)—LEDs turn ON steady if the RDTU receives the 1.554 mbs T1 carrier from the far end, but has not achieved Frame synchronization or when the span cable is not connected. Also, if the RDTU is set for SF and the far end is sending ESF (or vice versa), the MFALM LED will be ON steady. ♦ Red Alarm (FALM and MFALM)—When FALM and MFALM are both ON steady, a Red alarm condition exists. This indicates that the RDTU does not detect a proper carrier signal (1.544 mbs T1) on its receive pair and the RDTU is not synchronized. When the Red alarm condition exists, the RDTU should turn the BSY LED ON steady and attempt to send a Yellow alarm signal (RDTU YALM LED flashes) to the far end T1 circuit. ♦ Yellow Alarm (YALM)—When the far end network or CPE T1 does not detect the RDTU transmitted 1.544 mbs T1 carrier signal on its receive pair the far end T1 sends a Yellow alarm signal pattern to the RDTU—the RDTU should turn on the YALM LED (the YALM repeats the signal it receives from the far end—flashing or steady). If the RDTU does not receive the far end carrier signal, the RDTU sends the Yellow alarm signal to the far end and causes the BSY and YALM LEDs to flash. ♦ Blue Alarm (BALM)—The Blue alarm, also known as the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), is detected by the RDTU. This signal is sent by the Far End Network equipment to RDTU when it loses the carrier from a Network T1 circuit (other than RDTU). This signal assures that the RDTU maintains synchronization when there is a problem between two Network Nodes. The RDTU BALM also lights if the far end sends a Blue alarm signal during loop back. The RDTU sends a Blue alarm signal when loop-back test is being performed. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 ♦ 6-13 DK424 T1 Hardware and Cabling Synchronization LEDs ♦ Primary Synchronization (PSYNC) LED (see Figure 6-1 on Page 6-6) – If one RDTU PCB is assigned as the Primary Timing T1 PCB in Program *42, the PSYNC LED of this RDTU PCB flashes when it is synchronized with the far end T1 span line clock provider. If the Primary RDTU is not synchronized with the clock provider, the PSYNC LED will be ON steady. The SSYNC LED of the Primary sync RDTU PCB should always be OFF. The Primary sync RDTU PCB synchronizes the RTCU (time-switch) to the clock signal it receives from the T1 span circuit to which it is connected. The RTCU then synchronizes the DK424 PCM talk path (time-switch) to the far end PCM talk path. ♦ Secondary Synchronization (SSYNC) LED – If an RDTU PCB is assigned as the Secondary time T1 PCB in Program *42, its SSYNC LED will be ON steady (standby mode) when the DK424 is synchronized to the Primary T1 clock provider. In the event of a loss of Primary synchronization (when 4 out of 12 consecutive frame timing bits are in error) the DK424 switches from synchronizing to the Primary RDTU span line clock to the span line clock connected RDTU designated as the Secondary Timing Reference. When the DK424 is synchronized to the Secondary Reference RDTU, the PSYNC LED on the Primary Reference RDTU turns on steady and the SSYNC LED on the Secondary Reference RDTU will flash. ♦ Run Free (PSYNC/SSYNC) – If the RDTU PCB is the clock provider to the Far-end T1 span circuit both the PSYNC and SSYNC LEDs are always OFF. RDTU Cable Installation The RDTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba NDTU cable for connecting the RDTU PCB to a CSU. The NDTU is a 30 ft. cable and is specially made to conform with EIA specifications (see Figure 6-7). All other cables required to connect the T1 span line to the RDTU PCB are customer-supplied and must conform with EIA specification, see the Notes of Figure 6-7. Almost all CSU manufacturers supply cables that comply with T1 span specifications for connecting the CSU to customer premise equipment (like DK424, RDTU) to the Network Interface equipment. 6-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Hardware and Cabling RDTU To Network or Long Distance T1 Provider Customer Supplied Cable (See Notes) Network Interface Unit USOC-RJ48C or RJ48X (4) T (1) (5) R (9) (1) T1 (3) (2) R1 (11) NDTU Cable (30 ft. Maximum) Customersupplied CSU (1) Black T (26) (9) Red R (1) (3) White T1 (27) (11) Green R1 Transmit RDTU PCB (2) Receive NDTU DB-15 Connector (Male) DB-15 Connector (Female) 8-Pin Modular (RJ45 Type Jack) NDTU Amphenol Connector (Male) RDTU To Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) T1 Customer-supplied Cable (See Notes) CPE T1 (PBX or Key System) or Channel Bank Black T (26) Red R (1) White T1 (27) Green R1 (2) Transmit RDTU PCB Receive RDTU Amphenol 655 Feet Maximum 1670 Notes ● Pins 2 and 4 of the DB-15 connector in most CSUs are frame ground. No connection is required. ● NDTU cable is supplied with RDTU PCB (30 ft. maximum). ● Set RDTU SW1 switch for proper loop length per DK14. ● Figure 6-7 Customer-supplied span cables must be 22 AWG, ABAM cable or, if using standard 24 AWG twisted pair, the transmit pair must be separated from the receive pair by at least 5-cable pairs. Most CSU manufacturers supply cables to connect the CSU to the Network Interface Unit or other CPE equipment. RDTU Cable Connections DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-15 DK424 T1 Loop Back Testing Loop Back Testing The RDTU provides three loop back test configurations. These loop back tests should be performed as required in conjunction with CSU loop back tests (see CSU loop back test documentation). RDTU Self Test This test should be performed upon initial installation of a RDTU PCB. Program the RDTU per “System Programming for T1” on Page 6-3; then perform the RDTU loop back test, per the instructions in Figure 6-8, before connecting the far end (CSU, Network, or CPE) T1 span line. RDTU Self Check Remove NDTU Cable MM8976B P1 P2 CSU Network Interface Unit Network MITEL Chip 1671 Notes ● P1 and P2 to ON position (see Figure 6-2). ● Remove NDTU cable from RDTU amphenol connector. ● ● ● Figure 6-8 After about 12 seconds, all RDTU LEDs (except PRI/SEC SYNC) turn OFF. Appropriate primary or secondary sync. LED flashes if RDTU is Primary or Secondary reference. If RDTU is not a primary or secondary reference, then the Primary and Secondary sync LEDs should turn OFF. RDTU Self Test Network/CSU T1 Span Test This test will verify that the far end (CSU, Network, or CPE) T1 equipment and span cabling is functioning properly. This test checks all T1 span cabling including the RDTU Amphenol cable and connector. Guidelines for this test are provided in Figure 6-9. 6-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Loop Back Testing Network/CSU Check Loop Back NDTU Cable P26, TT P1, TR P1 P2 On On CSU P27, RT Network Interface Unit Network P2, RR 1672 Notes ● P1 and P2 to ON position (see Figure 6-2). ● Unplug RDTU from DK424 back plane. ● CSU or Network T1 equipment should receive its own transmitted signal. ● Indications and results depend on CSU and/or Network equipment. Figure 6-9 Network/CSU T1 Span Test Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test This test checks all equipment that is checked with the test in the above paragraph, but this test also checks that the RDTU Mitel LSI chip is functioning. Guidelines for this test are described in Figures 6-8~6-10. Note Loop back tests with CSU and Network equipment can also be performed when connecting the RDTU PCB directly to a customer premise (PBX, Key Hybrid, Channel bank) T1 circuit. The RDTU Self Test is an active test of the RDTU circuit. The Network/CSU Test checks all cables, the Network and CSU equipment (RDTU is not active). The Remote Loop Back (RLB) Test is an Active test of RDTU (LSI MM8976B), CSU, Network equipment and all cables. Refer to Figure 6-3 and the CSU manufacturer’s Installation and Maintenance manual for information on CSU Local/Network Loopback Tests. DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-17 DK424 T1 Performance Monitoring RDTU RDTU Amphenol Pin Nos. RDTU TX Open MITEL Chip NDTU Cable P1/P26 Transmit P4 Network Interface Unit (NIU) CSU P2/P27 Receive Network MM8976B 2581 LEDS ON RDTU PCB Top LED 0 Busy ON Steady 0 FALM ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0 FMALM OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 0 YALM OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 0 BALM OFF OFF OFF ON OFF T1 Bottom LED T2 T3 0 Primary SYNC ON or OFF, Steady 0 Secondary SYNC ON or OFF, Steady T4 T5 Continue to Cycle when P4 is in ON Position T6 T = About 1/2 Second 1673 Performance Monitoring The performance of the RDTU can be monitored using the Data Dump Mode. This requires an RSIU, RSIS, PIOU or PIOUS PCB, an ASCII terminal (or PC) and, if monitoring RDTU performance from a remote location, an IMDU or RMDS modem or Hayes compatible modem is required. The RDTU monitoring feature provides a printout (or CRT display) of RDTU detected T1 errors as shown in Figure 6-10. There are no time parameters given with this error report so the time between error count increments must be monitored manually. Basically the error count of any error category should not increase within 24-hour periods (see Table 6-2 on Page 6-21). 6-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Performance Monitoring T1 ERROR DISPLAY T1ERR DTU NO = 1 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO = 2 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO = 3 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO = 4 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO = 5 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO = 6 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR = = = = XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES (1 (1 (1 (1 TIME TIME TIME TIME = = = = 1024 ERRORS) 256 X 256 ERRORS) 256 ERRORS) 256 ERRORS) = = = = = = = = = XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX TIMES (XXXX = 0~9999) TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES Figure 6-10 RDTU Performance Monitor Printout The error categories are as follows: ♦ Synchro Bit Error: This counter increments each time the RDTU detects 1024 synchronization bit errors. ♦ Bipolar Violation Error: This counter increments each time the RDTU detects 6.55 x 104 bipolar violations. ♦ Slip error: This counter increments each time the RDTU detect 256 slips. ♦ CRC Errors: Cyclical Redundancy Check counter increments each time the RDTU detects 256 CRC-6 errors. This is only available when the RDTU is in the Extended Super Frame mode. DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-19 DK424 T1 T1 Fault Isolation ➤ To receive the “T1 ERROR DISPLAY” from a terminal (local or remote) 1. Establish communication with the terminal or PC using a communication software (e.g., Procomm®). 2. Enter the security code, and press Enter (or Return). 3. At the >MODE prompt, type DUMP (must be all caps), press Enter (or Return). The >D prompt displays on your screen. 4. At the >D prompt, type T1ERR and press Enter (or Return). The display (see Figure 6-10) shows all RDTU PCBs (DTUNO=1~DTUNO=8) even if the associated RDTU (1~8) is not installed. The ERROR counter can only be reset by turning the DK424 OFF and ON. Use Table 6-2 for recording customer’s problems. ➤ To exit the dump mode ➤ At the >D prompt, type QUIT, press Enter (or Return); the >MODE prompt displays. T1 Fault Isolation T1 fault troubleshooting can be complex and may require expensive test equipment to perform the necessary fault isolation. Because of the high cost, many dealers have not purchased T1 test equipment. As a result, on a cutover when an RDTU does not synchronize or CO lines simply do not function, the site technician can only check wiring and cabling. Without proper test equipment, there is very little that can be tested. This section provides some procedures that can be done without T1 test equipment to help find the cause of a failure, or at least determine if system hardware is functioning properly. The DK424 also provides T1 “in-service” monitoring which allows maintenance personnel to detect line errors without introducing any disturbances on the line. This method of testing permits maintenance personnel to monitor T1 performance without the expense of test equipment or without taking the T1 circuit out of service. The T1 error check is particularly useful for monitoring the T1 circuit for intermittent problems that may become more serious as time progresses (see “RDTU Performance Monitor Printout” on Page 6-19). If experiencing problems with an RDTU span circuit, refer to Flowcharts 6-1~6-3 to isolate the fault. The flowcharts in this section use the same logic symbols as those used in DK. Document error information in Table 6-2, “RDTU T1 Error Record” on Page 6-21. 6-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Flowchart Symbols Table 6-2 RDTU T1 Error Record Customer: _______________________________ Date Time Latest Strata DK424 Power Off/On Reset Syncro Bit Error Bipolar Violation Error Slip Error CRC Error Notes ● ● Latest DK424 Power On/Off Reset: Use this column to record whether the DK424 Power was reset On or Off, and the date and time that it was reset. Use the Synchro Bit Error, Bipolar Violation Error, Slip Error, and CRC Error columns to record the error number, and the date and time that they occur. Flowchart Symbols Five symbols are used in the flowcharts, which are identified in Figure 6-11. Marking points of a flowchart sequence. Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure. Question to be answered YES or NO. Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location. Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points. 1887 DK424 T1 Statement of a required action. Figure 6-11 Flowchart Symbols Strata DK I&M 5/99 6-21 DK424 T1 Flowchart Symbols Flowchart 6-1 Fault Classification Start RDTU LED Indicators Top LED Bottom LED Busy (on) FALM (on) MFALM (on) YALM (on) BALM (on) The problem is: the RDTU will not synchronize with the far end T1. PSYNC (on or off) SSYNC (on or off) Go to chart 2 Start Yes No Busy (on) No alarms; synchronization is achieved The problem is: no dial tone on CO lines. Run DK424 programs per “RDTU (T1)Applications.” Note: Remember to cycle power after Program 41-2. Yes * 1 No The problem is: clicking or popping sounds on the talk path. No alarms; synchronization is achieved Yes No The problem is: no dial tone on CO lines. MFALM (on) (only) Go to chart 3 Is the problem cleared ? No Yes End Contract your technical support group Yes No Run DK424 programs per “RTDU (T1) Applications.” Note: MFALM (only) can indicate that RDTU is set for (SF) and the far end T1 is (ESF), or vice versa, see Program 41-1. * Go to 1 The problem is: no dial tone on CO lines. YALM (on) This normally means that the far end does not receive the RDTU signal, but RDTU is receiving the far end carrier signal. Yes No Go to chart 2 Start The fault is not classified, contact your technical support group. No The problem is: volume levels are too high or too low. Yes Run Program 41-3, 4 * per “RTDU (T1) Applications.” 1676 6-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 T1 Flowchart Symbols Flowchart 6-2 No Synchronization Start Check RDTU/CSU/NIU cabling per “RDTU Cable Installation.” Possible causes: No carrier from far end; defective CSU, NIU, or RDTU; cable problems. Before disconnecting CSU from Telco line, notify the T1 provider. You should also notify the provider before connecting the CSU. Run DK system programs per “RDTU (T1) System Programming”. Correct as necessary. Is fault cleared ? No Perform RDTU self test per “RDTU Loop Back Testing.” Yes Did RDTU pass the self test ? Yes 1 Perform the CSU local loop back test. In this test the RDTU loop back jumpers remain off and the CSU is placed in the local loop back mode. (The RDTU transmit signal is looped back to its receiver circuit.) See the CSU manufacturer’s I&M documentation. Yes Perform RDTU Network loop back tests per Figures 6-10 and 6-11. Yes Replace RDTU and retest. End 3 Is the problem corrected ? Yes End No Go to 4 Perform the CSU network loop back test per Figure 6-2. 3 No 2 Did CSU network test pass but still no synchronization ? Did the CSU local loop back test pass ? No Go to 4 Recheck cables, then replace CSU. No Is the problem corrected ? Recheck cables, then replace CSU. Yes End No Contact the T1 provider (carrier) and request them to perform a point-to-point, on-site, test from the NIU (demarcation point) to the far end T1 equipment. Go to 3 Contact your technical support group. 5/99 No Was problem corrected by network personnel ? Yes End 1677 DK424 T1 Strata DK I&M 4 6-23 DK424 T1 Flowchart Symbols Flowchart 6-3 Synchronization Slip Problems Start Slip problems cause periodic clicking on the talk path. Clicks can occur many times (severe case) during a call or only a few times during a 24-hour period. Slips occur when synchronization timing is lost for an instant and then recovers. Monitor slips using “T1ERR” function in DK280 remote maintenance DUMP mode. One example of a slip fault when using more than one RDTU T1 span is provided in Figure 6-6. Is there more than one RDTU installed ? Yes 2 No 1 • If RDTU spans are connected to a Telco or... long distance provider, program the first RDTU as the primary reference and the second as a secondary reference using Program 42 (see Figure 6-7). * • If a third RDTU is connected to a PBX, the PBX should be set up as a slave to the RDTU. • If all RDTUs are connected to a PBX, then either the RDTUs can be set as primary and secondary references (slaves) and the PBX as the master (Program *42 data is blank; or, all RDTUs should be set as the master and the PBX T1s should be slaves. • If RDTU is connected to a reliable clock source (Telco, AT&T etc.) then it should be programmed as a slave (primary reference) to the provider. (Program *42 – data = 1). • If RDTU is connected to a PBX or channel bank, make sure that RDTU is programmed as the master clock provider (Program *42 – data = blank); or, if the PBX is set up as a master, the RDTU should be programmed as a primary reference. Program as required. Program as required. Is slip problem cleared ? Is slip problem cleared ? Yes End No No 3 Use Program 42 and assign a different RDTU as Primary reference. * If problem continues try another RDTU as Primary reference. • Check all cable connections and correct as necessary. • Change CSU. Change the RDTU that was causing slip problems when it was set-up as Primary reference. 1681 Yes • Change Primary reference RDTU. Is slip problem cleared ? • If problem continues after RDTU is changed, change RCTU. • If problem continues after CSU, RDTU, and RCTU are changed, contact the T1 provider and request a point-to-point slip test from NIU to far end T1. No Go to 3 Contact your technical support group. 6-24 No Is slip problem cleared ? Yes End Strata DK I&M 5/99 7 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs This chapter contains information on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) which can be used in the universal slots of either the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU or the Strata DK424 cabinets. Although the system architecture of these systems is very different, the PCBs described in this chapter are common to both systems. Important! When installing these circuit boards in the DK40i Expansion KSU, you must install them in the universal slots designated in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. PCBs which are not installed in the universal slots of the system can be found in the installation chapter for the system. For example, the TCOU PCB for the DK40i system appears in Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. Paragraph headings identify information which is specific to a particular system and minor exceptions are mentioned in text. Prior to PCB installation, the power supply must be tested and the ground checked. Note PCB Compatibility The following is a list of PCBs that appear in this chapter: PCB Compatible with DK40i Compatible with DK424 EOCU X X Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (See PEKU for installation/programming instructions.) IMDU X X Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (See PIOU2, PIOUS2 for installation/programming instructions.) KCDU X PCOU1,2 X X (See RCOU for installation/programming instructions.) PDKU2 X X Digital Telephone Interface Unit PEKU X X Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEMU X X See REMU. PEPU X X External Page Interface Unit PESU X X Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit Strata DK I&M 5/99 Function CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit 7-1 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Compatibility PCB Compatible with DK40i Compatible with DK424 PIOU2, PIOUS2 X X Option Interface Units PSTU X X (See RSTU2 for installation/programming instructions.) X Attendant Console Interface Unit X Adds four additional Caller ID lines to RCIU2. X (See RCIU2 for installation/programming instructions.) X Caller ID Interface RATU RCIS X RCIU1 RCIU2 X Adds two ports per card (maximum of two) to E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) RCMS RCOS X X Adds four loop start lines. (See RCOU for installation/ programming instructions.) RCOU X X Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RDDU X X Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit RDSU X X Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit X T1 Interface Unit (See Chapter 6.) RDTU 7-2 Function REMU X X E&M Tie Line Unit RGLU2 X X Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit RMCU X CAMA E911 Trunk Direct Interface card RMDS X Optional built-in modem. (See RSIU for installation/ programming instructions.) RSIS X Optional RS-232 ports. (See RSIU for installation/ programming instructions.) RSIU X RS-232/Modem Interface Unit RSSU X X PC Interface Unit RSTS X X Optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (See RDSU for installation/programming instructions.) RSTU2 X X Standard Telephone Interface Unit RWIU X X Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (see Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems) Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout Each PCB outline begins with the PCB’s designation and title (the outline appears in the chapter in alphabetical order by designation). A brief synopsis of the PCB appears next and includes a notation of the system(s) that the PCB can be used in, the circuits supplied by the PCB, what equipment the PCB interfaces with, and a list of the PCB’s older version(s) with a brief description of their differences. Installation and programming instructions follow the synopsis with a table showing the PCB’s controls, indicators and connectors and an illustration of the board. DK16e/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Title RDDU Direct Inward Dialing LIne Interface Unit RDDU Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit System: Circuits per PCB: Interfaces with: Older Versions: DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout System: DK16e Expansion KSU, DK424 four DID lines DID lines None The RDDU provides four Direct Inward dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions. If an RDDU is installed, an RRCS must be installed for DTMF operation, but not for dial pulse operation. Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple staitons, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK424 only), or an external tlephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to difernent staions or group of stations. An extension can alos be assinged to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. Gives the type of system that is compatible with the given PCB. Be sure to read this information before attempting to use a PCB with your system application. RDDU controls, indicator,s and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-10 and described in Table 7-8. Circuits per PCB: RDDU Hardware Option Type and number of circuits available on the PCB. Ther e are no hardware options supported by the RDDU. sample.pg Interfaces with: Type of line/hardware the PCB can accept. Older Version(s): Describes older version or versions of the PCB. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-3 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout KCDU CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU Circuits per PCB: two CO loop start/four digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: central office loop start lines digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) PDIU-DS DDCB cordless digital telephone (DKT2004-CT) Older Version(s): none One or two KCDU PCBs may be installed in the Expansion KSU. For controls, connectors, and indicators, see Figure 7-1 and Table 7-1. KCDU Configuration The KCDU may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system. It does not have to be configured for anything else. The decibel (dB) PAD switches, SW501 (CO1) and SW601 (CO2), control the loudness by providing a 3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position. The switch comes from the factory set at NOR (for normal) meaning no PAD loss. KCDU Installation 1. If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system, set dB PAD switches SW501 and SW601 to the PAD position. 2. Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot in the Expansion KSU, per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors. 3. After installing the KCDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. Note If KCDU CO lines receive Caller ID, RCIU2 must be installed. KCDU Programming See “RCOU Programming” on Page 7-29 and “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 7-6 for KCDU programming information. When running Program 03 for the KCDU slot(s), specify code 65 if the KCDU does not support OCA or PDIU-DI telephones or code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or PDIU-DI telephones. Do not specify code 11, 61, 62, or 64. 7-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Chapter Layout KCDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector CO line circuit 1 indicator SW501 Type of Component Description Red LED Lights to indicate CO line circuit is in operation. CO line circuit 2 indicator SW601 Red LED J7 connectors Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits,1 and 2. PAD switch SW501 Two-position slide Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 1 (when set in PAD position). PAD switch SW601 Two-position slide Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 2 (when set in PAD position). 25-Pair Amphenol Connector (Female) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Table 7-1 J7 CO2 CO1 SW601 (CO2) PAD NOR SW501 (CO1) PAD NOR 1857 Backplane Connector Figure 7-1 Strata DK I&M KCDU PCB 5/99 7-5 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) DDSS console (circuit 8 only) PDIU-DS (must have dedicated circuit) DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) cordless digital telephone (DKT2004-CT) DKT2001 single line digital telephones (see Note below) Older Version(s): PDKU1 (identical to PDKU2 except it does not support continuous DTMF tones w/DKT2000-series telephones, DIUs can only be connected to circuits 1~7) PDKU2 Hardware Options PDKU2 does not have to be configured for any option. Refer to Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the PDKU2, as well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: an Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI), a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (DVSU), and a Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU). Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation to connect the Standalone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) to the PDKU. Note DKT2001 telephones do not support HHEUs, DADMs, DDSSs, RPCI-DIs, or DVSUs. There are no controls or indicators on the PDKU (Figure 7-2). PDKU2 Installation 1. Insert the PDKU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, PDKU2 must be installed per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) 2. After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PDKU2 Programming Program 03 ♦ Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU2. ♦ Specify Code 62 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) and/or DIUs and RPCI-DI Data mode. ♦ Specify Code 64 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting a DDSS console, Speaker OCA, DIUs, and RPCI-DI Data mode. ♦ For RPCI-DI TAPI mode only and Handset OCA, code 61 can be used and the PDKU2 can be in any universal cabinet slot. Note If there are no PDKU2 options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Programs 20, 21, and 22: Configures DIUs and RPCIs. 7-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit Program *29: Enables ADMs on 2000-series digital telephones. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Programs 30, 31: Enables OCA. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) and door phone ringing assignments. Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Programs 28 and 29: Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS) assignments. Backplane Connector 1371 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 7-2 Strata DK I&M PDKU2 PCB 5/99 7-7 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: eight electronic telephone circuits Interfaces with: electronic telephones HDSS console (circuits 7 and 8 only–each console requires two circuits) alternate BGM source (circuit 3 only) EOCU PCB for OCA external conference amplifier (circuits 2 and 3 only–ports 09 and 10, 17 and 18, 25 and 26, 33 and 34–each amplifier requires two circuits) HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) Older Version(s): none PEKU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-4 and described in Table 7-2. Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU (Internal Option) Note PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 7-3). 1. Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60. 2. Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors. J60 J40 J50 3. Use a three-pair cable for making connections between the PEKU and the speaker OCA electronic telephone. 4. Refer to “Electronic Telephone Upgrades” on Page 9-16 for procedures to upgrade electronic telephones for Speaker OCA. J20 Note Electronic telephones do not support handset OCA. External Options Note J10 1373 Figure 7-3 Off-Hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation Refer to Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus and Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for installation of electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU, HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or loud ringing bell interface) and external options, respectively. PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option 1. Set the SW1 switch to DSS. 2. See “HDSS Console” on Page 9-21 for console installation instructions. Each HDSS console requires dedicated use of circuits 7 and 8 of a particular PEKU PCB. 7-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit 1. Cut the W9 Door Phone jumper wire on the PEKU PCB. 2. Refer to “Door Phone (MDFB)” on Page 9-22 for HDCB, associated Door Phones (MDFBs) and door lock control installation procedures. Only circuit 5 of a PEKU associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 can support HDCBs. PEKU Configuration to Support Separate BGM Source Connection 1. Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper wire on the PEKU PCB. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEKU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB) 2. Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for installation procedures for BGM connection. Only circuit 3 can support a BGM source. 3. In Program 10-2, set LED 09 on to enable the PEKU (Port 002) BGM source to be sent to digital and electronic telephone speakers and/or PIOU2, PIOUS2, PEPU PCBs. 4. Use Program 19 to identify the slot in which the PEKU supporting the BGM source will be installed. PEKU Installation 1. Make sure the PEKU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. See previous pages for more information. 2. Insert the PEKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the PEKU can be installed only in place of the RSTU2, PDKU, or RDSU. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) 3. After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. PEKU Programming Program 03: Door phones, the BGM source connection, and external amplifiers do not require a special code. ➤ Specify Code 21 to indicate a non-optioned station line PEKU. ➤ Specify Code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA. ➤ Specify Code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured for an HDSS console. ➤ Specify Code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA and an HDSS console. Note If there are no PEKU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Programs 10-2 and 19: BGM connection. Programs 10-3: Assigns external amplifiers to ports. Programs 28 and 29: HDSS console assignments. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79: HDCB and door phone ringing assignments. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-9 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit Table 7-2 PEKU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Off-hook call announce P10 Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P20, P40, P50, and P60). Off-hook call announce P20 Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P40 10-pin connector Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P50 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60. Off-hook call announce P60 Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P10, P20, P40, and P50). DSS/EKT HDSS Console/ Electronic Telephone SW1 Switch 2-position slide switch Configures PEKU for operation with an HDSS console or electronic telephones. When cut, configures PEKU for installation of an optional HDCB. Door phone W9 jumper wire White jumper wire BGM source connection W5 jumper wire When cut, configures PEKU for BGM source connection. Backplane Connector P60 P50 P20 W9, cut for HDCB option P10 P40 W5, cut for BGM option EKT DSS SW1 1372 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 7-4 7-10 PEKU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: built-in paging amplifier or page speaker door lock control external amplifier control external paging 600 ohm (duplex) interface (one zone) MOH control night relay control DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Older Version(s): none The PEPU is similar to the PIOU2 and PIOUS2, but supports fewer peripherals than both PCBs. PEPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are illustrated in Figure 7-5 and described in Table 7-3. PEPU does not support the following PIOU2 and PIOUS2 options: ♦ Alarm sensor ♦ Four-zone page ♦ SMDR port ♦ Remote maintenance modem or ASCII terminal connector ♦ IMDU connection Note Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation and Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for installation of external options. PEPU2 Installation 1. Make sure P15 is in the Mu Law position for U.S. and Canada. 2. Ensure the PEPU2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation.) 3. Insert the PEPU2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (S16) of the Base KSU/ cabinet if the system has only a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there are Expansion KSU/cabinets, install the PEPU2 in the highest slot number of the highest numbered KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 4. After installing the PEPU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PEPU2 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 41 for the slot that will support a PEPU. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code only, not with $OO&DOO3DJH button). Program 77-1: Assigns relay control options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-11 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Table 7-3 PEPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component M/B make/break jumper plug P10 3-terminal jumper plug M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Description External page/door lock control relay make or break jumper plug. Night/hold relay make or break jumper plug. SPI/SPO internal/external amplifier switch SW4 2-position slide switch Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM operation. Volume control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier. Backplane Connector SPO SW4 P10 M M SPI P11 B B VR1 1390 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 7-5 7-12 PEPU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone or two-wire device circuits (circuits 1,2)/ four electronic telephone circuits (circuits 5~8) Interfaces with: standard telephone circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations alternate BGM source auto attendant digital announcer DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PESU Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit electronic telephone circuits electronic telephones alternate BGM source (circuit 8 only) EOCU PCB for OCA HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) external conference amplifier Older Version(s): none The PESU provides a ring generator that can be set for either 130V P-P or 190V P-P for the two standard interface circuits. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are nonfunctional, but they are each assigned a port in system programming. Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF receiver unit (RRCS4, 8, or 12) must be installed on the DK40i K4RCU3 or the DK424 common control unit. PESU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-6 and described in Table 7-4. DK40i General Information The PESU must be installed in the DK40i Expansion KSU in place of RDSU, RSTU or PDKU. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. Installing the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) (Internal Option) 1. Mate the EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 (Figure 7-6) with the PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60. Note PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position. 2. Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. Use three-pair cable for connecting the PESU and the Speaker OCA electronic telephone. Refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/ interconnecting details. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-13 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit 4. See “PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone” on Page 9-9 for procedures to add required speaker OCA upgrade to electronic telephones. External Options Note Refer to Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus to connect electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or Loud Ringing Bell interface), standard telephones, and HDCBs to the PESU. See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation to connect peripherals. PESU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB) 1. Cut the W9 door phone jumper wire on the PESU PCB. 2. See “Door Phone/Lock Programming” on Page 9-24 for installation procedures for the HDCB and associated door phones (MDFBs) and door lock control. 3. Each HDCB requires dedicated use of circuit 5 of a particular PESU PCB. PESU Configuration to Support Background Music (BGM) Source 1. Cut the W7 (BGM) jumper wire on the PESU. 2. Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for BGM installation procedures. PESU Configuration for Square Wave Ring Generator ➤ Ensure the P90 jumper plug is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or PSTU2 experience ring trip. PESU Installation 1. Make sure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is securely attached to the PESU (Figure 7-6). WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the PESU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield. 2. Ensure the PESU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. “PESU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors” on Page 7-15. 3. Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. 4. After installing the PESU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. 7-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Enter Code 25 in Program 03 for a non-optioned PESU or Code 26 for a PESU supporting Offhook Call Announce. To program the PESU standard telephone ports, see “PESU Programming” on Page 7-15. To program the PESU electronic telephone ports, see “PESU Programming” on Page 7-15. If there are no PESU options, skip Program 03 and run Program 91 instead. Table 7-4 PESU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P20, P40, P50, and P60). Off-hook call announce P10 Off-hook call announce P20 Description 10-pin connector Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P40 Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P50 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60. Off-hook call announce P60 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P50. Ring voltage jumper plug P90 3-terminal jumper White jumper wire Strata DK I&M 5/99 Sets ring generator voltage level for circuits 1 and 2. H=190V P-P (factory setting) L=130V P-P When cut, configures PESU, circuit 5 for installation of an optional HDCB. Door phone W9 jumper wire BGM W7 jumper pack DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PESU Programming When cut, configures PESU, port 07, circuit 8, for BGM source connection (slot 01 only with PCTU2 and PCTU1). 7-15 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Cut W7 Only if BGM Is Connected to Port 07, Circuit 8 P60 W7 PESU P40 P50 Optional EOCU, Equip. for OCA Feature Cut W9 for Door Phone Option (HDCB on Circuit 5) W9 P10 P20 ESTS 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) P80 Backplane Connector P70 Up L H P90 PESU 1378 Ring Voltage Option (Ports 1 & 2): L = Low Level (130V P-P) H = High Level (190V P-P) ESTS: Standard Telephone Interface, Always Equipped From Factory Note Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L). Figure 7-6 7-16 PESU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit System: DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PIOU2, PIOUS2 Option Interface Units DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: night transfer/music hold control relay door lock/external amplifier control relay remote maintenance (IMDU) TTY port–terminal, modem, SMDI, ACD/MIS (DK424 only) SMDR output alarm sensor zone page interface–four zones (PIOU2 only) built-in paging amplifier (PIOU2 only) unamplified page output Older Version(s): none The PIOU2 and PIOUS2 both provide a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. A maximum of three PIOU2 or PIOUS2 PCBs can be installed in the system. (see “PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation” on Page 7-18). DK40i General Information: On the DK40i, the Base KSU provides the 600 ohm page output; the 600 ohm page output on the PIOU2, PIOUS2 is not used on the DK40i. PIOU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-8 and described in Table 7-6. PIOUS2 information is provided in Figure 7-9 and Table 7-7. IMDU Compatibility with PIOU and PIOUS The compatibility of the IMDU1 and IMDU2A PCBs are shown in Table 7-5. Table 7-5 IMDU and PIOU/PIOUS Compatibility PIOU/PIOUS IMDU1 IMDU2A PIOU1A/PIOUS1A Available Available PIOU2A/PIOUS2A N/A Available IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) 1. Make sure IMDU2 P3 is set for PCM Mu Law operation in the U.S and Canada. Mu A P3 H 5/99 J1 H M L 4. On the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, set the SW3 switch to the “MODEM” position for IMDU2 operation. Strata DK I&M P1 J2 3. Make sure IMDU2 P2, modem receive gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada. 5. Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 to the “BELL.” L P2 2. Make sure IMDU2 P1, modem transmit gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada. 3651 Figure 7-7 Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU2) Installation 7-17 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit 6. Mate IMDU2 connector J1 with PIOU2 or PIOUS2 connector P1 and IMDU2 J2 with P2 and P3 (see Figure 7-7). Note PIOU2 or PIOUS2 connectors P1, P2, and P3 are positioned to allow installation of the IMDU2 only in the proper position. 7. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual and turn LED 14 on in Program 77-1 to enable IMDU2 operation. Note The IMDU2 default station intercom or [DN] is #19. 8. Apply firm, even pressure to the IMDU2 to ensure proper mating of connectors. 9. Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the PCB has been installed in the KSU/cabinet (in for 300 bps, out for 1200 bps). Note Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for external option installation procedures. PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation 1. Make sure that P15 is in the Mu Law position for USA and Canada. 2. Ensure that the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for more details.) 3. Insert the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the Base KSU/cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/ cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 in the highest slot number in any KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Note In DK40i, PIOU2 or PIOUS2 can be installed in any available Expansion KSU. 4. After installing the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PIOU2, PIOUS2 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 41, 42, or 43 for the slot that will support a PIOU2 or PIOUS2. (See “Multiple Serial Port Installation” on Page 11-2) Note Program 76 assignments for RSIU, RSIS, RMDS will override Program 03 assignments (41, 42, and 43) for SMDI, SMDR, TTY, and maintenance modem. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code #39 only, not with $OO &DOO3DJH button). Program 60: Assigns SMDR options. Program 77-1: Assigns relay control and IMDU2 options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page 7-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs 3692 Backplane Connector P15 P2 P1 N.C N.O MODEM P12 SP1 SW3 CCITT BELL B PIOU2A M B P10 P11 M 300 P13 SW4 TTY SP0 SW1 J3 TTY 600/600 1200 SW2 SMDR ON 300 OFF 1200 PIOU2 Figure 7-8 Mu A P3 PIOU2 PCB 3719 Backplane Connector P2 P1 P15 MODEM Mu A IMDU2 P3 SW3 N.C N.O TTY P12 300 P13 P10 M B M P11 SW1 B CCITT BELL SW2 600/600 SPT CD4 PIOUS2 Figure 7-9 Strata DK I&M SPR DET DER NHT NHR ALMT ALMR PIOUS2 1200 ON 300 OFF 1200 PIOUS2 PCB 5/99 7-19 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Table 7-6 PIOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector IMDU2 connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU2 connector P2 9-pin connector IMDU2 connector P3 3-pin connector Description Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/ modem. Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Night/Hold Relay Make or Break jumper. Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper plug P12 Plastic jumper Alarm sensor normally open or closed jumper. IMDU2 or external modem operating specification jumper plug. CCITT/BELL plug P13 SMDR baud rate switch SW1 2-position slide switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking pushbutton switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU2) or external TTY jack. Enables PIOU2 for operation with IMDU2 modem or TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 2-position slide switch Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM operation. Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier. 3-terminal jumper plug Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of Europe and Asia. SPO/SP1 internal/external amplifier switch SW4 Volume control VR1 PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15 *Most modems in USA require BELL specification. **Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR. 7-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit PIOUS2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector (top modular is TTY, bottom is SMDR) IMDU2 connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU2 connector P2 9-pin connector IMDU2 connector P3 3-pin connector Description Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/ modem.** Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Night/Hold relay make or break jumper plug. Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper plug P12 3-terminal jumper plug Alarm sensor normally open or normally closed jumper plug. IMDU2 or external modem operating specification jumper plug. CCITT/BELL jumper plug P13 SMDR baud rate switch SW1 2-position slide switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking pushbutton switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU) or external TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 2-position slide switch Enables PIOUS2 for operation with IMDU2 modem or TTY jack. 3-terminal jumper plug Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of Europe and Asia. PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Table 7-7 *Most modems in USA require BELL specification. **Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-21 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit System: DK424 Circuits per PCB: four attendant console circuits Interfaces with: up to four conventional and/or PC attendant consoles Older Version(s): none RATU controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 7-10 and described in Table 7-8. RATU Installation 1. Insert the RATU (component side facing right) into the slot following the last station PCB. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors (consoles will assume the next four station port numbers). (See Worksheets in Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration for RATU slot assignment recommendations. 2. After installing the RATU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 7-8 RATU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Console 1 indicator CD3 Console 2 indicator CD4 Red LED Console 3 indicator CD5 Console 4 indicator CD6 Description Lights when a PC or conventional console is not operating. The LED will turn off when the console is operational. The LED temporarily flashes when the console is first installed and the DK424 RCTU processor and attendant console or RATI initialize. 1391 Backplane Connector 4 3 2 1 CD3 CD4 CD5 CD6 Female Amphenol Connector Figure 7-10 RATU PCB 7-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit System: RCIU1–DK424 RCIU2 –DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 RCIS–DK424 Circuits per PCB: four Caller ID circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines w/Caller ID (requires RCOU or RGLU2) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Caller ID Interface Older Version(s): none The RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB provides the Caller ID feature, also known as Calling Number Delivery (CND). There are two types of RCIU PCBs, RCIU1 and RCIU2. RCIU1 can be used in DK424 systems. RCIU2 can be used in DK424 and DK40i systems. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install RCIU1 in the DK40i system. Caller ID can be provided on analog loop start lines (PCOU, KCDU, RCOU PCBs) and analog ground start lines (RGLU2 PCB) only. It is not available on any other type of analog lines (RDDU/ DID and/or REMU, PEMU Tie) or any type of digital lines (RDTU- T1, including ground start, loop start, DID and Tie lines). An RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available in addition to each RCOU, RGLU, etc., line that is to receive Caller ID. When ordered from the factory, the RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB comes equipped with four caller ID circuits. RCIS PCB An RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed onto the RCIU to provide an additional four caller ID circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU/RCIS can provide a maximum of eight caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. To provide up to eight circuits, always install RCIS onto RCIU1 (DK424 only) or RCIU2 (DK40i and DK424) instead of installing two RCIU PCBs (Program 03 code 81 always assigns each RCIU slot with eight software caller ID circuits). Each RCIU/RCIS Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired across its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring on the MDF (see Figure 8-27 on Page 8-28). Each RCIU/RCIS modular jack provides interface for two Caller ID circuits. DK40i RCIU2 Installation ➤ Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only (see Figure 7-12 and Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) DK424 RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ➤ Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the DK424 (except slot 11 or slot 12 if the RSIU is installed in slot 11). Note Strata DK I&M It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. 5/99 7-23 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit DK424 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation 1. Install the RCIS onto the RCIU1 or RCIU2 as required (see Figures 7-11 and 7-13). 2. Install the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS into the appropriate cabinet slot. The circuit modular jack numbering and the tip/ring cross connect wiring of RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS to RCOU, PCOU, or RGLU is shown in Figure 8-25 on Page 8-26. Note It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Programming Program 03: Program each RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS (four or eight Caller ID circuit) slot with code 81. Note RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS caller ID circuits are numbered automatically in numerical order starting with the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS installed in the lowest slot number. Slots with code 81 increment the Caller ID circuit numbers by eight circuits even if RCIS is not installed on the RCIU1 or RCIU2. Program *50: Assigns CO lines that will receive Caller ID to an associated RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Caller ID circuit number. This assignment is flexible, i.e., any RCOU, PCOU, RGLU Caller ID CO line can be assigned to any RCIU1, RCIU2 or RCIS caller ID circuit number. Note After assigning CO lines to caller ID circuits, turn system power OFF for approximately five seconds and then back ON or run Program 91-2 to activate Program *50 assignments. Program *51: Sets the Caller ID (CLID)/Automatic Dialed Number Identification (ANI) memory allocation for the appropriate stations. This memory is used to save CLID/ANI telephone numbers for calls that are received but not answered (abandoned calls). CLID/ANI numbers are not saved in station memory if they are answered. Stations can be allocated with memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10-number increments. The total memory allocated to all stations in a system is: ♦ RCTUE/F = 2000 numbers ♦ RCTUC/D = 1000 numbers ♦ RCTUBA/BB = 400 numbers ♦ RCTUA and DK40i = 200 numbers Note When a CO line rings multiple stations, a station must be the owner of the Caller ID or ANI CO line to be able to save abandoned call (Caller ID and/or ANI) telephone numbers. (See Program *52.) Program *52: Assigns stations as owners of Caller ID CO lines. These stations will store the Caller ID telephone numbers received on abandoned (not answered) calls for the lines which they own. Typically all common CO lines are assigned to one designated telephone or attendant console and private lines are assigned to individual private line telephones. 7-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs J12 J13 RCIU1 P12 P13 20K/20K J4 Secondary Protectors RCIS1A (reverse) 20K/20K RCIU1A or RCIU2A (front) J3 20K/20K J2 J11 20K/20K J10 J1 P10 RCIU1A P11 V.1 1392 Figure 7-11 DK424 RCIU1/RCIS or DK40i RCIU2/RCIS PCB Installation P12 P13 20K/20K RCIU2 Secondary Protectors 20K/20K RCIU2A (front) 20K/20K 20K/20K J2 J1 P10 RCIU2A P11 V.1 1862 Figure 7-12 DK40i RCIU2 PCB Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-25 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RCIS RCIU1 or RCIU2 4-wire Modular Jack (4) Not Used T2 T1 R1 R2 Not Used CKT 7 & 8 CKT 3 & 4 CKT 5 & 6 CKT 1 & 2 SXX 1393 Figure 7-13 DK424 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS PCB Modular Jack Positions Note A station must also be allocated with Caller ID/ANI storage memory in Program *51 to store abandoned call telephone numbers. Program 39, Code 462: Assigns the Caller ID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to LCD telephones that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A user can scroll through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button. Program 59, Code 462: Assigns the CLID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to the attendant consoles that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A console user can scroll through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button. Program 10-3, Key 08: Determines if CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers will be sent out the system SMDI port: ➤ Turn LED 08 ON if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should be sent out the system SMDI port. ➤ Turn LED 08 OFF if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should not be sent out the system SMDI port. Note 7-26 The system will initialize with LED 01 OFF, i.e., no CLID/ANI information will be sent out the SMDI port. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit ➤ Turn LED 01 ON if CLID and/or ANI information should be sent out the system SMDR port. ➤ Turn LED 01 OFF if Account Codes information should be sent out the system SMDR port. The system will initialize with LED 01 OFF, i.e., Account Codes information will be sent out the SMDR port. Note DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Program 60-1, Key 01: Determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port, i.e., system Account Codes or CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers: Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02 (DK424 Release 3.2 and above): Enables CLID, ANI, and/or Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) information to be sent from the RSIU Open Architecture (OA) port on ACD calls only: ➤ Turn LED 01 ON if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information. ➤ Turn LED 01 OFF if the OA port should not send Caller ID/ANI. ➤ Turn LED 02 ON if the off port should send DNIS information. ➤ Turn LED 02 OFF if the OA port should not send DNIS information. Notes ● ● Strata DK I&M Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned ON simultaneously to allow CLID, ANI, and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port on ACD calls. The system will initialize with LED 01 and LED 02 OFF, i.e., no CLID, ANI, or DNIS information will be sent from the OA port on ACD calls. 5/99 7-27 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RCOU, RCOS Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit System: RCOU–DK40Expansion KSU, DK424 RCOS–DK40i, DK424 Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits Interfaces with: loop start lines Older Version(s): PCOU2 (does not have ABR circuitry, uses RCTU, K4RCU ABR circuits) PCOU1(has ABR circuitry, identical and interchangeable w/PCOU2) The RCOU also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold circuitry. Each RCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection. RCOU PCBs are shown in Figure 7-14 and described in Table 7-9. RCOS Installation (Internal Option) An RCOS PCB can be installed on the RCOU of the DK40i and DK424 for four more loop start lines (for a total of eight lines–the RCOS circuits provide the same options as the RCOU). Each RCOS circuit has gas tube secondary protection. Excessive loudness which is caused by close proximity to a CO or PBX telephone can be fixed through the RCOS and RCOU decibel (dB) PAD switches. RCOS dB switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 and RCOU dB switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO when set to position 3. Switches are factory-set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. See Figure 7-12 and Table 7-10 for RCOS controls, indicators, and interface connectors. ➤ To install an RCOS PCB 1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or CO, set the RCOS dB PAD switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. Set the RCOU dB PAD switches to position 3 also. Note RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 are positioned to allow installation of the RCOS only in the proper position. 2. Mate the RCOS female connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 (Figure 7-16) to the RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 (Figure 7-14). 3. Apply firm, even pressure to the RCOS to ensure proper mating of connectors. 7-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Note The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a Central Office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. ➤ To install an RCOU PCB 1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or Central Office, set the RCOU dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RCOU Installation 2. Insert the RCOU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. PCOU2 can be installed in place of RCOU, see Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 3. After installing the RCOU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RCOU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 11 for each slot that will support an a four-circuit RCOU (without an RCOS). Specify Code 17 for each slot that will support an RCOU equipped with an RCOS. Note Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Program 91 recognizes the RCOS. Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is automatically enabled for ground start CO lines. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Programs 45 ~ 48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line. Programs 50 ~ 56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments. Program *50: Assigns Caller ID circuits (RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS) to CO lines. Program *52: Caller ID line owner station assignment. Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant. Programs 81 ~ 89: ♦ Assigns lines to ring selected stations and DH groups. ♦ Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-29 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns which [DN] will flash when the CO line rings a telephone. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. Table 7-9 RCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1~4 indicators Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J1 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. 10-pin male connector Interface connector for RCOS 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. PAD switch SW101 (circuits 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) RCOS connector P11, P12, P13, P14 Backplane Connector P12 P14 SW401 SW301 SW201 SW101 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 P11 P13 RCOS Connectors CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 RCOS Connectors CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 4 3 2 1 Red LEDs J2 J1 1379 Figure 7-15 RCOU PCB 7-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 5~8 Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J3 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 5 and 6. J4 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 7 and 8. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. Female connector Interface connector for RCOU 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Table 7-10 PAD switch SW501 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW601 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW701 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW801 (circuit 4) RCOU connector J11, J12, J13, J14 Backplane Connector SW101 SW401 0 3 PAD 4 3 2 SW301 SW201 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 1 1381 CO Line LEDs CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 Figure 7-16 DK40i and DK424–RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connector Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-31 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit Table 7-11 PCOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1 CD112 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. CO line circuit 2 CD212 Red LED CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO. CO line circuit 3 CD312 CO line circuit 4 CD412 J1 connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. Modular connector J2 connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) 2-position slide switch PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) Red LEDs Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 7 and 8 8 7 6 5 Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 5 and 6 J4 J3 J13 J11 RCOU Connectors 3 J14 RCOU CONNECTORS 0 SW801 3 0 SW701 3 0 SW601 3 0 SW501 J12 1380 Figure 7-17 DK424 – PCOU2 PCB 7-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: four DID lines Interfaces with: DID (one or two-way) lines Older Version(s): none DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDDU Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit The RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or on any DK424 RCTU. RRCS is not required for RDDU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11). Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK424 only), or an external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or groups of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. RDDU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-18 and described in Table 7-12. RDDU Installation Note Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. 1. If the KSU is located within one mile of the PBX or CO, set dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position to control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to the PBX or CO. 2. Sensitivity jumpers P101~P401 are used mostly for dial pulse operation, to adjust for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the central office, the sensitivity should be set for low (L); as the loop length increases, it should be set to medium (M), then high (H). 3. Insert the RDDU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, RDDU must be installed per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) Important! Each RDDU PCB uses four station ports in software. See Worksheets in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for recommended RDDU slot assignments. 4. After installing the RDDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-33 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RDDU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 16 for slots that support RDDUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Program *09: Assigns DID line extensions to route to station [PDNs] and IMDU or RMDS Remote Maintenance (see Program 17 below). Program 10-1: Enables or disables two-line conference. Program 15: Assigns DTMF/dial pulse dialing, and additional attributes to each line. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program *17: Assigns intercept port for DID calls to wrong or vacant numbers. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to DID lines. Also used to assign Auto camp-on and no-dial tone return for DID lines. Program 17 also Assigns DID lines to route per DNIS and ANI options (Program 71 and 72) or DID numbers (Program *09). Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line. Programs 45~48: Defines toll restriction for any line. Programs 50~56: Defines least cost routing assignments. Programs 71 (1~5): Assigns DNIS or ANI option to DID lines. Programs *71~*73: Assigns telephone to ring called [DN]. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. 7-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) 3-position slide switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. J1 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 1 & 2 J2 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 3 & 4 DID line circuit 1 CD122 Red LED (top) DID line circuit 2 CD222 Red LED DID line circuit 3 CD322 Red LED DID line circuit 4 CD422 Red LED (bottom) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Table 7-12 PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) Lights to indicate line circuit is in operation. (Trunk indicator will not light unless RDDU is connected to a DID line.) Jumper plug P101 Jumper plug P201 3-terminal jumper plug Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. Jumper plug P301 Jumper plug P401 Backplane Connector P401 3 0 P201 3 0 HML SW201 P101 3 0 HML SW101 RDDU HML SW401 P301 3 0 HML SW301 4 3 2 1 RDDU J2 LEDs J1 1385 Figure 7-18 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-35 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit RDSU Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU only, DK424 Circuits per PCB: (with RSTS) four standard telephone (circuits 1~4)/four digital telephone (circuits 5~8) (without RSTS) two standard telephone circuits (1 and 2)/four digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital circuits digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM) PDIU-DS DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, 028) cordless digital telephone (DKT2004-CT) standard circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp Older Version(s): none An optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (RSTS) can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard telephone ports (circuits 3 and 4). RDSU and RSTS controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-19. RDSU interface connectors are described in Table 7-13. Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or on any DK424 RCTU. CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) An optional R48S unit can be connected to the RDSU or RSTU to change the standard telephone loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the standard telephone circuit loop length (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. The features provided by the R48S apply to the RSTS circuits as well as the basic RDSU standard telephone circuits. ➤ To install the R48S on the RDSU ➤ Mate the R48S connectors R6 and R7 with the RDSU connectors R6 and R7. RDSU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned to allow installation of the R48S only in the proper position (Figure 7-26). 7-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit ➤ Mate the RSTS connectors P2~P5 with the RDSU connectors P2~P5. RDSU connectors P2~P5 are positioned to allow installation of the RSTS only in the proper position (Figure 7-19). RDSU Installation 1. Ensure the SSTU subunit and optional subassemblies are securely attached to the RDSU (Figure 7-19). DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Installing RSTS (Internal Option) WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the RDSU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield. 2. Insert the RDSU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (See Figure 8-22 on Page 8-23.) CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the DK40i system. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 3. After installing the RDSU gently pull the RDSU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. RDSU Programming ➤ Enter Code 27 in Program 03 for a non-optioned RDSU, or enter Code 28 for an RDSU that support off-hook call announce and data interface units. To program the RDSU standard telephone ports (including the RSTS), see “RDSU Programming” on Page 7-37. To program the RDSU digital telephone ports, see “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 7-6. ➤ If there are no RDSU options, skip Program 03 can be skipped, and run Program 91 instead. Table 7-13 RDSU, RSTS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component RSTS connector P2/P3 10-pin connector RSTS connector P4/P5 R48S connector to P6 8-pin connector R48S connector to P7 6-pin connector Description Connector for RSTS subassembly that provides two standard telephone circuits. Interface connector for R48S. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-37 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit P3 P2 RSTS P5 P4 P6 R48S P7 P6 P3 P2 P7 P5 P4 RDSU1 1377 Figure 7-19 RDSU, RSTS PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit See Chapter 6 – DK424 T1 for RDTU PCB installation and programming information. 7-38 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits Interfaces with: E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signaling Immediate and Wink Start DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs REMU Tie Line Unit Older Version(s): PEMU (Type I signaling & immediate start only, does not provide PAD switches) With DK424, Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS/ ANI assignments (see Program 17). The REMU has four decibel (dB) PAD switches which can be set to reduce excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to the PBX or central office. (PAD is for Transmit and Receive for 2W operation, and Transmit only is for 4W operation.) Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or on any DK424 RCTU. RRCS is not required for REMU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11). REMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-20 and described in Table 7-14. PEMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-21 and described in Table 7-15. REMU Installation 1. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs SW103~SW403 to the appropriate positions. 2. Set the P102/104, P202/204, P302/304, and P402/404 jumper plugs for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 3. If the system is located within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the REMU dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 4. Insert the REMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be installed only in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) Important! Each REMU decreases the maximum system CO line and station ports by four each. See Worksheets in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for recommended REMU slot assignments. 5. After installing the REMU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-39 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit PEMU Installation 1. Determine if the E&M Tie lines will be configured for 2- or 4-wire transmission. 2. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs P103, P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions. 3. Set the FG jumper plug P3 to the “2-3” position. 4. Set all GND/BAT jumper plugs to the “BAT” position for connection to the telephone network. Note The “GND” position is used to connect PEMU circuits back-to-back on premises only, 1000 feet maximum (E&M lead wires must be crossed). 5. Insert the PEMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.(For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be installed only in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.) Important! Each PEMU decreases the maximum system CO line and station ports by four each. See Worksheets in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration and Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration for recommended PEMU slot assignments. 6. After installing, gently pull the PEMU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PEMU, REMU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support PEMUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones (see Program 17, LED 05). Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to REMU Tie lines. Important! Note Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return. When a PEMU or REMU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive CO line and station port numbers. Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DID DNIS assignments. Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DID to [DN] ringing assignments. Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line 7-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit REMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuits 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie trunk connector circuits 1~4 (J101, 201, 301, and 401) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. 2-position slice switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. 3-terminal jumper Enables line circuit to be set for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 2-position slice switch Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Table 7-14 PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P102/ 104 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P202/ 204 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P302/ 304 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P402/ 404 2W/4W switch 102 (circuit 1) 2W/4W switch 202 (circuit 2) 2W/4W switch 302 (circuit 3) 2W/4W switch 402 (circuit 4) Backplane Connector SW102 SW202 SW302 SW402 4W 2W 2W 4W 4W 2W 4W P304 P202 P204 P104 P302 P404 TYP1 TYP1 P402 TYP1 TYP2 TYP2 TYP2 3 SW401 TYP1 TYP2 0 4 3 2 1 3 0 TYP1 TYP1 TYP2 TYP2 SW301 SW201 3 TYP1 TYP2 TYP1 TYP2 0 SW101 3 0 REMU 2W P102 LEDs J401 J301 J201 J101 1383 Figure 7-20 REMU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-41 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit Table 7-15 PEMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuit 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie line connector J101, 201, 301,and 401 (circuit 1~4) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. FG jumper P3 3-terminal jumper Enables or disables -48VDC ground to FG. GND/BAT jumper P101 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 1) GND/BAT jumper P102 Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. GND/BAT jumper P201 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 2) GND/BAT jumper P202 GND/BAT jumper P301 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 3) GND/BAT jumper P302 GND/BAT jumper P401 M-lead origination for Tie line (must be in BAT position per FCC requirements. 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 4) GND/BAT jumper P402 2W/4W switch P103, 203, 303, and 402 (circuit 1~4) Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. 3-terminal jumper Backplane Connector 2W P403 4W 2W P303 4W P203 P103 2W 4W 2W 4W SP1020 -48 Volt Supply Ground/Battery Jumpers (Leave In Factory Positions) P401 P402 P202 P201 P102 P302 P301 FG LEDs P3 P101 123 4 3 2 1 J401 J301 J201 J101 1384 Tie Line 4 Tie Line 3 Tie Line 2 Tie Line 1 Figure 7-21 PEMU PCB 7-42 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: four line circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines Older Version(s): RGLU1 (does not have hookflash to CO) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RGLU2 Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold. Each RGLU2 line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection. RGLU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-22 and described in Table 7-16. RGLU2 Installation Note The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or central office when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. ➤ To install an RGLU2 PCB 1. If the DK KSU is within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. Set each line for ground start (GND) or loop start (LOOP) by setting the following jumper plugs: SW103 for line 1, SW203 for line 2, SW303 for line 3, and SW403 for line 4. 3. Insert the RGLU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RGLU2 can be installed in place of RCOU, per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 4. After installing the RGLU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RGLU2 Programming Programming for the RCOU and RGLU2 is essentially the same. See “RCOU Programming” on Page 7-29, for an overview of RGLU2 programming. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-43 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RDTU T1 Interface Unit Table 7-16 RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Line circuit 1 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. Line circuit 2 Red LED CO line indicator will not light unless RGLU2 is connected to a line. Line circuit 3 Line circuit 4 J1 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 3 and 4. 2-position slice switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for trunk circuits. 3-terminal jumper Used to configure line for loop or ground start. PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) LOOP/GND jumper SW103 (configures line 1) LOOP/GND jumper SW203 (configures line 2) LOOP/GND jumper SW303 (configures line 3) LOOP/GND jumper SW403 (configures line 4) Backplane Connector LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND SW403 SW303 SW203 SW103 Red LEDs 4 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 SW401 SW301 SW201 SW101 3 2 1 RGLU J2 J1 1382 Figure 7-22 RGLU2 PCB 7-44 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit System: DK424 Circuits per PCB: four interface ports Interfaces with: SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 voice mail ACD SMIS computer SMDR printer or SMDR call accounting machine DKAdmin/DKBackup PC or maintenance terminal (locally or remotely) Open-architecture application computer system–receives ANI, DNIS or CLID digits from the DK424 on ACD calls DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit Older Version(s): none The RSIU is a standard plug-in type PCB that must be installed into the first universal slot of the DK424 base cabinet. The RSIU PCB provides one standard RS-232 port (modular jack) when ordered from the factory; this port can be configured in system programming to support any one of the hardware options listed above. The RSIU can be equipped with up to three more optional RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232 ports) or with two optional RS-232 ports and one modem port (total of three RS-232 ports and one modem port). The optional RS-232 ports are provided by installing RSIS piggy-back PCBs onto the RSIU PCB. The optional built-in modem is provided by installing an RMDS piggy-back PCB onto the RSIU (see Figure 7-38 in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring). The RSIS PCB can support any one of the hardware devices listed above via its RS-232 modular jack. The RMDS PCB can function two ways: the RMDS can operate like an RSIS allowing it to support any one of the hardware devices listed above locally from its RS-232 modular jack; or, the RMDS can operate as a 1200 bps (bits-per-second) or 2400 bps system remote maintenance modem. The RMDS PCB function (modem or RS-232 port) is set in a system program option. The RMDS can be set for one function only; it cannot support both functions simultaneously. When configured as a modem, the RMDS PCB supports only the DK424 remote maintenance, ASCII terminal, or DKBackup, and DKAdmin functions, and does not simultaneously support SMDI, SMIS, SMDR, etc. (See Figure 8-36 on Page 8-37.) The total bits-per-second (bps) data rate of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS (RS-232/modem) ports combined cannot exceed 9600 bps. The RSIU, RSIS RS-232 ports can be individually set in system programming to operate at 1200 bps, 4 ports max.; 2400 bps, 3 ports max.; 4800 bps, 2 ports max.; or 9600 bps, 1 port max.; or, any other combination that does not exceed 9600 bps. The RMDS modem function can be set to operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps; however, if the RMDS port is used as a RS-232 port instead of a modem, it can also be set for 4800 bps or 9600 bps. The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active.The communication parameters for all RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port function types except the SMDR are: ♦ Data word bits = 7 ♦ Parity = even ♦ Stop bits = 1 The communication parameters for an RSIU, RSIS SMDR port is: ♦ Strata DK I&M Data word bits = 8 5/99 7-45 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit ♦ Parity = none ♦ Stop bits = 1 Only one RSIU can be installed per DK424 system. When the RSIU PCB is installed, the RSSU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, IMDU modem, and PEPU PCBs can still be installed with all of their respective paging, modem, and RS-232 port functions available; however, five RS-232/modem ports can be installed in one DK424 system. When installed together in the same DK424 system, the RSIU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port functions are identified and enabled (turned ON/OFF) in system programming. If the same function is programmed for an RSIU port and a PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port, only the RSIU port will function. RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation 1. Install all RSIS and RMDS PCBs on the RSIU PCB before installing the RSIU into the DK424. Each RSIS or RMDS piggy-back PCB is installed on the RSIU PCB as shown in Figure 4-38. Up to three RSIS PCBs can be installed on the RSIU PCB; only one RMDS PCB can be installed on the RSIU. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of each RSIS and RMDS circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Programming Part that follows. 2. After installing all RSIS, RMDS PCBs, install the RSIU into the DK424 per the following instructions. RSIU Installation 1. The RSIU must be installed only in slot 11 of the base cabinet (see Figure 7-23 to install the RSIU PCB). 2. A PDKU or PEKU PCB must be installed in slot 12 of the base cabinet to support the programming telephone. 3. The first 8-station ports (000-007) appear on the PDKU or PEKU as installed in slot 12. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of the RSIU or RMDS, RS-232 circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Strata DK Programming Manual. All information provided in the “RSIU Installation” on Page 7-46 applies to installing an RSIU in an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot. 7-46 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit 1 UP 17 J2 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P4 Port #1 3-Pair Modular Jack 1 Port #2 3-Pair Modular Jack DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs Each position on the RSIU card can accept either an RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) card. Only one RMDS card can be used per RSIU. (See Note 1) UP J1 P3 17 1 UP 17 J2 1 RSIU1 Port #3 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 1 P5 J1 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P7 UP J1 1 17 1 UP 17 J2 J4 1 Port #4 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 P8 J3 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P2 UP P11 J1 17 1 17 Bottom View (solder side) P9 RSIU1A V.1 RMDS Top View 1 17 J3 J1 J4 1 RSIS1A J3 J1 CAUTION: RSIS Top View 17 1 RMDS1A 1 J4 Do not connect telephone circuit Tip/Ring to J4 (See Note 2) J2 J2 1 17 17 17 17 1 1814 Notes 1. Maximum of one RMDS per RSIU, maximum of three RSIS per RSIU. 2. On RMDS, is not used for modem, operation. It is used when RMDS is configured for TTY, SMDI, or MIS operation like RSIS. Figure 7-23 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS PCB Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-47 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUA3 DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUC3 / D3 or RCTUBA3 / RCTUBB3 / RCTUE3 / RCTUF3 Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 Ribbon Cable Install ribbon cables as shown 2-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RCTU) Ribbon Cable Port 3 Port 3 Install ribbon cables as shown 3-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RSIU) Port 4 Port 4 SLOT PCB TYPE R11 RCTU RCTUC3 or RCTUBA3 or RCTUE3 S11 RSIU RSIS or RMDS S12 PDKU or PEKU S13 SLOT R11 RCTU RCTUA3 PCB TYPE RCTUD3 or RCTUBB3 or RCTUF3 S11 RSIU RSIS or RMDS S12 S13 PDKU or PEKU 1815 Figure 7-24 RSIU Installed into an Existing System without DID and/or Tie Lines ➤ To move the PCB to the next highest slot 1. Identify (mark) the attendant console and all station PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled on the same PCB later (console station PCBs include: PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, PESU, RSTU, PSTU and RATU PCBs). 2. Turn system power OFF. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the attendant console and all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 4. Remove all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 5. Install each PCB that was removed in Step 4 into the next highest empty station PCB slot number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. Example: If a PDKU was originally in slot 11 and a PSTU was in slot 12, the PDKU is moved to slot 12 and the PSTU is moved to slot 13. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. 6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs they were removed from in Step 3. 7. Turn the system power ON and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03. Next, cycle system power OFF (five seconds) and ON, or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports. 7-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit The steps in “RSIU Installation” on Page 7-46 apply to installing an RSIU into an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot using the following steps. Note 1. Identify (mark) all PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled onto the same station PCB later. 2. Turn system power OFF. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs ➤ To install an RSIU PCB into an existing system with DID and/or Tie lines 3. Disconnect the connectors from all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and RCIS. 4. Remove all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and RCIS. 5. Each PCB that was removed must be installed into the next highest empty PCB slot number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. This step may have to be modified for the RDTU PCB, depending on the configuration to meet the requirements of RDTU slot assignments per tables in Chapter 6 – DK424 T1. Note 6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs from which they were removed. 7. Turn the system power on and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03. Next, cycle system power OFF (5 seconds) and on or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports. RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming Program 03: Programs slot 11 with code 49 to identify that the RSIU PCB is installed in slot 11. Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed RSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 7-23 for RSIU port number configuration) and Y identifies the RSIU port function: ♦ Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 OFF) ♦ Y=1, RMDS modem (Program 77-1, LED14 ON) ♦ Y=2, SMDR ♦ Y=3, MIS or SMIS ♦ Y=4, SMDI ♦ Y=5, Open Architecture ♦ Y=0, No function - this should be used for any of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports that are not used. Notes ● Strata DK I&M Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y will override RSSU, PIOU2, and/or PIOUS2 function codes (41, 42, 43) set in Program 03. 5/99 7-49 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit ● ● The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active. When uploading Program 76-1 with DKAdmin or DKBackup, the data will not change until the system power is cycled. Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 7-23 for RSIU port number configuration) and Z identifies the RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps). Notes ● ● The sum of the used RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports transmission rates cannot exceed 9600 bps. Ports assigned as “non-function” (code 0) in Program 76-2X-Y will not be included in the transmission rate sum. The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps. When uploading Program 76-2 with DKAdmin or DKBackup make sure that Program 76-2 bps rate for the TTY/ modem port is set the same in: DKAdmin communications setup, DKAdmin customer database, and any DK424 RCTU. If the bps rate is not the same in all three areas, uploading will fail on Program 76 Program 77-1, LED 14: Enables the RMDS modem function. If the RMDS should function as a modem, turn ON LED 14. If the RMDS should function as a RS-232 port, turn OFF LED 14. Program 77-1, LED 15: Sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT/V.22bis (2400 bps) or Bell 212A (1200 bps). The standard set in this program must match the standard of the modem communicating with the DK424 RMDS. If the RMDS modem standard should be CCITT/V.22bis, turn LED 15 ON. If the RMDS standard should be Bell 212A, turn LED 15 OFF. Most Hayes compatible modems will function with either standard. Check with the modem manufacturer’s documentation to verify which protocol should be used. When the system is initialized the Bell 212A standard is set (LED 15 OFF). Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02: Enables CLID, ANI, and/or DNIS information for ACD calls to be sent from the RSIU OA port. ➤ Turn LED 01 ON if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information for ACD calls. ➤ Turn LED 02 ON if the OA port should send DNIS information for ACD calls. Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned ON simultaneously, allowing CLID, ANI, and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. The system will initialize with LED 01 and 02 OFF–no CLID, ANI, or DNIS information will be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. 7-50 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: one RS-232 connection Interfaces with: TTY jack Older Version(s): none DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSSU PC Interface Unit The RSSU contains one RS-232 serial port for connecting an SMDI, SMIS processor, DKAdmin/ DKBackup PC or external modem. One optional RSSU maintenance interface PCB can be used for connecting a maintenance PC or external modem (local or remote) to the DK40i. A maximum of three RSSU cards can be supported per DK424. The RSSU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-25 and described in Table 7-17. RSSU Installation 1. Insert the RSSU (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the Base KSU/ cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the RSSU in the highest slot number in any KSU/ cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Note In DK40i, RSSU can be installed in any available Expansion KSU. 2. After installing the RSSU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RSSU Programming Program 03–Specify Code 41, 42 and 43 for slots that support RSSUs. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-51 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit Table 7-17 RSSU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector TTY interface connector J3 Type of Component Dual modular connector Description Interface connector for maintenance terminal/ external modem. 1878 Backplane Connector J3 RSSU TTY SMDR (not used) Figure 7-25 RSSU PCB 7-52 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit System: DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424 Circuits per PCB: eight standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp (RSTU2 only) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit Older Version(s): RSTU1–80-VRMS sine wave ring generator, optional R48S unit increases the loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the loop length (including the resistance of the phones) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. PSTU2–190V P-P or 130V P-P W1 jumper PSTU1 v.3–square wave ring generator fixed at 190V P-P PSTU1 v.4–square wave ring generator set at 190V P-P or 130V P-P with the W1 jumper Only one telephone (or device) can be connected to a RSTU2 port. If more than one telephone or device is connected to a port, ringing or message waiting may not function. RSTU2 only provides a 90-volt square wave message waiting generator to drive standard telephone 90V message waiting lamps. Notes ● ● For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS-4, -8, or -12) must be installed on any DK424 RCTU or the DK40i K4RCU3. Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; however, some devices may experience ring-trip with 190V P-P and should be set for 130V P-P. See Figure 7-27 for an illustration of the PSTU1, PSTU2. Figure 7-28 shows the RSTU2. See Table 7-18, for details of the PSTU and RSTU2 controls and indicators. R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) ➤ Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 (Figure 7-26 and Figure 7-28) with the R48S connectors P6 and P7 on the RSTU or RSTU2. Note RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned so that the R48S only fits in the proper position. P6 1374 P7 Figure 7-26 R48S Interface Connectors Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-53 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit External Options W1 Ring Generator Switch Configuration (PSTU1 and PSTU2) ➤ On the PSTU1 or PSTU2, ensure the W1 switch is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or PSTU2 experience ring trip. Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Control No steps required here. RSTU2 Installation 1. Make sure the factory-installed SSTS or SSTU subunit is securely attached to the RSTU2 (Figure 7-27 and Figure 7-28). WARNING! The shield on the back of the RSTU2 is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do NOT remove this shield. 2. Insert the RSTU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RSTU2 must be installed per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration. 3. After installing the RSTU2, gently pull the RSTU2 outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. Table 7-18 RSTU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Ring voltage W1 jumper (PSTU1 (V.4) and PSTU2 only) 3-terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits. H=190V P-P, L=130V P-P. R48S connector P6 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 9-pin connector Interface connector to P6 of R48S. R48S connector P7 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 6-pin connector Interface connector to P7 of R48S. Backplane Connector W1 Ring Voltage H = 190V P-P L = 130V P-P (for PSTU (V.4) and PSTU2 only) SSTU Subunit W1 H L 1375 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 7-27 PSTU and Subunit (SSTU) 7-54 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit R48S Installed on RSTU1 P6 P7 UP R48S R48S P6 P7 UP RSTU OR RSTU2 R48S Installed on RSTU2 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs SSTU Subunit Backplane Connector 1376 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Optional Figure 7-28 RSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors RSTU2 Programming Program 03: Specify code 31 for all slots that have RSTUs and PSTUs installed. Note If there are no RSTU, RSTU2 or PSTU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Program 10-2: Sets standard telephone ringing option. Program 19: Used for BGM connection. Program 21: Assigns standard telephone ports to modem pools. Programs 10-3, 23, 24, 25, 26: Integrated Auto Attendant Digital Announcer assignments. Program 31: Configures all RSTU, RSTU2 and PSTU ports connected to voice mail or external Auto attendant devices. Program *34, LED 01: Standard telephone Camp-on/Busy Override tone option. Program 35, LED 03: Standard telephone message waiting lamp control option. Strata DK I&M 5/99 7-55 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit RMCU/RCMS E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface System: DK424 Circuits per PCB: four circuits Interfaces with: enhanced 911 locator services Older Version(s): none The E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) enables cost-effective connection to the Enhanced 911 locator services without third-party equipment. Figure 7-31 shows the RMCU. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports as shown in Figure 73. The RMCU has no CAMA circuits. It requires one RCMS subassembly to provide one or two CAMA trunks and two RCMS PCBs to provide up to four CAMA trunks. When RMCU code 19 is entered for a slot in Program 03, that slot assumes the next four consecutive CO line numbers in the system. Only one RMCU PCB can be installed in a DK424 system. If more than one slot is programmed with code 19 in Program 03, the lowest slot having code 19 will be the CAMA trunk active slot. The controls, indicators, and connectors for the RCMS are listed in Table 90. Location of the RCMS LEDs are shown in Figure 76. Functions of the RCMS LEDs are given in Table 91. A wiring diagram is shown in “RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone)” on Page 7-57. RCMS Subassemblies Installation 1. Attach one or two subassemblies (RCMS) to the connectors on the RMCU as shown in Figure 7-29. If only one RCMS is to be installed, install it in the bottom position. 2. Apply firm even pressure to ensure that the connectors are properly seated in the RMCU connector blocks. If they are seated properly, a light resistance is felt when you pull the units away from the RMCU. 7-56 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RCMS1A ® UP RMCU1A RMCU1A ABCDEFGHK P6 P5 UP P7 P3 RCMS1A P2 ® UP ABCDEFGHK P4 RM CU1 A -CM V.1 UP 2758 Figure 7-29 Placement of RCMS Subassemblies on the RMCU Interface Card RCMS1A RCMS1A -CM V.1 CB J2 NB 600 / 600 0 3 J1 SW101 PAD J5 CB NB 600 / 600 RCMS1 0 J3 SW201 J4 PAD 3 2762 Figure 7-30 RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone) Table 7-19 RCMS Subassembly Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Controls, Indicators, & Connectors Type of Component SW101 Switch 3-dB PAD switch for circuit 1 or 3. SW201 Switch 3-dB PAD switch for circuit 2 or 4. J1 J2 Jacks to connect to RMCU. Connector Blocks J3 RJ11 Strata DK I&M Description 5/99 Jacks to connect to RMCU. Jacks to connect to RMCU. 6-pin modular connector Network interface jack to CAMA trunk. 7-57 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit RMCU Installation 1. Insert the RMCU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. 2. Gently pull the unit outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a light resistance is felt. 3. Wire the RCMS jacks, J4 and J5, to the network CAMA trunks per Figure 8-26 on Page 8-27. 4. Test the CAMA trunk and set the 3-dB PAD switches, SW101 and SW 201, for the appropriate volume level. RMCU1A RMCU1 A P6 P5 RMCUV.1 P7 TC35354F P3 P2 RMC21B P4 R MC U 1A - CM V.1 3005 Figure 7-31 RMCU Interface Card TOP RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector CAMA #4 Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED CAMA #3 LEDs (indicate Trunk Condition) NB LED CB LED RCMS1A (1/2) CAMA #2 NB LED CB LED CAMA #1 NB LED CB LED 2796 Figure 7-32 Location of the RCMS LEDs 7-58 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit LED Indications (Normal Operation) (continued) Table 7-20 NB LED CB LED 1 No network connection. RMCU is in stand-by mode. Status ON OFF 2 Network connected. RMCU is in stand-by mode. OFF* OFF OFF ON Flashing ON ON ON 3 4 5 Network is in stand-by mode and the RMCU is off hook. Network is connected and the RMCU MF sending dial tone. Network is seizing and the RMCU is offhook. Network is connecting, before ANI is sent, and the RMCU is sending. Network is connecting and the RMCU is communicating. 6 Network is disconnecting first and then the RMCU disconnects. ON then OFF ON then OFF 7 RMCU is disconnecting first and then the network disconnects. ON then OFF ON then OFF 1. If the NB LED stays ON, even if the modular connector of the network is connected, check the following: ● Tip and Ring could be reversed. ● Network could be busy. RMCU/RCMS Programming Program 03: Specify code 19 for the RMCU slot. Program *11, *12, *13: Refer to the E911, CAMA trunk tab in the Strata DK Programming Manual and set Programs *11, *12, and *13 as required. Note Strata DK I&M Program *10 is required only when using third-party adjunct CAMA interface and not used with RMCU CAMA interface. 5/99 7-59 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit 7-60 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 8 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies for the universal slot PCBs of both the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU and DK424 systems. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment, as listed below: ♦ Station Wiring: ♦ Digital Stations ♦ Electronic Stations ♦ Attendant Consoles ♦ Analog Stations ♦ Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Pin-outs ♦ CO Line Wiring ♦ DID and Tie Line Wiring ♦ Option Interface PCBs Note Before using the Connect Record Sheets (following each Wiring Diagram), make copies for future use. Diagrams which apply to only one system (e.g., DK40i) are in the installation chapter which relates to the system. Wiring diagrams appear at the end of these two chapters: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation ♦ Chapter 2 – DK40i Installation The RDTU cable connection information (DK424 only) is in Chapter 6 – DK424 T1. Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-1 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Station Wiring Diagrams Digital Station Wiring 25-Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU W/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add. Power) PR1 (Add. Power) Circuit 2 to DKT 2 or PDIU-DS Circuit 3 to DKT 3 or PDIU-DS Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.) R GN BK Y W BL R1 T1 PT1 PR1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT 4 or PDIU-DS 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS or DDCB RJ11 TR PT Modular Cord Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Digital Telephone (With or Without PDIU-DI) Circuit 7 to DKT 7 or PDIU-DS T8 (Voice/Data) R8 (Voice/Data) PT (Add. Power) PR (Add. Power) (See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R8 T8 PT8 Not Used PR8 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT Modular Cord 66M150 Split Block GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT DDSS Console (Circuit 8 Only) Notes or... 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 3-10 on Page 3-39. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. 2. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. Digital Telephone (DKT 8) or... PDIU-DS (with PDKU2) 1593 Figure 8-1 8-2 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones (DKTs) and DDSS Console to PDKU Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring To PDKU with Female Connector Bridging Clips 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 or 2 Pair, See Note 1) Station Cabling 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T8 R8 PT8 PR8 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add Power) PR1 (Add Power) Circuit 2 to DKT 2 or PDIU-DS GN BK Y W BL T1 PT1 Circuit 3 to DKT 3 or PDIU-DS PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT 4 or PDIU-DS 2- Or 4-Wire Modular Cord to RJ11 Jack on Bottom of RPCI-DI Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS R R1 DB25 Female Connector GND PR (-) T GND (-) R PT To PC or ASCII Terminal, etc. DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-pair Cable W/male Amp Connector W-BL RS-232 Cable2 (See Note 1) T7 (Voice/Data) R7 (Voice/Data) PT (Add Power) PR (Add Power) Digital Telephone (with or without PDIU or RPCI-DI) Circuit 8 to DKT8 or DDSS R GN BK Y W BL R8 T8 PR8 PT8 Not Used RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND (-) DB-25 PR T Female Connector 2- or 4-wIre Modular Cord To RJ11 Jack on the Back Side of PDIU-DS (-) PT To Modem, Printer, or Host Computer etc. DIU POWER GND R TOSHIBA READY CONNECT RS-232 Cable2 PDIU-DS 1594 Notes 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 3-10 on Page 3-39. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. 2. RS-232 cable length is max 50 ft. with 24 AWG wire. See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. General Notes ● ● ● ● Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. DIUs can be connected to Circuits 1~7 only if connected to PDKU1; or Circuits 1~8 on PDKU2. DK40i: Slots 15 and 16 only support data applications. KCDU provides circuits 1~4 only. See Tables 4-4 and 4-5 in Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration for allowed data slots. Figure 8-2 Strata DK I&M MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones with RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS to PDKU 5/99 8-3 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring 25 Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU With Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 Figure 8-3 8-4 GN BK Y W BL Screw Terminals 2 1 Circuit 2 L1 L2 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 3 4 DDCB Circuit 3 Door Phone MDFB Modular Cord Circuit 4 - T5 (Voice/Data) (GND) R5 (Voice/Data) PT PR Circuit 6 HKSU 2-pair Modular Cords R GN BK Y W BL MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control Circuit 7 Circuit 8 ABC 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 MDFB Door Phone C Modular Cord See Note 1 MDFB (Door Phone) Station #s Not Used See Note 2 Port # A B C 42 42 43 43 004 #151 #152 #153 44 44 012 #154 #155 #156 45 45 46 46 020 #157 #158 #159 47 47 028 #161 #162 #163 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block 1596 Circuit 1 R Notes 1. DDCB “B” output options: ● SW1: Always in DOOR position. ● SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock. 2. Door phones may be connected to circuit 5 on ports 04, 012, 0202, and 028 only. 3. See Table 3-10 on Page 3-39 for loop lengths. MDF Wiring-DDCB/Door Phone/Lock to PDKU Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 Pair) Station Cabling Bridging Clips 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Not Used) RT2 T2 DC Output R2 CKT 2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 R GN BK Y W BL R1 AC/DC External Power Source CKT 3 T1 AC Input 6 5 4 3 2 1 CKT 4 To 120VAC Commercial Power Outlet 2 3 4 5 TR 2-Pair Modular Cord Required CKT 5 RJ11 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR PDKU Connector CKT 6 CKT 7 (-) T GND R CKT 8 Digital (1000 or 2000 Series) Telephone (With Or Without RPCI-DI) or... DDSS, DDCB, PDIU-DS AC/DC External Power Source Specifications: AC IN: 120VAC ± 10% DC OUT: 24VDC ± 10% 160 MA (Min.) DC Current 200 MV P-P (Max) AC Ripple On DC Output AC/DC power supplies that meet the above requirements are available from most telephone equipment supply houses. External Power Straps: If the external power is installed, cut the external power straps located inside the digital telephone DDSS, DDCB, or PDIU-DS. See Loop Limits at the front of this section for external power requirements. 1597 Figure 8-4 Strata DK I&M External Power for PDKU Digital Telephone Connection 5/99 8-5 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl Bl-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-Bl Bl-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-Bl Bl-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R T R PRW-T PRW-R KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 1. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. Note Figure 8-5 8-6 Indicate if PDIU-DS, digital telephone (with or without RPCI-DI), DSS console (number 1~8), or DDCB is connected. PDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring To RDSU W/Female Connector 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Station Cabling Jacketed Twisted Pairs (24 AWG) Tip 1 RJ11 Ring 1 Not Used Tip 2 (See Note) RJ11 Ring 2 R R GN BK Y W BL GN 654321 T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 Not Used T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) Standard Telephone Circuits 3 and 4 available with optional RSTS PCB. Wire the same as Circuits 1 and 2. BK Y W BL Tip Standard Telephone 1 Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device 654321 TIP Ring DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector W-BL RING Standard Telephone 2 Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS or DDCB Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS Circuit 7 to DKT 7 or PDIU-DS T8 (Voice/Data) R8 (Voice/Data) PT (Add Power) PR (Add Power) R GN BK Y W BL R8 PT8 T8 PR8 RJ11 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) DG -24V -24VDC (J1, 25) 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Modular Cord 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Digital Telephone 1603 CAUTION! Figure 8-6 Strata DK I&M To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in Slot 18 of the DK40i system. RDSU Wiring 5/99 8-7 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S PWRT S-R PWRR Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O PWRT O-Bk PWRR Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br PWRT Br-Bk PWRR Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl PWRT Bl-Y PWRR Note Figure 8-7 8-8 KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Directory Number 1 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 3 (Standard) (RSTS) 4 (Standard) (RSTS) 5 (Digital) 6 (Digital) 7 (Digital) 8 (Digital) Device/Standard Telephone/ Electronic Telephone Location Indicate if separate BGM source connected to Circuit 2. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. RDSU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 (VT) Voice R1 (VR) Data T1 (DT) Data R1 (DR) VT VR VR R GN DT BK Y DR OCAT W BL OCAR DT Circuit 2 Strata DK I&M VT DR VT VR DT Circuit 3 DR VT VR DT 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 VT VR DT Circuit 5 DR Modular Cord VT VR DT Station Circuit 6 DR VT VR DT Circuit 7 DR VT VR DT Electronic Telephone Circuit 8 DR Only if Electronic Telephone Receives "Off-Hook" Calls OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (OR) OT OR Circuit 2 OT OR Circuit 3 OR Notes • To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone must have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed. Circuit 5 • Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for electronic telephone to receive OCA. Circuit 6 • An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series electronic telephones for headset or HESB, Loud Ringing Bell option. • All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PEKU to electronic telephone (1000 ft). OT Circuit 4 OT OR OT OR OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block Figure 8-8 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector 1578 MDF Wiring/Electronic Telephone to PEKU 5/99 8-9 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 Voice R1 Data T1 Data R1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Jacketed Station Cable X Twisted Pair To 24 AWG OCA Circuit 4 R GN BK Y W BL Y To OCA R1 6 5 4 3 2 1 T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Circuit 5 Modular Cord Station Circuit 6 Electronic Telephone Associated with HDSS Voice Pait - Not Used Circuit 7 Data Tip 7 Data Ring 7 Voice Pait - Not Used Circuit 8 Data Tip 8 Data Ring 8 OCA T1 X OCA R1 Y Circuit 4 Circuit 5 Circuit 6 R GN T8 T7 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 R8 Only if Electronic Telephone Receives Off-Hook Calls Circuits 7 & 8 T/R pair order must be wired as shown. BK Y W BL R7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block DSS EKT SW1 Figure 8-9 8-10 Notes • Place PEKU SW1 to HDSS. • All cable 24 AWG max loop resistance: 20 ohms from PEKU to HDSS (500 ft). • See Program 29 to assign HDSS feature buttons. • See Program 28 for telephone to HDSS assignments. DSS Console 1579 MDF Wiring/HDSS Console and Associated EKT to PEKU Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Circuit 1 R GN BK Y W BL Screw Terminals 2 1 Circuit 2 L1 L2 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 VR 22 22 R GN 23 23 24 24 25 25 BK Y 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 3 4 HDCB Circuit 3 Modular Cord Circuit 4 Voice T5 Voice R5 Data T5 Data R5 2-Pair Modular Cords See Note 1 Circuit 6 Circuit 7 Door Phone MDFB A B C HKSU VT DT DR W BL 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 8 MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control 2 3 4 5 OCA T1 OCA R1 MDFB Door Phone C Circuit 2 Modular Cord Circuit 3 See Note 1 See Note 2 Circuit 4 Circuit 5 MDFB (Door Phone) Station Nos. Port # A B C 004 151 152 153 012 154 155 156 020 157 158 159 028 161 162 163 Circuit 6 Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Not Used DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU or PESU w/Female Connector Notes 1. On PEKU or PESU, cut W9. See Programs 39, 77-1, 77-2, and 79. 2. HDCB “B” output options: SW1: Always in DOOR position. 66M150 Split Block SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock. 1580 3. Door phones may be connected to Circuit 5 on Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 only. Figure 8-10 MDF Wiring-Door Phone/Lock to PEKU/PESU Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-11 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling (24 AWG, Twisted Pairs) Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice T1 (VT) Voice R1 (VR) Data T1 (DT) Data R1 (DR) to Electronic Telephone 1 (Port 000) VT2 VR2 DT2 Circuit 2 to Electronic Telephone (Port 001) DR2 VT3 Background Music Source Output (600 OHMS; 1V RMS MAX) VR3 DT3 DR3 Not Used VT VR DT Circuit 4 to Electronic Telephone (Port 003) DR VT VR DT Circuit 5 to Electronic Telephone or HDCB DR VT VR DT Circuit 6 to Electronic Telephone DR VT VR DT Circuit 7 to Electronic Telephone or DSS DR VT VR DT DR Notes • A separate BGM source is available. • Program 10-2, button/LED 09 ON, for BGM connection. • Program 19 for slot assignment. • Cut W5 jumper on PEKU. • Provide BGM to external page with PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU. • Volume is adjusted at BGM source only (not at PEKU). Circuit 8 to Electronic Telephone or DSS OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (or) to Electronic Telephones that receive OCA OT OR Circuit 2 OT OR Circuit 3 OT OR Circuit 4 OT OR Circuit 5 OT OR to Electronic Telephones that receive OCA Circuit 6 OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Not Used 66M150 Split Block 1581 Figure 8-11 MDF Wiring PEKU Background Music Connection 8-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring To PEKU W/Female Connector 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Customer-supplied Two-way amplifier or Line repeaters (see Note 1) VT1 VR1 DT1 Circuit 1 to EKT DR1 VT2 VR2 DT2 DR2 PEKU, Circuit 2 Voice Pair Port A (CO Side) Not Used VT3 VR3 PEKU, Circuit 3 Voice Pair Port B (Subscriber side) Not Used (See Note 2) DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector W-BL Bridging Clips DT3 DR3 VT4 To 115 VAC ± 10 VAC VR4 DT4 Circuit 4 to EKT DR4 Circuit 5 to EKT or HDCB Notes 1. Refer to Manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier or line repeater pin numbering. Circuit 6 to EKT 2. Connect to PEKU circuits only, do not connect to PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU or PDKU circuits. VT5 VR5 DT5 DR5 VT6 VR6 DT6 DR6 General Note • Amplifier or repeater must have automatic gain control and be registered FCC Part 68. VT7 VR7 DT7 DR7 Circuit 7 to EKT or DSS VT8 VR8 DT8 Circuit 8 to EKT or DSS DR8 OCA T1 (OT) OCA R1 (OR) PEKU Slot Position LED 01, ON 2nd LED 02, ON 3rd Circuit 4 LED 03, ON 4th Circuit 5 LED 04, ON 5th Circuit 2 OT3 OR3 Circuit 3 OT4 OR4 • Program 10-3, circuit assignments: Program 10-3 Button/LED OT2 OR2 System Programs OT5 OR5 OT6 OR6 PEKU Circuit A = 009 B = 010 A = 017 B = 018 A = 025 B = 026 A = 033 B = 034 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 Circuit 6 Program 10-1, button LED 19 and 20 ON. Circuit 7 Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. Circuit 8 Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. Not USED Program 10-2, key LED 18 and 19 ON. OT7 OR7 PEKU Port Number OT8 OR8 66M150 Split Block 1595 Figure 8-12 MDF Wiring/PEKU Amplified Two-CO Line Conference Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-13 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl VT Bl-W VR W-O DT O-W DR W-G VT G-W VR W-Br DT Br-W DR W-S VT S-W VR R-Bl DT Bl-R DR R-O VT O-R VR R-G DT G-R DR R-Br VT Br-R VR R-S DT S-R DR Bk-Bl VT Bl-Bk VR Bk-O DT O-Bk DR Bk-G VT G-Bk VR Bk-Br DT Br-Bk DR Bk-S VT S-Bk VR Y-Bl DT Bl-Y DR KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 See Note 1. 2 See Notes 1 and 2. 3 4 See Note 3. 5 6 See Note 4. 7 See Note 4. 8 Notes 1. Indicate if two-way amplifier or line repeater 2. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected (see Program 10-2 and 19); BGM connects to VT and VR, Circuit 3 only (DT and DR not used). 3. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028). 4. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS Console number (1~8). Figure 8-13 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record 8-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1585 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Station Cabling Jacketed Pairs (24 AWG) Tip 1 RJ11 Ring 1 Not Used Tip 2 RJ11 Ring 2 R Circuit 3 Not Used BK Y W BL Tip R Voice Mail Port or Similar Device DR VT GN BK DT VT DT RJ11 VR Circuit 6 to EKT 2 DR VR Ring Standard Telephone 1 Voice Mail Port or Similar Device VT DR VT BL Standard Telephone 2 Voice T1 (VT) 5 Voice R1 (VR) 5 Data T1 (DT) 5 Data R1 (DR) 5 DT Y Ring Tip 24 AWG Circuit 4 Not Used VR BK W GN 654321 (Port count in software) DT GN 654321 Not Used VR R OCAT W Circuit 7 to EKT 3 Y DR BL OCAR 654321 123456 Circuit 8 to EKT 4 or BGM (see Notes) Modular Cord OT and OR: Only if EKT Receives OCA Calls Station EKT 1 or HDCB See Program 77-1 Not Used OCA T1 (OT) 5 OCA R1 (OR) 5 OT OR Circuit 6 OT OR Circuit 7 OT OR Circuit 8 Strap Options: W9 - Cut if HDCB is connected to Circuit 5 P90 - Ring Voltage Option Circuit 1 & 2): L = Low Level (130VDC P-P) H = High Level (190VDC P-P) Notes • Two-ringers max may be connected (high or low) to Tip/Ring. HDSS connection is not available with PESU; HDCB may be connected to circuit 5, BGM to circuit 8 (see Program 77-1). (Electronic telephone circuits 5~8) Not Used • To receive OCA, the 6500-series EKT must have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed. 66M150 Split Block • Notes (Standard telephone circuits 1 & 2) • All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance - 300 ohms from PESU to standard telephone/VM port. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for the EKT to receive OCA. • An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series EKTs for headset or HESB; Loud Ringing Bell option. • Standard telephones may be on- or off-premises. Off-premises connection is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack. • All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU to electronic telephone (1000 ft). • Two ringers max per port. CAUTION! DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PESU w/Female Connector To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in Slot 18 of the DK40i system. Figure 8-14 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record PESU Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-15 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl Bl-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-Bl Bl-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-Bl Bl-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y T R Not Used Not Used T R Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used VT VR DT DR VT VR DT DR VT VR DT DR VT VR DT DR KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location NA NA NA NA 1 2 3 4 See Note 1. 5 6 See Note 2. 7 See Notes 2 and 3. 8 1. Indicate if HDCB or electronic telephone. 2. HDSS console number 1~8 is not allowed. 3. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected; BGM connects to VT and VR, circuit 8 only (DT and DR not used). Notes ● ● Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, electronic telephone, HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028) or separate BGM source. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring. Figure 8-15 PESU Station MDF Cross Connect Record 8-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 PC Attendant Console Cabling3 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block 1607 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PC Attendant Console #2 PC Attendant Console #3 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (2 Pair, See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R1 T1 PT1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 PC Attendant Console #4 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To RATU PCB W/Female Connector Customer-supplied PC Attendant Console 1-pair Modular Cord to PC COM Port Customer-supplied 9-pin computer cable 9 ft. max. (female DB9 connectors on each end) Handset RATHC Headset 2-pair modular cord (RJ11 plugs on each end) 8-pair modular cord (RJ45 plugs on each end) RATI (Rear Connections) To AC Outlet2 150~200 W 2-pair Modular (–22 dBv Output)4 (–25 ~ –30 dBv Audio Input – Future Use) Audio Plugs REC AUX OUT IN RJ11 RJ45 DB9 (Female) Notes 1. RATI is wired with 1-pair wiring - maximum distance from KSU (RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m). 2. PC Attendant Console and CRT require local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 4. To tape recorder “REC” input. 5. Audio input is for future use. Figure 8-16 PC Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-17 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To RATU PCB W/Female Connector Bridging Clips W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Console Cabling3 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) (-) T1 (GND) R1 T2 R2 Attendant PT2 Console #2 PR2 T3 R3 Attendant PT3 Console #3 PR3 T4 R4 Attendant PT4 Console #4 PR4 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (2-pair, See Note 1) R GN BK Y W BL R1 PT1 T1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT 2-pair Modular Cord 9-wire Cable W/DB-9 Male Plug Not Used EGA Color Monitor Or EL Display Modular Plug RJ11 Modular Jack RS-232C Connector (Not Used) DB-9 Female Jack 3-Prong AC Plug To 120VAC2 ATTENDANT CONSOLE #1 Notes 1. Console must be wired with 2-pair wiring - maximum distance from DK424 KSU (RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m). 2. EGA monitor or EL display require local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 1606 Figure 8-17 Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram 8-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring Analog Devices Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Jacketed Twisted Station Cable 24 AWG Tip 1 Ring 1 Not Used T2 (Note 1) R2 R GN BK Y W BL DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To RSTU2 or PSTU or PSTU2 w/Female Connector Bridging Not Used T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not Used 1 2 3 4 5 6 T5 R5 Not Used Modular Cord T6 R6 Tip Ring Not Used Standard Telephone, Voice Mail Port, ACD/Auto Attendant Digital Announcer, or Similar Device T7 R7 Not Used T8 R8 Not Used Notes • An alternate BGM source can be connected to Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU. An isolation transformer may be required when connecting BGM to RSTU or PSTU (see Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation, Alternate BGM Source to RSTU). • See Strata DK General Description, Station Loop Requirements table for loop requirements. • Two ringers maximum. DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) -24 Volts (J1, 25) DG -24V 1583 66M150 Split Block Figure 8-18 MDF Wiring/Standard Telephone, Voice Mail, DPFT to RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-19 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Digital Station Wiring MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S Not Used S-R Not Used Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O Not Used O-Bk Not Used Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br Not Used Br-Bk Not Used Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl Not Used Bl-Y Not Used Note KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 2 Indicate if separate BGM source. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. Figure 8-19 RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Station MDF Cross Connect Record 8-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Pair Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 Color Code W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O Lead Designation T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Spare Spare R 17 O-Y 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare 21T 46 V-Bl Spare R 21 Bl-V 22T 47 V-O Spare Spare R 22 O-V Spare 23T 48 V-G Spare Spare R 23 G-V 24T 49 V-Br Spare Spare R 24 Br-V 25T 50 V-S Spare R 25 S-V Spare Function TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU PSTU/RSTU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T Figure 8-20 DPFT Connector J2/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Station Line Connection Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-21 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Pair 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 Color Code W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O Lead Designation T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Spare Spare R 17 O-Y 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare 21T 46 V-Bl Spare R 21 Bl-V 22T 47 V-O Spare Spare R 22 O-V Spare 23T 48 V-G Spare R 23 G-V Spare 24T 49 V-Br Spare R 24 Br-V Spare 25T R 50 25 V-S S-V PFT DG PFT -24V Function TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU TIP-CO RING-CO TIP-PCOU/RCOU RING-PCOU/RCOU PFT GROUND (INPUT) PFT -24V (INPUT) PSTU/RSTU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN50 RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN25 Figure 8-21 DPFT Connector J1/Terminal Sequence & Designations/CO Line Connection & DPFT Control 8-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block BK Y W BL T2 R2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 PCOU #4 #3 #2 #1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 CO3+4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 PCOU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 10 R R1 6 543 21 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1 CO1+2 1586 Figure 8-22 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to PCOU Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-23 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number Figure 8-23 CO Line (RCOU/RCOS, RGLU2, RDDU, PEMU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU) MDF Cross Connect Record 8-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 BK Y W BL T2 R2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 RGLU or PCOU #4 #3 #2 #1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord 66M150 Split Block Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 CO3+4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1 CO1+2 PCOU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 (PCOU), 02GS2 (RGLU2) 1598 Figure 8-24 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to RGLU2 or PCOU Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-25 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R8 R7 T7 T8 Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same 5 4 3 2 R6 R5 T5 T6 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 8 7 6 5 7+8 3+4 5+6 1-6 14 15 BL 1-6 13 14 W T2 1+2 6-1 13 Y 6-1 12 BK R2 6 543 21 11 12 T1 6 543 21 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 RCOU RCOS (DK424 only) 1602 Figure 8-25 MDF Wiring/CO to RCOU/RCOS 8-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams RJ-11 2-pin To Network or PSAP T1 R1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ring Bridging Clips Tip 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T1 R1 R DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 GN R1 T1 BK Y W BL T2 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 Ring 21 21 Tip 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 Ring 27 27 28 28 Tip 29 29 NB LED 30 30 CB LED 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 Ring 35 35 36 36 Tip 37 37 NB LED 38 38 CB LED 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 NB LED 44 44 CB LED 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block R2 6 5 4 3 2 1 RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) 4 3 CAMA #4 RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED 4 3 CAMA #3 LEDs (indicates trunk condition) RCMS1A (1/2) Ring Tip 4 3 4 3 CAMA #2 CAMA #1 Only one circuit is shown connected. 2798 NOTE: Make sure Tip and Ring are connected properly, CAMA lines are polarity sensitive. Figure 8-26 RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-27 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams Bridging Jumper Wires R1 R GN R T1 R2 BK BK 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 T1 BK 6 5 4 3 2 1 T2 Y R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W GN R1 T2 Y R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W R T1 T2 Y GN R1 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 CKT 7&8 1-6 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same Same CKT 3&4 6-1 Same 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 CKT 3&4 6-1 R4 R3 T3 T4 6 54 3 2 1 Same 5 4 3 2 Modular Cords 1-6 4-Wire Modular Cord 4-Wire Modular Cord Telco RJ14C Modular Jack CKT 5&6 Telco RJ21X CKT 1&2 Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C/RJ21X FIC: 02LS2 (Loop Start) OR 02GS2 (Ground Start) Telco Jacks RJ14C CKT 1&2 Pin-out RGLU/RCOU/RCOS/PCOU/TCOU RCIU RCIS Installer Cross Connect Customer Supplied Modular Jacks 4-Wire Modular Cord Network R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 T1 LINE X R1 T2 LINE Y R2 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord RJ14C Duplex Modular Jack (AA-104A-4 or Equivalent) RJ21X 4-Wire Connector (267A2 Or Equivalent) Telco RJ21X 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord Network 1608 4-Wire Single Modular Jack (RJ14C) from Telco 1. 4-wire modular jacks such as graybar part number AA-104A-4 could be used in place of the two modular jacks; or, a T-connector such as graybar part number 267A2 Adaptor could be used as shown below: 2. Assign RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS circuits to the appropriate CO line using Program *50. CAUTION! RCIU1 cannot be used in DK40i. Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only of the DK40i Expansion Unit; it must never be installed in slot 18. Figure 8-27 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS MDF Wiring Diagram 8-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams DID and Tie Line Wiring To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block BK Y W BL T2 R2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 RDDU 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 J2 J1 6-1 11 12 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 10 R R1 6 543 21 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 1 RDDU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 1605 Figure 8-28 MDF Wiring/DID CO Lines to RDDU Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-29 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams REMU #4 #3 #2 #1 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #4 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #3 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #2 8-1 Line #1 To Network Jack (USOC: RJ1CX) LEAD — PIN # SB M — — 8 7 SG T — — 6 5 R — 4 E — 3 4WR1 — 2 4WT1 — 1 1600 Figure 8-29 MDF Wiring REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II 8-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T R E M Bridging Clips 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 R GN R T * BK Y W BL DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 7 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent * M E 6 5 4 3 2 1 PEMU 2-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 * * *Not Used Modular Cord 66M150 Split Block Same Same Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M #4 #3 #2 6-1 6 7 6-1 5 6 6-1 4 5 6-1 3 4 6543 21 2 3 6543 21 2 T R E M 6543 21 1 6543 21 1 #1 PEMU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ2EX FIC: TL11M 1587 Figure 8-30 MDF Wiring/2-Wire Tie Line to PEMU Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-31 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring CO Line Wiring Diagrams To Network T R T1 R1 E M Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T R T1 R1 E M R R GN T 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 DK Wire Pair Functions 50 DK, Transmit T, R DK, Receive T1, R1 Y T1 E W BL M PEMU 4-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 6-1 #4 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 6-1 #3 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 #2 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 Modular Cord 65 43 21 66M150 Split Block BK 65 43 21 50 R1 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent #1 Network Jack: RJ2GX FIC: TL31M Signaling PEMU Pin-out E, M 1588 Figure 8-31 MDF Wiring/4-Wire Tie Line to PEMU 8-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams MDF 66M Block PG.OUT 1 PG.IN 1 PIN COLOR 15 . S-Bk 40 . Bk-S PIN 30 29 PG.OUT 2 PG.IN 2 17 42 . . O-Y Y-O 34 33 PIOU Only PG.OUT 3 PG.IN 3 19 . . Br-Y 38 44 Y-Br 37 PG.OUT 4 PG.IN 4 21 46 . . Bl-V V-Bl 42 DE.T DE.R 32 7 . . R-O O-R 13 14 SP.T0 38 . Bk-Gn 13 50 Multi-zone Page 30W max./Composite Impedance 300 OHMS Zone A or E Zone B or F All Zone Page (#39) Zone C or G Zone D or H 41 Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Door Lock Or Amp. Control DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring PIOU 25PR. Connections PEPU/PIOU PCB BREAK PI0 MAKE SP1 Page or BGM From PCTU 25 Mute . Gn-Bk 26 . V-S Amplifier Multi-zone 49 25 . S-V 50 23 . Gn-V 46 ALM T. 36 . Bk-Bl 21 ALM R. 11 . Bl-Bk 22 600W (Duplex) SP.R0 SW4 SP0 VR1 Door Lock Control SP.T1 8W 3 WATT SP.R1 PG. Common 8Ω Speaker Alarm System (PIOU Only) N.C. P12 N.O. Alarm Sensor AMP. Tape Player BREAK P11 NH T. NH R. 34 9 . . R-Br Br-R 17 18 External Background Music Source Control MAKE 1589 Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay Or MOH Control MDF Connections All Wires Should Be Jacketed 24 AWG. Twisted Pairs Zones Access Codes DK40i and DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D) Access Codes DK424 (RCTUE/F equipment with a PIOU) A #35 #351 B #36 #352 C #37 #353 D #38 Night Bell Note To Music-on-hold Input On PCTU PCB P6 Connector. Four-digit access codes are for RCTUE/F only. Zones E~H require a second PIOU PCB. #354 E #355 F #356 G #357 H #358 Figure 8-32 MDF Wiring/PIOU or PEPU Peripherals (25-pair) Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-33 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams 6 1 3-Pair Modular Cord Max. 50 Ft With 24 AWG (cross-pinned) PPTC 6 Programmable RS-232 Port TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD PIOU Card TTY (6-pin Modular Jack) 6-1 PPTC connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer PPTC 6-1 PPTC connects to any one of these devices: DKAdmin PC COM Port DKBackup PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port MIS Device SMIS PC COM Port CCV PC COM Port Insight DK PC COM Port SMDR (6-pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port SW2 LED CD4 1 (25-pair Female Amp. Jack) Notes See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC. PIOU option settings: SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set OUT. SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. MODEM — For IMDU operation. — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. See PIOU/MDF Drawing in this Section 2377 Figure 8-33 PIOU/TTY and SMDR Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) 8-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams KSU Backplane TBI MDF SPT Page and BGM 600 SPR W1 Make DER K1 Break DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NHT W2 Make K2 Mute Control DET DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Break HESB or Page Amplifier NHR Night Bell Normal Open ALMT Alarm Sensor W3 ALM Facility Alarm Unit ALMR Normal Close PIOUS Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or Amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 Amp Maximum Notes • All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs. • Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed. 1591 Figure 8-34 PIOUS Page/Relay/Alarm Connections Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-35 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams 1 3-Pair Modular Cord Max. 50 Ft With 24 AWG (cross-pinned) PPTC 1 PIOUS CARD Programmable RS-232 Port 6 TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port 6 TTY (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6-1 PPTC connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer PPTC 6-1 PPTC connects to any one of these devices: DKAdmin PC COM Port DKBackup PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port MIS Device SMIS PC COM Port CCV PC COM Port Insight DK PC COM Port SMDR (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 SW2 LED CD4 TB1 to MDF: Notes 600 OHM Page See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC. Door Lock/ Amp, Mute PIOU option settings: SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set OUT. SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. MODEM — For IMDU operation. — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. Night Relay/ MOH Control Alarm 2376 Figure 8-35 PIOUS SMDR/TTY Options and Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) 8-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Modular Jack 6-wire Modular Cord - telephone type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord). Toshiba PPTC PC COM Port RSIU (plug-in motherboard) Port 1 Port 2 RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly Port 3 RMDS or RSIS (piggy-back)1 (2400 bps modem or serial interface)3 Port 4 SMDI2 SMDR2 TTY2 Notes 1. The RSIU can be configured with up to three RSIS, or two RSIS and one RMDS (in any position). Use Program 76 to set RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port types. 2. All RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports are system programmable to allow up to four of any of the functions: SMDR, MIS, CCV, SMDI, TTY, and remote modem. 3. When the RMDS is used as a modem, the modular jack is not used. If the RMDS is used as an RS-232 interface port, the modular jack is used. ACD/MIS PC Stratagy Voice Mail System Station Message Detail Report DKAdmin/DKBackup PC CAUTION! Do not plug CO line or RSTU tip/ring into RMDS or RSIU modular jack RSIU DKAdmin or DKBackup PC Remote Modem CO Line Telephone Network RS-232 Cable DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly MIS2 CO Line RMDS Flash or ROM and RAM Time Switch CO Line Circuit Strata DK 4274 CO line connects to RMDS port (#19) via: DID, Auto Attendant, DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing assignments. Figure 8-36 DK424 RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Wiring Diagrams Strata DK I&M 5/99 8-37 DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC-9 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) Connect to PC 9-pin COMX Port 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pinout (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 Connect to PC 25-pin COMX Port 3 2 6 20 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 PPTC25-MDM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Connect to External Modem 2 3 20 6 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 (male) 20 Connect to: • ASCII Terminal • Printer • Call Accounting Device 3 2 6 20 8 7 DB25 Pinout (front and side view) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DK RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Modular Jack Pinout (front view) DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 (male) DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) PPTC-25F (female) SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (side view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2378 1. The above modular adapters can be used to connect PCs, terminals, and SMDR devices to WSIU, TSIU, RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, PIOU, and PIOUS RS-232 ports. 2. PPTC will not connect directly into a 25-pin PC COM port because they are male gender. 3. All PPTC, PPTC9, PPTC25F connections require a 6-wire, telephone type modular cord (with modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord.) 4. See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for connection the MLX-41 Caller ID interface box to the WSIU, RS232 port using PPTC-CLID14. Figure 8-37 DK RS-232 Modular Adapter Pin Configuration 8-38 Strata DK I&M 5/99 9 Station Apparatus This chapter provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata DK systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles and door phones also appear in this chapter. The Strata DK systems can support digital, electronic and standard telephones. Digital Telephones Installation instructions for digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere in this manual apply only to the Toshiba 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones. The 2000-series digital telephones consist of four models: DKT2010-H DKT2020-S The DKT2010-H is a 10-Button Digital Telephone with Handsfree Answerback. The DKT2020-S is a 20-button Digital Speakerphone. 1867 1877 DKT2010-SD DKT2020-SD The DKT2010-SD is a 10-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display. The DKT2020-SD is a 20-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display. 3645 Station Apparatus Types of Telephones 1869 There are two 1000-series digital telephone models, the DKT1020-H and DKT1020-SD. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-1 Station Apparatus Types of Telephones Electronic Telephones The electronic telephone instructions in this manual apply to the Toshiba 6500-series electronic telephones. They consist of four models: the EKT6510-H, EKT6510-S, EKT6520-H, and EKT6520-SD. Note Other electronic telephones that are compatible with the Strata DK systems are the 2000-, 3000-, and 6000-series telephones. Important! When you install 2000-, 3000-, or 6000-series electronic telephones, you must calculate the system power factor using the tables provided in Chapters 2 or 4 to ensure that the system power supply is not overloaded. Standard Telephones 500- and 2500-type standard telephones apply whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual. Strata AirLink Wireless Handset Strata AirLink™ wireless systems add wireless telephone service to Strata DK16 and DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, and DK424 and many non-Toshiba telephone systems. There is one handset model (shown at right) that stores up to eight system and handset IDs that are configured by your System Administrator. The handset has a two-line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) that shows alphanumeric information, including the idle message, date, call duration, icons and specific call activity. Idle Message Date Time/Call Duration Icon Display Area Volume/Scroll Buttons PWR CALL END For installation instructions of the systems and operation of the handset, see Chapter 16 – Strata AirLink Systems and the Strata AirLink Handset User Guide. Scroll/Lock Buttons 3398 9-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation Telephone Installation This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the system. Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes: WARNING! ➤ Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm. ➤ Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. ➤ Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. ➤ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. ➤ If telephone, DSS console, door phone control box, or door phone wiring exits the building, external secondary protection is required. See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring. When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Important! For DK14, see Figure 1-15 on Page 1-22, for DK40i, see Figure 3-24, and for DK424, see Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation for station apparatus secondary protection information. Station Apparatus CAUTION! The DKT2000 V.4 series telephones have DIP switches that enable use for the international market. The DIP switches are located underneath the flexible button key strip on the DKT2000 V.4 series telephones (see Figure 9-1). On the DKT2001, the DIP switch is located on the base. ON 1 2 3 DIP Switches 4 Line 9 Line 8 Line 7 Speed Dial Do Not Disturb Line 17 Line 6 Line 16 Line 5 Line 15 Line 4 Line 14 Line 3 Line 13 Line 2 Line 12 Line 1 Line 11 Intercom Line 10 3926 Figure 9-1 Strata DK I&M DKT 2000-series V.4 DIP Switches 5/99 9-3 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation Table 9-1 shows the correct country settings for the DKT2010-S, DKT2020-S, DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-SD, DKT2001 V.4 telephones. Note Table 9-1 The default DIP switch settings are preset for the USA and Canada. Therefore, you do not need to adjust any of these from the default factory settings for North America. DKT International DIP Switch Settings Dip Switch Country USA Canada (Default Setting) DIP Switch Position 1 2 3 4 ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON Mexico ON ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 ON Taiwan OFF ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON Hong Kong Thailand* ON Singapore Malaysia Indonesia Sri Lanka India China OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON OFF 1 2 3 4 3925 * The DKT2000 V.4 is not compatible for Hong Kong and Thailand. Use the V.4A or later versions in these two countries. System Connection Digital Telephones The following provides information on how to connect digital telephones to the DK system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation”. Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for digital telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system. Digital telephones that are equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital telephones supported by systems that must operate with battery reserve power – Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation, Table 5-2 on Page 5-5. To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular digital telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.). Note 9-4 Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation Electronic Telephones The following provides information on how to connect electronic telephones to the Strata DK system. Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 9-3. Note Electronic telephones are connected to electronic telephone circuits in the DK40i Expansion Unit on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) and the Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Two-pair wiring, as a minimum, is required for telephone connection. However, three-pair wiring is recommended for some upgrades, such as OCA. To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11) at the station location. The standard two-pair modular electronic telephone cord length is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet). See Chapter 8 – DK40i/ DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details. If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the station cable run from the DK40i Base KSU to the telephone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters). The following provides information on how to connect standard telephones to the DK system. Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 9-3. Note Standard telephones connect to standard telephone circuits of the Standard Telephone Interface PCBs: RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU, KSTU2 (DK40i only), and QSTU2 (DK14 only). Standard telephones connect to RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (See single-pair wiring Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring for more details.) Station Apparatus Standard Telephones The standard telephone cable’s overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms maximum, (for PSTU, PESU, KSTU2, or QSTU2), 600 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -24VDC (no R48S), and 1200 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -48VDC (R48S installed on RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU PCB), including the telephone resistance. This also applies to all devices connected to standard telephone circuits. A standard telephone connected off-premises via the telephone network should interface with OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C lines (or equivalent) and connect to an RJ21X, FIC jack or equivalent, (see Chapter 8 – Universal Wiring Diagrams and Table 5-3, “DK424 Network Requirements” on Page 5-6). Telephone Wall Mounting This section explains how to mount digital and electronic telephones to a wall or other vertical surface. See the manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on mounting standard phones. Notes ● ● Strata DK I&M Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DI2s cannot be wall mounted. Electronic and older digital telephones equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall mounted. 2000series digital telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2. 5/99 9-5 Station Apparatus Telephone Installation ➤ To mount digital and electronic telephones Refer to Figures 9-2~9-3 and the following steps. Handset Hanger Plastic Tab 1. Loosen the captive screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws. 1478 Figure 9-2 Removing the Telephone Base 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Handset Hanger 1479 1480 Figure 9-4 9-6 Handset Hanger Figure 9-3 Wall Mounting Base Rotation Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades Telephone Upgrades Digital and electronic telephones can be upgraded for a number of features; there are no upgrades for standard telephones. Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is connected to and is not considered a station. See Table 9-2 for more information. Table 9-2 Telephone Subassembly Upgrades Subassembly Host Telephone Function 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA). Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. HHEU 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones. 6500- and 6005series Electronic Telephones. Provides interface for headset and loud ringing bell to telephone. Can be installed with DVSU, RPCI-DI, or DADM. RPCI-DI1 2000-series Digital Telephones Provides TAPI PC application and data calling interfaces. 2000-series Digital Telephones Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS, System or Station speed dial, or CO line appearances. DADM1 1 per telephone 1 or 2 per telephone 1. Only one of the following subassemblies allowed per telephone: DVSU, RPCI-DI or DADM. Station Apparatus DVSU1 Capacity Digital Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones for features and options. TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades (RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI) Both the 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones can be upgraded with an integrated data interface unit to transmit and receive simultaneous voice and data calls. There are three versions of the integrated unit: ♦ RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI2 for the 2000-series telephones ♦ PDIU-DI for the 1000-series telephones. Asynchronous devices, such as PCs and terminals, can be connected to the standard RS-232 connector of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2. Station users are able to transmit and receive RS-232 data over the single-wire pair of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 equipped telephone. TAPI/Data Communications Modes The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: the TAPI or the data communications mode. The mode is changed by sending the appropriate control signal to the RPCI-DI from the PC to which the RPCIDI is connected. TAPI Mode In the TAPI mode, the PC connected to the RPCI-DI can place telephone calls. The PC can also receive Caller ID, ANI, and DNIS information received by the RPCI-DI telephone. When in the TAPI mode, the RPCI-DI is designed to be compatible with Microsoft TAPI application programs. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-7 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades For more information, see Chapter 13 – Computer Telephony Integration. If an RPCI-DI only needs to support TAPI (and not data–see Notes below) it can be connected to any digital telephone circuit. Data Communications Mode In the data communications mode, data calls can be from a telephone with the 'DWD&DOO button and disconnected with the 'DWD5HOHDVH button. Digital telephones can have a 0RGHP button for reserving a modem or monitoring modem availability and status. These feature buttons are assigned to telephones with Program 39. Data and voice calls can be dialed from a terminal or PC using standard “AT” commands. Notes ● ● ● 1000-series digital telephones with an RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 cannot be wall-mounted or equipped with an Add-On-Module (ADM) or DVSU for Speaker OCA. A 2000-series digital telephone with a PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI can support an HHEU at the same time, but cannot support a DVSU or ADM and can be wall-mounted. Only PDKU1 circuits 1~7 can support RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2s; all PDKU2 and Base Unit digital circuits can support PDIU-DI2 and RPCI-DIs. RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DI2s that support data communications mode, must be connected to digital telephone circuits that support 2B channels. The digital circuits that support RPCI-DI data communication are: DK14 – all digital telephone circuits. DK40i – all digital telephone circuits except those installed in slot 17 and 18 of the expansion unit. DK424 – see Tables 4-4 and 4-5 of the Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration. RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI2 Installation See Figures 9-2, 9-5 and 9-6 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four screws on the digital telephone base and remove the base. 2. Insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into the connectors on the PCB in the telephone (observing the red wire for correct positioning). 3. Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the phone. Install the PDIU-DI for 1000-series; install PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI for 2000-series phones. Secure with the four captive screws. Note RPCI-DI V2s require some modification when installed in DKT versions 1~3; RPCI-DI V2s in DKT version 4 or higher do not require any modification. 4. Remove the directory tray from the original telephone base and install it on the integrated unit phone base. Squeeze the tray on its sides so it bows slightly to remove and re-install. 5. See Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation, Table 5-2 on Page 5-5 for loop limits. Install a two-pair house cable (or external power) and a two-pair modular cord (supplied with PDIU-DI), if required for distance. RPCI, PDIU-DI1/PDIU-DI2 Programming Program 39: Assigns the 'DWD&DOO, 'DWD5HOHDVH, and 0RGHP buttons. Programs 20 and 22: RPCI and data interface unit assignments. 9-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades RS-232 (Female) DB-25 Connector DIU & VSU DIU & ADM Perception Strap (only cut if installed on Perception) To P1 of Bottom PCB Digital Telephone Top Assembly To P2 of Bottom PCB RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 2000 Digital Telephone Base 3751 Station Apparatus RPCI-DI V.2s have stand offs that require cutting when installed into a DKT V.1~V.3. Use a wire cutter to trim the top pieces of the stand offs at the center of the telephone base before mounting. Red Wire Before After Do not cut the RPCI-DI stand offs when installing on a DKT V.4 or higher. Figure 9-5 Only RPCI-DI V.2s have these stand offs RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 Installation into 2000-series Digital Telephone F) P (S D B U 0K S -2 0- TO T1 K K D D TO RS-232 (Female) DB-25 Connector A HHEU IB H S DVSU PDIU D RE PDIU/ DVSU D RE Digital Telephone Top Assembly Perception Strap (only cut if installed on Perception) To P1 of Bottom PCB Red Wire To P2 of Bottom PCB Red Wire Important! Do not connect DIU cables to HHEU connector. Directory Tray PDIU-DI PCB 82 14 Notes • A 1000-series digital telephone cannot support an HHEU and a PDIU-DI at the same time. • 1000-series telephones do not support RCPI-DIs. Figure 9-6 Strata DK I&M PDIU-DI 1000 Digital Telephone Base PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone 5/99 9-9 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a DVSU. In a DK system with release 3 and above software, a DVSU is not required to receive OCA in the telephone handset or headset. An additional wire pair is not required for digital telephones that receive Speaker OCA calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000-series and 1000-series digital telephones. Notes ● ● ● Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a DVSU and integrated data interface unit (PDIUDI, RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2) or DADMs at the same time. Program 03, Code 62 or 64 must be set for the PDKU and Code 28 for the RDSU for telephones that are to receive Speaker OCA and Program 31 LED 03 must be turned ON for telephone ports. DVSU is not necessary to receive handset OCA. DVSU Upgrade Installation Red Wire See Figures 9-2 and 9-7~9-10 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. Red Wire 2. Loosen the four captive screws on the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base. Remove and discard the plate. 3. Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs), and secure with the four provided screws. 4. If installing the DVSU into a 2000series digital telephone and then connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCB inside the telephone. 1483 Figure 9-7 DVSU Installation for Digital ...or if installing the DVSU into a Telephones 1000-series digital telephone and connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCBs inside the telephone. 5. Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws. 9-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades W101 W102 RED RED P1 RED P6 RED P2 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM W204 P3 HHEU EX.SP RED HHEU BEEP W204 W204 EX.POW W101 W102 EX.POW P1 RED W201 W202 W203 HHEU W203 Carbon P2 Carbon W201 W202 BEEP RED P6 W409 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM HS-BOV EX.POW EX.SP Figure 9-8 1485 DKT2010-H Strap and Connector Locations Figure 9-9 DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and DKT2020-SD Strap and Connector Locations Station Apparatus 1484 Ex: Power DKT1020H DKT1020SD HHEU W303 W302 Carbon W301 Carbon W101/W102-1020H Beep W301-1020H W304-1020SD W202 HHEU W201 W203 Carbon Ex: Power 0K -2 D P (S B U S 1O T 0T1 K K D D F) S TO N A DVSU H IB H 1020SD Room Noise Switch W101/W102-1020SD HHEU Red Wire DVSU DVSU Ex. SP Strap W204-1020H W305-1020SD Red Wire 1486 Red Wire HHEU DVSU Figure 9-10 1000-series Digital Telephone Strap and Connector Locations Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-11 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be connected to both series of digital telephones. Notes ● ● ● ● ● There are two types of HHEUs: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the HHEU2. Both 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3 or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation only. Only digital telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the HESB. 1000-series digital telephones cannot be equipped with the HHEU (any type or version) and the integrated data interface unit (PDIU-DI) at the same time, but 2000-series digital telephones can support an HHEU and a RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 at the same time. HHEU Upgrade Installation See Figures 9-2 and 9-8~9-12 and follow these steps: Component Side of HHEU SW601 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) 2. Use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. (The HHEU modular connector for the headset is accessed through this opening.) 3. If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to headset for the headset or loud bell application. V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this switch, because they are automatically set for the headset/loud bell application. P601 HHEU 1487 Figure 9-11 HHEU Installation for Digital Telephones 9-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades 4. Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Feed Through for HESC-65(A) Cable To HESB Block Refer to Chapter 10– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. 5. For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor, then remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Note 1488 SW601 HESC-65 Cable or HESC-65A Cable For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note P601 Figure 9-12 HESC-65A Cabling Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Station Apparatus HHEU ...or 6. Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. Note See Figures 9-8~9-10 for Steps 7~8. 7. For 2000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU connector on the PCB in the phone. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU to the HHEU connector on the PCB of the phone. 8. For 2000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU (for Loud Ringing Bell), locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the telephone and cut the strap. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the EX.SP strap on the upper PCB in the phone. 9. For 2000-series digital telephones: If a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the PCB in the phone. ...or for 1000-series digital telephones: a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the upper PCB in the phone Note If the HHEU PCB is removed from the phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for proper telephone operation. 10. Reinstall the telephone base; secure with the four captive screws. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-13 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades ➤ To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut. ➤ To cut the straps Note You do not need to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 9-2 and 9-8~9-10 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. For 2000-series digital telephones, and cut the W201 and W202 carbon straps. ...or For 1000-series digital telephones, cut the carbon straps (W301 and W302 on the DKT1020SD; W201 and W203 on the DKT1020-H). 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone. ➤ To eliminate the beep sound See Figures 9-2 and 9-8~9-10 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws from the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Cut the beep strap. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models to cut off frequently. ➤ To make the 1000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 1000-series digital telephone speakerphone base (Figure 9-2), and remove the base. 2. For the 1000-series speakerphone model (DKT1020-SD), see Figure 9-10, and locate the room noise switch. Push the switch carefully to the H (high) position (for low sensitivity) when there is high background noise in the area surrounding the telephone. 3. Reinstall the telephone base. 9-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Telephone Upgrades ➤ To make the 2000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise ➤ Hold down 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▲ button. The less-sensitive level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. ➤ To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level ➤ Hold down the 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▼ button. The normal level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. Note On 2000-series digital telephone speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the Mic LED flashes at the in-use rate when the speakerphone is used. When set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED is on steady when using the speakerphone. Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option Using a 2000-series digital telephone, the busy override and camp-on ring tones can be sent over the telephone handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. Using a 1000-series digital telephone, the tones sound only over the speaker. 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base (Figure 9-2), and remove the base. 2. Install a strap in the HS-BOV W409 location (see Figure 9-8). 3. Reinstall the telephone base. ➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/ 2020-S/2020-SD Station Apparatus ➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset of the DKT2010-H model ➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▲ button. ➤ To block the tone over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/2020-S/2020-SD ➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▼ button. Note For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the speaker OCA strap or R607 is cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the telephone. (See “Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)” on Page 9-12) External Power Straps Digital telephones equipped with options such as integrated data interface units and ADMs require two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance from the KSU. Two-pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with reserve power. (Table 5-2 on Page 5-5.) Each digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC/DC power supply. ➤ To cut the straps See Figures 9-2 and 9-8~9-10 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Depending on the telephone, locate the W101 and W102 external power straps and cut them. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-15 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Note Refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for external AC/DC power supply ordering information and installation instructions. DKT2000 ADM Installation See “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on Page 9-29. Electronic Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure electronic telephones for features and options. Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These telephones also require three-pair wiring to receive speaker OCA, instead of the standard two-pair. Telephones making speaker OCA calls do not require an upgrade or extra wire pair. Notes ● See Notes in “PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone” on Page 9-9. ● Handset OCA is not available on electronic telephones. HVSU2 Upgrade Installation See Figures 9-2 and 9-13 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. 3. Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the PCB in the telephone. To HVSU Connector (P2) On Main PCB Inside Telephone R-UP (6510-H, 6510-S, 6520-S) HVSU2 Room Noise To HHEU Connector P1 RED P1 HI P2 Beep Strap Carbon RED R-UP (6520-SD) Red Wire To HVSU Connector, P2 Carbon Straps W201 W202 HHEU Strap W203 1490 1489 Figure 9-13 HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones 9-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation See Figures 9-2 and 9-13~9-14 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. To P2 HVSU Connector on Main PCB Inside Telephone P5 HSVI HVSU 2. Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subassembly with the receptacle on the HVSU subassembly. Apply firm, even pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the connectors mate properly (they should click). 1491 3. Position the HVSU/HVSI subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. Figure 9-14 HVSI/HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones 4. Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly wire plug to the P2 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. Station Apparatus Exercise care when assembling the HVSU to the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector pins; also, verify that the HVSU is aligned with the silk-screened image on the HVSI. Note 5. Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) and/or a headset to be connected to the electronic telephone. The HESB serves as a loud ringing bell when connected to a telephone. Notes ● ● ● ● Strata DK I&M There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the HHEU2. Only electronic telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in an electronic telephone to the HESB. Refer to Chapter 10– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. All HHEU versions and types, except for V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Speaker Offhook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI). 5/99 9-17 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades HHEU Upgrade Installation See Figures 9-2, 9-12, 9-13 and 9-15 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. Component Side of HHEU R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) SW601 (HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3) To P1, HHEU Connector of Telephone PCB OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) 2. Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool, remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. The HHEU modular connector for the headset will be accessed through this opening. 3. If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for HESB and/or headset connection. This switch is not on either the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2, because the operation is automatic with these subassemblies. 4. Connect either the HESC-65 or HESC65A cable to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Refer to Chapter 10– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. P601 HHEU 1492 Figure 9-15 HHEU Installation for Electronic Telephones 5. For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU and remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. Note Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. ...or For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the loud ringing bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. 6. Position the HHEU subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. 7. Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to the P1 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. 8. Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB. Note The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone. 9. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. 9-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephone Upgrades Adjust (HESB) Loud Ringing Bell Volume 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on both the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500-series electronic telephone, two straps inside the telephone must be cut. ➤ To cut the straps It is not necessary to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. Note See Figures 9-2 and 9-13 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Locate the carbon straps, W201 and W202 and cut them. Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad button or feature button is pressed on an electronic telephone. Station Apparatus 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. ➤ To eliminate the beep See Figures 9-2 and 9-13 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone and remove the base. 2. Locate and cut the beep strap on the telephone PCB. 3. Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone models (the EKT6510-S, EKT6520-S, and EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently. ➤ To make these telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent the cut-off See Figures 9-2 and 9-13 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the room noise switch on the PCB inside the telephone, and push it carefully to the HI (high) position. 3. Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic telephones only, the handset receiver volume can be increased six decibels (dB) by cutting a strap inside the telephone. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-19 Station Apparatus Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection ➤ To cut the strap See Figures 9-2 and 9-13 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the R-UP strap on the PCB inside the telephone and cut it. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in place using the four captive screws. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection The Strata DK40i can support up to three DSS consoles and the DK424 systems configured with RCTUA can support up to three DSS consoles, RCTUB up to four DSS consoles, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F up to eight consoles. There are two types of consoles: the Digital DSS (DDSS) and the Electronic (HDSS) console. The DDSS console can be connected to designated digital telephone circuits, and the HDSS console can only be connected to designated PEKU circuits. This section provides instructions on how to install both types of consoles. DDSS Console Connections The DDSS console, which can operate with a digital telephone (preferably an LCD model), can connect only to circuit 8 of a PDKU digital telephone circuit. Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet, 303 meters) is used for the connection. 1872 To accommodate the DDSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. Notes ● DDSS console cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. ● See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for secondary protection information and loop limits. ● See Chapter 5 – DK424 for secondary protection information and loop limits. CAUTION! When installing the DDSS cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. DDSS Console Configuration An RDSU will not support a DDSS. 9-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection DDSS Programming Program 03: Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS consoles. Program 28: Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones. Program 29: Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles. HDSS Console HDSS Console Connections The HDSS console must be connected to the data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU with standard two-pair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accommodate the connection, the instrument end of the HDSS console cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring for wiring/ interconnecting details. If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet (152 meters). The HDSS console can operate with either an electronic or digital telephone (preferably an LCD model). When installing the HDSS console cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within 3 feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. Avoid running HDSS console wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Station Apparatus CAUTION! HDSS Console Configuration The following considerations should be made when installing an HDSS console: ♦ A PEKU PCB is required. ♦ Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS console (always circuits 7 and 8). ♦ The PESU does not support the HDSS console. HDSS Programming Program 03: Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console. Program 28: Assigns HDSS console to a telephone. Program 29: Assigns individual button functions for the HDSS console. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-21 Station Apparatus Door Phone (MDFB) Door Phone (MDFB) This section provides installation instructions for the Door Phone (MDFB). Door Phones can be installed can also with Door Phone/Lock Control Units (see following section). ♦ DK14 can have up to 6 door phones ♦ DK40i can have up to nine door phones ♦ DK424 can have up to 12 door phones 1873 Lock Control Unit and Door Phone This section provides installation instructions for the Digital (DDCB) or Electronic (HDCB) Door Phone/Lock Control Units. Each DDCB or HDCB can support as many as three MDFBs or two MDFBs and one door lock. DDCBs or HDCBs can only connect to slot 11/port 004, slot 12/ port 012, slot 13/port 020 and slot 14/port 028. DDCBs can only connect to circuit 5 (a PDKU or RDSU PCB and HDCBs can connect only to circuit 5 of a PEKU or PESU PCB). DDCBs and HDCBs cannot connect to the RSTU2, PSTU, or KCDU. 1874 DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling For DDCB, HDCB, and MDFB wiring/interconnecting details and door lock control installation procedures, refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring. If using 24 AWG cable, the length of the cable run from the Strata DK to the MDFB (via the DDCB or HDCB) must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters). ● ● 9-22 DDCB or HDCB cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. See Chapters 1, 3 or 5 for Strata DK14, DK40i or DK424 secondary protection information and loop limits. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Lock Control Unit and Door Phone DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting External Power Straps (DDCB Only) The DDCB and HDCB is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ➤ To mount the units 1493 1. Locate the two mounting holes on the right-hand side on the DDCB or HDCB (see Figure 9-16). KSU Jack 2. Remove the side cover from the DDCB or HDCB to expose the two left-hand mounting holes. MDFB Jack A~C 3. Position the DDCB or HDCB adjacent to the Base KSU with regard to wiring needs. KS U DO PH OR ON E Mounting Screws (4) C Note See Table 3-9 regarding external power requirements. Figure 9-16 Door Phone (DDCB or HDCB) Installation MDFB Wall Mounting Station Apparatus 4. Secure the DDCB or HDCB to the mounting surface with four one-inch panhead wood screws. A B Base 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the cover. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame (see Figure 9-17). Metal Frame 2. Position the metal frame and base to the mounting surface and secure with two one-inch panhead wood screws. 3.25 inches 3. Attach cover to the metal frame and base and secure with the screw which was removed in Step 1. MDFB Volume Control Adjustments Two Wall Mounting Holes 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the MDFB cover. 2. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame. Door Phone 1494 Figure 9-17 Door Phone (MDFB) Installation 3. The volume level is changed by a screw adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn the screw with a flatheaded screwdriver while ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it. The volume level will change as the screw is turned. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-23 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) Door Phone/Lock Programming Program 39: Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to digital telephones. Program 77-1: Assigns DDCBs or HDCB to ports, door phone ringing over external page during the NIGHT mode, and door lock activation time. Program 77-2: Busy out unused MDFB positions, identifies which DDCBs support the door lock option, and sets the door phone to ring one or five times. Note Each DDCB/HDCB door lock assignment will reduce the system door phone capacity by one (see Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for HDCB, DDCB, and PIOU/PIOUS door lock installation information). Program 79: Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assignments. Program *79: Assigns which [DN] flashes on telephones assigned in Program 79. Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) The Toshiba DKT2004-CT cordless digital telephone brings mobility and productivity to office telephones. Greater call access cuts down on leaving messages and “telephone tag.” Its compact design enables the user to take it to many locations within the office complex. Digital 900 MHz spread spectrum technology provides nine simultaneous channels and represents state-of-the-art design and engineering. Spread spectrum technology provides clarity in unsurpassed range, several times greater than conventional analog cordless telephones. Spread spectrum technology also provides secure communications between cordless digital telephones and their corresponding base stations within a given environment. Fully charged, the cordless digital telephone provides over three hours of talk time, and 42 hours standby. An extended operation battery is also available to provide over five hours of talk time. 1876 The cordless digital telephone either attaches to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital telephone or is used as a stand-alone. It provides many sophisticated Strata features: ♦ LCD provides information such as User Name, DNIS and Caller ID ♦ Four programmable buttons for feature, multiple line or feature access ♦ Headset jack (headset optional) ♦ Handset volume adjustment ♦ Conference/Transfer (&QI7UQ) button ♦ Message Waiting LED ♦ +ROG button ♦ 20 Speed Dial number memory (in addition to 40 station speed dials) The DKT2004-CT cordless digital telephone operates from the same digital station port on the Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU) as the DKT2000-series digital telephone which may or may not be attached. 9-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) Precautions Before you read anything else, please observe the following: WARNING! Toshiba does not represent this unit to be waterproof. To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or damage to the unit, do not expose this unit to rain or moisture. Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery Warning This equipment contains a Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery. ♦ Cadmium is a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer. ♦ The Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery contained in this equipment may explode if disposed of in a fire. ♦ Do not short circuit the battery. ♦ Do not charge the Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery used in this equipment in any charger other than the one designed to charge this battery as specified in this Guide. Using another charger may damage the battery, or cause the battery to explode. Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Batteries Must Be Recycled or Disposed of Properly ♦ Residents of Minnesota should contact 1-800-225-PRBA for information concerning reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries. ♦ Residents outside of Minnesota should contact their local authorities for information concerning reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries.: Station Apparatus ♦ WARNING! To reduce risk of fire, use only Model EXP9580 or EXP9586 batteries. CAUTION! To power your Toshiba DKT2004-CB Cordless base unit, use only UL Listed AC Adapter Model AD-9500 Class 2 Power Supply. Ratings are: Input:120VAC 14W Output:0VDC 500mA Important! Charge your battery for 10 hours before using your new Cordless Digital Telephone. Cordless Telephone Installation Important! Your telephone system must be programmed for Auto Preference for your TALK button to work. If there is a shared digital telephone, you receive internal system dial tone automatically after picking up the handset of your deskset. For example, in a DK system, Program 32 must have a setting other than “00.” It is best to set Auto Line Preference to access Intercom dial tone. ➤ To install the cordless telephone 1. Select a location for your cordless digital telephone. Avoid excessive heat or humidity. 2. Place the cordless digital telephone’s base unit on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120V AC outlet and within reach of the digital telephone line connection to your Strata DK system. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-25 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) 3. Keep the base unit and handset away from sources of electrical noise (motors, fluorescent lighting, etc.). Important! Place the cordless telephone to the right of the DKT. If placed on the left of the DKT, the cordless antenna will pick up a tone due to its close proximity to the DKT speaker and electronic parts. Telephone Cord Connection There are two telephone line jacks on the back of the base unit of your cordless digital telephone: “Line In” and “Line Out.” You can connect the cordless digital telephone to both the telephone line and a Strata DK digital telephone. ➤ To connect cords for use as a stand-alone telephone ➤ Connect the modular jack labeled “Line In” to the telephone wall jack. ...or ➤ To connect cords for use with a desk telephone 1. Unplug the telephone line cord from your desk telephone. 2. Connect this cord to “Line In” of your cordless telephone. 3. Using the two foot modular cord that came with your cordless telephone, connect the jack labeled “Line Out” to the desk telephone. Connect and Apply Power to Base Unit The AC adapter furnished with this telephone may be equipped with a polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug fits into the power outlet only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug still does not fit, contact your facilities coordinator about replacing the obsolete plug. Do not alter the shape of the blades on the polarized plug. ➤ To connect the cordless telephone using the AC adapter 1. Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base unit (see Figure 9-18). Use only the AC adapter supplied with your cordless digital telephone. 1145 CAUTION! Line In to Digital Telephone Circuit AC Adapter Modular Cords Line Out to DKT (DK14 KSU or DK40 Base KSU, KCDU, PDKU2, RDSU) See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Figure 9-18 Cordless Telephone Connectors 9-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) 2. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. 3. Route the power cord where it is not a trip hazard, and where it will not become chafed and create a fire or electrical hazard. 4. Wrap the power cord around the notch on the bottom of the base unit (see Figure 9-19). 5. Check to see that the power LED is on, indicating the telephone has power. 6. Before using your cordless digital telephone, be sure to raise the antenna to the vertical position. 1175 Figure 9-19 Line Out Cord Attach/Remove Belt Clip to Handset (optional) ➤ To attach the belt clip to the handset 2. Use the belt clip to attach the handset to your belt or pocket for convenient portability. ➤ To remove the belt clip 1. Pry one tab at a time from the notch on the side of the handset. 2. Carefully lift the belt clip off. Station Apparatus 1. Snap the tabs of the belt clip into the notches on the sides of the handset. The belt clip is designed to fit snugly onto the handset. Handset Battery Pack Installation 1. Place a charged battery pack onto the handset so that it slides easily along the ridges. If your battery is not charged, see “Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack”. 2. Slide the battery pack up onto the handset until it clicks into place. You are now ready to configure your cordless digital telephone. Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack Before using your new cordless digital telephone, the battery must be charged continuously for 6 to 8 hours. ➤ To remove the handset’s battery pack 1. Press in on the battery pack release latch. 2. Slide the battery pack off the handset. Note You may have to pull hard to slide the battery pack off, when the handset is new. ➤ To charge the handset’s battery pack 1. Place the handset on the base unit. 2. Make sure the CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, check to see that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the base unit. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-27 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) Charging Extra Battery Packs The base unit of your cordless digital telephone is equipped with a battery charger for charging an extra battery pack. This compartment has a latch that keeps the battery pack in place during charging. ➤ To charge extra battery packs 1. Position the battery pack so the inner side is facing toward the top of the base unit. 2. Slide the battery pack into the charging compartment until it clicks into place. 3. Make sure the BATTERY CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, make sure the AC adapter is plugged in and that the battery pack is seated into the charger. Note Charge the standard 400 mAh battery pack without interruption for 6-8 hours. Charge the optional 730 mAh extended battery pack without interruption for 8-10 hours. Tips on Extending Battery Pack Life All rechargeable nickel cadmium batteries can develop a “memory” (reduced charge capacity) caused by repeated charge and discharge cycles. Batteries that have developed this effect do not operate to their fullest capacity. ➤ To avoid memory effect ➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged before recharging. For example, use the handset off the base all day. Only replace the handset on the base at night after a full day of use. Do not “top off” the charge after using the battery for a short time. ➤ To erase memory effect ➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged, then recharge it fully. Repeat this process at least three times. LCD Low Battery Indicator When the battery pack in the handset is low and needs to be charged you see this message on the display and the handset beeps. Table 9-3 shows symptoms. Table 9-3 Low Battery Symptoms On a Call... In Standby Mode... Only the 7$/. key operates. None of the keys operate. Handset beeps once every three seconds Handset beeps once. Complete your call as quickly as possible Cannot make call. Replace battery pack. Replace battery pack before making a call. ➤ To restore your battery capacity ➤ Return the handset to the base unit for charging or replace the handset battery pack with another charged one. 9-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation Digital Add-on Module Installation Install one or two DADM 2020s to a 2000-series digital telephone (only). ♦ DK14 supports up to 8 DADMs ♦ DK40i supports up to 12 DADMs The number of DADMs supported by the DK424 depends on the common control PCB: ♦ RCTUA supports 12 DADMs ♦ RCTUB supports 40 DADMs ♦ RCTUC/D supports 120 DADMs ♦ RCTUE/F supports 200 DADMs The DADM provides DSS buttons, speed dial buttons and CO line buttons. Notes See Chapters 1, 3 or 5 – DK14, DK40i or DK424 Installation for loop length and secondary protection requirements. ♦ DADMs cannot be installed on telephones that have RPCI-DI on OCA/DVSU installed. Station Apparatus ♦ ➤ To install DADMs See Figure 9-20 and follow these steps: 1870 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 2000series digital telephone base and remove the base. 2. Remove the base handset hanger. 3. Loosen two captive screws on DADM and remove bases. 4. Put the DADM supplied cable through the telephone and DADM bases. 5. Connect DADM cable connectors to P1 of DADM and P1 of DKT2000 telephone. 6. Install base of DADM and telephone– tuck DADM cable into DADM and telephone base, as necessary, for proper length. 7. Secure DADM to telephone base with DADM connecting plate (using four screws). 8. If required to achieve maximum distance, install 2-pair house cable (or external power) and 2pair modular cord, supplied with DADM. (See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal PCB Wiring.) 9. If a second DADM should be installed, connect P1 of the second DADM to P2 of the first DADM with the DADM connecting cable. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-29 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation (Smaller Connector) 4-Screws P1 P 2 (No Connection) 4-Screws 1 1 10 Second DADM 12 DADM Connection Plate (provided with DADM) DADM Base DADM Cable (Supplied with DADM) Remove Handset Hanger Black Wire to Pin 1 First DADM P1 P2 1 10 Telephone Base 1 Black Wire to Pin 1 12 1 (Larger Connector) DIU & ADM P1 of Bottom PCB 2000-Series Digital Telephone DADM2020 DADM2020 2000-Series DKT View of Bottom 1495 Figure 9-20 Digital Add-On-Module ADM Programming ADMs are programmed in Program *29. Important! To activate the ADM, Program *29 must be entered for each telephone port equipped with an DADM. See the Strata DK programming record sheets in the Strata DK Programming Manual for button defaults. 9-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console PC Attendant Console A Strata DK system configured with RCTUB2 or RCTUBA/BB can support two Attendant Consoles, and systems with RCTUC1/D2 or RCTUC3/D3 can support four Attendant Consoles. The RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1 do not support Attendant Consoles. PC and conventional Attendant Consoles require RCTUB2 or RCTUC/D2 R 2 processors or RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 R3 processors. The PC attendant console (DK-PCATT) requires a customer-supplied, IBM-compatible PC. A VGA or SVGA monitor and a COM port dedicated to the PC attendant console is required. Toshiba recommends the following for the PC attendant console: Pentium processor/100 MHz, 16 MB RAM, 1.44 MB floppy drive, 200 MB hard drive, and a mouse. A tower that sits on the floor is provides better monitor visibility (as opposed to a desktop model). Microsoft® Windows® 95 software must be resident on the PC. Windows 3.1 will work, but Windows 95 is recommended. Important! Hardware Installation The RATU PCB can support up to four Attendant Consoles in any combination. (See “RATU Installation” on Page 7-22.) Notes ● The maximum distance from the Strata DK to either attendant console is 1000 ft. (303 m). ● Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: ● ● ● Cable splits (single or double) ● Cable bridges (of any length) ● High resistance or faulty cable splices See Chapter 8 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring Diagrams for attendant console wiring. See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation or Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation for loop length and secondary protection requirements. CAUTION! Strata DK I&M Station Apparatus After the PC attendant console is installed in Windows 95, you can find your old program groups by clicking the Start button (formally Program Manager) and then selecting Programs. Your groups appear as folders. To manage files in Windows 95, click the Start button, select Programs, and then click Windows Explorer (formally File Manager). Your directories appear as folders. 5/99 When installing the PC or conventional attendant console cable, do not run the cables parallel to AC power if they are within three feet of an AC line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. 9-31 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To install the PC attendant console See Figure 9-21 on Page 9-32 and follow these steps: 1. Connect the RATI to the PC COM port a with a standard RS-232 cable. 2. Use one-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. If you need to use a long cable, use two-pair for more power. 3. Plug in the handset cradle to the RJ45-jack. 4. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the handset base. 5. After programming the Strata DK424 system, install the PC attendant console software and complete the Telephony Setup per the instructions on “PC Attendant Console Software Installation” on Page 9-34. POW DTR DSR RATI (Front View) Carbon Jumper RATI PCB DB9-FEMALE (To PC COM Port Cable) RJ11-JACK (To RATU Modular Cord) Headset Jumper RJ45-JACK (To RATHC Modular Cord) REC OUT (To Tape Recorder "RECORD" Input) AUX IN (Not Used) 14 97 Bottom Panel Figure 9-21 RATI Assembly/Disassembly Notes ● Do not cut HEADSET jumper unless you are connecting two headsets. ● Cut CARBON jumpers if a carbon handset is connected to the RATHC handset cradle. ● ● ● 9-32 “REC OUT” can be used to monitor or record the attendant console talkpath. Both the attendant and connected party will be monitored or recorded. The record level output from the attendant handset or headset is approximately 3 dB below the connected party record level. Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. “AUX IN” can be used to send audio to the attendant and connected party. The audio level to the attendant is approximately 10 dB below the audio level sent to the connected party. Audio sent to the outside party is limited to–15 dBv (CO Tip/Ring). Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. See Figures 8-16 and 8-17 in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RATI cable wiring information. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console PC Attendant Console Programming Program 03: Code 51 assigns the RATU PCB attendant console cabinet slot number. Important! The RATU PCB takes up four station ports in software; each attendant console will be assigned one of the ports in consecutive order. Toshiba recommends installing the RATU PCB in the next highest slot number following the last station PCB installed– do not skip slots. The first port number will be the next consecutive port number following the last station port installed. Program 15: If the attendant console is used to set-up trunk-to-trunk (two CO-line or tandem) connections with loop start lines, set Program 15-5 appropriately; if the CO sends the AR-Hold signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Detect. If the CO does not send the AR signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Ignore. Loop start trunk-to-trunk calls remain on attendant hold loops only if AR-Ignore is set. Program 58 58-1: Sets the attendant console overflow time for each console. ♦ 58-2: Sets the console display for EL or CRT (EGA) and enables or disables console call waiting tone for each console. (Not used for the PC attendant console). ♦ 58-4: Sets the console Answer key priority for each console. ♦ 58-5: Sets the console overflow destination for each console. Program 59: Assigns attendant console Flexible Buttons (Keys) for each console. Attendant Console Load Share Programming Program 81~89: Assigns CO lines (loop, ground, and DID) to share the incoming call load between consoles. (Tie lines load share on Dial “0” calls only, without the use of Programs 81~89.) All incoming CO lines (including DID lines) to be distributed between two or more Attendant Consoles should be assigned to ring each console in Programs 81~89. Note Station Apparatus ♦ Delay ring assignments do not apply to DID lines. Program *09: Assigns the user company’s main listed [DN] (last four digits) to the attendant console if DID lines should ring the console. If the DID lines are assigned to ring multiple attendant console ports in Programs 81~89, DID calls will be distributed between the consoles. Only one console (any one) should be assigned with the main listed [DN] in Program *09. Programs 71 and 72: Can be used to provide an alternative assignment of DID calls using Program *09. Program 71 assigns the dialed number to ring at different locations during each Night Mode (Day, Day2, Night). DNIS tags can be added for personalized identification of calls. Program 72 provides external forwarding of calls listed in Program 71. Program *17: Assigns each CO line to an attendant console as the DID line intercept position as required. (Intercept calls do not load share.) Attendant Console Load Share Programming Example The user’s company DID line [DN] is 583-3700; this number and other loop start lines should ring in a load sharing manner to each of the Company’s two Attendant Consoles in the Day, Day 2, and Night modes. Attendant consoles one and two are connected to RATU ports 024 and 025 respectively and should load share 583-3700 calls and other CO line calls. Program the DK424 as shown below: ♦ In Programs 81, 84, and 87, assign all CO and DID lines to ring ports 024 and 025. ♦ In Program *81, *84 and *87, assign all CO lines to flash the [PDN] of port 024. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-33 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ♦ In Program *09 or 71, assign digits 3700 to port 024, and assign any other selected DID extension number(s) to port 025–note that when the DID extension number assigned to either console is dialed, calls will load share between consoles. PC Attendant Console Software Installation Step 1: Install the Software The PC attendant console requires the installation of software on an IBM-compatible PC which has been connected to the RATI. See “To install the PC attendant console” on Page 9-32. ➤ To install the software 1. Turn on the PC and open the Windows Program. 2. Insert Diskette #1 in drive A (or B). 3. Run A:\setup (or B:\setup) from Windows. The installation process will proceed and request you to remove Diskette #1 and insert Diskette #2 as the program is decompressed and installed. A new program group will be added to your Windows Program Manager for the PC Attendant. This will include three icons for running the PC Attendant, PCATT BACKUP, and TELEPHONY SETUP (see screen below). Step 2: Add the Driver Before the PC attendant console can be used, the driver for the interface to the RATI must be installed and Telephony Setup must be established. The following steps may be skipped if this driver was previously installed. 1. Click the Telephony Setup Icon or respond to the “Go to Telephony Setup box” at the end of the installation process. 1021 2. From the Telephony dialog box, click the Driver Setup... button. 1022 9-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console 3. In the Telephony Drivers dialog box, if “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is shown in the driver list, go to Telephony Setup below. Otherwise, click the Add button to display the Add Dialog screen. 1023 4. From the Add Drivers dialog box, if “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is in the list, then select it (it should be highlighted) and press Add. 5. If “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is not listed, press Add and type c:\windows\system\att.tsp in the edit box. Click OK to return, select it in the list and press Add. Station Apparatus 1403 Step 3: Set Up the Telephony Driver 1. From the Telephony Drivers dialog box, click the Setup button. 2. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration dialog box, set the COM port used for the RATI interface (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4). 3. Choose the processor type for the connected DK424 system (RCTUB or RCTUC/D). 4. Select the DK software version of the system (R2, R3 or higher). 5. Enter emergency numbers as programmed in Program 44-91~93 of the DK424. 6. Click the Default Configuration button. This will set all the parameters to match the default values of the DK424. Important! It is extremely important to match the parameters set in the DK424 with those in the Telephony Setup or the PC attendant console will not know how to operate properly. Before Step 7, go through each of the following telephony setup programs. ALL changes in these following screens must match the corresponding values in the programming of the DK424. 1024 Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-35 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console 7. The Default Configuration button will close the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen. To make changes, select Setup again, then continue. Default Key Assignments From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, the Configure Keys button takes you to the DK PC Attendant Key Configuration screen.The default key assignments are defined for R2 and R3. These key assignments must match Program 59 of the DK. The Default Config button on this screen sets the default keys only, whereas the Default Config button on the previous screen sets the system database defaults. ➤ To assign PC Attendant keys 1. From the PC Attendant Configuration dialog box, select the key that you want to change. The Key Type drop-down box shows a list of key names that can be selected for that button. The three-digit program codes are shown in front of the button for convenient programming. If the programming telephone is next to the PC attendant console, you can look at the codes on the PC Attendant screen while you program. 1026 2. Click OK after making your selections. Access Codes Access Codes are used by the DK424 for dialing features. The access codes (dialing plan) must match to allow the PC Attendant to dial the correct code to activate certain features. This is normally left at default, but if Program 05 is modified, corresponding changes are needed here. If no changes were made to Program 05, skip these steps. ➤ To change access codes to match Program 05 1. From the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the Access Code button. 2. In the Access Code dialog box, click OK after making your selections. 1025 9-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Class of Service The Class of Service settings should reflect the call states and features which are anticipated to be used the most often. 1. From the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the Class of Service button. These contain two items from Program 10 for setting the operation for Tone First or Voice First when calling a [DN] on the system and for setting the system to support two or three Night Transfer modes. The Class of Service for the port assigned to the PC attendant console must match Program 30 of the DK424. 1028 DNIS Trunks To allow the DNIS feature to work properly, the PC attendant console needs to know whether trunk ports are being used for DNIS number translation or for CO line circuits. This assignment must follow Program 17 LED 05 in the DK424. (LED ON requires the line to be marked as DNIS.) Station Apparatus 2. In the Class of Service dialog box, click OK. ➤ To set DNIS trunk identification 1. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, click the DNIS button. 2. From the Class/ANI DNIS Trunk Assignment dialog box, click OK when done. 1029 ➤ To exit Telephony Drivers and Telephony Setup 1. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, click Close to exit the Telephony Drivers box. 2. Click Close again to exit the Telephony Setup box. PC Attendant Setup After Telephony Setup has been completed, then a series of items needs to be configured within the main program. System Settings in the main program can be easily changed since they do not require a corresponding change in the DK424 in order to function. Most of these items are found under the Main Menu heading of Setup. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-37 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To access System Settings 1. From the Main Menu, select Setup. 2. Click OK or enter a password. Initially, you can click OK, without entering a password. Store a password if you need to ensure that these settings cannot be changed without authorization. Once a password is entered, you must enter that password to proceed. 1030 System Settings Once the password screen is entered, the System Settings menu is presented. The two menu items, System Code Settings and Change Station User Name, allow the Attendant to change System Administration settings in the DK424. Within System Settings, the Attendant can customize the labels for only three menu items: Door Phone, Door Unlock, and Paging. The following sections cover the main settings needed to make the console work. 1031 Console Settings The first selection is Console Settings. This screen defines the PC attendant console main operating features, including: ♦ Auto Hold and Auto Dialing ♦ Account code length expected by the DK424 ♦ Pilot number for Voice Mail ♦ Prefix digits needed to access a mailbox for message taking ♦ Voice Mail ID codes for message answering ♦ Call Forwarding to Voice Mail 1032 More details about these settings can be found in the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide. 9-38 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Line Settings Each line and line group within the system can be renamed to allow for easy identification. For example, a private line for John Smith can be marked “John’s Pvt Line”. These identifiers are unique to the PC attendant console. In the Lines dialog box, you can change the names that appear in the Active Call window. The Active Call window names are different from the names that appear in the PC attendant console selection windows. The Attendant can also define a default line or line group to make dialing more efficient. The default line or line group can be used with the Directory to identify a Tie line group for easy transfer of calls. (See “Setting up the Directory” later in this section). ➤ To change CO line and names 1. From the menu bar, select Setup, Settings... and OK to access the System Settings dialog box. Then select Default Line Settings. 3. Select the corresponding edit box and enter a new name. 1033 4. Repeat for all lines or line groups that change names. Station Apparatus 2. From the Lines dialog box, highlight the Line or Line Group to be changed. User Buttons The user buttons of the PC attendant console can be customized with features used most often by the Attendant. User buttons can be set to immediately invoke a feature or to open a dialog box associated with the feature. Each button can be programmed with Speed Dial or Feature buttons. (See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on clearing buttons.) ➤ To change user buttons 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select User Buttons. 2. From the User Buttons dialog, select the button to be changed. 3. Select either Autodial or Feature to change the button. 4. Enter a feature code for the list by selecting from the pull down list or selecting the Digits box and entering a number. 1034 5. Select Label to change, if necessary. 6. Select the next button to change and repeat the process. 7. Select the OK button when all changes have been made. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-39 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Answer Prompts Answer Prompts can be entered so that when new calls are presented and answered by the Attendant, the prompts will appear in the information window. Any currently recorded prompts are listed in the Answer Prompts box (shown below) and two selections on the left allow linking the prompts to a DNIS tag or CO line. Note DNIS applies to R3 and up only. The DK424 identifies calls to the Attendant position by using the default CO line indication. It can also attach a tag that was recorded in Program 71 for each DNIS number translated by the system. When lines are marked as DNIS in the Telephony Setup (see “PC Attendant Console Software Installation” on Page 9-34), the PC attendant console uses the DNIS tag to select the prompt instead of the line number. The button marked DNIS Text... is used to record the DNIS Tags which should match those listed in Program 71-5. Toshiba recommends entering DNIS tags when they are programmed into the DK system. This enables the Attendant or System Administrator to create prompts as needed. Even if some DNIS lines are not scheduled to ring at the console, the calls to be forwarded to the Attendant and answers prompts may be used later. The Answer Prompts can have approximately 110 characters. The edit window, shown below, is the same size as the window on the main screen in order to view the message as it will display. ➤ To write an Answer Prompt 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select Answer Prompt. 1035 2. From the Answer Prompt dialog, select the Prompts...button. 3. Select the New button. 4. Type in a new prompt message in the Prompt box. 5. Select the New button again to enter another prompt or OK to save those entered. 1036 9-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To write a DNIS Answer Prompt 1. From the System Settings dialog box, select Answer Prompt. 2. Select the DNIS Text... button. 3. From the DNIS Text dialog box, select the Add button. 4. Type in the Name Tag as entered in Strata DK System system programming. 5. Select the Add button to enter another prompt or the OK button to save those entered. 1037 ➤ To link a CO line or DNIS tag with an Answer Prompt 1. Click on a line or DNIS tag. 2. Highlight the Prompt. ➤ To remove an Answer Prompt from a CO or DNIS line tags ➤ Click to remove the highlight. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on other Answer Prompt options. Station Apparatus 3. Press OK. Setting up the Directory The directory is a central part of the PC attendant console. Information in the directory is used for the following: ♦ Auto Dial ♦ Auto Transfer ♦ Transfers to Voice Mail ♦ Recording an individual’s status ♦ Recording messages for people without phones or for transferring to Voice Mail ♦ Recording individual’s work departments so that when a caller asks for someone in “Sales,” a list of department members will appear 1038 This is also a place to store information about different individuals and how they may be reached, for example, pagers, home office, car phones, fax, etc. It can also be used to indicate location, work schedule and supervisors of people if needed. Multiple entries of the same information is allowed. For example, two people may share the same [DN]. A call to John Smith will ring station 204 and if Sandy Johnson has the same [DN], her telephone will also ring. The same person may be entered twice. For example, John Brady may be entered with [DN] 204 and with a [PhDN] 504. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-41 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console When there are multiple entries, Auto Dial (includes Auto Transfer) is disabled. In the first example, where two people shared the same [DN], the system would pause if the [DN] is entered. At this point, the Attendant can enter a name and as long as there are no name conflicts, the console will now Auto Transfer. When the system pauses, other calls can still be handled by Auto Dial if there are no conflicts. It is important to enter names in the same format, otherwise, the directory search function will not work and the individual will have to be selected manually. In other words, avoid entering first names for some people and first and last names for others. For example, if I created an entry for Pat L and another for Pat Long, the first entry would never be selected because the console will look for a match to Pat Long. If an “o” is entered after the “L”, the console will select Pat Long. Avoid using abbreviations in the initial entry. Use the “Dept” field for grouping people who need to be reached by function. Directory entries with this field left blank will not show in the “Dept Select” feature. Assigning a consistent list allows for all people within a group to show on the list together, offering the Attendant a method to choose the person that can best serve the caller. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on adding entries into the Directory. Establishing the Speed Dial List The Speed Dialing list must be established before the list will show in the Dialing window. This can be done in one of two ways. Method 1 With the first method, you transfer a Speed Dial list that was previously entered into the DK system to the PC attendant console. Once you have completed the following procedure, the PC attendant console will store the numbers to match those stored in the system.Then, when the Attendant uses this Speed Dial list, the PC attendant console dials the code for speed dial and the DK system uses the number it has in memory. ➤ To transfer the DK Speed Dial list to the PC attendant console 1. If the Speed Dial list has been entered into the DK system, then select each speed dial entry. 2. Press the Modify button. 3. (optional) Enter a name for the number. Note This name is stored in the PC attendant console only and is not downloaded into the DK system Speed Dial Memo. Method 2 With Method 2, you enter a list of Speed Dial names and numbers from the console. The entered list will automatically re-sort and display 9-42 1039 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console alphabetically by name. A second sort is performed by dialed number which also searches for names that are the same. Do not enter extra spaces after either the first or last names and do not put the full name in only one box. The system searches the names by putting together the First and Last name by adding a space between the first and last. The system also adds a comma and space after the last and before the first. The Attendant can type names using either first or last name which will be automatically dialed if there is a matching name, but the name must match exactly, including any spaces and commas. [DNs] are treated as a separate match, thus calls proceed with either a [DN] or name match. ➤ To enter Speed Dial numbers 1. Enter each number and name from the console. 2. Click the Save button. Using LCD Messaging LCD Messaging uses the system messages and the personal messages (if enabled). Station Apparatus ➤ To display the messages currently programmed in the DK system 1. Select each message number and press the Retrieve Msg button. 2. Press the Modify or Save button. 3. Press Close. See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for more instructions on the messaging features. 1040 Backup/Restore Configuration After all the data parameters are entered, the system should be backed up to a floppy diskette for restoring the operation later if needed. This backup diskette can be used to set up additional PC Attendant Consoles to operate with the same directory and settings as the first. This saves time when creating additional consoles and ensures that the buttons and operation of one console matches the next. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-43 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console ➤ To backup or restore PC attendant console setup data 1. Double-click on the PCATT BACKUP icon. 1021 2. From the PC Attendant Backup and Restore dialog box, select Backup or Restore. 3. Enter the appropriate directories. 4. Select the Start Backup or Close buttons. Windows Control Panel Several items within Windows have an effect on the operation of the PC Attendant console. These controls are within the Main Program Group under the topic of Control Panel. 1041 Choose Color Dialog Box Windows allows the screen to use a variety of colors. PC Attendant console uses the color settings to determine the highlight, title bar and text color of many parts of the program. Choose a color scheme that provides the type of contrast best suited to the user. Action Description 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Colors. 4. Select a color setting from the list. A dialog box showing the current color settings and example colors is shown. Using the mouse or Arrow keys, the color settings can be viewed and changed. 5. Press the OK button when done. 9-44 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Choose Desktop Dialog Box The Desktop defines whether or not the Alt+Tab key combination can be used to switch between open applications on the desktop. The Desktop screen controls: cursor blink rate, whether a screen saver is used, and the timer to invoke the screen saver. Toshiba recommends using a screen saver since this protects the video monitor. When calls come into the PC Attendant when the screen saver is displayed, ringing is heard, but the screen saver remains on until the user takes an action. “Activate on Incoming” does not affect the screen saver. Action Description 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Desktop. A number of settings are possible within the desktop control. Only the “Fast Alt+Tab” operation and screen saver patterns are used with the PC Attendant. Station Apparatus 4. Look at Applications and make certain that “Fast Alt+Tab” operation is enabled. And choose a screen saver pattern and delay time for the pattern to employed. 5. Press the OK button. Choose Keyboard Dialog Box Two controls can be used on the keyboard, the first is the delay needed to hold a key down before the character will repeat and the second is the speed of repetition once the key repeats. Action Description 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Keyboard. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-45 Station Apparatus PC Attendant Console Action Description 4. Choose the Delay before Repeat and Repeat Rate speed desired. The slide controls offer two speed settings. This affects the rate of change the Vol Up/Vol Dn keys respond to when a key is held down to adjust the volume. The slower the repetition, the easier it is to distinguish level change. This rate also affects scroll rate for the Arrow keys used in the directory and other lists. Toshiba recommends starting at mid-points of each setting before making adjustments. 5. Press the OK button when done. Choose Mouse Dialog Box Under the title Mouse, two settings affect the speed of the mouse and the speed of the double click needed to make a selection. If you are currently using a mouse, these settings should be appropriate and need not be changed. If the mouse is new to you, Toshiba recommends each setting to be a slower speed for easier operation. Once you gain experience with the mouse, you can use faster settings. Action Description 1. Switch to Program Manager (Alt+Tab). The screen will show each window currently open, including the Program Manager. 2. From the Main Program Group, choose Control Panel. 3. From the Control Panel, choose Mouse. 4. Choose the Tracking and Double Click speed desired. Two speed settings are possible using a slide control. Slower operation is for beginning users while faster tracking and double click speeds are for experienced users. The control buttons can also be changed to allow for lefthanded users of the mouse. 5. Press the OK button when done. 9-46 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus Conventional Attendant Console Conventional Attendant Console A Strata DK system configured with RCTUB2 or RCTUBA/BB can support two Attendant Consoles, and systems with RCTUC1/D2 or RCTUC3/D3 can support four Attendant Consoles. The RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1 do not support Attendant Consoles. PC and conventional Attendant Consoles require RCTUB2 or RCTUC/D2 R 2 processors or RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 R3 processors. The conventional attendant console can be configured with a Toshiba-supplied base (ATT BASE1) and an Electroluminescent (EL) or EGA Color CRT. Installation Refer to “Hardware Installation” on Page 9-31 and the following steps. ➤ To install the conventional attendant console 1. Plug in the EL or CRT display to the base with a nine-pin cable, which is supplied with the display. 3. Use two-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. 4. Plug in the handset to the base RJ45-jack (see Figure 9-21). 5. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the base. Station Apparatus 2. Plug in the EL or CRT display to a commercial three-prong AC 117V outlet. Conventional Attendant Console Programming Follow the same programming instructions provided for the PC attendant console. See “PC Attendant Console Programming” on Page 9-33. Software Installation and Windows instructions do not apply to the conventional console. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-47 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone The following provides information on how to connect the DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephones (SLTs) to the DK system. Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation”. The digital SLTs connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for DKT2001 model standard telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system. 3532 To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular DKT2001 model standard telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.). Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. ➤ To wall mount DKT2001 digital SLTs 1. Loosen the screws, and remove the telephone base. Handset Hanger 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four screws. 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. 9-48 3633 Figure 9-22 Removing the Telephone Base Strata DK I&M 5/99 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone Installation 1. Set the DIP switches to match Figure 9-23. The DIP switches are preset from the factory for the USA and Canada. Refer to Table 9-1 on Page 9-4 for other country settings. 2. If required to achieve maximum distance (greater than 1000 ft.), install a two-pair house cable (or external power). ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU2. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Program 39: Specify button 01 as a [PDN]. 3482 Do not program CO lines or secondary line appearances onto Figure 9-23 DKT2001 DIP Switch Settings button 01 or in any other position. Since the system assigns CO lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any CO line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ). Important! Note Station Apparatus Program 38: Specify Code 21. If the 6SHHG'LDO6HOHFW button is removed, the key becomes the 6SHHG'LDO 6HOHFW button. While on an outside call, the user must press then to activate the and DTMF tones for the duration of the call. Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. Also, refer to the Numerical Programming Listing in the Strata DK Programming Manual for other station-related programs. Strata DK I&M 5/99 9-49 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone 9-50 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation 10 This chapter provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata DK Systems. Information in this chapter applies to all systems, unless stated otherwise in text. Instructions include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. Peripheral equipment is connected to system PCBs. See Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs installation and configuration information and the appropriate installation section. Power Failure Options In the event of a power failure, Strata DK uses these options: For information on the Reserve Power Option, see: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation ♦ Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation Peripheral Installation Reserve Power DK14/DK40i Single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer DK14 and DK40i have a built-in single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer (requires loop start lines). See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation and Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for detailed information. DK40i/DK424 Power Failure Transfer Unit An optional Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) can be installed that automatically connects up to eight selected CO lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure. The DPFT enables normal operation of the selected CO lines and standard telephones when the system is in service. When power is restored, each telephone is independently reconnected to system standard telephone circuit ports after it is finished with its direct CO line call. The DPFT is normally installed on the MDF. Figure 10-1 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-1 Peripheral Installation Power Failure Options To RSTU/PSTU-T1 RDSU/RSTS J2-27 J2-26 To RSTU/PSTU-R1 RDSU/RSTS J2-2 J2-1 To TEL-T1 To TEL-R1 Telephone Current Detector To RCOU/PCOU-T1 To RCOU/PCOU-R1 J1-27 J1-26 To CO-T1 J1-2 J1-1 To CO-R1 J1-50 DG (Input) Relay RSTU or PSTU Control -24V (Input) J1-25 1498 Notes • • Figure 10-1 Representation of first of eight circuits. Conditions shown with AC power (-24VDC) off. DPFT Circuit Diagram Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation 1. Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF. Note See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring, DPFT/MDF interconnecting tables. 2. Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for DPFT connector J1, male for DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to two 66-type quick-connect blocks. 3. Connect the CO lines selected for emergency use to the DPFT J1-block “CO-TIP” and “CORING” terminals. 4. Connect the RCOU, RCOS (or PCOU) circuits related to the emergency CO lines to the DPFT J1-block “RCOU-TIP” and “RCOU-RING” terminals. 5. Connect the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2-block “TEL-TIP” and “TEL-RING” terminals. 10-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options 6. Connect the RSTU, RDSU/RSTS or PSTU standard telephone circuits related to the emergency standard telephones to DPFT J2-block “PSTU/ RSTU-TIP” and “PSTU/RSTURING” terminals. 7. Connect the DPFT to the RDSU/RSTU/PSTU DG and -24V terminals (See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RSTU/PSTU and RCOU/PCOU wiring/ interconnecting details). The -24V (Pin 25) and DG (Pin 50) ground terminals are available on the KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU only, not on the PESU. ➤ To test the operation of the DPFT 1. Turn the system power switch OFF. 2. Verify that CO dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT. 3. Call back to each telephone using an outside line. Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options Strata DK systems provide an MOH option for CO, E&M tie and DID lines, as well as telephones connected to the system. A variety of BGM options are also provided. (See Figure 10-2.) MOH Option BGM or MOH Source Specifications ♦ Input Impedance: 600 ohms or 8 ohms ♦ Input Voltage (recommended levels) Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Peripheral Installation The DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU or DK424 RCTU supports an external, customer-provided music source – such as a tuner, compact disc player, digital music source, cassette downloader digital source or tape player – for MOH. The DK14 KSU, DK40i Base KSU, PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU each has a relay contact on it that can be configured to automatically turn the source on when a CO line or station is placed on hold. MOH source and MOH relay contact specifications are as follows: Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Relay Contact Specifications ♦ Voltage: 24VDC maximum ♦ Current: 1 amp maximum Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar organization, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature of this telecommunications system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. 10-3 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ➤ To install the MOH option 1. Connect the external music source to the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 RCTU, RCA jack (see Figure 10-1). 2. Rotate the DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU or RCTU volume control (VR1) to adjust MOH volume: clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise decreases volume. Listen to the CO line onhold when setting MOH to the proper volume. 3. If MOH relay control is required, access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to ON to configure the MOH/Night Transfer Control relay for the MOH function. This feature requires the installation of a DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, or PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB. 4. If using the MOH control feature with a PIOU or PEPU, set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug P11 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ♦ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ...or If using the MOH control feature with a PIOUS, solder PIOUS jumper W2 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is in the hold condition. ♦ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is in the hold condition. 5. MOH (CO line or intercom hold) is applied from the RCTU through the KSU’s backplane to DID lines, tie lines, CO lines, electronic, digital, and standard telephones on hold. 6. MOH is also applied through the DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, RCTU, Page/BGM control to provide BGM to electronic/digital telephone speakers and external page. 10-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options See MDF Tip & Ring Wiring Diagrams (Chapter 8) Twisted Pair 24 AWG. DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU VR1 MOH/BGM Volume Control Music MOH RCA Jack On/Off Control (24 Volt Max) CO Line and Station PCBs Music-OnHold Max. Music-OnHold Source1 Backplane Stations Page or Background Music Page/BGM Control Digital and Electronic Telephone Speakers Station PCBs DK14/DK40i Base KSU 600Ω Note BGM or MOH Source Specifications: • Input Impedance: 600W OR 8W • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels, Min. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) DID Lines TIE Lines CO Lines (Loop) CO Lines (GND) 600Ω RCA Jack Digital and Electronic Telephone BGM Dial Code #481-ON #480-OFF OR Tel Set Music (BGM) MOH over BGM Port 000 Only: #491-ON, #490-OFF NHT/NHR, if Using PIOUS PIOU/PEPU/PIOUS SP0 600Ω SW4 ( ) PIN No.s of PIOU/PEPU Amphenol Connector MOH/NT Relay Contact Jumper Plug (Make or Break) (38) HESB or Amplifier (13) & Speaker 3 Watt amp. (50) Speaker (25) Volume VR1 (See Note) SW4: Optional Page Output External BGM Dial Switch 600Ω OR Code from (9) 3-Watt 8Ω. Electronic & Digital Telephones MOH or B Port 000 Only: Night Transfer #491-ON (34) Control #490-OFF Relay M (MOH over BGM) P11 Peripheral Installation SP1 Backplane Optional External Page/ BGM Outputs Select MOH Prog. 77-1, 05 Note 3-watt amp and SW4 are available with PIOU and PEPU only; PIOUS provides 600 ohm output only. W2, IF Using PIOUS (See Figure 10-8) Relay Contact Specification: 24 VDC Max. 1 amp, Max. Figure 10-2 Music-on-Hold and Background Music (same source) Functional Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 4253 10-5 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options BGM Options The BGM options allow music to play over optional external speakers (external page system) and/ or digital and electronic telephone speakers. BGM can be configured in three ways: Configuration A – One Music Source This configuration enables BGM and MOH to share the same music source (see Figure 10-3). With this configuration, the MOH/BGM music source is connected to the RCA jack on the DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU or RCTU PCB. The music source is sent to CO lines/stations on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speakers, and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU optional PCBs. Station Port 000 must dial to send MOH over BGM and to disable the option. DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU MOH MOH/BGM Source (SHARED) 600Ω, 0-1 Volt RMS CO Lines and Stations On-Hold BGM Page Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) (BGM: #481 ON/#480 OFF) DK424 Only PIOU PIOUS PEPU To External Page System DK14/DK40i KSU (BGM when Page is idle, 8Ω or 600Ω Output) 600Ω RCA Jack Figure 10-3 Note To External Page System 4254 MOH/BGM Music Source Configuration A Telephone users can turn on BGM at their station by pressing the 7HO6HW0XVLF (%*0) button; or by pressing [PDN] + ( turns BGM OFF). Configuration B – Alternate Background Music Source This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the MOH RCA jack of the DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU or RCTU, (as in Configuration A) and a separate BGM source to be connected to a PEKU (circuit 3), PESU (circuit 8) ...or KSTU2, QSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU (circuit 2) PCB (see Figures 10-4 and 10-5). With this configuration, the MOH source is sent only to CO lines/stations on hold, while the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU or DK14 and DK40i BGM 600 ohm RCA jack. 10-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options RCA Jack QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU (CKT 2) Tip (28) BGM Music Source 600Ω Output or 8Ω Output High Level Output Input Ring (3) 4246 BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS: • Input Impedance: 600 OR 8 ohms • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels Min. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Phone Line Line Isolation Transformer (Dealer supplied) See Program 19 for Slot Assignment Figure 10-4 DK14/DK40i/DK424 Alternate BGM Source to Standard Telephone Port Connection DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU MOH QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU 25-Pair Connector VT = P28, W-GN VR = P3, GN-W Slot XX*, Circuit 2 ** PESU 25-Pair Connector VT = P40, BK-S VR = P15, S-BK Slot XX*, Circuit 8 Alternate BGM Source: Digital/Electronic Telephones and External Speakers ** PEKU 25-Pair Connector VT = P30, W-S VR = P5, S-W Slot XX*, Circuit 3 MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) DK14/DK40 600Ω RCA Jack BGM/PAGE DK424 To External Page System PIOU PIOUS PEPU BGM VT VR CO Lines and Stations On-Hold QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, PESU or PEKU in Slot XX* 4299 Peripheral Installation MOH Source (BGM: #491 ON/#490 OFF) (BGM when Page is Idle, 8Ω or 600Ω Output) Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker (BGM: #481 ON/#480 Off) Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring * Program 19 Assigns Slot XX Figure 10-5 DK40i/DK424 Alternate BGM Source Configuration B Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-7 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options Configuration C – Three Music Sources This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the RCA jack of the DK40i KSU or DK424 RCTU (as in Configuration A). The digital or electronic telephone BGM source is connected to a PEKU, PESU, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU PCB (as in Configuration B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the external page speakers via the PIOU PCB (see Figure 10-6). This option is not available on DK14. When a separate BGM source is connected to the PIOU, two customer-supplied amplifiers are required to drive the external speakers.One amplifier drives the speakers for BGM when page is idle and the other amplifier drives the speakers during page. The PIOU switches BGM or page to the external speakers via zone relays. (The PIOUS and PEPU do not provide zone relays; therefore Configuration C is not possible with these PCBs.) DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU RCA Jack MOH MOH SOURCE CO Lines and Stations On-Hold KSU BGM 600 RCA Jack RSTU/RDSU/PSTU1 VR1 (Volume) 25 Pair Connector VT = 28, W-GN VR = 3, GN-W SLOT XX2, Circuit 2 BGM/Page (DK424 backplane) PESU 25-Pair Connector1 VT = P40, BK-S VR = P15, S-BK Slot XX2, Circuit 8 Cut W7 on PESU Program 10, LED 10/On Electronic/ Digital Telephone Alternate BGM Source VT VR PEKU 25-Pair Connector VT = P30, W-S VR = P5, S-W Slot XX2, Circuit 3 Cut W5 on PEKU Program 10, LED 09/On Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker * KSTU2, RSTU1, RDSU1, PSTU1, PESU1, or PEKU in Slot XX2 (BGM: #481 On/#480 Off) Page Amplifier 600Ω External Speaker BGM Source Page Page or BGM P23 BGM BGM PIOU Only To External Page Speaker Zone Relays Activate with Page Amplifier (BGM When Page is Idle) Notes Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring 1. An isolation transformer may be required if connecting BGM source to a standard telephone port. 2. Program 19 assigns BGM Slot number. 4300 Figure 10-6 10-8 DK40i/DK424 Alternate Music Source Configuration C Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ➤ To install the MOH/BGM as BGM 1. Ensure that the MOH option is installed in accordance with “To install the MOH option” on Page 10-4 (see Figure 10-2). 2. The output of the RCTU page/BGM control is applied through the backplane to the output select switch (SW4) on the PIOU or PEPU. Set the SW4 switch to either SPO or SPI, as required: ♦ SPO – Directs external page and non-amplified BGM to the HESB or external amplifier (pins 13 and 38). ♦ SPI – Directs external page and BGM through the on-board 3-watt amplifier to the external speaker output (pins 25 and 50). The PIOUS provides non-amplified BGM/page output only (SPT and SPR). See Figure 10-8. Note 3. When using an HESB or external amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the HESB or amplifier volume control. 4. When using the internal amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust the volume using the volume control (VR1) on the PIOU/PEPU PCB. Alternate BGM Source Installation ➤ To connect the BGM source to the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU, PEKU or PESU See Figures 10-4~10-6 and follow these steps: 1. Access Program 10-2. If the BGM source is connected to circuit 3 on a PEKU, set LED 09 to ON. If the source is connected to circuit 8 on a PESU, set LED 10 to ON. If connecting BGM to QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU, LED 09 and 10 should be OFF. Peripheral Installation A BGM source can be connected to a station PCB (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU) to send music to all electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU. The BGM source is separate from the MOH source connected to the RCTU PCB. An isolation transformer is needed to connect a music source to one of the above standard telephone circuits (see Figure 10-4). 2. Using Program 19, identify (assign) the BGM slot. 3. If connecting the BGM source to a PEKU or PESU: Connect the PEKU tip and ring of circuit 03 to the 600 ohms or 8 ohms output of the BGM source or connect the BGM output to circuit 8 of a PESU. ...or If connecting the BGM source to a QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU: Connect circuit 2 of the RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU to a customer-supplied isolation transformer and BGM source. Note The isolation transformer protects the BGM source from potentially damaging QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU voltage. Some music sources which are designed for telephone system applications may have this protection built-in and do not require the transformer. (Consult the documentation provided with the music source.) 4. If the BGM source is connected to either a W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB, cut the strap. There is no strap to cut on the QSTU2/KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-9 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control 5. Using the BGM source’s volume control, adjust the BGM volume to the desired level while listening to BGM via a telephone speaker and/or the external page speakers. When BGM is sent to external speakers via a PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU PCB, use the external amplifier volume control to balance the BGM and page volume levels. External BGM Installation The external BGM options are closely associated with the external paging options. See “External Page Options” on Page 10-26 for external paging amplifier installation. Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Two relays are provided on the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs to control the operation of peripheral equipment: ♦ External Page/Door Lock Relay ♦ Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the relay control function. Each relay can be configured to provide one of two possible control functions and as normally open (MAKE) or closed (BREAK). Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as follows: Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 1 amp maximum CAUTION! Note To prevent relay damage, do not connect relays directly to 120VAC power source. See the Strata DK Programming Manual, as necessary, when instructed to program the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU in the following paragraphs. External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB may be programmed for either the external page function or the door lock control function. (See Figures 10-7 and 10-8.) When configured in Program 77-1 for the external page function, the relay controls an external music source connected to the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU to provide BGM over external speakers. When a paging announcement is made over the external speakers, the external page relay mutes the BGM. When configured in Program 77-1 for the door lock control function, the relay controls an external door lock. When a door lock button at a digital or electronic telephone is pressed, the door lock control relay unlocks the door for three or six seconds, as specified in Program 77-1 (LED 20). 10-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for External Page Mute Option 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to OFF to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the external page function. 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the jumper plug P10 on the PIOU or PEPU jumper plug to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W1 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. 3. See Figures 10-7 and 10-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the external paging function. PIOU/PEPU PCB MDF 66M Block PIN NO.s 32 7 . . R-O O-R 13 14 SP.T0 600Ω (Duplex) SP.R0 38 . Bk-Gn 25 SW4 SP0 13 . Gn-Bk 26 SP1 Page or BGM from RCTU or DK KSU 8Ω SP.T1 3 Watt SP.R1 50 25 . . V-S S-V 49 50 VR1 Door Lock Control Page Amplifier Control Break P11 NH.T NH.R 34 9 . . R-Br Br-R Speaker Tape Player Peripheral Installation PIOU 25 PR. Connectors PIN NO. Color Select Relay Function with Program 77-1 Door Lock or External Page Control Break DE.T P10 DE. R Make 8 ohm Speaker 17 18 Make Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay or MOH Control MDF Connections All wires should be jacketed 24 AWG twisted pairs Night Bell To Music On-Hold Input on RCTU PCB or DK KSU Note 1507 Figure 10-7 Strata DK I&M 5/99 PIOU/PEPU Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram 10-11 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control KSU Backplane TBI MDF SP.T Page and BGM 600 SP.R Break DE.R Break DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NH.T W2 Make K2 Mute Control DE.T W1 Make K1 Page Amplifier NH.R Night Bell Normal Open ALM.T Alarm Sensor W3 ALM ALM.R Facility Alarm Unit 1508 Normal Close PIOUS Notes • All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs. • Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously. Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-Hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 amp Maximum Figure 10-8 10-12 PIOUS Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Lock Control Function Only one door lock control is available using an optional PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) and only the optional PCB with the lowest Program 03 Code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the door lock function. Note 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to ON to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the door lock control function (see Figure 10-9). 2. Set Program 77-1 LED 20 to OFF for a three-second door lock activation time, or set LED 20 to ON for a six-second door lock activation time. 3. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s 'RRU /RFN button is pressed. PIOU/PEPU Note assigned to digital and electronic telephones in Program 39 with Code 71. DET B M 25-Pair Amphenol PIN 34, R-BR 17 P10 To Door Lock PIN 9, BR-R DER 18 See Program 77-1, LED 07, 20 for Relay Options Door Lock 0 Button K1 MDF Peripheral Installation 4. See Figure 10-9 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the door lock control function. PIOUS Break MDF DET W1 Make K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 amp Max.) DE To Door Lock DER Terminal on Front Edge of PCB 1509 Figure 10-9 Door Lock Control Option (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-13 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Door Lock Control with DDCB and HDCB In addition to the option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU), each DDCB and HDCB can provide one door lock control. ♦ DK14 provides two door lock controls on DDCB only. ♦ DK40i provides three door lock controls. The DK424 support DDCBs and HDCBs. ♦ DK424 RCTUA provides four door lock controls. RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F provide five DDCB/HDCB door lock controls. DK40i and DK424 DDCBs connect only to digital circuits (always circuit 5 on a PDKU or RDSU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. DK14 DDCBs connect to ports 002 or 003 only. HDCBs connect only to electronic circuits (always circuit 5 on a PEKU or PESU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 (see Table 10-1). Table 10-1 DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide DK14/DK40i KSU or RDSU/PDKU/PEKU/PESU DDCB/ HDCB No. Port No. DK40i/DK424 Door Lock 1 1 004 DK14 Door Lock 1 1 002 DK14 Door Lock 2 2 003 DK40i/DK424 Door Lock 2 2 012 DK40i/DK424 Door Lock 3 3 020 Unlock Door 3 (DRLK 3), Code 74 DK424 Door Lock 4 4 028 Unlock Door 4 (DRLK 4), Code 75 Important! Program 39 Button Assignments Unlock Door 1 (DRLK 1), Code 72 Unlock Door 2 (DRLK 2), Code 73 Each DDCB/HDCB door lock control reduces the maximum door phone capacity by one. Configure Each DDCB/HDCB for the Door Lock Control Function 1. DK40i and DK424: connect PDKU circuit 5 (T/R and PT/PR) to the DDCB HKSU modular jack (see Figures 10-9 and 10-10). DK14: connect applicable digital telephone circuit (logical port 02 or 03) to the DDCB KSU modular jack. See Figure 10-7 and Figure 8-1. 2. Connect the door lock wire pair to the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4). 3. Set SW1 to the DOOR position. 4. Set SW2 to the LOCK position. 5. SW3 inside the DDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock button is pressed: if SW3 is in the “1-2” position, the relay closes when the button is pressed; if in the “2-3” position, the door lock relay opens when the button is pressed. Note SW3 comes from the factory in the “1-2” position. 6. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds and enable the PDKU or RDSU ports for DDCB connection. 7. In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for door lock operation. 8. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to stations per the customer’s record sheet. 10-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control 9. Check each telephone door lock button from each station: the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will momentarily open or close (three or six seconds) when the button is pressed. HDCB Installation (DK40i and DK424 only) 1. Cut jumper W9 of the particular PEKU or PESU that will connect to the HDCB. (See Figure 10-10 and Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 2. Connect circuit 5 VT/VR and DT/DR pairs to the HDCB HKSU modular jack. 3. Connect the door lock wire pair to the HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4). 4. Set SW1 to the DOOR position. 5. Set SW2 to the LOCK position. 6. W3 inside the HDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock button is pressed: if W3 is in the “solid-line” position, the relay will provide a closure when the button is pressed; if in the “dotted-line” position, the door lock relay will open when the door lock button is pressed. 7. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds, and enable the PEKU and PESU ports for HDCB connection. 8. In Program 77-2, enable the HDCB B-jack for door lock operation. 9. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to the desired stations per the customer’s record sheet. 10. Check each door lock button from each station: The HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will momentarily close (three or six seconds) when the appropriate door lock button is pressed. Note 5/99 Peripheral Installation Strata DK I&M The HDCB W2 strap is not used with Strata DK424 systems. The strap provides an alarm function with other Strata systems. 10-15 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Relay Control Contact 1 DDCB or HDCB A 2 3 4 5 DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, (See Chapter 8— Wiring Diagrams) PDKU, RDSU, DK14 (Ports 002, 003) PEKU, DK40i/DK424 (Ports 004, 012, 020) or DK424 (Port 028) PESU B 3 RJ11 3 4 2 Relay Contact 5 to Customer Supplied RJ11 Device 3 3 4 C RJ11 3 Door Lock Control Contact2 to HDCB KSU Jack to PIN 3 / 4 DT (35) / DR (10) to PIN 5 / 6 VT (34) / VR (9) 1 4 2 3 1 MDFB Door Phone A MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control MDFB Door Phone C 4 4 HDCB WIRING CHART PEKU or PESU 1 2 2 DDCB Wiring Chart PDKU or RDSU to DDCB KSU Jack DT (34) / DR (9) to PIN 3 / 4 PT (35) / PR (10) to PIN 5 / 6 4301 See Chapter 8—Wiring for PEKU, PESU, PDKU or RDSU pin-out information. See DK14 and DK40i Installation chapters for appropriate pin-out information. Notes 1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the ringing, talk, or monitor state. 2. See External Page/Door Lock Relay Options on Page 10-14 and DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide on Page 10-19. 3. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power. Figure 10-10 Multiple Door Lock Control Options (DDCB/HDCB) Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU Night Transfer/Night Relay option may be programmed for either the Night Relay or the MOH relay function. (See Figures 10-7 and 10-8.) Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS, or PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42 or 43) will provide the Night Transfer (NT) or MOH relay control function. When configured for the NT function with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the system is in the Night mode. The relay can be programmed to activate continuously when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button (only) is set for the Night mode (for indirect answering machine control), or to pulsate at one-second ON/three-seconds OFF (for a night bell) when incoming CO lines ring (Night Transfer 1~4 = tenant 1~4 CO lines) per Program *15 and 77-3. When configured for the MOH function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any time a CO line is on hold. In this configuration, the relay is normally used to control the MOH source. 10-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for Night Transfer 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to OFF to configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night Transfer function (see Figures 10-7 and 10-8). 2. In Program 77-1, set LED 06 to provide continuous or pulsating relay activation: ♦ OFF – Programs the relay for continuous activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button (only) is set in the Night mode. ♦ ON – Programs the relay for pulsating activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHUa button for tenant 1~4 is set to the Night mode and a CO line rings. CO lines must be enabled in Program 78 for the Night Transfer pulsating relay function. Note 3. Set in Programs 87, 88, and 89 the CO lines that will activate the relay (when the system is in the Night mode). 4. Assign, in Program 39, the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU buttons to telephones that should be able to set the Strata DK system into the Night mode. 5. Assign in Programs 29-1~29-4 a 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button on all direct station selection consoles that are to transfer the Strata DK system into the Night mode. 6. If tenant operation is required, set in Program *15 the CO lines for tenant 1 through tenant 4 operation. DK40i and the DK424 RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenant assignments, RCTUC/D provides four. 7. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night relay is activated. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when night relay is activated. Peripheral Installation ♦ 8. See Figures 10-7 and 10-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the night relay function. Note Strata DK I&M Door phones programmed to ring over external page in the Night mode do not activate the Night Transfer feature, per Program 77-1. 5/99 10-17 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Configure PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for MOH Relay Control 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to ON to configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH relay function (see Figures 10-8 and 10-9). 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on hold. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on hold. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ♦ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on hold. ♦ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on hold. 3. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the MOH Relay function. DK14 KSU and DK40i KSU Relay The DK40i KSU Relay can be programmed for one of three options: ♦ BGM mute ♦ Night transfer ♦ MOH source control These options are set in Program 77-1 (LED 05 and 06). Only one option is allowed per installation. However, in the DK40i, these options can be supplemented with PIOU/PIOUS relay options. Electrical specifications for the DK40i base relay contacts are: Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 10-18 ♦ 1 amp maximum ♦ Normally open – closed when activated Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Strata DK systems provide three options utilizing an HESB: ♦ Loud Ringing Bell ♦ Amplified Speaker ♦ Talkback Amplified Speaker System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. See the following installation procedures for the hardware requirements for each option. Loud Ringing Bell Option The loud ringing bell option enables the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first and signal tone can be amplified on all electronic and digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs and HESB. (See Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus.) The HESB automatically turns OFF once the ringing call or voice first has been manually answered from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems. Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Digital Telephones 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block (Figure 10-11). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~6 can be accomplished using the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. Peripheral Installation 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable in the telephone per Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A cable using a modular block. 7. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power source. Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. 10-19 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (-) Internal Wiring: TBI 1 2 3 4 Jumper Wires: TB1 2-10 TB2 4-5 (L2) Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Not Used 115 VAC ± 10 VAC maximum HACU-120 115VAC to 12 VDC 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair from Digital Telephone to HESB TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Power Supply MDF 66 Block Jumpers Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Station Cabling Tip Ring PT PR 25-Pair Cable Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG DK14 & DK40i KSU or PDKU (CKT 1~8) or RDSU (CKT 5-8) R GN R (+) GN (-) BK Y BK Y W BL W BL 654321 654321 123456 123456 Modular HESC-65A Cable Station OCA Strap (-) Green (L2) Yellow (+) Red 1000 or 2000 Series Digital Telephone (L2) + P601 HHEU (V.3 or .4) R607 Do Not Cut Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per HHEU installation information in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus 4302 Important! See Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. Figure 10-11 HESB/Digital Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring 10-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Electronic Telephones (DK40i and DK424 Only) 1. On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7, and connect another jumper between terminals 5 and 8 (see Figure 10-12). 2. On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5. 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A (or HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 can be made with the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65 cable using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE TIP). 7. Connect terminal 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE RING). 8. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 9. Plug power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power source. Important! ● Make sure the AC power is within the specified limits shown in Step 9. If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Cut the EX-SP and HHEU straps on telephones and do not cut the OCA strap or R607 on the HHEU (see Chapter 9 for details). Testing the Loud Ringing Bell Option 1. Test the AC input voltage. See Step 9, above. Peripheral Installation ● 2. Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell. Ringing will be heard over the HESB. 3. Use a small, slotted screwdriver to turn the volume control on the back of the HESB to the desired level and adjust the ring volume control on the telephone. 4. If ringing is heard at the station, but not over the HESB, check the following while the station is ringing: ♦ Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the HESB TB1 terminal block. Voltage indication should be 4.5~5VDC. Note Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential across terminals 1 and 2. ♦ Strata DK I&M If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to the HESB have been made properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block may have been reversed). 5/99 10-21 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (Red) (-) (Green) VOICE Tip VOICE Ring Internal Wiring: Jumper Wires: TB1 5-8 6-7 TB2 4-5 TBI 1 2 3 4 Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Jumpers 654321 654321 Not Used HACU-120 115VAC 115VAC to ± 10VAC 12VDC maximum Power Supply MDF 66 Block 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair from Electronic Telephone to HESB Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Modular Connectors May Be Used TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Station Cabling Voice Tip Voice Ring Voice Tip Voice Ring Data T1 Data R1 25-Pair Cable PEKU (CKT 1~8) or PESU (CKT 5~8) Jacketed Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG OCA Tip R GN R (+) GN (-) BK Y BK Y W BL W BL OCA Ring 654321 654321 123456 123456 1513 Modular Cord Station Electronic Telephone 6500-Series Green Red HESC-65 or HESC-65A Cable 3 (-) 2 1 (+) P601 HHEU Important! Figure 10-12 OCA Strap Do Not Cut R607 Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per HHEU installation information in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus See Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. HESB/Electronic Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring Amplified Speaker Option The amplified speaker option enables the HESB to be configured as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600-ohm page output to provide an amplified external speaker. ➤ To install the HESB amplified speaker option 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 10-13). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 10-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 5. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 6. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. ...or Connect the PIOUS, DK14 or DK40i KSU 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 7. Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power source. 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Important! ➤ To test the amplified speaker option 1. Make an external page. The page should be heard over the HESB. 2. Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired level. DK14 & DK40i KSU BGM RCA Jack TB1 MDF SPT 600Ω Page Output SPR SPT (38, BK-GN) PIOU or PEPU SPR (13, GN-BK) 600Ω Page Output Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG Block Pin NO.s 1 25 Note Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide amplified speaker output. 26 25-Pair Cable 50 MDF 66 Block Volume Control Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 5-8 6-7 Modular Connector May Be Used TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Internal Wiring: TBI 3 4 Voice Voice 3 4 The 600 ohm page output sends three types of signals during system operation: • Voice page • Background music • Night ringing Door Phone 12V 0V TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note • Peripheral Installation PIOUS MDF 12V 0V VDC Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 4303 Power Supply 115 VAC (± 10 VAC) to 12 VDC Figure 10-13 HESB/Amplified Speaker Wiring Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-23 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Talkback Amplified Speaker Option The talkback amplified speaker option enables a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600 ohm (duplex) output and is used as the amplifier and speaker. A door phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The MDFB push-button is inoperative, and the unit serves only as a microphone for talkback and not as the normal door phone.) Note The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU 600 ohm is a two-way (duplex) page output compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers – door phone not required for talkback. ➤ To install the HESB talkback amplified speaker 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 10-14). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and door phone modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L1 of the MDFB. 5. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB 6. Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 1 of the MDFB. 7. Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 2 of the MDFB. 8. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. ...or If using a PIOUS, connect the PIOUS 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. 10. Connect the HACU-120’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 11. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. ➤ To test the talkback amplified speaker 1. Make an external page. Page will be heard over the HESB. 2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door phone.) 10-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options MDFB (Rear View) DK14 & DK40i KSU BGM RCA Jack MDF Door Phone Talkback Microphone 1 PIOUS TB1 2 L1 L2 MDF Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG SPT 600Ω Page Output SPR Duplex MDF Block Pin Numbers PIOU or PEPU 600Ω Page Output SPT (38, BK-GN) 1 25 SPR (13, GN-BK) 26 25 Pair Cable MDF 66 Block Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWGVolume Control L1 L2 1 2 Jumper Wires: TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 Modular Connector May Be Used Internal Wiring: TBI 4 3 TBI 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 Voice 4 3 Door Phone 4 3 2 5 Voice 654321 Door Phone 12V 0V TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 12V 0V Notes • The 600 ohm duplex page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers. – MDFB not required. • Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide talkback amplified speaker. Peripheral Installation TB1 1-2 HACU-120 Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 4304 Power Converter 115VAC ± 10VAC to 12VDC Figure 10-14 HESB/Talkback Amplified Speaker Wiring Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-25 Peripheral Installation External Page Options HESB Wall Mounting Some applications may require that the HESB is mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ➤ To wall mount the HESB 1. Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB (see Figure 10-15). 2. Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface. One Wall Mounting Hole 3. Hang the HESB from the screw. 6 151 Figure 10-15 HESB Wall Mounting External Page Options Strata DK systems equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB offer a variety of external paging options, each of which includes a BGM option. The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) is required to support these options: ♦ Paging with BGM (same amplifier) – available with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU ♦ Zone Paging with BGM (separate amplifiers) – available with PIOU ♦ Zone Paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers) – available with PIOU External Page Option Installation All paging connections are made via the PIOU or PEPU Amphenol connectors or the PIOUS TB1 terminal to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). Paging (Single-zone) with BGM (Same Amplifier) Paging and BGM are amplified by a common customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the external page access code is dialed, the external page control relay is activated, which applies a short (or opens the contacts) to the amplifier mute control to mute the music. ➤ To install External Page (single zone) with BGM (same amplifier) 1. Connect input 1 from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to SPT and SPR of the PIOUS (see Figure 10-17). 2. Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal to pins 7 and 32 of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to DET and DER of the PIOUS. 3. Connect the music source to input 2 of the paging amplifier. 4. Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier output. 5. Verify that the PIOU or PEPU P10 jumper plug is in the MAKE position or that the PIOUS W1 jumper wire is in the MAKE position. 10-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Page Options PIOU/PEPU 600Ω B P10 External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) SPT (38) 25 SPR (13) 26 DET (32) 13 DER (7) 14 External Paging Amp Output Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane MDF Input 1 66 Block Pin Numbers Mute 2 M Input 2 PIOU/PEPU Pin Numbers 25-Pair Cable BGM Music Source KSU Backplane PIOUS 600Ω Break W1 K1 Make TB1 SPR 600 Input 1 SPT External Paging Amp Output Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane MDF P10 DET DER DE Mute 2 Note BGM Music Source The PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide External Page options. 1517 Peripheral Installation Input 2 External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) Figure 10-16 DK424 Page and BGM Using the Same Amplifier (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-27 Peripheral Installation External Page Options Zone Paging with BGM (Separate Amplifiers) Provides multiple-zone paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU Relays K1 through K4. The relay selected is determined by the access code dialed by the station user. Default access codes are: PIOU Relay Access Codes DKT LCD Display K1/zone 1 = or K1/zone 5 = External Paging A or E K2/zone 2 = or K2/zone 6 = External Paging B or F K3/zone 3 = or K3/zone 7 = External Paging C or G K4/zone 4 = or K4/zone 8 = External Paging D or H See Program 90 in the Strata DK Programming Manual. EXT + ALL CALL PAGE or RCTUE/F Note Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maximum at 300 ohms. Zones 5~8 (LCD display E~F) for a second PIOU installed when using an RCTUE3/F3 processor only (see Figure 10-6). An all zone page code ( ) is also available as an option (see Program 10-2). When the All Page code is dialed, all four or eight relays are activated to permit simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all digital and electronic telephone speakers. ➤ To install the page and background music features on the same amplifier 1. Connect the input from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 10-17). 2. Connect the BGM music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier output to the “M” contact’s PIOU relays K1~K4 and the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. 4. Connect the BGM music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. 10-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Page Options 66 Block Pin Numbers MDF PIOU Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG B K1 PGOUT 1 (15) 30 A PGIN 1 (40) 29 C Zone 1 / Zone 51 M B K2 PGOUT 2 (17) 34 A PGIN 2 (42) 33 C PGOUT 3 (19) 38 37 A PGIN 3 (44) PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) 42 41 A Zone 2 / Zone 6 M B K3 Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M B K4 Zone 4 / Zone 8 C M Paging Amp SPR (13) 26 PG Common (23) 46 Output 25 Input 600Ω SPT (38) Speaker Common Line C Output Input PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable Night Ringing and/or Page from KSU Backplane Optional Connection BGM Music Source (To External Speaker Only) 1. Zones 5~8 are available only to DK424 systems equipped with a RCTUE/F common control unit and more than one PIOU. Set zones 1~4 (first PIOU) with Program 03 Code 41, and zones 5~8 (second PIOU) with Program 03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not used). Notes ● ● ● See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options. Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines. The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. Figure 10-17 PIOU Zone, Page/BGM/Night Ring (Separate Amplifiers) Strata DK I&M 5/99 Zones Access Codes DK40i and DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/ BB, RCTUC/D) Access Codes DK424 (RCTUE/F equipment with a PIOU) All Call Page and External #39 #39 All Call Page #30 #30 1 #35 #351 2 #36 #352 3 #37 #353 4 #38 #354 5 Not Available #355 6 Not Available #356 7 Not Available #357 8 Not Available #358 1518 Peripheral Installation Music Amp RCTUE/F More than 1 PIOU 10-29 Peripheral Installation External Page Options Zone Paging with BGM (Multiple Amplifiers) DK40i and DK424 Only Provides multiple-zone paging capability (same as “External Page Option Installation” on Page 10-26) but separate amplifiers are used for each zone. ➤ To install zone and night ringing with multiple amplifiers 1. Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 10-18). 2. Connect the music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier outputs to “M” of the PIOU Relays K1~K4 and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 4. Connect the music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 5. Connect zone 1 through zone 4 speakers “A” terminal to the “B” contact of the PIOU relays K1~K4, respectively. 10-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation External Page Options MDF PIOU B K1 PGOUT 1 (15) 30 PGIN 1 (40) 29 66 Block Pin Numbers Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG A Zone 1 / Zone 5 C M PGOUT 2 (17) 34 PGIN 2 (42) 33 Output Input B K2 Amp 1 A Zone 2 / Zone 6 C M PGOUT 3 (19) 38 PGIN 3 (44) 37 Output Input B K3 Amp 2 A Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M Output Input B K4 Amp 3 A 42 PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) 41 Zone 4 / Zone 8 C M SPT (38) 25 SPR (13) 26 PG Common (23) 46 PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cables BGM Music Source & Amplifier ● ● See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options. Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines. The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. Figure 10-18 PIOU Zone Paging and Night Ringing with Multiple Amplifiers Strata DK I&M 5/99 Output C Zones 5~8 are available only to DK424 systems equipped with a RCTUE/F common control unit and more than one PIOU. Set zones 1~4 (first PIOU) with Program 03 Code 41, and zones 5~8 (second PIOU) with Program 03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not used). 1519 Zones Access Codes DK40i and DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/ BB, RCTUC/D) Access Codes DK424 (RCTUE/F equipment with a PIOU) All Call Page and External #39 #39 All Call Page #30 #30 1 #35 #351 2 #36 #352 3 #37 #353 4 #38 #354 Notes ● C Peripheral Installation 600Ω Output Input Night Ringing or Page from KSU Backplane Amp 4 5 Not Available #355 6 Not Available #356 7 Not Available #357 8 Not Available #358 More than 1 PIOU 10-31 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Night Ringing over Selected Page Zones In systems shared by 1~4 tenants, each tenant’s CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate PIOU external page zones. This feature can also be used in one-tenant systems. With shared systems, for example, Tenant 1’s night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while Tenant 2’s lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4. In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected zones. Note For DK424 only: any RCTU provides four tenants. Programming CO Lines to Ring Selected PIOU Page Zones Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, Tenant 1 through Tenant 4, that will night ring over PIOU external page zones. Program *15: Assigns CO lines to Tenant 1 through Tenant 4. Lines are initialized as Tenant 1. Note For DK424 only: RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenants, RCTUC/D and RCTU E/F provide four. Program 77-3: Assigns Tenant 1 through Tenant 4 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones. Program 39: Assigns appropriate 1LJKW7UDQVIHU and 7HQDQW3LFNXS (for Tenant or NonTenant systems) buttons to electronic and digital telephones. Note Any station can pick up CO lines that night ring over external page zones by pressing the [PDN] and dialing . PIOU Zone Paging Installation See “External Page Option Installation” on Page 10-26, paragraph 4 and Figure 10-17 for installation instructions. Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Customer-supplied two-way amplifiers can be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem (DISA, External Call Forward) and/or conference calls. Amplified Conference is not available for the DK14. DK40i Information Up to two amplifiers per Strata DK40i System can automatically connect to any two CO line conference. DK424 Information As many as four amplifiers (4-RCTUB, C/D, and /F; 3-RCTUA) can be installed to support up to four of these calls simultaneously. If three amplifiers are installed, three simultaneous calls can be supported. If all amplifiers are in use, then subsequent two-CO line tandem calls and/or conference calls will be unamplified. Each amplifier is connected to two designated PEKU station ports and will automatically be switched into a two-CO line connection established between any CO lines in the system. 10-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference Amplified Talk Path Figure 10-19 provides a functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified conference connection. (A tellabs 7206 amplifier is used here.) The talk path for the connection is as follows: outside party 1 – public telephone network – CO PCB, CKTX – RCTU – PEKU, port A – into AMP, Line in, – AMP, Line out – PEKU, port B – RCTU – CO PCB, CKTY – public telephone network – outside party 2. This path is two-way so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is amplified in the reverse direction. Note Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified to/from a system telephone when it is connected into a two-CO line conference. Amplifier Requirements ♦ Customer-supplied amplifier (two maximum for DK40i and four maximum for DK424). ♦ Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and must provide automatic gain control. ♦ Each amplifier requires two PEKU station ports. ♦ See the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier grounding instructions. ➤ To connect a two-way amplifier to the Strata DK system 1. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 2 on the designated PEKU PCB to one input of the customer-supplied two-way amplifier. In the example in Figure 10-19, this is CKTA (CO Side A) of the amplifier. (See the Amplified Two-CO Line Conference wiring diagram in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 3. Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117VAC (standard) wall outlet. 4. Set the gain and other amplifier parameter options per the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation. Amplifier Programming ♦ Program 10-1: LEDs 19 and 20 must be ON. ♦ Program 10-2: LED 18 must be ON. ♦ Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate PEKU PCB ports for amplifier connection. Only enable the ports that will be connected with the amplifier(s). ♦ Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO lines for Two-CO line tandem connection. Note ♦ Strata DK I&M Peripheral Installation 2. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port B) of circuit 3 on the designated PEKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier. In Figure 10-19, this is CKTB (subscriber side B) of the amplifier. LED 19 in Program 10-1 should be ON if it is certain that an amplifier will always be available for two-CO line conference connections (four maximum, simultaneously). If this LED is ON and a two-CO line connection is established without an external amplifier, the Strata DK424 station may be unbalanced and may receive a hum noise. LED 19 provides additional station amplification when external amplifiers are switched into two-CO line connections. Program 78-2: Enables appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. 5/99 10-33 Peripheral Installation Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference tellabs 7206 Amplifier (See Notes) Strata DK40i/DK424 CO PCB Outside Party 1 Outside Party 2 24AWG 25-Pair Cable PEKU PCM Conference Switch T CO Line R RCTU CKT, X MDF VT(2), P28/W-GN T TA VR(2), P3/GN-W R RA Port A DT(2) (CKT 2) Public Telephone Network Not Used DR(2) T CO Line R CKT, Y 24AWG Twisted Pair VT(3), P30/W-S T TB VR(3), P30/S-W R RB Port B DT(3) (CKT 3) Not Used DR(3) PEKU, PDKU, RDSU, RSTU, PESU, or PSTU Any CO line will be switched into the conference; see programming notes for tandem and/or DISA CO lines System Telephone that sets up 2-CO Line Conference Call Programming Notes 117VAC 60Hz • Program 10-3, circuit assignments: Program 10-3 PEKU Port Conf. Enable Button/LED PEKU Slot Position LED 01, ON 12 LED 02, ON 13 LED 03, ON 14 LED 04, ON 15 tellabs Power Adapter tellabs Case PEKU Port Number PEKU Circuit A = 009 B = 010 A = 017 B = 018 A = 025 B = 026 A = 033 B = 034 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 CKT2 CKT3 • Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20 ON. • Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection. • Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required. • Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19 ON. Duplex AC Plug Notes (Amplifier) • • • • All amplifier equipment is customer or dealer-supplied. Available in single and multiple configurations. For information regarding the tellabs 7206 two-way amplifier: http://www.tellabs.com 1(800) 445-6501 Install in accordance with tellabs technical manual Through Signalling Configuration. 4245 Figure 10-19 External Amplified Two-CO Line Call Functional Wiring Diagram 10-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options An SMDR printer or call accounting device may be connected to the system to provide a hardcopy record of station activity. The Strata DK system can record incoming, outgoing, and transferred calls, as well as Account Code entries and names and telephone numbers of answered DNIS, ANI, Caller ID, E911 and ISDN calls. Call record data is printed out at the completion of each eligible call. SMDR format is ASCII-formatted, 8-bits, no parity, 1-stop bit. To support the SMDR printer/call accounting device option, a Strata DK system must be equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS,...or ♦ For DK424 only, a RSIU/RSIS, PIOU, and PIOUS ♦ For DK40i only, TSIU ♦ For DK14 only, WSIU Connection of the printer or call accounting device to the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424), TSIU (DK40i), or WSIU (DK14) PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular cord (seven feet maximum) and a PPTC connector adapter (Figure 10-21, “PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections”). Note PIOU, PIOUS will be 300 or 1200 bps (see Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs); RSIU/RSIS (DK424), TSIU (DK40i) and WSIU (DK14) can be 1200~9600 bps (see Program 76). Note If PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424) or TSIU (DK40i) are assigned as SMDR simultaneously in programming, RSIU/RSIS or TSIU will operate as SMDR – not PIOU, PIOUS. A display of the customer database (Figure 10-22 on Page 10-41) can also be printed using the SMDR RS-232 port by running Program 97. Peripheral Installation The PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424), or TSIU (DK40i) contain a call record buffer which stores call record data (up to 50 calls) when the printed or call accounting device is turned OFF, or when no device is connected to the SMDR port. No further call records are stored after the buffer is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational, “ERROR BUFFER OVERFLOW” prints out to indicate the buffer was full, and that some call information may have been lost. To program SMDR, use Program 60. The SMDR port is active only on the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43), or the RSIU or RSIS Port programmed with code x2 in Program 76-1. SMDR sends out special names for the following types of calls: ♦ MSS – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls to stations. MSS prints only on DISA calls that are answered after the threshold time (set in Program 60-2). If the call is answered before the threshold time, the call will register as a normal incoming call and the MSS/transfer portion of the call will not print out. Note The call threshold time – the length of time that a call must be in progress before it is registered by SMDR – can be set for either 1.0 or 10 seconds in Program 60-2. ♦ MODM – Prints on calls to the RMDS or IMDU remote maintenance modem (Station #19). ♦ DISA – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls in which CO lines are accessed for trunk-to-trunk outside calling. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-35 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options Figure 10-20, “SMDR Output” shows a sample SMDR printout and describes the contents of each column. The following examples show call record samples and describe the sequence of events that generated the call records. If a subaddress for an call is received or sent on an ISDN call, it is included in the SMDR. Subaddresses may/may not be received/sent on all ISDN calls. 1 10 30 40 08:14 00:00;22 001 MODM 08:15 00:00;18 00;00 003 200D 08:16 00:00;28 00;08 003 DISA 08:16 00:00;15 001 DISA 08:17 00:00;25 003 MSS 08:18 00:00;12 003 205 08:19 00:00;22 003 202 205 50 60 205 80 90 100 110 120 DISA Call to IMDU Outgoing DISA Access by Incoming DISA 01 Incoming DISA and Access CO 03 Outgoing 205 Answers DISA Call 12 Seconds After DK Dial Tone 00;06 First Digit (varies) Last Digit (always this column) 08:19 00:00;16 500 08:20 00:00;34 1234567890123456789 003 C 200 200 08:22 00:00;22 7145933700 08:23 00:00;40 7145833700 F G First Digit Last Digit 1234567894563210 1993021977 K L 093772981 2890 205 4567897 123456987 sw 004 D 200 002 70 MM/DD/ YY, Every Fifty Call Records and at Midnight 11/06/97 001 * 20 A B C D E H I J M = Non-ISDN call established, then network disconnects. A = ISDN call established, then DK disconnects. + = ISDN call established, then network disconnects. S = Start of E911 call. E = End of E911 call.4 Field Number 1 A B CO Line Number (001~144). Field Number (2~4)3 C C = Caller ID Call; D = ANI or DNIS Call. Field Number 5 D [PDN] of the Station (1~4 digits)2 making/answering a call. Field Number (7~10)3 E Primary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/ answered the call (1~4 digits). Blank if call is made from a CO line button. Field Number (12-15)3 F Time of Day (HH:MM:SS).1 Field Number (17-21)3 G Call Duration (HH:MM:SS).1 Field Number (23-30)3 H CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS). Field Number (32-36)3 I Station to which the CO line was transferred (1~4 digits). Field Number (38-41)3 J Telephone Number ♦ Incoming (1~20 digits)5 ANI (10 digits), DNIS (2~5 digits), Caller ID Number or ID Code ♦ Outgoing Number (1~20 digits) ♦ E911 Station ID (Prg 12) Field Number (43-63)3 ANI/DNIS Format: 7145833730 3846 K DNIS NAME5 (0~16 characters); Caller ID Name5 (0~16 characters), or Account Code6 (4~15 digits); LCD User Name on E911 Calls Field Number (65~80)3 L Outgoing Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (82~101) M Incoming Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (103~122) Field Number (43~52) 1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 1 or 10 secs. (set by Program 60-2) to generate a call record printout. 2. “MSS”: designates a DISA or CF–External CO call to an unanswered station or answered after 1 or 10 secs. (threshold) per Program 60-2. The call registers as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time. DISA calls always register 5~6 seconds ring before answer duration time. 3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes. 4. A “*” in the first column indicates a disconnected call by the CO Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic Release signal. Loop start CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled before the CPC is dropped. 5. Answered calls ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data transmits using the SMDR port. Abandoned calls data is not transmitted, but can be stored in station memory. See Program *51 and *52. 6. See Program 60-1. 7. Strata DK sends a Carriage Return (CR) and Line Feed (LF) ASCII symbol after each line of data. General Notes The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit. Special dial printout: Tone = “T”, Long pause = “L”, Flash = “F”, Pause = “P” “DISA”: designates a DISA or CF–External call through the system via CO-to-CO connection. “MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem. Figure 10-20 SMDR Output 10-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options SMDR Printout Examples Note SMDR printout “time of day” and month/day/year (MM/DD/YY) is the same as the system clock time/date set by the station connected to Port 000. SMDR MM/DD/YY prints out each time 50 call records are generated and at midnight each day. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines Note DISA station calls print out as MSS or DISA. Example 1 – Ring, No Answer DISA Call Call Sequence A ♦ Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ♦ Line 003 returns internal dial tone to caller after one or two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller does nothing. DH 200 rings but is not answered. ♦ After 32 seconds, call is disconnected. ♦ Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59. Printout A (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;32 00;06 Printout A (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;25 00;05 Example 2 – DISA Internal Station Call Call Sequence B Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ♦ Line 003 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller dials 203. ♦ After 48 seconds from start of call, station 203 answers. ♦ Printout B prints after station 203 answers the call at 4:32. Note MSS will not print if the call is answered before the threshold time set in Program 60-2. Peripheral Installation ♦ Printout B (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203 Printout B (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203 Example 3 – DISA Outgoing CO Line Call Note DISA CO line calls print out as DISA. Call Sequence C Strata DK I&M ♦ Outside caller rings CO line 001. (Line 001 is programmed as DISA.) ♦ Line 001 returns intercom dial tone after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ♦ Caller dials #7003 to access CO line 003 (outgoing). ♦ Caller dials the DISA security code and receives CO dial tone. ♦ Caller dials the telephone number and converses when the call is answered. 5/99 10-37 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options ♦ Caller hangs up. ♦ The call releases, and Printout C prints after the call disconnects at 12:22. Notes ● ● If the CO provides the Calling Party Control or Auto Release (AR) signal (see Program 15-0 and 15-3), the call disconnects when either party hangs up. A “*” will follow the CO line number in Release 1 and 2 and precede the CO line number in Release 3 on the printout if the call is disconnected by the CPC or AR signal. If the CPC or AR signal is not sent, the CO lines will remain seized until the DISA disconnect timer releases the call (see Program 12). Printout C Auto Release signal: (Release 1 and 2) 003 MSS 12:20 00:00;02 00:06 (outgoing) 003* DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing) 001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming) Auto Release signal (Release 3 and above) 003 MSS 12:20 00:00;03 00:05 DISA (outgoing) *003 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing) 001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming) Disconnect Timer (Release 1 and 2) 001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming) 003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing) Disconnect Timer (Release 3 and above) 001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming) 003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing) Note 10-38 The “MSS” entry prints out only if the call was connected after the SMDR threshold, 1.0 or 10 seconds. The threshold is set in Program 60-2. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options SMDR Programming Program 03 ♦ The SMDR output is provided by the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest code assigned (41, 42, or 43). ♦ If using RSIU or RSIS PCB (DK424) in slot 11 for SMDR, set Program 03 code 49 for slot 11. Notes ● ● WSIU (DK14) and TSIU (DK40i) do not require a Program 03 slot assignment. RSIU/RSIS (DK424) Program 76-1 code x2 overrides PIOU/PIOUS SMDR assignments and code 49 for RSIU/RSIS. Program 60 ♦ Item 1: Selects Caller ID, ANI and DNIS or Account Code to be sent out the SMDR Port. ♦ Item 2: Selects the minimum duration (1.0 or 10 seconds) of calls that will be registered by SMDR. Any call that lasts less than the set time will not be recorded. ♦ Item 3: Selects the records of outgoing calls or outgoing and incoming calls to be printed. ♦ Item 4: Selects the digit length of Account Codes (4 to 15 digits). ♦ Item 5: Allows only long distance call records to be printed. ♦ Item 6: DISA security code. ♦ Item 7: Credit card calling digit length. ♦ If WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i), or RSIU/RSIS (DK424) is used to interface to the SMDR device use Program 76 to make the appropriate WSIU, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS SMDR programming assignments. SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation 1. Connect the interface cable and the PPTC or PPTC9 adapter from the WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i), PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424), or SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call accounting device DB25 or DB9 connector. (See Figure 10-21 and PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.) Peripheral Installation Program 76 2. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to the appropriate bps rate WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i) – 1200~9600 bps), (PIOU/PIOUS – 300 or 1200 bps, RSIU/RSIS (DK424) as determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device (Program 76 set WSIU/TSIU, RSIU/RSIS bps rate). 3. Set the printer or call accounting device to no parity/8-bits/one stop bit. 4. Use Program 60 to set the system for the required SMDR printer/call accounting device options (See the following section and the DK Strata Programming Manual). Note Strata DK I&M Only the PIOU/PIOUS with the lowest code in Program 03 (41, 42, or 43) or RSIU/RSIS with Program 76-1 code X2 will provide the SMDR output. 5/99 10-39 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options Basic Connection DK14, DK40i or DK424 WSIU or TSIU or RSIU or RSIS or PIOU or PIOUS DB25 or DB9 Plug 3-pair Modular Modular Cord (7 ft. max) Jack Printer SMDR Modular Jack or Call Accounting Device Data Format: • ASCII • 8-bits • No parity • 1-stop bit 50 ft. max 24 AWG Wire Twisted Pair Toshiba Modularized PPTC1A-5M (25 pin), PPTC-25F, or PPTC9 (9-pin) RS232, Modular Adapter Basic Wiring PIOU, SMDR Jack Modular Pin No. PPTC1A-5M Adapter Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No. RS-232 Lead Name 1 to 6 to 3 RD 2 to 5 to 2 TD 3 to 4 to 6 DSR 4 to 3 to 20 DTR 5 to 2 to 8 CD 6 to 1 to 7 SG 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS 4305 Figure 10-21 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections 10-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation System Database Printout Using SMDR Port System Database Printout Using SMDR Port If a printer is connected to the SMDR port, customer program information stored in the DK14, DK40i or DK424 RCTU RAM may be printed out for reference (see Figure 10-22). Program 97 Enables system program data to be printed via the SMDR port. See Program 97 record sheet. ♦ Notes An SMDR printer must be connected to the SMDR port to use the printout option selected by Program 97. ● Call record data is lost when program data is printed out with Program 97. ● Program Number Port Number ## System Programming ## 1: SELECT (LED ON) 40 3 1111111 1111111 1111111 3 32 1 111111 1 111111 1 111111 2 1 1 1 40 3 81 001-249 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 0000000 3 32 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 0 0 81 000 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 136 7 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 136 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 128 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 128 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 CO Line Numbers Lines 41 ~ 80 Lines 81 ~ 120 CO Line Numbers ## 1523 Figure 10-22 PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS SMDR Port Data Dump Example Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation ## END OF PRINT 5 24 1 111 1 111 1 111 111 144 5 24 0 000 0 000 0 000 000 144 10-41 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options Voice Mail Options Strata DK systems can support a Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, VP or customer-supplied voice mail system. Voice mail systems connect to standard telephone circuits (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/ RSTS, PSTU or PESU). The number of circuits required by each device depends on the customer’s voice mail requirements, such as the number of voice mail users. To support voice mail, DK14 KSU must have QCRU3 installed, DK40i KSU must have K4RCU3 or K5RCU installed and a DK424 RCTU must have an RRCS installed. Voice mail integration is provided by Strata in-band tones and/or on DK424 (only) the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) output of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS SMDI port. The PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU must be set with Program 03, code 43 or for RSIU/RSIS Program 03, code 49 and Program 76-1 with code x4 to provide SMDI output. See the SMDI section for more details about SMDI installation and operation. Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems Strata DK systems are designed to support the full range of features offered by the Toshiba Stratagy and/or VP systems. It provides various call routing, message handling, and information management features, including: ♦ Auto Attendant ♦ Call Forward to Voice Mailbox ♦ Message Waiting Indication ♦ Voice Mail Control from Digital and Electronic Telephones ♦ System Monitoring ♦ Feature Integration A block diagram of voice mail-to-QSTU2, KSTU2, -RSTU2, -RDSU/RSTS, or -PESU connection is shown in Figure 10-23, “Voice Mail Block Diagram”. Note The RRCS must be installed on the RCTU and K4RCU3 must be installed on the DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU to allow VM DTMF dialing. For installation procedures, see: 10-42 ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for QSTU2 ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KSTU2 ♦ Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs for RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options RCTU RRCS 4, 8, or 12 MDF DK14/DK40i Base KSU QRCU3 or K4RCU3 Voice Mail Machine QSTU2 (DK14), KSTU2 (DK40i) RSTU2/RSTU/PSTU (CKT 1~8) or PESU (CKT 1 & 2) or RDSU/RSTS (CKT 1~4) 25-Pin Cable (8 circuits per PSTU/RSTU, 2 or 4 circuits per RDSU/RSTS 2 circuits per PESU, 4 circuits per KSTU2) Standard Telephone Circuit Tip & Ring (1 Pair PerVM Port) 4306 Figure 10-23 Voice Mail Block Diagram Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or Toshiba VP Programming Answer (A) Tone The Strata DK stations send an answer tone to Stratagy or VP when the station answers a VP or Stratagy call. Disconnect (D) Tone Peripheral Installation Some features of Strata DK system programming were designed for Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP systems, and do not necessarily apply to customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. These programming features are: The Strata DK stations send a disconnect tone to Stratagy or VP when the station hangs up while connected to Stratagy or VP. [(D Tone is also sent to release the Stratagy or VP/Auto Attendant port when an outside loop start CO line caller hangs-up and the CO provides a Calling Party Control (CPC) or Auto Release (AR) disconnect signal per Program 15-0 and 15-3. Ground start CO lines will send “D” tone to VM ports anytime an outside caller hangs up.] Notes ● ● ● Strata DK I&M D Tone will not operate in all areas, because some COs fail to provide the CPC or AR signal on loop start lines. Both A and D Tones provide more efficient Stratagy or VP port use. Always enable these options. Both options are enabled by accessing Program 31, and setting LED 15 ON. The CPC or AR signal of some COs is not reliable and may occur during a CO line voice connection, causing the call to disconnect. If this occurs, disable CPC /AR Hold and CPC/AR Voice Mail calls on all CO loop start lines with Programs 15-0 and 15-3. 5/99 10-43 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options Recall (B) Tone Stations send a recall (B) tone to Stratagy or VP whenever Stratagy or VP answers a transfer (camp-on) recall from stations that did not answer a Stratagy or VP blind transfer. (The B tone notifies Stratagy or VP that the call is a recall and not a new call, allowing Stratagy or VP to respond with the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to operate, QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20 turned ON in Program 31. See “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” below for more information. Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems Strata DK systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. Depending on the voice mail system used, some of the features available with Toshiba Stratagy or VP (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 10-42) may be available with the customer-supplied system. General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming Voice mail (VM) QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU port programming is accomplished using Programs 31 and 10-2. (See Strata DK Programming Manual for more details.) VM programming features are as follows: VM Groups This feature groups VM QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU ports together so that message waiting set/cancel signals appear to originate from the lowest port in the VM group. All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set in the same VM group (Program 31, LEDs 05~08). The same ports set in the Program 31 VM group should also be set in the designated VM Distributed Hunt Group in Program *40. Message Waiting (MW) Set/Cancel If the VM machine has the ability to dial a code and the appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the message waiting LEDs on digital and electronic telephones, you can use Program 10-2, LED 04 to instruct the VM machine to set or cancel a MW LED. See the Strata DK Programming Manual for more information. Note Only dial codes and are set in the VM device configuration; the VM device dials the station number automatically to set/cancel the MW LED. No Conference VM Prevents undesired three-party connections during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set for No Conference (Program 31, LED 09). Privacy Override Deny Prevents stations from overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls (Program 31, LED 18). End-to-End Signaling Enables VM port DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for end-to-end signaling (Program 31, LED 17). Note 10-44 The RRCS -4, -8, or -12 must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU to enable Endto-End Signaling. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to station mailboxes. All VM ports should be set to receive auto ID code (Program 31, LED 16). Voice Mail Program Checklist Prior to Programming Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system parameters to “D” = Strata DK (any model). See Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP documentation for other parameter settings. Programming Strata DK for Voice Mail Program 92: Initialization clears voice mail auto dial codes. ♦ Program 03: Verifies that a RRCS is installed on the RCTU, K4RCU3 or K5RC4 is installed on the DK40i KSU, or the QRCU3 is installed in the DK14 to enable the VM device to send DTMF tones. Also sets PIOU, PIOUS (code 43) or RSIU/RSIS (code 49) to enable the SMDI port (see Program 76 if installing RSIU or RSIS SMDI port). ♦ Program 04: Assigns station Intercom or Directory numbers [DN] to VM ports (initialized numbers recommended). ♦ Program 05: First digit of special codes and (initialized numbers recommended). ♦ Program *09: Sets DID extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program 71 is not used. ♦ Program 10-1: If the system is first set for voice, program the VM device to dial the suffix “1” after station numbers. ♦ Program 10-2: If LED 04 ON for set/cancel operation and LED 06 ON for the VM to detect 80 millisecond tones. Also set DTMF Tone return or No DTMF return options (LED 11 and 20). ♦ Program 10-3: Sets SMDI options. ♦ Program 13: If the VM device is the message center, set the lowest standard telephone port in the Program 31 VM group as the message center. ♦ Program 31: Turn LEDs 04, and 15~20 ON, and LED 05, 06, 07 or 08 ON for the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP and Stratagy VM ports. Turn LED 09 ON for VM Auto Attendant “Supervised Transfer” operation; turn LED 09 OFF for VM Auto Attendant “blind transfer” operation and/or VM two CO-line tandem connection with release 3.2. Do not set these options for telephone station ports. Note A, D, and B Tones should be enabled only for VM devices that respond to these tones. ♦ Program *32: Sets lowest standard telephone port if the Program 31 VM group as message center for stations using VM. ♦ Program 33: Sets the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU ports that are connected to the VM ports to a hunting sequence, starting with the lowest port hunting to the next highest port, etc. The last hunt should be to an attendant station. Only use Program 33 if you ar not using Program *40 to set up a VMDA group. ♦ Program *34: Turns OFF LED 01 to disable camp-on BOV tone to a VM port. ♦ Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON for stations to receive the message waiting indication (flashing LED) from a VM device. This program also turns ON LED 03 for standard telephone ports that must support standard telephone message waiting lamps. It is Strata DK I&M Peripheral Installation ♦ 5/99 10-45 Peripheral Installation Voice Mail Options advisable to turn Busy Station Transfer (LED 20) ON for all VM/Auto Attendant ports, and to turn Busy Station Ringing (LED 19) ON for all stations that must never be detected as busy when called by the VM/Auto Attendant port. Also turn LED 03 OFF to disable standard telephone MW signal to VM ports. ♦ Program 36: Sets Fixed Call Forward to VM [DN] per customer requirements. ♦ Program 37: Sets the transfer recall timer for the VM ports to 11~999 seconds minimum to allow Call Forward-No Answer to work on VM transferred calls. Station users can individually set CF-NA ring time from 8~60 seconds. ♦ Program 39: Sets the VM-related buttons on the digital and electronic telephones that will be used to communicate with the VM device. ♦ Program *40: Sets VM standard ports into a Distributed Hunt Group (same ports set as Program 31 VM group). ♦ Program 71 (1-3): Sets tie/DID/DNIS extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program *09 is not used. ♦ Program 71-4: Sets the DNIS VM ID code (for Inband Integration only, not SMDI). ♦ Program 76: Sets RSIU RSIS or TSIU SMDI port. ♦ Programs 81~89: Verifies that the ringing assignments to the VM devices are set per customer requirements. ♦ Programs 16, 40, 41, 45~48 and 50~56: Verifies that outgoing CO line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM beeper notification feature to operate. Voice Mail System Installation 1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs. 2. Connect the VM system to the selected KSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU or PESU standard telephone port. (See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation or Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation.) 3. Program the Strata DK system for the required VM features. (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 10-42, paragraph 3 and “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 10-44.) 4. For DK424, ensure that an RRCS -4, -8 or -12 is installed on the RCTU, and verify that the RCTU code in Program 03 is for RRCS operation. ...or For DK40i, K4RU3 is installed on the KSU. For DK14, QRCU is installed. 5. Perform additional VM system programming as applicable (See customer-supplied installation/programming manuals). Note 10-46 Some VM devices may ring trip when called; in this case, set the square-wave ring voltage jumper to L (low position) on the PSTU2, KSTU2, PESU or PSTU2 PCB connected to the VM device. This is not necessary on RSTU2 and RDSU/RSTS PCBs because they have a sine-wave ring generator. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PC/Data Communications Interface Units The Strata DK supports two types of Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same digital station port and wire pair while communicating on a voice call. One unit, called the integrated DIU (RCPI-DI, PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2), becomes part of the digital telephone, replacing the telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small self-contained unit called the stand-alone DIU (PDIU-DS). Each RPCI or PDIU is powered by the digital port to which it is connected (see Figure 8-3 on Page 8-4 for wiring requirements). The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: Telephony Application Program Interface Mode (TAPI) or Data Communication mode. The RCPI operating mode is controlled by the PC connected to the RPCI-DI. This section only covers the RCPI-DI data communications mode. See the PC/DIU User Guide for information on changing the RPCI-DI mode. Notes ● ● “Digital Ports” include the PDKU and RDSU digital station ports. 2000-series digital telephones require RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 and 1000-series telephones require PDIU-DI and are not compatible with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2. Both RPCIs and DIUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS232 asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are divided into two categories: data communication equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE). Common DCE devices are modems and some printers; common DTE devices are personal computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers. When in the data communications modes, RPCIs and DIUs can function with DCE and DTE devices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However, keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC or terminal connected to a RPCI or DIU) is limited to 9600 bps. RPCI or DIU data transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the RPCI or DIU receives once it is in the command state; if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer (default) mode, the transmission speed is transparent and can be up to 19.2 kps. Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI operate like a DCE and connect directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232 cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate like a DCE device and connect to DTE devices. In most applications, DTE and DCE devices exchange data between each other via the standard RS-232 cable connection. To use the RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT commands, communications software or a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used. AT commands cannot be issued from the computer’s operating system prompt. 10-47 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI Dual Mode RPCI-DI can operate in the data communication or Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) mode. ♦ When in the Data Command mode, send the HEX (fØ), enter ALT (Hold) + 240 to the RPCI to switch it to the Data Communications mode. (Unplugging the telephone cord and then reconnecting it also resets the RPCI to the Data Communications mode.) ♦ When in the TAPI mode, send (ATCØ) to the RPCI to switch it to the Data Command mode. In the TAPI mode, a constant stream of data is sent from the RPCI to the PC COM port. ♦ RPCI-DI mode switching should be performed automatically by the application programs running on the PC connected to the RPCI-DI. (See Chapter 13 – Computer Telephony Integration for instructions on configuring your PC for TAPI software.) Common DIU Connections The block diagram in Figure 10-24 illustrates common RPCI and DIU data communications connections. In this example, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DIs are connected to PCs (PC1 and PC2), and PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial printer and modems. PC users can transfer files internally, print files on the same printer, and access the modem pool to send/receive data to/from an external personal computer or dial up data service. To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the RPCIs and DIUs. This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dial pad or from a PC keyboard using standard AT dial commands. RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DIs share the same intercom or [PDN]/ports with the digital telephone to which they are connected, while PDIU-DSs have their own. The intercom and data call LEDs on the digital telephone initiates a voice or data call, respectively. When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands, ATD is typed for voice calls, and ATDD for data calls. Installation instructions for these devices are provided, starting from “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIUDS SW1 DIP Switch Information” on Page 10-60 through “PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly” on Page 10-65. Call paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls are provided in “RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests” on Page 10-66, paragraph 2 through paragraph 6. Step-by-step data calling procedures are provided in the PC/Data Interface User Guide. 10-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Portable PC 1 Strata DK40i/DK424 KSU DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-2321 MDF 2 Digital (Port 000) Portable PC 2 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201) 1 RS-232 MDF2 Dial-up Computer Service Digital (Port 001) Serial Printer 2 MDF TOSHIBA Telephone Line X DIGITAL (Port 003) RS-2321 TOSHIBA DIU POWER READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (203) RS-2321 Line Z MDF2 RSTU2 PSTU RDSU RSTS (Port 008) Modem Public Telephone Network CO LINE 1 DIGITAL (Port 004) 1 RS-232 DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (204) Modem Pool Telephone Line Y 2 MDF Modem 1 (219) Standard Telephone RS-2321 RSTU2 PSTU RDSU RSTS (Port 009) Peripheral Installation MODEM (208) MDF Modem DIGITAL (Port 005) RS-2321 DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (205) Portable 2 PC 4307 1. RS-232 cable and connector information is provided in Figures 10-26 to 10-33. 2. See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation and Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for PC, data interface and modem MDF station wiring. Figure 10-24 DK Data Communications Installation Example Block Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-49 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units EIA Interface Leads (Signals) Both DIUs operate with 10 standard EIA RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data is transmitted and received. RPCIs and DIUs connect to serial data devices with standard RS-232 cables, available from telephone supply stores (see Figures 10-24~10-29 and 10-31). The RPCIDI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS requires 10 signals for some applications, but can function with eight using modular cords and connectors with RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If uncertain which signals are necessary for an application, all 10 should be connected. See Figure 10-33, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information” for more information. Important! ♦ The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI is always a DCE device; the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE, depending on how its internal jumpers (1~9) are configured. ♦ In the descriptions below, when a signal is ON, its potential is about seven volts positive relative to signal ground (pin 7); when a signal is OFF, it is about 7 volts negative relative to the signal ground (pin 7). Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1) The FG signal (EIA circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which is bonded to the PDIU-DI/ PDIU-DS PCB. If required by local codes, the FG should be connected to external ground. Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7) The SG signal (EIA circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and data device signals and must be wired for all applications. Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2) DTE devices transmit and DCE devices receive data on the TD lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and DTR signals (all discussed below) must be ON. The TD signal is OFF in the idle state. Receive Data (RD, Pin 3) The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead (EIA circuit BB); the DTE receives data on the RD. Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4) Some DTE devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to the DCE device when they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch SW1-4 should be set ON to inform the RPCI or DIU. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these cases DIP switch SW1-4 should be OFF. 10-50 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5) The DCE device sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to the line side. The DCE device sends this signal only when it receives the RTS signal from the DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control; in these cases, DIP switch SW1-4 should be OFF. Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6) When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal (EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set ON, DSR will be ON continuously; if the switch is set OFF, DSR follows DTR (if DSR is ON, DTR is ON, etc.) SW1-2 should be OFF in most cases. Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8) The DCE device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when receiving the carrier signal on the line side. Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE devices require that the DCD be ON. If the carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE notifies the DTE device by an OFF condition with the DCD signal. The PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set ON to set the DCD ON continuously. If set OFF, the DCD signal will only be ON when connection between two DIUs is established and OFF when a connection is not established. SW12 is set OFF when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR signals for Ready/Busy flow control. Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20) Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22) The RI signal (EIA circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device. Whenever the DCE device receives a ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI signal ON. If RPCI or DIU DIP switch SW1-3 is set ON, the RI signal will be continuously ON if ringing; if the switch is set OFF, the RI signal will be one second ON/three seconds OFF when the RPCI or DIU detects ringing signal. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation The DTE device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to open the communication line. The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE device quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to transmit or receive data. DIP switch SW1-2 should be set OFF in most cases. 10-51 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Functions like a DCE) Personal Computer or Toshiba Portable (DTE) Pin Designations COM Port Pin # Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pin Designations 7 8 PDIU-DI Pin # 9 DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Name Rear view of asynchronous (serial) communication interface connector (DB9) of PC or Toshiba Portable. DB9 Female Connector DB9 Male Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Female Connector DB25 Male Connector 22 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB9 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 1 DCD 8 2 RD 3 3 TD 2 4 DTR 20 5 SG 7 6 DSR 6 7 RTS 4 8 CTS 5 9 RI 22 PC modem style (serial) DB25 to DB9, RS-232 cable. Pin to pin connections are confiqured as a straight cable, not as a null modem cable (50 ft max, 24AWG; customersupplied). Notes • • Some RS-232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers. The computer receives data on Pin 2 (RD) and sends data on Pin 3 (TD). 1527 Figure 10-25 RPCI-DI to 25-Pin to 9-Pin COM Port 10-52 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DI Pin # Name 1 Personal Computer or ASCII Terminal (Functions like a DTE) RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Functions like a DCE) DB25 Pin Designations DB25 Pin Designations 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of personal computer or ASCII terminal DB25, RS-232 connector PDIU-DI Pin # 22 RI 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Name Rear view of RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector DB25 Male Connector 6 RI DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 22 20 20 22 22 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Female Connector DB25 Male Connector Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 Note The PC/ASCII terminal 5 CTS 5 receives data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on Pin 2 (TD). 22 RI 22 1 FG 1 Peripheral Installation DB25 Pin # RS-232 Cable PC modem style (serial) DB25 to DB25 (M/F) RS-232 cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG, customer -supplied). 1528 Figure 10-26 RPCI-DI/PDIU/PDIU-DS to 25-Pin to 25-Pin COM Port Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-53 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Configured in the "Connect to DTE" Mode: P1 ~ P9 = A-B SO PDIU Functions like a DCE) Toshiba Serial Printer (Functions like a DTE) DB25 Pin Designations Printer Pin # Name 1 2 3 4 5 FG TD RD RTS N/C 6 22 20 8 DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of printer or ASCII terminal DB25, RS-232 connector. 8 7 6 7 DB25 Pin Designations PDIU-DS Pin # 22 RI 1 2 3 4 5 Name Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232 female connector DB25 Female Connector 6 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR 4 3 2 1 RI DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 22 20 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Male Connector DB25 Male Connector DB25 Pin # Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 N/C CTS 5 N/C RI 22 1 FG 1 RS-232 Cable Notes • • The printer receives data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on Pin 2 (TD). The PDIU-DS should be in the connect-to-DTE mode (P1 ~ P9 are strapped A-B), so that it transmits data on Pin 3 (RD) and receives data on Pin 2 (TD). (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied). 1529 Figure 10-27 PDIU-DS to Toshiba Printer, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections 10-54 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Configured in the "Connect to Modem" Mode, P1 ~ P9 = B-C, So it functions like a DTE) Hayes-Compatible Smart Modem (Functions like a DCE) Modem Pin # Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR Rear view of modem DB25 connector 22 PDIU-DS Pin# RI Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 22 RI Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector DB25 Female Connector DB25 Female Connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 20 22 20 22 20 22 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Male Connector DB25 Male Connector Name DB25 Pin # 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 TD 2 RS-232 Cable (Open) 20 7 DTR 20 SG 7 (Open) 6 DSR 6 (50 ft. max., 24 AWG, customer-supplied) 4 RTS 4 For PDIU-DS port: 5 CTS 5 22 RI 22 1 FG 1 Program 20: LEDs 01, 04, 17 ON. All other LEDs OFF. LED 02 should be set ON after the AT commands Peripheral Installation DB25 Pin # 2 The following commands should be sent to the modem: ATS0=1: Auto Answer ATE0: Disable character echo in command state ATQ0: Modem returns result codes AT&C1: Track presence of data carrier AT&D2: Hang up and assume command state with DTR on to off transition 8 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR 1530 Notes ● ● ● ● Modem receives data on pin 2 (TD) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD). The PDIU-DS must be in the Connect to Modem mode (P1~P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits data on pin 2 (TD) and receives data on pin 3 (RD). For the above cable modifications, modem AT commands, and Program 20 settings are required for proper call release when modems disconnect. With this configuration, the PDIU-DS “READY” light will not light until modems at both ends establish communication (DCD is detected) See “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation”, paragraph 3 for more details. Figure 10-28 PDIU-DS to Hayes-Type Smart Modem, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-55 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Connection Example 1 Digital Telephone PDIU-DI Base or RPCI-DI Base Personal Computer (PC) or Toshiba Portable 1 Type 1 Modular Adapter 1 Type B Modular Cord (Crossed) (50 ft max, 24AWG) 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal Connection Example 2 Personal Computer (PC) Digital Telephone PDIU-DI Base or RPCI-DI Base 1 Type 3 Modular Adapter 1 Type A Modular Cord (Straight) (50 ft max, 24AWG) 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal Connection Example 3 Stand-Alone DIU PDIU-DS Toshiba P321SL or Similar Standard Type Serial Printer 1 Type 2 Modular Adapter 1 Type A Modular Cord (50 ft max, 24AWG) Type 2 Modular Adapter 4333 1. See Figure 10-31 for detailed pin-out information of modular cords and adapters. Notes ● ● ● ● Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (auto-dialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is normally required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figure 10-24 on Page 10-49 and Figure 10-27 on Page 10-54). In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (P1 ~ P9, strapped A-B). All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied. Figure 10-30 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cable/RJ-45 Adapter Connections 10-56 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Type 1 RJ45 TO DB9 (Female) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 N/C RJ45 DSR RTS RD DCD TD GND CTS RI 6 7 2 1 3 5 8 9 Lead Name DB9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 TYPE 2 RJ45 TO DB25 (Male) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N/C RJ45 Lead Name DB25 CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 2 1 N/C RJ45 Lead Name DB25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 TYPE 3 RJ45 TO DB25 (Female) Adapter 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 Peripheral Installation 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 RJ45 Straight Through Front 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYPE A RJ45 Flat Modular Cord (Straight) 1 Front 1 RJ45 Cross Pinning Front TYPE B RJ45 Flat Modular Cord (Crossed) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 Front 8 Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer-supplied) 1 1532 Figure 10-31 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cords and RJ-45/RS-232 Adapter Pin Connections Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-57 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units PDIU-DS (Front View) PDIU-DS (Rear View) Modular jack for connecting 1- or 2-pair to digital circuit DIU READY CONNECT 1234 DNTA ON POWER Connect LED Ready LED Power LED SW1: See Notes for Switch Options A-B B-C See Notes DTE MODEM RTS RD TD FG CTS DSR SG DCD Perception 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P5 P1 P2 P7 P4 P3 P6 P8 P9 ABC 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 RI DTR P1 ~ P9 located on PCB inside of PDIU-DS Unit (see Notes). RS-232, DB25 (Female) Connector Signal Direction and Function of P1 ~ P9 PDIU-DS Connected to DTE Signal Abbreviation Signal Name/ Function PDIU-DS Pin NO. Signal Direction Function: A-B (DTE Mode) PDIU-DS Connected to DCE Function: B-C (Modem Mode) Signal Direction FG Frame Ground 1 SG Signal Ground 7 TD Transmit DATA 2 DTE DIU P1 Modem DIU P1 RD Receive DATA 3 DTE DIU P2 Modem DIU P2 RTS Request to Send 4 DTE DIU P6 Modem DIU P6 CTS Clear to Send 5 DTE DIU P7/P5 Modem DIU P7/P5 DSR Data Set Ready 6 DTE DIU P4 Modem DIU P4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 20 DTE DIU P3 Modem DIU P3 DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DTE DIU P8 Modem DIU P8 RI Ring Indicator 22 DTE DIU P9 Modem DIU P9 1533 Notes ● Mode select (P1~P9) “A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE). ● Mode select (P1~P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE). ● Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU-DS in Strata DK Systems. ● ● See Figure 10-33 for SW1~4 DIP switch options and Figure 10-34, “DK PDIU-DS Disassembly/Assembly Diagram” to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DS. Some RS-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer. Figure 10-32 PDIU-DS Jumper Plug Options/RS-232 Connector Information 10-58 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units DIP Switch Options The RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a four-control DIP switch which can be configured for signaling options. The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the back panel of the PDIU-DS (see Figure 10-33). SW1-1 Normally, this switch is set ON to disconnect devices from RPCIs or DIUs automatically. The connection is maintained if data is exchanged between the device and the RPCI or DIU within eight to nine minute intervals. If SW1-1 is OFF on the called and calling DIU, data calls will remain connected until released manually. SW1-2 This switch is placed in the ON position when the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR ON continuously. If SW1-2 is OFF, DSR follows DTR and DCD will be ON only when the DIU is connected on a data call to another DIU. SW1-2 should be OFF on a RPCI DIU when it is connected to a personal computer that uses a communications software program to establish data calls with AT commands; and whenever PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. SW1-3 The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal to the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the RPCI or PDIU is receiving an incoming call. SW1-3 should be ON for the DIU to send RI steady, and OFF to send at one second ON/three seconds OFF intervals. This switch is placed in the ON position if the computer does not output the RTS signal or when connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal (modem set with AT&C1). Sometimes, the DTE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SW1-4 should be OFF. In this case the DCD signal of the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the called DTE and the DCD signal of the called DTE is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In this case a signal which stops the DTE from transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should be cross-connected to the RPCI’s or DIU’s DCD signal. Consult the DTE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. If the DIU-DS is connected to a modem that tracks carrier detect (AT&C1) SW1-4 should be ON. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation SW1-4 10-59 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units OFF DIP Switch 1234 RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Bottom View) Access from Bottom — Outside of PDIU-DI DIP Switch SW1 Back View (Access from Back — Outside of PDIU-DS) 1234 DNTA Directory Tray: Remove from original Telephone Base and Install on PDIU-DI Base DB25 Connector (Female) For DTE or DCE RS-232 Cable Connection ON PDIU-DS (Rear View) Modular Connector for Digital Port Connection PDIU-DI Digital Telephone Base PDIU-DI and -DS SW1 DIP Switch (1 ~ 4) Functions General Notes • • • • See Subsection “EIA Interface Leads (Signals)” and “DIP Switch Options” for more details regarding SW1 option settings. When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal (AT&C1) SW1(4) must be ON. If using Toshiba Personal Computers and Toshiba Printers using X-ON/XOFF flow control, set SW1(4) ON on PDIU-DIs and -DSs. SW1(2) should be off when PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. Switch Function Initial Position SW1 (1) Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 8 to 9 minutes On: enable (auto-disconnect)1 Off: disable OFF SW1 (2) DCD, DSR control On: continuous on Off: DSR depends on DTR (DCD is on during communication state) OFF SW1 (3) RI control On: RI is on continuously during ringing state Off: RI is 1 sec ON/3 sec OFF during ringing state OFF SW1 (4) RTS control ON: DTE doesn't have RTS signal Off: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD) OFF 1534 1. RPCI or DIU port must have LED 02 ON in Program 20 to enable auto disconnect. Figure 10-33 RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information 10-60 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI to PC Installation The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead (RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead (TD). Most personal computers function as a DTE device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead. Note The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device using a specially configured RS-232 cable or adapter; but this application is rarely required. ➤ To install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to a DTE device, PC, or ASCII terminal 1. Install the digital telephone that is to be equipped with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI per the instructions in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus and the drawing in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 2. Install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI under the digital telephone per the instructions in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus. Note The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIUDS, it has no internal jumpers. 3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI’s DB-25 female connector and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector (COM port). Important! 4. Set the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. See Figure 10-33, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information”. RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI Programming Peripheral Installation Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communication port interface documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer. The number of EIA RS-232 signals required (8, 9, or 10 wires) depends on the application. When EIA signal requirements are not known, connect the 10 EIA signals listed in “EIA Interface Leads (Signals)” on Page 10-50. Figures 10-33 and 10-31 provide diagrams for connecting RS-232 cables between PDIU-DIs and PCs/ Toshiba portables. Configure the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI for DTE-type connection in Program 20 and the data button assignments of the digital telephone connected to the PDIU-DI in Program 39. ♦ Strata DK I&M Program 20 ♦ The port number entered for the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI in Program 20 is the port number of the digital telephone to which the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI is connected. ♦ LED 01: Should always be ON for RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI ports. ♦ LED 02: Should be ON for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports, unless the PC user will never uses RPCI or DIU AT commands (other than ATDD, ATDT, and ATD) and never requires the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to send result codes to display on the PC display screen. Frequently, it is difficult to determine the full extent of these requirements; so Toshiba recommends turning LED 02 ON. See the PC/Data Interface User Guide for DIU AT commands and result codes. ♦ LEDs 03 and 04: Should be OFF for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports. 5/99 10-61 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ ♦ LED 05: Should be ON if the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access codes to make external calls or to insert a pause following RPCI DIU access of an outside line. ♦ LED 10: Enables Caller ID and ANI information to be sent from RCPI-DI to the connected PC. ♦ LED 11: Enables DNIS information to be sent from the RCPI-DI to the connected PC. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Used to establish data security groups. RPCI and PDIU stations are only allowed to make calls to RPCI and PDIUs in the same assigned data group. Program 39: The following data call buttons can be assigned digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs: 'DWD&DOO, and 0RGHP. Assign 6' buttons to data devices as required. Do not assign '66 buttons to data devices; '66 buttons are used for voice calls only. PDIU-DS to Printer Installation Strata DK enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connected to stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DSs). Digital telephones equipped with RPCI or PDIU-DIs can share access to these printers. Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the vendor; the PDIU-DS can be connected to either type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device.) ➤ To connect the PDIU-DS to a serial printer Notes ● ● Only serial printers (not parallel) that conform to EIA RS-232 signaling requirements can be connected to PDIU-DSs. In rare applications, it may be desired to connect printers to PDIU-DIs. See the printer’s installation instructions. 1. Consult the serial printer’s documentation and determine if the printer operates as a DCE or DTE device. Also, see Figures 10-32 and 10-34. If the printer is a DCE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and configure it to operate like a DTE device by placing the jumper plugs (P1~P9) in the “B-C” (MODEM) position. Reassemble the PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom label for future reference. If the printer is a DTE device: You may not need to disassemble the PDIU-DS, since it comes factory-direct configured as a DCE device. However, if uncertain, disassemble the PDIU-DS and verify that jumper plugs (P1~P9) are in the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble the PDIUDS and mark “A-B” on the bottom label for future reference. 2. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus. 3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Figures 10-27 and 10-30 for an example printer cable connection). 4. If Steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS light when the printer is turned on and ready. 5. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the application. See Figure 10-33 for DIP switch locations. Note 10-62 If using Toshiba computers and printers with X-ON/X-OFF flow control, set SW1-(4) “ON” on the DIU connected to the computer and DIU connected to the printer. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Important! Check the printer’s serial documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The requirements vary with each manufacturer. PDIU-DS Programming ♦ ♦ Program 20: Configures the PDIU-DS to connect to a serial printer (see Strata DK Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets). ♦ LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 02: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. ♦ LED 03: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type printers. ♦ LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 05: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to enable or disable digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access to PDIU-DS ports connected to a printer. DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group. Program 22: Configures PDIU-DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS connected to the same printer/server. PDIU-DS to Modem Installation Strata DK enables asynchronous-type (not synchronous) modems to be connected to PDIU-DSs. This enables RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI equipped digital telephones that are connected to personal computers, terminals, and other devices to share access to a modem or modem pool. Important! A modem(s) can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIU-DSs that are connected to them must be configured to operate like a DTE device. In the example shown in Figure 10-24 on Page 10-49, the line side of the two modems are connected to RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU, or PESU ports to establish a modem pool; however, the line side of modems can be connected directly to a dedicated CO line. Peripheral Installation Modems must be “smart modems” that respond to AT commands and return result codes. Modems are customer-supplied. If modems are connected directly to telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of CO line voice calls to system modems (data call) do not function as described in the PC/Data Interface User Guide. For efficient operation and the best use of CO lines and modems, Toshiba recommends configuring modems to RSTU2, PSTU or RDSU/RSTS standard station ports in a modem pool. The RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU-DS with standard RS-232 cables; the PDIUDS line side (RJ-11 connector) always connects to its own individual digital port. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-63 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ➤ To configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device 1. Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper plugs P1~P9 in the “B-C” position (MODEM). 2. Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future reference. (See Figures 10-32 and 10-33.) ➤ To install modems to PDIU-DSs 1. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 2. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure 10-29, “PDIU-DS to Hayes-Type Smart Modem, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections” shows an example PDIU-DS to “smart modem” RS-232 connection. Important! All 10 PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should be connected to the modem. Consult the modem’s documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; the requirements may vary with each manufacturer. 3. Connect the line side of the modem to a RDSU/RSTS, RSTUS2, or PESU standard telephone circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult the modem’s documentation to install it to a CO line). Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring provides station port wiring information. 4. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. (See Figures 10-32 and 10-33.) Note If the modem tracks carrier detect (DCD, AT&C1), SW1(4) should be ON, and SW1(2) should be OFF when PDIU-DS is connected to a modem. 5. Configure the PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous modem using Programs 20, 21, 22, 31 and 33. PDIU-DS Programming Note ♦ 10-64 See the Strata DK Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets. Program 20 ♦ LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIU-DS ports ♦ LED 02: Should be ON for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems, enabling the use of AT commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to modems connected to PDIU-DSs. ♦ LED 03: Should be set ON for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems. ♦ LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIU-DS ports. ♦ LED 05: Should be OFF if the system is installed behind a PBX/Centrex that uses access codes to place outgoing trunk calls. ♦ LED 06: Should be OFF for DIUs connected to modems. The modem cable must be modified per Figure 10-29 or Figure 10-38, or the PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs must be set per the instructions in the DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide. ♦ LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a modem. DIU stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ Program 21: For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign the digital, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU ports that will be connected to the PDIU-DS and modem, respectively. ♦ Program 22/33: If more than one modem/PDIU-DS pair is configured as a system modem pool, the PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each other in Program 22. The modem RSTU, PSTU, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports should be set to hunt each other in Program 33. ♦ Program 31: LED 18 should be turned ON for all RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU station ports that are connected to modems. This provides data security by preventing executive or privacy override of modem calls. Modem Setup Recommendations 1. Always make sure the escape sequence of the telephone PDIU-DI is default (+++). 2. Send AT command ATS2=43 to PDIU-DI. 3. Use a modified modem cable for the connection (see Figures 10-29 and 10-38) or reset the PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs per the instructions in the DK Admin User Guide. 4. Send the following AT commands to the modem pool modem: ATS0=1, ATE0, ATQ0, AT&C1, and AT&D2. PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly To set the jumper plugs (P1~P9) on the PCB inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the PDIU-DS must be disassembled. ➤ To disassemble the PDIU-DS 2. Remove the bottom panel. 3. Remove the PCB inside the PDIU-DS by lifting the back panel from its side grooves. 4. Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs (P1~P9): ♦ If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE, set the plugs to the “A-B” position. ♦ If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE device, set the plugs to the “B-C” position. Note Peripheral Installation 1. Remove the four non-captive screws on the bottom of the unit (Figure 10-34); these screws are needed in Step 3 of the assembling procedure. Do not cut PDIU-DS PERCEPTION jumper wire for Strata DK installations. ➤ To assemble the PDIU-DS 1. Position the back panel to the PCB (Figure 10-34). 2. Slide the back panel down into its side grooves. 3. Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the four non-captive screws. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-65 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Side Grooves W3 Ex. Power Perception W1 W2 DTE/Modem Jumper Plugs P1~P9 SW1 PDIU-DS PCB Bottom Panel 1535 Notes ● ● Do not cut the Perception jumper wire for Strata DK installation. Jumper wire is for Perception applications only. Figure 10-34 DK PDIU-DS Disassembly/Assembly Diagram RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests The following material provides tests for five RCPI/DIU data call applications: ♦ PC-to-PC ♦ PC-to-Printer ♦ Internal PC-to-External PC ♦ External PC-to-Internal PC ♦ PC Auto Dial Voice Call These test routines only check the data communications mode of the RPCI-DI; they do not check the RPCI-DI API mode. The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided as an example. When performing the test, use the appropriate port and telephone numbers for the system. 10-66 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Each of these tests can be conducted with manual dialing from a digital telephone’s dial pad or AT dialing from a personal computer’s keyboard; however, only the preferred method of dialing for application is presented. PC-to-PC Test with AT Commands See Figure 10-35, “DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands” for additional information. Note 1. Set RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Ports 000 and 01. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 39: Ports 000 and 01. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Registers. 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with communications software and that the parameters of each PC and its communication software are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). If using an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. Note 3. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD201 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters). The data call LEDs light on DKT 200 and 201. ♦ PC 1 displays: CONNECT XXXX. ♦ PC 2 displays: RING. PDIU-DIs or RPCI-DIs are now in the communication mode. Typing from the PC 1 keyboard appears on the PC 2 monitor and vice versa. Note Peripheral Installation ♦ ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. ...or 1. Type XXX from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. XXX = PDIU-DI escape sequence (see “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation” on Page 10-63). 2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 3. PC 1 and PC 2 screens display, NO CARRIER. The data call LEDs on each DKT are OFF. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-67 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Portable PC 1 Strata DK RS-232 MDF DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200 ) Digital (Port 000) Portable PC 2 RS-232 MDF DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201 ) Digital (Port 001) 1536 Figure 10-35 DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands PC-to-Printer Test using Manual Dialing Note See Figure 10-36 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 20: Port 003. LEDs 01, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Registers. 2. Make sure the PC is configured to print data from its serial port (the PC COM port connected to DKT/PDIU-DI or DKT/RPCI-DI port 001). This is normally accomplished using the DOS MODE commands. Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX f0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. 3. Using the manufacturer’s documentation, make sure the communication parameters (data speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of the PC COM port match the printer’s serial interface parameters. 10-68 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ➤ To connect the PC to the printer ➤ Press 'DWD&DOO + on the DKT. CONNECT on the PDIU-DS lights. The connection between the PC and the printer is completed, as shown in Figure 10-36. (PDIU-DS 203 is in the communication mode). Note If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the connection is not complete; press 'DWD5HOHDVH and Step 3 again. Operate the PC to print data as required. Portable PC Strata DK RS-232 MDF DKT/PDIU-DI (201) Serial Printer A TOSHIB RS-232 Digital (Port 001) MDF Digital (Port 003) DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT PDIU-DS (203) Figure 10-36 DK PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual Dialing ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. Peripheral Installation 1537 Internal PC-to-External PC Test using AT Commands Note See Figure 10-37 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 21: Digital port 004 assigned with KSTU port 008. ♦ Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456), 'DWD5HOHDVH(454), and 0RGHP (455) buttons should be provided. ♦ Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS S-Registers. 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.). Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-69 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Note With an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the data communication mode before proceeding with Step 3. 3. To place the RPCI into the data communication mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock ON, and hold the Alt key down while typing 240 (this is HEX F0). If the RPCI is in data communication mode, ATC0 switches back to TAPI mode. 4. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD204 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters). ♦ The data call LED on DKT 204 is ON. ♦ The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 204 is ON. ♦ The screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. 5. The PC 1 and PDIU-DS 204 are connected (PDIU-DS 204 is in the communication mode). PC 1 is now linked directly to the RS-232 side of the internal modem and can issue AT commands to the internal modem, which is now in the command mode. Note If Digital/PDIU-DS port 004 is the only DIU port connected to the modem (Program 20, LED 03 ON), the Modem LEDs on all DKTs is ON. 6. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDT#70016744700 and press Enter. ♦ The internal modem (208) goes off-hook, dials #7001 to seize the CO line, and then dials the external modem’s telephone number (674-4700). ♦ The external modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. ♦ If the modems send result codes, the screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. 7. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines above, to exchange data (file transfers, type messages, etc.). ➤ To terminate the call 1. Press the telephone 'DWD5HOHDVHbutton. 2. Type +++ from PC2 keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. 3. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 2. 10-70 ♦ PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. ♦ The data call LED on DKT 200 will turn OFF. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units 583-3700 Strata DK MDF Internal Modem (208) QSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU or PSTU (Port 008) MDF Public Telephone Network CO Line 1 Telephone 555-5555 Digital (Port 004) RS-232 (Modified) DIU POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT RS-232 PDIU-DS (204) External Modem (Auto Answer) Portable PC 1 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-232 Portable PC 2 Digital (Port 000) MDF 1538 External PC-to-Internal PC Test See Figure 10-38 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. ♦ Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be provided. ♦ Internal modem: set the following AT commands: Auto answer (ATS0=1), disable character echo in the command state (ATE0), modem returns result codes (ATQ0), presence of data carrier (AT&C1), hang up and assume command state with DTR on-tooff transition (AT&D2). ♦ Settings for PDIU-DS: rear panel switches 1, 2 and 4 ON; internal jumpers P1-P9 set to BC position. Peripheral Installation Figure 10-37 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands 2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.) Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-71 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode. 3. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDT5833700 and press Enter. ♦ The external modem originates the call to internal modem. ♦ The internal modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications. The ready light on the PDIU-DS turns ON. ♦ If the modems send result codes, the PC’s screens display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communications software. 4. The PC 2 is connected to PDIU-DS (204), as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 204 is in the command mode). PC 2 can now issue AT commands to PDIU-DS 204. 5. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDD200 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (204) to dial and connect to PDIU-DI (200). ♦ The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS (204) is ON; the Data Call LED on DKT 200 is also ON. ♦ The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. 6. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines, to exchange data (file transfers, typed messages, etc.). ➤ To terminate the call ➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button. ...or 1. Type +++ from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK. 2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 5 above. 10-72 ♦ PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER. ♦ The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will turn OFF. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units RS232 Cable Modification (See Figure 10-29) PDIU-DS 2 3 4 Jumper Wire 5 6 7 MDF 8 20 Internal Modem (208) DIU (RS-232 Cable See Figure 10-28) POWER TOSHIBA READY CONNECT TD RD RTS CTS DSR Open SG DCD Open DTR Modem 2 Jumper Wire 3 4 5 6 7 583-3700 8 20 Public Telephone Network Strata DK Digital (Port 004) PDIU-DS (204) Telephone Line 555-5555 RS-232 External Modem SW 2, 4 on P1-P9 (B-C) Portable PC 1 MDF DKT/PDIU-DI (200) RS-232 Portable PC 2 Digital (Port 000) Notes ● ● When a PDIU-DS is connected with modified RS-232 cable, the READY LED will not light until the External and Internal modem establish carrier detect. See “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation”, paragraph three and Figure 10-29 for more details. Figure 10-38 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using Direct CO Line Connection Peripheral Installation 1539 PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test There are many off-the-shelf, Windows compatible, desktop organizer software packages that provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the terminal resident Starfish Sidekick ®. It is used in this section for test explanation purposes only. If you choose another auto dialer software package, the detailed response may be different than that shown here. ➤ To test a PC auto dial voice call Note See Figure 10-39 for additional information. 1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming. ♦ Strata DK I&M Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF. 5/99 10-73 Peripheral Installation PC/Data Communications Interface Units ♦ Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (556) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (554) buttons are optional. If the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial application, the 'DWD&DOO and 'DWD 5HOHDVH buttons are unnecessary. 2. Make sure that the auto dial application software is installed on the PC root directory and that the communication parameters of the PC and application software are set to the same values. Note If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the API mode. 3. Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to auto dial is installed within the application software (include the appropriate Strata CO line access code prefixing each telephone number). ➤ To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC keyboard 1. Press the Alt and Ctrl keys simultaneously. The PC screen displays the Sidekick menu window. 2. Press F5 twice (Sidekick prompts “search for INITIALS:” to display on the PC’s screen). 3. Type the initials or name of the person or organization you wish to auto dial. 4. Press Enter. Sidekick finds and highlights the desired name/number. 5. Press Enter again. ♦ DKT/PDIU-DI 201 seizes the CO line and auto dials the selected telephone number. ♦ The LEDs of the DKT’s Data Call and CO line 001 buttons are ON (if assigned in Program 39). ♦ Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback or busy tones are audible from the DKT’s speaker. 6. Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time after the phone number is dialed. Press the Spacebar to release the 'DWD&DOO button, or remain on-hook and use the DKT’s speakerphone. Note Speakerphone model only: pressing the Spacebar when using the speakerphone feature disconnects the call. ➤ To terminate the call anytime 1. If off-hook, press the Spacebar and place the DKT handset on-hook. 2. If talking via the speakerphone, press the Spacebar. 10-74 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation DK Alarm Sensor Standard Telephone Portable PC 2 Dialed Line Strata DK RS-232 DKT/RPCI-DI or DKT/PDIU-DI (201) Digital (Port 001) Public Telephone Network CO LINE 1 MDF MDF 1540 Figure 10-39 DK PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test DK Alarm Sensor The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit that can be set to detect a relay open or closed condition from a facility alarm system. When the sensor is activated, all electronic and digital telephones sound an alarm signal. The electronic/digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any electronic or digital telephone with an $ODUP5HVHW button (see Program 39). Alarm Sensor Options See Figure 10-40 for additional information. Jumper plug P12 on the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system. ➤ To detect an open or closed condition by the jumper plug P12 1. To detect a closed condition, set P12 to the N.O. position. 2. To detect an open condition, set P12 to the N.C. position. Peripheral Installation Note Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system ➤ To detect an open or closed condition by soldering the W3 jumper wire 1. To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the normal open position. 2. To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the normal closed position. Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-75 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Alarm Sensor Wiring See Figure 10-40, and connect the facility alarm system relay contacts to the PIOU/PIOUS PCB. PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable PIOU PCB N.C. Alarm Sensor P12 66 Block Pin Numbers MDF ALMT (36) 21 ALMR (11) 22 N.O. Facility Alarm System 25-Pair Cable PIOUS PCB Normal Open TB1 Twisted Pair MDF ALMT Alarm Sensor W3 ALMR ALM Facility Alarm System Normal Close 1541 Figure 10-40 DK Alarm Sensor Block Diagram (PIOU/PIOUS) Auto Attendant Auto Attendant operates like an automatic station attendant or switchboard operator that quickly and efficiently distributes calls to stations selected by callers. Incoming calls are greeted by an external announcement device that offers callers a menu of station locations associated with a number, such as 3 for Sales, 4 for Customer Service, etc. Callers pick the destination just by dialing the single number associated with it. The call is then transferred to the station. Callers can also dial the intercom number directly. This feature is available from three separate sources. ♦ Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant ♦ Voice Mail device Auto Attendant ♦ External Auto Attendant Note 10-76 Auto Attendant is licensed by Dytel, Inc. under United States Patent No. 4,975,941. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) A built-in Auto Attendant feature is programmed into the Strata DK system software. To enable the built-in AA to function, RRCS (-4, -8 or -12) DTMF tone receiver PCB (see Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RRCS and RKYS installation instructions). The customer must provide digital announcement device(s), on which the greeting and menu that the callers hear are recorded. The digital announcement devices must connect to Strata DK standard telephone circuits. There is a series of programs (explained later) in the Strata DK Programming Manual Record Sheets, which are for the built-in AA feature exclusively, not the other two AA feature applications. Callers must use a DTMF (tone) telephone to select AA dialing options. The built-in AA feature offers flexibility in answering calls. Calls follow the basic sequences described below and illustrated in Figure 10-41, “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences”. Sequence A The call is answered directly after being transferred from the Auto Attendant. The caller calls in on CO lines assigned for built-in Auto Attendant, receives a greeting along with a menu of dialing options, and then dials an option of the intercom number. The call is then transferred to a station, which answers the call. Sequence B The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an optional secondary announcement, where it will receive a new announcement and the same or additional dialing options. Some customers may not configure their AA system with a secondary announcement; if so, their unanswered calls would follow sequence C or D. The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an alternate station(s) assigned in system programming, ringing assignments. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Sequence C 10-77 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Sequence D The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed back to the primary announcement. This is probably the least desirable of the four sequences, since the caller hears a repeat of the announcement he just received seconds earlier. Note In all of the above sequences, the call can first ring telephones selected in system programming for 12 or 24 seconds, and then be routed to the Auto Attendant if not answered by any of the ringing stations. This is called Auto Attendant delayed ring. Caller Dials Auto Attendant CO Line Auto Attendant Delayed Ring ? Yes Ring Stations Per Program 81~89 No No Primary Announcement Greets Caller, Offers Dialing Options Station Answers Before Delay Timeout ? Yes Caller Dials Option Caller Is Transferred To Dialed Option Call Is Answered Sequence: A Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Secondary Announcement Talk Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Alternate Stations B C Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed Back To The Primary Announcement D 1693 Figure 10-41 Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences Built-in Auto Attendant Programming See Figures 10-41 and 10-42 for a comprehensive overview of built-in Auto Attendant (AA). 10-78 ♦ Program 78 (61, 62, and 63): CO lines are assigned for built-in AA with this program. There is no limit to the number of lines that can be assigned for AA, and each line can be set for any or all of the ringing modes (DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT). See Programs 81~89 record sheet notes in the Strata DK Programming Manual. ♦ Programs 81~89: Assign stations to ring if AA callers do not dial or AA calls are not answered. Also, if not answered by a station set to ring during Immediate Ringing (or delay 2 ring), incoming calls can be set to ring built-in AA announcement ports on a Delayed Ringing basis. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant ♦ Program 03: An RRCS (-4, -8 or -12) must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU for the system to interpret DTMF tones generated by the CO. Use this program to tell the system that the common control unit is equipped with an RRCS. Important! RKYS must also be installed on RCTU, RKYS does not need a Program 03 (or any other) program assignment. Program 25-1: If there are no RRCS circuits or announcement devices available for an incoming CO line built-in AA call, the call will transfer to alternative station(s) (Programs 81~89) after a time duration assigned with this program. ♦ Program 23: As many as four digital announcement devices for primary announcements, each requiring one standard telephone station port (Figure 10-42), can be assigned. Callers receive primary announcements (60 secs. maximum announcement time) – which consist of the greeting along with the delivery of menu prompts – when they first call (they may also be rerouted back to the announcement after reaching a busy or ring no answer station). ♦ Program 24: Transferred calls that are unanswered at stations can be routed to a secondary announcement device (60 secs. maximum announcement time), which typically first informs the caller that the option they dialed was unavailable and then presents them with either the same options offered by the primary announcement device or some additional ones (Figure 10-42). ♦ Program 09: Tells the system where to transfer built-in AA calls after the caller has dialed in response to the delivered menu options. ♦ Program 60-6: Enter a DISA security code to prevent users from making unauthorized external calls via the AA DISA access (Dial *) feature. ♦ Program 26: There will be times when transferred AA calls are not answered after camping-on to a busy station. This program tells the system when to end the camp-on and to route the call to another destination (it could be a secondary announcement device or alternative stations per program 10-3, LED 18). If a station has Call Forward set, the call forwards to the proper destination instead of routing per AA Program 10-3, LED 18. ♦ Program 10-3: Strata DK I&M ♦ LED 18: Some customers may choose to configure their AA without a secondary announcement device. In these arrangements, transferred calls that are unanswered can be routed for normal ringing to some alternative stations set in Programs 81, 84, and 87, or back to the primary announcement device. LED 18 should be ON if the calls should be routed to stations assigned in Programs 81, 84, and 87. It should be OFF for the primary or secondary announcement device option. If LED 18 is selected, see LEDs 16 and 17 for disconnect timing options. ♦ LED 15: If LED15 is ON (and Music-on-Hold (MOH) is installed) the DK sends MOH to callers when the AA routes a call to ring or camp-on a station. If LED 15 is OFF the DK send ring-back-tone to the caller. ♦ LEDs 16 and 17: Set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect, as a safeguard, built-in AA calls that have not been answered by stations. This feature assures that the loop start CO line that the call was made on is free for other calls if the caller hangs up before the call is answered. The initialized disconnect setting is 40 seconds. The other timing options available are 150 secs. and 350 secs. Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows: 5/99 Peripheral Installation ♦ 10-79 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant 40 seconds: LED 16 = OFF. LED 17 = OFF. 150 seconds: LED 16 = OFF. LED 17 = ON. 350 seconds: LED 16 = ON. LED 17 = OFF. Ground start lines disconnect automatically with this timer. ♦ Program 15: Selects Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail, AA or voice calls. This will provide automatic release (if the calling party disconnects) without waiting for the safeguard timer in Program 10-3. Built-in Auto Attendant Installation The built-in Auto Attendant feature only requires the installation of a feature key and customersupplied announcement devices to deliver announcements to callers. The feature does not require the installation of any other devices. ➤ To install the customer-supplied digital announcement devices Note In Figure 10-42 and elsewhere in this manual, announcement devices are referred to as A1 and A2. A1 designates a primary announcement device, and A2 a secondary announcement device. The prime marks following the designation distinguishes the multiple announcers from each other. 1. Ensure that the PCB that will connect with the device is installed per: Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3 ...or Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS 2. Connect the devices to the selected circuit per wiring diagrams: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3 ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS ♦ Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 3. Ensure that the feature key is correctly installed per: ♦ Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QKYS ♦ Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs, see RRCS and RKYS on the RCTU ♦ Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KKYS installation on K4RCU3 4. Program the system per the instructions in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 10-78. 5. Record the message and dialing prompts on the announcement device per the device manufacturer's instructions. 10-80 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant MDF Strata DK QSTU2 or KSTU2 (DK40i) or RSTU or RDSU/RSTS or PSTU or PESU To Standard Telephone Circuit A1 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1''' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2''' Digital Announcer 4308 See Programs 23 and 24 for Digital Announcement Assignements (A1 = Primary Auto Attendant (AA) Announcements, A2 = Secondard AA Announcements) Figure 10-42 Announcement Device Block Diagram The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) groups in two ways (see Flowchart 10-1 and text below): ♦ The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function to answer calls and send them to selected ACD groups when the caller dials the digit assigned to an ACD group. ♦ A call that is waiting in an ACD queue can overflow to the built-in Auto Attendant to enable the caller to choose another destination. Peripheral Installation DK424 Built-in Auto Attendant ACD Applications Both options can be used simultaneously or independently. See Chapter 11 – ACD Installation for ACD/Auto Attendant programming options. Note Incoming Call Auto Attendant Built-in Station ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue ACD Queue Agent Agent Overflow 1543 Flowchart 10-1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Auto Attendant/ACD Application Flowchart 10-81 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Digital Announcer Auto Disconnect The DK built-in AA automatically disconnects digital announcers immediately after the caller(s) dials a digit and are routed to a selected destination. Thus, the announcement device does not have to play to the end before it is released. This feature requires a digital announcer that can recognize a 100 milliseconds open circuit on the (RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS) loop and hang-up when it detects the open on the loop. Built-in Auto Attendant Block Diagram A detailed block diagram which includes call flow patterns and associated programs is provided in Flowchart 10-2. ACD CO Lines (Program 14-0) Auto Attendant Ring Control Using 1 Night Transfer (NT) Button per Program 78, 81 ~ 89 Incoming CO Call to Auto Attendant Program 78 (61,62,63) Is Auto Attendant Delay Ring Mode? Program 81 ~ 89 To Agent ACD Group Queue Answer Yes Ring Stations For 12 OR 24 Sec. Per Program 81 ~ 89 Talk Overflow Option to AA Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 No No Answer 0 A1 + RRCS Available? No (Caller Receives Ringback Tone Before A1 Answers) (Reserve A1 + RRCS) 1 Timeout Answer Ring Telephones Per Program (81-89) Talk No Answer Program 25: Wait Timer (12-24 Sec) 1 Second Ringing Queue Wait A1 / RRCS Becomes Available Ring A1 A1' Caller Hangs Up Disconnect CO Line 4 Second Delay Go to 5 A1''' Program 23 A1 ~ A1''' Assignment KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU / RDSU / PESU 16-Second A1 Answers Within Time-Out 16 Seconds (Faulty A1) A1 Answers and Plays Announcement Announcement Ends and Disconnects A1'' Caller Does Not Dial (60 secs. maximum; RRCS remains for 4 secs. after announcement disconnects. 2 Caller Dials and system Checks Program 09 Note A1 ~ A1''' — Primary Announcement Device(s) on next page Go to A on next page 1544 Flowchart 10-2 10-82 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant A Caller Receives Music-On-Hold or Ring Back Tone per Program 10-3, LED 15 When Auto Attendant Routes Call Auto Attendant Routes Call (Program 09): Dial * Camp-On Beep 10 IPS Fast LED Flash LCD Camp-On Display Dial Busy or Ringing DN DISA Mode Internal Dial Tone Dial: Wrong or Vacant Number; or Dial a DND or Ringing Station ACD Group Camp-On Timer (Program 26) (011-999S) Go to 0 Figure 10-44 No 4 Program 10-3 LED 18 (On) A1 + RRCS Available? 15 Sec No Note A2 In System? Check Program 10-3 No Answer Talk 16 Second No Answer 1 3 Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 Ring DN for 16 Seconds1 Busy Station Becomes Idle Time-Out Overflow To AA Option Dial Idle DN Yes If the station has CF/NA set, the station will ring for the CF/NA time duration and then it will forward to the forwarded destination. The CF/NA destination station will ring 16 sec and then route to if not answered. A call will not forward a second time. Yes No 5 (15 Second Time Out) A2 + RRCS Available? (16 Second Wait for A2/RRCS Available) Yes Yes Go to 1 Yes Answer 1 Second Queue Wait Ring A2 No Answer or Automatic Release Talk Disconnect CO Line Note: A2 ~ A2''' — Secondary Announcement Device(s) Strata DK I&M Time-out 16 Seconds (Faulty A2) A2 Answers and Plays Announcement Go to Flowchart 10-2 A2' A2 Answers Within 16 Seconds 2 A2''' A2'' Figure 10-44 Program 24 A1 ~ A1''' Assignments to KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU / RDSU / PESU 4 Go to (60 Seconds Maximum; RRCS Remains 4 Seconds After Announcement Disconnects) 1545 Peripheral Installation Ring Station per Program (81, 84, 87) for 40/120/240 Sec. per Program 10-3 LEDs 16 and 17 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart (continued) 5/99 10-83 Peripheral Installation Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation Non-built-in Auto Attendant Alternatives to using the Strata DK built-in AA feature, are voice mail systems, such as Toshiba Stratagy or VP, with an AA feature and non-voice mail AA as a stand-alone device. Non-built-in Auto Attendant Programming The Auto Attendant programs described in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 10-78 do not apply to the Non-integrated AA feature sources, but Strata DK Programs 03, 04, 10-1, 13, 16, 31, 33, 36, 37, 39, and 81~89 should be considered for proper operation. Non-built-in Auto Attendant Installation Non-integrated AA sources, such as voice mail devices and stand-alone units, connect to standard telephone circuits (ports). See Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more information. Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation Up to three PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs can be installed in a system to simultaneously provide: maintenance terminal (or modem) interface, Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface, and RS-232 voice mail interface (Toshiba proprietary or SMDI). Each of these interfaces are provided by the modular jacks on a separate PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU (Figure 10-37). Interface assignments are made in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43). PIOU and PIOUS Paging, SMDR, relay control, alarm sensor, and door lock functions will be active only on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB which is assigned the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU only provides the TTY interface for SMDI, local maintenance, or ACD MIS but not for SMDR, built-in maintenance modem or system OA. If TSIU or RSIU/RSIS is installed, functions enabled in Program 76 will operate as programmed and the same functions programmed in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43) will not operate. For more details regarding RSIU/RSIS/RMDS and TSIU installation, see RSIU installation in Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs and Figure 8-35 in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. 10-84 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Peripheral Installation Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack Maintenance Terminal, Personal Computer, Modem, or PDIU-DS SMDR2 Jack Maintenance Interface PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 413 RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord COM Port PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack SMDR2 Jack DK424ACD/MIS Personal Computer MIS for ACD Interface (DK424 Only) PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 423 RS-232 (DB-25 or DB-9)4 Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU1 TTY Jack RS-232 (SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary) for VM Interface SMDR2 Jack Voice Mail Device PPTC-25F or PPTC9 Adapter Program 03 Code 433 1546 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slot in any cabinet(s). 2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU does not provide these features. 3. If set, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS Program 76 will override Program 03 code 41, 42, and 43. 4. VP100 and Stratagy use straight cables, VP200/300 require “null modem” connection. PPTC (25-pin) requires a “male-tofemale” gender changer. Figure 10-43 Multiple PIOU/PIOUS (Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, RS-232 Voice Mail Integration) Strata DK I&M 5/99 10-85 Peripheral Installation Enhanced 911 Service (E911) Enhanced 911 Service (E911) The Toshiba Strata DK forwards 911 and 9+911 calls to designated ports to interface with external third party adjunct translation equipment designed to handle them. The Strata DK provides up to two QSTU2, KSTU2 or RSTU2 ports (standard telephone ports) to receive these calls and send them to the third party E911 adjunct equipment along with the specific directory number of the emergency calling station. The Strata DK sends the telephone DN to the telephone company’s 911 tandem switch that forwards the call to the proper Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) where it is matched up with a central Automatic Location Information (ALl) database to provide enhanced information to the PSAP dispatcher. Interface between the third party adjunct equipment and the E911 tandem CO must be via special Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks. (Ordering of these specialized trunks is done through a special ordering desk with your local phone company.) Important! ● ● DID numbers: In many cases, a DID service is the only way to provide a unique number (CESID) for each station that is recognizable by the telephone company. In order for this feature to be effective, 911 and 9+911 calls must be dialed from a DKT [DN] or single-line telephone. 911 calls originating from a [PhDN] CO Line or Pooled Line button bypass the adjunct equipment and go directly to the CO exactly as dialed. E911 System Installation 1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs or each DK14 and DK40i installation section. 2. Connect the E911 system to the selected QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU standard telephone port. (See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation, Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation, Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details.) 3. Program the Strata DK system for the required E911 features. (See “E911 Programming”.) 4. Install E911 external system per the manuals supplied by the vendor selected and used for the interface. E911 Programming Program *10: Selections 11 and 12 assign the RSTU port to be used for E911 Service. Selections 91 and 92 assign an inter-digit timer for valid dialing and a delay timer before the station number is sent to external E911 equipment. ➤ Remove the [DN] assignment for ports assigned to E911 so that someone calling a station number will not accidentally call 911. 10-86 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation 11 This chapter includes information on the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for: ♦ Strata DK424 systems (applies to all common control units except the RCTUA) ♦ ACD and MIS are not available to the Strata DK14 and DK40i Included in this chapter are installation instructions, ACD programming procedures and record sheets. Note Only qualified service technicians and system programmers should install ACD/MIS. ACD automatically routes incoming calls so they are equally distributed to a group of ACD Agents. Figure 11-1 shows an example of how a typical ACD call is handled. DK424 ACD Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 11-1 DK424 ACD Installation Installation The Strata DK System provides many ACD functions and custom keys on for Toshiba DKT2000series telephones. For instance, the ACD Supervisor can monitor calls and assist Agents through use of an LCD telephone, programmed especially for the Supervisor which shows ACD Agent and Group information. Telephone instructions are provided in the Strata DK ACD Supervisor Guide and Agent User Guide. Incoming Call Auto Attendant (Built-in or External) Station ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue (No Overflow Assignment) ACD Queue Agent PhDN ACD PhDN • • • • • • Distributed Hunt Group Station PDN, PhDN or CO Line Attendant Console Another ACD Group Auto Attendant Announcement 1971 Figure 11-1 ACD Call Handling Example Installation ACD for the Strata DK systems is provided through a feature key upgrade called RKYS. The RKYS is a subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. See “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 5-48 for installation instructions. Multiple Serial Port Installation Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, and SMDI With DK R3 or higher (RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3), the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS PCBs can be installed alone or in addition to PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU to provide: ♦ Maintenance Terminal (or modem) interface ♦ Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface ♦ SMDI ♦ SMDR Related Programs Program 03 (Codes 41, 42, and 43): Assigns PIOU and PIOU interface options. SMDR, page outputs, SMDR, relay controls, alarm sensor, and door lock functions on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). 11-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation Installation ♦ Code 41: Enables Remote Maintenance ♦ Code 42: Enables MIS/SMIS PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU Slot. The TTY port must have Code 42 set for its slot in Program 03 to support ACD/MIS. ♦ Code 43: Enables RS-232 Voice Mail Interface/SMDI ♦ If the RSIU is to be used for ACD/MIS, the RSIU must be installed in the Strata DK Base Cabinet, slot 11 and programmed with Code 49 in Program 03. ♦ The RSSU only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI. The RSSU does not provide SMDR, page, alarm sensor or relay control. Program 76-1x3: Assigns the RSIU or RSIS port to provide MIS for ACD. Notes ● Program 76 assignments override Code 42 if programmed for PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU in Program 03. For more information on installation of the PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU and the RSIU/RSIS/RMD, see Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs and Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. Wiring Announcements/music patterns are played and sent to callers at programmed time intervals while calls are waiting in an ACD queue. Announcement and music devices are connected to Strata DK station ports and are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 14-3. The ACD/MIS interface is provided by the TTY modular jack on a separate serial port (RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS), see Figure 11-2. 25-pin PC serial COM port uses PPTC25-f 1 9-pin PC serial COM port (DB-9) 6-pin modular jack Toshiba PPTC9 adaptor MIS RS-232 port 3-pair modular cord (straight-wired, not cross-wired). 50 ft. max. for Insight DK PC parallel printer port SRB00566 9353L9335 Sentinel key (off-white color, comes with SMIS software version V1.0 or higher) RS-232 jack: RSIU 2 RSIS2 DK424 ACD Installation Personal Computer for: ACD Insight DK SMIS CCV Strata DK TTY jack: PIOU PIOUS or RSSU3 4277 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slots in any cabinet(s). 2. Install RSIU in Slot 11 of Base Cabinet only. 3. If the PC COM port is a DB-25, a Toshiba PPTC25-F adapter is required in place of the Toshiba DB-9 adapter. Figure 11-2 ACD Application Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 11-3 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Installation Guidelines Digital announcement devices can be connected to DK standard telephone ports only; music sources such as digital Music-on-Hold (MOH) devices, radio tuners, CD players, etc., can be connected to standard telephone ports, electronic (not digital) telephone ports, or to the RCTU MOH jack. The wiring diagrams for connecting announcement/music devices are: ♦ Digital announcers and/or music sources to standard telephone PCB ports: RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PESU – see Chapter 7 – Wiring Diagrams. Digital announcement devices and music sources can be assigned to any standard telephone port; they are not restricted to designated Background Music (BGM) source ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). Announcement devices are designed to connect directly to standard telephone ports. Do not use an isolation transformer to connect digital announcers. Important! Most music sources (600 or 8 OHM) are not designed to be connected to telephone line circuits like the Strata DK standard telephone circuits. When connecting these devices to standard telephone circuits, an isolation transformer may be required between the music source and the standard telephone circuit. Figure 10-4 shows how to connect an isolation transformer. ♦ Music sources to electronic telephone PCB ports: PEKU, PESU – see Chapter 8 – Wiring. Music sources can be assigned to any PEKU or PESU port; they are not restricted to designated BGM ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). ♦ Music source to DK MOH input: The MOH source connected to the RCTU MOH jack can be sent to ACD Groups selectively via Program 14-3. ➤ To connect a music source to the RCTU MOH jack ➤ See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation, “Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options” on Page 10-3. ACD Installation Guidelines The following steps show how to install the Strata DK ACD feature. Step 1: Initialize the System If installing a new RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D2, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 (ACD is not provided with RCTUA3) processor PCB or if changing ROMs on the RCTU, the RCTU must be fully initialized by running Programs 91-9 and 03 per the programming procedures in the Strata DK Programming Manual. If the system has been previously initialized and installed, it is not necessary to re-initialize the RCTU when installing the ACD feature unless the RCTU ROMs or flash memory are changed to install ACD. If changing ROMs, DK Admin or DK Backup software is recommended for downloading/uploading previously programmed customer data. 11-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Installation Guidelines Step 2: Install the RKYS Feature Key ➤ To install the RKYS2 (ACD/Auto Attendant) or RKYS3 onto the RCTU PCB ➤ Read the section titled “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 5-48 and refer to Figure 5-30 for installation instructions. Important! It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialization, and, before or after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are enabled immediately when RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for Auto Attendant and ACD must be entered for the feature to operate. Step 3: Install Related PCBs 1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the highest numbered slots in any cabinets. 2. Install the RSIU PCB in slot 11 of the Base Cabinet only. Step 4: Connect COM Port Wires ➤ Connect Strata DK to the SMIS PC per Figure 11-2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay Controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on the PIOU or PIOUS PCBs will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). The RSSU PCB only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI. Step 5: Install ACD/SMIS Interface If installing a SMIS personal computer, a RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU or RSIS must be installed (see Figure 11-2 for MIS RS-232 port installation). Step 6: Set the MIS Channel If there are more than 1,000 Agent calls in a heavy-traffic hour, the MIS channel must be set higher than 1200 bps. The next higher speed, 2400 bps, can handle up to 1,300 calls per hour. Strata DK allows 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps for the MIS channel. SMIS registers ACD and PBX calls: ♦ An ACD call is a call that is sent (directly or transferred) to the ACD group. ♦ A PBX call is a call that is sent to the Agent’s$&'&DOO button [PhDN] or a call originated from an Agent’s $&'&DOO button [PhDN]. Based on a total system speed of 10,800 bps (9600 + 1200) for auxiliary serial channels and a requirement of one channel each for SMDI, TTY, SMDR, and MIS, the installation should use the lowest MIS channel speed for the expected amount of traffic. CAUTION! Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation Agent calls are defined as ACD incoming, PBX incoming/outgoing, and external/internal calls to and from the Agent’s [PhDN]. If the channel speed is not set high enough, the MIS buffer may overflow, causing loss of data to MIS. 11-5 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Installation Guidelines Step 7: Connect Announcement Devices Connect the digital announcement devices that are used for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station ports. Digital announcers can be connected to any RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/ RSTS, PSTU, or PESU standard telephone ports. See Chapter 8 – Wiring Diagrams for MDF wiring to appropriate standard telephone ports. ♦ Use Program 14-3, Code 1, 2, and 3 to assign digital announcers to standard telephone ports. Use Program 14-3, Code 5 and Program 14-5XX to configure the queue announcement pattern for each ACD Group. Step 8: Connect Music Sources Connect the music source for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station port or to the RCTU MOH jack. Music sources can be connected to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU station ports or to the RCTU MOH jack. See Figures 10-3, 10-4, 10-5 and “Alternate BGM Source Installation” on Page 10-9. See Chapter 8 – Wiring Diagrams for wiring information. Important! If connecting a music source to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU standard telephone ports, an isolation transformer may be required as shown in Figure 10-4 to protect the music source from excessive current/voltage. Each ACD Group can have a separate music source or Groups can share music sources in any combination. Music source port assignments are made in Program 14-3, Code 4. Music source timers are set in Program 11-5 (1, 2, and 3). Step 9: Install ACD to Strata DK Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Integration If ACD calls route to an ACD Group via the Strata DK built-in AA, install and program the AA per “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 10-78 of Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation. Auto Attendant “single digits” are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 09. Step 10: Assign ACD to Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA Integration If a Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA must answer calls and transfer CO lines to ACD Groups, assign the CO lines to ring the Strata DK standard telephone ports connected to the Stratagy or VP AA in Programs 81~89. Also program the appropriate Strata DK station ports to interface with the Stratagy or VP ports in Program 31. Program the Stratagy or VP AA to hookflash and dial ;; to transfer calls to ACD Groups (where XX = the ACD Group Number: 01~16). 11-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Programming All types of DK lines can be routed to ACD Groups (ground/loop start, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI). Lines can be assigned in programming to route directly to ACD Groups when they ring or dial into the Strata DK system. All line types can be programmed to transfer into an ACD Group from any telephone, attendant console, or built-in or external AA. Use the ACD programming guidelines and flowcharts provided in Chapter 6 of the Strata DK Programming Manual to configure the remaining ACD items per the customer’s requirements. The following paragraphs describe differences in the operation and programming of ground/loop start lines versus DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines used with an ACD system. Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups Ground/Loop Start Incoming Line Calls Program 14-0: Used to make the line assignments to send calls directly to specific ACD Groups. If a ground or loop start line is assigned to an ACD Group in Program 14-0, it routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH *US buttons to Agent telephones. ACD CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH*US buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. Note Program 14-0 has priority over all other ringing assignments except Program 78 (61, 62, and 63). If a line is assigned to ring an ACD Group in Program 14-0 at the same time the line is assigned to ring the DK built-in AA in Program 78, the line routes to the AA. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Incoming Line Calls Program *09 or Program 71-1, 2, or 3: assigns DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI incoming digits to ACD Groups and DID digits to ring designated station ports. ANI only lines must route to the same ACD Group (see Program 71-1, 2, or 3 address 349 or 499). If the incoming digits (XXXX) dialed from a Tie or DID line match the digits assigned to an ACD Group, the call routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH buttons to Agent telephones. However, ACD DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group DK424 ACD Installation Program 04 or Program 71-1: assigns Tie line digits to ring at designated station ports (see Program 17, LED 05). Ground/Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring into the DK built-in AA in Program 78. Each ACD Group can be assigned a unique one or two-digit AA dialing prompt in Program 09. Incoming calls on these lines are answered by the AA. The caller then enters the one or two-digit number and is connected to a specific ACD Group. Strata DK I&M 5/99 11-7 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI ACD Line Calls Calls cannot be assigned to ring the DK built-in AA, so they cannot be transferred from the DK AA to an ACD Group. Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group The external AA (Stratagy or VP) can be programmed to transfer calls to specific ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialing prompts to each Group. To transfer a call into an ACD Group from an external AA, the user must hookflash and dial ;; (;; = ACD Group number 01~16). Ground/Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring external AA ports in Program 81~89. The external AA can be programmed to transfer calls to particular ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialing prompts to each Group. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring directly into an external AA by assigning incoming digits to the AA ports in Programs *09 or 71 for DID/DNIS/ANI lines and Programs 04 or 71 for Tie lines (see Program 17, LED 05). Internal station to station [DN] calls cannot be transferred to ACD Groups. Overflow From an ACD Group Queue ACD Calls ACD calls can be routed to overflow to a [PDN], [SDN], [PhDN], to normal CO line ringing assignments, to another ACD Group, or to a Distributed Hunt [DH] Group (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowcharts 6-3~6-10). If the overflow [PhDN] or [PDN] is idle when overflow time occurs, an ACD call rings the overflow destination [DN]. If it is busy, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination, an Agent telephone in the ACD Group, or a DH Group member telephone becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. In this case, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines operate the same as ground, and loop start lines. Ground/Loop Start Lines Lines can overflow from an ACD queue to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87; to the DK built-in AA or to an attendant console. When the overflow time or point occurs, calls immediately exit the ACD Group queue and ring all stations assigned to ring in Programs 81, 84, or 87 and *81, *84, and *87 (no delay ringing assignment operates during overflow). Idle stations and [DNs] ring normally while busy stations and [DNs] have a muted ring. Auto Attendant If the overflow destination is the DK built-in AA, calls overflow immediately when overflow time occurs and are routed per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy, the call still exits the ACD queue and queues onto the AA announcement port. Attendant Console If the overflow destination is the attendant console, calls immediately exit the queue and alert the console whether the console is idle or busy. This applies to overflow queue time out (Programs 111 and 14-4) and overflow point (see Programs 14-3, 14-5, and Flowcharts 6-8~6-10). 11-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines Lines cannot overflow to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87, or to the DK built-in AA. If the overflow destination is assigned as either the DK CO line normal ringing or built-in AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the substitute destination [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. This applies to overflow queue time out and overflow point destinations assigned in Programs 14-4/111, and 14-5, respectively. If the overflow destination [DN] is busy when overflow time occurs, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination [DN] or an Agent telephone in the ACD Group becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. ACD Group Status After Shift Mode When an ACD Group is placed in the After Shift mode, calls are not sent to the ACD Group’s queue or Agents, but are routed to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6. The After Shift operation for each possible case is described below (also see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-5): If the After Shift destination is idle, all line types ring the idle destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines operate the same. ♦ If the After Shift destination of an ACD Group is another ACD Group, and all Agents in the destination Group are busy on calls or in the After Call Work Time mode, the call is placed at the end of the destination ACD Group’s queue. If there are no Agents logged in for the After Shift Group, the call is sent to that Group’s After Shift destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines operate the same. ♦ If the After Shift destination is a [DN], the [DN] rings. If the station is busy, DID/Tie/DNIS/ ANI lines camp on to the [DN] while ground/loop start lines busy override ring the port. ♦ If the After Shift destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, ground/loop start lines ring stations assigned to the ACD lines in Programs 81~89 (including delayed ringing assignments). DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not ring stations in the Normal Ring assignments but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. ♦ If the After Shift destination is the DK AA, ground/loop start lines are answered by the AA and routed after the caller dials a digit prompted by the AA. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not route to the AA, but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. ♦ If the After Shift destination is the attendant console, calls ring or queue onto the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines. All Agents Unavailable Mode If all the Agents in an ACD Group become unavailable simultaneously, calls that would normally ring into the ACD Group or enter the Group’s queue are routed to either the Group’s After Shift destination, set in Program 14-6 or to the Group’s Overflow Point destination, set in Program 14-5 (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-6). DK424 ACD Installation ♦ The option of where to send calls when all Agents are unavailable is set system-wide for all ACD Groups in Program 10-4, LED 04. All line types (ground/loop start and DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI) follow this operation. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6, (Program 10-4, LED 04 “Off”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if the ACD Group were in the After Shift mode. Strata DK I&M 5/99 11-9 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the Overflow Point destination set in Program 14-5 (Program 10-4, LED 04 “On”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if they overflowed from the Group’s queue even if the overflow destination is busy. If the “All Agents Unavailable” overflow destination is another ACD Group, calls route to an idle Agent, or are placed at the end of the overflow ACD Group’s queue. Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment If an ACD call rings an Agent telephone for the time specified in Program 11-2 and the call is not answered, the call is routed to ring another idle Agent in the same ACD Group for that same time duration (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-7). This continues until all idle Agents in that Group have been rung. If the call is not answered by an Agent, the call then routes to the destination assigned in Program 14-5. Two consecutive Ring No Answer (RNA) calls to the same Agent automatically places that Agent’s telephone in the Unavailable mode. The RNA operation for possible cases is described below: ♦ If the RNA destination is an idle [DN], it rings when RNA occurs. If the RNA [DN] is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI calls camp on to the [DN] and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). ♦ If the RNA destination is an ACD Group, the call rings an idle Agent in that Group when RNA occurs. If all Agents in the RNA destination ACD Group are busy when RNA occurs, DID/ Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the destination assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ringing assignments). ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). If the RNA destination is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines mute ring the busy [DN]. ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK built-in AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines queue onto the AA announcement port. ♦ If the RNA destination is the DK attendant console, RNA calls ring or queue on the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to ground, loop, Tie, DID, DNIS, and ANI lines. ACD SMDR Printout Examples Auto Attendant, DNIS, ANI, DID, and Tie line ACD calls can be identified on SMDR printouts. Several SMDR printout examples noting ACD information are provided. (See Figures 11-3 through 11-10). However, Toshiba recommends using SMIS to track ACD call data rather than SMDR. SMIS is designed to track ACD/PBX agent calls. Loop and ground start line ACD calls can only be identified by line and station numbers. The ACD tag is not applied. For detailed ACD call record reporting, Toshiba recommends using SMIS. The Work Unit (or Stroke) count data, which is entered from the Agent telephone while on an ACD call, is printed in the account code field of the SMDR output data (last 15 columns). Note 11-10 If multiple Work Unit entries are entered on the same ACD call, SMDR only sends data for the last entry. MIS or SMIS receives all entries made. Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations Identifies ACD call (not Group number) Call answered by Agent Time Ring before Queue + Queue Time DID Seizure + Digits Received Time 009 ACD 009 204 500 14:30 00:02;03 00;04 14:31 00:00;26 204 Agent Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Agent ACD Call [PhDN] Agent Telephone [PDN] DID Line Number 2023 Figure 11-3 DID Call to ACD Queue Example ACD Call goes to Queue then rings Agent – Agent Answers 003 ACD 003 204 500 14:00 00:02;38 00;05 14:01 00:01;23 Time Agent answers call Queue + Ring Agent Time Ring Time, before First Announcement Answers Duration 204 (Program 11-4 = 4 seconds) Agent Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Agent ACD call [PhDN] Agent Telephone [PDN] CO Line Number 00:05 02:38 01:23 Total time call is connected to system is 4 minutes, 6 seconds 03:66 2024 Figure 11-4 Ground/Loop Start Incoming Call Example DK424 ACD Installation DID ACD Call to ready Agent at Station 204 009 ACD 009 204 Figure 11-5 Strata DK I&M 500 10:53 00:00;16 00;06 10:53 00:00;40 204 Time Telephone (204) answers Line 9 Queue and/or Ring Telephone Time Duration of Incoming Seizure + digits dialed Primary Directory Number [PDN] of Called Telephone Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Agent ACD call [PhDN] Talking Telephone [PDN] DID Line Number DID ACD Call to Available Agent Example 5/99 1999 11-11 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations 007 MSS 007 203 500 10:36 00:00;26 00;03 10:37 00:01;12 203 Identifies DISA or Built-in AA call Time call was transferred Call connected to DISA or AA Time Duration Ring before DISA or AA Answer Time Duration Caller dials 203, DISA or AA transfers to 203 Call connected to 203 Time Duration Time 203 hung-up and call disconnected [DN] that answered call [DN] connected to Line 007 Line Number Note: DISA callers cannot dial into an ACD Group. Auto Attendant Transfers Call to ACD Group 007 MSS Figure 11-6 500 10:38 00:00;26 ACD 2080 Incoming Built-in AA or DISA Call (non-ACD call) Example 203 Transfer Time 203 Talk Time Duration 203 Ring before Answer Time Duration Indicates Call Transfer to ACD Group A→ 003 203 203 13:10 00:00;10 00;03 ACD 204 B→ 003 ACD 204 13:10 00:00;06 [PDN] of telephone that C→ 003 204 500 13:10 00:00;26 answers the ACD transferred call 204 Ring before Answer Time or Queue Time 204 Talk Time 204 Discconnect Time A→ [DN] 203 Transfer Line 003 to ACD Group 01 (Dialing + B→ [DN] 204 Answers Line 003 (Agent logged in and ready on 204) C→ [DN] 204 Hangs up Figure 11-7 003 204 ) 2081 Transfer CO Line to ACD Group Example 500 14:13 00:01;05 00;10 Ring Duration Time before Agent answers 6 – 09 2 Rings 10 –13 3 Rings 14 –17 4 Rings etc. Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Agent ACD Call [PhDN] [PDN] of Agent Telephone ACD CO Line Number 2082 Figure 11-8 11-12 Direct Ground/Loop Start Line Call to ACD Agent (no Queue Time) Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations Direct ACD call with ANI/Caller ID Number, answered by ACD Queue Announcer 4414. Call stays in queue until Agent button, [PhDN] 500 on Station 4403 becomes available. Agent answers call on button [PhDN] 500, line 1 prints, services call and hangs up, line 2 prints. Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 018D 018 ACD 4403 4414 500 Agent [PDN] ACD GRP Announcer Port 01:32 01:32 00:00;13 00:00;17 00;14 Button [PhDN] on station 4403 Line Number 4403 *7145833700** ANI/Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Answers Station 4403 [PDN] Direct ACD call with ANI, does not enter queue and is answered by Agent Station 4403 on [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up. button Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 018D 4403 500 02:05 00:00;06 00;19 *7145833700** Button [PhDN] ANI/Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Hangs Up Line Number Station 4403 [PDN] Direct ACD Call with ANI/DNIS, does not enter ACD queue and is answered by Agent station 4403 on button [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up. Indicates DNIS/ANI Line 019D 4403 500 02:47 00:00;04 ACD Call Age 00;18 *7145833777*2222* DR JONES nt Button [PhDN] Line Number ANI No. DNIS No. DNIS Name Agent [PDN] Direct ANI/Caller ID Number call goes to queue and caller hangs up while in queue; the information below prints on SMDR. Indicates DNIS/ANI LINE 018D ACD 02:34 00:00;03 00;17 ACD Queue Announcer [PDN] *7145833333** DK424 ACD Installation Line Number 4414 ANI/Caller ID Number Prints When Caller Hangs Up Lost or Abandoned Calls ANI/Caller ID Number Storage Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent: Abandoned call is stored on Agent telephone. Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent. Agent does not answer and call goes to Ring No Answer (RNA) destination telephone: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number is stored on RNA destination telephone. Direct ACD call rings to ACD Group. Caller hangs up before ACD announcer answers: Abandoned Call ANI/Caller ID Number is stored on telephone owner of ACD line which received the call (Program *52 assignment). Direct ACD call is answered by ACD queue announcer: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number information is printed on SMDR as shown directly above. 0874 Figure 11-9 Strata DK I&M ACD ANI/DNIS Printout Example 5/99 11-13 DK424 ACD Installation Insight DK (DK424 only) Delay Ring to Built-in Auto Attendant — Dial ACD Group “1” Digit Time caller dials “1” Auto Attendant Announce Time Duration Ring Duration Time before AA answer Indicate AA sent call to ACD Group 003 MSS 003 ACD 003 204 500 14:47 00:00;10 00;16 14:47 00:00;03 14:48 00:00;42 ACD 204 Work Unit Entry appears in Acct Code Field Agent or Overflow Destination Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent ring before Answer Time Duration Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time CO Line Number 1998 Figure 11-10 Delay Ring to Built-in AA Example Insight DK (DK424 only) The Insight DK™ and Insight DK Plus are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging. Insight DK and DK Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running Microsoft® Windows® 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), Windows 98 or Windows NT® with Service Pack 3. For more information, refer to the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description or other Insight DK documents listed in “Related Documents/Media” on Page xviii of the Introduction. Call Center Viewer (CCV) Call Center Viewer™ is a software application designed for ACD supervisors which enables them to view the calling states and activities of ACD Groups and Agents. With the Call Center Viewer, supervisors can customize the ACD displays, set Call Waiting alarms, and send messages to Wall Boards. The software works on a PC running Windows 95. This section discusses various combinations of connections between the Strata DK System and the Call Center Viewer PC(s). The Call Center Viewer application can be configured to work directly with the Strata DK, or with a SMIS PC, and/or with one Master PC plus additional PCs also running Call Center Viewer application programs. Application Overview Call Center Viewer organizes and displays events reported by the Strata DK MIS port. This application enables you to see the following: 11-14 ♦ Number of Calls in Queue ♦ Number of Agents Available ♦ Number of Agents Busy ♦ Number of Agents Logged-In ♦ Number of Agents Unavailable ♦ Individual Agent States and State Times Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation Call Center Viewer (CCV) ♦ Longest Call Waiting ♦ Strata DK Date/Time ♦ Wall Board Messages Strata DK Requirements The RKYS3 must be installed on the Strata DK RCTU processor card in order for the Call Center Viewer to work. Host PC Requirements The host PC does not have to be dedicated to the application, since the Call Center Viewer application was designed for multi-tasking. When the Call Center Viewer application connects to the Strata DK system, it functions as a machine-to-machine interface, constantly updating call center data. The Call Center Viewer application should be installed on a PC with the following minimum requirements: ♦ Windows 95 ♦ IBM®-compatible 100MHz Pentium® class processor ♦ 16MB of RAM ♦ Hard drive with 10MB of available space ♦ One available serial communication ports; two if Wall Boards are used ♦ SVGA color display ♦ Windows Graphics Acceleration card ♦ Keyboard and Mouse ♦ Parallel Printer Port Increasing the PC’s processor speed and adding RAM will improve the host PC’s performance, therefore boosting the performance of the Call Center Viewer application. To ensure data integrity, Toshiba strongly recommends that both the host PC and CCV application remain in continuous operation once the CCV application session begins. Note Strata DK I&M The term “Wall Board” refers specifically to the physical Wall Board. The Call Center Viewer software uses the term “Reader Board” in place of “Wall Board.” 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation When the CCV application starts, the objects are displayed in Tree View, including ACD Groups, Agents, and Reader Boards. 11-15 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Following is an example of a typical Call Center Viewer display. Main Menu List View Tree View Status Bar 2097 Reference Information Refer to the Call Center Viewer User Guide for software installation and operation instructions. CCV Configuration Considerations The Call Center Viewer application can connect solely to the Strata DK280 or DK424 port, or in parallel with other CCV applications, or with a Software MIS (SMIS) computer. The number of CCV PCs and the hardware configuration determines the type of connectors needed. Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem adapter may be needed. Connectors This section describes the various connectors used with the CCV. Specific instructions for different types of configurations appear later in this section. ct ne on C " "Y er V ie w r te IS en M lC K al TE R D C The CCVY connector enables two-way transmission between the Strata DK and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and oneway transmission to other PCs. Use the CCVY to install multiple CCV PCs. (See Figure 11-11). or Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) M N TR 2 M N TR 1 M A S The CCVY enables only SMIS to send ACK and NAK to the telephone system, and not from the Call Center Viewer host PC(s). The PC(s) only receive data on the RXD lead from the Strata DK system. 23 80 An example of CCV connections is shown in Figure 11-18. Figure 11-11 11-16 Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration PPTC Connector A PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F is used to connect a six conductor standard telephone cord plug to connect the PC’s COM port (see Figure 11-12). To CCVY 2511 Standard Modular Telephone Cord (7 ft. maximum) 25 or 9 Pin Connector Figure 11-12 There are three models of the PPTC appropriate for this application. See Figure 11-13 for pinout details for connecting the Call Center Viewer with equipment, such as Line Drivers and Data Broadcast Units. PPTC PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F Connector RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 PPTC-9 9-pin Female 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 Conductor Line Cord 6 Conductor Line Cord 5 1 4 6 3 2 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 7 8 20 6 2 3 PPTC-25F 25-pin Female 1 2 3 4 5 6 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 7 8 20 6 2 3 2513 Figure 11-13 PPTC Pinout Diagram Line Driver An RS-232 short-haul modem or Line Driver is needed to boost transmission for PCs located more than 50 feet from the Strata DK System. A suitable Line Driver is made by Black Box® Corporation at (724) 746-5500, Model ME764A-MSP (male) or ME764A-FSP (female). See Figure 11-14. DK424 ACD Installation SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD PPTC 25-pin Male 1 2 3 4 5 6 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD RSIU/RSIS/ RMDS/PIOU 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Conductor Line Cord 2544 Figure 11-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 RS-232 Short-haul Line Driver 11-17 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Line Drivers must be used in pairs. Figure 11-15 shows the connections between the two line drivers. + G RCV + XMT Pair 1 + RCV - XMT + Twisted-pair Cable G Pair 2 2547 Figure 11-15 Twisted Pair Connections Instructions for connecting PCs more than 50 feet from the Strata DK are covered later in this section. Data Broadcast Unit The Data Broadcast Unit (Figure 11-16) enables you to connect more than three PCs to with the Call Center Viewer application. A data broadcast unit regenerates the RS-232 signal to accommodate multiple PCs. A suitable data broadcast unit to drive eight PCs can be obtained from Black Box Corporation at (724) 746-5500, model number TL158A. 2336 TXD CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 PWR Figure 11-16 RJ-25 Data Broadcast Unit This unit is powered by AC. If the Strata DK424 system is equipped with reserve power, then a small PC-type uninterrupted power supply can be used for full system operation in the event of a power failure. Instructions for connecting multiple PCs to the CCV appear later in this section. CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC ➤ Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to the COM port of the host computer with an RS-232 cable. See Figure 11-17. Strata DK Wall Board CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10 Host PC with Call Center Viewer (CCV) 4076 Figure 11-17 11-18 Connecting Strata DK Directly to a CCV PC with Optional Wall Board Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC, More than 50 Feet Away 1. Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to the ME764-MSP Line Driver with an RS-232 cable (see Figure 11-18). Set the switch on the Line Driver to DTE. 2. Connect the other end of the Line Driver to the COM port of the host PC. Set the switch on this Line Driver to DCE Strata DK Host PC Line Driver must be less than 50' from DK ME764-FSP ME764-FSP Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem SW: Set to DTE Position SW: Set to DCE Position Plugs into 25-pin COM Port of PC 2402 4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC male connector Connecting Strata DK to a CCV PC More Than 50 Feet Away Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation Figure 11-18 11-19 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting CCV and SMIS Call Center Viewer monitors the data flowing between the Toshiba SMIS and the Strata DK. This enables the CCV application PC to display information and work in conjunction with a SMIS computer that is connected to the same Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port. The CCV application and the SMIS application must reside on separate computers because SMIS requires a dedicated PC. The CCV provides the real-time status displays and connection of electronic Wall Boards. SMIS is used to provide historical ACD reports. The CCV can run concurrently with other Windows applications on other ACD Supervisors’ PCs. ➤ To connect the CCV to SMIS PC, less than 50 feet from the DK 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 11-19. Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem adapter may be needed 2. Use a six-conductor modular telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” port on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC. 4. To connect up to two more PCs, use a six-conductor modular telephone cord between the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port(s) with a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the PCs. Strata DK 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector Figure 11-19 11-20 DK MIS MASTER MNTR1 MNTR2 2425 CALL CENTER VIEWER "Y" CONNECTOR PC with SMIS Second PC with CCV Connecting Strata DK to SMIS and CCV PCs Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs If you are connecting multiple PCs with the CCV application, use: One Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY) One six-conductor telephone cord per PC, plus one cord for the DK to CCVY connection One PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F pin connector per PC ➤ To connect up to three CCV PCs to the Strata DK 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 11-20. 2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” jack on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the Main Call Center Viewer PC. 4. Connect the additional PCs the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port with a six-conductor line cord. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F on the PC end of the cord. Strata DK Wall Boards TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10 Master CCV PC MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56 2427 CCVY Connector CCV PC#2 CUSTOMER SUPPORT CW:5 LCW: 3:15 CCV PC#3 Figure 11-20 Connecting Strata DK to Two or Three CCV PCs Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector 11-21 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Connecting the CCV to More than Three CCV PC Use a Data Distribution Box when you are connecting more than three PCs using the CCV software. You will also need the connectors listed on the previous page. ➤ To connect Strata DK to multiple CCV PCs 1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU PCBs). See Figure 11-21. 2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS” port on the CCVY. 3. Plug a six-conductor modular plug into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC. 4. Make sure that the Data Distribution Box is strapped for DTE operation for every output port (8). By using multiple data broadcast units, as many PCs as desired can be used, provided each one has the Call Center Viewer application and key installed. 5. Plug in a six-conductor line cord to either the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port. connect the other end to the Data Distribution box ...or if the PCs are located more than 50 feet from the DK, use Line Driver Modem(s) to boost the signal (see Figure 11-22). Use a a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the recommended ME764MSP Line Driver modem. Connect the other end of the Line Driver modem directly into the Data Distribution box. 6. Connect the additional PCs to the Data Distribution box with RS-232 cables or line cords with PPTCs. Strata DK SMIS Master CCV PC Data Distribution Box CCVY 2428 CCV Slave PC1 or PCs can be connected with a PPTC and standard phone cord or an RS-232 cable CCV Slave PC2 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord RS-232 cable PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector PPTC male connector Figure 11-21 Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs (Less than 50’ From the DK) 11-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 DK424 ACD Installation CCV Configuration Instructions Strata DK SMIS Master CCV PC 2428 ME764-MSP ME764-MSP Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem CCVY Must be less than 50' from DK 2232 CCV Slave PC1 Data Distribution Box Second LD can be up to four miles from DK CCV Slave PC2 CCV Slave PC3 4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord 6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord RS-232 cable PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector CCV Slave PC4 PPTC-25F connector Figure 11-22 Connecting Multiple CCV PCs (More than 50’ from Strata DK) DK424 ACD Installation Strata DK I&M 5/99 11-23 DK424 ACD Installation Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards Electronic Wall Boards can be connected to each supervisor’s PC to display call center status data over head from the Call Center Viewer application. This provides visibility of important call center event information to both supervisors and agents. The supervisor can also send custom, user defined, text information to the electronic Wall Board. This can be used for general information, motivational messages, etc. One copy of the Call Center Viewer application supports a Wall Board network which can cover all active ACD groups. The Call Center Viewer application works with Spectrum 200, 300 and 700 series electronic Wall Boards listed below. In the following table, “R” stands for a red display and “C” stands for a three-color display: green, amber, and red. Table 11-1 Wall Board Model and Part Numbers Model Toshiba Part Number 215R Master TOS1512RM1 215R Slave TOS1512RS1 215R Stand-alone TOS1512RA1 215C Master TOS1512CM1 215C Slave TOS1512CS1 215C Stand-alone TOS1512CA1 320C Master TOS1023CM1 320C Slave TOS1023CS1 320C Stand-alone TOS1023CA1 330C Master TOS1033CM1 330C Slave TOS1033CS1 330C Stand-alone TOS1033CA1 714C Master TOS3417CM1 714C Slave TOS3417CS1 714C Stand-alone TOS3417CA1 Message Area Size 27” wide x 2.1” high 54” wide x 3.1” high 81” wide x 3.1” high 45.6” wide x 4” high Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards are available directly from Spectrum Corporation (800-9446200 or at Website: http://www.specorp.com). Spectrum provides technical support for their products. Toshiba does not plan to sell, stock, or provide technical support for Spectrum Wall Boards. Multiple Wall Boards Each Call Center Viewer PC can drive multiple electronic Wall Boards that function independently from other supervisor’s Wall Boards. Wall Boards connect to each other using a twisted pair Spectrum network. Up to 255 slave Wall Boards can be attached to one master Wall Board. The total cable distance can be up to 10,000 feet. Each supervisor can send custom messages to that supervisor’s Wall Board. The Wall Boards are addressable so that multiple supervisors can use a group of Wall Boards connected to one PC to send messages and ACD data differently to each Wall Board. 11-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding 12 This chapter describes the procedures to diagnose faults in the Strata DK14 and DK40i Key Service Unit (KSU) and the DK424 system. Faults are classified and then cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and by performing operational tests in the sequences by prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in “Fault Isolation Flowcharts” on Page 12-10. Fault Classification A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical sequence (Flowchart 12-1 on Page 10). The flowcharts assume that the fault was discovered and reported by a digital or electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore, are classified according to the way they would appear at the digital or electronic telephone. Fault Clearing Procedures Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH source, etc. Important! Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as described in the Strata DK Programming Manual. It is very important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware. Initialize the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) before testing new systems or when changing the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 RCTU PCB. Fault Finding Strata DK I&M 5/99 12-1 Fault Finding Parts Return Faults in the Strata DK40i and DK424 are cleared by replacing PCBs, telephones (digital or electronic) or the power supply, as instructed in the flowcharts. Five symbols are used in the flowcharts, which are identified in Figure 12-1. The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to permit rapid fault localization within the system. All fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classification Flowchart, which is arranged in the correct fault locating sequence. Marking points of a flowchart sequence. Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure. Question to be answered YES or NO. Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location. Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points. Statement of a required action. 1887 Figure 12-1 Flowchart Symbols CAUTION! When handling PCBs, do not: Drop a PCB. Stack one PCB on top of another. Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by touching the grounded cabinet. Touch the PCB contacts with your fingers. Important! If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB, reinstall the original PCB in the KSU/cabinet before trying another PCB. Parts Return 1. Pack the part in a suitable container (original box is highly recommended). Use anti-static containers for all PCBs and feature cartridges. Use plastic bags for digital or electronic telephones, KSU/cabinet, etc. CAUTION! To avoid damage, never write on the part itself. 2. Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair. Note 12-2 Return tags are available from Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding KSU/RCTU Fault Isolation KSU/RCTU Fault Isolation The DK14 and DK40i KSU circuits, and DK424 RCTU circuits may contain a “soft” fault due to an extremely high level of static electricity and/or improper or no System Initialization. If the KSU or RCTU is found defective during the fault finding procedures, attempt to clear a “soft” fault before returning the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or the DK424 RCTU PCB for repair. ➤ To clear a “soft” fault 1. Initialize the system, then re-program the system as necessary to test for the fault. 2. If the fault returns again, tag the defective KSU or RCTU and return it for repair. Fault Isolation Procedure 1. Test the power supply (see “Testing the System’s Power Supply” on Page 3-6). Test AC power and ground per system installation section. 2. Verify that the BATT jumper plug on the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU motherboard, or the DK424 common control RCTU PCB, is in the ON position. 3. If there are feature keys, verify that they are correctly installed: ♦ DK14: verify that the QKYS is correctly installed per Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation. ♦ DK40i verify the KKYS option installation on the K4RCU3 per Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. ♦ DK424 verify correct installation of the RRCS or RKYS options on the RCTU per Chapter 7 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs. 4. For the DK14 and DK40i, skip to Step 6. For the DK424, make sure the system power is OFF. Then install an RCTU in the “RCTU” slot of the base cabinet. If RCTUD is installed, install RCTUC in the “R11” slot of the base cabinet. If RCTUBB is installed in the “RCTU” slot, install RCTUBA in the R11 slot of the base cabinet. 5. For DK424: If installing RCTUBA and RCTUBB, RCTUC and RCTUD, or RCTUE and RCTUF connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. 6. Verify that all PCBs are installed in proper slots per Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation, Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration, or Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration. 7. Turn system power ON; backup the customer database using DK Admin or DK Backup. For the DK424, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on RCTUA3, RCTUBB, RCTUB, RCTUD, RCTUE (RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC and RCTUF do not have heartbeat LEDs). 8. Run System Initialization Program 91-9 (two times) per Program 91-9. 9. Run Program 03, for all option PCBs installed per Program 03. 10. Run the processor RAM tests with Program 00 (Part 2). 12. After performing the above steps, tag the defective PCB(s), Power Supply, or KSU, and return for repair. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding 11. Enter the customer database (manually or with DKAdmin or DKBackup) and retest for faults. 12-3 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test This test applies to the base and expansion cabinet RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies. Cabinet PCBs may or may not be installed when beginning this test. Some steps in the test require an AC/DC voltmeter that can measure up to 50VDC and 150VAC. Notes ● ● RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies are fit, form, and functionally the same. They can be interchanged and mixed in DK280 and DK424 systems. To test DK14 or DK40i power supplies, see their respective installation in Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation or Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation. ➤ To test the Power Supply 1. Verify that the correct RPSU280 and RPSU424 jumper plug is installed in the jumper plug socket. The plug with the wire must be installed on the base cabinet power supply and the plug without the wire must be installed on all expansion cabinet power supply. One of each plug is supplied in a plastic bag attached to each power supply. 2. Verify the power supply ON/OFF switch is in the ON position. Note The base cabinet ON/OFF switch must be ON to allow expansion cabinet power supplies to operate. Verify that the data ribbon cable is plugged into the base from all expansion cabinets. Check AC power and ground per AC Power and Grounding Requirements in Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. 3. Ensure the AC power cord is plugged into the RPSU280 or RPSU424 AC IN connector and the commercial AC outlet (or power strip (RPSB) if used). The green power LED indicator will be on when AC power is connected to the power supply and the ON/OFF switch is ON. Take appropriate action to restore AC power if necessary. Note The green power LED indicates that AC voltage is present at the AC IN connector only when the power supply ON/OFF switch ON. This is helpful for battery backup systems— the POWER indicator will be OFF and the +5V and –5V indicators will be ON when the DK280 or DK424 is operating on reserve power (batteries). 4. Verify that the +5V and –5V green LED indicators are ON. If one or both indicators are OFF, remove cabinet PCBs one at a time and check if +5V or –5V indicators turn on (it may be necessary to turn power OFF and ON to restore ±5V). Replace defective PCBs causing a ±5V fault. Important! If a CRCU PCB is installed on an RCTU PCB, ±5V will turn OFF. Do not install CRCU on RCTU. Only RRCS DTMF PCBs can be installed on RCTU. 5. Lightly press the three –24 circuit breakers to ensure they have not accidentally opened during shipment. If a circuit breaker continues to “trip,” remove cabinet PCBs, one at a time, and try to reset the circuit breaker. Replace defective PCBs if causing –24V fault. If breakers continue to trip, go to Step 7. 6. Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power supply DC output voltages at the “DC OUT” connector on the power supply. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the FG screw. Insert the negative (red) meter lead tip into the DC out connector until it makes contact. 12-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test Make sure that +5V, –5V, and –24V are within the range specified in Figure 12-2. Do this test with PCBs inserted; if a voltage(s) is not within specification, remove PCBs, one at a time and recheck the voltage. (Power may have to be turned OFF and ON to restore a voltage.) Replace any PCB which causes a voltage fault. If voltage tests out of specification with all PCBs removed from the cabinet, go to Step 7. 7. Unplug the cabinet DC power connector from the power supply “DC OUT” jack. Attempt to reset -24V breakers per Step 5. If breaker cannot be reset replace power supply; if breakers reset go to Step 8. 8. Check the power supply DC voltages measuring at the power supply “DC OUT” jack with the black meter lead on the BATT “+” terminal. If the DC voltages are within specification when the cabinet DC power connector is disconnected but not within specification when the cabinet is connected, the cabinet is probably defective. If the DC voltages are not within specification when the cabinet DC power connector is unplugged, the power supply probably is defective. Replace the defective cabinet or power supply per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation. Important! +5VDC (white wire) cannot be checked with the DC out cable disconnected. 9. Using the DC voltmeter, check the RPSU280 battery charger as follows: Remove the battery cable from the power supply “BATT” connector. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the “+” BATT pin and the negative (red) meter lead on the “–” BATT pin. The allowed range is (–26.3VDC ~ –27.8VDC). The “BATT” connector output of the RPSU424 is 0VDC unless connected to good batteries. If BATT output is not within specification, replace the RPSU280. Fault Finding Strata DK I&M 5/99 12-5 Fault Finding DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test Power Indicator LEDs (Green) DC Out Cable/connector DC OUT R11 PCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 1 Base Jumper Plug POWER -24V 2 +5V 3 -5V DKSUB DKSUE AC Power Cord + BATT ON OFF R11 RCTU S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 –24VDC Circuit Breakers DC VOLTAGE PINS Red Wire No Wire Blue Wire White Wire Green Wire +5VDC 0VDC –5VDC +5VDC 0VDC Green Wire Green Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire Yellow Wire 0VDC 0VDC –24VDC –24VDC –24VDC DC VOLTAGE SPECIFICATION –5VDC (–4.5 ~ –5.5), Expansion Cabinet only + 0 –24VDC (–26.3 ~ –27.8) – –26.3 ~ –27.8* FG Wire and Spade Lug 24VDC Circuit Breaker Assignments: AC IN ON/OFF Switch Third Wire Ground or Power Supply Daisy Chain Ground to Next Power Supply BASE CABINET 24V-1 S15, S16 24V-2 S13, S14 24V-3 S11, S12 BATT (VDC) –5VDC (+4.5 ~ +5.5) FG S16 EXP. CABINET 24-1 SX1, SX2 24-2 SX3, SX4, SX5 24-3 SX6, SX7, SX8 Base Jumper Plug Expansion Jumper Plug 4252 *RPSU424 “BATT” is 0 volt unless connected to good batteries. Figure 12-2 RPSU280 Power Supply Voltage Test Points / Circuit Breakers / Jumper Plugs 12-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Station Cable Continuity Check Voltmeter Test Use a voltmeter to check cable continuity between the DK40i KSU/DK424 cabinet, digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, and the attendant console (DK424). Make tests at the modular block. Refer to Tables 12-1 and 12-2. ➤ To perform the voltmeter test 1. Refer to Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for appropriate MDF wiring diagrams in Chapters 1 and 3. 2. Disconnect the digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, PDIU-DS, HDCB, or DDCB. 3. Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the wires of the two pairs to verify the readings shown in Table 12-1 for digital telephone ports. Refer to Table 12-2 for electronic telephone ports. The reading will be a plus or minus depending on meter lead placement. 4. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. See “Power Supply Replacement” on Page 1-9, Page 3-20, or Page 5-11. 5. For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or electronic) cable, use an ohmmeter to make a more precise check. Table 12-1 Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Voltmeter 1. 2. Pair From Wire Color Pair To Wire Color 1 1 T R Green1 Red 2 2 T T Black Black 0 242 1 1 T R Green Red 2 2 R R Yellow Yellow 242 0 1 2 T T Green Black 1 2 R R Red Yellow 242 242 Voltage The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements. Fault Finding Strata DK I&M 5/99 12-7 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Table 12-2 Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Voltmeter 1. 2. Pair From Wire Color Pair To Wire Color 1 1 T R Green1 Red 2 2 T T Black Black 242 242 1 1 T R Green Red 2 2 R R Yellow Yellow 242 242 1 2 T T Green Black 1 2 R R Red Yellow 0 0 3 3 T T White White 3 1 R R Blue Red 0 0 3 3 R T Blue White 1 1 R T Red Green 0 0 3 3 R T Blue White 1 2 T T Green Black 0 0 3 3 R T Blue White 2 2 T R Black Yellow 0 0 3 R Blue 2 R Yellow 0 Voltage The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements. Ohmmeter Test Check the continuity of the cable run between the KSU/cabinet and digital or electronic telephone with an ohmmeter. ➤ To perform the ohmmeter test 1. Disconnect the DSS console, electronic or digital telephone. 2. At the MDF, remove the bridging clips. 3. At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red), the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for PEKU/ PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers, see Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 4. At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The proper readings are shown in Table 12-3 for digital telephones, DDSSs, DDCBs and Table 12-4 for electronic telephones and HDSSs. 5. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. see “Power Supply Removal and Replacement” on Page 1-8 (DK14), or Page 3-19 (DK40i), or Page 5-11 (DK424). 12-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Cable Installation Test If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are within limits, digital telephones, DDCBs, or DDSS consoles may not operate. ➤ To perform the cable installation test 1. Cable runs for the above digital devices must be free of cable splits (single or double). Test for and eliminate all cable splits. 2. Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will not operate if cable runs contain any type (short or long) of cable bridge. Test for and eliminate all cable bridges. 3. When installing the station cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 ft. of an AC power line. AC power lines should cross at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. 4. For DK40i: Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation, Table 3-10 on Page 3-39. Verify that your telephone is wired correctly (2-pair or External power) for the options it supports (ADM, RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, HHEU, DVSU, etc.). Table 12-3 Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From Table 12-4 To Wire T Color Green1 Pair 2 Wire T Color Black 1 1 R T Red Green 2 2 T R Black Yellow open open 1 1 R T Red Green 2 1 R R Yellow Red open 40 ohms2 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 40 ohms2 open Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From 2. To Voltage Pair 1 Wire T Color Green1 Pair 2 Wire T Color Black 1 1 R T Red Green 2 2 T R Black Yellow open open 1 1 R T Red Green 2 1 R R Yellow Red open 40 ohms2 2 3 T T Black White 2 3 R R Yellow Blue 40 ohms2 40 ohms2 3 3 T R White Blue 1 1 R R Red Red open open 3 3 T R White Blue 1 1 T T Green Green open open 3 3 T R White Blue 2 2 T T Black Black open open 3 T White 2 R Yellow open open The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. This is the maximum allowable reading for all digital and electronic telephone cable runs except if connecting an HDSS console to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU, then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms. 5/99 Fault Finding 1. Strata DK I&M Voltage Pair 1 12-9 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Fault Isolation Flowcharts The following troubleshooting flowcharts are available to aid in fault isolation. Toshiba recommends reading the previous text in this chapter before proceeding to Flowchart 12-1 on Page 10 to begin fault isolation. Flowchart 12-1 Fault Classification START Please read Chapters 2 and 3 before proceeding. Is the system completely non-operational? 1-1 Yes Go to Flowchart 12-2 No Is it a station no dial tone fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 12-3 No Is it a CO line no dial tone fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 12-4 Is it a remote maintenance fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 12-8 No Is the fault classified on this page? Yes Go to appropriate Flowchart 12-1~12-12 No Call your technical support group. 1879 No Is a DSS console nonoperational? Yes Go to Flowchart 12-5 Yes Go to Flowchart 12-6 Yes Go to Flowchart 12-7 No Is it a voice mail/auto attd fault? No Is it an SMDR fault? No 1-1 12-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-2 Catastrophic Faults START Go to Flowchart 12-1 No Is the system completely non-operational? Yes 2-1 Test the Power Supply as described in the installation sections of DK14 and DK40i and in this chapter for DK424. Also perform Hardware Fault Isolation per this chapter. 2-2 Was the fault isolated by completing the system hardware check? No Yes 2-3 Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. END 2-5 Re-initialize the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) and re-check fault using default program data (do not enter customer database). 2-4 Reprogram customer database, one program at a time, and check to see if fault re-occurs. 2-6 Yes 2-7 No END No Yes 2-8 Fault Finding Does the fault re-occur after entering customer database? Was the fault cleared after re-initializing the system? Call your technical support group. 1880 Strata DK I&M 5/99 12-11 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-3 START Station Dial Tone Faults Check station wiring per the Station Cable Continuity Check in this chapter. 3-1 Repair if necessary. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 3-2 Replaceable Station PCBs: DK14: QCDU, QSTU2 DK40i Base KSU: KSTU2 and all PCBs in the DK40i Expansion Unit DK424: PEKU, PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, PDKU Is the faulty station on a replaceable station PCB? Yes Replace the PCB and retest 3-8 No No 3-3 Are the faulty station(s) only in the DK40i Expansion KSU or only one DK424 cabinet? Yes 3-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes 3-4 Change the DK40i Expansion KSU and retest or check the cabinet power supply per the RPSU280 power supply test. Then replace the DK424 cabinet Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center END No 3-7 3-6 Replace the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU. Or, test the DK424 common control PCB per the Fault Isolation section. Initialize the DK424/DK40i system (Prog: 91-9 and 03). Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 3-4 Retest. No Is the fault cleared? No Call your technical support group. Yes 1881 Go to 3-4 12-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-4 CO Line Dial Tone Faults START 1. Check CO line wiring per Chapter 8. 2. Test central office line using a standard telephone or butt set at the TELCO block. Repair as necessary. 4-1 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Change the PCB and retest. 4-3 4-2 Are all faulty CO lines on a replaceable PCB (not including KSU motherboard)? 4-4 Yes No No Is the fault cleared? Replaceable CO Line PCBs: DK14 QCDU DK40i Base KSU: KCOU TCOU TDDU DK40i only: KCDU DK40i RCOU Expansion RCIU2 KSU/ DK424: REMU RDDU PCOU DK424 only 4-7 REMU RCOS RGLU Yes 4-5 Are the faulty CO lines only in the DK40i Expansion KSU or one DK424 Cabinet? Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center. Yes END No 4-10 4-9 Change the expansion unit and retest. 4-6 Change the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU or test the DK424 common control PCB per the Fault Isolation section and initialize the system (Prog. 91-9 and 03). Retest. Is the fault cleared? Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 4-5 No No Call your technical support group. Go to 4-5 Strata DK I&M 5/99 1882 Fault Finding Yes 12-13 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-5 DSS Console Faults START Note DSS console type? DDSS DSS is not available on DK14. 5-0 Is the correct PCB slot code entered in Program 03? HDSS On PEKU connected to HDSS, set SW1 to the DSS position. Enter correct PCB slot code using Program 03; then turn power OFF (for 5 seconds) and then ON. No 5-1 Yes 5-2 5-3 Refer to Chapter 8 and verify wiring: Go to 5-0 Is the fault cleared? • For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base unit or PDKU (KCDU does not support DDSS). • For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of PEKU (PESU does not support HDSS). No Go to 5-3 Yes END Correct as necessary. 5-4 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Test DSS cable with cable continuity checks in this chapter. Correct as necessary. 5-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 12-14 1883 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-6 Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant Faults 6-1 START Check that the QRCU3 (DK14), K5RCU (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424) is installed correctly and programmed with Code 92 in Prog. 03 (DK40i) or Code 92, 93, and 94 in Prog. 03 (DK424). This chart assumes the VM/AA device has no faults. Is VM/AA integration completely non-operational? Yes Is the fault cleared? Yes END No No 6-2 Check that VM/AA ports are connected to standard telephone station ports correctly. (Refer to QSTU2 (DK14), KSTU2 (DK40i only). DK40i/DK424 RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, and for the DK424 only, RDSU/RSTS wiring diagrams in Chapter 8.) Read “Voice Mail Options” in Chapter 10 and the programming instructions for: DK14/DK40i: 03 (Code 92, slot 00 for K4RCU3) DK424: 03 (Code 92~94 for RCTU PCB) DK14/DK40i/DK424: 15-0 and 15-3 (Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09, 15~20). This explains system hardware and programming options related to VM and external auto attendant. Correct if necessary. 6-4 Correct Hardware/System Programming as necessary. Is the fault cleared? 6-3 Is the fault cleared? END No Yes No Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and 657) are stored correctly in users’ digital or electronic telephones. Use operating procedures in the manual for instructions. END Using a standard DTMF telephone, check all standard telephone circuits (QSTU2, KSTU2,RSTU2, PSTU2, PESU). Replace defective PCB if necessary. 6-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 6-6 Call your technical support group. 1884 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Other VM/AA related programs: • 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones • 13 – Message center • 33 – Station hunting • 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing • 36 – Fixed call forward • 37 – Ring transfer recall time Yes 12-15 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-7 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Faults START 7-4 Read the SMDR installation instructions in this chapter before proceeding with this chart. This chart assumes the SMDR device has no faults. No SMDR data or garbled data is detected at the QSMU, WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS/ RSIU/RSIS SMDR port. No Verify that the PIOU/PIOUS, WSIU (DK14), or TSIU (DK40i only) baud rate SW1 switch is in the correct position (300 bps or 1200 bps) to match the SMDR device baud rate. (Refer to TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS installation in Chapter 7.) If using RSIU/RSIS with DK424, verify Program 76-1 for port assignment. Verify baud rate in Program 76-2 Yes Change as required. 7-5 7-1 No other faults are classified. Call your technical support group for assistance. No SMDR data records are sent correctly but not when the customer requires. Yes 7-2 Set SMDR options in Program 60: Threshold time, long distance calls only, etc. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Verify that the SMDR device communication parameters are set for: 8-data bits, no-parity, 1-stop bit, 300 or 1200 bps. RSIU/RSIS 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600 Change as required. 7-6 7-3 Call your technical support group. No Is the fault cleared? Yes Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 7-7 7-8 END • DK40i/DK424: The SMDR port is the bottom modular jack (TTY is on top) of WSIU (DK14) or TSIU (DK40i only) /PIOU/PIOUS. • DK424: SMDR can be any jack on RSIU or RSIS. See Program 76. • The modular cord connecting to the SMDR port must be 6-wires. Check that the SMDR device is wired correctly to the WSIU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU/PIOU/ PIOUS SMDR port. (Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring instructions in Chapter 8.) Fix as required. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Change the PIOU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU PIOUS PCB. 7-9 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 1885 12-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts Flowchart 12-8 Remote Maintenance Faults START If a digital or electronic telephone is in the Programming mode, it is not possible to enter the Remote Maintenance mode. This chart assumes that the remote terminal and modem have no fault and that Remote Maintenance does not operate. Check that the baud rate switch (SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS) is set to match the remote terminal baud rate (300 bps LED ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) . DK40i: check that the WSIU, TSIU, IMDU, PIOU, or PIOUS is installed correctly. DK424: check that the RSIU, RMDS, IMDU, RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS is installed correctly. If using RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, check that Program 76 settings match DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and modem or remote terminal/modem. Check that communication parameters of remote terminal are set to match the PIOU or PIOUS TTY port or IMDY (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). 8-1 External modem connected to the WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS TTY port 8-2 Is Remote Maintenance connection via external modem on TTY port or IMDU modem? IMDU modem installed on PIOU or PIOUS 8-4 Check that the communication parameters of the remote terminal are set to match the IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the MODEM position. Check that the WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the TTY position. For DK424, check Program 76-1 and verify the port is programmed as a 1 for TTY. • Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in Program 77-1. • If required, assign CO lines for DISA or to ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code 51~53. • When calling IMDU or RMDS via DISA or ring transfer, dial #19. If calling RMDS or IMDU via DID lines, call the sttion number assigned to Port 085 (RCTUB) or Port 245 (RCTUC/D) in Program *09 or 71, 72 and 73. Correct as necessary. 8-3 Is the fault cleared? Correct above if necessary or replace IMDU or PIOU(S). YES END 8-5 NO Check that the modem or terminal connected to the TTY port is wired correctly per the WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS, RSSU MDF wiring in Chapter 8. Correct above if necessary or replace WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, or RSIU/RSIS. • The TTY port is the top modular jack (SMDR is bottom) of the PIOU/PIOUS. • The modular cord connecting the TTY port to the terminal or external modem must be 6-wires. • TTY can be any jack on RSIU/RSIS—see Program 76. Is the fault cleared? Call your technical support group. 1886 Strata DK I&M 5/99 12-17 Fault Finding Fault Isolation Flowcharts 12-18 Strata DK I&M 5/99 13 Computer Telephony Integration Computer Telephony Integration This chapter gives you information about Computer Telephony Integration (CTI). Currently, it includes procedures for using a Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) running under both Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 for Workgroups. About Strata DK and TAPI The Telephony Specification was jointly developed and copyrighted by Intel® and Microsoft. It consists of both TAPI, used by applications, and the Telephony Service Provider Interface (TSPI), implemented by other service providers. Toshiba provides the TAPI connection through a Strata DKT2000-series telephone with a modified Data Interface Unit. The Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for TAPI integrates into the bottom base of a 2000-series telephone. There are two separate modes of operation for the Toshiba TSPI depending on the type of Strata DK telephone system that the DKT/RPCI-DI is connected to. Toshiba’s TSPI is configured using the Telephony icon installed as part of TAPI in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. Windows Telephony is a component of Windows Open Services Architecture. This architecture provides telephony services when connected to many different telephone switches. Therefore, an application needs to know only the definition of the API (Application Program Interface) and not its implementation. The Strata DK TAPI Service Provider (DK TSPI) comes with each RPCI-DI. This device, along with this software module, allows a Windows-based PC to interconnect with the phone system for receiving and making calls. Any TAPI-compliant PC software becomes compatible with Strata DK systems. The disk set also contains a “middleware” software known as StrataLink. This application enables other Windows-based software to also work with Strata DK systems. Requirements To use TAPI with the DKT Service Provider, you must have an IBM-compatible PC with 8 MB RAM, running: ♦ Windows 95, Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11. ♦ Microsoft TAPI installed. (Most TAPI applications automatically install TAPI as part of the normal installation process.) Strata DK I&M 5/99 13-1 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 Step 1: Remove Previously Installed DKT TAPI Service Provider Applications 1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. 083win 2. Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. 068win 3. Highlight the Toshiba DKT TSPI. Click Remove. 4. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes. 13-2 092win Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 Computer Telephony Integration Step 2: Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages 1. From the Windows’ Start button, select Run. 2. Enter A:\Setup.exe, then follow the Installation Wizard instructions. 2534 3. When the Package Selection menu appears, select the appropriate option to install either software package or both software packages (recommended). 2527 4. When the Automatic Startup menu appears, make sure that “Add StrataLink to the Startup Group” is checked. 5. Follow the remaining Installation Wizard instructions to complete the installation. 2530 Strata DK I&M 5/99 13-3 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 Step 2: Initialize StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider ➤ To initialize StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider 1. Press the Windows Start button, select Programs, StrataLink, and StrataLink. 2. Click “Enable TAPI”. 2662 The light above this box will be red at first, then yellow as the TAPI Service Provider is initialized, and finally green when initialization is complete. 3. Press Driver Setup to configure the TAPI Service Provider. 4. Select the Com Port that will be used to make the connection to the desktop telephone. 5. You may type a name in the Phone Name box. This name appears in the application on the PC. 6. Select phone type: 10- or 20key. 7. Select the switch type from the drop-down menu. 8. Select the shared line appearance to enable incoming calls to act like a key system. Leave it unselected for a standard TAPI (PBX interface). 13-4 2695 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 Computer Telephony Integration 9. Click on Configure Keys to define the functions assigned to each of the telephone buttons. 10. Select a button. 11. Choose a function from the list. 12. Name the button to match the name on the telephone. Repeat for each button to be used (see table). 2696 Note Strata Link uses the label to create the customizing Trigger Rules. Unique button names allows rules that apply individually to that button. Buttons with the same name will have the same rule applied. For example, the two PDN buttons will follow any rule If {Call Ringing} on PDN then {Pop Goldmine}”. All other buttons will not respond to this rule. 13. Click OK. Toshiba recommends the following assignments: Table 13-1 DK Button Definitions: DK Button Strata DK I&M 5/99 Use PDN/Intercom Primary Line SDN Secondary Appearance PhDN Primary Line CO Line CO Line Speed Speed Dial All Others Feature Key 13-5 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Using StrataLink for CTI Connections This section provides important general information on StrataLink and how it operates. For specific instructions on using StrataLink with a given software application, see the Application Notes for that software. Many Windows-based Computer Telephony software products either do not have a TAPI compliant version of their product, or need the additional capabilities of a “middleware” software to use their software with the Strata DK. StrataLink is a “middleware” application that provides the multiple line and translation functions for non-TAPI software applications. StrataLink provides the flexibility to interface multiple applications and to be able to define the actions desired for each button on the connected phone. StrataLink works with Toshiba’s TAPI Service Provider (TSPI) v2.26 or higher. Both the TAPI Service Provider and the StrataLink application are included on the TAPI installation disks. Either TSPI, StrataLink, or both can be installed. The installation program selects the appropriate TAPI Service Provider for the PC’s operating system. StrataLink Operation StrataLink communicates with software applications using Microsoft Windows Open System Architecture capabilities for Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). The specific messages are defined as Actions in StrataLink. StrataLink contains a number of Actions for popular applications. The user can select from this list or define new Actions for an application. StrataLink also accepts DDE Execute commands. These commands enable dialing calls, answering calls, holding calls, blind transfer of calls, and hanging up. Many of these commands can be directed to specific telephone buttons or the TSPI can choose the button. When using this interface for dialing, StrataLink also provides for button preferences to be used for intercom, local, or long distance calls. It can include prefix digits prior to dialing the number and automatically insert a “1,” if required for long distance calling. Incoming calls are based upon events from the TAPI Service Provider. These events (Call Ringing, Call Connected, Call Hold, Call Cleared) are used in the Triggering Rules that define what Actions are needed and when. Filters can be used to qualify when an action should be taken. Figure 13-1 shows how StrataLink is used with Windows applications to provide telephone services with your desktop PC. Microsoft Windows PC DDE Link Strata DKT RS-232 Link RPCI to COM Port TAPI Service Provider TAPI DLL (Windows) 2047 StrataLink CT Software Application DDE Link Figure 13-1 Computer Telephony Connection Using Toshiba’s StrataLink 13-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections StrataLink has three basic functions. It: Accepts events from the telephone, applies filtering rules and conditions, and causes actions to take place in the application ♦ Provides for outbound calling and call control from the application ♦ Provides tools for testing the interface and debugging or monitoring the call events Incoming Call Events Computer Telephony Integration ♦ Using Windows TAPI, StrataLink accepts the Strata DK commands and provides a selection of Actions based upon call events (Triggers). Each Trigger can have one or more conditions applied to control how, when, or if the Action should be performed. Each Action has a set of parameters that can customize the application for the user. A list of Trigger events can be created for the desired Action. Provides Outbound Calling and Call Control The Computer Telephony Software creates events for controlling the telephone. The events are controlled using DDE exchanges originating from the application and received by StrataLink. In some programs, the application software must be configured for this operation. Tests, Debugs, and Monitors StrataLink provides several important testing and debugging functions. These tools enable the installer to verify whether the link is functional. The installer can also use the TAPI link to view the details of the information being passed. These tools reduce the guesswork in the troubleshooting and operation verification. Starting StrataLink The Main Screen for StrataLink is shown in Figure 13-2. This screen provides access to the main menu, driver setup, the ability to enable/disable the TAPI link, and a testing interface with the telephone. Most Setup items are located under Setup item from the Main Menu. 3544 Figure 13-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 StrataLink Main Screen 13-7 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections ➤ To install and set up StrataLink 1. Load the software by inserting Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive, and from Windows, selecting Run…, typing A:\Setup.exe and pressing Enter. 2. Follow the instructions for installation. 3. Start StrataLink, enable TAPI and wait for the green light that indicates a communication link with the TAPI Service Provider was successful. 4. Press Driver Setup to configure the driver if not previously done as part of the installation. 5. The Driver Setup selects the COM port, system type, and key definitions for the connected phone. Be sure to assign meaningful labels for the keys on the phone as these are used for creating the Triggering Rules. 6. Test the link with the phone using the Test section. Select the button to place a call, enter a number to dial and press Dial. 7. Once the link has been established with the phone, go to Setup to establish the Preferences, add or edit any new Actions. Note Actions can be tested using the Add/Edit Action and Show Test Params button. 8. Create Trigger Rules using the events expected from the phone and the desired Action. 9. Make several test calls to verify all the pieces are working and the installation is complete. Preferences Most application programs when attempting to dial using a DDE command are not able to specify the line appearance for the call. A line appearance must be specified and can be different for the different types of calls: ♦ Intercom Calls – dialing numbers with less than five digits. ♦ Local Calls – calls that match the local area code specified or calls with only seven digits. ♦ Long Distance Calls – any call with 10 or more digits (also indicate if a “1” needs to be added when missing). When an Intercom or [PDN] button is used to initiate calls, a prefix code is required to select an outside line. Local and Long Distance calls have provisions for prefix digits to be dialed prior to the number received from the software application. Applications using DDE messages generally will dial the area code of the telephone number even if it is a local call. By assigning a Local Area Code, StrataLink detects these calls, strips off the Area Code of the telephone number, and dials using the “Local” appearance. For example, if your Local Area Code is “714” and the application attempts to dial “714-5151234,” the program converts the number to “515-1234” before dialing. It may be convenient to record a person’s extension number as part of the telephone number. When dialed the 10 digit number is sent along with the extension number. As long as the number is stored using any letter, such as “x,” all digits following are not dialed, e.g. “714-515-1234 x205” is dialed as “515-1234”. Some databases may not include a “1” as part of the dialed number. StrataLink can optionally insert this missing digit by using the option “Add 1+ if Missing”. For example, if the application attempts to dial a long distance call like “612-555-1234” (and your Local Area Code is “714”), this option converts the number to “1-612-555-1234” before dialing. 13-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections StrataLink provides a method for defining the format to present this number to the software application. Any character other than “x” is included as part of the number, where “x” will be replaced with the number received as part of Caller ID. For example, if the international number plan is needed for the number, then a code for &H of “1+(xxx) xxx-xxxx” is entered. When a number “6125551234” is received, it will be presented as “1+(612) 555-1234”. Computer Telephony Integration Incoming calls with Caller ID need to have the telephone number in a specific format for the lookup function to work. Caller ID and ANI numbers are received from the telephone network as 10 digits. Many databases store the numbers in a more readable format using punctuation formats by inserting hyphens, parenthesis, and spaces. The Preferences dialog box is shown in Figure 13-3. 3542 Figure 13-3 Preferences Dialog Box DDE Commands StrataLink accepts a number of DDE commands for controlling calls. StrataLink, wherever necessary, offers more than one format for each command. The commands supported include Dial, Answer, Hangup, Transfer, and Hold/Unhold. Table 13-4 DDE Commands Dial Dial a telephone number on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the lowest button appearance (Intercom, Local, or Long Distance) is used. [Dial, “Phone Number”, ] ...or [DialNumber (“Button Name”, “Outside Phone Number”)] Answer a Ringing Call on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the lowest appearance is used. Answer [Answer, ] ...or [AnswerCall ( )] Hangup on a active call. Hangup [Hangup] ...or [DropCall ( )] Hold Strata DK I&M 5/99 To hold the active call. [Hold] 13-9 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Table 13-4 DDE Commands (continued) Unhold Retrieving a call from Hold. If the “appearance” isn’t specified, the lowest button number with a holding line is answered. [UnHold, ] Blind transfer a call to the designated number Transfer [Xfr, "Ext Number"] …or Transfer, "Ext Number"] Quit Terminates the OA Client program. [Quit] This is a numerical value for the buttons on the attached phone. Buttons begin on the lower left and count upward beginning with zero. Telephone System Events Trigger Rules and Conditions The Trigger Rules are established by the installer or user so that specific Actions can be performed when an event occurs. The Triggering event can be any number of things (e.g., Call Ringing, Call Connected, Call Holding, or Call Cleared). See Figure 13-5. 2657 Figure 13-5 Trigger Rules The existing Trigger Rules can be displayed, edited, deleted or new rules can be added. Multiple rules can be created and active at the same time. Each rule uses the names assigned in the TAPI Service Provider to determine their application to a given event. Buttons with the same name use the same rule written for that name. For example, creating a Triggering Rule for “Call Ringing” on a [PDN] with multiple appearances can be written to apply only to the PDN name, such as “3351.” Specific [PDNs] can be labeled for “Call Ringing,” while other appearances may require a screen pop whenever a call is connected. These other appearances could have the rule “Call Connected” using button. This prevents screen pops for calls which are directly ringing a particular telephone button, while providing screen pops when a call is answered on another button on the phone. 13-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Add/Change a Trigger Rule Computer Telephony Integration When adding or changing a rule, Filters and Conditions fields display on the Add/Change Trigger Rule screen (see Figure 13-6): 3535 Figure 13-6 Add/Change Trigger Rule Filters When the triggering event occurs, it may need to pass specific filters or conditions before the Action is performed. The Filters (see Figure 13-6) are: ♦ Caller ID – required/not required. If there is no Caller ID associated with a call, you may not want to have an Action performed. The most common example is “Screen Pop” where you may select “any Number” to not perform the action until a Caller ID number has been received. To trigger an event anytime a call rings, regardless of whether Caller ID is present, you need select “none Required.” ♦ Trigger Delay – a short delay, expressed in tenths of a second, that will occur prior to the action. The delay is needed to allow the Caller ID or other information to be received prior to performing the action. ♦ Appearance – the Trigger can be used on any line or a specific line. If the same Trigger applies to some lines but not to others, the rule must be entered for each line to which the rule applies. Buttons having the same name need only one rule, e.g., two buttons labeled 205 would have the same action whenever either ring when a Trigger Rule for Call Ringing is created for appearance 205. Conditions Conditions (i.e., Phone State, shown in Figure 13-6) include performing the action “if not talking” or “if trunk number is available.” You may not want to have an Action performed while you are talking on a call. Again, a common example is to screen pop only “If Not Talking”. This prevents an Action from occurring until you are finished with the call or placed it on hold. Strata DK I&M 5/99 13-11 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Actions and Parameters Actions are set up by the installer to perform a specific function (e.g., Screen Pop Goldmine, Pop Telemagic, or Beep My Pager). These Actions can then be used as part of a Trigger Rule and performed when a specific event occurs. The existing Actions can be displayed (Figure 13-7), edited, deleted or new Actions added. 3533 Figure 13-7 Important! Add/Change Actions Deleting or adding Actions without instructions from Toshiba or knowledge of your program’s DDE commands is not recommended. Toshiba supports editing actions that are based on Application Notes. Add/Edit Action When adding or editing an Action, the following fields are displayed (see Figure 13-8 and the following text): 3543 Figure 13-8 Important! 13-12 Add/Edit Actions Changes to these items without specific instructions in the program’s Application Notes is not supported by Toshiba. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Type – Select the Action to be performed from the pull-down menu. Each Action has one or more parameters that must be provided by the user/installer. These parameters often contain “tokens” that enable the inclusion of real-time information (e.g., Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The choices are as follows: ♦ ♦ DDE Execute – Sends a specific DDE command to the program you specify. This Action is very flexible and can be used to communicate with many different types of programs for a variety of purposes (e.g., Screen Pop). DDE Execute String parameters include: ♦ App Name – Used to set the DDE name of the application to receive the DDE event. ♦ App Topic – Used to set the DDE “Topic” for the application to receive the DDE event. ♦ DDE Execute String – This is the command executed by the application receiving this DDE event. Typically this command includes token(s) so that real-time information is included in the command string. Computer Telephony Integration Action Name – Every event Action has a “Name” that you should set to describe the result the action, such as “Beep My Pager.” This name is used in the Trigger Rules. Show/Hide Test Params Button – When you set up an Action, it is always a good idea to make sure the Action works correctly. The Show Test Params button exposes a set of parameters (e.g., Calling Phone Number and Calling Name) that can be changed for verifying the action defined. ➤ To execute the command, press the Do Test button. The results of the action are displayed on the lower part of the window. Clicking on the open part of the window clears the test results and the process repeated. Some parameters contain token(s) that enable the inclusion of real-time information (like the Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The Tokens are described in Table 13-9. Table 13-9 Tokens Token Note Strata DK I&M Function &P Caller Phone Number: Unformatted &H Caller Phone Number: Formatted 714-555-12341 &I Caller Phone Number: Formatted (714)555-12341 &N Caller Name &L Elapsed Time of Call (Seconds) &C TAPI Call ID &R Trunk (CO Line) Number &E Called Phone Number (DNIS) &F Called Name (DNIS Tag) &A Phone Button Number &B Phone Button Name &D Date: MM:DD:YY &T Time of Day: HH:MM The format is defined using the Preferences dialog box. 5/99 13-13 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections TeleMagic Link The TeleMagic program (from Telemagic, Inc.) communicates with StrataLink via a special link called TeleMagic. The TeleMagic Link appears automatically each time StrataLink is accessed and provides a means to set up and monitor communication between the two programs. Important! For this link to operate, the TeleMagic program must be loaded and operational. If you select Auto Activate Link (see Figure 13-10), StrataLink automatically attempts to establish the TeleMagic link periodically (every 30 seconds or so) until the connection is made. Once the link is established, the Link Active light changes from Red to Green, dialing and Screen-Pop can function. For Screen-Pop to work, the appropriate Trigger Rules must be set up. 3549 Figure 13-10 Telemagic Link Pop TeleMagic This instruction sends a “Pop” or “LookUp” command to TeleMagic with the configuration you specify. This is used to Screen-Pop the TeleMagic contact manager when a call rings in. Pop TeleMagic parameters are: ♦ Index Level – Tells TeleMagic the level on which to perform the search (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.). Leaving this parameter blank causes the search to occur on the level in present use. ♦ Index Name – Selects the TeleMagic index to be used for the search. For Screen Pop this is typically “TelePhone #”, but since the Indexes within TeleMagic are programmable, this could be set to any appropriate index. The TeleMagic Link must be operational before you can make this selection. ♦ Search String – This should be set to whatever string should be searched for using the above two parameters. For Screen Pop, this is typically the Calling Phone number which would be the token &P. Testing TSPI Link The TAPI dialog box provides a method for verifying the TAPI Driver is setup and operational. To check the driver, select an appearance (e.g., Intercom) and click on each of the Pickup, Dial, and Hangup keys individually. To complete the test, you should repeat this procedure for each line appearance. To access the setup screen for the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider, click on the Driver Setup button. The Configure Keys section of the screen should be programmed properly as they will be 13-14 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections The Display section on the screen is the display found on the phone. This information is not normally shown and can be activated by pressing Alt+O (See Figure 13-11). Computer Telephony Integration interrogated and used as the Appearances by StrataLink. Whenever you make configuration changes to the TAPI Service Provider, it is recommended that you exit and restart StrataLink. 3544 Figure 13-11 StrataLink Main Screen Show Events Show Events opens a Debug Events screen which shows real-time events as they occur (see Figure 13-12). The Display option enables you to choose which event you will monitor. 3541 ♦ Figure 13-12 Debug Events Screen Telephone System Events ♦ Show Calls displays the Active Call Queue window (see Figure 13-13), which can be kept open while other activities and functions are performed. 3540 Figure 13-13 Active Call Screen Strata DK I&M 5/99 13-15 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Application Bulletin Contents CTI Application Bulletin Contents The list below gives you the current application bulletins available for understanding, installation and operation of third-party software applications with your Toshiba telephone system. As you get future updates and new bulletins, simply replace older ones with the updates and/or add the additional bulletins. Updates and additions that may affect the list below will also include an update to this Contents page. ♦ AB50-0013 September 15, 1997 Update for Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink (Replaces AB50-0008, April 1, 1997) ♦ AB50-0012 September 15,1997 ♦ AB50-0011 September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0010 September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0009 April 1, 1997 Using TeleMagic Enterprise V2.2 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0008 April 1, 1997 Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink (use AB50-0013) ♦ AB50-0007 April 1, 1997 Using DayTimer Organizer V2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0006 April 1, 1997 Using Commence V2.0 with StrataLink ♦ AB50-0005 April 1, 1997 Golden Gate Pager Client/Server user StrataLink ♦ AB50-0004 April 1, 1997 This bulletin is obsolete. Refer to the new section “Using StrataLink for CTI Connections” on Page 13-6. ♦ AB50-0003 April 1, 1997 TSPI Description V2.15 ♦ AB50-0002 January 10, 1997 Installing ACT! Trial Size Demo Software ♦ AB50-0001 January 10, 1997 Using ACT! Phone Link with Strata DK ♦ Understanding Computer Telephony in a Business Phone System, April 1, 1997 Note 13-16 TSPI Description V2.26 All of the above application bulletins have been sent to you in previous mailings. Place them after this page. If you do not have these bulletins, they can be found on the Strata DK Library CD-ROM. Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces 14 ISDN Interfaces This chapter covers information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). PRI and BRI Overview ♦ PRI is available on DK424 Release 4.0 systems with RCTUBA3/BB4, C3/D4, and E3/F4 processors; but unavailable for any other Strata DK systems or processors. For PRI services, the Strata DK424 uses an RPTU PCB to connect to a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI line using a UL listed Channel Service Unit (CSU) in most locations in the U.S. Each RPTU provides 23B + D channels. The B-channels support CO speech and data connections on the PSTN side only. The RPTU PCB is shown in Figure 14-2 on Page 14-6. ♦ BRI S/T is available for DK40i and all DK424 Release 4.1 processors including RCTUA4, but not for any other DK systems. For BRI S/T services, the DK424 uses an RBSU PCB; the DK40i uses TBSU and RBSU. Both the RBSU and TBSU provide two BRI S/T circuits to connect to the PSTN BRI line using an external UL listed NT1; or, on the station-side, connect to: ♦ S-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-S) ♦ S-type Terminal Adapters (TA-S) with non-ISDN devices Each TE-1-S and TA1-S device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data as shown in Figure 14-1. The station-side BRI S/T circuits are point-to-multipoint. A subassembly (RBSS) can be attached to the RBSU for two additional BRIs for S-type station-side connections only. The RBSU PCB and the RBSS subassembly are shown in Figures 14-14 and 14-15 on Page 14-21. The combination of RBSU and RBSS uses only one slot to provide up to four BRI S/T circuits. Note ♦ Strata DK I&M In DK424, each installed RBSU or RBSS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. In the DK40i, each TBSU, RBSU, or RBSS circuit uses two CO lines (no station ports) when configured for the CO side and two station ports (no CO lines) when configured for the station side. BRI U will be available on all Release 4.2 processors for the DK424, including RCTUA4, as well as the DK40i. 5/99 14-1 ISDN Interfaces PRI and BRI Overview For BRI U services, the Strata DK424 uses an RBUU PCB. The RBUU provides two BRI U circuits that connect directly to PSTN BRI lines; or, on the station side, connect to: ♦ U-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-U) ♦ U-type Terminal Adapters (TA-U) with non-ISDN devices Each TE-1-U and TA-U device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data depending on the device (see Figure 14-1). The station-side BRI U circuits are point-to-point. A subassembly (RBUS) can be attached to the RBUU for two additional BRIs for PSTN and/ or U-type station connections. The RBUU PCB and the RBUS subassemblies are shown in Figure 14-28 on Page 14-33 and Figure 14-29 on Page 14-34. The combination of RBUU and RBUS uses only one slot to provide up to four U-type BRI circuits. Each installed RBUU or RBUS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. Note R SLT Demarcation Point DK424 (NT2) U RSTU DKT PDKU EKT PEKU RBUU (NT-1) RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination T S TE-1-S (Voice or Data) R SLT TA-S TE-1-U (Voice or Data) PC 2751 NT1 RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination RPTU (TE) CSU (NT1) RJ48C 8-wire PRI Office Channel Unit Dealer-supplied CSU and NT1 U PC SLT RBSU (NT) (P-MP) RBSU (TE) R TA-U 14-2 Office Channel Unit, or OCR, is the CO Channel Service Unit RBUU (LT) (P-P) R, T, S, and U are ISDN standard reference points TE-1 = Terminal Equipment, Type 1 TA = Terminal Adapter P-P = Point-to-Point P-MP = Point-to Multipoint (passive bus) Customer Premises Equipment Figure 14-1 Telcosupplied Jacks ISDN SWITCH Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) DK424 ISDN Reference Model Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit RPTU Interface Unit System: DK424 Release 4.0 Circuits per PCB: 24 channels Interfaces with: ISDN PRI Older Version(s): none The DK424 Release 4.0 system supports the RPTU according to the common control units resident in the system. The RPTU cannot be installed in a system operating with the RCTUA4. The RPTU requires installation of a customer-provided CSU in most locations of the U.S. Refer to “CSU Requirements” on Page 14-3 for CSU installation. Testing procedures (local and remote loop back) are in “Loop-back Testing” on Page 14-10. ISDN Interfaces Note The RPTU’s LEDs indicate a continuous status of its operation. They are shown in Figure 14-3. Table 14-5 on Page 14-7 lists the functions for each LED. Switches, jumpers, and interface connectors are described in Figure 14-2. RPTU Overview The RPTU is a DS-1 divided into 24 TDM channels using standard T1 electrical signal format. The RPTU’s D-channel is typically the 24th channel and can control the signaling of 23 of its own B-channels and 24 B-channels of another designated RPTU. Each RPTU can also use its own D-channel for control. The RPTU’s in-service bit rate is 1.544 mbps (± 4.6 ppm), but during a maintenance session, the rate may vary ± 32 ppm. The RPTU provides Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) and ESF with Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) and Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking in the framing bits. Note The Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) which carries alarm notifications, statistics, and error indications is not available with DK Release 4.0 software. Extracting the Stratum-1 clock from the ISDN PRI, BRI, or T1 provider is the most common method used to synchronize the RPTU PCB and the DK time switch to the public telephone network. One RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, or RDTU T1 must extract the clock from the ISDN or T1 provider. The selected unit is designated as the “Primary” timing source in system Program *41-1. For more information, refer to “Timing and Synchronization” on Page 14-11. A dealer-supplied CSU must be installed between the ISDN PRI network line and the RPTU PCB as shown in Figure 14-1. Some telephone companies supply the CSU and call it the Network Interface Unit (NIU). CSU Requirements In the U.S., the CSU must be UL listed and comply with Part 68 of the FCC rules. It must also comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. In Canada, the CSU must be CSA certified. Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-3 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit The CSU is transparent to data, clock, and framing. It acts as a repeater, not a controller, for timing. The CSU also acts as a signal regenerator and must be able to perform loop-back tests and maintenance to both the network and DK RPTU. The CSU is the same type as used for T1 circuits although it performs the function as NT1 for PRI ISDN in the ISDN reference model as shown in Figure 14-1. Slot Assignments Up to eight RPTU PCBs can be installed in a DK424 system providing up to 188 PRI lines (B-channels). If RPTU (PRI) and RDTU (T1) PCBs are installed in the same DK424, the maximum combined PCBs cannot exceed the numbers provided in Table 14-1. The PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the DK424 cabinets per Tables 14-2 and 14-3. The next highest slot adjacent to the RPTU slot must be vacant. Program 03, code 79 designates which cabinet slots contain RPTU PCBs. The maximum number of cards and lines is listed in Table 14-3. Table 14-1 Maximum Number of RPTU PCBs, Lines, and Stations Processor Table 14-2 Max. PCBs Max. Lines RCTUA (1~4) 0 Not Applicable RCTUBA3/BB4 2 47 B-Channels RCTUC3/D4 6 141 B-Channels RCTUE3/F4 8 188 B-Channels DK280 or DK424 Base Cabinets with BA3/BB4, or C3/D4 with MBJU; or DK280 Base with RCTUE3/F4 DK280 or DK424 Cabinet No. RPTU1/Vacant Slots2 1 (base) 131/142 151/162 2 211/222 231/242 3 311/322 4 411/422 5 511/522 6 611/622 251/262 1. Allowed RPTU slots. 2. Slots must be vacant. 14-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Table 14-3 DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUE3/F4 with MBJU Removed Cabinet RPTU1/Vacant Slots2 No. Type 1 DK424 (base) 131/142 151/162 DK280 211/222 231/242 DK424 211/222 231/242 DK280 311/322 DK424 311/322 DK280 411/422 DK424 411/422 DK280 511/522 DK424 511/522 DK280 611/622 DK424 611/622 2 3 5 6 7 371/382 471/482 571/582 671/682 DK280 Does not have a seventh cabinet. DK424 None ISDN Interfaces 4 251/262 1. Allowed RPTU slots. 2. Slots must be vacant. RPTU Installation Before installing a RPTU PCB into a DK424, a number of system programs should be run. This enables the RPTU to function immediately upon insertion. It is recommended that you run these programs in the order listed in the DK Programming Manual (refer to the ISDN section) before beginning installation. ➤ To install an RPTU PCB 1. Set the jumper wire plugs JP1 and JP2 (LB) to the OFF position. 2. Turn the DK424 system power OFF. 3. Insert the RPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot (see “Slot Assignments” on “Slot Assignments” on Page 14-4) and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 4. After installing the RPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Note Strata DK I&M For cabling information and requirements, refer to “Cabling” on Page 14-8. 5/99 14-5 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit RESET SW2 J2 RS-232C CD1 LOS RST BSU TS RPTU1A (front) CD2 FSYC AIS RAB LEDs Backplane Connector RPTU1 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF MCC J1 ISDN (PRI) JP1 JP2 RPTU1A V .1 2543 JP1 & JP2 Figure 14-2 Table 14-4 RPTU PCB RPTU Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Switches/Jumpers/Connector Description SW1 (Line length adjustment switch) Matches the RPTU impedance to the impedance of the line (length between the CSU and the RPTU). Refer to Table 14-6 on Page 14-8. SW2 (Reset switch)1 Resets or initializes the RPTU firmware. Press this switch to correct an out-of-service condition, or just prior to connecting to the Network PRI. JP1 & JP2 (Loop-back jumpers) Makes loop-back tests of the cabling between the ISDN Network switch, CSU, and RPTU. J1 8-pin Modular Connector (RJ-45) Connects the RPTU to the CSU/network PRI ISDN line. J2 6-pin Modular Connector (RJ-11) Connects the RPTU to a terminal or PC to monitor D-channel data. 1. If this switch on the Primary Clock source RPTU is pressed (Program *42-1), the clock source will automatically revert to the Secondary Clock source PCB (Program *42-2). 14-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Reset Switch (resets the software) Not Used RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor (RJ-12) FSYC AIS RAB LEDs RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector (to CSU) ISDN Interfaces LOS RST BSY TS 2747 Figure 14-3 Table 14-5 RPTU LEDs and Connectors LED Functions LED FSYC 5/99 Frame Synchronization ON: Frame alignment is lost. OFF: Frame alignment is working properly. AIS Alarm Indication Signal ON: Receiving an alarm from the CO. OFF: Circuit is working properly. RAB Remote Alarm ON: Receiving a remote alarm from the CO. OFF: Circuit is working properly. LOS Loss of Signal ON: IC signal cannot be detected. OFF: Circuit is working properly. RST Reset ON: CPU is resetting the software. OFF: Circuit is working properly. BSY Busy ON: OFF: TS Strata DK I&M Functions One or more B-channels are busy. All B-channels are idle. Timing Signal ON: Circuit is secondary timing source. OFF: Circuit is not used for system timing. Flashing:Circuit is primary timing source. 14-7 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Cabling To meet Part 15 of FCC Rules, ISDN PRI equipment must be connected using CAT5, Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling between the CSU and the RPTU. CAT5 STP protects against cross talk, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI), and/or Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). STP protects ISDN signal data while being transmitted through the cable and keeps the cable itself from emitting EMI and RFI. To avoid ground loops, connect only the RPTU end of the shielded cable to ground. The DK grounds the CAT5 cable shield between the DK and CSU at the RPTU RJ45 jack. You do not have to connect the CSU ground drain. The CSU ground should not be connected to the cable shield. Important! Shield continuity must be maintained from the RPTU to the CSU, particularly if using extension connecting cables. Keep the cable as short as possible between the CSU and the PRI Demarcation jack, because there is no shield between the CSU and the Demarcation jack. Toshiba provides a cable kit (Part No. RPRI-CBL-KIT), that contains all that you need to connect the network ISDN jack to the network side of most CSUs and the equipment side of the CSU to the RPTU PCB. Depending on the manufacturer, the CSU may use DB15 or modular jacks. If the CSU is equipped with the modular jacks, the DB15/modular adapters are not used. If this is the case, make sure the CSU modular jacks are not shielded jacks. Refer to Figure 14-3 for more information. A detailed pinout diagram for the RJ-45 jacks (USOC RJ-48C or RJ-48X) and the modular cords/ adaptors is shown in Figure 14-2 on Page 14-6. Cable Length The distance between the RPTU and CSU or RPTU and other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) may vary (0~655 ft.). The RPTU must be equalized and its impedance must match the impedance of the connecting cable. Set SW1 on the RPTU for the proper cable length as shown in Table 14-6. Refer to Figure 14-2 for switch locations. Table 14-6 14-8 SW1 Settings SW1 Short (0 - 150 ft.) Medium (150 - 450 ft.) Long (450 - 655 ft.) 1 ON OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON 4 OFF ON OFF 5 OFF OFF ON 6 OFF ON OFF 7 OFF OFF ON 8 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Cable Installation The RPTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba RPRI cable kit for connection of the RPTU to a CSU. Install the kit as shown in Figure 14-3. CSU ISDN PRI Network Jack RPTU DB15 (female) RJ-45 DB15 (male) D A E B C ISDN Interfaces 2752 Item Description A1 Fifteen feet of CAT5 unshielded cable B One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to network jack) C One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to RPTU) Thirty feet of CAT5 shielded cable D1 E One Ferrite core 1. Cable A and D are straight-pinned data cables, not cross-pinned telephony cables. CSU Local Power Adapter 2753 Network Interface Jack RJ48-C or RJ48-X (8-pin Modular) 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 11 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T 9 1 CSU DB15 Female CSU DB15 Male Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (15 ft. CAT5, unshielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular cord to DB15 female adapter C S U 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T Dealer-supplied CSU 3 11 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu RPTU 8-pin Modular Jack Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (30 ft. CAT5, shielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular to DB15 male adapter Network Jack/RPTU Modular Jack Pin Function 1 Tip – Receives from the network (NT – TE) 2 Ring – Receives from the network (NT – TE) 3 Not Used 4 Ring – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 5 Tip – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used Notes ● ● Figure 14-4 Detailed Pinouts for ISDN PRI Cabling Strata DK I&M 5/99 The modular pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking clip down. Shield continuity must be maintained between the RPTU and the CSU, particularly on extension cords. Since there is no shield continuity across the CSU and network jack, the cable should be kept as short as possible. 14-9 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit Ferrite Core Install the Ferrite core provided with the RPRI cable kit as shown in Figure 14-5. This core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. RPTU Side View ISDN PRI Jack CAT5 Shielded Cable Tie Wrap 2754 Ferrite Core ZCAT3035-1330 Note: The Ferrite core must be as close as possible to the RPTU. One Turn Figure 14-5 Ferrite Core Installation RPTU Testing and Troubleshooting Loop-back Testing The RPTU has loop-back test jumpers that enable physical connections (cables/jacks/plugs) between the RPTU, CSU, and the network PRI line to be tested (see Figure 14-6). The tests check that the CSU receives and transmits the PRI signal properly in both directions. The test signals, generated by the Network PRI provider, pass through the CSU and loop around the RPTU. The RPTU sends the received test signal back through the CSU to the Network and the Network detector checks for a valid signal. ➤ To perform the loop-back test 1. Remove the PRI modular cord from the RPTU RJ-45 jack and remove the RPTU from its card slot. 2. Place the JP1 and JP2 jumpers to the LB-ON position. Install the RPTU with the DK power OFF and the PRI modular disconnected from the RPTU RJ-45 jack. 14-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization 3. Turn the DK power ON and connect the PRI modular cord to RPTU RJ-45. 4. After the PRI line and RPTU are synchronized, have the CO generate the loop-back test sign (all “1s” or “0s”). CAUTION! Do not have the CO do a QRS loop-back test, because the test signal may cause the DK to drop all calls and/or stop operating. RPTU CSU CO ISDN PRI Test Signal ISDN PRI JP1 (RJ-45) (LB-ON) ISDN PRI ISDN Interfaces 5. If the loop-back test fails, perform tests to isolate the problem with an ISDN test set, such as the Sunbird, ISDN, or Trend DUET. In this case, the network PRI line is disconnected and the test set is connected to the CSU network input jack. For testing details, refer to the ISDN test set operating procedures. 1.5MHz line Interface LSI Network Jack RJ-48C or RJ-48X JP2 (LB-ON) Demarcation Point 2756 Figure 14-6 Loop-back Test Timing and Synchronization The Digital Network is connected by timing clocks that synchronize the network and have various degrees of precision (stratum levels). There are four stratum levels – 1 is the highest and 4 is the lowest. They are associated with the following sources: ♦ Stratum – 1: Public Telephone Network clock ♦ Stratum – 2: #4 ESS Toll Switches ♦ Stratum – 3: #5 ESS Central Offices ♦ Stratum – 4: Digital PBXs In the DK424, one PRI, BRI, or T1 PCB can be programmed to extract the Stratum clock signal. It uses the signal as the DK system Primary clock reference. The clock provider should be a reliable source, such as a Telco or common carrier (AT&T). All other PRI, BRI, or T1 lines connected to the DK424 will be synchronized to the same clock provider. If the PRI, BRI, or T1 are not synchronized to the same clock provider, the DK424 could experience “slip” problems. Timing reference assignments for PRI, BRI, and T1 are made with the Program *42 series. The timing or synchronization program determines how the DK424 digital voice or data transmission path is synchronized with the far-end digital path. For proper PRI, BRI, and T1 operation, the equipment at each end of the line must be synchronized. Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-11 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization The RCTU time switch is synchronized as the slave to the PRI, BRI, or T1 line (Line 1 in Figure 14-7). The DK424 PRI, BRI, or T1 in any slot number can be assigned as the Primary reference (Program *42-1, DATA=1 for this PRI, BRI, or T1). If a malfunction occurs and Primary reference synchronization is lost, the DK424 automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the Secondary reference, provided that there is another PRI, BRI, or T1 installed in the DK424. The Secondary reference PCB is assigned in Program *42-2. DK424 RCTU PCB Synchronization Circuit Clock Primary Reference PCB* Digital Telephone PDKU Electronic Telephone PEKU Standard Telephone RSTU SS1 DK424 Digital Transmission Voice Path 2757 Time Switch Synchronization Circuit Prg *42-1-1 Digital Voice Path Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI, BRI, or T1 Secondary Reference PCB* SS2 Synchronization Circuit Line 2 Prg *42-2-2 AT&T or other provider PRI, BRI, or T1 Stratum-1 Clock Source Digital Voice Path Clock synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Other RDTU, RPTU, or RBSU SS3 Synchronization Circuit Digital Voice Path * Primary/Secondary reference PCBs are assigned in Program *42-1/*42-2 and can be an RDTU, RPTU, RBSU, or RBUU. Figure 14-7 Line 1 Line 3 Prg *41-1[blank] Prg *42-1[blank] Other Clock Source Other PRI, BRI, or T1 provider Clock not synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Primary and Secondary References Figure 14-7 shows the Primary reference PCB. The clock signal from Line 1 passes through the PCB Software Switch (SS1) and the synchronization circuit of the RCTU PCB. The RCTU clock passes the clock source through the time switch and synchronizes the DK424 digital transmission voice or data path. 14-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) The Secondary reference is activated if the Primary reference fails. The DK424 automatically switches over to the Secondary reference PCB by opening its synchronization circuit (SS1) and closing the synchronization circuit (SS2). When this occurs, the digital voice or data path of the DK424 is synchronized to the Line 2 clock source. If the path is not synchronized to the Stratum – 1 clock source, calls connected through that path experience “slipping” or “jitter” in the digital voice or data path (channels). Figure 14-7 shows an unsynchronized signal from Line 3. The unsynchronized signal produces a clicking or popping sound that is heard by the people connected through this path or causes data errors on data transmissions. The RPTU provides an RS-232 monitor function that enables you to monitor the ISDN PRI D-channel call progress layer two and three messages (setup, connect, and release). This data can be monitored live, saved to a file, and/or printed using a PC with communication software. ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) The hardware connections and communication parameters for the RPTU monitor port are shown in Figure 14-8. Once this connection is setup and established, call monitoring data continues to be sent (on the fly) as PRI calls are originated or received. Two sample printouts from the RPTU monitor are provided. Figure 14-9 shows typical ISDN PRI start-up and synchronization sequences that occur at connection and power on. Figure 14-10 shows typical ISDN PRI outgoing call setup and release sequences. The communication parameters for all call-monitor jacks are 9600 bps, 7, 1, even. RPTU/RBSU/RBBU PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ Call-monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 2755 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ-12) pin numbering Note The RPTU, RBSU, and RBUU ISDN interface PCBs each have a call-monitor jack. The pin numbering and communication parameters are the same for each call-monitor jack. The call-monitor jack on each PCB provides data only for the circuits of the PCB on which it appears. Figure 14-8 Call-monitor Jack for the RPTU, RBSU, and RBUU Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-13 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ 00;00 016 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ 00;00 016 Act. (F1) 00;09 634 LOS (F3) 00;12 109 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ 00;00 017 Act. (F1) 00;06 619 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;06 630 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;07 236 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;07 245 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;11 754 LOS (F3) 00;14 228 Act. (F1) 00;14 415 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;14 427 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;14 753 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;14 765 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;24 275 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 00;24 292 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;28 315 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 00;28 333 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;43 812 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8002 MT = CONN(07) [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA P F P F [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]INFO P F P F [N(S)]000 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO [N(R)]001 [N(S)]001 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO ..........p..583 3001 ..........p..583 3001 [N(R)]002 [N(S)]000 [N(R)]002 2759 Figure 14-9 14-14 Start-up and Synchronization Sequences Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) ISDN Interfaces 01;14’446 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]004 01;14’449 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]002 01;14’456 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]002 01;14’460 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]004 01;19’450 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]002 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 ..........p..583 33 30 30 31 3001 01;19’466 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 01;19’878 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CALL PROC(02) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... 01;19’888 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]003 01;19’924 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = ALERT(01) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... 01;19’932 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]004 01;25’464 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CONN(07) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... 01;25’476 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 01;25’785 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = CONN ACK(0F) 01;25’799 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 01;46’127 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... 01;46’138 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 01;46’449 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 .... 01;46’464 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 01;46’784 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 80 90 .... 01;46’795 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 02;16’659 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]007 02;16’670 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]007 02;22’661 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]007 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0004 2760 Figure 14-10 Outgoing Call Connect and Release Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-15 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) Performance Monitoring The performance of the RPTU can be monitored using the Data Dump Mode. This requires: ♦ RSIU, RSIS, PIOU or PIOUS PCB TTY port. ♦ ASCII terminal or PC with communications software (such as ProComm). ♦ IMDU or RMDS modem or Hayes compatible modem for remote monitoring. The RPTU monitoring feature provides a download of PRI errors detected as shown in Figure 14-11. This data can be stored to a file and/or printed when using a PC with communications software. There are no time parameters for the error report, so the time between error-count increments must be monitored manually. The counter is reset after 15 registrations and begins again from zero. Basically the error count of any error category should not increase within 24-hour periods. ➤ To dump the data (PRI ERROR DISPLAY) from a terminal or PC (local or remote) 1. Establish communications between the DK TTY port and the terminal or PC using a communications software. 2. Enter the security code, and press Enter (or Return). 3. At the >MODE prompt, type DUMP (must be all caps), and press Enter (or Return). The >D prompt displays on your screen. 4. At the >D prompt, type PRIERR and press Enter (or Return). The display (see Figure 14-11) shows all RPTU PCBs (PRI NO=1~PRI NO=8), even if the associated RPTU (1~8) is not installed. The ERROR counter can only be reset by turning the DK424 OFF and ON. ➤ To exit the dump mode ➤ At the >D prompt, type QUIT, press Enter (or Return); the >MODE prompt displays. 14-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Call Monitoring (PRI) ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 1024 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 X 256 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS) = XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS) = = = = = = = = = XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX TIMES (XX = 00~15) TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES = = = = XX XX XX XX TIMES TIMES TIMES TIMES Error Message ISDN Interfaces PRI ERROR DISPLAY PRIERR PRI NO = 1 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 2 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 3 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 4 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 5 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 6 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 7 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR PRI NO = 8 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR Action Synchro Bit Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 1024 synchronization bit errors. Bipolar Violation Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 6.55 x 104 bipolar violations. Slip Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 slips. CRC Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 CRC-6 errors. The RPTU must be in the ESF mode. Figure 14-11 RPTU Performance Monitor Printout Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-17 ISDN Interfaces SMDR Output for ISDN SMDR Output for ISDN See Figure 10-20 on Page 10-36 for a sample SMDR printout and descriptions of each column. RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units System: DK424 and DK40i, Release 4.1 and above Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI S/T when connected to the Public Network or a BRI S-type, TE-1, or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The Strata DK424 and DK40i Release 4.1 system supports the RBSU/RBSS interface unit according to the common control units resident in the system shown in Table 14-7. The DK40i only supports the TBSU. RBSU/RBSS switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figures 14-14 and 14-15 on Page 14-21 and described in Table 14-8. TBSU switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figure 14-8 on Page 14-13 and described in Table 14-10 on Page 14-25. LEDs on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS show a continuous status of BRI operation. Refer to Table 14-9 on Page 14-23 for a list of each LED’s status. Overview The TBSU, RBSU and RBSS PCBs provide the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for DK40i and DK424, Release 4.1. The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The RBSU is the main plug-in PCB that plugs into the DK424 cabinet slots and the DK40i Expansion KSU slots. The RBSS is an optional PCB that plugs onto the RBSU. Each PCB provides two ISDN BRI circuits. Each BRI circuit provides 2 B-channels + 1D channel for voice/ data/video applications. An REBU PCB is a piggy-back PCB that plugs onto the RBSU and provides basic functions for RBSU/RBSS circuits so it must always be installed on the RBSU. The REBU is not required on the TBSU. The TBSU and RBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) BRI lines using an Network Terminator unit (NT1); or, on the station side, they can connect to ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or Terminal Adapters (TA) as shown in Figure 14-12. TE devices include any ISDN device (telephone, fax, computer) that connects directly to S/T ISDN BRI circuits. TA devices match the protocol of non-ISDN devices (telephone, fax, computer) to the protocol of S/T ISDN BRI circuits. The TBSU and RBSU circuits can be configured two ways: ♦ 14-18 As BRI – TE circuits which connect to Telephone Network BRI lines using a NT1. Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units ♦ As BRI – NT circuits which connect to ISDN TEs or TAs. These devices must be S-type station devices. The DK424 and DK40i BRI circuits allocate line numbers and station ports differently. In DK424, each BRI circuit consumes two line numbers and two station port when configured as line-side or station side. In DK40i, each BRI line circuit consumes two line numbers and no station ports; each BRI station circuit consumes two station ports and no line numbers. Important! The RBSU connection options (BRI line or ISDN TE-1/TA devices) are selected in DK40i and DK424 customer database programming and option switches located on the TBSU and RBSU. ISDN Interfaces The TBSU and RBSU circuits that connect to the ISDN network side requires a dealer-supplied NTI interface box to convert the two-wire, U-interface BRI line from the telephone network to the four-wire, T-interface of the RBSU circuit. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The network BRI line connection is a point-to-point connection, which means that the network BRI line can only be connected to one RBSU or TBSU circuit via the NT1 (T-reference point). RBSS circuits connect directly to S-type TE-1 or TA ISDN devices only. They do not support BRITE telephone network BRI line connections. The TBSU, RBSU, and/or RBSS circuits that connect to the DK station side, (BRI-NT, Sreference point) allows direct connection of multiple ISDN (TE-1 or TA) devices. The S point of the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS supports the Toshiba DK passive bus, also known as point-tomultipoint connection. The terminal-side (S-point) of the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit can have parallel connections of up to two TE-1s or TAs maximum. When multiple TE-1 and TA devices are installed on a single TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share, or contend for, that circuit’s two B-channels. That is to say, a maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between both devices connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B-channels is first come, first serve. BRI-NT (4-wire) 3336 .. 1 . TE-1 or TA 2 TE-1 or TA BRI-TE (4-wire) RX BRI (2-wire) RX DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS TX NT1 PSTN RX/TX TX S T U S, T, and U are ISDN reference points. TE = S-type Terminal Equipment TA = S-type Terminal Adaptor Figure 14-12 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Interfaces between the S/T Reference Points Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The RBSU/RBSS can be installed in any DK40i Expansion Unit slot and any DK424 slot except the programming telephone PDKU or PEKU slot. On DK424, each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits and each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines (one port/line per B-channel). Therefore, if the RBSU PCB is installed, the station port and CO line count will increment by four ports and four lines at the RBSU cabinet slot. If the RBSU/RBSS is installed in a DK424 slot, the station port and CO line count will increment by eight station ports and eight lines at the RBSU/RBSS cabinet slot. RBSU and RBSS PCBs can Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-19 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units be installed in any combination so long as the number of RBSU PCBs is the same or greater than the number of RBSS PCBs. See Table 14-7 for the maximum RBSU/RBSS circuits allowed. On DK40i, TBSU and each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits. Each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports or two CO lines. If the BRI circuit is configured as NT, the circuit assumes two station ports. If the BRI circuit is configured as TE, the circuit assumes two CO lines. Table 14-7 RBSU/RBSS, BRI-TE, and BRI-NT Maximums by Type of Processor Maximum allowed: TBSU1 Processor DK40i RBSU/RBSS/ PCBs combined BRI-TE Circuits BRI-TE Channels BRI-NT Circuits BRI-NT Channels 82 6 12 102 202 1 RCTUA4 N/A 4 4 8 8 16 RCTUBA3/BB4 N/A 12 8 16 16 32 RCTUC3/D4 N/A 24 8 16 40 80 RCTUE3/F4 N/A 36 8 16 64 128 1. TBSU and RBSU circuits can be NT or TE, but RBSS circuits can only be NT. TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. 2. Maximums may not be achievable because of power factor limitations. PS-1 Backup Power Option The RBSU provides an optional backup power supply, R40S, that will supply backup power to TE devices in the event of an AC power loss. This power backup option only applies to RBSU or RBSS circuits that are configured in the NT mode. See Figure 14-16 to install the R40S. Note The R40S is not available for the TBSU. Also the DK system must have battery backup to allow the R40S power backup function to operate. The R40S power supply is an ISDN, PS-1 type power unit which means it supplies power to TE devices on the RBSU/RBSS transmit and receive wire pairs as shown in Figure 14-13. This power arrangement is also known as phantom power. Each of the four circuits on RBSU/RBSS can be connected to share the R40S using option switches on the PCBs (see Table 14-8). Before using the R40S as a backup power source, make sure the TE devices do not require more power than the R40S can supply and the TE is compatible with the ISDN PS-1 power arrangement. Figure 14-6 shows the power limits of the R40S. 3031 TE TE Device Power sink RBSU RJ-45 Pin Nos. on RBSU or RBSS NT circuit Pin 3 RX - Pin 3 Pin 6 RX - Pin 6 Pin 4 TX + Pin 4 Pin 5 TX + Pin 5 R40S PS-1 Power Source RJ-45 Pin Nos. on TE device R40S Power Limits: Voltage: 33.3VDC to 38.85VDC maximum Current: 100mA maximum (25mA maximum per each RBSU/RBSS circuit) Figure 14-13 Power Limits of the Backup Power Supply 14-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Installation Step 1: Run Related Programs ➤ Run all ISDN programs related to TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits prior to installation of the PCBs. This enables the circuits to operate immediately upon insertion. ISDN BRI programs are explained in the Strata DK424 Programming Manual under the ISDN tab. Step 2: Set Option Switches/Jumpers ➤ Set all option switches and jumpers on the TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS PCBs before plugging the RBSS onto the RBSU or inserting the RBSU into the system. RBSU/RBSS switch/jumper information and locations are shown in Figures 14-14, 14-15 and Table 14-8. TBSU switch/ jumper information is shown in Figure 14-18 and Table 14-10. RBSU1A RBSS SW7 BSY TS LOS FS P4 J2 BSY TS LOS FS SW2 SW5 SW9 SW8 SW6 SW6 BSY TS LOS FS J7 P7 P2 J4 RBSS1A-CM V.1 RBSU1 BSY TS LOS FS ISDN Interfaces For the DK40i, make sure to run Program *60 to identify all station (NT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits for each RBSU/RBSS and TBSU installed. Program *60 causes station port and CO line shifting on PCBs installed in slots that follow the BRI PCBs. Important! J2 SW3 TB3 J6 SW2 P6 SW5 SW4 J3 J5 SW1 P3 SW3 SW4 J1 P5 SW1 F 2788 J3 P9 P8 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 RB S U1 A- CM V. 1 2789 Figure 14-14 RBSU PCB Strata DK I&M 5/99 Figure 14-15 RBSS PCB 14-21 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Table 14-8 PCB RBSU/RBSS Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Circuit Option Switch Type All SW 1 1 RBSU RBSS Circuit Type Description TE NT Push-button N/A N/A SW 2 Jumper X X 1 SW 3 Slide ON OFF Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 1 SW 4, 5 Jumper N/A ON Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 6 Jumper X X Resets firmware on all circuits of RBSU/RBSS. Drops calls off the RBSU/RBSS. Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 2 SW 7 Slide ON OFF Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 8, 9 Jumper N/A ON Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 1 Slide ON OFF Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 3, 4 Jumper N/A ON Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 2 Slide ON OFF Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 5, 6 Jumper N/A ON Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT. Step 3: Install the REBS Note The REBS provides a basic part of the RBSU/RBSS circuit functionality; therefore, it must always be installed on the RBSU (see Figure 14-16). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the REBS onto the RBSU. Step 4: Install the RBSS Note If one or two additional BRI-NT circuits are required, install the RBSS (see Figure 14-16). 1. Align the four connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the RBSS onto the RBSU. Step 5: Install the R40S Note If ISDN PS-1 backup power for TE devices is required, install the R40S (optional PCB) (see Figure 14-16). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the R40S. 2. Plug the R40S onto the RBSU. 14-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units RBSU Optional RBSS1A REBS (always install) UP UP UP ISDN Interfaces UP Two-circuit Subassembly 2761 UP Optional PS-1 Power Supply UP R40S1A-CM V.1 R40S Figure 14-16 Location of RBSU Plug-on PCBs Step 6: Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet After setting the switches and jumpers and installing the plug-on PCBs as described in the preceding paragraphs, the RBSU/RBSS PCBs can be installed in the appropriate cabinet slots. Refer to RBSU/RBSS Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information on Figure 14-18. After the RBSU/ RBSS is installed in the DK424 cabinet or DK40i Expansion Unit, the status LEDs and connecting jacks are positioned as shown in Figure 14-19. Table 14-9 RBSU/RBSS LED Indications LED BSY TS LOS FS Strata DK I&M 5/99 Indication Circuit Busy ON – Any B-channel is in use. OFF – B-channels are idle. Timing Source Blinking ON/OFF – The RBSU is extracting the clock from the BRI line and is the Primary synchronization circuit for ISDN and T1. ON – The RBSU is the secondary (backup) synchronization circuit for the ISDN and T1. OFF – The RBSU is not used for ISDN or T1 synchronization. Loss of Signal ON – Clock timing cannot be detected from the line. OFF – Normal condition. Frame Alignment Alarm ON – Frame alignment cannot be established. OFF – Frame alignment is established. 14-23 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Step 7: Install the TBSU Carefully align the TBSU connector pins with P11 and P12 on the DK40i motherboard and install the TBSU into the DK40i Base Unit. Use the two supplied screws to secure the TBSU to the motherboard. Figure 14-17 shows the TBSU mounting on the DK40i and Figure 14-18 shows the TBSU switch layout. Table 14-10 shows the TBSU option switches. FG Screw - + Optional with TCOU (provides Caller ID) V1 TC1U2A TCOU1A Install a TCOU, TBSU or TDDU here TDDU1A V1 3796 TBSU1A FS LOS TS BSY FS LOS TS BSY Figure 14-17 Installation of TBSU into DK40i 14-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units ON 100 SW201 OFF NT TE SW200 SW1 Reset ON J2 100 SW101 Cct2 OFF CPU CUT SHORT ROM SW100 Cct1 J1 SW2 W2 IC7 CD9 CD10 CD11 CD12 IC6 TBSU1A FS LOS TS BSY Cct1 J3 Monitor Loop Back ISDN Interfaces NT TE 3795 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 Cct2 Figure 14-18 TBSU Switch Layout Note It is normal for sockets IC7 and IC8 to be empty. Table 14-10 TBSU Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors TBSU Circuit Option Switch Type All SW 1 1 Circuit Type TE NT Push-button N/A N/A SW 100 Jumper X X 1 SW 101 Slide ON ON 2 SW 200 Jumper X X 2 SW 201 Slide ON ON Description Resets firmware on all TBSU circuits. Drops calls off the TBSU. Causes the circuit1 to operate as TE or NT. Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.1 Causes the circuit2 to operate as TE or NT1. Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.2 1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT. 2. SW2 is for factory use only Circuit Switch Type W2 Jumper TBSU1A uses the internal CPU ROM (IC20) TBSU1A uses the external ROM (IC6 and 7) Future Use SW2 Jumper For factory loop back test. Normal operation Used for factory inspection only. Do not cut this jumper. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Short Cut (remove) Description 14-25 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units Modular Jack Pin Configurations BRI Circuit Jack (TE or NT Mode) The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit jack is a shielded RJ-45 (8-pin modular) with Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) pin numbers as shown in Figure 14-19. The Tx and Rx pin numbers change when the BRI circuit is configured with TBSU and RBSU/RBSS option switches for TE or NT (Tables 14-8 and 14-10). If the R40S is installed on the RBSU, the PS-1 voltage is carried on the Tx/Rx wires with polarity. (See Table 14-11). The position of the TBSU BRI and RBSU/RBSS circuit jacks are shown in Figure 14-18 and 14-19 respectively. Table 14-11 RJ-45 Pins in the 8-pin Modular Jack Pin No. TE Side NT Side PS1/R40S Polarity 1 N/C N/C N/C 2 N/C N/C N/C 3 Tx Rx - 4 Rx Tx + 5 Rx Tx + 6 Tx Rx - 7 N/C N/C N/C 8 N/C N/C N/C 87654321 3048 Front View of RJ-45 Jack Cavity Note: The RJ-45 pins are numbered as shown above. Monitor Jack The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS monitor jack is an RJ-12 (6-pin modular). This jack provides an RS232 output that enables you to monitor the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit D-channel, layer-2 and layer-3 data. The monitor jack pin configuration and communication parameters are the same as RPTU and RBUU which are shown in Figure 14-8 on Page 14-13. Figures 14-29 and 14-30 on Pages 14-34 and 14-35, respectively, show examples of the TBSU or RBSU monitor jack output. Figures 14-10 and 14-19 show the location of the TBSU and RBSU monitor jacks respectively. RBSU CKT2 BSY TS LOS FS CKT1 BSY TS LOS FS RBSS BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS CKT4 CKT3 4th Circuit 2nd Circuit RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector 3rd Circuit TB3 (FG) 1st Circuit Reset Switch (resets RBSU Firmware) RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor TB1 and TB2 (PFT) 2795 Figure 14-19 Location of LEDs and Connectors 14-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines Power Failure Terminal Screws TB1 and TB2 are the connecting points that interface a pair of dry contacts that can be used for power failure switching purposes (see Figure 14-19 for the locations). When the DK system (TBSU and RBSU) has power (from AC source or batteries) there is a short circuit across TB1 and TB2. In the event of no power to the DK424, there is an open circuit across TB1 and TB2. The specifications for TB1 and TB2 contacts are: Maximum switchable voltage: 30VDC ♦ Maximum switchable current: 80mA ♦ Short circuit resistance: Approximately 15 ohms Grounding Terminal Screws TB3 is a screw terminal that can be used to connect a ground wire to the RBSU PCB (see Figure 14-19 for the location). This ground enables the RBSU/RBSS to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements. As of Release 4.1, RBSU complies with EMC requirements without grounding TB3 on the RBSU, so it is not necessary to connect a ground wire to TB3. ISDN Interfaces ♦ BRI Wire Type Recommendations CAT3 or CAT5 wire is recommended for ISDN BRI customer-premises wiring. While the ISDN BRI signal works for some distance over almost any wire that is suitable for analog voice service, better wire enables longer runs. CAT5 provides better 100-ohm impedance matching (at little extra cost) between the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit and the station Terminal Equipment (TE-1). Normally the CAT3 or CAT5 wiring does not have to be shielded when used for ISDN BRI premises wiring. However, the RJ-45 jacks on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits are shielded and provide a ground shield in the event that shielded modular plugs and cable are used. Note If using shielded cable and plugs, cable runs should only be grounded at the DK TBSU and RBSU/RBSS, RJ-45 jacks. To prevent ground loops, do not ground both ends of shielded cable runs. TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI Cable Jacks and Connectors In the U.S., the standard connector for ISDN equipment is the eight-pin RJ jack. Patch cables have eight-pole plugs at both ends. The same pinout applies to both ends of an ISDN cable, which is the practice of the data world. This means that a flat untwisted cable with an RJ modular plug at both ends will have the locking tab of the plug on one end, “up;” and, on the other end, “down,” as shown in Figure 14-20. Note Strata DK I&M This is the opposite of telephony “silver satin” cables which have locking tabs on both ends facing the same direction. Telephony cables cause the pins at either end to crossover while data cables provide a straight through pin-to-pin connection between modular jacks. 5/99 14-27 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units A cord of up to 10 meters connects the ISDN BRI RJ-45 wall jack to the desktop TE-1 or TA RJ45 jack. Bellcore recommends that all TE-1 and TA devices be attached with the same standard cord to ensure compatibility. Locking Tab 3039 Four-pair Wire RJ-45 Eight-pole Plug Figure 14-20 Modular ISDN Data Cable The standard pinouts for ISDN jacks is the TIA-568A or TIA-568B jack as listed in Table 14-12. The variants A and B to the TIA specification are electrically the same, only the wire colors are different. However, you should only use one type TIA jack in a customer installation because mixing the two may cause certain wire pairs to be swapped which would result in line faults. Table 14-12 TIA-568A (RJ-45) Jack – ISDN Standard Interface Modular Connector Pinout (RBSU-TE mode) Pin Color Name Function 1 Green T2 Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 2 Green/White R2 Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 3 Orange/White R3 Transmit to Network (NT-1, S/T jack) 4 Blue/White R1 Receive from Network (NT-1, S/T jack) 5 Blue T1 Receive from Network (NT-1, S/T jack) 6 Orange T3 Transmit to Network (NT-1, S/T jack) 7 Brown T4 - Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) 8 Brown/White R4 + Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS) Notes ● ● 14-28 Pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking tab down. TIA-568B swaps pair two with pair three, changing only the color of the wires on the pins. Electrical performance is the same. Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS EMC Ferrite Core Requirement To ensure that the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuits meet the EMC requirements, it is necessary to run all wire connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuits (TE mode and NT mode) through a Ferrite core. Use Toshiba part number, FER-CORE-ISDN, which is shipped with the TBSU and RBSU. Figures 14-21 and 14-22 show how to dress the wiring through the Ferrite core. RBUS RBSS TBSU1A FS LOS TS BSY FS LOS TS BSY CAT 3, 4, or 5 Cable ISDN Interfaces ISDN PRI Jack CAT 3, 4, or 5 Cable Tie Wrap 3377 3046 Tie Wrap Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN Note: Locate the Ferrite core as close as possible to the RBSU/RBSS. One Turn Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN Note: Locate the Ferrite core One Turn as close as possible to the TBSU. Figure 14-21 RBSU/RBSS Ferrite Core Installation Figure 14-22 TBSU Ferrite Core Installation Connecting TBSU and RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) The TBSU and RBSU only, not the RBSS, circuits can be connected to the network side of a BRI line. The TBSU and RBSU circuits must be configured in the TE-mode (refer to option switches in Table 14-8 on Page 14-22 and Table 14-10 on Page 14-25 and Program *60). In the U.S., the BRI line from the ISDN service provider is a two-wire U-type BRI line. This line connects to the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit via a customer-provided NT1 as shown in Figure 14-23. The NT1 is necessary to convert the network BRI, two-wire, U interface to the TBSU or RBSU BRI, four-wire, T interface. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The NT1 is powered by local AC power via an AC adapter supplied with the NT1. The connection between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit is a point-to-point connection, so the NT1 can connect to only one TBSU or RBSU BRI TE circuit. A 100-ohm Terminating Resistor (TR) is required on each end of the point-to-point connection. The TR must be switched into the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit (refer to option switches in Table 14-10 on Page 14-25 and Table 14-8 on Page 14-22) and into the NT1 device. Most NT1 devices have TR option switches; if the NT1 does not have TRs, two 100-ohm TRs must be wired into the NT1 modular jack - one 100-ohm resistor across each pair (Tx and Rx). Refer to the NT1 manufacturers documentation for the maximum loop length between the NT1 and the network jack. The maximum loop length between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU circuit is 1650 feet. Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-29 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units RJ-45 Pinout (NT1 - S/T jack) RJ-45 Pinout (TBSU or RBSU - BRI jack) BRI (four-wire) 3 TBSU or RBSU TE-Circuit Switch in 100-ohm TR using RBSU option switch. BRI (two-wire) 3 4 6 TX RX 4 5 RX TX 6 NT-1 4 Switch in 100-ohm TR. Network BRI-line RJ-11 Jack 5 RX/TX 5 3343 U T Note: T and U are ISDN standard reference points. Local AC Power Demarcation Point Figure 14-23 TBSU or RBSU to NT1 Point-to-point Connection Connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) S-type TAs and TE-1s can be connected to the station side of TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits. TA and TE devices must be powered by local AC power using AC adapter supplied with the TA or TE device. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuits must be configured in the NT mode when connected to TA and TE devices (refer to option switches in Table 14-8 on Page 14-22 and Table 14-10 on Page 14-25 and Program *60). The TA enables you to connect non-ISDN voice and data devices to ISDN BRI circuits. The TA matches the protocol of existing interfaces (R-reference point) to the ISDN S/T protocol (see Figure 14-1 on Page 14-2). TA devices include asynchronous circuit-switched adapters that convert RS-232 async data (like data from a PC COM port) to B-channel 64 kbps sync. TAs also enable you to connect standard telephones and non-ISDN fax machines to receive and make calls over ISDN circuits. TEs include any user device (telephone, fax, PC video conference board) that is designed to plug directly into the ISDN (S/T) interface without the use of a TA. There are two types of ISDN TA and TE-1 devices: the U-type and the S/T type. Most manufacturers of ISDN station devices make both types. In DK424 R4.1 and DK40i, the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS station side, BRI-NT circuits only function with S/T type TA and TE-1 devices. You cannot connect U-type TE-1 or TA devices to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuits. Also, connecting an NT1 to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit to convert from S/T to U interface is not supported to enable the use of U-type TE-1 or TA device on the station side of the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS. U-type TE-1 and TA device interface is provided in the DK by the TBUU and RBUU/RBUS BRI circuit only. TBUU and RBUU/RBUS will be provided in the DK424 and DK40i Release 4.2. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit supports the National ISDN 2 (NI2) S-Interface “passive bus.” It is called a passive bus, because it contains no logical functions. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT interface supports a point-to-multipoint connection on two twisted pairs. Up to two TE-1 and/or TA devices can be connected to one TBSU or RBSU/RBSS, BRI-NT circuit. Using standardized wiring and modular connectors, as explained in previous paragraphs, 14-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units maintains control of polarity. The pinout from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuit to a S-type TE1 or TA device is shown in Figure 14-24 and Table 14-11. TBSU or RBSU NT Circuit RJ-45 Pinout 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 S-type, TE-1 or TA with 100-ohm TR or just a 100-ohm terminating resistor across each pair on a RJ-45 jack. 3344 BRI (four-wire) 3 6 4 5 To local AC Power S-type, TE-1s or TAs without 100-ohm terminating resistors (maximum eight TE-1s or TAs per RBSU/RBSS circuit). ISDN Interfaces Insert 100-ohm TR using RBSU and RBSS option switches. RJ-45 Pinout To local AC Power Figure 14-24 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS NT Circuit Pinout on Passive Bus As a parallel bus, the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT passive bus will accept TE-1 and TA devices scattered on the bus; however, the locations of the TE and TA devices on the S bus is limited by timing considerations. Specifically, the round trip propagation delay of a signal from the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit to one device must be within four microseconds of the delay from the other device on the bus. That is to say, layer-1 frames from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS must be received within a two microsecond window. This says nothing about how large the delay can be. In fact, it can be much larger, as long as the differences remain small. To control electrical characteristics, a 100-ohm terminating resistor (TR) is required at both ends of the passive bus. One resistor should be across the Tx pair and one across the Rx pair at either end of the passive bus. Branch-type passive bus configurations, shown in Figures 14-25~14-28, may only require a TR on the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT circuit side and not on the TE or TA device side of the bus. The TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits provide an option switch that allows the 100-ohm TR to be switched into the circuit on the DK side of the bus (see Table 14-8 on Page 14-22 and Table 14-10 on Page 14-25). Most TE-1 and TA devices also provide option switches to connect 100-ohm terminating resistors as shown in Figure 14-23. If the TE or TA devices do not provide TRs, they may be permanently wired in place on a RJ-45 jack at the far end of the bus. Only one terminating resistor on each pair should be on the far (TE) end of the passive bus - do not switch in TRs on more than one TE-1 or TA device on the passive bus. Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 The correct placement of TRs on the Passive Bus is critical to ISDN BRI circuit operation (see the following TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus configurations section). 14-31 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations The placement of S-type TE and TA devices on the BRI S-passive bus is critical for good TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit performance. Figures 14-25~14-28 show four passive bus architectures that are known to work. In all installations, follow the guidelines of any of these passive-bus models using the wire, cables, and jacks described in the previous paragraphs. TA and PC Com Port x ' ma 360 TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR RJ-45 360 3338 ' ma x ISDN Telephone Figure 14-25 Simplified Short-branched Passive Bus TE-1 PC Card * TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR 850' RJ-45 3339 RJ-45 with TRs * No more than 130' difference between any 2 branches. * ISDN Telephone Figure 14-26 Branched Passive Bus 14-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units 82' ISDN Telephone TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ-45 TR ISDN Interfaces TR 1650' 3340 Figure 14-27 Extended Passive Bus 490' ISDN Telephone TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ-45 TR TR 640' 3341 Figure 14-28 Short Passive Bus Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-33 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI Call Monitor The call-monitor jack located on the TBSU and RBSU enables you to use a PC or ASCII terminal to monitor the BRI, D-channel call setup, layer-2 and layer-3 data (refer to Figure 14-8 on Page 14-13 for information about connecting the monitor jack). Figures 14-29 and 14-30 provide examples of BRI call setup message information that is available from the TBSU and RBSU callmonitor jack. Figure 14-29 Outgoing Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor 14-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units ISDN Interfaces Figure 14-30 Incoming Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-35 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit System: DK424, Release 4.2 and above Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI U when connected to the Public Network or a BRI U-type TE-1 or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The DK424 Release 4.2 system supports the RBUU/RBUS interface unit (Figures 14-31 and 14-32) according to the common control units resident in the system. LEDs on the RBUU/RBUS show a continuous status of operation. Refer to Table 14-13 for a list of each LED’s status. Figure 14-33 shows the location of the LEDs and connectors. RBUU Installation Before installing a RBUU PCB into a DK424, a number of system programs must be run. We recommends running these programs in the order listed before installation. This allows the RBUU to function immediately upon insertion beginning with a self-check loop-back test and then normal operation. Before you can begin installation of the RBUU, you may have to install the subassemblies. ➤ To install the subassemblies (RBUS) ➤ Place the RBUS card (component side facing down) onto the RBUU connectors. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. The RBUS card should have been installed at the factory. ➤ To install an RBUU PCB 1. Insert the RBUU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. 14-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUU1A RBUU1 J1 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 1 P4 J2 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 2 P7 P2 ISDN Interfaces LED Indicator for Circuit 1 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS P6 LED Indicator for Circuit 2 P5 P3 DIN Connector J3 RS-232C Monitor Output P9 P8 RBUU1A 2799 Figure 14-31 RBUU PCB J7 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 4 RBUS1A RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 3 J6 RBUS1A LED Indicator for Circuit 3 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS F LED Indicator for Circuit 4 2800 Figure 14-32 RBUS Subassembly Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-37 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUU1A RBUS1A RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 1 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 2 LED Indicator for Circuit 1 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 3 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS LED Indicator for Circuit 2 RJ-45 Modular for Circuit 4 LED Indicator for Circuit 3 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS RS-232C Monitor Output LED Indicator for Circuit 4 2801 Figure 14-33 Location of LEDs and Connectors (RBUU/RBUS) Table 14-13 RBUU/RBUS LED Indications LED BSY TS LOS FS 14-38 Indication Busy Time Synchronization Loss of Signal Frame Synchronization Strata DK I&M 5/99 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit ISDN Interfaces Strata DK I&M 5/99 14-39 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit 14-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) 15 This chapter gives you information about the Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS), including: ♦ HMIS Server/Workstation PC requirements ♦ Installation steps ♦ Setup Utility ♦ Maintenaince and troubleshooting HMIS comes in a complete software package or a turnkey system that has all of the components pre-installed in the PC. The software package includes: ♦ HMIS application and documentation CD-ROM ♦ Printed user guide ♦ Symantec™ pcANYWHERE™ ♦ HMIS activation key For additional information, see the Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description and HMIS User Guide. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-1 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Minimum PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements HMIS Server To ensure proper operation of HMIS, the following minimum PC requirements must be met. The turnkey package PC is also listed and can be used as a reference for the recommended PC requirements. Table 15-1 Minimum Specifications Hardware Minimum PC Intel® Celeron® Pentium® 200 MHz (or higher) with Universal Serial Bus (USB) port1 Toshiba Equium™ 7000D with Intel Pentium 200 MHz (or higher) and USB port1 RAM 32MB 32MB Hard Drive 2GB 3GB Disk Drive 3.5” 1.44MB Floppy 3.5” 1.44MB Floppy CD-ROM 8 Speed 24 Speed Network Interface Card (NIC) 10BASE-T EtherLink®2 10/100BASE-T EtherLink2 Monitor 14-inch SVGA .28n 15-inch SVGA .28n Video Card SVGA with 1MB VRAM SVGA with 1MB VRAM Keyboard Standard 101/102 Standard 101/102 Mouse PS/2 PS/2 Parallel Ports 1 (for activation key and customersupplied printer) 1 (for activation key and customersupplied printer) Serial Ports 2 2 Modem 33.6 kbps or higher 33.6 kbps or higher Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)3 ONEAC® (highly recommended) ONEAC® (highly recommended) Backup Tape or Zip® drive (highly recommended) Tape or Zip® drive (highly recommended) Connectors N/A 2 PPTC-9(F) Software Minimum 4 Windows 95B/98 Remote Symantec pcANYWHERE 1. 2. 3. 4. 15-2 Recommended Recommended Same Same Port used to plug-and-play peripherals using one interrupt and address. Required if the server and workstations are networked. UPS is part of the turnkey package. It is highly recommended to protect the server from power failure that can corrupt data. Required for USB support. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation HMIS Workstation Table 15-2 Minimum Specifications Hardware Minimum Recommended PC Intel Celeron Pentium 150MHz (or higher) with USB port Toshiba Equium 7000D with Intel Pentium 233MHz (or higher) and USB port RAM 32MB 32MB Hard Drive 1GB 3GB Disk Drive 3.5” 1.44MB Floppy 3.5” 1.44MB Floppy CD-ROM 8 Speed 8 Speed NIC 10BASE-T EtherLink1 10BASE-T EtherLink1 Monitor 14-inch SVGA .28n 15-inch SVGA .28n Video Card SVGA with 1MB VRAM SVGA with 1MB VRAM Keyboard Standard 101/102 Standard 101/102 Mouse PS/2 PS/2 Serial Ports 2 2 Parallel Ports 1 (for customer-supplied printer) 1 (for customer-supplied printer) Software 1. 2. Minimum Recommended 95B/982 Windows 95B/982 Required if the server and workstations are networked. Required for USB support. Installation ct ne on C " "Y er w ie V te r M IS en lC K al M N TR 1 M A S TE R D C The Strata DK must have SMDR and TTY ports to transmit and receive data to the HMIS. HMIS connects to Strata DK using the TTY and SMDR ports on a PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU at 1200, 2400, or 4800 baud (see “Connect HMIS PC to Strata DK” on Page 15-4). RSIU with RSSU is the recommended configuration. or Step 1: Check Strata DK System Requirements M N TR 2 If SMDR is also used for general purposes, in addition to hotel guest billing records, it requires a customer-supplied Y-connector (see to a general purpose printer or call accounting device. 23 80 Figure 15-1 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Customer-supplied YConnector 15-3 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Important! ♦ ♦ The Automatic Wake-up Call function has some specific Strata DK system requirements that are: ♦ One dedicated digital station port and one digital telephone to provide Automatic Wakeup Call. ♦ An external customer-supplied music source or digital announcer is required for optional music or greeting for guests who receive Auto Wake-up calls. The telephone system must have an available standard station port on an RSTU2 or RDSU card. An RSIU with two RSIS cards are required for Stratagy Voice Mail (SMDI interface). See Stratagy Hospitality Application Software Technical Bulletin (TB40-0022) for details. Step 2: Make Sure You Have Everything ♦ HMIS-SWK CD-ROM with the HMIS software and documentation ♦ Printed HMIS User Guide; Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual, Chapter 15; and other applicable documentation (bulletins, etc.) ♦ Symantec pcANYWHERE ♦ Adobe® Acrobat® Reader ♦ HMIS activation keys ♦ PPTC-9 and PPTC-25F connectors ♦ UPS (optional) ♦ Five-port network hub (optional) Note Printer not included. Step 3: Inspect HMIS Server/Workstation PCs CAUTION! Always wear an anti-static wrist strap when inspecting HMIS system components. Important! Before powering on, remove the computer cover and verify that all cards (i.e., internal modem, SVGA, and network cards) are seated and secured properly. Make any adjustments necessary and replace the cover. Step 4: Connect HMIS PC to Strata DK HMIS interfaces directly to the DK424/DK280 Release 3.1 or higher and the DK40i, by connecting the PC to the TTY and SMDR ports. HMIS comes standard as a server/workstation configuration. If additional terminals are needed, HMIS workstations can be networked using a LAN. 15-4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation PPTC Connectors To Strata DK TTY Port A PPTC, PPTC-9, PPTC-25F or PPTC25MDM and two six-conductor telephone cords connect the HMIS-SVR COM Port 1 and 2 with Strata DK TTY and SMDR ports (see Figure 15-2). See Figure 15-5 on Page 15-6 for pinout details for connecting the HMIS SVR to other equipment, such as line drivers. 2790 Standard Modular Telephone Cord (7 feet maximum) 25- or 9-pin Connector PPTC To HMIS Server Figure 15-2 PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F Connector An RS-232 short-haul modem or Line Driver (see Figure 15-3) is needed to boost PC transmission located more than 50 feet from the Strata DK System. A suitable Line Driver is made by Black Box® Corporation at (412) 746-5500, Model ME764A-MSP (male) or ME764A-FSP (female). 2544 Line Driver Line Drivers must be used in pairs. Figure 15-4 shows the connections between the two line drivers. Figure 15-3 See “HMIS Server PC (More than 50 Feet Away)” on Page 15-7 for instructions on connecting PCs more than 50 feet from the Strata DK. + RCV + XMT G Pair 1 Twisted-pair Cable Pair 2 RS-232 Short-haul Line Driver + RCV + XMT G 2547 Figure 15-4 Twisted-pair Connections Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-5 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC-9 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) Connect to PC 9-pin COMX Port 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pinout (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 Connect to PC 25-pin COMX Port 3 2 6 20 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 PPTC25-MDM (male) 20 Connect to External Modem 2 3 20 6 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 (male) 20 Connect to: • ASCII Terminal • Printer • Call Accounting Device Figure 15-5 15-6 3 2 6 20 8 7 DB25 Pinout (front and side view) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DK RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) RSIU/RSIS/RMDS WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS PPTC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Modular Jack Pinout (front view) DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DK Modular Jack Pinout (front view) PPTC-25F (female) SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD DK Modular Jack Pinout (side view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2378 PPTC Pinout Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation HMIS Server PC (Single Front Desk Terminal) For smaller installations, an HMIS server acting as a single front desk terminal can be installed (see Figure 15-6). SMDR link to DK424 using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU at 1200, 2400, 4800 baud to COM Port 2 on HMIS-Server PC. UPS HMIS Server 2420 Figure 15-6 UPS keeps the HMIS working even when commercial power is down. Resident 33.6 modem connected to a station on the DK424 or a telephone company line. TTY link to DK424 using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU at 1200, 2400, 4800 baud to COM Port 1 on HMIS-Server PC. HMIS Server PC HMIS Server PC (More than 50 Feet Away) 1. Connect the Strata DK TTY or SMDR port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to the ME764-MSP Line Driver with an RS-232 cable (see Figure 15-7). Set the switch on the Line Driver to DTE. 2. Connect the other end of the Line Driver to the COM port of the HMIS PC. Set the switch on this Line Driver to DCE. HMIS Server PC Strata DK Line driver must be less than 50' from DK ME764-FSP ME764-FSP Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem SW: Set to DTE position SW: Set to DCE position - plugs into 25-pin COM port of PC 2791 4-conductor, twisted-pair phone cord 6-conductor, twisted-pair phone cord PPTC male connector Figure 15-7 Connecting Strata DK to a HMIS Server PC more than 50 Feet Away Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-7 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation HMIS Server PC with HMIS Workstation PCs For larger installations, the HMIS server PC can be networked with HMIS workstation PCs via a LAN to function as multiple front desk terminals (see Figure 15-8). The configuration includes a five-port 10Base-T network hub (HM-HUB5P) which can support up to four workstations. Up to nine workstations can be connected using either larger or multiple hubs. HMIS Server UPS UPS keeps the HMIS working even when commercial power is down. Network Hub 2572 HMIS Workstations Figure 15-8 Server PC with Workstations Step 5: Install the Network Hub (Optional) ➤ See the hub manufacturer’s instruction booklet (included in the package) for the procedure on installing the hub. 15-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Step 6: Install Activation Keys There are two types of required activation keys, one for a server (HMIS-S) and one for a workstation (HMIS-W). ➤ Install the correct HMIS activation key on the LPT1 parallel printer port of the HMIS server (see Figure 15-9). ,,, ,,, HMIS Server Activation Key (required) HMIS Server Screws 4316 Printer Parallel Printer Cable HMIS-S Parallel Printer Port LPT1 Parallel Printer Connector on Back Figure 15-9 HMIS Server PC Activation Key ...or if there are HMIS workstations, install the correct activation key on each (see Figure 15-10). ,,, ,,, HMIS Workstation Activation Key (required) HMIS Workstation Screws 4317 Printer Parallel Printer Cable HMIS-W Parallel Printer Port LPT1 Parallel Printer Connector on Back Figure 15-10 HMIS Workstation PC Activation Key Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-9 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Step 7: Power Up the System ➤ Power up the HMIS PC server/workstations. Step 8: Verify Communication Port Settings The Settings drop-down menu displays. 2. Click Control Panel, then double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen displays. 3. Click the Device Manager tab, then double-click the Ports icon. The ports display on the screen. 4. Highlight COM1 and click Properties. The Communications Port (COM1) Properties screen displays. 2804 1. From Windows 98/ 95, click Start, then Settings. 15-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation This displays: 6. Check the Interrupt and Address settings. The communication port settings for the HMIS server/workstation PCs are: 2941 5. Click Resources tab. ♦ Interrupt = 4 ♦ Address = 3F8h 7. Click OK. 8. Highlight COM2 and click Properties. The Communications Port (COM2) Properties screen displays. 9. Click Resources tab. The COM2 resource settings display. 10. Check the Interrupt and Address Settings. The server/workstation communication port settings are: 11. Click OK twice, then close the Control Panel window. Strata DK I&M 5/99 ♦ Interrupt = 3 ♦ Address = 2F8h Important! The COM3 modem must have a unique IRQ and address setting. These resources cannot be shared. 15-11 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Step 9: Verify Modem Settings Important! The HMIS workstation PC is not equipped with a modem. 1. From Windows 98/ 95, click Start, then Settings. The screen should designate the COM3 port as Modem 33.6K (as shown). 2802 2. Click Control Panel, then double-click the Modems icon. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 2803 4. Highlight COM3 and click More Info... 5. Check the Interrupt and Address settings. 15-12 The modem settings should be: ♦ Interrupt = 5 ♦ Address = 3E8h Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 6. Click OK twice, then close the Control Panel window. Important! The COM3 modem must have a unique IRQ and address setting. These resources cannot be shared. Step 10: Verify pcANYWHERE Modem Settings Note These settings are available only on the HMIS server PC. 1. From Windows 98/ 95, click Start, then highlight Programs. The Programs drop-down menu displays. 2943 2. Highlight pcANYWHERE32 and from the dropdown menu, click pcANYWHERE. 2944 3. Highlight the Modem icon and press Alt+Enter. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-13 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation This displays: 2942 4. Highlight COM3 and click Details. 5. Check that Port field reads COM3. If not, use the pull-down menu to correct. 6. Click OK twice, then close pcANYWHWERE window. Step 11: Install the Software Note If you purchased the turnkey system, all of the software comes pre-installed from the factory. This procedure is provided to assist you in reinstalling or upgrading the turnkey software, when necessary, or installing the software package. Important! 15-14 ♦ Run ScanDisk to verify that no errors exist on the HMIS hard drive. ♦ Backup the HMIS databases using the Windows backup function. ♦ Close all applications on the PC before attempting HMIS software installation. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation ➤ To install, reinstall, or upgrade the software 2765 1. Click Start, then Run. = CD-ROM drive letter on the PC. 3. Type: :\hmis\ setup.exe Click OK. A pop-up window reads “Copying initialization files...”. When complete, this displays: 4. Click OK. This displays: 2766 2. Insert the CD-ROM Disk into the . 2767 5. Click the installation button. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The HMIS setup begins. 15-15 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Then, this displays for a few seconds: 2768 Finally, this displays: 2769 6. Click OK. 7. Restart HMIS server/ workstation PC. Step 12: Set up the HMIS Databases/Settings The Setup Utility is accessed from the Main screen by clicking on the Setup button at the bottom of the screen. At the right of every setup screen is a menu of the setup selections that comprise the utility (see Figure 15-11). The following options appear in the Setup Menu screen: ♦ Rooms – Enables you to set up a database of room listings using the Master Room Setup screen. ♦ Settings – Establishes phone rates (local, long distance, international), taxes, voice mail, auto wake-up settings, etc. ♦ Employee – Enables you to enter a three-digit employee ID code for maids, janitors, clerks, medical, service/delivery, restaurant, management and other staff categories. The codes can be used for various productivity and tracking reports. ♦ AutoGen – Creates contiguous room records automatically using an incremental approach. Given a starting room number, extension number and port number, a specified number of default records are appended to the room-record database. For configurations with widely varying room numbers, segments of room numbers can be created by repeating the procedure. ♦ Company – Provides company information for use on guest bills and reports. ♦ Statement – Enables you to set up a customized billing statement. For a complete description of screen fields and instructions on using the screens, see “Set up the Server Network” on Page 15-31. 15-16 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 2738 HMIS Main Screen Setup Menu 3037 3038 Figure 15-11 Setup Menu Substep A: Access HMIS Server PC 2596 1. Click Start, Programs, then HMISWS icon. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-17 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation This displays until you enter the employee IDs and names in the database. (See “Create Employee Database” on Page 15-20.) 3. Click OK. This displays: 4. Click Yes. Important! 2597 2770 2. From the HMIS Login screen, press Enter twice. TelMon must always be running on the server to capture call data from the Strata DK SMDR port. A Strata Hospitality icon is placed on the Windows taskbar. This displays until you enter the port communication settings for the SMDR line. 2771 See “Check HMIS SMDR and TTY Port Settings” on Page 15-21 for instructions. This displays: 2599 5. Click OK. Important! 6. Click Yes. 15-18 The TTY Communications server communicates directly with the Strata DK system and must always be running. A Strata Hospitality icon is placed on the Windows taskbar. The icon is used to check/change the TTY settings (see “Check HMIS SMDR and TTY Port Settings” on Page 15-21). Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 7. Click OK. This only displays the first time you access HMIS. 2772 8. Click OK. The HMIS initializes the services link file. This only displays the first time you access HMIS. 2773 The HMIS initializes the deposit link file. This only displays the first time you access HMIS. 10. Click OK. The HMIS initializes the messages link file. When the message link file is initialized, this displays. 2774 9. Click OK. 2775 This only displays the first time you access HMIS. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-19 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Substep B: Initialize the Room Reservation Block Index ➤ Click Yes. HMIS initializes a room reservation block index for eight years. Once initialized you can change the reservation block to 4, 12, 16, or 20 years. (See “Modify the Reservation Block Index” on Page 15-54 for instructions on changing the block index.) 2776 This displays: Substep C: Create Room Records Database 1. Click OK. The AutoGen Setup screen displays (see Figure 15-16 on Page 15-43). 2. Enter the rooms (description, type, location, etc.) into the AutoGen Setup screen You can use the AutoGen Setup screen to enter blocks of similar rooms at one time. It may be possible to complete your installation by running this procedure a few times. ...or click Rooms and enter the rooms into the Master Room Setup screen. You can select the Master Room Setup screen and enter individual rooms into the database (see Table 15-7 “Master Room Setup Screen Fields” on Page 15-45 for instructions). Substep D: Create Employee Database ➤ Enter the company employees into the database, using the Employee Codes screen. (See “Add a Staff Member to the Database” on Page 15-48 for instructions.) Substep E: Enter the Company Information ➤ Enter the company information into the database, using the Company screen. (See “Add Company Information to the Database” on Page 15-50 for instructions.) Substep F: Establish HMIS Settings ➤ Enter the settings (rates, taxes, voice mail, etc.) for the hotel/motel system, using the Settings screen. (See “Enter, Change, Delete Settings” on Page 15-53 for instructions.) Substep G: Set up Statement Format ➤ Set up statement format to be used as a billing statement when a guest checks out. (See “Invoice Statement Format” on Page 15-55 for instructions.) 15-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Step 13: Check HMIS SMDR and TTY Port Settings Note These programs are available only on the HMIS server PC. There are two auxiliary programs that must be running on the server at all times—Transaction Monitor Program (TelMon) and HMIS Communication Settings Program (HMISCS). Transaction Monitor Program (TelMon) This program captures call data from the Strata DK SMDR port. The TelMon program consists of two screens, SMDR Viewing and SMDR Processor. SMDR Viewing/Processor Screens These screens (see Figure 15-12) contain HMIS SMDR port settings and an exporting feature which enables you to export data to an ASCII file for checking trunk utilization. See Table 15-3 on Page 15-22 for screen field descriptions. Important! This program must always be running on the server to capture call data from the Strata DK SMDR port. SMDR Viewing Closes viewing application. Click setting to display SMDR Processor screen. 2780 SMDR Processor 2780 Closes editing application. Figure 15-12 SMDR Viewing/Processor Screens Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-21 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Note Table 15-3 For instructions on using these screens to export data, see “Check Trunk Utilization” on Page 15-68. SMDR Viewing/Processor Screen Fields Field Description Port Select COM2 as the SMDR port to receive data from the Strata DK. The default configuration is COM2 which is marked COM on the back of the PC. Baud Rate The baud rate speed must match the Strata DK TTY port setting. The default for DK424 is 1200. Bits/Parity The bits/parity should match the Strata DK. The default for the DK424 is 8 bits, None. SMDR Board Board A = RCTUA Board B = RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F Polling Interval The polling interval should be 2000 ms; this is the factory setting and does not need to be changed. Enable scrolling to end on each transaction By checking this selection, the latest or last call record received is listed at the end of the receive buffer window. If unchecked, it enables the up and down arrow at the side of the receive buffer window to be used to scroll back through approximately 2,000 call records that are displayed in the received buffer window. Transaction Records (Display only) The transaction records window is a counter that increments as call records are received. This window starts at “0” only when the system is first installed. The window shows “2000” after 2,000 call records have been received into the buffer. From that point on, it displays 2,000+; however, many calls would have been received since the software has been stopped and restarted. HMIS Communication Settings Program (HMISCS) This program communicates with the Strata DK TTY port. The HMISCS software consists of three TTY screens, Comm Server Viewer, Comm Server, and Communication Settings and Emulation. Comm Server Viewer/Comm Server These screens (see Figure 15-13) verify the following functions are working properly: check-in/ check-out and the Enable DND, Disable DND, and Change Phone Service buttons on the Control/ Status tab. See Table 15-4 on Page 15-23 for screen field descriptions. Important! 15-22 This program must always be running on the HMIS server to communicate with the Strata DK TTY port. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Double-click here to display the Comm Server screen. Comm Server Viewer Closes viewing application. Functions Window 3301 Comm Server Display Status Line 3308 Figure 15-13 Comm Server Viewer/Comm Server Screens Note Table 15-4 For instructions on using this screen to verify communications, see “Check HMIS Communications with Strata DK” on Page 15-74. Comm Server Viewer/Comm Server Screen Fields Field Description Status Line Displays the active function. If no function is active, displays “Idle.” R (Check Mark) HMIS checks the box once it has completed the function. Clerk ID of person logged on to the system. Ext Room extension. Mode These are the modes: 1: Enable telephone service. 2: Disable telephone service. 3: Enable DND. 4: Disable DND. 5: Remote maintenance (required to perform Mode 1 or 2 changes) Date Date in DD/MM/YY format when the procedure was performed. Time Time in HH/MM/SS format when the procedure was performed. Comment Brief description of function performed. Command Guest name/room number. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-23 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Communication Settings and Emulation Screen This screen (see Figure 15-14) designates the Strata DK telephone system interface/settings. The screen can also be used to communicate and program the Strata DK and to output (record) the communications to a file. (See Table 15-5 for screen field descriptions.) Important! This procedure stops communication to the Strata DK. Settings 2784 Closes screen and returns to Comm Server screen. Figure 15-14 Communication Settings and Emulation Screen Note Table 15-5 For instructions on using this screen to perform manual tests/remote maintenance or output data to a file, see “Perform Manual Tests/Remote Maintenance” on Page 15-71. Communication Settings and Emulation Screen Fields Field 15-24 Description Port Select COM1 which is marked COM on the back of the PC. Baud Rate The baud rate speed must match the Strata DK TTY port setting. The default for DK424 is 1200. Bits The Bits must match the Strata DK TTY port setting. The default for DK424 is 7 Bits. Parity The Parity must match the Strata DK TTY port setting. The default for DK424 is Even. Polling Interval The polling interval must be 150 ms. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Substep A: Access the TelMon/HMISCS Screens Each time the HMIS program is started, a minimized button for each of the programs (i.e., TelMon, HMISCS) appears on the desktop taskbar (shown below). By placing your cursor on a button, context-sensitive help identifies the program as the SMDR Viewer (TelMon) or the Comm Server (TTY) Viewer. 3092 ➤ To access the program screens ➤ Click on the desktop taskbar icon. The program screen (Comm Server Viewer, SMDR Viewing) displays. Upon exiting the screens, the minimized buttons are removed from the taskbar, and the servers continue to run in the background. To access the screens again, you must use the Setup Utility screen (see “Restart HMIS SMDR and/or TTY Servers” on Page 15-65). Substep B: Check SMDR Settings 1. From the SMDR Viewing screen, check the SMDR settings on the screen (see Figure 15-12 on Page 15-21). SMDR settings for the DK424 should be: ♦ Port = COM2 ♦ Baud Rate = 1200 ♦ Bits/Parity = 8 Bits None ♦ SMDR Board = Board B ♦ Polling Interval = 2000 ms. 2. If no changes are necessary, click Close. When the TelMon View pop-up box displays, click Yes 3306 ...or if you have a change, click the desired setting. 3299 3. Click Yes to make the change Strata DK I&M 5/99 The SMDR Processor screen displays (see Figure 15-12 on Page 15-21). 15-25 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 4. Select the new setting, then click Close. 3300 ...or click No to cancel the process. When the TelMon View pop-up box displays, click OK. The SMDR Viewing screen displays. 5. Click Close. 3307 6. Click Yes. Substep C: Check HMIS TTY Settings 1. From the Comm Server Viewer screen, double-click the area to the right of Flush Queue (see Figure 15-13 on Page 15-23). 3308 2. From the Comm Server screen, click Disconnect. Call capturing is discontinued. 3050 3. Click Comm Settings. 15-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 4. Click OK. The pop-up box disappears. 5. Check the TTY settings on the screen and change, if necessary. TTY settings for the DK424 should be: ♦ Port = COM1 ♦ TTY = 1200 ♦ Bits = 7 Bits ♦ Parity = Even ♦ Stop Bits = 1 ♦ Polling Interval = 150 ms. 6. Click Close. The Comm Server screen displays. 7. Click Exit. The Comm Server Viewer screen displays. 3405 8. Click Exit. 9. Click Yes. Step 14: Program the Strata DK The HMIS controls outgoing calls by assigning the station to one of three LCR classes of service. Outgoing calls are tracked and recorded using the DK’s SMDR data. Table 15-15 lists the Strata DK programs which must be configured for the HMIS integration with the Strata DK systems to operate properly. See Strata DK HMIS LCR Programming on the next page for additional LCR programming instructions. Table 15-15 Strata DK Program List Program Settings Program 03 Assign PIOU, PIOUS or RSIU PCBs to cabinet slots. Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups or Dial 9. Program 45-1 Define a dial plan for Toll Restriction. Program 50-1 Set LED 01 and 04 ON to enable LCR. Program 50-2 Set LCR home area code. Program 50-3 Add the 411 and 911 as special codes. Program 50-4 Add the long distance route plan: 08 for RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB and 16 for RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F. Program 50-5 Enter 02 as the local call plan. Program 50-6 Enter the LCR time-out value. 06 is recommended. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-27 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Table 15-15 Strata DK Program List (continued) Program Settings Program 51 Enter LCR area codes. Plan 01 includes home area code, 800, 888. Plan 08 includes long distance area codes. Plan 16 is used for RCTUC/D, E/F processors. Program 52 Assign LCR office code exceptions for specified area code as needed. Program 53 Enter LCR schedule assignments for LCR plan no. 01, 02, and 08/16. Stations in groups 1, 2, and 3 are controlled by HMIS. Program 54 LCR Route Definition Tables. Table defaults are acceptable. Program 55-0 Delete PIC Code digits as needed. Program 55-1/55-2 Assign PIC Code digits as needed. Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments for LCR plans 01, 02, and 08/16. Group 1: No restrictions Group 2: Local, 800, 888, 911only Group 3: Resident room in house dialing and 911 only Program 60-2 Set SMDR threshold time to 0 for 1 second. Program 60-3 Set SMDR output for 0 (outgoing calls only). Program 76-1 Assign SMDR and TTY ports. Strata DK HMIS LCR Programming The following LCR programs use the guidelines shown in Table 15-15. See Chapter 5 – Least Cost Routing in the Strata DK Programming Manual for more detailed information. Program 50-1 LCR Parameters ➤ Set LED 01 and LED 04 to ON. LED On 01 X Enable System LCR No LCR 02 Not Used Not Used 03 555 LDI Route per Program 50-4 Per Area Code Table Dial Tone After LCR Access Silent 05 Warning Tone Last Choice Route Number No Warning Tone 10 Silent1 Dial Tone after Completion of Dialing 04 1. Off X X Strata DK Release 4.15 software only. Program 50-2 LCR Home Area Code ➤ Enter the local area code. Example shown below. 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG DATA = Home (local) area Code 15-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Programs 50-3 (1~5) LCR Special Codes ➤ Add special codes 411 and 911. SELECT = Special Code (4 Digits) 31 411 32 911 Examples 33 34 35 Program 50-4 LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number ➤ Enter 08 for RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB and 16 for RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F. 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG DATA = LDI Route Plan Program 50-5 LCR Local Call Plan Number ➤ Enter 02 as the local call plan. 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG DATA = Local Call Plan Program 50-6 LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Time-out ➤ Enter the time-out value. Value 06 is recommended. 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG 6SNU +ROG DATA = Time-out Value Program 51 LCR Area Codes ➤ Enter the LCR area codes. Plan 01 includes home area code, 800, 888. Plan 08 includes long distance area codes. Plan 16 is used for RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F processors. The following table uses “714” as the example home area code. LCR Plan: 01 Data = Area Code LCR Plan: 02 Data = Area Code LCR Plan: Data = Area Code 714 000 713 800 715 799 888 801 887 889 999 Strata DK I&M 5/99 08 LCR Plan: Data = Area Code 15-29 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Program 52 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code ➤ Assign LCR office code exceptions as needed. Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans ➤ Enter LCR schedule assignments for LCR plan 01, 02 and 08/16. Stations in groups 1, 2, and 3 are controlled by HMIS. The following table shows you how to set up Program 53 for the HMIS. LCR Plan 01~16 Sched. 1~3 01 1 Program 54 Route Definition # (see legend above) Program 56 LCR Station Group (see legend above) 1st Pick 1 1 2 1 3 02 08 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 1 1 2nd Pick 3rd Pick 4th Pick LCR Plan 01~16 Sched. 1~3 Program 56 LCR Station Group (see legend above) Program 54 Route Definition # (see legend above) 1st Pick 2nd Pick 3rd Pick 4th Pick Guest Room with restricted calling Home Area Code Guest Room local/800/888/911 Guest Room complete restriction/911 only Hotel Administration (unrestricted) Local Call Route/ 911 2 Long Distance 3 4 1 Program 54 LCR Route Definition Tables ➤ Enter LCR Route Definition Tables. Table defaults are acceptable (shown below). LCR Plan 01~16 Route Definition # (see legend above) Program 16 CO Line Group (see legend above) Program 55 Modified Digits (see legend above) 01 1 01 01 Local 02 1 01 01 911 08 1 01 01 Long Distance LCR Plan 01~16 Route Definition # (see legend above) Program 16 CO Line Group (see legend above) Program 55 Modified Digits (see legend above) Program 55-0 Delete Number of Digits from the Front of Dialed Number ➤ Delete PIC Code digits as needed. Program 55-1 and 2 Add Digits Before and/or After the Dialed Number ➤ Add PIC Code digits as needed. 15-30 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments ➤ Enter LCR Station Group Assignments for LCR Plans 01, 02, and 08/16. Guidelines are shown below. LCR Group Guest Rooms Administration Enables 01 All calls to be dialed by rooms. 02 Local calls, 800/888, 911 only. 03 911 only. 04 As needed (most likely will be the same as Group 01). Step 15: Set up the Server Network The following section has step-by-step instructions to set up the server in a Windows peer-to-peer network. For additional information on any of these procedures, see Microsoft Windows Help/ Network. ➤ To set up the server 1. Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network. The Configuration Tab should be selected. 2. Verify that Client for Microsoft Networks, TCP/IP, and NetBEUI are installed. If these components are not installed, proceed to Step 3, otherwise go to Step 12. 4269 Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-31 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 3. Click Add. 4270 4. Highlight Service and Microsoft. 5. Click OK. 4269 6. Click Add. 7. Highlight Protocol and click Add. 15-32 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 8. Highlight Microsoft and TCP/IP, then click OK. 4318 9. Click Add. 10. Click Protocol and click Add. 11. Highlight Microsoft and NetBEUI, then click OK. 4319 12. Click File and Print Sharing. 4269 Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-33 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 13. Ensure the boxes shown at right are checked. 4311 14. Click OK. ➤ To set up workgroup 1. Open Identification. 2. Enter this computer name: HMISSRV01. Note Make sure you enter a zero in the name. 3. Enter this work group: HMIS 4. Enter this description: HMIS SERVER 5. Open Access Control. The share level access control should be selected. 6. Click OK. 7. Remove floppy disk from drive A. 8. Click OK to restart the computer. 9. If log in dialog box appears, enter HMISSRV01 for the user name and leave password blank. 10. Click OK to log in. ➤ To activate sharing 1. Double-click My Computer. 2. Right-click C: and select Sharing from the pop-up menu box. 4312 15-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 3. Select Share As and Full under Access Type. 4313 4. Click OK. 5. In My Computer dialog box, right-click D: (CD-ROM drive). 4312 6. Select Share As and Full under Access Type. 4313 7. Close the My Computer dialog box Workstation network setup. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-35 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Step 16: Set up the Workstation The following section has instructions to set up Windows peer-to-peer networking. For additional information on any of these procedures, see Microsoft Windows Help/Network. 1. Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network. The Configuration Tab should be selected. 2. Verify if Client for Microsoft Networks, TCP/IP, and NetBEUI are installed. If these components are not installed proceed to Step 3, otherwise go to Step 12. 3. Click Add. 4270 4. Highlight Service and Microsoft. 15-36 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 5. Click OK. 4269 6. Click Add. 7. Highlight Protocol and click Add. 8. Highlight Microsoft and TCP/IP, then click OK. 4318 9. Click Add. 10. Click Protocol and click Add. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-37 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 11. Highlight Microsoft and NetBEUI, then click OK. 4319 12. Click File and Print Sharing. 4269 13. Ensure the boxes shown at right are checked. 4311 14. Click OK. ➤ To set up a workgroup 1. Open Identification. 2. Enter this computer name: HMISWRK01. Notes ● ● 15-38 Make sure you enter a zero. If you have two or more workstations, name each workstation HMISWRK02, HMISWRK03, etc. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation 3. Enter this workgroup: HMIS 4. Enter this description: HMIS WORKSTATION 5. Open Access Control. The share level access control should be selected. 6. Click OK. 7. Click OK to restart the computer. 8. Remove the floppy disk from drive A. 9. If the log in dialog box appears, enter HMISWRK01 for the user name and leave the password blank. 10. Click OK to log in. ➤ To activate sharing 1. Double-click My Computer. 2. Right-click C:. 3. Select Sharing from the pop-up menu box. 4. Select Share As. 5. Choose Full, then click OK. 6. Close the My Computer dialog box. Step 17: Installing the Workstation Software Note If you purchased the turnkey system, all of the software comes pre-installed from the factory. This procedure is provided to assist you in reinstalling or upgrading the turnkey software, when necessary, or installing the software package. Important! ♦ Run ScanDisk to verify that no errors exist on the HMIS hard drive. ♦ Backup the HMIS databases using the Windows backup function. ♦ Close all applications on the PC before attempting HMIS software installation. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-39 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation ➤ To install, reinstall, or upgrade the software 2765 1. Click Start, then Run.33 = CD ROM drive letter on the PC. 3. Type: :\hmis\ setup.exe Click OK. A pop-up box reads “Copying initialization files...”. When complete, HMIS Setup Welcome screen displays: 4. Click OK. The main HMIS Setup screen displays: 2766 2. Insert the CD-ROM Disk into the . 2767 5. Click the installation button. The HMIS setup begins.When it finishes, this displays for a few seconds: 2768 15-40 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation This displays: 2769 6. Click OK. 7. Open Windows Explorer. 8. Double-click Program Files. 9. Click or highlight the HMIS directory. 10. Delete the HMIS directory. 11. Restart the HMIS workstation. Important! The HMIS directory must be deleted from the workstation PC. The HMIS program is accessed and run from the HMIS server. Step 18: Map the HMIS Workstation to the Server After the HMIS software is installed on the workstation and the HMIS directory is deleted, you have to access the HMIS software application using the network. 1. Double-click Network Neighborhood and the HMISSVR01 icon. Note If the HMIS server does not display, verify the network configuration. 2. Right-click C:. 3. Select Map Network Drive. 4. Select Reconnect at Logon. 5. Click OK. 6. Double-click on the mapped network drive, C:, then Program Files and HMIS. 7. Right-click on HMISWS.EXE. Strata DK I&M 5/99 A pop-up window displays. 15-41 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 8. Select Send To/ Desktop (Create Shortcut). 9. Close all network windows. 10. Restart the HMIS Workstation Computer. Setup Utility The Setup Utility is accessed from the Main screen by clicking on the Setup button at the bottom of the screen. At the right of all setup screens is a menu of the screen selections that comprise the utility (see Figure 15-11 on Page 15-17) that includes: ♦ AutoGen Setup – adds a group (range) of identical rooms automatically ♦ Master Room Setup – adds only a few rooms ♦ Employee Codes – adds codes for each employee ♦ Company Information – adds and changes the company information on the invoice ♦ HMIS Settings – adds and changes the settings in HMIS ♦ Invoice Statement Format – sets up or changes the invoice format AutoGen Setup This screen (see Figure 15-16) enables you to quickly format a room-record database based on a set of default parameters. Information that must be unique, such as room number and associated port/extension numbers, HMIS automatically generates by incrementing each value by one. See Table 15-6 for the field descriptions. 15-42 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Room Amenities 2569 Starting/Ending Range Numbers Figure 15-16 Table 15-6 AutoGen Setup Screen AutoGen Setup Screen Fields Field Description Room Amenities (check boxes) Selections can be toggled ON/OFF by clicking the option’s button. The selections describe the amenities or status of the room: Suite, Cable TV, Movie Channel Box, No Smoking Restriction, Unavailable Due to Repairs, and More Than One Bed Available. These options are displayed in the Restrict/Accommodate pop-up dialog box on the Main screen. Room Type User definable, or use the drop-down menu for preset options. Any new types are automatically saved by HMIS to the drop-down menu for future use with this screen and the Master Room Setup screen. Building Building identification (e.g., main, tower). Rates The rate to be charged for the room on a Daily, Weekend, Holiday (Seasonal) or Special rate basis. Decimals/cents are not required. HMIS treats the entered number as a dollar amount. For example, if you enter 73, HMIS saves the rate at $73.00. Rates are user definable and automatically apply when guests check in. Floor, #Beds, #Rooms Fields are displayed in the Available Room Selection Window when reserving a room or checking in a guest. Queen/King beds can be entered as # Double Beds. Starting/Ending Room Numbers (5 digit max) Enter the Starting Room Number. The Ending Room Number is computed automatically by HMIS. Starting/Ending Extension Numbers (4-digit max) Enter the Starting Extension Number. The Ending Extension Number is computed automatically by HMIS. Starting/Ending Port Numbers (3-digits) Enter the Starting Port Number. The Ending Port Number is computed automatically by HMIS. Number of Additional Records Number of room records you want HMIS to add. The numbers appear in the Ending Room/Extension/Port Numbers fields after clicking Computer Ending Numbers. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-43 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Add/Overwrite Room Record Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Autogen. The AutoGen Setup screen displays (see Figure 15-16). 3. Enter the room information in the screen fields (e.g., room type, amenities, rates, etc.). See “AutoGen Setup Screen Fields” on Page 15-43 for field descriptions. 4. Enter the starting numbers (i.e., Room, Extension and Port) in each field, the number of additional records required, and click Compute Ending Numbers. HMIS adds the ending room, extension and port numbers to the screen. 5. Click Over-Write Data Base to overwrite the current database of rooms and start fresh Important! For new installations, you must use the Over-Write Data Base option for the first entry; then change the screen to Append Records to Data Base for subsequent entries. ...or Append Records to Data Base to add the rooms to the current database. 6. Click Add Records Now. 3304 7. Click Yes if the HMISCS and TELMON servers are shut down The rooms are added to the database. The room, extension and port number fields are cleared. The remainder of the fields (e.g., room type, building, rates) remain on the screen for use with the next record. ...or click No and shut down the HMISCS and TELMON servers. 8. Repeat this procedure until all rooms have been added. 9. Click Save, then Main screen. 15-44 The Main screen displays. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 10. Click Exit to close the HMIS program, then restart the program. Important! Always exit the HMIS program after adding or deleting room records from the database. Master Room Setup Screen This screen (see Figure 15-17) enables you to enter, modify, or delete a room record. Records consist of room number, extension, type, location, rates, amenities and comments. (See Table 15-7 for screen field descriptions.) Room Amenities 2568 Figure 15-17 Table 15-7 Master Room Setup Screen Master Room Setup Screen Fields Field Description Room Number The room number (alphanumeric up to five-digits). Extension The telephone system extension number (up to four-digits). Phone numbers do not have to match room numbers. Example: Room 201, Ext. 2201, Port 000 can be used. Port # The Strata DK station port number. Room Type User definable, or use the drop-down menu for preset options. Any new types are automatically saved by HMIS to the drop-down menu for future use with this screen and the Master Room Setup screen. Building Building identification (e.g., main, tower). Sub-Extension/Port # (modem line) Extension and port number used for faxes. The rate charged for the room on a Daily, Weekend, Holiday (seasonal) or Special rate basis. Decimals/cents are not required. HMIS treats the entered number as a dollar amount. For example, if you enter 73, HMIS saves the rate at $73.00. Rates are user-definable and automatically apply when guests check in. Rates Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-45 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Table 15-7 Master Room Setup Screen Fields (continued) Field Description Room Amenities (check boxes) Selections can be toggled ON/OFF by clicking the option’s button. The selections describe the amenities or status of the room: Suite, Cable TV, Movie Channel Box, No Smoking Restriction, Unavailable Due to Repairs, and More Than One Bed Available. These options are displayed in the Restrict/Accommodate pop-up dialog box on the Main screen. Floor, # Double Beds, # Single Beds, Rooms Fields are displayed in the Available Room Selection Window when reserving a room or checking in a guest. Queen/King beds should be counted as double beds and entered in the # Double Beds field. Comments/Lost and Found Comments and lost and found information. Entries stay until manually changed by highlighting and pressing Delete. WakeUp Retry Count The number of times a wake-up call is redialed if the phone is not answered. Add a Room Record to the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Rooms. The Master Room Setup screen displays (see Figure 15-17). 3. Enter the information in the screen fields. See Table 15-7 “Master Room Setup Screen Fields” on Page 15-45 for field descriptions. 4. Click Save to save your entries. 5. (Optional) To add another room record, click New Record The room, extension and port number fields are cleared. The remainder of the fields (e.g., room type, building, rates) remain on the screen for use with the next record. 6. When finished, click Main screen. The Main screen displays. 7. Click Exit to close the HMIS program, then restart the program. Important! Always exit the HMIS program after adding or deleting room records from the database. Delete a Room Record from the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Rooms. The Master Room Setup screen displays (see Figure 15-17). 3. Enter the room number. You can use the field pull-down menu to select the room. 4. Click Delete Record. You are asked to confirm the deletion. 5. Press y or click Yes to delete the room record from the database. 6. Click Main screen. 15-46 The Main screen displays. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 7. Click Exit to close the HMIS program, then restart the program. Important! Always exit the HMIS program after adding or deleting room records from the database. Modify a Room Record in the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Rooms. The Master Room Setup screen displays (see Figure 15-17). 3. Enter the room number. You can use the field pull-down menu to select the room. 4. Highlight the field and typeover the current entry. 5. When you are finished, click Save. Employee Codes 2560 The Employee Codes screen (see Figure 15-18) enables you to enter a three-digit employee ID code for all employees (see Table 15-8 for screen field descriptions). Standard staff categories listed on the screen are maid, janitor, clerk, medical, service/delivery, restaurant, management and other. The codes can be used for various productivity and tracking reports and employees requiring access to the HMIS system can be given a password and access level. Figure 15-18 Employee Codes Screen Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-47 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Table 15-8 Employee Codes Screen Fields Field Description A unique three-digit ID (alphanumeric). Important! Employee IDs assigned to maids must be numeric for the purpose of entering the code on the telephone’s dial pad. HMIS Maid Service Activity Feature This feature requires the maid to enter a code into the room telephone upon entering and leaving the room for the purpose of cleaning. Employee ID (3-digit) The code consists of a direct trunk access code + three-digit Employee ID code + 4-digit Maid Service Start or Complete Code (assigned in the Settings screen). The HMIS checks for maid activity by monitoring the SMDR port for CO line activity; therefore, each Employee ID code assigned to a maid must correlate to a vacant CO port on the Strata DK RCTU processor. Since Strata DK systems equipped with RCTUA processors only enable up to 048 as a valid entry, we recommend you start assigning maid codes with the highest number possible (i.e., 048) and continue by assigning consecutive lower numbers (e.g., 047, 046, etc.). A sample code is: ++ , where: = Direct Trunk Access Code = Employee ID Code (vacant CO port) = Maid Service Start Code Password A unique password (alphanumeric). Provides access to HMIS. Optional field if employee does not need access to HMIS. Access Level Levels 0~10 provide access to all HMIS functions except Setup Utility. The utility is limited to accessing the Master Room Setup screen. Levels 11~ 20 provide access to all HMIS functions, including all functions/screens of the Setup Utility. Optional field if employee does not need access to HMIS. First/MI/Last Employee’s name. Staff Categories Select one of the categories. Categories are: maid, janitor, clerk, medical, service/ delivery, restaurant, management, other. Provide Access to HMIS Must be checked to give an employee access to HMIS. Even if you enter a password and access level for an employee and do not check this field, the employee cannot access HMIS. Should not be checked if the employee does not require access to HMIS. TTY Communications Enabled (Optional) Select this field if the employee (e.g., a manager) is going to need to log on to the HMIS server. Add a Staff Member to the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Employee. The Employee Codes screen displays (see Figure 15-18). 3. Click New. 15-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 4. Enter the information in the screen fields. See “Employee Codes Screen Fields” on Page 15-48 for field descriptions. Note If the employee does not need access to HMIS, do not select Provide Access to HMIS or fill in the Password or Access Level fields. 5. Click Save. Your entries are saved. 6. Add another employee by clicking New ...or select another setup option ...or click Main screen. Delete a Staff Member from the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Employee. The Employee Codes screen displays (see Figure 15-18). 3. Enter the Employee ID. 4. Click Delete. The record is deleted from the database. Company Information 2563 The information entered in the Company screen (see Figure 15-19) prints on the top of all billing statements when guests check-out unless designated on the “Invoice Statement Format Screen” on Page 15-55. Figure 15-19 Company Information Screen Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-49 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Add Company Information to the Database 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Company. The Company screen displays (see Figure 15-19). 3. Enter the company name, address, and phone and FAX numbers. 4. Click Save. 5. Select another setup option ...or click Main screen. HMIS Settings The Settings screen (see Figure 15-20) contains the settings for the many items that are required to do business. Some of these items are: phone call rates (e.g., long distance, local, etc.); the reservation block size; voice mail/DND port designations; local, state, and additional taxes; and auto-wakeup settings. (See Table 15-9 for screen field descriptions. 2571 Figure 15-20 15-50 Settings Screen Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Table 15-9 Settings Screen Fields Field Description Long Distance Call Rates Initiation – Initial cost for making the call. Min. – Cost per minute. After __ Sec. – The grace period before billing of a call, setup time or the ring before answer time. International Call Rates Initiation – Defines initial cost for making the call. Min. – Defines cost per minute. After __ Sec. – Defines the grace period before billing of a call, setup time or the ring before answer time. Local Call Rates Initiation – Defines initial cost for making the call. Min. – Defines cost per minute. After __ Sec. – Defines the grace period before billing of a call, setup time or the ring before answer time. Note If there are no charges for making local calls, the HMIS automatically defaults all telephones to LCR Class 2 service upon guest check in. Toll-Free Call Rates Initiation – Defines initial cost for making the call. Min. – Defines cost per minute. After __ Sec. – Defines the grace period before billing of a call, setup time or the ring before answer time. Comm Carrier Pick Code Select one of the following options from the pull-down menu: “None” if none used 10XXX if using old NANP for intraLATA or long distance 101XXXX if using new NANP Pick Codes Default: None Centranet (‘8’ or ‘9’ precede every call) Select if an “8” or “9” prefix is required to make a call on an outside line (Telco service, Centranet, Centrex). LCR Enabled (‘P’ as leading character) Select if Least Cost Routing is used. This must always be checked on a Strata DK system. Trunks Not Requiring ‘1’ access Select if area codes with long distance billing numbers do not require a “1” first (e.g., AT&T T1 service). Print Credit Card Number on Statement Select if you want the guest’s credit card number automatically printed on billing statement. Display Zero-Cost Calls Select if you want the no-charge calls to be shown on the Phone Calls Tab screen and printed on the guest’s bill at check-out. Voice Mail Sys. Enabled Select if voice mail is installed on the system. If checked, changes DND buttons on Main screen to Call Forward–Busy/No Answer(CFBNA). Stratagy Select if Stratagy is installed on the system. If checked, changes DND buttons on Main screen to CFBNA. VM/DND Forward Port # The Strata DK port number for the voice mail pilot number; or, if no voice mail is used, the port number for the front desk telephone to which calls are forwarded. Stratagy VM Clearing Extension The extension number at the Stratagy VM Port used for clearing guest messages upon check-out. Software Version (For information only) The Strata DK software version number 3.1 or higher. System CPU (For information only) Select a processor type from the drop-down menu. Options are RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F. Local Sales Tax in Percent The local tax charged. States Sales Tax in Percent The state tax charged. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-51 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Table 15-9 Settings Screen Fields (continued) Field Description Additional taxes that may be required. Click User Defined Tax Rules to display a pop-up box to add/change or delete the listed taxes. If additional taxes are entered, the standard invoice statement can no longer be used. You must format the default statement (see “Default Statement” on Page 15-58). Additional Taxes The pop-up box fields are: Enable – Selects the tax for inclusion on the guest bills. Tax Description – Description of tax (max. 16-characters). Prints in all caps on the bill. Room/Phone/Service – Select the item to be taxed (i.e., room, phone, service). Additive $ – Enter dollar amount of applicable tax ...or Percent % – Enter the percent of applicable tax. Repeat Daily – Select if tax is to be a per day tax rather than a one-time tax charge. Phone System Security Code Defines the Strata DK Security Code which must match the telephone system. Enter 0000. Billing Resolution (Seconds) The time in second increments used for billing. For example, six-second increments would bill every six seconds after the first 30 seconds are billed. CFBNA Timer (Seconds) The Call Forward-Busy/No Answer time, if Voice Mail is used, before a call is sent to Voice Mail. Reverse Billing Area Code(s) Up to four area code(s) that do not require “1” in front of the area code and are not billed to the caller’s room. Usually associated with Pager or Cellular companies that set up long distance calls to a pager or cellular phone. Auto-Wakeup Digital Init Port The digital port of the Strata DK that is used to initiate auto wake-up calls. Auto-Wakeup Announcer Extension # The extension number of the Strata DK optional digital announcer, if used. Valid entries must be three or four-digit long numeric characters. Auto-Wakeup Retry Limit The retry limit if the room telephone is busy or no answer on auto wake-up. AW Polling Period (sec) The time in seconds used to poll auto wake-up. Default is set at 6 and should not be adjusted. COMM Timeout (Sec) Communication timer (seconds) for link with Strata DK. Default is set to 30 and should not be changed. Transmit Delay [5] (ms) Communication timer in milliseconds (ms). Default is set at 5 ms. and should not be changed. Rx Delay [4] (ms) Communication timer in milliseconds (ms). Default is set at 4 ms. and should not be changed. Maid Serv Start Code (4) The code the maid dials when starting to clean a room. This code works with the maid Employee ID assigned in the Employee screen, and should be a unique code (e.g., *7*7). Maid Serv Complete Code (4) The code the maid dials when finished cleaning a room. This code works with the maid Employee ID assigned in the Employee screen, and should be a unique code (e.g., *0*0). Note Include All Rooms in Consolidated Night Audit Report 15-52 See “Employee ID (3-digit)” on Page 15-48 for a more detailed explanation of this field. All rooms are included on the Consolidated Night Audit Report. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Enter, Change, Delete Settings Important! After changing or deleting any settings, the HMIS PC must be restarted before the changes or deletions take effect. 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Settings. The Settings screen displays (see Figure 15-20). 3. Enter/delete the information in the screen fields. See “Settings Screen Fields” on Page 15-51. 4. Click Save. Your entries are saved. 5. Select another setup option ...or click Main screen. Add Applicable Additional Taxes 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Settings. The Settings screen displays (see Figure 15-20). 3. Click User Defined Tax Rules in the Additional Taxes field. 2991 4. Select (check) the Enable field. Tax is included on guest bills. 5. Enter a brief description of the tax. Maximum 16-characters. Prints on bill in all caps. 6. Select (check) one of the following: Room, Phone, Service. Tax is calculated based on charges against room, phone or service items. 7. Enter either a set dollar amount in the Addition $ field ...or a percent in the Percent % field. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-53 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 8. If the tax is to be added daily to the room charges, select (check) Repeat Daily. 9. Repeat Substeps 4~8 for any other taxes. 10. Click OK. Modify the Reservation Block Index 1. From the Main screen, click Setup. 2. Click Settings. The Settings screen displays (see Figure 15-20). 3. Click Modify Block Index button (upperright corner of Settings screen). 2778 4. After reading the caution in the dialog box, click Yes to change the index and reformat/convert the database 2779 ...or No to abort the procedure. 5. Click OK. 6. Using the drop-down menu, select the reservation block size (i.e., 4, 12, 16, or 20 years). The menu appears in the upper-right corner of the Settings screen: 2794 HMIS defaults to an eight-year reservation database. 7. Click Convert. 15-54 The HMIS converts the database. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Invoice Statement Format Using the Invoice Statement Format screen (see Figure 15-21), you can set up the billing statement given the guest upon check out in one of three different formats — standard, default and customized. (See Table 15-10 on Page 15-56 for screen field descriptions.) Exclude item from Statement Overall Form Requirements Placement of Statement Items Placement of Statement Calculations 2993 Figure 15-21 Invoice Statement Format Screen Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-55 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Table 15-10 Statement Screen Fields Field Description Hotel Name...Room Rate The first 16 fields on the left-hand side of the screen are standard items that can appear on the billing statement. Enter the row and column number for each item or check Off to eliminate the item from printing on the statement. Maximum Number of Columns The maximum number of columns is 96. Lines Per Page The maximum number of lines is 66. Number of Copies The number of statement copies that print each time. Font Size The size of the statement’s print. Select 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 from the pull-down menu. Left Column for Body Determines the left margin for the statement. Starting Row for Body on Page Determines the top margin for the statement. Ending Row for Body on Page Determines the bottom margin for the statement. Phone Charges Sub-Total Column Column location for phone charges sub-total. Billed Services Sub-Total Column Column location for billed services sub-total. Pre-Tax Charges Column Column location for pre-tax charges total. Credits And Payments Column Column location for credits/payments total. Local and State Taxes Column Column location for local and state taxes total. Total Charges Column location for billing statement total. Net Statement Balance Column Column location for net statement balance. Separate Pages for Phone Calls and Services If selected, the phone calls and services are printed on separate pages. Add Test Pattern on Current Session If this field is selected, the billing statement is printed with a vertical and horizontal test pattern. Click the field to turn off the selection. If you do not manually turn off this option, it remains on until you have logged off the HMIS program. Standard Statement When HMIS is installed, the Invoice Statement Format screen fields (see Figure 15-21 on Page 15-55) default to “0.” Without making any changes to the screen, the HMIS produces a billing statement (see Figure 15-22) that covers all the basic hotel/motel charges and information: hotel name, address, date, guest name, billed services, room rates, credits and payments, etc. This form is perfect for businesses that do not have preprinted stationery or forms. 15-56 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility TSD SUITES 9740 IRVINE BLVD. IRVINE, CA 92713 PHONE: (714) 555-3700 FAX: (714) 555-6798 TUESDAY, JANUARY 21, 1998 3:40:44 PM CUSTOMER ROOM NO. 107 EXTENSION NO: 107 HOWARD FELDMAN REF: XYZ COMPANY, INC. 714-587-3701 30 MAIN STREET ANYWHERE, CA 92714 USA 714-888-8979 CONFIRMATION NO: 778AGW124251 CREDIT CARD NO: 0123456789 10/98 BASE RATE DESCRIPTION DAILY TOTAL BASE ROOMCHARGE: DATE(S): PHONE BILLING: PER NIGHT 120.00 # NIGHTS 2 240.00 10/21/97 - 10/23/97 (NONE) BILLED SERVICES: MOVIES ROOM SERVICE ROOM SERVICES 10/21/97 15:35 RENTAL 10/21/97 15:35 BREAKFAST 10/21/97 15:35 DINNER TOTAL SERVICES: PRE-TAX CHARGES: 5.00 20.00 30.00 55.00 295.00 LOCAL AND STATE TAXES: 14.75 TOTAL CHARGES: 309.75 CREDITS AND PAYMENTS: 309.75 **** PRIOR PAYMENT CREDIT ACTIVITY **** 10/21/97 15:40 CR HF PAYMENT 10/23/97 11:15 CR HF PAYMENT NET STATEMENT BALANCE: Figure 15-22 Standard Statement Strata DK I&M 5/99 120.00 189.75 $0.00 15-57 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Default Statement The Default Statement (see Figure 15-23) also includes all the standard items (e.g., guest name, room number, etc.), works from a set of preprogrammed defaults (shown below), and works with a common billing format. Figure 15-23 shows the Invoice Statement Format screen with the defaults loaded. Overall Form Requirements Placement of Statement Items Placement of Statement Calculations 3015 Figure 15-23 Invoice Statement Format Screen with Standard Defaults ➤ To change the invoice statement format to the defaults 1. From the Invoice Statement Format screen, click Load Defaults. HMIS automatically enters the preset defaults that produces the default statement (see Figure 15-23 on Page 15-59). This pop-up box displays: 2994 2. Click Yes. 3. Click Save. 15-58 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Test Pattern 3016 Figure 15-24 Default Statement with Test Pattern Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-59 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Customized Statement The Default Statement can be used as a starting point for customizing the billing statement to suit any preprinted forms or stationery. Simply click Add Test Pattern on Current Session at the bottom of the Invoice Statement Format screen (see Figure 15-23) and print a sample bill (see Figure 15-23). The test pattern appears both vertically and horizontally on the printout and gives you the locations for the rows and columns. ➤ To customize a statement 1. From the Invoice Statement Format screen, click Load Defaults. HMIS automatically enters the preset defaults that produces the default statement (see Figure 15-23). This pop-up box displays: 2994 2. Click Yes. 3. Enter the numbers required for the first seven fields on the right hand side of the screen. (See “Statement Screen Fields” on Page 15-56 for field descriptions.) The fields are: Maximum Number of Columns, Lines Per Page, Number of Copies, Font Size, Left Column for Body, Starting Row for Body on Page, and Ending Row for Body on Page. 4. Click Add Test Pattern on Current Session. The test pattern consists of numbers designating the locations of the rows and columns on the page. These seven fields determine the overall requirements for the statement. 5. Click Save. 6. Return to the Main screen and print a sample billing statement. 7. Click Setup, then Statement. 15-60 The Invoice Statement Format screen displays. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility 8. With the sample statement as a reference, enter a row and column for the items on the left-hand side of the screen ...or click Off to stop the item from printing on the statement. 9. Enter the column locations for the remaining fields on the screen. Items consist of Hotel Name, Hotel Address, Arrival Date, Room Rate, etc. Note If you did not check the Print Credit Card Number on Statement field on the Settings screen, the Credit Card Number field on this screen is not active. Be sure to turn off any items (e.g., hotel name/address, etc.) that are on the preprinted stationery/form. HMIS automatically produces subtotals and totals of charges that appear on each statement (e.g., phone charges, pre-tax charges, credits and payments total, etc.). The entries in these fields place the credits/charges in the desired locations. 10. (Optional) If a separate page is required for phone calls and services, click Separate Pages for Phone Calls and Services. 11. Click Save. 12. Return to the Main screen and print a test billing statement. 13. With the sample statement as a reference, adjust any entries. 14. Repeat Substeps 12~13 until the statement matches the required pre-printed stationery/form. 15. When finished, click Add Test Pattern on Current Session. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-61 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Setup Utility Template Captions To further customize the billing statement, up to 14 captions can be entered into a Define Template Captions screen (see Figure 15-25) and added to the printout. The captions can be used to print any special note required on the statement. For example, an 800 number can be printed at the bottom of each page. Captions print in all caps on the statement and appear on each page. 2995 Figure 15-25 Define Template Captions Screen ➤ To add special captions (notes) to the billing statement 1. From the Invoice Statement Format screen, click Caption Setup. The Define Template Captions screen (see Figure 15-25) displays. 2. Enter the caption in the field (up to 30 characters). 3. Enter Row and Column location desired. Maximum row number appears in the Lines Per Page field on the Invoice Statement Format screen and maximum column number appears in the Maximum Number of Columns field on same screen. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each caption. 5. Click OK. The Invoice Statement Format screen displays. 6. Click Save. 15-62 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Maintenance Maintenance The maintenance procedures provided in this section are: ♦ Reinstall software ♦ Shut down HMIS SMDR and/or TTY servers ♦ Restart HMIS SMDR and/or TTY servers Note All HMIS software comes pre-installed from the factory in the turnkey system. This procedure is included to assist you in reinstalling or upgrading software, when necessary. Before You Begin 1. Run ScanDisk to verify there are no errors on the HMIS hard drive. 2. If you are performing an upgrade, backup of the HMIS databases. Backups can be performed using the Windows backup function. 3. Close all applications before attempting HMIS software installation. Reinstall/Upgrade Software 2765 1. Click Start, then Run. 2. Insert the CD-ROM Disk into the . Strata DK I&M 5/99 = CD ROM drive letter on the PC. 15-63 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Maintenance 3. Type: :\hmis\se tup.exe A pop-up box reads “Copying initialization files...”. When complete, HMIS Setup Welcome screen displays: 2766 Click OK. 4. Click OK. The main HMIS Setup screen displays: 2767 5. Click the installation button. The HMIS setup begins. When it finishes, a status screen displays for a few seconds: 2768 Finally, a message displays on the screen stating that the installation is complete: 2769 6. Click OK. 7. Restart HMIS server/ workstation PC. 15-64 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Maintenance Shut Down HMIS SMDR and/or TTY Servers 1. Press The Close Program dialog box displays. Ctrl+Alt+Del. 2. Highlight the program name (i.e., TelMonComm, HMISComm). 3316 3. Click End Task. 4. Click OK. Restart HMIS SMDR and/or TTY Servers 1. From the Setup screen, double-click the area below the Setup menu. The Launch Auxiliary Server Applications box displays: 3303 Double-click here 3. Click Start Application. Strata DK I&M 5/99 3304 2. Using the pull-down menu, highlight either the Communications Server or SMDR Processor (Telmon) selection. The selected program is restarted. 15-65 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Troubleshooting The troubleshooting procedures provided in this section are: ♦ Verify data communications ♦ Check trunk utilization ♦ Perform manual tests/remote maintenance ♦ Output data to file ♦ Check HMIS communications with the Strata DK ♦ Verify communication port settings ♦ Verify modem settings ♦ Verify modem data communication ♦ View HMIS error file (i.e., HmisErr.Log) Important! Technical Support can request that your PC be replaced with one that meets the recommended PC specifications on Page 15-2 and that all auxilliary software (games, etc.) be removed for isolation of possible software conflicts. Verify Data Communications Step 1: Verify the Server COM/TTY Port Communications) 3310 1. From the Setup Utility screen, double-click below the Setup menu. 3305 2. From the pull-down menu, select Communications Server Viewer. 3301 3. Click Start Application. 15-66 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting The Comm Server screen displays: 5. Click Disconnect. Call capturing is discontinued. 6. Click Comm Settings. The Communication Settings and Emulation screen displays (shown below). 7. Click Connect and press Enter. A >CODE prompt appears on the screen (shown below). You have successfully connected the HMIS/Strata DK TTY ports. If the system does not respond, check the TTY port settings at the top of the screen. 8. Click Disconnect, then Close. The Comm Server screen displays. 9. Click Exit. The Comm Server Viewer displays. 2956 4. Double-click the area to the right of Flush Queue. 3313 10. Click Exit. 11. Click Yes. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The Launch Auxiliary Server Applications screen displays. 15-67 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Step 2: Verify SMDR Communications 3311 1. From the pull-down menu, select SMDR Viewer. The SMDR Viewing screen displays (see below). 3. From a DKT phone, dial and a sevendigit telephone number, then hangup. The SMDR window shows port, extension number, time stamp, duration and the number dialed (shown below). You have successfully connected the HMIS/Strata DK SMDR ports. If the system does not respond, check the SMDR port settings at the top of the screen. 2957 2. Click Start Application. 3312 4. Click Close. 5. Click Yes. The Launch Auxiliary Server Application screen displays. 6. Click Close. Check Trunk Utilization Important! This procedure stops all call capturing. Polling should only be stopped when absolutely necessary. Polling saves call records to a file and automatically starts when the software is loaded. To check trunk utilization, you must temporarily stop the polling and send either the outgoing or incoming 15-68 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting call data collected in the buffer to an ASCII file with a “,” delimiter. Exported data can then be imported to a database program and checked. ➤ To export data 3310 1. From the Setup Utility screen, double-click below the Setup menu. 3311 2. From the pull-down menu, select SMDR Viewer. 2780 3. Click Start Application. 3024 4. Click Cancel Polling. 5. Click Yes to temporarily disable polling ...or No to continue the polling function. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-69 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting 2781 6. Click Export. A pop-up box displays (shown below) requesting the directory/ file name. The default is C:\Program Files\HMIS\Outcdm.txt. If you want to change it, type over the default. 2782 7. Click Yes if you want outgoing/incoming calls exported. A pop-up box displays (shown below) requesting the directory/ file name. The default is C:\Program Files\HMIS\Incdm.txt. If you want to change it, type over the default. 3025 ...or No if you want only incoming calls exported. 8. Click Poll. Call capturing is sent to the buffer. 3312 9. Click Close. 10. Click Yes. The Launch Auxiliary Server Application screen displays. 11. Click Close. 15-70 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Perform Manual Tests/Remote Maintenance 3310 1. From the Setup Utility screen, double-click below the Setup menu. 3305 2. From the pull-down menu, select Communications Server Viewer. 3301 3. Click Start Application. 4. Double-click the area to the right of Flush Queue. 5. Click Disconnect. Call capturing discontinues. 6. Click Comm Settings. The Communication Settings and Emulation screen displays (shown below). Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-71 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting A >CODE prompt appears on the screen (shown below). You have successfully connected the HMIS/Strata DK TTY ports. 2956 7. Click Connect and press Enter. Note If the system does not respond, check the TTY port settings at the top of the screen. 8. Using the center display area, you can now do any tests/ maintenance. While performing tests/maintenance, you can record all transmissions to a file. When finished, you can view or print the file. (See “Output Data to File” on Page 15-72 for instructions.) 9. When finished, click Disconnect. 10. Click Close. The Comm Server screen displays. 11. Click Exit. The Comm Server Viewer displays. 3313 12. Click Exit. 13. Click Yes. The Launch Auxiliary Server Applications screen displays. 14. Click Close. Output Data to File This procedure records all transmissions to a file while you are performing tests/maintenance. Exported data can then be imported to a database program and checked. 15-72 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Important! This procedure must be done after hours, because it stops all call capturing and interfers with hotel activities. 1. From the Communication Settings and Emulation screen, click Record. 2. When you are finished performing tests/maintenance procedures, click Stop Recording. A pop-up box displays (shown below). The directory/file name defaults to Record.txt on your hard drive. 2782 3. (Optional) If you want to change the directory/file name, type over the default. 4. Click OK. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The data is saved to the file. 15-73 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Check HMIS Communications with Strata DK This feature enables you to verify the following communications: ♦ Check-in/check-out procedure for phones ♦ Manually changing a room’s phone service (enable/disable) or DND mode (enable/disable) ➤ To verify HMIS communications with Strata DK 3310 1. From the Setup Utility screen, double-click below the Setup menu. 3305 2. From the pull-down menu, select Communications Server Viewer. 3301 3. Click Start Application. 4. Arrange the two screens (Main and Communications Display) so that you can view both of them. 15-74 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting ♦ Check a guest in or out on the Main screen ♦ Enable/disable phone service on the Control/Status Tab screen ♦ Enable/disable DND or CFAC/ CFBNA on the Control/Status Tab screen The Communications Display Window shows the commands that are being sent to the Strata DK by the HMIS (shown below). As HMIS completes the individual procedure, a check mark is placed next to it. 3314 5. From the Main screen, perform one of the following functions: By repeating this step for each of the options, you can verify that HMIS is communicating effectively with the Strata DK. 6. To repeat a procedure already performed, uncheck the box by clicking on it. HMIS performs the same procedure again. 7. To mark all functions as completed, click Flush Queue. All items in the queue are checked as completed. If any procedures are being performed, HMIS discontinues processing. 3313 8. When finished, click Exit. 9. Click Yes. The Launch Auxiliary Server Applications screen displays. 10. Click Close. Note Strata DK I&M The HMIS workstation PC is not equipped with a modem or pcANYWHERE software. 5/99 15-75 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Verify Communication Port Settings The Settings drop-down menu displays. 2. Click Control Panel, then double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen displays. 3. Click the Device Manager tab, then double-click the Ports icon. The ports display on the screen. 4. Highlight the COM1 port and click Properties. The Communications Port (COM1) Properties screen displays. 2804 1. From Windows 98/ 95, click Start, then Settings. 15-76 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting The screen displays the resource settings for COM1. 6. Check the Interrupt and Address settings. The communication port settings for the HMIS server/workstation PCs are: 2941 5. Click Resources tab. ♦ Interrupt = IRQ4 ♦ Address = 3F8h 7. Click OK. 8. Highlight the COM2 port and click Properties. The Communications Port (COM2) Properties screen displays. 9. Click Resources tab. The screen displays the resource settings for COM2. 10. Check the Interrupt and Address Settings. The communication port settings for the HMIS server/workstation PCs are: 11. Click OK twice, then close the Control Panel window. Strata DK I&M 5/99 ♦ Interrupt = IRQ3 ♦ Address = 2F8h Important! The COM3 modem must have a unique IRQ and address setting. These resources cannot be shared. 15-77 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Verify Modem Settings Note The HMIS workstation PC is not equipped with a modem. 1. From Windows 98/ 95, click Start, then Settings. The screen should designate the COM3 port as Modem 33.6K (as shown). 2802 2. Click Control Panel, then double-click the Modems icon. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 2803 4. Highlight the COM3 port and click More Info... 15-78 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting 5. Check the Interrupt and Address settings. 6. Click OK twice, then close the Control Panel window. The modem settings should be: ♦ Interrupt = IRQ5 ♦ Address = 3E8h Important! The COM3 modem must have a unique IRQ and address setting. These resources cannot be shared. Verify pcANYWHERE Modem Settings Note These settings are available only on the HMIS server PC. 1. From Windows 95, click Start, then highlight Programs. The Programs drop-down menu displays. 2943 2. Highlight pcANYWHERE32 and from the dropdown menu, click pcANYWHERE. 2944 3. Highlight the Modem icon and press Alt+Enter. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-79 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting The modem properties for COM3 display on the screen. 2942 4. Highlight COM3 and click Details. 5. Check that Port field reads COM3. If not, use the pull-down menu to correct. 6. Click OK twice, then close pcANYWHWERE window. 15-80 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting Verify Modem Data Communication Step 1: Set HMIS Server PC as Host PC 1. From Windows 95, click Start, then highlight Programs. The Programs drop-down menu displays. 2943 2. Highlight pcANYWHERE32 and from the dropdown menu, click pcANYWHERE. 3. Click Be A Host PC. 4. Double-click the Modem icon. The HMIS is now waiting for connection. Step 2: From the Host PC System, remotely connect to HMIS Server PC 1. From Windows 95, click Start, then highlight Programs. The Programs drop-down menu displays. 2945 2. Highlight pcANYWHERE32 and from the dropdown menu, click pcANYWHERE. Strata DK I&M 5/99 15-81 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting The program prompts you to enter the modem telephone number. 4. Enter the dialing number assigned at RSTU for the HMIS PC system. The Remote PC is now able to operate the HMIS program on the HMIS server PC. 2955 3. Click Remote Control, then double-click the Modem icon. Step 3: Access HMIS from Remote PC 1. From Windows 95 on the HMIS server PC screen, click Start, then highlight Programs. 2596 2. Click HMISWS icon. 3. Type your user name and press Enter. 2597 4. Type your password and press Enter. 15-82 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting 5. Click Yes. Important! TelMon must always be running to capture telephone call data. A SMDR Processor (TelMon) minimized button is placed on the desktop taskbar. 2599 The HMISCS TTY Communications Server launch pop-up window displays: 6. Click Yes. Important! The TTY Communications server communicates directly with the Strata DK system and must always be running to capture call data. A Comm Server (TTY) minimized button is placed on the desktop taskbar. The Main screen displays. 2654 7. To exit HMIS, from the Main screen, click Exit. 8. Click Yes. View HmisErr.Log The HmisErr.log file located on the HMIS directory captures any error that may occur in each of the modules. This includes reporting the loss of communications with the TTY port on the Strata DK. If an error does occur in the software, it may be necessary to forward this file to Toshiba Technical Support for decoding. Note Strata DK I&M This file is available only on the HMIS server PC. Using a text editor, access the file in the HMIS directory. 5/99 15-83 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) 3445 Troubleshooting Figure 15-26 Sample HmisErr.Log View History Log The History log file logs all communications with the Strata DK. ➤ To view the history log 1. From the Communication Display, click on the lower right-hand area of the screen. 3308 2. Clear the History On box by clicking in it. 4320 15-84 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting 3. Click the View History button. 4321 This displays: 4322 4. Click Okay. 4321 Important! Strata DK I&M 5/99 Be sure to check the History On box before exiting this window. 15-85 Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Troubleshooting 15-86 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16 Strata AirLink Systems This chapter describes Strata AirLink™ wireless systems. There are two available configurations: ♦ Strata AirLink External Wireless System – The basis for this system is the Base Station Interface Adapter (BSIA) system that interfaces to Strata DK systems and many non-Toshiba systems using the standard telephone ports. ♦ Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless System – The basis for the integrated version is the RWIU system that interfaces to Strata DK16, DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, and DK424, using a proprietary RWIU Printed Circuit Board (PCB). Strata AirLink operates in single building and campus environments in the 1920~1930 MHz band. This bandwidth is designated by the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) for unlicensed operation, and an FCC license is not required to install and operate the system. System Components Each Base Station (see Figure 16-1) provides 4 or 8 simultaneous speech paths and up to 320,000 square feet of calling coverage for either system. Since handsets are not in continuous conversation, a system can support more than 8 handsets, up to a maximum of 32. Multiple systems can be active simultaneously. The Base Station has radio transmitters and receivers that relay calls between the BSIA or RWIU, handsets, other telephones and trunks. It has four external antennas that enable the best choice for receiving and transmitting the strongest signal. Antennas Antennas Strata AirLink Systems The BSIA system supports up to two Base Stations and one BSIA or controller. The RWIU system supports up to four Base Stations and interfaces directly to the Strata DK system without using a controller. Both systems support up to 32 handsets. 3399 LEDs Figure 16-1 Base Station The Base Stations can be mounted on walls or ceilings up to 2,000 feet from the system, using twisted-pair continuous cable. They receive power directly or locally. If powered locally, they can be installed up to 3,300 feet from the system. LEDs provide diagnostic information for System Administrators or technical personnel (see Table 16-22 on Page 16-66). Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-1 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation In typical office environments, each Base Station has a broadcast range (see Figure 16-2) of up to 300 feet. They can also be placed one meter apart in the same coverage area to increase traffic capacity without interference. Broadcast Range - 300 Feet The Base Station software is easily upgraded from the BSIA or RWIU, simplifying system administration and eliminating the need to remove the Base Stations for system upgrades. The handset is small, lightweight, and easy to use. Its Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) shows alphanumeric information and icons that report status. It has many features depending upon the interfacing telephone system. The handsets used with the RWIU system have many of the same Strata DK Digital Telephone (DKT) features. Base Station 2967 Figure 16-2 Broadcast Range Unique Electronic Serial Numbers (ESNs) are programmed into the handsets at the factory and are automatically configured the first time a call is made. Pre-installation This section provides common step-by-step pre-installation procedures and several sample configurations for both Strata AirLink Wireless systems. The configurations range from a single system with one or two Base Stations to multiple-overlapping systems. The anticipated coverage of 320,000 square feet per Base Station and a maximum number of 32 users for each system was used to layout the samples. It is highly recommended that a site survey and BER test be conducted to assist in the careful planning of Base Station placement, ensuring the highest possible quality of coverage. The survey should include: ♦ Location of Base Stations ♦ Maximum broadcast range required from any Base Station ♦ High traffic areas and general coverage areas, such as conference rooms, cafeterias, and manufacturing floors ♦ Obstructions between Base Stations and handsets ♦ Office locations and number of handsets within each location ♦ Construction materials used in walls, including the insulation, and floors between multistory buildings ♦ Window coatings and coverings ♦ Large metal objects, such as equipment, doors, and fluorescent lamp shades ♦ Distance of Base Stations from the BSIA or RWIU There are special installation requirements to meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459 regulations in the United States that are explained in the “Underwriters Laboratories (UL)” on Page 16-91. 16-2 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Step 1: Check the System Hardware and Software Requirements Table 16-1 lists the minimum hardware and software that your PC must have to use the Strata AirLink Manager software. Table 16-1 Hardware and Software Requirements Minimum Recommended Hardware 386DX 33 MHz 486DX2 66 MHz Hard Drive 1.5MB 3MB Random Access Memory (RAM) 4MB 8MB Video VGA SVGA Mouse Any supported by Windows Same Floppy Drive 1.44 MB 3.5 inch Same Software Microsoft Windows 3.11/3.1 Windows 98/95 Important! Windows 3.11/3.1 is a 16-bit application and the Manager software is 32-bit. To run the Manager software, a special 32-bit support expansion is required. Step 2: Review System Component Placement A review of component placement before installation will help to reduce or eliminate attenuation. Attenuation is loss of RF signal strength due to distance, antenna positioning, and/or obstructions. The loss is measured in decibels (dBs). dB Power: Loss: -30 -50 -62 -78 -90 40 60 72 88 100 1 10 20 50 100 Base Station Distance in Meters Figure 16-3 Strata AirLink Systems Increases or reductions of three dBs result in doubling or halving signal strength. Try to limit the total loss to 100 dBs (see Figure 16-3). 2974 Loss of Signal Strength by Distance (Direct Line of Sight) Table 16-2 shows attenuation obstruction caused by common materials in a building. Table 16-2 Signal Attenuation Obstruction Object Strata DK I&M 5/99 Approximate dB Loss Concrete 20 Concrete with metal siding 30 Brick 15 Plaster 10 Walls with windows 10 Walls with metal coating 20 16-3 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Signal Attenuation Obstruction (continued) Table 16-2 Approximate dB Loss Object Venetian blinds Open Closed 10 20 Soft partitioning 3 to 4 l To reduce or eliminate attenuation and fading 1. Begin the signal path without obstructions even though signals can travel through obstacles (see Figure 16-4). 2975 2. If obstructions cannot be avoided, do not place the Base Stations: On or near metallic objects or on walls that have metallic content such as metal girders or foil-backed insulation. ♦ Near large obstructions; for example, doors that could temporarily obstruct antennas when the doors open. 3. Place components in locations that ensure clear line of sight signaling between the Base Station and handset. Note Corridor Corridor ♦ Base Station Figure 16-4 Maximum Line of Sight In general, for optimum coverage and reduced signal fading, it is recommended that the coverage by the Base Station overlap by approximately 25 percent. Base Stations are designed to automatically use frequencies that are not already in use, so interference between the Base Stations is not a problem. 4. Plan coverage for each floor separately in multi-story environments. A single Base Station can support multiple floors. The guidelines for ensuring proper broadcast ranges and maximum traffic must be followed. 5. Consider the high traffic areas and install the number of Base Stations required to meet the estimated traffic demand. When multiple Base Stations are needed in the same location, you can mount Base Stations as close as one meter apart. Each Base Station can support eight or more simultaneous conversations. Figure 16-5 shows 2 Base Stations supporting 32 handsets in a manufacturing area. Note 16-4 Handoff does not operate between Base Stations connected to different wireless systems. Base Station 1 Concrete Concrete 6. Use corridors because they can act as natural pathways for RF signals. When trying to cover two types of areas, place a Base Station near a corridor to optimize coverage in both areas. 320' Base Station 2 168' Manufacturing Floor (32 handset users) 2973 Figure 16-5 Increasing Traffic Capabilities Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Step 3: Review Possible System Configurations It is highly recommended that you follow the installation guidelines and examples in this step. The maximum number of Base Stations that the BSIA system supports is two, and the RWIU system, four. Some configurations are: ♦ Single BSIA system with two Base Stations (see Figure 16-6) or single RWIU system with four Base Stations (see Figure 16-7). The Base Stations are placed in locations that optimize the requirements of the system. For example, the Base Stations could be placed in the same general area or on separate floors, but with overlapping coverage Base Station Broadcast Area Base Station 1 Base Station 2 BSIA 2969 Figure 16-6 BSIA System with Two Base Stations Base Station 1 Strata AirLink Systems Base Station Broadcast Area Base Station 2 Strata DK RWIU Base Station 3 Base Station 4 3731 Figure 16-7 Strata DK I&M 5/99 RWIU System with Four Base Stations 16-5 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation ♦ Multiple BSIA systems as a single system (see Figure 16-8) Base Station Broadcast Area Analog lines (32) from the office telephone system Double punch down to BSIAs 1 and 2 Base Station 1 Base Station 2 Base Station 3 Base Station 4 BSIA 1 BSIA 2 Figure 16-8 2971 Multiple BSIAs in One System This configuration creates a system with greater coverage area. The handsets must be programmed with both system IDs. Users can place and receive calls, although handoff does not automatically operate between Base Stations connected to different BSIAs. Manually invoke handoff by using )/6+ to hold the call while moving between Base Station 4 and 2, for example. System Identification numbers (SIDs) for both BSIAs must be programmed in the handset for this operation. ♦ Multiple overlapping systems (see Figure 16-9). Multiple overlapping configurations create a system with greater user capacity. This configuration works for the BSIA or RWIU systems. Use Table 16-3 to determine how many Base Stations are needed to accommodate the numbers of users at different traffic levels. Note 16-6 It is assumed that users have access to all Base Stations in a high-traffic environment where only one call is blocked out of 100 attempts. Strata DK Base Station 1 RWIU Base Station 3 Strata DK Base Station 2 Base Station Broadcast Area Base Station 4 RWIU 3729 Figure 16-9 Multiple Overlapping Systems Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Table 16-3 Base Station Traffic Requirements Erlangs1 Per User .1 .15 .2 Number of Users Total Erlangs Equivalent CCS2 Required Channels Base Stations Required 10 1 36 5 1 20 2 72 6 1 30 3 108 8 1 32 3.2 115.20 8 1 10 1.5 54 6 1 20 3 108 8 1 323 4.8 172 11 2 10 2 72 6 1 16 3.2 115.20 8 1 323 6.4 230.4 13 2 1. Typical usage assumes .1, .15, and .2 Erlangs (6 minutes, 9 minutes, and 12 minutes, respectively, where 1 Erlang equals 60 minutes of usage) per line during the busiest hour of the day. 2. CCS stands for centi-call seconds, or 100 seconds of telephone conversation. 3. Assumes Base Stations are co-located. Factory with adjoining offices (see Figure 16-10). 168' Factory Floor (32 handset users) Base Station 2 (wall mounted) 200' 140' This is especially important if the wall between the offices and factory is concrete. The Base Stations are also mounted on the ceilings and away from any potential obstructions to the antennas. Concrete Place Base Station 2 closer to the offices, maximizing line of sight signal through the doorway. Base Station 1 (ceiling mounted) Strata AirLink Systems Both Base Stations are placed in the factory area to accommodate the greater number of users in that area. 320' Concrete ♦ Offices Front Door Figure 16-10 2976 System with a Factory and Adjoining Offices If a second area was available to the left of the factory, moving Base Station 1 to that location would broaden the coverage to users in that area also. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-7 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation ♦ Manufacturing plant (see Figure 16-11). Base Station 2 The entrance from the manufacturing area into the cafeteria is a high-traffic area. Placing a Base Station in the entry area of the cafeteria blocks the line of sight to the other areas in the cafeteria. Manufacturing Area Cafeteria Base Station 1 Locate Base Station 2 centrally in the cafeteria and Base Station 1 in the manufacturing area. Align Base Station 2 with the entrance of the cafeteria to provide coverage into that area. Concrete Offices 2977 Figure 16-11 Cubicles, walled offices, and conference rooms (see Figure 16-12). Instead of placing both Base Stations close to each other, place Base Station 1 near the conference rooms and entrance area to accommodate greater potential traffic in these areas. Cubicle Area Walled Offices Walled Offices Although the number of Base Stations in this environment would depend on the number of handsets, the Base Stations are aligned with corridors to maximize the line of sight. Base Station 2 Conference Rooms ♦ System in a Manufacturing Area Cubicle Area Main Entrance 2978 Base Station 1 Figure 16-12 Office Area with Cubicles and Walls Step 4: Unpack the Shipment 1. Inspect all packages carefully and note any visible damage when the system first arrives. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. 2. Unpack all of the packages. 3. Be sure to retain the original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting the system components. 16-8 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Step 5: Check the Equipment List 1. Before installation, check the system components against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact the supplier immediately. 2. Ensure that the following Toshiba-supplied equipment was delivered: ♦ BSIA or RWIU PCBs ♦ PC cable with DB9 or DB25 adapter (BSIA) ♦ RWIU Manager interface cable (6-pin connector) ♦ Power supplies ♦ Optional power supply for locally powered Base Stations ♦ Base Stations, handsets, and Charger Bases ♦ Strata AirLink Manager and RWIU Manager software (two floppy disks) Step 6: Purchase Additional Equipment ➤ Ensure that the following equipment has been purchased: ♦ PC (for the Strata AirLink Manager software) ♦ BSIA grounding wire (for gauge requirements, see Table 16-37 on Page 16-88) ♦ BSIA external alarm (see Page 16-16 for specifications) ♦ Cable for the Base Stations (see Page 16-16 for specifications) ♦ ONEAC five-pin analog protector for outside Base Station installation 1. Pick locations for your system components that are dry and clean, well ventilated and illuminated, and easily accessible. The indoor/outdoor locations must not be subject to: ♦ Extreme heat or cold ♦ Corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants ♦ Excessive vibration Strata AirLink Systems Step 7: Select Suitable Locations 2. Do not place the components next to televisions, radios, or high-frequency equipment. Step 8: Set Up Temporary Installation Important! It is recommended that you use the Toshiba Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand instead of setting up a temporary installation. If the test stand is used, skip this step and go to Step 9. Setting up a temporary installation helps to determine proper Base Station placement without permanently cabling any components. A BER test can be easily conducted to determine the proper Base Station placement for maximum signaling. The BER test is a password-protected function of an initialized handset. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-9 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation One BSIA or RWIU, one Base Station, and one handset is all that is required to conduct the BER test. To initialize the BSIA system, see Steps 7~9 on Page 16-19. To initialize the RWIU system, see Step 11 on Page 16-45. Step 9: Use the Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand The Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand verifies the Base Station positioning prior to system activation or during the site survey. It generates an audible tone for the handset to lock onto, verifies BER status, and can be moved to validate the best locations for each Base Station. Substep A: Before You Begin 1. Ensure that the following materials are available: ♦ Strata AirLink Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand ♦ Base Station power supply with cord ♦ One or more handsets with batteries fully charged ♦ Floor plan of the facility to survey Substep B: Set Up the Base Station 1. Determine the best location for a Base Station. See “Review System Component Placement” on Page 16-3 for more information. 2. Temporarily place the Stand-alone Base Station Test Stand as close as possible to the selected Base Station location with the proper orientation (vertical or horizontal). Note When testing with a Base Station, be sure to rotate all four antennas to a 90° angle. 3. Plug the Base Station power supply into the +5VDC connector of the test stand (located on the bottom) and into a 110VAC outlet. 4. Watch the LEDs on the front of the test stand until all red LEDs are out and only the green LED is lit. Substep C: Set Up the Handsets 1. Make sure that your handsets are fully charged. 2. Press 3:5 to turn on a handset. 3. Enter and press )&1 to access System Configuration. S Y S T EM C O N F I G 1 2 : 1 5 16-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation 4. Press )&1 again. S I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 5. Enter . 6. Press ▼ (right of $%&). H I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 7. Enter . 8. Press (1'. The handset returns to idle. 9. Repeat Substeps 1~8 for each handset, substituting a different HID number (for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc.) in Substep 7. Substep D: Audio Coverage Test Strata DK must recognize DTMF signaling, if you have a BSIA. Strata DK requires a DTMF receiver PCB to support the RSTU ports. 1. Press 3:5 to turn on the handset. 2. Press &$//. 3. Listen for continuous tone while walking around the facility observing coverage area boundaries. Strata AirLink Systems Important! 4. Mark the floor plan where the continuous tone “warbles” (indicating the beginning of a handoff overlap area) and where the continuous tone “breaks” or stops (indicating the end of the coverage area). 5. Press (1'. The handset returns to idle. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-11 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation Substep E: Perform the Handset Bit Error Rate (BER) Test 1. Simulate real use rather than trying to get the best readings by: ♦ ♦ ♦ Perform tests in all possible areas that users may carry their handsets. Remain in an area long enough to get an accurate reading. BER readings can take a few seconds to register. It is recommended that you stand still for an accurate reading. Test specific Base Stations. Handsets do not perform handoff during BER tests so that you can test each Base Station 2. In idle mode, press . 3. Press $%&, then &$//. B E R M E A S U R E 1 2 : 1 5 4. Make a 360 degree circle to check the signal from different directions. H S B S 0 2 MA X GOOD 1 2 : 1 5 See Table 16-4 for BER test readings. In the example above, 02 indicates the Base Station ID, MAX is the handset receive signal, and GOOD is the Base Station receive signal. 5. Keep the handset slightly raised. Important! Mark the floor plan where the LCD permanently changes from MAX to GOOD (indicating the beginning of the handoff overlap area) and where the LCD permanently changes from GOOD to POOR (indicating the end of the coverage area). 16-12 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Pre-installation 6. Walk while performing the test, but pause occasionally for the best readings. 7. Press (1'. Table 16-4 Explanation of Possible BER Test Results BER Result Description Max or Good Values required for clear conversation. Poor Call setup is not advisable, although calls in progress could survive. Bad Area is not sufficiently covered to support call traffic. Relocate other Base Stations or put up another Base Station. Mismatched values (e.g., good/bad) Faulty equipment or interference close to the handset or Base Station. Step 10: Mount the Base Stations 1. Determine a location (see “Set Up Temporary Installation” on Page 16-9) that provides the best coverage before mounting the Base Station permanently. 2. Use locations that reduce attenuation and create a clear line of sight. 3. Always mount the Base Stations in a centralized location in open, symmetrical areas. Note l To ceiling mount the Base Station 1. Rotate Base Station antennas to expose the mounting tabs (see Figure 16-13). Mounting Tabs 2. Mark the mounting tab position on the ceiling by holding the Base Station in place to use as a guide for drilling. 3382 3. Drill the four holes in the ceiling. Rotated Antenna Figure 16-13 Important! Strata AirLink Systems Base Station placement guidelines are provided in “Review Possible System Configurations” on Page 16-5. Mounting Tabs Location on the Base Station Do not mount Base Stations on movable surfaces such as acoustic drop ceilings. Mounting a Base Station above a non-metallic dropped ceiling is acceptable. 4. Insert anchors into the drilled holes. 5. Insert #8 screws in the anchors, leaving a gap between the ceiling and screw head. 6. Mount the Base Station on the screws and tighten the screws. 7. Rotate the antennas so that they are perpendicular to the Base Station (facing down). Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-13 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation l To wall mount the Base Station 1. Choose a location that is in a corridor or non-symmetrical area and faces the greatest coverage area. 2. Mount the Base Station midway between the floor and permanent ceiling, but above any obstructions such as cubicle walls. 3. Rotate the Base Station antennas to expose the mounting tabs (see Figure 16-14). 4. Mark the mounting tab position on the ceiling by holding the Base Station in place to use as a guide for drilling. 5. Drill the four holes in the wall. Mounting tabs 6. Insert anchors into the drilled holes. 7. Insert #8 screws in the anchors, leaving a gap between the wall and screw head. 8. Mount the Base Station on the screws and tighten the screws. 3383 Figure 16-14 Location of Mounting Tabs 9. Rotate the Base Station antennas so that they are perpendicular to the wall For specific installation procedures for the BSIA system, see “BSIA System Installation” and for the RWIU system, see “RWIU System Installation” on Page 16-36. BSIA System Installation This section describes specific installation steps for the BSIA system. It interfaces to Strata DK16, DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, and DK424 and many non-Toshiba telephone systems using standard telephone ports. Step 1: Install the Analog Line Module (ALM) Note Skip this step and go to Step 7 if ALM PCB was not purchased. The BSIA motherboard comes configured to support a maximum of 8 handset users (upgradeable to 16, 24, or 32). Additional groups of eight users can be installed using the ALM PCB. CAUTION! 16-14 When installing, removing, or examining PCBs, do not touch the soldered (back) side or “gold” plate at the edge of the PCB. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 1. Remove the screws securing the cover of the BSIA (see Figure 16-15) and lift the cover off the BSIA. 2. Align the ALM with DIN connector J5 (see Figure 16-16). Cover Screws 3. Gently press the PCB into the DIN connector. 2985 4. Connect the standoffs. Figure 16-15 Location of Screws on the BSIA Cover 5. Replace the BSIA cover and re-install the screws. Important! Do not power on the BSIA at this point. Amphenol Connector (Circuits 1~16) Amphenol Connector (Circuits 17~32) DIN Connector J6 (Circuits 25~32) DIN Connector J5 (Circuits 17~24) Strata AirLink Systems 2964 ALM Plugged into DIN Connector J4 (Circuits 9~16) Figure 16-16 ALM Connections on the BSIA Strata DK I&M 5/99 Standoffs 16-15 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Step 2: Run the Cable 1. Run the cable from the Base Stations to the BSIA, using the following maximum cabling distances: ♦ 2,000 feet for line power ♦ 3,300 feet for local power 2. Use Category 5 cable. Using a mix of Categories 2, 3, 4, and 5 is acceptable, but can affect the total possible cable length. See Figure 16-19 on Page 16-17 for the wiring diagram. 3. Connect the transmit cable (pair 21 or 25) to the receive side (see Figure 16-17). 4. Connect the receive cable (pair 20 or 24) to the transmit jack (see Figure 16-17). Transmit Jack Antenna Receive Jack Debug (not used) 2982 +5VDC Local Power Power Cord Strain Relief Figure 16-17 Antenna Location of Transmit and Receive Jacks Step 3: Activate the External Critical Alarm (Optional) Note The BSIA system is not equipped with an external critical alarm. If one was not purchased, skip this Step. 1. Connect pair 22 on connector block P1 to one input on the external alarm device (see Figure 16-18). 2. Connect tip (normally closed) or ring (normally open) of pair 23 on P1 to the other input of the alarm device. Lamp or Buzzer Maximum Switched Power 60W 0.5 A, 125VAC Resistive 1.0 A, 48VDC Resistive Pair 22 - Relay Common Pair 23, Tip - Normally Closed Contact Pair 23, Ring - Normally Open Contact 2981 Figure 16-18 Wiring for External Critical Alarm Step 4: Determine the Base Station Power Supply A Base Station can receive input (line) power from the BSIA or an optional local power supply. Using a local power supply increases the distance Base Stations can be located from the BSIA. Toshiba provides an optional universal 110/230VAC, 50/60 Hz power supply with a barrel-jack connection to the Base Station (see Figure 16-20 on Page 16-18). Customers with 220VAC outlets can: 16-16 ♦ Purchase another power cord to fit the universal connector (three-pronged IEC 320 power inlet) on the power supply. ♦ Replace the 110VAC plug on the cable with an appropriate 220VAC plug. ♦ Connect a North American 220VAC adapter to the 110VAC plug. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Base Station To P1 of BSIA PWR GND RX TX GN 4128 Yellow/Grey RX Standard Silver Satin Line Cord R (Pair 20) GN Grey/Yellow Violet/Blue (Pair 21) TX R Blue/Violet Strata AirLink Systems Base Station Violet/Brown RX R (Pair 24) Violet/Slate TX Standard Silver Satin Line Cord TX R Slate/Violet RX GN Brown/Violet (Pair 25) GND GN PWR Figure 16-19 Base Station to BSIA Wiring Diagram Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-17 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Step 5: Connect the Power Supply ➤ For AC power, use the power supply that comes with the BSIA system. It has a universal input (110/220VAC), operates at 50~60 Hz, and provides -48VDC. Note The power supply includes a cable with a barrel-jack connection (see Figure 16-20) to the BSIA and 110VAC cable. Barrel Jack Power Supply 115/230VAC Input (50/60 Hz) 2983 CAUTION! Connect to power, but do not power on until the entire system is cabled. +5.3VDC @2.5 Amp Output GND Figure 16-20 Barrel-jack Connection l To connect to power when -48VDC is required 1. For DC power, a power cord with the following is required: ♦ 18 AWG wire ♦ 2.1mm ID x 5.5mm barrel jack (Switchcraft, Inc. S765 or equivalent) with minus (–) potential center lead and positive (+) shield lead 2. Connect the barrel jack to the BSIA at J1 (see Figure 16-20). Note Battery source requirements are -44 to -56VDC @2 amps. An inline, slow-blow fuse rated 3 amps @250VAC must be installed as close as possible to the battery source on the minus potential side. 3. To prevent accidental removal of the power cord connected to J1 on the BSIA, tie wrap the power cord to the power strain relief above the ground screw on the BSIA (see Figure 16-22). Step 6: Connect the PC 1. Insert one end of the RS-232-C cable with a DB9 or DB25 adapter into the serial port in the back of the PC (see Figure 16-21). RJ-45 Connector (J2 Admin Port) RS-232-C Cable BSIA 3730 DB9 or DB25 Connector (Male DB9 or DB25 Adapter) Figure 16-21 2. Insert the RJ-45 connector into the back of the BSIA (J2) (see Figure 16-22) Power Cord Strain Relief P2 (Circuits 17~32) P1 (Circuits 1~16) J3 J2 J1 -48VDC Input 3000 Not GND Used Figure 16-22 16-18 PC to BSIA Connection RJ-45 (Admin Port) 25-pair Female Connectors (Analog Lines and Base Stations) BSIA RJ-45 Jack (back side) Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Step 7: Install the Strata AirLink Manager Software 1. Check the PC hardware/ software against the required minimums. Refer to “Check the System Hardware and Software Requirements” on Page 16-3. 2. Close any open applications in Windows. 3. Insert the Strata AirLink Manager software floppy disk into the A:\ drive. 4. In Windows 98/95, click Start and Run ...or in Windows 3.11/3.1, open Program Manager and click File and Run. A dialog box displays requesting the location of the setup disk. A dialog box displays requesting the location of the setup disk. 6. Type A:\Setup and click OK. The Windows setup screen appears and warns you to close other Windows applications. 7. Click Yes A dialog box displays, recommending a destination path of C:\Wireless. ...or No if you need to close applications. 8. Click OK C:\Wireless is accepted as the destination directory. ...or change the destination drive and directory. 9. Click OK. Strata AirLink Systems 5. Click File and Run. A dialog box displays asking for verification of the software location (its program directory or the Windows system directory). It is recommended that the program directory is used. 10. Select the program directory. 11. Click OK. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The files are copied to the hard disk. A program group is created. 16-19 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Step 8: Copy the Upgrade Software 1. Place the Strata AirLink floppy disk #2 into drive A:\. 2. In Windows 98/95, doubleclick the My Computer icon ...or in Windows 3.11/3.1, open Program Manager. 3. Navigate to the A:\ drive. 3332 4. From the A:\ drive, highlight the file to be copied. 5. From the Edit pull-down menu, double-click Copy. 3505 All of the highlighted files are copied to the clipboard. 6. Navigate to the C:\Wireless\Software subdirectory. 7. From the Edit pull-down menu, double-click Paste. All of the files on the clipboard are pasted to the subdirectory. 8. Close all the windows and return to the Strata Airlink Manager application. 16-20 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Step 9: Configure the System 1. Make sure the PC is connected to a BSIA. 2. Turn on the PC. Windows automatically starts. 3. Double-click the Strata AirLink Manager Desktop icon. This displays only once when the system is initialized. 3327 4. Type the name, organization (company name) and the password. Important! If the password is forgotten, the software must 5. Click Continue. The Password Verification dialog box appears. 6. Enter the same password and click OK. The Setup dialog box displays again. 7. Click Continue. The software starts and requests your password. be reloaded. The password can be changed after initialization of the system. cannot open port 1 or 2 is received, check the software port configuration against the hardware configuration. 8. Enter the password and click OK. Strata AirLink Systems Important! If a warning message that the manager 3289 Substep A: Activate UTAM 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Status icon. 3484 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-21 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 2. Click Get UTAM Inputs from Strata Airlink. 3. Make a note of the BSIA serial number and input codes before calling the Strata AirLink Activation Desk because the staff will request these numbers. 3485 4. Call the Strata AirLink Activation Desk, (949) 5984980 for the activation code. 5. Close the Get UTAM Inputs From Strata AirLink window. Note The hours of operation are: Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time. After the BSIA serial number and input codes are given to the activation desk, the technician will give you the UTAM system activation code. The Status window displays. 6. From the Status window, highlight UTAM. 3486 7. Select Send UTAM Activation Code to Strata AirLink. 8. From the UTAM Activation Code dialog box, enter the UTAM Activation Code. 3487 9. Click OK. The message “Wireless system has been activated” displays at the bottom of the Status window. Important! Install the UTAM code in one hour or a new one must be obtained. 16-22 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Normal LED indications display on the BSIA (PWR and Master LEDs ON) and Base Stations (PWR LED ON). Several messages display (below) on the PC screen as Strata AirLink Manager tests the installation. 3491 Important! If the message “Waiting for Wireless Manager” does not appear in the Status window before the progress bar times out, or LED S2 remains lit after a reboot, the BSIA has not been upgraded. Repeat Substeps 1~9. Strata AirLink Systems Substep B: Set the System Time and Date 1. Click the Configuration icon. 3282 2. Highlight Preferences. 3. Click Time and Date. 3274 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-23 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 4. Enter the time and date. 5. Click “Automatic daylight savings time adjustment,” if needed. 6. Send the new data to the configuration file. 7. Click Close. Substep C: Enter the System Settings 1. Complete the System Settings form. See Table 16-5 on Page 16-28. 2. Open the Strata AirLink Manager program. 3289 3. Click the Configuration icon. 4. Highlight Select Database. 3270 5. Click System Settings ...or double-click “System Settings” in the active window. 3271 6. Click the Get icon. 16-24 The current data from the BSIA displays. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 7. Verify previous settings. 8. Enter the System and Base Station IDs, and timing intervals. 9. Click the Send icon. The recommended timing intervals are: ♦ Stop ringing time – 4500 ms ♦ Dial tone delay – 200 ms ♦ DTMF cycle duration – 200 ms ♦ DTMF off duration – 100 ms ♦ Hookflash duration – 500 ms ♦ FT pause duration – 1000 ms ♦ FT inter-event pause – 100 ms The new data is sent to the BSIA. 10. Save the file (file extension is .sdb). Substep D: Configure the Handsets 1. Complete the User Settings form. See Table 16-6 on Page 16-29. 3. Open the Strata AirLink Manager program. 3289 4. Click the Configuration icon. Strata AirLink Systems 2. Ensure that each handset ID corresponds to the correct connector pair. 5. From the Configure Window, click Select Database and User Database. 3272 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-25 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 6. Click the Get icon. The current data from the BSIA displays. 7. Verify the previous BSIA settings. 8. Enter the handset ID. 9. Save the file (file extension is .udb). 10. Click the Send icon. The new data is sent to the BSIA. Substep E: Program the Button Sequences 1. Complete the Programming Button Sequences form. Consider the order in which commands and text displays should occur during the execution of a telephone feature. See Table 16-7 on Page 16-30. 2. Enter events 1~20 using the command codes or text displays. 3. Open the Strata AirLink Manager program. 3289 4. Click the Configuration icon. 5. From the Configure Window, click Select Database and Feature Table. 3273 16-26 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 6. Click Select Event and Commands. 3264 7. Click a command (Hookflash, 1~0, *, #, etc.). The command appears in the designated column (labeled Event 1~20). The Select Event pull-down menu displays. 8. Highlight Display. 9. Click an LCD message (CALL WAIT, CALLBACK, CAMPON, etc.). The message appears in the designated column (labeled Event 1~20). A completed Feature Table looks like this: Strata AirLink Systems 3265 3258 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-27 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation 10. Repeat Substeps 1~5 as necessary. 11. Save the file (file extension is .fdb). 12. Click the Send icon. The new data is sent to the BSIA. Programming Sheets Table 16-5 System Settings Parameter Description Units/ Range Suggested Setting System ID ID for the system (written on the RWIU label). 1~5 Base Station 1 ID ID of the first Base Station. 0~31 Base Station 2 ID ID of the second Base Station. 0~31 Stop Ringing Time Length of time the RWIU waits after last detection of ring voltage on a line before it stops the ring. 100 ms1 45 Dial Tone Delay2 Time delay between pressing &$// and outpulsing DTMF tones. 100 ms1 2 DTMF Cycle Duration Duration of the full DTMF cycle (length of tone plus length of silence between tones) for dialing and other telephone system operations. 10 ms3 20 DTMF Off Duration Duration of silence between DTMF tones. 10 ms3 10 Hookflash Duration Duration of the hookflash in signaling the office telephone system. 100 ms1 5 FT Pause Duration Duration of pause events in the Feature Table. 100 ms1 10 FT Inter-event Pause Duration of pause between events in the Feature Table. 100 ms1 1 Second Base Station Service Enabled Enables service for a second Base Station. TRUE if a second Base Station is installed. FALSE if only one Base Station is installed or out of order. NA Your Setting 1. For example, a setting of 2 means 2 x 100 ms or 200 ms. 2. The Dial Tone Delay eliminates the possibility of a user dialing before the office telephone system is ready. 3. For example, a setting of 2 means 2 x 10 ms or 20 ms. 16-28 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Table 16-6 Line Amphenol Connector/ Pair 1 P1, Pair 1 2 P1, Pair 2 3 P1, Pair 3 4 P1, Pair 4 5 P1, Pair 5 6 P1, Pair 6 7 P1, Pair 7 8 P1, Pair 8 9 P1, Pair 9 10 P1, Pair 10 11 P1, Pair 11 12 P1, Pair 12 13 P1, Pair 13 14 P1, Pair 14 15 P1, Pair 15 16 P1, Pair 16 17 P2, Pair 1 18 P2, Pair 2 19 P2, Pair 3 20 P2, Pair 4 21 P2, Pair 5 22 P2, Pair 6 23 P2, Pair 7 24 P2, Pair 8 25 P2, Pair 9 26 P2, Pair 10 27 P2, Pair 11 28 P2, Pair 12 29 P2, Pair 13 30 P2, Pair 14 31 P2, Pair 15 32 P2, Pair 16 5/99 Handset ID (1 - 1535) Extension # (1 - 10 digits) User Name/Comment (1 - 12 characters) Strata AirLink Systems Strata DK I&M User Settings 16-29 Feature Table FCN 1 FCN 2 FCN 3 FCN 4 FCN 5 FCN 6 FCN 7 FCN 8 FCN 9 FCN 0 FCN * FCN # Commands Text Displays Strata DK I&M 5/99 Digit 1 Digit 7 Pause Echo (digits entered) CALL WAIT OK Digits 2 Digit 8 User Extension Key Pad CALL BACK TRANSFER Digit 3 Digit 9 Hookflash CAMP ON V-MAIL Digit 4 Digit 10 Oh-hook CONF VMS Digit 5 Digit * Off-hook E-MAIL Clear Display Digit 6 Digit # Terminate Call1 NOT AVAIL 1. The Terminate Call command can only be used as the last event in a sequence. Strata AirLink Systems FLSH Table 16-7 Events 1 - 20 (Use the Commands or Text Displays Listed Below) BSIA System Installation 16-30 Button Sequence Strata AirLink Systems BSIA System Installation Substep F: Store the IDs in the Handset 1. Press 3:5. The handset turns on. 2. Press )&1. M E N U O P E R A T I ON 1 2 : 1 5 3. Press ▼ until SYSTEM CONFIG. displays S Y S T EM C O N F I G . 1 2 : 1 5 ...or + )&1. 4. Press )&1. S I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 5. Enter the proper System ID (SID). Note The SID must match the data entered in the system settings. 7. Press ▼. H I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 8. Enter the handset ID (four digits) for the system ID entered in Substep 5. Strata AirLink Systems 6. Press &/5to make corrections. H I D # 1 1 2 : 1 5 9. Press ▼ for other systems. 10. Repeat Substeps 1~11 to enter all the system and handset IDs required. A maximum of eight system IDs and associated handset IDs can be stored in handset memory. 11. Press (1'. The ESN displays momentarily. 12. Press &$//. The handset ESN is stored in the BSIA. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-31 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA Additional Information BSIA Additional Information The following tables have additional information unique to the BSIA system and cover: ♦ BSIA (controller) specifications – Table 16-8 ♦ Adapter and BSIA pinouts – Tables 16-9 and 16-10 ♦ ALM removal ♦ Initial configuration change ♦ Password change ♦ Base Station additions ♦ Communication port change BSIA (Controller) Specifications Table 16-8 BSIA Specifications Name Description Dimensions 16.84 x 9.29 x 1.75 inches Weight 4.6 lbs. without ALM Mount Wall or industry-standard rack mount Input Power -48VDC or 110/220VAC with optional power supply Temperatures Operating: 10°~40°C Storage: -20°~53°C Operating Humidity: 20 to 80% non-condensing Storage Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing Operating: 4,920 ft. Note Altitude Systems operating above 4,920 ft. in low humidity areas could require additional cooling. Storage: 940 to 9,400 ft. Adapter and BSIA Pinouts Tables 16-9 and 16-10 list the adapter and BSIA pinouts. Table 16-9 16-32 DB9 and DB25 Adapter Pinouts 8-Pin Jack DB9-F DB25-F 8-Pin Jack DB9-F DB25-F 1/BLU Not Used Not Used 5/GRN 3 2 2/ORG 7 4 6/YEL 5 7 3/BLK 8 5 7/BRN Not Used Not Used 4/RED 2 3 8/WHT Not Used Not Used Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA Additional Information Table 16-10 BSIA Pinouts Pair P1 P2 1 Tip, ring — station 1 Tip, ring — station 17 2 Tip, ring — station 2 Tip, ring — station 18 3 Tip, ring — station 3 Tip, ring — station 19 4 Tip, ring — station 4 Tip, ring — station 20 5 Tip, ring — station 5 Tip, ring — station 21 6 Tip, ring — station 6 Tip, ring — station 22 7 Tip, ring — station 7 Tip, ring — station 23 8 Tip, ring — station 8 Tip, ring — station 24 9 Tip, ring — station 9 Tip, ring — station 25 10 Tip, ring — station 10 Tip, ring — station 26 Tip, ring — station 11 Tip, ring — station 27 Tip, ring — station 12 Tip, ring — station 28 13 Tip, ring — station 13 Tip, ring — station 29 14 Tip, ring — station 14 Tip, ring — station 30 15 Tip, ring — station 15 Tip, ring — station 31 16 Tip, ring — station 16 Tip, ring — station 32 20 Receive from Base Station 1 21 Transmit to Base Station 1 22 Tip, ring — external alarm connection 23 Tip, ring — external alarm connection 24 Receive from Base Station 2 25 Transmit to Base Station 2 ALM Removal Strata AirLink Systems 11 12 1. Power off the BSIA. 2. Remove the screws securing the cover of the BSIA case. 3. Lift the cover off of the BSIA. 4. Unplug connectors J4, J5, or J6. CAUTION! Do not apply diagonal pressure to the DIN connectors (see Figure 16-16 on Page 16-15). 5. Disconnect the ALM from the standoffs on the BSIA PCB. 6. Gently lift the ALM out of the BSIA. 7. Replace the BSIA cover and re-install the screws. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-33 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA Additional Information Initial Configuration Change It is highly recommended that you get the current configuration and save it to a file on the PC as the working copy. Then, open and edit the working copy – not the original file. Using this method ensures that the original configuration file is not corrupted while adding or editing existing data. Once the new information is saved, the BSIA uses the new data immediately. Important! Sending configuration information to the BSIA overwrites existing information. Make sure that the sent data contains all of the required configuration information, not just the few additions or changes that were made. Password Change 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Configuration icon. 2. Open the Configure Window. 3. Select Preferences from the menu bar and Password. 3268 4. Enter the old and new password and click OK. Base Station Addition 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Configuration icon. 2. Open the Configure Window. 16-34 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems BSIA Additional Information 3. Click Select Database and System Settings. 3271 4. Click the Get icon. The current data from the BSIA displays. 5. Enter TRUE in Second Base Station Service Enabled. Important! Do not perform this step without getting the 6. Save the file and close the Configure Window. The Desktop Toolbar displays. 7. Double-click the Upgrade icon. The Base Station is upgraded. current system settings first, or all data is overwritten. Strata AirLink Systems Communications Port Change 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Configuration icon. 2. Click Preferences and Port Setting. 3281 3. Click the new port and Close. Important! Click close immediately (before 10 seconds have elapsed) or the change does not take effect. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-35 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation RWIU System Installation This section describes the specific installation steps for the RWIU PCB. Step 1: Check the DIP Switches and Jumpers on the PCB The RWIU and WWIS come from the factory already assembled. Remove the WWIS carefully to check the DIP switches on the RWIU, keeping the pins on it straight. After checking the DIP switches, but before aligning the two PCBs, be sure that the connectors are not bent. This causes irreparable damage to both PCBs. CAUTION! 5 4 4 5 J13 2 J16 J15 J14 J13 RWIU (top view) 3 8 7 4 1 2 1 ON 3 JTAG 2 5 ON 6 DIP 4 5 6 DIP S1 8 J17 7 1 ON 3 DIP 12 ON 1 ON 3 S2 2 12 S3 ON DIP The RWIU has three DIP switches. The location of each is shown in Figure 16-23. The factory default positions are given in the following steps. J10 J8 LD2 RWIU1A J12 J9 J7 LD1 3513 Figure 16-23 16-36 Location of RWIU DIP Switches S1~S3 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation 1. Check DIP Switch S1. Table 16-11 gives the factory settings - defaults are in bold. Table 16-11 S1 Factory Default Positions S1 DIP Switch Number Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 On Base Station 1 Inactive Base Station 2 Inactive Base Station 3 Inactive Base Station 3 Inactive Spare Spare Spare Disable Download Off Base Station 1 Active Base Station 2 Active Base Station 3 Active Base Station 4 Active Spare Spare Spare Force Download Important! Switch 8 is used to recover the RWIU in the event of a software load failure. Turn Switch 8 to its off position to force a download of the stored factory default software. ● If any Base Station is not used, put its corresponding S1 switch in the on (inactive) position. If the switch is in the off position, the WWIS subassembly LED 1 and 2 remain lit and the RWIU tries to initialize that Base Station every 40 seconds. ● 2. Check DIP Switch S2. Table 16-12 gives factory settings - defaults are in bold: Table 16-12 S2 Factory Default Positions (RF Signals) S2 DIP Switch Number Position 1 2 2 3 4 5 Slave1 DECT Disabled PCS3 Disabled Four Ports Spare Off Master DECT Enabled PCS Enabled Two Ports Spare 1. RWIU must be in the master setting to operate. 2. DECT = Digital European Cordless Telecommunications 3. PCS = Personal Communication Service 3. Check DIP Switch S3 settings to ensure that the correct number of handsets are enabled (see Table 16-13). Table 16-13 Strata AirLink Systems On S3 Factory Default Positions (Number of Handsets) S3 DIP Switch Number 1 2 Number of Handsets On On 8 Off On 16 On Off 24 Off Off 32 4. Verify that the Watch Dog Timer (WDT) is jumpered correctly as shown in Figure 16-24. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-37 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Step 2: Mount the WWIS onto the RWIU CAUTION! Before aligning the two PCBs, be sure that the connectors are not bent. This causes irreparable damage to both PCBs. 1. Carefully align the connectors of the WWIS (P9~P10 and P12~P17) to the terminals on the RWIU (J9~J10 and J12~J17) (shown in Figure 16-24). RJ45 Figure 16-24 Alignment of the WWIS onto the RWIU 2. Gently press the WWIS onto the RWIU. Ensure that the connections are solid by gently pulling the WWIS away from the RWIU. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Step 3: Determine the Proper Strata DK Slot Configuration ➤ Use Table 16-14 to determine the physical slot configuration for the RWIU in Strata DK424 or DK280. The bold numbers indicate the first physical RWIU position for nine or more handsets. You can only have one RWIU per Base Cabinet and two per Expansion Cabinets. Note 16-38 For 8 handsets, install the RWIU in any slot except 11 and 12. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Table 16-14 Strata DK424 and DK280 Base and Expansion Cabinet Slot Assignments Cabinet Number Type Physical Slots Vacant Slots 1 DK424 Base 13~16 13/141 15/161 2 DK424 21~28 21/221 23/241 25/261/272/28 2 DK280 21~26 21/221 23/241 25/261 3 DK424 31~38 31/321 33/341/352/363 37/381 3 DK280 31~36 31/321 33/341/352/36 4 DK424 41~48 41/421 43/441/452/46 4 DK280 41~46 41/421 43/441/452/46 5 DK424 51~58 51/521 53/541/552/56 5 DK280 51~56 51/521 53/541/552/56 6 DK424 61~68 61/621 63/641/652/66 6 DK280 61~66 61/621 63/641/652/66 7 DK424 71~78 71/721 73/741/752/76 7 DK280 47/481 57/581 67/681 77/781 Cannot be seventh cabinet 1. Slot must be vacant for RWIU handsets 9~16 (2 slot RWIU positions). 2. Slot must be vacant for RWIU handsets 17~24 (3 slot RWIU positions). 3. Slot must be vacant for RWIU handsets 25~32 (4 slot RWIU positions). For Strata DK40i, if there are 8 handsets, the RWIU can be installed in any of the expansion cabinet slots (15, 16, and 18). If there are 16 handsets, the RWIU must be installed in slot 15 and Slot 16 must be vacant. This system cannot support 24 or 32 handsets because of a port limitation. Step 4: Install the RWIU/WWIS into the Strata DK 1. Insert the RWIU (WWIS and components facing right) into the appropriate slot of the Strata DK and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. CAUTION! Strata AirLink Systems Important! Strata DK power must be off before inserting the RWIU. 2. After installing the RWIU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Step 5: Run the Cable 1. Do not exceed these cabling distances between the Base Stations and WWIS for Category 5, 24 AWG: ♦ 2,000 feet for line power ♦ 3,300 feet for local power 2. Use Category 5 cable. Using a mix of Categories 2, 3, 4, and 5 is acceptable but can effect the total possible cable length. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-39 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation 3. Connect one end of each cable into the RJ-45 jacks on the RWIU/WWIS (Point B in Figure 16-26) and the other end (reversed) into the EMI box (Point A in Figure 16-26). The RJ-45 transmit and receive pins are shown in Figure 16-25. 1 2345 6 Transmit 4. Connect each end of the other set of cables into the RJ-45 jacks of the EMI box (Point C - To Base Stations in Figure 16-26) and run the opposite end out to the Base Stations. RJ-45 RJ-45 Receive RJ-45 RJ-45 3512 Figure 16-25 RJ-45 Pin Configuration C - To Base Stations B WWIS1A (side) RWIU1A (side) 3724 A 1 2 3 4 Figure 16-26 EMI EMI Connections to the RWIU/WWIS CAUTION! ♦ Do not use bridge taps between the RWIU and Base Stations because of potential transmission problems. ♦ Do not use current-limiting (fuse style) primary protectors on the transmit and receive pairs between the RWIU and Base Stations. Do not connect the RWIU to power at this point. ♦ Step 6: Determine Base Station Power Supply A Base Station can receive input (line) power from the RWIU or an optional local power supply. Using a local power supply increases the distance Base Stations can be located from the RWIU. Customers with 220VAC outlets can: 16-40 ♦ Purchase another power cord to fit the universal connector (three-pronged IEC 320 power inlet) on the power supply ♦ Replace the 110VAC plug on the cable with an appropriate 220VAC plug ♦ Connect a North American 220VAC adapter to the 110VAC plug Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Step 7: Connect the Power Supply The maximum available PBX power for each RWIU PCB is one amp (+5VDC). 1. Use the external power supply (see Figure 16-27) to increase the amps for each Base Station. The power supply has a -40VDC power connector for direct connection to the RWIU. DC IN Backup Batteries 2. Connect to 110VAC power, but do not power on. 24VDC Step 8: Use the Proper Power Factor (PF) DC OUT ➤ Check the +5VDC PF using Table 16-15 as a reference. Calculation examples are shown in Tables 16-16 and 16-17. Note RWIU - 40 VDC Power Connector 40VDC DC OUT OK AC/DC OUT OK The maximum voltages for the RPSU280A Power Supply are 25.0 (+5VDC) and 65.0 (-24VDC). DC/DC OUT OK AC IN 110VAC Power Cord 3923 Figure 16-27 Strata DK40i and DK424 PCB and Power Supply PFs PCB Type +5VDC PF -24VDC PF IMDU 0.1 0.16 PCOU1, 2 1.9 2.0 PDKU1, 2 0.8 0.3 With 8 DKTs. PEKU 1.6 0.7 With 8 EKTs. PEPU 1.1 6.5 PESU 1.5 0.5 PIOU 2.0 6.5 PIOU2 1.1 6.5 PIOUS 0.75 4.0 RSTU/RSTU2 (-24VDC) 1.4 0.5 With 8 SLTs. R40S 0.0 2.8 Does not use +5VDC. RATU 1.7 0.3 RBSS 0.6 0.3 RBSS2 0.0 0.3 RBSU + RBSS 3.2 0.3 RBSU 2.5 1.0 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Notes Strata AirLink Systems Table 16-15 RWIU Power Supply With 4 EKTs and 2 SLTs. Does not use +5VDC. 16-41 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Strata DK40i and DK424 PCB and Power Supply PFs (continued) Table 16-15 PCB Type 16-42 +5VDC PF -24VDC PF Notes RBSU2 0.0 1.0 Does not use +5VDC. RBUS 0.0 0.3 Does not use +5VDC. RBUU 0.0 1.0 Does not use +5VDC. RCIS 0.3 0.1 RCIU, RCIU2 0.7 0.2 RCMS 0.6 0.3 RCOS, RCOS2 1.7 2.0 RCOU (4 CO) 2.5 2.0 RCOU + RCOS (8 CO) 3.6 4.0 RCOU, RCOU2 1.9 2.0 RCTUA 2.0 1.0 RCTUB 4.0 1.0 RCTUBA/BB 4.0 1.9 RCTUC/D 4.5 1.9 RCTUE/F 10.0 1.9 RDDU 2.6 7.0 RDSU/RDSS (-24VDC) 1.1 0.3 RDSU + R48S (-48VDC) 1.1 0.5 RDTU 1.8 1.0 REMU2/PEMU 1.0 7.5 RGLU, RGLU2 2.1 2.5 RMCU 0.7 0.3 RMDS 0.35 0.16 RPTU 2.6 1.0 RRCS-12 1.5 1.0 RRCS-4 0.4 0.3 RRCS-8 1.0 0.5 RSIS 0.35 0.15 RSIU 1.0 0.3 RSSU 0.7 0.3 RSTU + R48S (-48VDC) 1.4 1.0 With 8 SLTs. RSTU2 4.0 2.3 With 8 MWs. RWIU 9.2 0.0 With 8, 16, 24, or 32 handsets. With 4 DKTs and 4 SLTs. 2400 bps MODEM. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Table 16-16 Example of Strata DK424 Base Cabinet Configuration with RCTUA4A PCB Table 16-17 Quantity +5VDC PF -24VDC PF RCTUA4A 1 2.0 1.0 RRCS-4 1 0.4 0.3 PDKU2 2 1.6 0.3 RCOU + RCOS 1 3.6 4.0 (8 COs) RBSU + RBSS 1 3.2 0.3 RWIU 1 9.0 0.0 Total 7 19.8 5.9 Example of Strata DK40i Expansion Cabinet Configuration PCB Quantity +5VDC PF -24VDC PF RCOU + RSOU 1 3.6 4.0 (8 COs) RBSU + RBSS 1 3.2 0.3 RWIU 2 18.0 0.0 Total 4 24.8 4.3 Step 9: Program the Strata DK Important! Do not use a DKT that has an intercom button for Speed Dial programming. 2. Use the following programs: ♦ Program 03 for Code 61 (slot assignments). ♦ Program 32 for Auto Preference. ♦ Program 39 for flexible button assignments. ♦ Programs 81~89 for line ringing on the handsets. ♦ Program 91-9 for automatic PCB recognition. ♦ Programs *71~73 for DID ringing on specific handsets. Strata AirLink Systems 1. Determine how many handsets, PDKU ports, and available slots are required before programming the Strata DK. Up to 32 handsets per RWIU are allowed. Refer to Strata DK Programming Manual for specific information and Table 16-18 for available Strata DK station features. Table 16-18 Available Station Features Feature Name Account Code Continuous DTMF Tones Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DISA Security Code Revision Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Do Not Disturb (DND) Automatic Call Back (ACB) DND Override (receive) Automatic Hold Exclusive Hold Automatic Line Selection Door Phone Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-43 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Table 16-18 Available Station Features (continued) Feature Name Busy Override/Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing Headset Interface Call Forward: Headset Receiver Volume Control ● All Calls Hearing Aid Compatible ● Busy Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) ● No Answer Message Waiting Indication ● Busy/No Answer Multiple Message Waiting ● Fixed Microphone Control (fixed) - Mute Only ● External Microphone Sensitivity Control Call Park Orbits: ● Park/Page Call Pickup: Loud Ringing Bell (headset) Night Lock Night Transfer ● Night Bell Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) - Handset Mode ● Tenant Ringing Lines (four groups) Page Access ● Station Groups (20 groups, all call types) Phantom Message Waiting Indication ● Any Ringing LIne Pooled Line ● Directed Station (all call types) Private CO Lines ● Held CO Lines (selectively) Push-button Dialing ● Parked Call Release and Release/Answer ● External Page Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls Centrex/PBX Compatible Ringing Line Preference CO/Centrex Saved Number Redial Conferencing Timed Reminders Dial Pulse DTMF Mode Change Toll Restriction Override Code Revision Direct Station Selection (DSS) User Programmable Feature Buttons DSS Console Features Step 10: Connect the PC ➤ Run the RS-232-C cable to the back RWIU (side view) of the PC (COM port 1) and insert the 6-pin connector into the RWIU jack (see Figure 16-28). 3333 RS-232-C 6-pin Jack Figure 16-28 16-44 RWIU 6-pin Jack Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Step 11: Initialize the RWIU 1. Open the RWIU Manager software. 2. Turn on the Strata DK. The RWIU checks Base Station status and connections. 3. Check the LEDs on the Base Stations. If all the LEDs are OFF, the initialization is complete. 4. Check the handsets for dial tone. If there is dial tone, the initialization is complete. Step 12: Install the RWIU Manager 1. Check the PC hardware/ software against the required minimums. Refer to “Check the System Hardware and Software Requirements” on Page 16-3. 2. Close any open applications in Windows. 3. Insert the RWIU Manager floppy disk into the A:\ drive. 4. In Windows 98/95, click Start and Run ...or in Windows 3.11/3.1, open Program Manager and click File and Run. A dialog box displays requesting the location of the setup disk. The Windows setup screen warns Windows applications should be closed. 6. Click Yes A dialog box displays recommending a destination path of C:\Wireless. ...or No if applications need to be closed. 7. Click OK Strata AirLink Systems 5. Type A:\Setup and click OK. C:\Wireless is accepted as the destination directory. ...or change the destination drive/directory. 8. Click OK. A dialog box displays requesting verification of the software location (its program directory or the Windows system directory). Using the program directory is recommended. 9. Select the program directory. 10. Click OK. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The files are copied to the hard disk. A program group is created. 16-45 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation Step 13: Start the RWIU Manager 1. Make sure that the PC is connected to the RWIU. 2. From the RWIU program group, double-click on the Manager icon. After a few seconds, the Desktop Toolbar displays. 3347 Step 14: Set General Settings 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Config icon. 3348 2. Click General Settings and assign COM port 1. 3349 3. Click OK. 4. Click System ID. 3351 5. Enter the System ID. 6. Click OK. 16-46 General Settings window displays. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation 7. Click Time and Date. 3354 8. Enter the Date and time. 9. Click OK. Step 15: Enter the Handset IDs 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Config icon. 2. Click User Database. 3. Download the settings from the RWIU. Default IDs display. 3746 4. Click OK. The Desktop Toolbar displays. 5. Upload the settings to the RWIU. The new IDs are saved. Strata AirLink Systems Handset IDs do not have to be in numerical order and can be changed at any time. Step 16: Enable UTAM 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the UTAM Activation icon. 3356 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-47 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation 2. Click Get UTAM Code from RWIU. 3. Enter the password LABUTAM. 4. Click OK twice. The Desktop Toolbar displays. 5. Click Get UTAM code from RWIU. The new 20-digit UTAM activation code displays. Call the UTAM Activation desk at (949) 598-4980 between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Pacific Standard Time), Monday through Friday with this number. 6. Click OK. The Desktop Toolbar displays. 7. Click Send UTAM Activation Code to RWIU. 3357 8. Input the 10-digit code given to you by the Activation Desk 3358 9. Press Enter. “Permission granted successfully” displays. If an error message displays, repeat Steps 1~7. Note If UTAM is required, the Base Stations have one power LED ON (green), two (center) transmission LEDs ON (red), and four additional LEDs that are red. Step 17: Store the IDs in the Handset 1. Press 3:5. The handset turns on. 2. Press )&1. M E N U O P E R A T I ON 1 2 : 1 5 16-48 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU System Installation 3. Press ▼ until SYSTEM CONFIG. displays S Y S T EM C O N F I G . 1 2 : 1 5 ...or + )&1. 4. Press )&1. S I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 5. Enter the proper System ID (SID). Note The SID must match the data entered in the system settings. 6. Press &/5to make corrections. 7. Press ▼. H I D # 0 1 2 : 1 5 H I D # 1 1 2 : 1 5 9. Press ▼ for other systems. 10. Repeat Substeps 5~7 to enter all the system and handset IDs required. A maximum of eight system IDs and associated handset IDs can be stored in handset memory. 11. Press (1'. The ESN displays momentarily. 12. Press &$//. The handset ESN is stored in the BSIA. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems 8. Enter the handset ID (four digits) for the system ID entered in Substep 5. 16-49 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information RWIU Additional Information The following paragraphs describe: ♦ RWIU/WWIS interface unit ♦ Changing the initial configuration ♦ Changing the communications port ♦ Checking the RWIU and Base Station software versions ♦ Viewing log messages ♦ Resetting the Base Stations and RWIU ♦ Upgrading the RWIU and Base Stations ♦ Changing the Base Station number RWIU/WWIS Interface Unit The Strata AirLink Wireless System interfaces to Strata DK16, DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, and DK424 systems with an RWIU Interface Unit. The RWIU PCB (shown in Figure 16-29) functions as a protocol converter between the Base Stations on one side and the Strata DK system on the other. The RWIU is the “master” PCB, generating timing and synchronization signals and the WWIS PCB is the “slave.” The PCBs have LEDs that indicate a continuous status of operation for both. They are shown in Figure 16-30 on Page 16-52. The switches and jumper are described in Tables 16-11~16-13 on Page 16-37. The PCB has an Intel® 80C186EC, 25 MHz (provided by a 50 MHz oscillator), 16-bit Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) embedded Central Processing Unit (CPU) with the following: ♦ External 16-bit data bus and 20-bit address bus ♦ Four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels ♦ Three programmable timer counters ♦ Eight programmable external interrupt controller inputs ♦ Two integrated communication channels Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UARTS) ♦ Integrated Watch Dog Timer (WDT) ♦ Two flash memories (expandable by two) ♦ Two CMOS Static Random Access Memories (SRAMs) (expandable by two) ♦ In-circuit test points The RWIU has the following interfaces: 16-50 ♦ Backplane (P1) ♦ Synchronous RS485 bus (J5) ♦ Serial line (J7) ♦ External power supply (J8) ♦ JTAG Mach programming (J11) Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information J13 S2 3721 5 DIP 4 S3 2 1 ON 3 12 ON The WWIS has four Base Station interface connectors (J1~J4). J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 RWIU (top view) JP1 8 7 4 5 6 ECE S1 2 1 ON 3 JTAG J10 J8 RWIU1A J12 J9 LD2 J7 LD1 RWIU (side view) Figure 16-29 Top and Side View of the RWIU There are eight external interrupt signals: ♦ INT0 – connects to the data highway receive (RX) and transmit (TX) interrupt output or to the RX interrupt output of internal serial channel one (optional). ♦ INT1 – connects to the TX interrupt output of internal serial channel one. ♦ INT2 – connects to interrupt output of the DMA channel N0 (DMA0). ♦ INT3 – connects to interrupt output of the DMA channel N1 (DMA1). ♦ INT4 – connects to N0~3 interrupt output. ♦ INT5 – connects to the RX interrupt output of internal serial channel one or to the data highway RX and transmit TX interrupt output (optional). ♦ INT6 – connects to the general device interrupt output. ♦ INT7 – connects to the interrupt output of the optional external UART device. Strata AirLink Systems The CPU addresses come from three octal latches that are also address buffers while the data bus addresses are buffered by a pair of bi-directional octal transceivers connected to the various peripheral devices. The CPU has two flash (boot) memories, 128KB each, operating at 55 ns and mounted on 32-pin sockets. The memory is expandable to two optional flash memories (512KB each, 55 ns). The total size of program memory is 256KB or 1024KB using two memories. The Random Access Memory (RAM) consists of two CMOS SRAM chips, 128KB (55 ns), used as main data memories. It is expandable to 512KB (55 ns) using two additional chips. The total size of the data memory of the CPU is 512KB. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-51 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information The WWIS PCB (see Figure 16-30) has the following components: Four E1 transceivers with crystals, line transformers, protectors, and electronic circuit breakers ♦ Two LEDS for each transceiver ♦ Eight elastic buffers, two for each E1 interface ♦ Surface Mount Technology (SMT) resistors and capacitors WWIS1A P16 P17 P14 P15 3722 ♦ TOSHIBA P13 WWIS (top view) P9 P10 P12 J1 J2 LED1 J1 LED` J3 LED2 J2 LED2 J4 LED3 J3 LED3 LED4 J4 LED4 WWIS (side view) Figure 16-30 Top and Side View of WWIS The thickness of the RWIU is 1.6 mm and the maximum distance between the WWIS PCB (including the height of the mounted components) is 30 mm. Signaling A high density Mach decoder generates all the chip select signals and control signals for Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), flash and RAM memories, peripherals, and Input/ Output (I/O) devices. The Mach device includes a serial interface on connector J7 for on-board programming. The digital I/O block has two digital input buffers and four output D flip-flops for the digital output signals. All input buffers and output flip-flops connect to the CPU lower data bus using a bi-directional transceiver. All control signals are generated to the I/O devices by the Mach decoder. A power ON external reset generator is provided by an internal WDT chip. There is also a powerfail circuit that alerts the CPU when the voltage falls below 4.75V. This feature is necessary because the CPU stores data in the backup memory of the RTC during a power failure. An RTC chip mounts on the RWIU PCB only. It has an internal Lithium battery and an internal backup 2KB of SRAM memory, powered by the same Lithium battery. The RWIU interfaces to the Strata DK system using a 32 time slot, 2.048 MHz Pulse Code Modulator (PCM) channel. The PCM channel has the following signals: 16-52 ♦ PHOUT – 32 time slots (receiving data) ♦ PHIN – 32 time slots (transmitting data) ♦ PHFS – 8 KHz frame synchronization output Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information ♦ PHCLK - 2.048 MHz clock input ♦ 4MCLK - 4.096 MHz clock input The interface with the voice channel has the following signals: ♦ PCM matrix memory time switch device ♦ Digital I/O buffers (output enable) The PHOUT connects to the matrix PCM input signal using a digital input buffer. The PHIN connects to the output signal using a digital output buffer. It is enabled only during the transmission phase of the data by the matrix. A time-slot assignment logic enables the output buffer of the PHIN signal during the right time segment. There are five hardwired address pins coming from the backplane connector (P1) of the RWIU and one additional two-position DIP switch (S3). These are connected to seven input pins to control the time-slot assignment logic for the various configurations. The CPU reads the status of these hardwired addresses and the state of the two-position DIP switch (S3). An additional five-position DIP switch (S2) selects various RWIU configurations and synchronizes the clock with the 8 KHz frame synchronization pulse. The receive data signal from the main PCM voice channel connects to input N0 (IN0) of the matrix. The transmit data signal from the main PCM voice channel comes from output N0 (OUT0). The signal connects to a buffer that generates the external buffered transmit data signal available on the backplane connector P1. Table 16-19 describes the four internal synchronous 2.048 PCM busses generated by the matrix. Table 16-19 Generated Internal Synchronous PCM Signal E1 Interface Signal RD01 internal synchronous PCM channel N1 receive data. 1 N1 XDI1 internal synchronous PCM channel N1 transmit data signal, derived from input N1 (IN1) of the matrix while the output signal is derived from output N1 (OUT1) of the same matrix. RD02 internal synchronous PCM channel N2 receive data. 2 N2 XDI2 internal synchronous PCM channel N2 transmit data signal, derived from input N2 (IN2) of the matrix while the output signal is derived from output N2 (OUT2) of the same matrix. Strata AirLink Systems PCM Bus Number RD03 internal synchronous PCM channel N3 receive data. 3 N3 XDI3 internal synchronous PCM channel N3 transmit data signal, derived from input N3 (IN3) of the matrix while the output signal is derived from output N3 (OUT3) of the same matrix. RD04 internal synchronous PCM channel N4 receive data. 4 Strata DK I&M 5/99 N4 XDI4 internal synchronous PCM channel N4 transmit data signal, derived from input N4 (IN4) of the matrix while the output signal is derived from output N4 (OUT4) of the same matrix. 16-53 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information Timing and Synchronization To comply with FCC part 15D clock and frame synchronization requirements, the clock and frame frequency accuracy must be ± 10 parts per million (ppm). To meet this requirement without adding cost, the system uses the Strata DK system as the primary clock source. The analog, digital, and Stratum 3 trunks were considered as possible configurations. To continue using only one single interface between the RWIU and the Base Stations, the clock signal is sent through the E1 interface using a 320 ms synchronization pulse. The Base Stations lock onto the RWIU clock signal and the Portable Unit Board (PUB) extracts the clock from the Base Stations. The RWIU provides a signal to all other PCBs for a simple insertion into the E1 time slot 17. Backplane Interface Connector The RWIU has a 44-pin Deutsche Institut fur Normung (DIN) connector (P1) that connects to the backplane of the Strata DK system. The connector has two rows with 22 pins in each row. PBX Data Highway Interface The PBX data highway control channel uses an integrated UART controller running at 312.5 kbs. The control channel uses the following signals that originate from the backplane connector P1: ♦ DHOUT - receive signal (input) and connects to RX ♦ DHIN - transmit signal (output) and connect to TX The UART debug serial channel connects to the integrated serial channel N0, and the asynchronous multi-drop communication channel connects to serial channel N1. The UART internal serial channels connect to the debug serial channel and the asynchronous multi-drop communication channel. The debug serial channel connects to N0, and the asynchronous multidrop communication channel connects to the external UART device. An RS-485 asynchronous multi-drop communication link between the RWIU and the WWIS occurs because the UART connects to the CPU external bus. The UART is not physically mounted on the RWIU, but uses the 28-inch PLCC socket on the RWIU. The UART receives its operating frequency from the output of the internal timer N0 of the CPU. N0 is programmed to divide the internal 25 MHz operating frequency of the CPU by a factor of 5 to obtain the UART 5 MHz operating frequency. It is possible to use N0 for other software applications by substituting an optional external 5 MHz crystal. Base Station Interface Connectors (E1s) Four identical long-haul E1 (2048 kbs) PCM interfaces connect the RWIU PCB to each Base Station (N0~N3) using a standard pulse (see Table 16-20). Each interface has: 16-54 ♦ Primary access transceiver devices ♦ Two elastic buffers for each E1 channel ♦ RX and TX line transformers with protectors ♦ 320 ms synchronization signal insertion logic (channel N17) ♦ Loop back controls ♦ RWIU generated Base Station reset (relays K1~K4) ♦ RFI protectors (common mode chokes - optional) ♦ Electronic circuit breakers for each E1 channel Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information Table 16-20 Connector J1~J4 Descriptions J4 Pin No. Name Description 1 TX_TIP_BS1 2 TX_TIP_BS1 E1 interface (transmission output from TX line transformer) 3 4 Base Station Not used 1 Not used 5 RX_TIP_BS1 6 RX_TIP_BS1 1 TX_TIP_BS2 2 TX_TIP_BS2 E1 interface (transmission output from RX line transformer) J3 3 4 E1 interface (transmission output from TX line transformer) Not used 2 Not used 5 RX_TIP_BS2 6 RX_TIP_BS2 E1 interface (transmission output from RX line transformer) J2 1 TX_TIP_BS3 2 TX_TIP_BS3 3 Not used 3 Not used 5 RX_TIP_BS3 6 RX_TIP_BS3 E1 interface (transmission output from RX line transformer) J1 1 TX_TIP_BS4 2 TX_TIP_BS4 3 4 E1 interface (transmission output from TX line transformer) Strata AirLink Systems 4 E1 interface (transmission output from TX line transformer) Not used 4 Not used 5 RX_TIP_BS4 6 RX_TIP_BS4 E1 interface (transmission output from RX line transformer) The four primary access transceivers (U7, U13, U25, and U35) use the E1 (31 B + D) interface to each Base Station. Not all of the 32 time slots of the E1 (32 B + D) frame are used. The format is called 8 B + D and organized as follows: ♦ Time slot N0 – synchronization time slot ♦ Time slots N1~N8 – voice channels time slots ♦ Time slots N9~N15 – idle (free) time slots ♦ Time slot N16 – signaling CCS time slot ♦ Time slot N17 – multiframe 320 ms synchronization pulse time slot ♦ Time slots N18~N31 – idle (free) time slots Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-55 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information The E1 devices receive each processed (but not formatted) 31 B + D frame from the CPU and transmits it (after formatting) to its Base Station through its TX line transformer. The same is true from the receiving side. The CPU performs the protocol conversion. Both TX and RX transfers are actuated in DMA mode by the CPU. The E1 device connects to the matrix using four internal 2048 kbs synchronous PCM buses with the following signals: ♦ RD01 internal PCM channel n1 received data (U7) ♦ XDI1 internal PCM channel n1 transmit data (U7) ♦ RD02 internal PCM channel n2 received data (U13) ♦ XDI2 internal PCM channel n2 transmit data (U13) ♦ RD03 internal PCM channel n3 received data (U25) ♦ XDI3 internal PCM channel n3 transmit data (U25) ♦ RD04 internal PCM channel n4 received data (U35) ♦ XDI4 internal PCM channel n4 transmit data (U35) The four internal 2048 kbs synchronous PCM busses transfer the data between each E1 device and the matrix. The matrix places the data on the backplane PCM channels. Protectors The RX and TX transformers connect to the E1 line through protector devices. Current-limiting resistors are used on both sides of the transformers. Tranazorb U45~U47, U53, U57~U58, and U62~U63 and Gas Tubes G1~G8 devices provide fast protection from lightning by sending sudden surges to the frame around the RWIU PCB. Additional protection is provided by the secondary line transformers by dual MMBT7000 diodes. All the line transformers RX and TX are breakdown-rated at 1500 Vrms. Loop back controls and Base Station resets are provided for each Base Station by a relay. Each relay is controlled by the CPU using an output port signal. Transistors drive each relay. Power (-40VDC) transfers from each Base Station to the associated remote Base Station are performed using a standard phantom interface on the central taps of the secondary of each TX and RX transformer of the E1 interface. An electronic circuit breaker with associated power Field Effect Transistor (FET) is used for each Base Station E1 interface. Important! In the case of a short circuit on the -40VDC side of one the phantom interfaces, the electronic breaker turns off its associated power FET. After about five seconds, it tries to verify that the short is gone by turning on the power FET for a shorter period (about 200 ms). If the short is gone, the circuit breaker turns on its power FET permanently. If the short is still present, it continues to retry the circuit. The same device protects the PCB against a rush current at Base Station power up. Each electronic circuit breaker block is turned on/off by the CPU using the output port that drives the LED of a photocoupler. A short circuit indication flag is provided to the CPU for each electronic circuit breaker. The following are additional protection devices for each E1 interface: 16-56 ♦ Four slow-blow fuses ♦ One polyswitch Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information Ring Back Tones Generator The RWIU PCB incorporates a 32KB EPROM that generates: ♦ 440 Hz ring back tone, modulated at 480 Hz ♦ 2400 Hz busy override tone ♦ 4 tone channels for the U.S. Each tone generates 800 bytes every 125 ms. The bytes are sent on a specific time slot of the matrix and to the related time slot of the PHIN output. Serial Line Interface There is a six-pin serial line interface (J7) that debugs and sets up the system. It is a RS-232 port and connects the PC to the RWIU (see Table 16-21). Table 16-21 Connector J7 Descriptions Pin No. Name 1 TXD 2 RTS_0 3 RXD 4 CTS_1 5 6 Description RS-232 TX data (from the RWIU) RS-232 RTS data (from the RWIU) RS-232 RX data (to the RWIU) RS-232 CTS data (from the RWIU) Not used GND RS-232 Ground (from the RWIU) Software Architecture ♦ Communication (KSU DHWY and Base Station) ♦ Local debugging ♦ Monitor communication ♦ Call control logic procedures (call origination, delivery and release) ♦ Mobility control (handoff) ♦ Handset text and icon displays ♦ System and Base Station power up controls ♦ RWIU cross connects ♦ Base Station software download ♦ Start-up diagnostics (BIT) ♦ Online diagnostics ♦ Loop tests ♦ System audit and parameter refresh ♦ RWIU and Base Station configuration ♦ Alarm reports and LEDs Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems The RWIU software is a real-time embedded software, written in C language designed for the Intel 80186EC processor. Its modules include real-time tasks, service packages, and hardware drivers. Its functions are: 16-57 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information ♦ System parameters ♦ UTAM activation The software is built in layers, each implementing a different function. Each layer gets input from the layer below and provides services to the layer above. The hardware drivers layer uses interrupts and API calls interface with the layers above. The operating system is totally independent of the hardware configuration and uses API calls to interface with the other layers. All other layers use API calls and inter-task communication messages to interface each other. The operating system main services are: ♦ Task definition and initiation, termination, and context switching ♦ Inter-task communication (message, semaphores) ♦ Message handling (mailbox) ♦ Timers ♦ Memory management (buffer pools) All access to the operating system is performed using an Operating System Shell (OSS). The shell provides a general API to the operating system services. The software supports the following interrupt-driven protocols: ♦ KSU DHWY communication protocol (addressed ASYNC) ♦ Base Station communication protocol (E1 D channel) ♦ Local debug/monitor communication protocol (RS-232) The main data structures are: ♦ Port information ♦ Card status ♦ External E1 links state and status ♦ External/internal E1 cross connect configuration ♦ Base Station configuration ♦ System ID ♦ UTAM parameter The communication protocol layer, using the corresponding hardware drivers, handles external interfaces. Messages from the KSU and the Base Station are converted by the communication protocol layer to inter-task messages and are sent to the corresponding layer or task. The hardware drivers consist of: 16-58 ♦ CPU (Intel 80186EC) ♦ E1 Transceiver (DALLAS DS2153) ♦ Matrix (MITEL MT8985) ♦ WDT (CPU) ♦ UART (16550 compatible and internal to the CPU) ♦ External UART (16550 compatible) ♦ PIC (8259 compatible and internal to the CPU) Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information ♦ DMA (four channels and internal to the CPU) ♦ RTC The communication with hardware drivers is performed using package interface procedures. The Init task controls the sequence of card initialization and synchronizes it according to the KSU and Base Station needs. System management consists of several packages—each a set of functions providing a group of services. The main features are: ♦ Alarm management (send alarm, set alarm severity) ♦ Database services (add Base Station, change status) ♦ Configuration Interfaces (reset Base Station) ♦ Test Control (set loop back, start test, utilities and general services, such as set date and time, set LED) ♦ UTAM procedures Changing Initial Configuration It is highly recommended that you get the current configuration and save it to a file on the PC as the working copy. Then, open and edit the working copy – not the original file. Using this method ensures that the original configuration file is not corrupted while adding or editing existing data. Once the new information is saved, the RWIU uses the new data immediately. Important! Changing Communications Ports 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Config icon. Strata AirLink Systems Sending configuration information to the RWIU overwrites existing information. Make sure that the sent data contains all of the required configuration information, not just the few additions or changes that were made. 3348 2. Click General Settings. 3349 3. Click the new port and OK. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The Desktop Toolbar displays. 16-59 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information Checking RWIU and Base Station Software Versions 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Status icon. 3360 2. Click Versions. 3742 Viewing Log Messages 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click Status. 4145 2. Click Log Messages. 4146 16-60 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems RWIU Additional Information Resetting Base Stations and RWIU 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click Status. 2. Click Reset BS 4147 ...or Reset RWIU. 4148 The selected Base Station or RWIU is reset automatically. Upgrading RWIU and Base Stations 3743 2. Click RWIU Software The software downloads. Strata AirLink Systems 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the Software Upgrade icon. 3744 ...or Base Station Software. 3736 3. Click BS0~BS3 ...or Download BIN File to RWIU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 The software downloads. 16-61 Strata AirLink Systems Charging Batteries Changing Base Station Numbers 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click the UTAM Activation icon. 3737 2. Click Change BS Num. You are prompted for a password. 3739 3. Enter the password and click OK. 4. Enter the new Base Station number. Charging Batteries 1. Insert the handset with the battery (power off) into the Charger Base front pocket. FLSH PWR RCL STO FCN ABC CLR END CALL 1 2 ABC 3DEF 4 GH I 5 JKL 6 MNO 7PQRS ª * 8 TUV 9WXYZ 0 # 3911 Handset LED The front pocket LED changes to amber and then changes to red to indicate that rapid charging is in progress. 16-62 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Discharging Batteries 2. Insert the spare battery into the Charger Base rear pocket. 3912 Battery LED The rear pocket LED changes to amber while the handset finishes charging or alternates between green and amber, indicating in-progress discharge. The charger switches to a trickle charge. When the handset is fully charged, the front pocket LED changes to green and the rear pocket LED changes to red, indicating an inprogress charge. 4. Remove the handset or spare battery. Important! ♦ Do not use an incomplete, charged battery, even if the battery icon shows full strength. The handset will have reduced talk/standby time. ♦ If a fully charged battery is placed in the charger, it will detect the charged condition and cancel rapid charging. The LED changes to amber, red, and then green. Strata AirLink Systems 3. When LEDs change to green, charging is complete. Discharging Batteries 1. Insert the battery into the charger base rear pocket. If the LED alternates between green and amber, leave the battery in the charger to complete discharging. After the discharge cycle completes, the LED changes to red to indicate rapid charging is in progress. 2. Remove the battery, when the LED changes to green. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-63 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting tips for the Strata AirLink Wireless BSIA and RWIU systems. Problems are classified and cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and by performing operational tests in the sequences described in this chapter. Important! Many wireless system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as described in “Install the Strata AirLink Manager Software” on Page 1619 (BSIA) and “RWIU System Installation” on Page 16-36 (RWIU). It is very important to verify that the programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware. Before beginning diagnostic and troubleshooting tests, check the following: ♦ System power, polarity, and continuity ♦ BSIA or RWIU LEDs, boot sequence, and alarm relays ♦ Base Station LEDs ♦ Handset and batteries ♦ Strata AirLink and RWIU Manager reports System Power, Polarity, and Continuity It is important to check all power sources, polarity, and continuity before any other troubleshooting begins. Quickly check the LEDs. Check the polarity of the system by ensuring that all transmit and receive pairs are consistently wired throughout the system. Sometimes switching pairs at the Base Station solves a problem quickly. Components If only one system component has a problem, try replacing it with a known good one. For example, switch Base Stations, RWIUs, BSIAs, ALMs, or handsets to see if problems persist. Communications To check for communication errors (for example, serial port failure), perform a software version query of the Base Station from the software. If the system does not respond to the query, check the cables. RF Link Termination The handset can lose its signal from the Base Station because of reduced power, interference, or stepping out of range. Verify that the battery is fully charged and the handset is in range of a Base Station. Noisy Circuits If users complain about noisy circuits or problems with dial tone, try switching the user to another circuit on the office telephone system. If a circuit is not operating at all, use a installer test set to check continuity throughout a system. 16-64 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting DC Resistance The distances between the system and its Base Stations (see Table 16-28), whether using line power or a local power supply, can be exceeded during an installation. The distances are reflected in the resistance of the line. For specific BSIA information, see “To measure the DC resistance” on Page 16-73, and for the RWIU, see “Measuring DC Resistance” on Page 16-85. System Reset As a last resort, sometimes resetting the system clears up system problems. Before resetting the system, collect as much information as possible in the current log file. Get traffic statistics reports, call status reports, line and Base Station status reports, and alarm reports, if available. Use the Save As command to save the log file. Activation Code If the UTAM activation code has not been uploaded, the Base Stations will not operate (refer to “Set Up Temporary Installation” on Page 16-9 for more information). Contact Strata AirLink Activation Desk at (949) 598-4980 for the code between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Pacific Standard Time), Monday through Friday. Voice mail is available for messages after hours. Base Station Power On/Reset Table 16-22 explains how to interpret Base Station LED readings that occur during power on or reset. The LEDs must be read in combination to understand their meaning. The footnotes to the table contain troubleshooting suggestions. Strata DK I&M 5/99 1 2 3 4 5 3002 Error Condition LED (red) Power LED (green) Figure 16-31 Strata AirLink Systems The Base Station has five LEDs (see Figure 16-31). Four LEDs on the left indicate error conditions during power on, reset, and during the diagnostic tests that run during normal operation. The green LED on the right is the power indicator. Base Station LED Location 16-65 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-22 Base Station LEDs during Power On/Reset Red LEDs (In Combination) Failed Test 1 2 11 Off Memory test 21 Off Memory test Memory test 31 Base Station Interface/processor test1 3 4 Off Off Blinking Off Blinking Off Off Off Blinking Blinking Off Blinking Off Off Base Station Interface external communication test2 Off Blinking Off Blinking ASIC test3 Off Blinking Blinking Off Off Blinking Blinking Blinking Frequency test4 Vocoder # (0–3) Vocoder Initialization test1 Signaling channel Blinking test5 Memory flash test4 Off 0: Off Off 1: Off On 2: On Off 3: On On Blinking Blinking Off Off Blinking Blinking Off Blinking 1. Indicates a Base Station failure in most cases. Check cable connections or replace transmit/receive cables or local power supply. 2. Check whether the Base Station transmit/receive cables enable another Base Station to initialize. 3. Verify power supply. 4. Test the Base Station on the another BSIA or RWIU Base Station port and with good transmit/receive cables. 5. Reset the BSIA. Normal Operation Table 16-23 explains how to interpret Base Station LED readings that occur during self- diagnostic tests that run during normal operation. The LEDs must be read in combination to understand their meaning. The footnotes to the table contain troubleshooting suggestions. Table 16-23 Base Station LEDs during Normal Operation Red LEDs (In Combination) Test Failed ASIC test1 Phase lock loop lock test2 1 2 3 4 Off Off Off On On Off On Off Vocoder # (0–3) Vocoder test2 Synthesizer unlock Off test3 16-66 Off Off 1: Off On 2: On Off 3: On On On Off Off On 4 Off On On Off test2 Off On Off Off Waiting for configuration test Phase lock loop initialization On 0: Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-23 Base Station LEDs during Normal Operation (continued) Red LEDs (In Combination) Test Failed Base Station Interface clock test Receive loss 2 2 Loss of control channel5 1 2 3 4 On On Off Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off 1. Test the Base Station on another BSIA or RWIU Base Station port and with different transmit and receive cables. 2. Reset the Base Station on the other BSIA or RWIU. Reset a Base Station by plugging/unplugging its transmit or receive cable. Reset all Base Stations by resetting the BSIA. 3. Test Base Station transmit/receive cables by replacing the Base Station with a functional one. 4. Ensure that the system has been activated or check the BSIA or RWIU configuration. Also try resetting the BSIA. 5. Check for RF interference. Replacing a Defective Base Station 1. Disconnect the transmit and receive cables and power supply, if applicable. 2. Lift the Base Station off the mounting screws. 3. Mount the new Base Station and connect the cables and power supply, if applicable. 4. If the Base Station does not come online within a minute, perform a software upgrade using the latest version of software. See “Upgrading Base Stations” on Page 16-77. Table 16-24 lists handset symptoms and possible solutions. Table 16-24 Handset Troubleshooting Symptoms Called party can hear but cannot be heard. Conversation broken up. Handoff clicks occur during conversation. Possible Solution The handset signal strength is inadequate. Try moving closer to a Base Station. If the problem is reported by many users, try moving the Base Station to a location that provides better coverage. Strata AirLink Systems Handset For best results the signal strength icon should show three to five bars. The (BER) test should report Good or Max results. See BER testing on Page 16-13 for instructions on how to perform this test. The handset is not locked onto a Base Station. Try powering off and on or moving to another location closer to a Base Station. Display does not contain date, time and signal strength. Note It may take up to a minute for the full display to appear. If the problem persists, check system and handset ID configuration. These symptoms could also occur if the BSIA, RWIU, or Base Station is being reset. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-67 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-24 Handset Troubleshooting (continued) Symptoms Possible Solution The handset ESN is improperly configured. Fix this problem by: 1. Reprogramming the handset with proper system and handset IDs. 2. Off-hook icon ( ) flashes when &$// is pressed; Changing the handset ID configured for the handset to any valid ID not already in use. 3. Handset operated correctly and now cannot make calls. Changing the handset ID in the User Database to match the ID programmed in the handset. 4. Making a call on the handset to store its ESN in the BSIA or RWIU. 5. Installing the ALM. 6. Performing a maintenance check (system maintenance busy) and loop start line status is activated. The same handset ID and system ID were programmed into two telephones and databases, and the handset ESNs were associated with the wrong analog line when the first telephone call was made. Fix this problem by: Invalid ESN reported for handset (alarm). 1. Locating both handsets and correcting the databases. 2. Checking the handset ID configuration in both handsets to make sure they are correct. 3. Changing the ID in the handset and making another call (corrects the ESN configuration for that handset). 4. Correcting the configuration for the handset that reported the invalid ESN. Follow these steps: ● ● ● Open the User Database and change the handset ID configured for the handset to any valid ID not already in use. Change the handset ID in the User Database to match the ID programmed in the handset. Make a call on the handset to store its ESN. Make sure the handset is locked and check the volume level. If the problem remains, the handset is not locked onto a Base Station. Try powering off and on or moving to another location closer to a Base Station. No dial tone. Check the analog line with a installer’s test set to ensure the telephone system is operating properly. If it is, check the wiring between the BSIA or RWIU and the telephone system. Check the BSIA, RWIU, or Base Station for a reset condition because this will interrupt the dial tone. Check the handset volume level. Make sure to align the handset with the ear rather than mouth and don’t watch the display. Weak or delayed dial tone. Consider using the predial method to make calls by dialing the number and pressing &$// (rather than pressing &$// and waiting for dial tone). The handset is not locked and it is out of range or all eight channels of the Base Station are being used for other calls. Try powering off and on or moving to another location closer to a system Base Station. NO SERVICE! message. Check the BSIA, RWIU, or Base Station for a reset condition because this will cause the NO SERVICE! message. Reset the handset to the factory defaults. 16-68 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-24 Handset Troubleshooting (continued) Symptoms Possible Solution SYSTEM BUSY message. The handset is locked onto a Base Station and &$// was pressed, but the Base Station did not respond. One or more Base Station channels could be in a maintenance busy state or the handset may not be locked well enough to complete the request for service. Unexpected digits in display. It is easy to inadvertently press keys on the handset when the handset is not in use. Use the lock feature. To clear digits from the display, use &/5. Password Protection Table 16-25 lists functions in the handset that are accessed by password. Some of the functions are for use by Toshiba technical support only. Table 16-25 Handset Password-protected Functions Function Meaning Access to functions. Unique Base Station Locks the handset onto a Base Station with a particular ID. Zero (0) means normal operation. Software version Displays handset’s software version. Beep on Roam Causes an idle handset to beep when the Base Station it is locked onto changes. Handoff by Recall Enables 5&/ to initiate handoff to another Base Station in the system while a call is in progress. Reset to factory defaults Restores the handset to factory default settings. All changes made via the handset menu are removed. l To access password-protected functions 1. In idle mode, press . 2. Press $%&, then )&1. B U L K E R D U Strata AirLink Systems Bulker DU 1 2 : 1 5 3. Enter the password. 4. Press ▼ to choose UNIQUE BASE STATION ...or SOFTWARE VERSION ...or BEEP ON ROAM ...or HANDOFF BY RCL ...or FLASH MODE ...or RESET TO FACT DFLT. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-69 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting l To lock a handset to a Base Station 1. Press ▼. U N I QU E B S 1 2 : 1 5 2. Enter a Base Station ID (1 or 2) Note RWIU 1, 2, or 3 cannot lock uniquely to Base Station 0 (zero). ...or 0 to restore a handset to normal operation. l To view the software version 1. Press ▼. S O F TWA R E V E R S I ON 1 2 : 1 5 2. Press )&1. The software version displays. l To use vthe Beep On Roam feature 1. Press ▼. B E E P R O AM ON 1 2 : 1 5 2. Press )&1 B E E P R O AM ON ON 1 2 : 1 5 ...or )&1 again. B E E P R O AM ON O F F 1 2 : 1 5 3. Press (1' ...or ▼ to go the next password protected function. 16-70 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting l To use the Handoff by Recall feature 1. Press ▼. H A N D O F F B Y R C L 1 2 : 1 5 2. Press )&1. H A N D O F F R C L ON 1 2 : 1 5 ...or )&1 again. H A N D O F F R C L O F F 1 2 : 1 5 3. Press (1' ...or ▼ to go the next password-protected function. 1. Press ▼. R E S E T T O F A C T D F L T 1 2 : 1 5 2. Press )&1. Strata AirLink Systems l To reset to factory defaults R E S E T D O N E 1 2 : 1 5 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-71 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Battery Table 16-26 lists symptoms of battery problems and possible solutions. Table 16-26 Battery Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Solution Try discharging and recharging the battery using the instructions on Page 16-73. The handset has been left unpowered for a long period of time and has drained. Battery has reduced talk/standby time. Make sure users are not removing batteries from the charger base before the green LED appears. The handset battery strength icon shows full power after a short period of charging. Complete the full charging cycle before using the batteries. Users should also use the handset during the day and recharge it at the end of the day, rather than performing intermittent charging during the day. Charger has green flashing LED. Try recharging the battery. If the problem continues, replace the battery. Charger Base The Charger Base charges the handset and a spare battery. Do not have to remove the battery from the handset to charge it. The LEDs indicate the status of the charging process as shown in Table 16-27. Table 16-27 Charger Base LED Indications LED Red Green State Steady Battery is rapid charging. Flashing Internal battery fault. Charge the battery again. If the problem persists, replace the battery. Steady Battery is charged and ready. Flashing Battery is charged, but it could have reduced standby/talk time. Try repeated rapid charging to rejuvenate the battery. Replace the battery, if this fails to remedy the situation. Steady The charger is evaluating the handset or battery state, or waiting for one battery to complete charging. Flashing Short circuit or over-discharged battery is detected. Make sure contacts are clean and allow the battery to remain in the charger until rapid charging starts and completes. Alternate flashing Battery is discharging. Amber Amber/green 16-72 Meaning Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting BSIA System Reports Strata AirLink Manager generates reports with troubleshooting information. Some of the reports are: ♦ Alarm conditions ♦ Traffic statistics ♦ Line, channel, and call status Analog Line Continuity To check the analog line continuity throughout the system, use an installer test set at individual MDF/IDF locations. Check for any bridge taps on the Base Station transmit/receive cables and remove. Check all punch downs and cable connections. DC Resistance The distances between the system and its Base Stations (see Table 16-28), whether using line power or a local power supply, can be exceeded during an installation. The distances are reflected in the resistance of the line. l To measure the DC resistance 1. Use a digital multimeter that has resistance measuring capability in ohms and a basic accuracy of better than one percent. 2. Use an RJ-11 female-to-female line adapter. 4. Disconnect the BSIA from power. 5. Disconnect the 25-pair cables from P1 and P2 on the BSIA. 6. Disconnect the transmit and receive cables from the Base Station and connect them into each end of the RJ-11 line adapter. Strata AirLink Systems 3. Ensure that all permanent wiring is done and all primary protectors are installed, if required. For information on primary protection requirements for UL1459 compliance in the United States, see “Primary and Secondary Protectors” on Page 16-91. 7. Set the multimeter to the ohms scale. 8. To check the distance to Base Station 1, connect the multimeter probes between pins 20 and 46 of the 25-pair cable that connects to P1 on the BSIA. If no reading or a high resistance is reported, measure between pins 20 and 21. A reading should register at only one of the pairs and must be less than the values listed in Table 16-28. Table 16-28 Cable DC Resistance Input Power Wire Gauge Maximum DC Resistance Allowed for 2,000 feet Line 22, 24, or mixed 98 ohms 22 66 ohms 24 104 ohms Local Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-73 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting 9. Based on which pins returned a valid reading in Step 8, check readings between the following pairs: ♦ Valid reading pins 20/46 – measure pins 21/45 ♦ Valid reading pins 20/21 – measure pins 45/46 The readings between the measured sets of pins should be similar. 10. To check the distance to Base Station 2, connect the multimeter probes between pins 24 and 50. If no reading or a high resistance is reported, measure between pins 24 and 25. A reading should register at only one of the pairs and must be less than the values listed in Table 16-28. Note 11. Based on which pins returned a valid reading in Step 10, check readings between the following pairs: ♦ Valid reading pins 24/50 – measure pins 25/49 ♦ Valid reading pins 24/25 – measure pins 49/50 The readings between the measured sets of pins should be similar. 12. If the multimeter reports no reading or high resistance, check the readings between any of the other pins specified in Steps 8~11. If readings after performing Step 9 are correct, the transmit and receive pairs are probably reversed or shorted somewhere in the installation. If not, there are open connections somewhere in the installation; check and correct all punch-down connections and repeat Steps 8~11. Status Window To diagnose problems, there are several reports available that are: ♦ Base Station channels status ♦ Loop start lines status ♦ Call status ♦ Critical alarms A software query can be performed also, or as a last resort, the BSIA can be rebooted from the Status Window. Alarms Table 16-29 lists possible alarms by its displayed number. Table 16-29 Alarm Descriptions by Number Alarm # (decimal) Alarm # (hex) Description NO_MSG_BUFFER_AVAILABLE 48 16-74 30 The BSIA attempts a system reboot after this alarm occurs. If the system cannot reset, press the reset button to the right of the LEDs. If the problem persists, contact Toshiba. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-29 Alarm Descriptions by Number (continued) Alarm # (decimal) Alarm # (hex) Description SMX_OS_ERROR 49 31 The BSIA attempts a system reboot after this alarm occurs. If the system cannot reset itself, press the reset button to the right of the LEDs. If the problem persists, contact Toshiba. 50 32 UTAM_CHECK_FAIL_SYSTEM_CLOCK 51 33 UTAM_ACTIVATION_NEEDED (UTAM_CHECK_FAIL_NORMAL) Contact Toshiba for an UTAM activation code. INVALID_HSID_FROM_BS 138 8A 153 99 A handset with invalid handset ID, but valid system ID, tried to make a call. Compare the handset ID against the user database in the Strata AirLink Manager and ensure that they match. INVALID_INCOMING_BCC A bad connection exists between the BSIA and Base Station. Check the cable. INVALID_ESN A handset with invalid Electronic Serial Number (ESN) tried to make a call. Check the system settings database in the Strata AirLink Manager software against the handset ESN. Ensure that they are the same. 161 A1 186 BA 194 C2 203 CB 204 CC 207 CF The system must be UTAM activated. See “Set Up Temporary Installation” on Page 16-9. 208 D0 UTAM_ACTIVITION_CODE_IS_OLD UTAM_ACTIVATION_NOT_NEEDED The UTAM activation code is not required. Check the cable connections between the BSIA and Base Station. FAILURE_IN_BS_SW_UPGRADE The software upgrade process failed. Check the cable connections between the PC and BSIA and try again. TIMEOUT_IN_BS_SW_UPGRADE The software upgrade process failed. Check the cable between the PC and BSIA and try again. Strata AirLink Systems NO_BS_SANITY_RESPONSE_RECEIVED INVALID_MSG_BEFORE_UTAM_ACTIV INCOMPATIBLE_BS_SW_VERSION 256 D9 The software version of one of the Base Stations is not compatible with the BSIA software. Upgrade the system software. UTAM_ACTIVATION_FAILED N/A Strata DK I&M N/A 5/99 A failure occurred during the UTAM activation process. A new UTAM activation code is needed. Contact Toshiba Activation Desk at (949) 5984980. 16-75 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Critical Alarm Relay When a critical alarm is detected, a relay on the BSIA is triggered and LED S3 flashes. The relay activates an external alarm, if one is installed (see installation instructions and specifications in Step 3 on Page 16-16). To reset the alarm relay and determine the cause of the critical alarm, check the critical alarm report in the Strata AirLink Manager. Checking the critical alarm report also stops the flashing LED. LEDs There are LEDs on the BSIA (controller) that give continuous system status and assist in diagnosing symptoms. When the BSIA system is powered on, all BSIA LEDs except for PWR, RLOS1, and RLOS2 go through these changes: ♦ LEDs are lit for one second to show that they all work. ♦ LEDs turn OFF for a brief moment. ♦ LEDs light again. ♦ Each LED is turned OFF as the LED passes the test. ♦ If an LED remains lit after the boot tests complete, one or more hardware integrity tests have failed. Call processing software usually starts even if some of the tests fail, although some failures prevent call processing software from starting. ♦ The MASTER LED remains lit during boot up because it does not respond to a boot test. ♦ The PWR LED is always lit when the BSIA has power. The RLOS LEDs flicker during boot tests and are lit when there is a problem with Base Station connections. Table 16-30 explains the meaning of the LED states during boot up and normal operation. Table 16-30 BSIA LEDs during Boot Up and Normal Operation Meaning When Lit Bottom Label Top Label Color POWER Green The power is on. 9 MASTER Yellow This LED should always be lit. 8 BUSY1 Green The test that checks the integrity of the connection to Base Station 1 failed. 7 RLOS1 Red 6 BUSY2 Green 5 16-76 RLOS2 Red Boot Up Normal Operation One or more channels on Base Station 1 are busy. If flashing, a software upgrade is in process. Loss of synchronization occurs on Base Station 1 because of poor connection, bad cable, Base Station or BSIA failure. The test that checks the integrity of the connection to Base Station 2 failed. One or more channels on Base Station 2 are busy. Loss of synchronization occurs on Base Station 2 because of poor connection, bad cable, Base Station failure, BSIA failure; or the Second Base Station Service Enabled parameter is set to TRUE in the System Settings database when the system has one Base Station only. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-30 BSIA LEDs during Boot Up and Normal Operation (continued) Meaning When Lit Bottom Label Top Label Color 4 S3 Yellow The test that checks the integrity of the real time clock failed. Yellow The test that checks the integrity of call processing software stored in non-volatile memory failed. Try reloading the software (see “Activate the External Critical Alarm (Optional)” on Page 16-16). 3 S2 Boot Up 2 S1 Yellow The test that checks the integrity of boot software stored in non-volatile memory failed because there is a hardware failure. 1 S0 Yellow The test that checks volatile memory failed because there is a hardware failure. Normal Operation If flashing, a critical alarm has occurred. Upgrading Base Stations CAUTION! 1. From the Desktop Toolbar, click Status. Strata AirLink Systems This procedure should only be performed if technical support requires it. Attempting the procedure without technical support, could destroy the system. 3496 Monitor the upgrade by viewing the status messages as the BSIA powers up. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-77 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting 2. From the Desktop Toolbar, click Upgrade. 3279 3. From the Select software to be uploaded: dialog box, highlight the file and click OK. 3497 4. From the Software Upgrade screen, click OK. The BSIA boots automatically. 3492 Note If the BSIA does not boot automatically within a few seconds, which occurs sometimes during the initial upgrade, press the reset button on the BSIA. 16-78 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting A series of screens display: ♦ Upgrade of the BSIA software: 3493 ♦ Upgrade of the Base Station software: 3494 ♦ Normal failure of the Base Station upgrade: 3495 Important! At this point in the upgrade process, input the UTAM system activation code. Strata AirLink Systems 5. From the Software Upgrade screen, click OK. 3483 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-79 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting 6. From the Status menu bar, highlight UTAM and pull down its menu. 3484 7. From the UTAM pull-down menu, select Get UTAM Inputs From Strata AirLink. 3485 Important! Make a note of the BSIA serial number and input codes before calling the Strata AirLink Activation Desk because the staff will ask for these numbers. 8. Call the Strata AirLink Activation Desk, (949) 5984980 for the activation code. 9. Close the Get UTAM Inputs From Strata AirLink window. Note The hours of operation are: Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time. After the BSIA serial number and input codes are given to the activation desk, the technician will give you the UTAM system activation code. The Status window displays. 10. From the Status window, highlight UTAM and pull down its menu. 3486 11. From the UTAM pull-down menu, select Send UTAM Activation Code to Strata AirLink. 3488 16-80 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting 12. In the UTAM Activation Code dialog box, enter the UTAM Activation Code and click OK. 3487 The message “Wireless system has been activated” is displayed at the bottom of the Status window. Important! The UTAM code must be installed in one hour or a new one is required. Normal LED indications display on the BSIA (PWR and Master LED ON) and Base Stations (PWR LED ON). Several messages display (shown at the right) on the PC screen as Strata AirLink Manager tests the installation. Important! If the message “Waiting for Wireless Manager” does not appear in the Status window before the progress bar times out, or LED S2 remains lit after a reboot, the BSIA has not been upgraded. Repeat Substeps 1~12. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems 3491 16-81 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Replacing Defective Handsets 1. Go to the Configure Window. 2. Pull down the Select Database menu and click User Database. 3272 x 3. From the User Database toolbar, click Get. Current information displays. 4. Highlight the handset ID to be replaced and delete the ID. 5. From the User Database toolbar, click Send. Strata AirLink Manager prompts for confirmation. 6. Click OK. The new data is uploaded. 7. Input the original handset ID. Important! Enter the new SID and HID in the handset by accessing System Configuration ( + )&1). 8. From the User Database toolbar, click Send. Strata AirLink Manager prompts for confirmation. 9. Click OK. The data is uploaded. 10. Go off-hook and press &$//. New ESN is locked into the BSIA. Log Files The Strata AirLink Manager creates log files that open in any text editor for viewing. If the log file has blank lines when opened, Strata AirLink Manager is running in the background. Close the software and re-open the log file. Communication errors (PDQ Comm) occur in the log file when the BSIA is powered on. This has no effect on performance. If the log file has information about the boot software instead of the Base Station software after an upgrade or when querying the software, try querying the BSIA software version before querying the Base Station software. 16-82 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Error Messages There are several error messages that can occur during the initial configuration process and data uploads. Most are self-explanatory. A brief description of each is in Tables 16-31 and 16-32. Table 16-31 System/Base Station ID Troubleshooting Error Message Possible Solution When alpha characters are input instead of numeric characters, this displays: Click OK and input numeric values. 3269 When adding a Base Station and a word was entered that Strata AirLink Manager does not recognize in the Second Base Station Service Enable field, the following displays: Click OK and input TRUE or FALSE. 3278 3262 Click OK and enter the proper number. Strata AirLink Systems If incorrect DTMF cycle duration ranges have been input, these display: 3263 Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-83 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting Table 16-32 BSIA Troubleshooting Error Message Possible Solution When uploading data, if this error message displays: Check the serial port and try again. If it still fails, contact the System Administrator. 3283 If these error messages display during UTAM activation or a software upgrade: ● BSIA off-line ● System did not boot ● Critical alarm #48 Reset the BSIA immediately to clear all errors and try again. If this error message: “Corrupt Msg from BSIA. Msg length = 31. Pls try again” or “ALM #200. Invalid msg during Base Station sw upgrade” displays Try the upgrade again. If the Strata AirLink Manager loses its communication link with the BSIA Restart the software to re-establish the connection. RWIU System LEDs There are two LEDs for each Base Station jack on the WWIS, and two on the RWIU for the external power jack and system. The Base Station LEDs are for the transmit and receive sides of the Base Stations. If the LEDs are OFF, they are linked and working. If they are ON, there could be a problem with the cabling or battery. The power LED should be on and the system LED should be blinking. This means that the system is properly linked and working. If any Base Station is not used, its jumper on DIP switch S1 should be off. If S1 is on, the two LEDs will remain lit and the RWIU will try to initialize that Base Station every 40 seconds. Replacing a Defective Handset 1. From the Desktop toolbar, click the Config icon. 3348 2. Click General Settings. 16-84 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Troubleshooting 3. Get current handset IDs. 4149 4. Highlight the defective handset ID and press Del. 5. Input the new handset ID. 6. Click OK. 7. Go off-hook and press &$//. New ESN is locked to the RWIU. Measuring DC Resistance 1. Use a digital multimeter that has resistance measuring capability in ohms and a basic accuracy of better than one percent. 3. Ensure that all permanent wiring is done and all primary protectors are installed, if required. For information on primary protection requirements for UL1459 compliance in the United States, see “Primary and Secondary Protectors” on Page 16-91. 4. Disconnect the RWIU from power. 5. Disconnect the cables from Base Station 1, 2, 3, and 4. 6. Disconnect the transmit and receive cables from the Base Station and connect them into each end of the RJ-11 line adapter, creating a loop. Strata AirLink Systems 2. Use an RJ-11 female-to-female line adapter. 7. Set the multimeter to the ohms scale. 8. To check the distance to Base Station 1, connect the multimeter probes between pins 1 and 5 or 1 and 6, depending on the cable polarity. 9. Connect the probes between 2 and 5 or 2 and 6. Note Strata DK I&M A reading should register at only one of the pairs and must be less than the values listed in Table 16-33. 5/99 16-85 Strata AirLink Systems Base Station Specifications Table 16-33 Cable DC Resistance Input Power Wire Gauge Maximum DC Resistance Allowed for 2,000 feet Line 22, 24, or mixed 22/24 98 ohms 22 66 ohms 24 104 ohms Local 10. Repeat Steps 1~9 to check all the Base Stations. 11. If the multimeter reports no reading or high resistance, check the readings again. If the readings are correct after performing Step 9, the transmit and receive pairs are probably reversed or shorted somewhere in the installation. If not, there are open connections somewhere in the installation; check and correct all punch-down connections and repeat Steps 1~9. Base Station Specifications The following tables list the Base Station and power supply specifications for both wireless systems. Table 16-34 Base Station Item Description Dimension 13.25 x 13.25 x 2.5 inches Weight 4 lbs., 11.5 oz. Temperatures Operating: 0°~40°C Storage: -10°~70°C Channels 8 duplex, 1 control Antennas 4 Antenna Gain 4 dBi maximum, 3 dBi typical Mount Ceiling or wall Wiring Distances from BSIA/RWIU Line Power: 1,186 ft. (24 AWG) 2,985 ft. (22 AWG) Local Power: 3,280 ft. (22 and 24 AWG) 16-86 Modulation π/4 differential (QPSK) Gross Bit Rate 384 kbs (QPSK) Access Method FDMA/TDMA/TDD Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Handset Specifications Table 16-34 Base Station (continued) Item Table 16-35 Description Power Requirements Peak Transmission: 80 milliwatts Average Transmission: 40 milliwatts From PBX: 6.5~13 watts For remote power: 13 watts at 2,300 feet Input: -48VDC line power; +5.2VDC local power Consumption: 11.5 watts (-48VDC) from the PBX Miscellaneous Line powered, local power option, voice scrambling. Base Station Power Supply (Local Power Option Only) Name Description Dimensions 5 x 3 x 2.25 inches Weight 15.5 oz. without cable Mount Desktop Power Input: 115/230VAC 0.6/0.3 amps (50/60 Hz) Output: 5.2V at 2.5 amps (20 watts maximum) Operating: 10°~40°C Storage: 0°~50°C Strata AirLink Systems Temperatures Handset Specifications Table 16-36 Handset Name Description Dimension 6.125 x 2.25 x 1.125 inches Weight 6.4 oz. with battery Transmission Peak: 80 milliwatts Average: 5 milliwatts Antenna 1 internal Antenna Gain 3 dBi maximum, 2 dBi typical Modulation π/4 (QPSK) Temperatures Operating: 0°~40°C Storage: 0°~50°C (without battery) -10°~70°C (with battery) Ringer Types: 8 Volumes: 3, plus mute LCD 2 lines and 9 characters Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-87 Strata AirLink Systems Grounding Requirements Grounding Requirements Table 16-37 provides the recommended gauges for the distances between the system and the master ground bus of the office telephone system. The proper gauge wire ensures that DC resistance does not exceed 0.25 ohms. Table 16-37 Ground Wire Requirements StrataAirLink:Distance Between BSIA/RWIU & Ground Recommended Gauge 0~18 feet 16 AWG 0~30 feet 14 AWG 0~46 feet 12 AWG 0~73 feet 10 AWG 0~113 feet 8 AWG FCC The Strata AirLink wireless telephone system operates under the FCC Part 15 rules for Unlicensed Personal Communications Service (UPCS) equipment in the 1920~1930 MHz band. Note Part 15 ID numbers for the Base Station (BS) and handset are BS-CJ6DT-WRLS-BS-01 and HS-CJ6DT-WRLS-HS-01, respectively. The system complies with UL1459 for safety, and the compliance ID is C86-0345. Part 68 The Strata AirLink Wireless telephone system complies with Part 68 of FCC rules. Product labels contain, along with other information, the FCC registration number. This information must be provided to the telephone company if they request it. Note The FCC Part 68 registration number is 5RYISR-23723-WC-T, and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is 0.6B. An FCC-compliant telephone cord with modular plug is provided with the system hardware. This equipment is designed for telephone networks or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant. If the wireless equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will give advance notification. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will give notification as soon as possible. Along with the notification, the telephone company will advise of the right to file a complaint with the FCC, if necessary. To report trouble with the wireless equipment, please contact Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunications Systems Divisions in Irvine, CA, (949) 583-3700 for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the public telephone network, the telephone company can request that the wireless equipment be removed from the network until the problem is resolved. Important! 16-88 Repairs must be made by an authorized representative or the warranty is void. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems UTAM, Inc. Do not install the wireless equipment on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utilities commission for information. It is recommended that an AC surge arrestor be installed in the AC outlet to which the wireless system is connected. This prevents damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges. The wireless system provides access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities is a violation of the telephone operator consumer services improvement act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules. Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with this chapter of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual, it can cause harmful interference to radio communications. Important! ● ● Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. can void the authority to operate the equipment. The 25-pair cable that connects the BSIA to an MDF must be shielded to meet FCC emissions limits under Part 15 Class A. The Strata AirLink system operates in the 1920~1930MHz band, and microwave services are also offered in this band. The FCC has designated UTAM, Inc. to coordinate the transition of microwave services to other frequency bands and the installation of new UPCS equipment, which includes the wireless system, until all microwave users are cleared from the band. Each device requesting FCC certification must have an affidavit from UTAM stating that the device meets the requirements of Rules 15.307(d), (e), and (h), regarding UTAM location verification and disablement. The basic mandatory requirements are: ♦ The handset must not transmit when it is not within the coverage area of any system Base Station. ♦ A Base Station must not begin operation until it is UTAM confirmed and attached to a permanent structure such as a building so that it cannot be easily relocated. ♦ If the system is removed from its original installed location and re-installed at another location, the system must not begin operation until the new location is UTAM confirmed. Strata AirLink Systems UTAM, Inc. The Frequency Coordination Service Request (sample on Page 16-90) must be completed and sent to UTAM before activation of the system. Contact the Strata AirLink Desk at (949) 598-4980 for more information between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Pacific Standard Time), Monday through Friday. Voice mail is available for messages after hours. Strata DK I&M 5/99 16-89 Strata AirLink Systems UTAM, Inc. UTAM FREQUENCY COORDINATION SERVICE REQUEST Part 1 - Installation Status Type of Request (circle one): New-Permanent/New-Temporary/Reiteration/Removal/Relocation Installation Date: If Temporary, Proposed Activation Date: Removal Date: Part 2 - Dealer Information Dealer Name: Telephone: Dealer Contact: Fax: Part 3 - Site Information Customer Name: County of Installation: Street: Customer Contact: City: Customer Contact Telephone: State: Zip: Customer Contact Fax: Part 4 - Equipment Information No. of BSIA Controllers: No. of Base Stations (antennas) Inside: Outside: No. of Handsets: Max. Height (inch/feet) and/or Floor of Base Stations Inside: Outside: DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS POINT Part 5 - System Information UTAM ID: BSIA CJ6CCLMU00022 Base Station: CJ6DT-WRLS-BS-01 Handset: CJ6DT-WRLS-HS-01 Band: Isochronous Power/Device (mW) - Fixed: 40mW Mobile: 5mW Building Loss: Unknown Max. Horizontal Distance: 2,000 ft. (default) Latitude: Longitude: Zone 1 or Zone 2: FIPS No.: PFC ID (if not a new site) UTAM Site ID: Part 6 - Approvals Jeff Parkin Telephone: (949) 598-4980 Name/Signature of Company Rep./Coordinator: Fax: (949) 583-3097 Title: Primary Frequency Coordinator Date: UTAM Member Contact (if different from above): Paul Keith 16-90 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Strata AirLink Systems Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) To ensure that installations are fully protected from fire hazards, UL1459 specifies primary and secondary protectors for circuits that interconnect to the telephone network or cables that exit/enter buildings. Primary and Secondary Protectors Protectors replace bridge clips when installed across two horizontal 66-block terminals. When using 66-50 connector blocks, it is recommended that protector ITW Linx SCP-9 be used as the secondary protector and out-of-building primary protector. It provides overvoltage protection of 600VAC or DC, overcurrent protection of 350 mA, and installs in series with the telephone loop. Line circuits do not require protectors unless the circuit is cross-connected to out-of-building circuits. In this case, it is recommended that ONEAC 6-AP200 protectors are used. This is a single, block-mounted protector that provides both primary and secondary protection for out-of-building, single-line circuits. System Line Circuit Requirements Line circuits do not require protectors unless the circuit is cross-connected to out-of-building circuits. Out-of-building circuits require primary/secondary protectors, and it is recommended that the ONEAC 6-AP200 be used. This is a single, block-mounted protector that provides both primary and secondary protection for out-of-building, single-line circuits that are terminated to a system. MDF/IDF Bridge Clips (Not Protected) P2 Pair 1 To OPS Analog Line Unit 25-pair Cable OPS Pair 16 OPS Telephone System WFC/P1 Pair 1 OPS To ONS Analog Line Unit Strata AirLink Systems Double Punch Down on System Side Pair 16 25-pair Cable OPS Primary Protection (ONEAC 6-AP-200) Base Station 1 Pair 20 ONS P2 BSIA P1 Pair 21 Base Station 2 Pair 24 ONS Pair 25 3004 Figure 16-32 Primary and Secondary Protectors Strata DK I&M 5/99 ONS = ON-Premise Equipment OPS = OFF-Premise Equipment 16-91 Strata AirLink Systems Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 16-92 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary Term Definition Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts. ACD Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents. The ACD supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents. ACD/MIS Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS). ADM Add-on Module—See DADM. Amphenol Connector A 25-pair connector typically used on a multi-button telephone set for interfacing cables to many electronic key and PBX systems. ANI Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata DK system over incoming DID or tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone service companies. B-channel Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an ISDN line at 64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is a logical, rather than a physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI. B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution. BGM Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and external speakers. bps Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of electronic signals. It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation. BRI Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface with RJ-11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ-45 four pair S/T interface wiring. CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting. A special trunk provided by the phone company or the E911 Public Safety Answering Point Agency. CESID Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station or station location which is sent to the CAMA trunk. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary AA GL-1 Glossary CCVY ~ DK Term GL-2 Definition CCVY Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector—Enables two-way transmissions between the Strata DK and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and one-way transmissions to other PCs. There are four ports on the Call Center Viewer Connector for one Strata DK, another master port, and two additional ports. CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local telephone companies. CLID or CND Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or name of the calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines. This feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies. CO Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service (CO lines, E & M tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate geographical area. CO Line A term used to define the Strata DK system hardware circuits that connect to the Central Office network line pair. Each CO line, DID and tie line circuit is assigned a CO line number in system software. CODECs Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversions. DADM Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital telephones to provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line access. D-channel Used in ISDN. This channel transmits call control information (out-of-band signaling) for B-channels. The D-channel is a logical, not a physical channel. DDCB Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. DDSS Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone. DIL Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular extension or hunt group. DID Line Direct Inward Dialing line. DISA Direct Inward System Access—A feature that allows an outside party to access the Strata DK system internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling. DK Digital Key. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary DKAdmin ~ DVSU Term Definition Toshiba’s customer database programming and upload/download software package for Strata DK systems. DKBackup Toshiba’s customer database upload/download software package for Strata DK systems. DKT Digital Telephone. DKT2000 series Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models: two 10-button models with handsfree answerback and/or LCD display and two 20 button telephones with speakerphone or a speakerphone with LCD display. DKSU14A Strata DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply. Equipped with two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits built-in. Includes external page interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control. DKSUB280 or DKSUB424 Base Cabinet—Unit that houses the Common Control Unit (RCTU), as well as six universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The Base Cabinet also contains a power supply that provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the base cabinet PCBs. DKSUE280 or DKSUE424 Expansion Cabinet—Optional unit that has six universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs. As many as five expansion cabinets can be added to the system. DKSUB40i Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply and battery charger. Equipped with eight digital telephone circuits built-in, and no CO line circuits. Includes external page interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control. [DN] Directory Number. DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata DK over incoming DID or tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone companies. DPFT Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit—An optional backup unit that provides emergency service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight standard telephones to designated CO lines. DSS Direct Station Selection—Feature which allows a telephone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button. DTMF Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing. DVSU A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA). Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary DKAdmin GL-3 Glossary E911 ~ ISDN Term GL-4 Definition E911 Enhanced 911 operation that provides more complete locator information to the responding agency. EKT Electronic Telephone. ESF Extended Super Frame. EOCU Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly—An optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or Electronic Telephone/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) that enables properly configured telephones (see HVSU2) to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. FCC Federal Communications Commission—The federal agency which regulates the telecommunication industry. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved. HDCB Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. HDSS Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones. HESB External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM) speaker. HESC-65A A cable used to connect an HHEU-equipped digital telephone or an HHEUequipped electronic telephone to the external speaker box (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature. HHEU Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a 6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be connected to the telephone. HPFB Optional Reserve Power Battery Charger (DK14)—One or two can be connected to the power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure. HVSU2 Subassembly that fits into a 6500-series electronic telephone enabling it to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. The telephone must be connected to an Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or a Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) equipped with an Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly (EOCU) to receive OCA, and must have three-pair wiring. IMDU Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS) that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary K4RCU, K5RCU ~ NT-1 Term Definition Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit—An optional PCB installed on the TMAU motherboard. The K4RCU3A, K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit) and it is required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and DID. The K4RCU and K5RCU circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate. K4RCU has four DTMF receivers and four ABR busy tone detectors; K5RCU1A and 2A have five DTMF receivers and four ABR detectors. KCDU CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK40)—The KCDU has two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital telephone circuits can support all but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit integrated digital telephone circuits: digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIUD12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs, DDCBs and RPCIs. KKYS Modular add-on key or integrated circuit that installs onto the K4RCU3 to add the auto attendant feature to the DK40. KSTU2 The optional PCB provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the base unit. The KSTU2 supports the two-wire devices such as standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. The KSTU2 can also support an alternate Background Music (BGM) source on circuit four. LATA Local Access and Transport Area. LCD Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that displays calling information. LCR Least Cost Routing. LDI Long Distance Information. LED Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards (PCBs), digital telephones, and electronic telephones. LSI Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design. MDF Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet. MDFB Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option. MOH Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold on CO lines or the intercom. NDTU Toshiba 30-foot cable that connects the RDTU to the KSU. NT-1 Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified (Canada). Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary K4RCU, K5RCU GL-5 Glossary OCA ~ PEPU Term Definition OCA Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA. OPS Off-premises Station. PBTC A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect customer-supplied batteries to a cabinet power supply in a one- or two-cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the entire system. PBX Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch, usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO). PCB Printed Circuit Board. PCM Pulse Code Modulation—A widely-used form of digital telephone switching. PCOU CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RCOU) that provides the system with four loop start CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. PDIU-DI2 Integrated Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone base so that the telephone can be used for the transmission and reception of data between a terminal/personal computer connected to the telephone and devices connected to other PDIU-DIs or to modems, printers, and computers which are in turn connected to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing of voice calls without a modem; and, access to outside dial-up data services and/or bulletin boards via modem pooling. Note GL-6 Replaced by RPCI-DI. PDIU-DS Stand-alone Data Interface Unit—Used for modem pooling, printer sharing, and accessing host/mainframe computer. PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight digital telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can support data interface units (stand-alone and integrated), a digital DSS console (DDSS), RPCI, ADM, and a digital door phone/lock control unit (DDCB). [PDN] Primary Directory Number. PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic telephones, a Background Music source, a door phone/lock control unit (HDCB), an electronic DSS console (HDSS), and amplifiers for two CO-line conference calls. The PEKU is also used with older Strata systems. PEMU E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of REMU) that provides the system with support for four E & M Type I tie lines. The PEMU is also used with older Strata systems. PEPU External Page Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with external paging functions. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary PESU ~ QCDU2 Term Definition Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with a combination of two standard and four electronic telephone circuits. The standard telephone circuits can support standard telephones and optional hardware peripherals, such as voice mail devices and fax machines. Except for the electronic DSS console, the PESU electronic telephone circuits can support the same stations and peripherals that the PEKU does. The PESU is also used with older Strata systems. [PhDN] Phantom Directory Number. PIOU Option Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades. PIOUS The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one external paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four. PORT A term used to identify a station circuit or CO line circuit location. PBTC1A-3M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies (102 cabinet installations). PPTC A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: an SMDR device, ASCII maintenance terminal, or remote maintenance external modem. PPTC A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: the modular SMDR, SMDI, MIS for ACD, Open Architecture (OA), maintenance ports of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS to the DB-9 (PPTC-9) connector of a call accounting machine, DK Admin, DK Backup personal computer (PC), SMIS personal computer or Open Architecture personal computer. PPTC-9 Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports, while PPTC connects directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25, not a PC COM port male DB25. PPTC-25F Used to connect a Call Center Viewer PC or SMIS PC to the RS-232 Strata DK424 MIS port on the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU. PRI Primary Rate Interface. PSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background Music source, fax machines, etc.). The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for 190V peak-to-peak or 130V peak-to-peak. The PSTU2 is also used with older Strata systems. PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. QCDU2 CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides one CO line (loop start) circuit and two digital telephone circuits on each PCB. The QCDU2 interfaces with digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI, ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIU-DSs, but does not support a DDSS or DDCB console. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary PESU GL-7 Glossary QKYS ~ RCMS Term GL-8 Definition QKYS Auto Attendant Feature Key (DK14)—Provides built-in Auto Attendant software without Program 03 assignments and installs directly onto the QRCU3 PCB. QSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides two standard telephone circuits (ports) and interfaces with standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, separate BGM source connections, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. QRCU2 DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (DK14)—Provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones (required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s), and three circuits to detect busy tone (required for the ABR feature). RAM Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily revised in programming. RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit—Optional PCB that can support up to four attendant consoles and/or PC attendant consoles. RBDB Battery Distribution Box—Interface used to connect reserve power batteries to systems with three or more cabinets (also provides six RBTC1A-1.5M cables to connect RBDB to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies). RBSU ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two circuits, each of which provide two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control channel). Available for DK424 with Release 4.1. RBSS ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or station-side connections only. Available for DK424 with Release 4.1. RBTC1A-2M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution box (3 or more cabinet installations). RBUU ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two BRI “U” circuits. Each circuit provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control) channel. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2. RBUS ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or station-side connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS subassembly provides four BRI “U” circuits in one card slot. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2. RCMS Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Subassembly—Enables the DK424 (Release 4.0 and above) to connect to one or two CAMA trunks. Two RCMS PCBs enable connection to four CAMA trunks. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary RMCU ~ RGLU Term Definition Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Interface—Enables connection from the DK424 (Release 4.0 and above) to E911 locator services without third-party equipment. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports. RCCB Conduit Connection Box—Device required for floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the system. Cabling from the AC power source and from the reserve power battery source can only be installed by a licensed electrician. RCIU2/RCIS Four-circuit plug-in PCB/four-circuit piggy-back PCB, each of which receives and decodes FSK Caller ID (CLID or CND) information from the Central Office ground or loops Caller ID lines. Each RCIU/RCIS circuit works in conjunction with a DK424 RGLU/RCOU/RCOS line PCB circuit. RCOS Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly—Optional subassembly that attaches to the RCOU PCB to provide four additional CO analog line circuits to the PCB. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. RCOU CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with four loop start CO lines. An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for four more loop start analog CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/ RCIS circuits. RCTU Common Control Unit—The system’s controller PCB that contains the system's main microprocessor and microprocessor bus, ROM, RAM, time switch logic, busy tone detectors, system tones and MOH/BGM Interface. RCTUs include: RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F. Each RCTU supports different station and line capacities. The RCTU PCBs also provide interface for the optional RRCS PCB and RKYS key. RDDU Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides four analog Direct Inward Dialing line circuits. Supports ANI and DNIS. RDSU Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides two standard telephone and four digital telephone circuits in its basic configuration. An RSTS can be attached to the RDSU for two additional standard telephone circuits. RDTU T1/DS-1 Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides up to 24-digital channels that can individually be assigned for loop start CO line, ground start CO line, E & M tie line, or DID line operation. Supports ANI and DNIS. REMU E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with support for four E & M Type I or Type II, Immediate or Wink Start tie lines. Supports ANI and DNIS. RFIF Floor Mount Installation Kit—Kit that is used to floor mount systems. RGLU Analog Ground/Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit—Provides four CO line circuits that can be individually configured for loop start or ground start CO line operation. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary RMCU GL-9 Glossary RKYS ~ RSIS Term GL-10 Definition RKYS Feature Key Upgrade—Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. There are four versions of the RKYS: the RKYS1, the RKYS2, the RKYS3 and the RKYS4, each of which provides a distinct set of features. RMDS Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RSIU Optional Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer. RPCI-DI Computer Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal telephone base and provides all the functions of PDIU-D12. In addition, it can be switched to a second mode automatically and used with a Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) software application. RPTU ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Unit—Provides 1 data (control) channel and 23 bearer channels.All B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, tie, etc., service operation. Supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and RCTUE3/F4. ROM Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software engineers. RPSB (1 and 2) Power Strip—Interface between cabinet power supplies and the commercial AC power source. The RPSB provides outlets for three power supplies. One RSPS is required for systems with three or four cabinets, two or three RSPSs for five- or sixcabinet systems. RPSU280 Cabinet Power Supply—Furnishes power to all of the stations and peripherals connected to the cabinet PCBs. Each Base and optional expansion cabinet has a separate power supply. RRCS Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver—An optional upgrade to the system common control unit (RCTU) that provides Dual-tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) receivers for system Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO lines, E&M tie lines, DID, DNIS and ANI lines, Auto attendant announcement devices, remote change of call forward-external destination, DNIS external call routing, and stations and other peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits. The RRCS comes in three models: the RRCS-4 (provides four DTMF receivers), the RRCS-8 (eight DTMF receivers), and the RRCS-12 (12 DTMF receivers). RSIS Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—A subassembly installed on the RSIU optional interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer, external maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary RSIU ~ T1/DS-1 Term Definition Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides interface to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local or remote DK Admin/DK Backup Personal computer, built-in (RMDS) or external system maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. By itself, the RSIU PCB provides one interface port. With up to three RSIU/RMDS subassemblies, it can provide up to four interface ports. RSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight-standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background music source, fax machines, etc.). The RSTU has a built-in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator. The RSTU also has connectors for the R48S, which extends station loop length and is described in this section. RSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB functionally identical to the RSTU. RSTU2 also contains a 90-volt DC message waiting/generator/switching circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps. RWBF1 Wall bracket Fixture—Bracket that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. RFMF Floor Mount Fixture—Fixture that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. R48S Optional 48V Power Supply—Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU or RDSU to extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. [SDN] Secondary Directory Number. SF Super Frame. SLT Single-line Telephone. SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface: RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration. SMIS Software MIS for ACD. SSTU Factory-installed sub-unit board that is “piggy-backed” onto the PSTU or PSTU2. S/T Interface Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are RJ-45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network U-type BRI lines to S/T type interfaces. TAPI Telephone Application Programming Interface. TA Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ-11 voice ports and RS232C or V.35 or V.449 data interfaces. T1/DS-1 See RDTU. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Glossary RSIU GL-11 Glossary TCIU1 ~ WSIU Term GL-12 Definition TCIU1 Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK424. TCIU2 Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK40. TCOU Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Board— An optional PCB providing four loop start CO line circuits in the Strata DK40. TDDU Four-Circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit— An optional PCB providing four DID line circuits in the Strata DK40. TE Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes, computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type intefaces. TSPI Telephony Service Provider Interface. TSIU RS-232 Ports—An optional PCB that provides up to two RS-232 interface ports (modular jacks) enabling the DK40 to connect to various hardware devices. TTY Flexible RS-232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS (ACD). U Interface A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ-11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line. universal slot Slots in a telephone KSU/cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs. WSIU Serial Interface Board (DK14)—Provides two serial ports for either a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem, or Caller ID interface. Strata DK I&M 5/99 Index A ABR receiver, 2-2 ACD installation guidelines, 11-4 Strata DK built-in auto attendant, 11-6 to voice mail or auto attendant, 11-6 ADM, 2-3 installation (DKT2000), 9-16 limits, 3-39 amplified talk path, 10-33 amplifier requirements, 10-33 attendant console, 9-47 interface unit, 7-22 attendant position options, 4-16 auto attendant, 2-2, 10-76 built-in ACD, 11-6 ACD applications (DK424), 10-81 block diagram, 10-82 DK14, 1-18 installation, 10-80 overview, 10-77 programming, 10-78 DK424 feature key, 4-15 auto dial (PC ) voice call, 10-73 auto disconnect digital announcer, 10-82 auto preference, 9-25 automated attendant (see auto attendant) B Strata DK I&M 5/99 C cabling DDCB/HDCB/MDFB, 9-22 call center viewer (CCV), 11-14 configuration, 11-16 software installation, 11-16 Y connector (CCVY), 11-16 call monitoring, 14-13 caller ID, 3-28 interface, 2-2, 7-23 Index background music (see BGM), 7-14 base cabinet, 4-2 base cabinet installation, 5-7 base KSU (see key service unit) base KSU PCB K4RCU3, 3-23 KSTU2, 3-25 TCIU2, 3-28 TCO, 3-30 TDDU, 3-33 TSIU, 3-36 basic rate interface (see BRI, see also ISDN) battery DK14 reserve power battery/charger (HPFB), 1-7 removing and charging, 9-27 battery backup DK40i interface, 2-2 beep strap, 9-14, 9-19 BGM, 2-2, 7-14, 10-3 alternate source installation, 10-9 external installation, 10-10 options, 10-3, 10-6 single page zone, 10-26 to connect source, 10-9 BRI, 3-38 BRI circuit jack (TE or NT mode), 14-26 BRI wire type recommendations, 14-27 built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, built-in) busy override, 9-15 IN-1 Index D~D CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/RCMS), 7-56 camp-on ring tone, 9-15 carbon headset/handset strap, 9-14 CCVY, 11-16 CO line, 2-1 digital interface unit, 7-4 CO line digital telephone interface unit, 1-13 common DIU connections, 10-48 compatibility DK8/DK14, 1-21 conference two-CO line, 10-32 connecting to network side (TE-mode), 14-29 connecting to station devices (NT-mode), 14-30 cordless telephone, 9-25 connect to base unit, 9-26 cord connection, 9-26 handset battery pack, 9-27 installation, 9-25 cross connect record RCOU/RCOS, RGLU, RDDU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU, 8-24 station PDKU, 8-6 PEKU, 8-15 PESU, 8-16 RDSU, 8-8 RSTU2/PSTU, 8-20 CTI, 13-6 D DADM, 9-29 data broadcast unit, 11-18 data communication installation tests external PC to internal PC, 10-71 internal PC to external PC, 10-69 PC to PC, 10-67 PC to printer, 10-68 PDIU-DI, 10-66 PDIU-DS, 10-66 RPCI, 10-66 DDCB, 2-2-2-3 DDCB/HDCB, 7-9, 9-22 assignments guide, 10-14 cabling, 9-22 programming, 9-24 wall mounting, 9-23 IN-2 DDSS, 2-2-2-3 limits, 3-39 DID line circuit, 2-2 digital add-on module (see DADM) digital announcer auto disconnect, 10-82 digital telephone 1000-series, 9-9 circuits, 2-2 connecting to system, 9-4 limits, 3-39 upgrade, 9-7 beep strap, 9-14 busy override/camp-on ring tone over handset/headset, 9-15 carbon headset/handset strap, 9-14 external power strap, 9-15 loud ringing bell/headset, 9-12 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment, 9-14 simultaneous voice/data, 9-7 TAPI, 9-7 telephone speaker off-hook call announce, 9-10 digital telephone interface unit, 3-38, 7-6 digital/standard telephone interface unit, 3-38, 7-36 DIP switch options, 10-59 direct inward dialing line interface unit, 7-33 direct station selection (see DSS) DISA, 10-37 distributed hunt, 7-33 DIU, 10-47 common connections, 10-48 limits, 3-39 DK alarm sensor, 10-75 DK14 PCBs compatible with DK8, 1-21 QCDU2, 1-13 QRCU3, 1-17 QSTU2A, 1-15 WSIU, 1-19 reserve power battery, 1-7 secondary protection, 1-22 wiring station (QCDU2 and QSTU2), 1-23 to caller ID interface (WSIU), 1-25 to CO lines (KSU and QCDU), 1-24 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Index E~E Strata DK I&M 5/99 DSS console configuration, 9-20 system connection, 9-20 DTMF ABR receiver, 2-2 receiver/ABR tone detector unit DK40i, 3-23 tones, 2-2 DVSU, 9-10 installation, 9-10 E E&M tie line unit, 3-38, 7-33 E911, 10-86 programming considerations, 10-86 see RCMS system installation, 10-86 E911 CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/ RCMS), 7-56 EIA interface leads (signals), 10-50 electronic telephone connecting to system, 9-5 interface unit, 3-38, 7-8 upgrade, 9-16 beep strap, 9-19 carbon headset/handset strap, 9-19 handset receiver volume-up strap, 9-19 loud ringing bell/headset, 9-17 microphone/speaker threshold, 9-19 off-hook call announce, 9-16 EMC ferrite core requirement, 14-29 enhanced 911 service (see E911) EOCU, 7-13 illustration, 7-8 expansion cabinet installation, 5-7 expansion cabinets, 4-2, 5-21 expansion key service unit connections, 3-15-3-16 mounting, 3-15-3-16 expansion KSU components (DK40i), 2-3 external page, 10-10 installation, 10-26 with BGM, 10-26 interface unit, 7-11 external speaker unit (see HESB) Index DK40i capacities line and universal PCB slots, 2-6 station and peripherals, 2-7 system features, 2-6 interface PCB options, 2-5 PCBs (see Universal PCBs) installation in KSU, 3-21 KSTU2, 3-25 PCOU, 3-30 RCIU2 installation, 7-23 TCIU2, 3-28 TDDU, 3-33 TSIU, 3-36 secondary protector diagram, 3-40 system configuration, 2-1 telephone circuits, 2-9 DK40i PCB RCIU1/RCIU2 installation, 7-25 DK40i/DK424 PCB RCOU/RCOS, 7-28 DK424 base cabinet, 4-2 DK280 compatibility, 4-3 hardware, 4-18 interface PCB options, 4-15 network requirements, 5-6 PCBs PCOU2, 7-32 DK424 PCB RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS installation, 7-23 RCOS, 7-28 RDSU, 7-36 DK424 PCBs (see Universal PCBs) DKT2000 ADM installation, 9-16 DKT2010 strap/connector locations, 9-11 door lock control, 10-10 DDCB/HDCB, 10-14 relay options, 10-10 door phone (see MDFB), 9-22 door phone/lock control unit (see DDCB/HDCB) DPFT installation, 10-2 DSS and MDFB, 4-17 IN-3 Index F~H F fault finding, 12-1 fault isolation, 12-3 fault isolation flowcharts, 12-10 catastrophic faults, 12-11 CO line dial tone faults, 12-13 DSS console faults, 12-14 fault classification, 12-10 remote maintenance faults, 12-17 station dial tone faults, 12-12 voice mail auto attendant faults, 12-15 fax machine, 2-2 four-circuit DID line digital telephone interface unit, 3-33 loop start CO line board, 3-30 loop start CO line interface unit, 7-28 RCOU/RCOS, 7-28 standard telephone interface unit, 3-25 G grounding terminal screws, 14-27 H HDCB, 7-14 installation, 10-15 HDSS console, 7-8 connections, 9-21 headset upgrade, 9-12 HESB amplified speaker installation, 10-22 installation test, 10-23 external speaker unit, 10-19 loud ringing bell, 10-19 installation for DKT, 10-19 installation for EKT, 10-21 test, 10-21 talkback amplified speaker, 10-23 installation, 10-24 wall mounting, 10-26 HHEU, 9-12, 9-17 installation, 9-12, 9-18 HMIS billing statements customized, 15-60 default, 15-58 standard, 15-56 check SMDR settings, 15-25 IN-4 check TTY settings, 15-26 create employee database, 15-20 hardware activation keys, 15-9 connectors, 15-5 line driver, 15-5 network hub, 15-8 PPTC connectors, 15-5 PPTC pinout diagram, 15-6 PPTC-25F, 15-4 twisted-pair connections, 15-5 initialize deposit link file, 15-19 messages link file, 15-19 reservation index, 15-20 services link file, 15-19 modify reservation block index, 15-54 packing list, 15-4 pcANYWHERE, 15-4 programming Strata DK, 15-27 LCR programs, 15-28 screens autogen setup, 15-43 communications display, 15-22 company, 15-20 comunication settings and emulation, 15-24 employee code, 15-20 invoice statement format, 15-20 master room setup, 15-45 settings, 15-50 telmon, 15-21 set up databases, 15-16 set up PC, 15-4 multiple terminals (workstations), 15-8 server - 50 ft away, 15-7 single front desk terminal, 15-7 setup menu, 15-16 software installation, 15-63 Strata DK system requirements, 15-3 troubleshooting check communications with Strata DK, 15-74 check trunk utilization, 15-68 perform manual tests/remote maintenance, 15-71 verify communication port settings, 15-10 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Index I~K interface unit, 14-18 LED indications, 14-23 LEDs and connectors, 14-26 monitor jack, 14-26 option switches, jumpers, and connectors, 14-22 overview, 14-18 passive bus configurations, 14-32 premise wiring guidelines, 14-27 PS-1 backup power option, 14-20 RBUU installation, 14-36 RBUU/RBUS interface unit, 14-36 LED indications, 14-38 location of LEDs and connectors, 14- verify data communication between server COM ports/Strata TTY/SMDR ports, 15-66 verify modem settings, 15-66 verify pcANYWHERE modem settings, 15-13 HVSI, 9-16 installation, 9-17 HVSU, 9-16 installation, 9-16 I Strata DK I&M 5/99 38 REBS PCB installation, 14-22 DK424 reference model, 14-2 modular jack pin configurations, 14-26 performance monitoring, 14-16 PRI RPTU overview, 14-3 testing and troubleshooting, 14-10 R40S PCB installation, 14-22 RBSU/RBSS, 14-29-14-30 RBSU/RBSS premise wiring guidelines, 14- 27 RPTU testing and troubleshooting, 14-10 SMDR output, 10-36 timing and synchronization, 14-11, 14-13 K K4RCU, 3-21 K4RCU3, 2-2, 3-23 DK40i DTMF receiver/ABR tone detector unit, 3-23 K4RCU3 and K5RCU configuration, 3-23 illustration, 3-24 programming, 3-23 K5RCU, 3-21 KCDU, 2-3, 7-4 configuration, 7-4 installation, 7-4 programming, 7-4 Index IMDU, 7-17 Insight DK (DK424only), 11-14 installation, 9-25 ADM, 9-16 alternate BGM source, 10-9 built-in auto attendant, 10-80 DADM, 9-29 DK alarm sensor, 10-75 door phone, 9-22 DPFT, 10-2 E911, 10-86 external BGM, 10-10 external page, 10-26 HDCB, 10-15 MOH, 10-4 MOH/BGM as BGM, 10-9 multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU, 10-84 PDIU-DI2, 9-8 PDIU-DS to modem, 10-63 PDIU-DS to printer, 10-62 peripherals, 10-1 RPCI-DI, 9-8 SMDR printer/call accounting device, 10-39 voice mail, 10-46 interface leads EIA, 10-50 ISDN basic rate interface unit (RBSU), 3-38 subassembly (RSSS), 3-38 BRI RBSS PCB installation, 14-22 RBSU/RBSS cabinet installation, 14-23 call monitor, 14-34 capacity and cabinet slot information, 14-19 installation, 14-21 IN-5 Index L~P key service unit base to expansion unit connection , 3-14 DK14, 1-2, 1-5 components, 1-12 DK40i, 2-1 components, 2-2 connectors, 3-13 cords, 3-13 KKYS, 2-2, 3-21 KSTU2, 2-2, 3-21, 3-25 configuration, 3-25 wiring, 3-25 L lines CO, 2-3 station, 2-3 lock control unit, 9-22 loop limits, 3-39 loop start line limits, 3-39 loop/ground start CO line interface unit, 3-38 loop-back testing, 14-10 loud ringing bell upgrade, 9-12 headset upgrade, 9-17 M MDFB, 9-22 cabling, 9-22 volume control, 9-23 wall mounting, 9-23 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment, 9-14 threshold, 9-19 modem setup recommendations, 10-65 MOH, 2-2, 10-3 installation, 10-4 options, 10-3 relay control, 10-18 MOH/BGM installation, 10-9 motherboard DK14, 1-12 DK40i, 3-21 multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU installation, 10-84 music-on-hold (see MOH) IN-6 N network requirements DK424, 5-6 night ringing selected page zones, 10-32 non-built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, non-built in) O off-hook call announce unit (EOCU), 7-8 upgrade, 9-16 option interface unit, 3-38, 7-17 P P90 ring generator switch, 7-14 page single zone with BGM, 10-26 PC attendant console, 9-31 wiring, 8-17 PC auto dial voice call, 10-73 PC interface unit, 3-38 PC/data communications interface unit (see DIU), 10-47 PCB circuits, interface options and connectors, 4-12 PCOU, 2-4 controls, indicators, connectors, 7-32 PCOU2, 7-32 controls, indicators, connectors, 7-32 illustration, 7-32 installation(see RCOU installation) PDIU-DI, 9-7 data communication installation tests, 10-66 PDIU-DI2, 9-7 installation, 9-8 PDIU-DS, 2-2-2-3 assembly, 10-65 data communication installation tests, 10-66 disassembly, 10-65 installation to modem, 10-63 to printer, 10-62 PDKU1/PDKU2, 7-6 PDKU2, 2-3, 3-38, 7-6 hardware options, 7-6 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Index Q~R Strata DK I&M 5/99 PSTU2, 2-4 hardware option, 7-54 illustration, 7-54 installation, 7-54, 7-56 Q QCDU2 configuration, 1-13 illustration, 1-13 installation, 1-13 programming, 1-14 wiring, 1-24 QCDU2 and QSTU2 wiring, 1-23 QKYS1 built-in auto attendant key, 1-18 QRCU3 configuration, 1-17 DTMF receiver/ABR tone detector unit, 1-17 illustration, 1-17 installation, 1-17 programming, 1-17 QSTU2 configuration, 1-15 installation, 1-15 programming, 1-16 wiring, 1-16 QSTU2/QSTS2 illustration, 1-15 R R40S, 14-22 R48S, 2-4 illustration, 7-53 RATU, 7-22 controls, indicators, and connectors, 7-22 illustration, 7-22 installation, 7-22 RBSS, 14-22 RBSU overview, 14-18 RBSU, 4-12 RBSU/RBSS, 14-18, 14-23, 14-26 RBUU, 14-36 installation, 14-36 RBUU, 4-12 RCIS, 7-23 programming, 7-24 Index illustration, 7-7 programming, 7-6 PEKU, 2-3, 3-38, 7-8 controls, indicators, connectors, 7-10 hardware options, 7-8 illustration, 7-10 installation, 7-9 programming, 7-9 PEMU (see REMU) PEPU, 7-11 installation procedure, 7-11 programming, 7-11 peripherals, 2-1 installation, 10-1 PESU, 2-3, 3-38, 7-13 controls, indicators, and connectors, 7-15 illustration, 7-16 installation, 7-14 programming, 7-15 PIOU, 2-4-2-5 controls, indicators, connectors, 7-20 PIOU/PIOUS, 3-38, 7-17 hardware options remote maintenance modem unit (IMDU), 7-17 installation, 7-18 programming, 7-18 PIOUS, 2-4-2-5 controls, indicators, connectors, 7-21 power failure DK40i transfer interface, 2-2 options, 3-17, 10-1 power failure terminal screws, 14-27 power supply DK14 PCB considerations, 1-10 removal, 1-8 replacement, 1-9 DK40i removal, 3-19 replacement, 3-20 wiring, 3-17 program checklist voice mail, 10-45 programming considerations E911, 10-86 Stratagy, 10-43 voice mail, 10-44 VP, 10-43 IN-7 Index S~S RCIU1, 7-23 programming, 7-24 RCIU1/RCIU2, 7-23 RCIU2, 2-4, 7-23 programming, 7-24 RCMS installation, 7-56 RCOS controls, indicators, connectors, 7-31 installation, 7-28 RCOU, 2-4, 3-38 illustration, 7-30 installation, 7-29 programming, 7-29 RCOU/RCOS, 7-28 RCTU common control unit programming, 5-51 RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3, 5-46 RDDU, 2-4, 7-33 DID line unit, 3-38 illustration, 7-35 installation, 7-33 programming, 7-34 RDSU, 2-4, 3-38, 7-36 hardware options, 7-36 illustration, 7-38 installation, 7-37 programming, 7-37 R48S ring generator, 7-36 RDTU, 6-1-6-2, 7-38 controls, indicators, and connectors, 6-9 programming, 6-3 RDTU2, 4-12 REBS, 14-22 relay control options, 10-10 REMU, 2-4, 3-38 connectors, controls, indicators, 7-41-7-42 illustration, 7-41 installation procedures, 7-39 programming, 7-40 reserve power DK40i, 3-17 installation DK40i, 3-18 RGLU2, 2-4, 3-38, 7-43 connectors, controls, indicators, 7-44 illustration, 7-44 IN-8 installation procedures, 7-43 ring generator, 7-36 RJ-45 pins in the 8-pin modular jack, 14-26 RMCU illustration, 7-58 installation, 7-58 RMCU, 4-12 RMCU/RCMS, 7-56 programming, 8-27 RMDS, 7-45 RPCI-DI, 2-3, 9-7 data communication installation tests, 10-66 dual mode, 10-48 installation, 9-8 RPTU installation, 14-5 interface unit, 14-3 RPTU2, 4-12 RS-232/modem interface unit, 7-45 RSIS, 7-45 RSIU, 7-45 RSSU, 2-4-2-5, 3-38 RSTS, 2-4, 7-37 illustration, 7-38 RSTU2, 2-4, 3-38, 7-53 illustration, 7-55 installation, 7-54, 7-56 RWIU, 4-14 S serial interface board DK14, 1-19 DK40i, 3-36 simultaneous voice/data upgrade, 9-7 SMDI, 2-2 SMDR, 2-2 direct inward system access CO lines (see DISA), 10-37 printer/call accounting device installation, 10-39 options, 10-35 printout example, 10-37 DISA internal station call, 10-37 DISA outgoing CO line call, 10-37 ring, no answer DISA call, 10-37 programming considerations, 10-39 speakerphone, 9-14, 9-19 Strata DK I&M 5/99 Index T~T standard telephone connecting to system, 9-5 interface unit, 2-2, 3-38, 7-53 standard telephone interface unit DK14, 1-15 standard/electronic telephone interface unit, 3-38, 7-13 Strata DK I&M 5/99 T T1 interface unit, 6-2, 7-38 T1/DS-1 interfacing, 6-1 talk path (amplified), 10-33 talkback amplified speaker (see HESB) TAPI (see Telephony Application Programming Interface) TAPI upgrade, 9-7 TBSU, 3-27 TCIU2, 2-2, 3-21, 3-28 installation, 3-28 programming, 3-28 TCOU, 2-2, 3-21, 3-43 hardware options, 3-30 installation, 3-30 programming, 3-31 removal, 3-30 Index station and CO lines, 2-3 station apparatus, 9-1 telephones, 9-1 station lines, 2-1 station message detail recording (see SMDR) strap beep, 9-14, 9-19 carbon headset/handset, 9-14, 9-19 external power, 9-15 handset receiver volume-up, 9-19 Strata AirLink ALM removal, 16-33 analog system line circuits, 16-91 base station cabling distances, 16-33 base station power supply, 16-40 BSIA pinouts, 16-32 charging batteries, 16-62 digital interface unit (RWIU/WWIS), 16-50 erlang, 16-7 handset IDs, 16-48 installation activate external critical alarm, 16-16 check your equipment list, 16-9 stand-alone base station test stand, 16-10 unpack the shipment, 16-8 interface unit, 4-14 PC port configuration, 16-21 pre-installation, 16-2 primary protectors, 16-91 ring back tones generator, 16-57 RWIU/WWIS interface unit backplane connector, 16-54 protectors, 16-56 serial line connector, 16-57 signal fading, 16-4 software architecture, 16-57 Strata AirLink Manager adding base stations, 16-34, 16-59 changing the configuration, 16-32, 16-59 installation, 16-19 system configuration examples, 16-5 password, 16-50 system line circuit requirements, 16-91 system power, polarity, continuity, 16-64 troubleshooting activation code, 16-65 base station, 16-66, 16-77 base station power on/reset, 16-65 communications, 16-64 component problems, 16-65 DC resistance, 16-64 defective base station, 16-67 handset, 16-67, 16-72 handset password, 16-69 noisy circuits, 16-64 RF link termination, 16-64 system, 16-72, 16-74 reset, 16-65 underwriters laboratory (UL), 16-91 UTAM activation of codes, 16-89 frequency coordination service request, 16-90 Strata AirLink Manager system, 16-77 Stratagy, 10-42 programming considerations, 10-43 StrataLink, 13-6 StrataLink and TAPI for Windows 95, 13-2 IN-9 Index U~W replacement, 3-30 TDDU, 2-2, 3-21, 3-33, 3-43 programming, 3-33 telephone (see station apparatus) battery backup, 3-39 installation, 9-3 wall mounting, 9-5 telephony application programming interface (TAPI), 13-1 telephony service provider interface (TSPI), 13-1 TPSU16, 3-19 TSIU, 2-2, 3-21, 3-36 illustration, 3-37 installation, 3-36 programming, 3-36 TSPI (see telephony service provider interface) two-CO line external amplified conference, 10-32 U universal slot PCB KCDU, 7-4 PDKU2, 7-6 PEKU, 7-8 PEPU, 7-11 PESU, 7-13 PIOU/PIOUS, 7-17 RATU, 7-22 RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS, 7-23 RCOU/RCOS, 7-28 RDDU, 7-33 REMU, 7-39 RGLU, 7-43 RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, 7-45 V voice mail options, 10-42 program checklist, 10-45 programming considerations (general), 10-44 system installation, 10-46 voice messaging customer-supplied, 10-44 Stratagy, 10-42 VP, 10-42 programming considerations, 10-43 IN-10 W wall boards, 11-24 Windows, 9-31 wiring diagram 2-wire tie line PEMU, 8-31 4-wire tie line PEMU, 8-32 CO line to MDF PCOU, 8-23 RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS, 8-28 RCOU/RCOS, 8-26 RDDU, 8-29 REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II, 8-30 RGLU2 or PCOU, 8-25 CO/tie line, 8-23 DK40i CO lines, 3-43 DK40i KSU amphenol station/relay, 3-41 DK40i secondary protector, 3-40 external power to DKT, 8-5 MDF, 3-41 PDKU DDCB/door phone/lock, 8-3 DKT/DDSS, 8-2 PIOU or PEPU peripherals, 8-33 PIOUS page/relay/alarm connection, 8-35 station to MDF RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS, 8-3 PEKU amplified two-CO line conference, 8-13 background music, 8-12 EKT/HDSS console, 8-10 PESU, 8-15 RDSU, 8-7 RSTU/PSTU/RSTU2 standard telephone/voice mail/ DPFT, 8-19 Worksheets DK40i, 2-11 DK424, 4-19 WSIU, 1-19 illustration, 1-20 installation, 1-20 programming, 1-20 wiring, 1-25 Strata DK I&M 5/99
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 766 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Creation Date : 1999:05:20 09:45:20Z Producer : Acrobat Distiller 3.01 for Windows Author : EZ Manuals Mod Date : 2002:01:02 19:03:08-06:00 Create Date : 1999:05:20 09:45:20Z Modify Date : 2002:01:02 19:03:08-06:00 Metadata Date : 2002:01:02 19:03:08-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals Title : Installation and Maintenance Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools